Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D10-072 - TOYS R US / BABIES R US - TENANT IMPROVEMENT
TOYS R US / BABIES R US 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE 300 D10-072 City a7Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No.: 2623049067 Address: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Suite No: Permit Number: D 10 -072 Issue Date: 05/20/2010 Permit Expires On: 11/16/2010 Tenant: Name: TOYS R US / BABIES R US Address: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE 300 , TUKWILA WA Owner: Name: CLPF- TUKWILA LP Address: C/O JSH PROPERTIES INC , 10655 NE 4TH ST #300 98004 Phone: Contact Person: Name: RYAN NOAKES - PAEP ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING Address: 1811 4 MILE ROAD NE , GRAND RAPIDS MI 49525 Phone: 616- 447 -3437 Contractor: Name: ENGINEERED STRUCTURES INC Address: 12400 W OVERLAND RD , BOISE ID 83709 Phone: 208 - 362 -3040 Contractor License No: ENGINSI152K2 Expiration Date: 05/20/2010 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: RENOVATION OF EXISTING (FORMER) LINENS & THINGS AND K & G FASHION SUPERSTORE, INCLUDING FRONT ELEVATION MODIFICATIONS AND INTERIOR (NEW TOILET ROOMS, OFFICES, BREAK/TRAINING ROOM, SALES FIXTURES, FINISHES, ETC.) Value of Construction: 2,000,000.00 Fees Collected: $21,077.14 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2006 Type of Construction: II -B Occupancy per IBC: 0019 * *continued on next page ** doc: IBC -7/07 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Inspection Request Line: 206 - 431 -2451 Web site: http. //www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: D10-072 05/20/2010 11/16/2010 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Flood Control Zone: Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y. Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: Permit Center Authorized Signature: Private: Profit: N Private: N Lwaru_ Public: Non - Profit: N Public: Date: '"� U I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the perfArmance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit. Signature: Print Name: C H GU C) t Date: v — C' I O This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. doc: IBC -7/07 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: hup://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Parcel No.: 2623049067 Address: Suite No: Tenant: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW TOYS R US / BABIES R US PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: Status: Applied Date: Issue Date: D10 -072 ISSUED 03/11/2010 05/20/2010 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be required. 6: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 7: Installation of high- strength bolts shall be periodically inspected in accordance with AISC specifications. 8: The special inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete. 9: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 10: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 11: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 12: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. 13: Insulating materials, where exposed as installed in buildings of any type of construction, shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke development index of not more than 450. Where facings are installed in concealed spaces in buildings of Type III, IV, or V construction, the flame spread and smoke - developed limitations do not apply to facings, that are installed behind and in substantial contact with the unexposed surface of the ceiling, wall or floor finish. 14: Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation, compaction, and fill requirements shall conform strictly with the recommendations given in the soils report. Special inspection is required. 15: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: ht0://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 16: Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not greater than 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. 17: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 18: Special inspection for sprayed fire - resistant materials applied to structural elements and decks is required. Special inspections shall be based on the fire - resistance design as designated in the approved construction documents. 19: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 20: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 21: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 22: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 23: Ventilation is required for all new rooms and spaces of new or existing buildings and shall be in conformance with the International Building Code and the Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Code. 24: Water heaters shall be anchored or strapped to resist horizontal displacement due to earthquake motion. Strapping shall be at points within the upper one -third and lower one -third of the water heater's vertical dimension. A minimum distance of 4- inches shall be maintained above the controls with the strapping. 25: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila Permit Center. 26: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 27: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 28: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 29: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 30: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1) 31: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 32: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 33: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 34: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 35: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 36: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 37: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 38: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 39: The path of egress travel along a means of egress shall not be interrupted by any building element other than a means of egress component as specified in this chapter. Obstructions shall not be placed in the required width of a means of egress except projections permitted by this chapter. The required capacity of the means of egress system shall not be diminished along the path of egress travel (IFC 1003.6) 40: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 41: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 42: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 nun) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If art arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1) doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 43: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 44: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot - candle (11 lux) at the floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) The path of egress shall require emergency lighting until exit discharge is accomplished. 45: An approved automatic fire sprinkler extinguishing system is required for this project. (City Ordinance #2050) (Sprinkler densities to be appropriate for the commodities being stored.) 46: U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2050) 47: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual, or a licensed Fire Protection Engoneer (FPE), prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050) 48: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4) 49: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 50: Maintain a 4 foot clear space around the sprinkler riser(s) for emergency access. (NFPA 25) (City Ordinance #2050) 51: All valves controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and waterflow switches on all sprinkler systems shall be electrically supervised. (City Ordinance #2050) 52: All exterior components of sprinkler systems should be painted SAFETY RED. This includes: Post indicator valves (PIV), outside stem and yoke (OSY), wall indicator valves (WIV), and Fire Department connection (FDC). (City Ordinance #2050) 53: Maintain minimum 40 degrees F. temperature in all areas to prevent sprinkler pipe from breaking and causing unnecessary damage. (NFPA 13- 7.6.1.3.2, NFPA 25.5.2.5) 54: All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with permanently marked weather -proof metal or rigid plastic identification signs. The signs shall be secured with corrosion- resistant wire, chain or other approved means. (NFPA 13- 6.7.4.1, 6.7.4.2) 55: Calculated sprinkler systems shall be designed with a 10 PSI cushion for low reservoir allowed. (City Ordinance #2050) 56: All new underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested. Test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi for 2 hours. The amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints. Contact Dave Stuckle, Utilities Inspector, Public Works Department, at (206) 433 -0179 to make an appointment. (NFPA 13- 10.10.2.2.1, 10.10.2.2.2, 10.10.2.2.3, 10.10.2.2.4) 57: A supply of spare sprinklers (never fewer than 6) shall be maintained on the premises so that any sprinklers that have operated or been damaged in any way can be promptly replaced. These sprinklers shall correspond to the types and temperature ratings of the sprinklers in the property. The sprinklers shall be kept in a cabinet located where the temperature to which they are subjected will at no time exceed 100 degrees F. A special sprinkler wrench shall also be provided and kept in the cabinet to be used in the removal and installation of sprinklers. (NFPA 13- 6.2.9.1, 6.2.9.2, 6.2.9.3, 6.2.9.6) doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http. / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 58: Sprinklers subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with listed guards. (NFPA 13- 6.2.8) 59: The fire department connection (FDC) shall have a downward angle bend between 22.5 and 45 degrees, with a 5 -inch Storz fitting(s) and Knox FDC locking Storz cap. (NFPA 13- 6.8.3) (City Ordinance #2050) 60: When the sprinkler riser is located inside a room, the door to the room shall have a sign with one -inch letters which reads "Sprinkler Riser ". (NFPA 13) 61: Sprinkler coverage around unit heaters needs to comply with section 8.3.2.5 and figure 8.3.2.5 of NFPA 13 (2007 edition). 62: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2051. 63: An approved manual fire alarm system including audible /visual devices and manual pull stations is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of Americans With Disabilities' Act (I.B.C.), N.F.P.A. 72 and the City of Tukwila Ordinance #2051. 64: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and /or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 65: Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051) 66: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 67: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this project. 68: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #2051) 69: Remote alarm annunciation indication is required if the control panel is not visible from the main entrance. (City Ordinance #2051) 70: When the control panel is located inside a room, the door to the room shall have a sign with one -inch letters which reads "Fire Alarm" or "Fire Alarm Control ". (City Ordinance #2051) 71: Dedicated fire alarm system circuit breaker(s) shall be equipped with a mechanical lockout device. (NFPA 72 (4.4.1.4.2.1)) 72: Fire Department lock boxes shall be provided for access to all fire alarm panels and sprinkler risers. The appropriate key(s) for access shall be placed in the lockbox. Lockbox order forms must be obtained from the Tukwila Fire Department. The lockbox should be mounted so that it is readily visible and not over 60 inches high. (City Ordinance #2051) 73: The Tukwila Fire Department has changed keybox manufacturers, from Supra to Knox. Install a fire department Knox keybox. Contact the Tukwila Fire Prevention Office at 206 - 575 -4407 for ordering information. 74: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 75: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 76: In order to provide you with the fastest police and fire protection under emergency conditions, please post your suite, doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone : 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: hto://wwwci.tulcwila.wa.us room or apartment number in a conspicuous place near the main entry door. (IFC 505.1) 77: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) 78: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. 79: Arty overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 80: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. 81: ** *PLANNING DIVISION COMMENTS * ** 82: The service door to be added to the building facade at the north side of the Toys R Us /Babies R Us tenant space shall be painted to match the color of the corresponding wall in which it will be located; the exisitng "Light Taupe" color. * *continued on next page ** doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: htT,..//www.ci.tulcwila.wa.us I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work construction or the performance of work. Signature: Print Name: RA Y S C ,L/ 14 L`" Date: s'/2 0% 0 1 D ordinances governing or local laws regulating doc: Cond -10/06 D10 -072 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Building Permit No. 1)1() - V 72. chanical Perruit No. tdt 10 Plumbing/Gas Permit No. Public Works Project No. or ofce use only) Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** SITE LOCATION Site Address: 17501 Southcenter Parkway Tenant Name: Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us Property Owners Name: JSH Properties, Inc. - John Chelico Mailing Address: 2003 Western Ave, Suite 200 King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 47,30 Ll — L f,7 (0 7 Suite Number: 300 Floor: New Tenant: 0 Yes ❑..No Seattle WA 98121 City State Zip CONTACT PERSON - who do we contact when your perini eady to be issued Name: Ryan Noakes - PAEP Architecture Engineering, P.C. Mailing Address: 1811 4 Mile Road, NE E -Mail Address: noakesr @progressiveae.com Day Telephone: (616) 447 -3437 Grand Rapids MI 49525 City State Fax Number: (616) 361 -1493 Zip GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5)) Company Name: TBD Mailing Address: City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: State Zip ARCHITECT OF RECORD - All plans must be stamped by Architect of Record Company Name: PAEP Architecture Engineering, P.C. Mailing Address: 1811 4 Mile Road, NE Contact Person: Doug Wurl Grand Rapids MI 49525 E -Mail Address: wurld @progressiveae.com City State Day Telephone: (616) 447 -3439 Fax Number: (616) 361 -1493 Zip ENGINEER OF RECORD AU plans must be we stamped by Engineer of Record Company Name: Structural Associates, Inc. Mailing Address: 62 Commerce Avenue, SW, Suite 100 Contact Person: Dirk Buttke Grand Rapids MI 49503 E -Mail Address: dbuttke @gowithsai.com H:\Applications \Forms - Applications On Line\2009 Applications \1 -2009 - Permit Application.doe Revised: 1 -2009 bh City State Day Telephone: (616) 457 -8100 Fax Number: (616) 457 -8107 Zip Page 1 of 6 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 -431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 2,000,000 Existing Building Valuation: $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Renovation of existing (former) Linens & Things and K &G Fashion Superstore, including front elevation modifications and interior renovation (new toilet rooms, offices, break/training room, sales fixtures, finishes, etc.) Will there be new rack storage? ® Yes 0.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: 155 Compact: 131 Handicap: 6 Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes m No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: 0 Sprinklers m Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes m No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. 1- 1:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \1 -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh Page 2 of 6 Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of '` Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC 1st Floor 58,132 58,132 0 58,132 IIB Mercantile 2nd Floor 3'd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: 155 Compact: 131 Handicap: 6 Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes m No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: 0 Sprinklers m Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes m No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. 1- 1:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \1 -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh Page 2 of 6 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWN O TH ZED AGENT: Signature: Date: 03/09/2010 Print Name: Ryan T. Noakes Day Telephone: (616) 447 -3437 Mailing Address: 1811 4 Mile Road, NE Grand Rapids MI 49525 City State Zip Date Application Accepted: kl-t Date Application Expires: •, I Staff Initials: 1W1I/h -- H:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \1 -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh Page 6 of 6 Parcel No.: Address: Suite No: Applicant: eft City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site': http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 2623049067 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW TOYS R US / BABIES R US RECEIPT Permit Number: Status: Applied Date: Issue Date: D10-072 ISSUED 03/11/2010 05/20/2010 Receipt No.: R10 -02565 Initials: User ID: WER 1655 Payment Amount: Payment Date: Balance: $63.00 12/28/2010 09:04 AM $0.00 Payee: BERNARD MELICK TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Credit Crd VISA Authorization No. FINANCE ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description 63.00 Account Code Current Pmts PLAN CHECK - NONRES 000.345.830 Total: $63.00 63.00 City of Tukwila 6200 Southcenter Blvd, Tukwila, WA 1 Finance Department 1036201 -1 12/28/2010 BR1 T108 Tue Dec28,2010 09:09AM Tans #2 -2 2 $63.00 DCDGEN - DCD ermits Plus - General Fund ID: TOYS R US BABIES R US Secondary ID: BERNARD MELICK 1 ITEM(S): TOTAL: $63.00 Visa PAID $63.00 www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 206 - 433 -1835 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 12 -28 -2010 Parcel No.: Address: Suite No: Applicant: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: hto://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 2623049067 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW TOYS R US / BABIES R US RECEIPT Permit Number: Status: Applied Date: Issue Date: D10-072 ISSUED 03/11/2010 05/20/2010 Receipt No.: R10 -01701 Initials: User ID: Payee: WER 1655 Payment Amount: $378.00 Payment Date: 08/27/2010 01:13 PM Balance: $0.00 JAN PETERSON TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Credit Crd VISA Authorization No. 51722D ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description 378.00 Account Code Current Pmts BUILDING - NONRES 000.322.100 Total: $378.00 378.00 PAY MLNT �Fr.Fn►Fr doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 08 -27 -2010 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone : 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2623049067 Permit Number: D10-072 Address: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 03/11/2010 Applicant: TOYS R US / BABIES R US Issue Date: Receipt No.: R10 -00886 Initials: User ID: WER 1655 Payment Amount: $12,775.80 Payment Date: 05/20/2010 10:56 AM Balance: $0.00 Payee: ESI TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 212971 12,775.80 Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts BUILDING - NONRES 000.322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 640.237.114 12,771.30 4.50 Total: $12,775.80 PAYMENT ECF.IVED doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 05 -20 -2010 esk City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2623049067 Permit Number: D10-072 Address: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Status: PENDING Suite No: Applied Date: 03/11/2010 Applicant: TOYS R US / BABIES R US Issue Date: Receipt No.: R10 -00431 Initials: User ID: Payee: WER 1655 Payment Amount: $8,301.34 Payment Date: 03/11/2010 02:15 PM Balance: $12,775.80 PROGRESSIVE /AE TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 38391 8,301.34 Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts PLAN CHECK - NONRES 000.345.830 8,301.34 Total: $8,301.34 PAYMENT RF(FI\FED doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 03 -11 -2010 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit (4 PERMIT NO. NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Souithcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: n /��,�.�j, l t31i )t.-US Q$ JiE'_� Type of pectio FAA l' A A‘--1 Addrreeyss:l t Date Called: Sp cial Instructions: - Date Wanted:) t -7 i i a p.m. Requester: / / / t IC� t(..'i z J . a —( ,.i Phone No: proved per applicable codes. '2 (> ElCorrections required prior to approval. z. F COMMENTS: - f �J/ r - - 4 - ' A �. ' ( ( , ) ) r . - - )/' 1.7— GU / / / t IC� t(..'i z J . a —( ,.i Z-.4) ( ✓• .z) /1_, \ef ( c'4 - pA.,ft- L-t.) J 1 Inspec or: Date: Z.7 —1 ( REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 4- INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTIO NO. PERMIT NO. 0-4K- CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 ect: � cj;S ..8. + c_s Type of Inspection: n: p;,tJAA .8)ti : L4 .'nom Addrest: c �/� rI s j ie. L'.. 1 k Date Called: Special Instructions: ( / fff 04(4,5 2., q ~ � it 2.0 3.. Date Wanted: j — ' / a.m. Requester: Phone No: WO -- ?'4 - ---3'I 1 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: P477 n „ v 1 %' . Q n. 1 f rG : tAi.i b `�C...' ^AAA u.i L, I Li S P.E,,.i --r_"sp t- o A ► -L1 ct AftRr! ♦ ._ S- '! t- t, Yom" 4 „N `7 j f 6 7 1 1Rte r b )21. vilk e' A--g to CA 4T0r A0 e.S nS t LJ "c.-- "ct ek rJ:C., S- ,, ii,f , ‘1,f it. \ j J Inspect m Date F-7 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO, CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 le. (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 INSPECTION RECORD r Retain a copy with permit' 0 `Q ,07 Project: Typ f In; ction: Addres : p j '7 0 I $ A-r Date Called: � l Special Instructions: .7 "' �,.- fi. 11/1 Date Wanted: / f — % 0 Infr .m. Requester: Phone No 7,-0 - (0 c — 7 Co 3ci LJApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 4 -F- 7)) t 1 4 G 4 ei ,. Vie' - r vf.e4 t %j i° / ., e4- L`. i _.—k l �.J 1! 4 C L " / '." "�� /i,1 . if / / ^' /1 � l r ( , e-,- , . , ,.) A./. r,-.44,..p , F lQ ...1,,4 - yM /3:k.---e J ✓ if--, e r- .7) �Uf �tvr�,447 . .'.� e er~ ..) : LI,' f cAX ()l A- - � �`j 'FCC. r cr N & !T L'( a u 'T`I-'I_fes . AI f S J'14, (el IL ti. it( (t 1-1 t '61) 3 iv'ss& . tie S) t r A-6t S ,. Insp$ttor: Date: r}sREINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspectiorn,_fee must be Aid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ON —0372 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 1 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 P rojecct: 1 Uil L . . -Type LA rCc of Inspection: F te_ 4 . .'6 [ -�r ` � • Address: _ (} { f Date Call eC Special Instructions: ate Wanted: ,/ L� f a.m. Requester: `_ Phone No: % J�r proved per applicable codes. [J Corrections required prior to approval. Co COMMENTS: `_ % J�r �f Inspector C A Date: n REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTIsN NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. , , 'R Pcol?ct: v C 2.. J,Sg ! '7 . t P Type of Inspection: > ,J s,P , tom ( Address: _ , r ) 5 3 I Sc 1 f- L- Date ailed: Special Instructions: //! ate Wanted: - % c� a.m. G,►r►' Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: -.r, LA-- t *- P-71. "77 - •(..t2`. +`` �lfi' ,' R ... lams ■ _ , A ■ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: - k INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 3((0 -0r17 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: t I s .i Li C / a A-Pi : , Type of Inspection: i' vS _ cvc_s t : Ica 3 Address/ / 11 C1 S�_ p 4-Li � Date CaIIe :r Ge- �. t ^� � � � �'� Special Instru tions: 1 - Date Wanted: 8— ` a.m. E —f0 G Requester: Phone No: `2 , e --- KC/ 0 -7103 C. ElApproved per applicable codes. ections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /.0 i aTa /_J Ins ector: J 1 J f REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED., Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: I INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431-3670 _Project: „ e 1r. Type pf Inspectiop: Addreis: i / `7 50 ( SCpAI Date Called: Special Instructions: 1 , Date Wanted: ielV-;11: --- Requester: --.1) Ph7e o: EjApproved per applicable codes. EJCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: i' AP 1)--prh a 0 IC •-1---t) .-.-. o V e _r" e , "---' ( , AA '\ i --.1) , ' o" ,17,11)TA ( -, T- -e 0. Ins ector: Date: D $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE R63 RED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 jsaject: , Type of Inspecti g: ." Addr�r-s�s: 1 t S. 0 / . , C_ ),4rKwA" Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 0 a Requester: � Phone No: 1 EllApproved per applicable codes. ElCorrections required prior to approval. . 7 COMMENTS: t � ra 1 � Inspector: Date: $60.0O—RETNSPECTION FEE REQUIRED.IPrior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: INSPECTION Mt INSPECTION INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 12.4 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)431-3670 ..f_roject: , ( il/t (:- Type of In pecti • n , 0,-* Addr ss: i ri,"". 0 ,I S( OA./ /1(4,4/47 Date Called: - , A-, ' (- Special Instructions: ,'‘ W:j. ,.. Date Wanted: k•-5.. ' ' -( f 1 f a.m. . Requester: Phon No: OF k6,o 'I 3ci 0 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: f ' — , .t.'' ,-) (,- 1 ' 3 ,A 1 s I ). -•-• , X . . ..„ , r •-.; .. .1' • r r."--- '''''' ‘ r. InspectOr: Date: ( ri $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE RE&UIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Laififig-v$4~-loacit, - 1 INSPECTION RECORD I j �� Retain a copy with permit lo INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION k. 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 erect: S jL 73 /� �-i Type o .Inspection: Addre ._. t t � `SOt 3�. 3Afk ` Date Called: f - -� Special Instructions: - } Wanted:fr //R /G� am Requester: Phone No 2.6 — 5'6 o - `-7(c 3 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. 7 COMMENTS: 73 /� �-i L� .2r, r - -� • - } �7 - 4pd /n/e cam% E3 5 C� _ v -- i- lam=- specto Dates $ - 0.11 REINSPECTION E REQUIRED Prior to inspection, fee must be ai. -t 6300 Southcente Blvd., Suite 1 0. Call to schedule reinspection. Rec '•t No.: Date: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit (0 -0 '1 Z PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION ‘41 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Project: I 0 IS US A-12 r es Type of I spection: , • � ,tip 0A • Address. j '1 5 r C. /• kw Date Called: , 7 Special Instructions: [Date // Wanted: C'% -10 m •m Requester: Phone o: "�,v 8" (i9 0 — %6 / Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: f • / (g /] ) �j k J k-- )4 6 / A e"=- l v 3 /-- sr- r, , / X 14 115- ri'1rr A f ?i,„."-13 � /lo us P 4 .,Y--_, -, , n i r - Ai (� P . Ins or: Date: ri $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: 1 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. Project: 1 Type of Inspection: Address: i f Date Calle la i , / 0 Special Instructions: Date Wanted/ 0 1 ,0 .m. Reques Pho eN U — Tea —9 e33y ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1,�✓Frc� Inspector: A,c- Date /0 /7 yo $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Project: _J A l/j J (j c . i Fire Alarm: Type of Inspection,: J { 2 `1 ( t_ , “_.) (1-i" 2 Address: 1-7 c 0 i Suite #: 317e) : C , {'fc-c.< ` C ntact Person: Li'A Ai Special Instructions: Phone No.• 4> ` iI- r'. Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: A Inspector: Date: /i /,�f 1/ Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION, RECORDr Retain a Copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Type of Inspe ' n Monitor: Address: 1--) .5- 0 1 Suite #: fo . c , rc - Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: I Pr ov, 0e_ 1.c wL '.•.,S `tom 1 u. tAAJ ( 14 k r -NA , & --rt< 6 t s c ei ti) .t, A cw C, ._ b,, -. .g- ---rtE k. e -' Le C' 6‘4, s tj ',old Tl-R. )OAe) /Ad. '--/-, __ ..c , re %o . r..:r ,,), -1' e,, Re Q1 U 1 c c7r___ ft I AR_ .rte, ) r3Ne t f C l. A-k_ 7/2.0 c... L e e4 Iv4. -, Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Hrs.: 1 pi* $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form,Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 1D-5-13! /O -$ -13`1 PERMIT NUMBERS /0 —r -I 7 CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Project: -To 5 us Type of Inspection: Alec in i!htt� �?k-f hp 1. /f-�/,"1, I1fl l/h Address: 7073 `t?' vs E ?, o i .5<- i2 y Suite #: 4100 Contact Person: Sekk, e el; ck_ Special Instructions: Phone No.: 20S_ 2(00- 703CJ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / e6/.. FJ - 1 0< svlc F', -,c, i QK 1-'.A- Fink I OK fi -cs.,,-1w I NO 0k. ti. L —7,s47411 l� Pc �1 ai h; CA 1 5-1b9 - e'�vre r, rod'on icci L k s s o -f ii,,, 4- „vii c -, rG( %`S C(rt rolled _= U,S_e )-v---, 5// i,cI- — ketkrur,%se` -Pt v4- 5et(e: J hici.th4'cA', .14, di ‘-C- force,.. (o /!,,lc) let c.k vh;A- S, Ek.:11_,...4L 5C.cd &I 4cs+ ere he(Ai t- 11,e r3cM,7 //_51i1,A/ i,• bh.- <- 16'' 47(n& 1- c, k - OCCLI:9 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: A1,4 51 1 Date: /0'1 _ /J Hrs.: - $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 9 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit i91.0 - 072_ /) --S -1q PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: 7G7 5 2 c t 5 0 5/,r rto)41sti. ...e,,,j- .�-1by b4,l) Isel X4-4 -- Type of Inspection: S /0 r.'el v El a� /Cvice'�/ ."-� ( Address: /7501 Suite #: S CO.e hit' Z'yvr) Contact Person: -_ Special Instructions: Permits: Phone No.: 1- 2-s3— 74'O- --GCVZ V� Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: , A /;C- 3 0 5/,r rto)41sti. ...e,,,j- .�-1by b4,l) Isel X4-4 -- [ 0°C vt r it- . 'g »i 4 J iG /sod , c... G ar 01 4�Jl G JS , i%(91,1 494 CL4 -i ,., s,1//5 . (iZ 1, -ra-is - 3 Hood & Duct: i Pre -Fire: Permits: _ Occupancy Type: Needs Shift Inspection: , A /;C- 3 Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: 1 Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: _ Occupancy Type: Inspector: , A /;C- 3 Date:1 J i/1 o H rs.: 1 $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 4/o c 7 7- PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Project: 7» s iZ 5 Type of Inspection: Hood &Duct: Address: / 7S 71 Suite #: Sc Pe tv11 Contact Person: 0G Occupancy Type: Special Instructions: Phone No.: 02.5.-3 — ''2' a -- " Ce'i Z- Approved per applicable codes. 1--Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: CA-et yv 4° ST L G✓...1,40re ill- ee- - c 1__ C vn-t .'� arty -H4 4-41c, 5 le LopaOt i • S Ir Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood &Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: 4 Occupancy Type: Inspector,:° p"6,- 3 Date: '13 p ho Hrs.: / V$80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit -o 10- C ? PERMITNUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Proje : 14? C s f7cts� o-3 1 11.11 Type bf Inspection: Aq-- Address: Suite #: 1� c ,. t v,t. `_ Contact Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. rrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: iv) 2 C�- f°t O L/ C ttP 1 K .12 , jl ?LW UC,;QM, Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: ' I Date: ,2' 7.1. / / �> Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit In - c7 c2.. 10- r- - IS- 7 /3/ PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: u 0 C %> 4 3 4, - -- -- - - - -- Type of Inspection: Address: 7 cc) Suite #: Lipo �. , �' `x(i t; > v Contact Person : Special Instructions: t ;(n t L � , c20-)161< co-) IJ ©d r " 5PR, okf i , , e (-- Phone No.: nApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: 1. 5k L-- 1 ,JOCJr (rec.- re,p (.>"k �. 'r P 9) L { 4/ c,12-vs-2 wee 48 1,2: S-or. t ;(n t L � , c20-)161< co-) IJ ©d r " 5PR, okf i , , e (-- ill fat., '4 A irc 4kt rr. 1, Mte i _ j v.i cikti,mL i` -jIi9-, ivl S r ANC.e , hvi.cr. IAAa(2 )t) A I / A / vivi_s 1 lam- - 1r1- , e eAc,l `jt'tB,% ;7 ff vripr Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: /5---) ' -- y'-` .--_ Date: ` / t / c Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit -o-1=)-- 1a - - 131 /a P -/37 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: Sprinklers: I . HUA C.- N@Pkk - 1 f'eCik ( T AcP Type of I specti n: _ - 7p O e f c LAM ( -cl o k S f U -c `ej 'r ref ° t2 t ,4 S 6.) ( a)1 Address: r�75_0 } Suite #: s p� (1i, y / Conta Person: Special Instructions: 5-, RJS t L - r;�'r=c._ r.,e 464 P6\1, x, Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes: KCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: I . HUA C.- N@Pkk - 1 f'eCik ( T AcP Hood & Duct: 7p O e f c LAM ( -cl o k S f U -c `ej 'r ref ° t2 t ,4 S 6.) ( a)1 ," . 0 117 ._ -fps P/C- 4 (0gw . A t(t bl11 :rte , ,�,�0 ,3 5-, RJS t L - r;�'r=c._ r.,e 464 P6\1, x, . , lL _ 4) 60 ._ ?" , s r _ .Loo -ff "d G r �. _..y ���PN� tau � r z � � �-- � ( � � b� iv�d e � �� -� .� Ar -5I ► L IP d s P C71 4z 7. 5-k- Ti L L 16 -0 -7- ► - , 0 pt 2,, rc /)q)iiitv - Od'o ' t ) -�( (Th (-> (z-- TO . 0 1- L �i PJ 7U � (1 A �1 ,..* OK 70 S Toy.. Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: Sk? rs.. $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Project: Sprinklers: ( ,i1 c c Tye of Inspection: -# —oy'Rct Address: 0.5-0 i Suite #: ijcio c C to by ki Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: riApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: (, ,%100-e c_ e VIceS' 'p • #}(II Occupancy Type: c2. ; i c_ (I de ci 1 6e. ` a ) s/� o 3( . AU-f%, y a 1 . (/i /0e)}a T (2P A, mi,. , li'�^ P�'- filDr 1)) V1�1 -e C I l ` wZ ('7) f/i'i'l to it- ` c _eA.'' /\�dJ /"42 , f� oer civ Vii/ , ' -;' r Q -�Q Cy\ 0.0(t_ ce, ! ter f r f /V , I l dpiof `j\ /A,K/ Si, !! (0, per s tJ _} to ,4a' (S'S �-‘ -2, emu ,de S , 4 x, A-C s .cr v,'►,. sry r'iz..nf <:,1,4---111; it) 7,4 K,, fit Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: 6-2/4„ H rs•. $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 1 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Dig -0�- PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: >Pct / $ c fZ Ca.0 Type of Inspection: w LL Addr ss: 11 Suite #:, � �`r� � a6 __ 6,,;v �� � Contact Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: 9r Q- P6o�- 7.63ei Approved per applicable codes. icorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: J i ( �ad(i -; to fk L e, �f= T10 ii `i gv 77) . - - C at-d k . ° & / OA 4 s Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: ,,\ 5.-- ... Date: /c271 Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Cali to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit D /D - d 7,;;;&. !0- 5 /3! PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575- Project: --tcy u ' / get V , es k c <_ c Type of Inspection: ..... P (T f'2/ f f d Q.a Address: /°7s-a / Suite #: 466 S , (, j3'r,0 y Contact Person: Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: 9-0- g ----36i nApproved per applicable codes. LACorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: -yor0 — oic Coo -P12- vk Hood &Duct: t'`" -- c*..c P >L 1 310 `tr 1 Pre -Fire: AJ , 1. .,,,.. (9 ' ' 6, 15/0 A r Occupancy Type: . / ^y / Ai* _ -. Lt, I0 7 /4 L�CJ`' A/ ii-C ., 4_1 1-G•), f/ ' ry/i r k✓ (� � a . reolcu.e_ e -, 1 i 5 P 1114 ki'> 0 (0(24)42__ /t,D L L % f' V L v't 1 I) 2r0' r . 1Ce, L( 1 QGoO+ as c). eels Sot_ n); 9i,, r- ^-fi V At r bw. c. 4' S, i gou ; de As -,i 1 +'S P : x- 7-i) , n1 A 0 Ip t. t., A-71 .; sri P18 t?oO (L '< lit) Ar j Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood &Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: a- ;v, c- Date: 2 c//6) Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit fly". 0 z. PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Project: 1-_ • (1 - u 5 Type of Inspec"ti%pn r Address: k-45-01 e,c _ fek „lc Suite #: goo Contact Person: %1`i l n , r) F 5l Special Instructions: Phone 7.: ) ?Zti J / ?Z proved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: to f ✓T - / / . l- eyoo 225- / 135% / L; rin s r /r(p 26 2 7 5 P.S Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: , 6 \ r 0 Hrs.: U 10 SF l , , $80.00 REINSPE ION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 January 27, 2011 C8101023 Revision #1 Toys "R" Us, Inc. 1562 Del Mar Road Oceanside, CA 92057 Attention: Mr. Devin Bissember, Project Manager Email: Devin.bissember(c�tovsrus.com Subject: Final Summary of Special Inspections Toys "R" Us 17501 Southcenter Parkway, Suite 200 Tuk sfiirig�oI' P rmit #D10 -072 Dear Mr. Bissember: lierracon Terracon Consultants, (Terracon) respectfully submits this letter to acknowledge that special inspections and materials testing have been completed for the above - referenced project. Terracon conducted inspections for this project from June 17, 2010 through January 7, 2011, as described by our Daily Field Reports C8101023.0001 through C8101023.24 and corresponding laboratory test reports. These reports, copies of which were previously submitted, form the basis for this final summary of our inspections. In accordance with the general structural notes, Terracon conducted inspections for the following: 1. Soil bearing verification 2. Reinforced concrete (cast in place) 3. Structural steel erection, field welding & bolting 4. Chemical and mechanical anchors It is our understanding that the work which was inspected as referenced in our Daily Field Reports was constructed in general conformance with the approved plans, building codes, and changes authorized by the structural engineer. If you have questions or desire additional information, please call at your convenience. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. rew i Tyler McCormick Office Manager Terracon Consultants, Inc. 14940 NE 95th St. Suite A Redmond, WA 98052 P [425] 202 0288 F [425] 202 0307 terracon.com Getxtr.chnfcnl II e 4 $ Co it i} +:sif:n I . I ivtilde, i.. \ L • CASCADE TESTING LABORATORY, INC. - TESTING & INSPECTION PREVIOUS 5 12919 N.E. 126TH PLACE REPORT No - No. KIRKLAND, WASHINGTON 98034 11 "tr. . 3 -9800 EVERETT ''•.b' -^_ (425) 59-0817 DATr I 1� CENQ0 FIELD REPO ,' . 1 no\,N, 01/4„..x,, 6,,,,,,,,,..,, ,:[ / PROJECT c �.-� "� � � J �l/� ,V9 ..CATION • BLDG. OWNER y+ � WI! NO. ` p \ WEATHER TEMP. AM @ PM \i'\ ; '2._` Lit ENGINEER ATTN: ARCHITECT CONTRACTC�11 e °` k c. \` \, �h (2) INSPECTION PERFORMED _ LATERAL WOOD — RESTEEUCONCRETE — RESTEEL ONLY _ RESTEEUMASONRY — STR.ST/WELDING EP — STR.ST /BOLTING OTHER S (3) ITEMS INSPECTED — FOUNDATIONS _ FOOTINGS _ SLAB _ AUGER CAST PILES _ COLUMNS — DRILLED PIERS — WALLS — BEAMS — (LOCATION (AREAS) l- �� 'CC- ..C. ' S" _S V erVIA jQ (5) CONCRETE/MASONRY MIX NO. DESIGN STRENGTH (ft) SUPPLIER TOTAL CU. YD. PLACED SLUMP (INCHES) SPECIMENS CAST AIR CONTENT %) CYLINDER REPORT NO ( ITEMS INSPECTED WERE IN CONFORMANCE WITH BLDG. DEPT. APPROVED PLANS YES III NO ❑ a a REMARKS: N63 \Je.112_ `/ 2 X /4- r' r . Y- S <2-- Li Q N ovi,,,i_Vo,(5„ '‘f). ,L....)ef 0_, ,--kV,X 0-.) .0k\o„.35 oki.CL •E-c --C -.._ s\c 4 ( % G \\e a,r1 -4- ck \..e..„ 0‘„,,, Aiet7 SA,,,e( .s %-.X.,› 4, 0 '‘,e4 v,(7),,, (f)e c W '` ■o 7a i - 0.4 cfrcek X (€01] A Ao \e A'f \sV m ot\. "1 p\ 5 �,t�1)\C cal\ c �! c.-fr ..er cl\3 pi a PP, TEST RE S APPLY ONLY TO THE ITEMS HEREIN TESTED. THIS REPORT SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED EXCEPT IN FULL, WITH- OUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF CASCADE TESTING LABORATORY, INC. REVISED 3/09 INSPECTOR(S), NAME(S) PRINTED INSPECTOR SIGNATURE SIGNED BY COPIES TO: ,t 1 -ar fiegni age No. / of ill S- ,GbtA+-ttert,76- CY-64 s. Job Name 7120 74te..f17/04 structural associates inc. job No. /0.G• - /49 Date // /6 • lb Name 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 . . fax (616) 457-8107 • , . , ' , e . t_ ! i ! i • , _._; . ,..,,,,..71.„. Aiii-ze77 t-ofira 1 ,15 >d-.0? (;7) 0 i a:WO fre..).r : , • 0‘t,' 1 : : ,,.;: 1 : 1 , 1 P. 155-ifit:C . 6) ' Ze5 i . ..,L..H._._. _ i,_■ _.._.t_ ' 1 , 1 : ! . , • 1 ! ! II 1 V .. • li, , . .. '40111 • in ■ i . M' (06) : 3___LS. _._x______ .14. A t, , • , t.. - --- "g14---4---: ------:-----:--- -- --: 1- „”- - V _i :___ ...7f5.' A ; : I EXPIRES el/ / 210491c>" I; -----7-PERMITCENTER ' . - • i q /'•0 5 : 4" `a-E3IL/94#7 . ' • ! 1 : : : . ; . , 04!a____ t_e"!12/41.3_6*__11?:_t(W3. — _4?_*_/_-__L__ile.._ ;____0_4'. _44.4 _Ae____24.4:411__...:__:_ ,11 1:4q." *4) A6. .400/,-4 ..-40,12;190/241e'e_ Ani ...,__,VY=4,) 1 : : : : i , I - i : ‘.• ! • 1 : :‘ z ■ , , 1 a i I • . : : 4t, gr.r....;„_...._6....,.e.5__94...: 4 . 1 . . . z x i 4 ; _._.ty , • ee....44 . 4-.04, r ,,,--4- ;_,,,_.,,,,Ife.01 A., 0 / ' 'L6 - -:--t: • X4 A "1)47'. 1 / 1,0 • igiO 712fY /-5 /.07 <-4?-1'1-./." 6 ile-441._/. .! .- _ - - --,--- ., . __.. 44 7' 1 .// _ Avc ):-..5._ ) ..._ .P..._/4..__- 1 : • ' ) -- .//14tc_11.. _.‘ Z. „,;--; ,-,-- ----i4 ) 44..,4 041, ' ! , . ; , • -0.--,,:, .......01•441... ' REV1EVVE _ , I - -', ' _D. F : . ■ . -1--- ! 1 I A APPOnVED I 1 1 , ilFe 1010 I J .] i --- ---:,----4------ e41-5i---?Ite , . . t , • .1- 1 ' • • I. • . . .1' •----1,i:;i BUI 1 1 INGDIVISION . . , : : . -------7 . . 2. "6 .rifte, . '....... , . .1.7x14_44‘,7,0• . say structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457 -8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457 -8107 Page No. of 02 Job Name rtilJ Job No. • -/f6 Date / / - /S_ /O Name Pe s • /59.0 .643,6 /3/.1 ._271 .?S , hj $ o¢ if S6 22,E fF6 -.'7 S (4,-1^ 27. REVIEWED FOR 0DECOMPLLANCE AocsonvEn DEC 23 2L J tY -ptTu_ BUJLDIN( nRhl IAtj 1. ! 1 1 ; 1 I , ; -;• • I • ' CzOlv& orrevr, 44-0141°91 . .0,--"-g-'1--Litot4,--e07-?,9,'---14,-•-•.-9;,'''-'-'--- t7h21Z,-/. . •v4' . 11';#Y !/-r'' JY71/0"74g 0 1 4 -7-l-Z5W / d' 'e,"'' LR-7//e • 1 • ; -; I- •i- : • • f- " • 1 ; 1 I . • I ek-y_4' i,41 it1■V ih/ 04 / • , t , I 77‘ -/q i;e Q/C4d ' j!: -PlhAir . ... . 1.. , , I , a4•00,06 / ..4/1-zu JIN'fr)--• ,- associates inc. ; ..I oei 1DNA:eel rv(Iv) 77°7 ''j7e 52,1/1 119 -1410i1 01- 1,124calt/ (7-7.. ' L Z- Z - - - L_. -.1-rke4Lic 4W 41i/1" a.ae,bc/ viy -1 a cr-1, o/-109 SQL structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457 -8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457 -8107 Page No. a of °Z Job Name 7-111.1 Job No. /.!v- /AS Date / / -/: -/O Name 25 _,I_; 2' i t 1 p- -f. wf6FYw r EWEIFOR -LIANGE ctfl'I - -DEC 202-10 �flo 5c ar.E ! City-9M! EMIR G ' o / 2 1 7 r x / e w 32e3 %_ voisr / % . "1 r Ur s _?-moo A,'t ti4- : -4/ or beilD G'Gl avd A.14 ,'e JL t .low A,var• ch-es;, 1.. 2- .f y4. j "X . /� .. Z / ge. _ Thy► /Q/ r_ . C _o• ' 111-04-• /n/ .1015Te, Aero Assemblies, Incorporated 12012 12th Avenue South Burnsville, Minnesota 55337 PHONE: 952- 894-5552 FAX: 952- 894 -5798 11 -23 -2010 Lift and Storage Systems 3580 Hoffman Road E. White Bear Lake, MN 55110 Attn: Jim Jim, Here is the information you requested on the wire rope used in your assemblies. We use this style 7X19 GALVANIZED STEEL STRAND CONSTRUCTION A very flexible cable which is used with pulleys The nominal breaking strength in pounds is 20001bs REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE .f. nup GEE 2 0 «,J City of Tukwila BUILDING niumnpi sat structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457-8107 Page No. of 2 lob Name 74/1 Job No. 06 /g6 Date // - /0- '70 Name tq"-c4 • ; ; . „ i 1 _ ji 1 : 1 - , 1 , . . jT • a: 4 , ----:---±- o-c1 4 0. ■-`,■• %. -,--- : :--- --- ----, -- - - — 4 - - - -g • k‘e ''t'i•- , L _ • • Ntl _34 _Nztl t 4 ; REVIEWED .E CODE COMPW IBr■ • •City of Tukwila BUILDINGnIminhi a Sat structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457-8107 Page No. cR of .eR Job Name TAI 77k', Job No. X46 Date //-/., -AO Name 27e • . • ; W.144 --t- ••■• I .1 ■0Arm-z- Alo 5cA1 e . I ; ' ,a,fatt/4 i I ; 1 . ie.-444440AV I • ! ; 1 - • • , i , • . : : : : i . I_ •_, 1 • • • 1 • • • ; ig 443vr- Ao /4'1: 6 IA AN) 1--4.027 i 1,8,- - : /e3 ,e-lEpt, : ■ ' . . . ,Q4,4!A),/z, .. 4.r!_boi4 y)i ...1t. A r e I itAere 4545._ 4A41-C. i i ri-v; . ' . . -1-Zoi,t/AleEr *7.10 , i . .1 . • ' .lofOr ,A)77-&-n 4-bei-tif 6P.:f/2,01::=1:7-. 73 " . . , __ _ 1_ _ 4z _ • • • 1 REVIEWED 5,&e- -t, • ilECOmPLIANCE P/2.-Aer)g Liu C4 of Tukwjla BUILDING OivigOki : . ,e4) • , ,f,t, %/a/sr C61/417Z72-0A1 • • • E V LE M E 1 REID MIDDLETON, INC.; 1 • • • 1 • • • ; ig 443vr- Ao /4'1: 6 IA AN) 1--4.027 i 1,8,- - : /e3 ,e-lEpt, : ■ ' . . . ,Q4,4!A),/z, .. 4.r!_boi4 y)i ...1t. A r e I itAere 4545._ 4A41-C. i i ri-v; . ' . . -1-Zoi,t/AleEr *7.10 , i . .1 . • ' .lofOr ,A)77-&-n 4-bei-tif 6P.:f/2,01::=1:7-. 73 " . . , __ _ 1_ _ 4z _ • • • 1 REVIEWED 5,&e- -t, • ilECOmPLIANCE P/2.-Aer)g Liu C4 of Tukwjla BUILDING OivigOki : . ,e4) • , ,f,t, %/a/sr C61/417Z72-0A1 • • • December 16, 2010 File No. 262010.005/01501 Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Subject: Building Permit Plan Review — First Submittal Toys R Us Bike Rack (D10 -072) Dear Mr. Benedicto: 1∎VI Ts,RE-R1 S C1 Ui° �f'J 1,E5R f U'nV.:.L' ' C17M O COMMNITY DEVELOPMENT We reviewed the proposed project for compliance with the structural provisions of the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) as amended and adopted by the state of Washington and the city of Tukwila. The permit applicant has responded successfully to our comments. We have no comments necessitating a response from the permit applicant. The calculations reference a conversation with Shawn at Lift Store that the fully loaded bike rack weighs 900 pounds and is 12 feet 0 inches long. The structural analysis is, in part, based on this conversation. As such, we recommend the placement of a load limit sign near the bike rack. Enclosed are two sets of pages from the structural calculations with revisions to the existing structure for your records. If you have any questions or need additional clarification, please contact us. Sincerely, Reid Middleton, Inc. Philip razil, P.E., S.E. Senior Engineer Enclosures cc: Brenda Holt, City of Tukwila (by e-mail) knb\26 \planrevw \tukwila\ 10 \t015r 1. doc \prb 728 134th Street SW Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 Phone: 425 741 -3800 Fax: 425 741 -3900 4300 8 Street Suite 302 Anchorage, AK 99503 Phone: 907 562 -3439 rcx: 907 551 5319 .1 sai structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 . . fax (616) 457-8107 Page No. / Job Name 7720 7--&/ Job No. ./OG - /B5 Date 1/- /6 Name d'o of __ ,. . • -/----------i . . , , • ': )0f 6 iitiv-- V-3 ',7 40-4•1-t-G--. 66 /1.-41.4t ' , ■ ! • : I ; . I . 1- • ; ! - ! --I _ : ■ Ault( _z$715-5) • ! - -7 e- I /Itettiie I _lc- ZOO $6', 2 01 ; 03 4.55„0 i ! ! ! . , /`el'erit/n,,LIA,.&t! 1 1 04.**11 ‘ ‘96,,e17 0 0 7.4P . ...e .0 S e eg - - : i i • . , . . . . , /01 4 4440-.4' , p6 i 6A0,: s- , ,__ •-, , , I __Loz . , I - , i i i i ! , ---1 • ! - . . _4_ /0.0. 7 , , , • t : • i I ! !Ili t t ' 1. . 1 : : i i - --- 4 ; . . • T T . ilepig,c ' 6,, .543 i , , ,•,-;,.i : 1 • . 7 ___2a/t7- . 1 . : • 1 ! : i - • , 7 7 ' . . . --: ' • ! - 4..:., • : , : : ; . . - -7-- 6-71-5 /,i. ! , 7 : V ' ..-. --i — A.) 0 00, . . 4 , . . : • __.' - . 1 . . ! i . i . , . • • : , 0'6, e ././'' 1 • t • / ; ! - ! --I _ : ■ Ault( _z$715-5) • ! - -7 e- I /Itettiie I _lc- ZOO $6', 2 01 ; 03 4.55„0 say structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457-8107 Page No. of 02-- Job Name rial 73tirot tA- Job No. /51.o, -/f6- Date // - /0- /0 Name oe . , A-A4:41. 11-41-011 li, ZZ_zifi v.0e- / 0.2 ' • , . .. . g4-4..: - I i , d4.• ' ' . • ' -.- ' ----- -- . __._.-1___. •i- .,_ _..,. . ' 1.A4 z /05-ri 57 (ilr.--pt 27, r ... , ... 1 ,,,,i - ) af? 4 _ • . , i 4 . '790 -5. /3 Ok. ,/.54 • ./}1644 : 7 2-1 _r4 -L 7q0 1 I ! ; . • . . ' , 1 I . . 1 ! j. • I i . I . -1- ; i • , . . ! . . . - • o--,Xii : , , . , . .. -i--- 1 : 7 : . P . I ; i 1 : I 1 1 . , 1 ; . . I i I . : . . , . . • ! . . 1 I , . i . . . I : ■ •"---/-0 I i . . . , : . . - .... . ' I : . --1 . —1 _...-- , • /, D ! . .• . , , , I • --1 1 . . 1 • -t--- : , 1 -----— 1 . 1 • . . _ i : 1 . 1 . , I . • • . ' ' 1_0*11'4.4.6._21_____:___4;&._,_a___ - .. i . . $_ : .7-..,___. ; . 1 1 3b.a.2, . 1 & 166 4/ ....),..ezle 1 . . . 4 . , 6 0,5) ,.. ., _2_7/e)-5_,_7s/_6__ . , . _.,._ . • ; • . i • "/C)4,--/--/6PKI /59z, • /-5/..A.. , . . 1 : . . _ -. • I - • . . 1 It . . .• . ; . ; • . . , A-A4:41. 11-41-011 li, ZZ_zifi v.0e- / 0.2 ' • , . .. . g4-4..: - I i , d4.• ' ' . • ' -.- ' ----- -- . __._.-1___. •i- .,_ _..,. . ' 1.A4 z /05-ri 57 (ilr.--pt 27, r ... , ... 1 ,,,,i - ) af? 4 _ • . , i 4 . '790 -5. /3 Ok. ,/.54 • ./}1644 : 7 2-1 _r4 -L 7q0 t1 o. .17 t-- L. Viv& /09.22, • 1- 1.-- . I L... 4•0147111?"-- , 1 . • I "- Yli/lirel /./.% & • 4f47-17.? • " ''-- ' - ' -- — c,;(...:2114' • - _at/0 'f-z.La' c 1/(7 ' 4Zif■ct i i 1 1 ....1:rvi)614e/ i' "4.1sire/o1 4?"`I' ---g1214. 1 I . 1 ' rie- 1_01 —1t10 je7 ' e oic4d - 441. ' -1.111f. 1 . , • . , _— 090,ed J.11-20 .i/yr) . OE ZcOO cij Z Z ri_C‘l 00 — •—■ —I -I— structural associates inc. • J 049 .i.iriN14."c . !--44c1r! 19 • rv'AN'o r-t"1- ----7(1/ ._14.1ofq' ea- .¢1-71(capr/ _.4.1(7-7., -:--,7'20 I ,,, : • 1.. I. I I . , ! 1 : ; I • : : 1 . ! 1 A-04 idA? w L_ L_ AA, .slsz7 7,44-v, , - ig utv's€4,1 .1-e)4aC 0-t10-7 C/Cl-V; ■-- , I • structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457 -8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457 -8107 Page No. a of °Z Job Name Lk- Job No. /510- /-=-5 Date //-/.. -/O Name 43 7it Ix /Z-4, X %Z44. Innet ifvc -o /6/ ./D ion. i 1 , ; , , F-- . 1 Gh/ , . - •61/46 -1 3x ' x1 ? a; 7 • ' • 1 ! ! L , ; _ /429j; UA/fSrYwr _r______ � ' r 1 , 1 r I i E i 1 eyonne x/ew SST, 4;f5 6G ee.z L., 4'r ,{/D Arr-7 6 40 ADJ; a A,VA 44- ...14.7 - _4.n Gtr 1L.! , ; bD,4 v)'� c'kevI iJ. ere A-,64� 61st! -c - / , �� -1 �i7'rd'f+'` � �� /2Asi'� JOlyf G�' /D>ff� _off'_. / 7a.- I - -- - - 1 - - - -- A w/9 %2 y0 ems, . � - -_. 3X;3)4 f4., - - -. _ _ . lit _, _,___ _ _______ ____ __ :. 7it Ix /Z-4, X %Z44. Innet ifvc -o /6/ ./D ion. Aero Assemblies, Incorporated 12012 12th Avenue South Burnsville, Minnesota 55337 PHONE: 952 -894 -5552 FAX: 952-894-5798 11 -23 -2010 Lift and Storage Systems 3580 Hoffman Road E. White Bear Lake, MN 55110 Attn: Jim Jim, Here is the information you requested on the wire rope used in your assemblies. We use this style 7X19 GALVANIZED STEEL STRAND CONSTRUCTION A very flexible cable which is used with pulleys The nominal breaking strength in pounds is 20001bs e_ksai structural associates incorporated • Description Structural Calculations for Toys R Us Tukwila, WA Contents Loading Criteria Metal Stud Design Beam Design Column and Foundation Design Concrete shear wall calculations ,EXPIRES `If 1. it0 tijO 07Z 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 :.. x FILE C Perm!t 1�o. Page phi REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 Al -A6 City' �/orrukwtla C1 -C6 BUILDING DIVISION D1 -D40 El -E8 3/1 0/1 0 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER (616) 457 -8100 fax (616) 457 -8107 • • • Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude = - 122.26117 Spectral Response Accelerations Ss and S1 Ss and S1 = Mapped Spectral Acceleration Values Site Class B - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.0 Data are based on a 0.05000000074505806 deg grid spacing Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 1.412 (Ss, Site Class B) 1.0 0.483 (S1, Site Class B) Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude = - 122.26117 Spectral Response Accelerations SMs and SM1 SMs = Fa x Ss and SM1 = Fv x S1 Site Class D - Fa= 1.0 ,Fv = 1.517 Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 1.412 (SMs, Site Class D) 1.0 0.733 (SM1, Site Class D) Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude = - 122.26117 Design Spectral Response Accelerations SDs and SD1 SDs = 2/3 x SMs and SD1 = 2 /3xSM1 Site Class D - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.517 Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 0.941 (SDs, Site Class D) At • Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude = - 122.26117 Spectral Response Accelerations Ss and S1 Ss and S1 = Mapped Spectral Acceleration Values Site Class B - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.0 Data are based on a 0.05000000074505806 deg grid spacing Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 1.412 (Ss, Site Class B) 1.0 0.483 (S1, Site Class B) Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude = - 122.26117 Spectral Response Accelerations SMs and SM1 SMs = Fa x Ss and SM1 =FvxS1 Site Class D - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.517 • Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 1.412 (SMs, Site Class D) 1.0 0.733 (SM1, Site Class D) Conterminous 48 States 2003 NEHRP Seismic Design Provisions Latitude = 47.44787 Longitude — - 122.26-11-7 Design Spectral Response Accelerations SDs and SD1 SDs = 2/3 x SMs and SD1 = 2/3 x SM1 Site Class D - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.517 Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 0.941 (SDs, Site Class D) A l 1BC2006 (1613), ASCE 7 -05 CHAPTER 11, 12, 13 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA Response Spectral Acc. (0.2 sec) SS = 141.20 %g = 1.412g Figure 22 -1 through 22 -14 = 0.483g Figure 22 -1 through 22 -14 Response Spectral Acc.( 1.0 sec) S1 = 48.30 %g Soil Site Class Site Coefficient Fa = 1.000 Site Coefficient F„ = 1.518 Max Considered Earthquake Acc. SMS = Fa.S, Max Considered Earthquake Acc. SM1 = Fv.S1 5% Damped Design SDS = 2/3(SMs) SD1 = 2/3(SM1) D Building Occupancy Categories Design Category Consideration: Seismic Design Category for 0.1 sec Seismic Design Category for 1.0sec Si <.75g Since Ta < .8Ts (see below), SDC = Comply with Seismic Design Category D 12.8 Equivalent lateral force procedure Seismic Force Resisting Systems Ct = 0.02 Building ht. H„ = 25 C�= 1.400 Approx Fundamental period, Ta = Ct(hn)x Calculated T shall not exceed S Cu.Ta 0.8Ts = 0.8(SD1 /SDS) Table 20 -3 -1, Default = D Table 11.4 -1 Table 11.4 -2 = 1.412 (11.4 -1) = 0.733 (11.4 -2) = 0.941 (11.4 -3) = 0.489 (11.4 -4) Table 1 -1 with dist. between seismic resisting system >40ft Table 11.6 -1 Table 11.6 -2 Section 11.6 Control (exception of Section 11.6 does not apply) T- R301.2.2.1.1 II, Standard Flexible Diaphragm v D D NA D IRC, Seismic Design Category = D2 A. BEARING WALL SYSTEMS HZ 2. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls Is structure Regular & 5 5 stories ? Response Spectral Acc.( 0.2 sec) Ss= 1.412g F8 = 1.00 Yes v x = 0.75 T- 12.8 -2 ft Limited Building Height (ft) = NP for SD1 of 0.489g Table 12.8 -1 = 0.224 12.8 -7 TL = 6.000 Sec = 0.313 Use T = 0.313 V sec. = 0.415 Control (exception of Section 11.6 does not apply) 12.8.1.3 Max Ss 5 1.5g 5% Damped Design SDS = %(Fa.Ss) = 0.941 g (11.4 -3) Response Modification Coef. R = 4 Table- 12.2 -1 Over Strength Factor C20= 2 foot note g Importance factor I = 1 Table 11.5 -1 Seismic Base Shear V = C, W Ca= SDS =0.235 (12.8 -2) R/I or need not to exceed, Cg = SD' - 0.390 For T5 TL (12.8 -3) (R/I).T or Cs- Sol TL N/A For T > TL (12.8-4) Cs shall not be less than = 0.01 (12.8 -5) T -12.2- Min Cs = 0.5SiI /R N/A For S1 z 0.6g (12.8 -6) Use Cs = 0.235 Design base shear V = 0.235 W Control • • • 12.11.1 Structural Walls and Their Anchorage Fp= 0.40S0sIWW = 0.377(W) 12.11.2 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry structural Walls (flexible diaphragm) shall be z 280 #/ft or Fp= 400SDSI Fp = Max Seismic Load EM = Where 00 = 0.2SDSD = Deflection Amplification factor Cd = Nonbuilding structures, Section 15 Response Modification Coef. R = Importance factor I = For flexible nonbuilding, C8 = Min CS = or C5= V= For rigid nonbuilding, C8 = 0.8Sosl(WW) 0.753Wp S2QE t 0.2SDSD 2 0.189(D) 4 = 377 3 1 SDsI /R = 0.314 0.03 0.8 S11 /R = 0.129 0.314 W 0.3 SDS 1 0.282 W (12.11.1) (12.4.4), (12.4.5), (12.4,6), (12.4.7) T- 15.4 -1 or T- 15.4 -2 15.4.1.1 (15.4 -1) (15.4 -2) (15.4 -5) 115 12.11.1 sal stuctural associates inc. 62 CommeceAve SW Suitor 100 Cxand R9pids, M 49603 PENT: PAE PROJECT: TRU - Tukwila ASCE 7 -05 Snow Loading Input: Ground snow load as determined from Figure 7 -1 Exposure factor as determined from Table 7 -2. Thermal factor as determined from Table 7 -3 Acceptable factors are 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, and 0.85 Importance factor as determined from Table 7 -4. Acceptable factors are 0.8,1.0,1.1, and 1.2 Ca (RP) 180 12 0 := atan J 12 Tr RP 0 =1.19 S =48 Y := • y = 25 Pf := 55 if SS =1 ACt =1.2 25 if SS= OACt =1.2 60 if SS =1 ACt =1.1 32.5 if SS= OACt =1.1 65 if SS =1 ACt< -1 40 otherwise Uw := v1.0 (2/21/08) 70 2.38 if 2.38 > 0.5 + — W 70 0.5 + — otherwise W = 3.68 P:\MathCad Files\ 2/23/2010 JOB No: 156 -185 SHEET OF Horziontal distance from eave to ridge in feet Roof pitch (x/12) Is the building a monosiope? Enter 1 for yes. Does the roof have an unobstructed slippery surface meeting the R value and ventilation requirements as spelled out in Figure 7 -2? Enter 1 for yes. x := x =1 Ay 1 if MS = 1 A 9 < 15 Pfa := 0.7•Ce•Ct•I•Pg 1 if MS 1 A 0 Pfa =16.8 0 otherwise Pfmin := (I•Pg) if Pg 5 20 (20•I) otherwise 7:= (0.13•Pg +14) if 0.13•Pg +14<30 30 otherwise = 16.6 Pfmin if Pfmin > Pfa A x = 1 0 if 8 >_ 70 Pfa otherwise Results: Pf = 20 Cs = 1 Ps = 20 ROS = 0 BS = 20 Uw =0 0 1 =0 U12 = 0 U12 :_ 0 if W <— 20 0 if 0 >70v9 <C 0 if MS = 1 (0.3-Ps) otherwise ROS := W 5 if 0 <Pg. 20A0<- 50 0 otherwise 0 if W <20 0 if 0 >70v0<C 0 if MS =1 hd• otherwise Snow load on flat roofs (See section 7.3) Slope factor as determined from Figure 7 -2 Sloped roof snow load (See section 7.4) Rain -on -snow surcharge (See section 7.10) Balanced roof snow load. This is the sum of the sloped roof snow + the rain -on -snow surcharge. Unbalanced windward snow (See figure 7 -5) Length of drift past ridge (See figure 7 -5) Unbalanced bottom layer leeward snow (See figure 7 -5) Unbalanced top layer leeward snow (See figure 7 -5) U11:= Pfmin = 20 hd := [0.43.•4�(Pg + 10)] — 1.5 hd =1.32 Cs := 1 if (70 — 0) > 1 y 0 if 0 >_ 70 (70 — 0) y I•Pg if W < 20 O if 0 >70v9 <� O if MS = 1 Ps otherwise otherwise Ps := Cs• Pf BS := Ps + ROS (-8 -hd.V—S") if W > > -20 O if 0 >70v0 <C O if MS = 1 O otherwise Balanced now (BS) Lhbal windward (Uw) U12 L Lhbal. leeward (UI1) w 12 RP t NT: PAE PROJECT: TRU - Tukwila ASCE 7 -05 Snow Drift Loading Note: Per Section 7.6, balanced and unbalanced shall be analyzed separately. sal structural associates inc. 62 Com me ce Ave SW Suite 100 Crand Rapids, M 49603 Input: Leeward Drifts Horizontal dimension in reet of the upper roof normal to the line of change of roof level, but not less than 25 ft. Difference in height between the upper and lower roof or deck (hr), in feet_ Calculations: Height of the drift (hd), in feet. hdl:= 0.43.3 Lu•4(Pg+ 10) – 1.5 hdl = 1.443 Input: Windward Drifts •d1 Horizontal dimension in feet of the lower roof normal to the line of change of roof level Use the greater of hdl or hdw for calculating the drift . := W := hdl if hdl > hdw hdw otherwise 4.hd if hd1 _< he 4•hd12 hc otherwise he := hr – hb hc = 5.295 hd1 = 3.442 hd = 3.442 Results: Maximum intensity of the snow load at the high point of the drift (Pm), in pounds per square foot. x := [-y•(hd + hb) •y•hr] Pm := min(x) Pm = 77.132 Graphical representation of results: • v1.0 (2/21/08) JOB No: 156 -185 Ground snow load expressed in pounds per square foot, determined trom Figures 16080.311), 1608.3(2) and 1608.3(3). Flat roof snow load (Pf), in psf, which is evaluated on the basis of the lower roof -yb := 0.13.Pg + 14 'yb = 16.6 Snow density (y), in pounds per cubic foot Height of the balanced snow load on the lower roof or deck (hb), in feet. P:\MathCad Files\ 2/23/2010 SHEET OF -yc:= (-yb 30) -y := min(•yc) = 16.6 Ps hb := — 7 hb = 1.205 hdw :_ [0.43.1• J (Pg + 10) – 1.5]• 3 hdw = 3.442 4 hd := hd1 if hd1 < he hc otherwise W = 13.767 hc — = 4.395 hb 8•hc = 42.361 Maximum drift width Width of the drift (Wd), in feet. y:= (8•hc W) Wd := min(y) Wd = 13.767 z := 0, .1 .. Wd Za := Wd .. (Wd + 10) ifir TENT: PAE PROJECT: TRU - Tukwila ASCE 7 -05 Snow Drift Loading Note: Per Section 7.6, balanced and unbalanced shall be analyzed separately. sou structural associates inc. 62 CommEraeAve SW Suite 100 Grand Rapids, P,9 49603 Input: Leeward Drifts Horizontal dimension in lest of the upper roof normal to the line of change of roof level, but not less than 25 ft. Difference in height between the upper and lower roof or deck (hr), in feet Calculations: Height of the drift (hd), in feet. hdl := 0.43. Lu•41(Pg+ 10) – 1.5 hdl =1.443 Input: Windward Drifts Horizontal dimension in feet of the lower roof norrnal to the line of change of roof level. Use the greater of hdl or hdw for calculating the drift . •dl := I hdl if hdl > hdw he := hr – hb hdw otherwise hc = 2.295 W := 4-hd if hd1 5 hc wwv 4•hd12 hc otherwise hd1 = 3.442 hd = 2.295 Results: Maximum intensity of the snow load at the high point of the drift (Pm), in pounds per square toot. x := [- y•(hd+ hb) -y•hr] Pm := min(x) Pm = 58.1 Graphical representation of results: • v1.0 (2/21/08) JOB No: 156 -185 Ground snow load expressed in pounds per square foot, determined horn Figures 16080 3111, 1608.3(2) and 1608..3(3). Flat roof snow load (Pt), in psf, which is evaluated on the basis of the lower roof. 76 := 0.13 • Pg + 14 'yb = 16.6 Snow density (y), in pounds per cubic foot. Height of the balanced snow load on the lower roof or deck (hb), in feet. hdw := [0.43. I. / Pg + 10) – 1.5]• 3 4 hd := hd1 if hd1 < he hc otherwise W = 20.644 P:\MathCad Files\ 2/23/2010 SHEET OF -lc := (7b 30) ^y := min( -yc) ry = 16.6 Ps hb := — 7 hb = 1.205 hdw = 3.442 hc — = hb 1.905 8•hc = 18.361 Maximum drift width Width of the drift (Wd), in feet. y:= (8-hc W) Wd := min(y) Wd = 18.361 z := 0,.1 ..Wd Za := Wd.. (Wd + 10) gl Company: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila Project Ref #: 156 -185 Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW Roof Joist City: Grand Rapids / MI Date: Feb 23 10 Zip Code: 49503 User - Defined Joist i9C9.8(Ms/ft 30.00 Ibs/ft 1 1 1 1 1 1.50ft 4 ] 1 1 1 1 1 9.08ft I Dead Load agumaimmio illb sift 1.50 ft 9.08 ft Live Load Gross Section Properties 1.6250 lx (major) (in4) 2.8610 6.00 0 .� 10.5000 0.0849 ""' 0.0566 Sx (major) (in3) 0.9537 rx (major) (in) 2.2678 ly (minor) (in4) 0.1805 Sy (minor) (in3) 0.1490 ry (minor ) I (• n ) 0.5696 Area (in2) 0.5563 Xo (in) - 1.0487 J x 1000 (in4) 0.5941 Cw (in6) 1.3372 Ro (in) 2.5626 Weight (lb /ft) 1.8932 6005162- 54mi1, 50 ksi Floor Information: Material Properties: Design Code IBC 2006 w /AISI -NAS 2001/04 Supp. Fy (ksi) 50 Fu (ksi) 65 Design Method Joist Length (ft) ASD 10.583 E (ksi) 29500 G (Ksi) 11300 Design Options Top Bracing @ (in) Bottom Bracing @ (in) Full None ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISISec. A7.2) Considered LL Allowable Deflection, L / 240 TL Allowable Deflection, L / 180 Joint Supports & Reactions: Joint Loads: Joint Support Type Rx (kips) Ry (kips) Rm ( kips.in) Joint Load Case Vertical (Ibs) M (Ibs.ft) 2 Hinged 0.0000 1.6656 0.0000 3 Roller 0.0000 0.5322 0.0000 Span Uniform Loads: Span Non - Uniform Loads: Span Dead Load (Ibs /ft) Live Load (Ibs /ft) Span 1 Load Case Live Load Start pt. 0 Load (Ibs /ft) 154.26 End pt. 1 Load (Ibs /ft) 137.46 1 30 40 2 30 40 2 Live Load 0 137.46 1 35.67 Span Concentrated Loads: Load Combination Factors: # Load Case Vertical (Ibs) Moment (Ibs.ft) X/L # Dead Live Used For 1 Dead Load 452 0 0 1 1 0 Strength 2 1 1 Strength 3 1 1 Deflection Capacity Check Sections Effective Properties Member Moment (kips.in) Shear (kips) LL Deflection (in) TL Deflection (in) Crippling (kips) Member Value Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.3613 1 Actual 11.0879 0.7758 0.1024 0.0542 1.6656 1 Sxe (in3) 0.9164 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 1/3 ep Z Company: Structural Associates Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW City: Grand Rapids / MI Zip Code: 49503 TRU - Tukwila Roof Joist User - Defined Joist Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 1 Allowable 30.3546 2.8229 0.1500 0.2000 1.7751 Ratio 0.3653 0.2748 0.6827 0.2710 0.9383 Actual 13.8308 0.7211 0.2072 2 Allowable 30.3546 1.9474 0.4542 Ratio 0.4556_ 0.3703 0.4563 0.1865 0.6055 0.3080 1.6656 1.7402 0.9571 Web Crippling Bearing Length =4 in Interaction Check Member Combined (M,V) (kips.in,kips) Combined (M,Pcr) (kips.in,kips; 1 Moment(Mx) - 11.0879 Moment(Mx) - 11.0879 Shear(Vy) 0.7758 P (Crippling) 1.6656 Act./All. 0.4571 Act./All. 0.9410 X/L 1.0000 X/L 1.0000 2 Moment(Mx) - 11.0879 Moment(Mx) - 11.0879 Shear(Vy) - 0.8898 P (Crippling) 1.6656 Act./All. 0.4825 Act./All. 0.9410 X/L 0.0000 X/L 0.0000 Ixe(in4) 2.7924 Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.4303 2 Sxe (in3) 0.9164 Ixe(in4) 2.7924 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 2/3 Company: Structural Associates Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW City: Grand Rapids / MI Zip Code: 49503 TRU - Tukwila Roof Joist User - Defined Joist Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 Connection Data 1 Clip Data Clip Position... Clip @ joint 3 ': }" �_' yG�F.VY 54 „` , ' : �– '1 — - • Clip Type JH600- 43mi1� Screws 2 ( #12)��' F1 Allowable (kips) N/A F2 Allowable (kips) N/A F3 Allowable (kips) 2.0300 M1 Allowable (kips.in) N/A Support Reactions F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) N/A F3 (kips) 0.5322 M1 ( kips.in) N/A Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.2622 o When more than one Toad affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 3/3 Company: Structural Associates Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW City: Grand Rapids / MI Zip Code: 49503 TRU - Tukwila Parapet studs User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 451.99 Ibs 6.75 ft 10.83 ft 1.25 ft Dead Load • 1 6.75 ft 28.62 psf 10.83 ft 15.66 psf 1.25 ft 15.66 psf Live Load Gross Section Properties: Ix (major) (in4) 3.5254 Sx (major) (in3) 1.1751 rx (major) (in) 2.2555 ly (minor) (in4) 0.2178 Sy (minor) (in3) 0.1797 ry (minor) (in) 0.5606 Arealin2) 0.6930 Xo (in) - 1.0318 J x 1000 (in4) 1.1743 Cw (in6) 1.6259 Ro (in) 2.5428 Weight (lb/ft) 2.3584 Wall Information: Design Code IBC 2006 w /AISI -NASI 2001/04 Supp. Design Method ASD Wall Height (ft) 18.833 Stud Spacing (in) 24 Allowable HI. Deflection L / 240 Dead Loads (!bs /ff) 0 Wall Own Weight(pst) 12 Max. Bridging Spacing(ft) 4 Torsional Bracing Full 6.75 ft 10.83 ft 1.25 ft Wind Load 0.1069 0.5000 600S162- 68mi1, 33 ksi • 1 6.75 ft 10.83 ft 1.25 ft Seismic Load Material Properties: Uniform Dead Load: Fy (ksi) 33 Fu (ksi) 45 E (ksi) 29500 G (ksi) 11300 Span Loads: Span I Load value (Ibs /ft) Reactions: Span Wind Load (psf) Joint Rx (kips) Ry (kips) Rm (kips.in) 1 15.6600 2 - 0.0907 0.0000 0.0000 2 15.6600 3 - 0.6741 0.4520 0.0000 3 28.6200 Design Options: ° Back To Back Configuration Not Considered °Fastener Spacing (in) N/A ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered Note:Aoolied Members Loads are calculated from Wall Loads Joint Supports: Joint Support Type 1 Unsupported 2 Roller Joint Loads: # - Load Case Axial (Ibs) Lateral (Ibs) M (Ibs.ft) 4 Dead Load 451.992 0 0 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 1/4 Company: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila Project Ref #: 156 -185 Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW Parapet studs City: Grand Rapids / MI Date: Feb 23 10 Zip Code: 49503 User Defined Curtain Wall Layout 3 Hinged 4 Unsupported Member Loads: # Load Case Axial Lateral _ _Moment X/L 1 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 31.32 Ibs /ft 0.0 Ibs.ft Uniform 2 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 31.32 Ibs /ft 0.0 Ibs.ft Uniform 3 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 57.24 Ibs /ft 0.0 Ibs.ft Uniform Load Combination Factors: # Dead Live Wind Seismic Used For 1 1 0 0 0 Strength Strength Effective Section Properties: 2 1 1 0 0 3 4 1 1 0 0.75 1 0.75 0 0 Strength Strength Member Value 1 Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.5373 5 1 0.75 0 0.525 Strength Sxe (in3) Ixe(in4) 1.1751 3.5254 6 1 0 0 0.7 Strength 7 0 0 1 0 Deflection 2 Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.4783 8 0 0 0 0.7 Deflection Sxe (in3) 1.1751 Capacity Check: Ixe(in4) 3.5254 Ae(Comp.) (in2) Sxe (in3) 0.4801 1.1751 Member Moment (kips.in) Shear (kips) Tension (kips) Compression (kips) HL Deflection (in) Crippling (kips) N/A 3 Ixe(in4) 3.5254 1 Actual 0.2936 0.0391 N/A N/A 0.0164 Allowable 26.7893 4.3466 13.2538 9.5221 0.1250 N/A Act. /AII. 0.0110 0.0090 N/A N/A 0.1314 N/A 2 Actual 15.6480 0.2616 N/A N/A 0.0776 N/A Allowable 26.7893 2.3389 11.2084 6.1925 0.5417 N/A Act. /AII. 0.5841 0.1119 N/A N/A 0.1432 N/A 3 Actual 15.6480 0.3387 N/A 0.4520 0.5938 N/A Allowable 26.7893 2.3389 11.2084 6.0656 0.6750 N/A Act. /AII. 0.5841 0.1448 N/A 0.0745 0.8797 N/A Design for Web Crippling is Disabled Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Member Combined (M,V) Combined (M,Pcr) Combined (M,T) Combined (M,P) 1 Moment(Mx) 0.2936 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Shear(Vy) - 0.0391 Pcr (CripplingZ N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) N/A Act./All. 0.0142 Act. /AII. N/A Act. /AII. N/A Act. /AII. N/A X/L 1.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L N/A 2 Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Shear(Vy) - 0.2878 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) N/A Act. /AII. 0.5879 Act. /All. N/A Act. /AII. N/A Act./All. N/A X/L 1.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L N/A 3 Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Shear(Vy) 0.3864 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) - 0.4520 Act. /AII. 0.5908 Act. /AII. N/A Act. /AII. N/A Act./All. 0.6466 X/L 0.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L 0.0000 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 2/4 6'e Company: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila Project Ref #: 156 -185 Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW Parapet studs City: Grand Rapids / MI Date: Feb 23 10 Zip Code: 49503 User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Connection Data: 1 Clip Data Clip Position Clip @ joint 2 Clip Type Screws - - None _ N/A � � F1 Allowable (kips) N/A -� SF3 F2 Allowable (kips) N/A F3 Allowable (kips) N/A M1 Allowable ( kips.in) N/A Support Reactions F1 (kips) 0.0000 F2 (kips) - 0.0907 F3 (kips) 0.0000 M1 (kips.in) 0.0000 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio N/A Base Material Material N/A Concrete Compressive Strength (ksi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation N/A Quantity N/A Min. Penetration (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) N/A Fastener Design Load Allowable Shear (kips) N/A Allowable Tension (kips) N/A Actual Shear (kips) N/A Actual Tension (kips) N/A Combined Forces (Act. / All.) N/A Tensile Strength Reduction Factor N/A Shear Strength Reduction Factor N/A 2 Clip Data Clip Position Clip @ joint 3 Clip Type Screws None N/A F1 Allowable (kips) N/A jF3 F2 Allowable (kips) N/A F3 Allowable (kips) N/A M1 Allowable (kips.in) N/A Support Reactions F1 (kips) 0.0000 F2 (kips) - 0.6741 F3 (kips) 0.4520 M1 (kips.in) 0.0000 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio N/A Base Material Material N/A Concrete Compressive Strength (ksi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation N/A Quantity N/A Min. Penetration (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) N/A Allowable Shear (kips) N/A ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 3/4 gr7 Company: Structural Associates Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW City: Grand Rapids / MI Zip Code: 49503 TRU - Tukwila Parapet studs User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 Allowable Tension (kips) Fastener Actual Shear (kips) Design Load Actual Tension (kips) Combined Forces (Act. / AII.) Tensile Strength Reduction Factor Shear Strength Reduction Factor N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A o When more than one load affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the Interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. o Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. Bridging Data: 1 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold - Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.1229663 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (1 Screw) 0.18 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.075 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.1229663 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0 2 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold - Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.1229663 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (1 Screw) 0.18 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.075 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.1229663 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0 3 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold- Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.2247316 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0.1084776 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (3 Screw) Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.34 Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.36 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.2247316 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0.0090398 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 4/4 Company: Address: City: Zip Code: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila 62 Commerce Ave. SW Grand Rapids / MI 49503 User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Parapet studs min wind Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 451.99 Ibs 6.75 ft 10.83 ft .1.25 ft Dead Load • 6.75 ft 10.83 ft 1.25 ft Live Load Gross Section Properties: Ix (major) (in4) 4.7985 Sx (major) (in3) 1.5995 rx (major) (in) 2.2294 ly (minor) (in4) 0.2832 Sy (minor) (in3), 0.2333 ry (minor) (in) 0.5416 Area (in2) 0.9655 Xo (in) - 0.9968 J x 1000 (in4) 3.3286 Cw (in 6) 2.1532 Ro (in) 2.5014 Weight (lb/ft) 3.2856 Wall Information: 28.62 psf 7.83 psf 7.83 psf 6.75 ft 10.83 ft 1.25 ft Wind Load 1.-`- -4:6259' 0.1525 0.5000 600S162- 97mi1, 33 ksi Material Properties: Design Code IBC 2006 w /AISI -NAS 2001/04 Supp. Design Method ASD Wall Height (ft) 18.833 Stud Spacing (in) 24 Allowable HI. Deflection L / 240 Dead Loads (Ibs /ft) 0 Wall Own Weight(pst) 12 Max. Bridging Spacing(ft) 4 Torsional Bracing Full Design Options: Fy (ksi) 33 Fu (ksi) 45 E (ksi) 29500 G (ksi) 11300 Span Loads: K 6.75 ft 10.83 ft •1.25ft Seismic Load Uniform Dead Load: Span Load value (Ibs /ft) Reactions: Span Wind Load (pst) Joint Rx (kips) Ry (kips) Rm (kips.in) 1 7.8300 2 0.0148 0.0000 0.0000 2 7.8300 3 - 0.5904 0.4520 0.0000 3 28.6200 ° Back To Back Configuration Not Considered °Fastener Spacing (in) N/A ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered Note:Applied Members Loads are calculated from Wall Loads Joint Supports: Joint Loads: Joint Support Type 1 Unsupported 2 Roller # Load Case Axial (Ibs) Lateral (Ibs) M (Ibs.ft) 4 Dead Load 451.992 0 0 ASI Steel Smart System Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 1/4 Company: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila Project Ref #: 156 -185 Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW Parapet studs min wind City: Grand Rapids / MI User Defined Curtain Wall La out Date: Feb 23 10 Zip Code: 49503 y 3 Hinged 4 Unsupported Member Loads: # Load Case _ Axial Lateral Moment X/L 1 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 15.66 Ibs /ft 0.0 lbs.ft Uniform 2 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 15.66 Ibs /ft 0.0 lbs.ft Uniform 3 Wind Load 0.0 Ibs /ft 57.24 Ibs /ft 0.0 Ibs.ft Uniform Load Combination Factors: # Dead Live Wind Seismic Used For 1 1 0 0 0 Strength 2 1 1 0 0 Strength Effective Section Properties: 3 4 1 1 0 0.75 1 0.75 0 0 Strength Strength Member Value 1 Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.8645 5 1 0.75 0 0.525 Strength Sxe (in3) Ixe(in4) 1.5995 4.7985 6 1 0 0 0.7 Strength 7 0 0 1 0 Deflection 2 Ae(Comp.) (in2) 0.7546 8 0 0 0 0.7 Deflection Sxe (in3) 1.5995 Capacity Check: Ixe(in4) 4.7985 Ae(Comp.) (in2) Sxe (in3) 0.7546 1.5995 Member Moment (kips.in) Shear (kips) Tension (kips) Compression (kips) HL Deflection (in) Crippling (kips) 3 Ixe(in4) 4.7985 1 Actual 0.1468 0.0196 N/A N/A 0.0240 N/A Allowable 38.3805 6.9114 18.4649 15.2834 0.1250 N/A Act. /All. 0.0038 0.0028 N/A N/A 0.1920 N/A 2 Actual 15.6480 0.1910 N/A N/A 0.0879 N/A Allowable 38.3805 2.5117 15.5473 9.5302 0.5417 N/A Act. /AII. 0.4077 0.0760 N/A N/A 0.1623 N/A 3 Actual 15.6480 0.3387 N/A 0.4520 0.5028 N/A Allowable 38.3805 2.5117 15.5473 9.5302 0.6750 N/A Act. /AII. 0.4077 0.1348 N/A 0.0474 0.7449 N/A Design for Web Crippling is Disabled Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Member Combined (M,V) Combined (M,Pcr) Combined (M,T) Combined (M,P) 1 Moment(Mx) 0.1468 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Shear(Vy) - 0.0196 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) N/A Act. /All. 0.0048 Act. /AII. N/A Act./All. N/A Act. /AII. N/A X/L 1.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L N/A 2 Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Shear(Vy) - 0.2041 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) N/A Act./All. 0.4088 Act./All. N/A Act. /AII. N/A Act. /AII. N/A X/L 1.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L N/A 3 Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) N/A Moment(Mx) 15.6480 Shear(Vy) 0.3864 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension (T) N/A Comp. (P) - 0.4520 Act. /AII. 0.4115 Act. /All. N/A Act. /AII. N/A Act. /AII. 0.4467 X/L 0.0000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L 0.0000 ASI Steel Smart System Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 2/4 Company: Structural Associates TRU - Tukwila Project Ref #: 156 -185 Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW Parapet studs min wind City: Grand Rapids / MI Date: Feb 23 10 Zip Code: 49503 User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Connection Data: / Clip Data Clip Position Clip @ joint 2 Clip Type None Screws N/A //��,,, r t. mi F1 Allowable (kips) N/A jF3 F2 Allowable (kips) N/A F3 Allowable (kips) N/A M1 Allowable (kips.in) N/A Support Reactions F1 (kips) 0.0000 F2 (kips) 0.0148 F3 (kips) 0.0000 M1 (kips.in) 0.0000 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio N/A Base Material Material N/A Concrete Compressive Strength (ksi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation N/A Quantity N/A Min. Penetration (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) N/A Fastener Design Load Allowable Shear (kips) N/A Allowable Tension (kips) N/A Actual Shear (kips) N/A Actual Tension (kips) N/A Combined Forces (Act. / All.) N/A Tensile Strength Reduction Factor N/A Shear Strength Reduction Factor N/A 2 Clip Data Clip Position Clip @ joint 3 Clip Type None Screws N/A .%04 `r �NI F1 Allowable (kips) N/A -1 1F3 F2 Allowable (kips) N/A F3 Allowable (kips) N/A M1 Allowable (kips.in) N/A Support Reactions F1 (kips) 0.0000 F2 (kips) - 0.5904 F3 (kips) 0.4520 M1 (kips.in) 0.0000 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio N/A Base Material Material N/A Concrete Compressive Strength (ksi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation N/A Quantity N/A Min. Penetration (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) N/A Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) N/A Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) N/A Allowable Shear (kips) N/A ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 3/4 elf Company: Structural Associates Address: 62 Commerce Ave. SW City: Grand Rapids / MI Zip Code: 49503 TRU - Tukwila Parapet studs min wind User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Project Ref #: 156 -185 Date: Feb 23 10 Fastener Design Load Allowable Tension (kips) Actual Shear (kips) Actual Tension (kips) Combined Forces (Act. / All.) Tensile Strength - Reduction Factor Shear Strength Reduction Factor N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A o When more than one Toad affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. o Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. Bridging Data: 1 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold - Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.05974554 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (1 Screw) Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.18 Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.075 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.05974554 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0 2 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold - Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.05974554 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (1 Screw) 0.18 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.075 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.05974554 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0 3 Bridging Member Bridge Type Cold - Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 4 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 24 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Allowable Compression(F1)(kips) 0.6699449 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.2183802 Actual Compression(F1)(kips) 0.1084776 Clip Data Clip Type BridgeClip (3 Screw) 0.34 Allowable Moment(M1)(kips.in) Allowable Tension(F1)(kips) 0.36 Actual Moment(M1)(kips.in) 0.2183802 Actual Tension(F1)(kips) 0.0090398 ASI Steel Smart System© Version 5.0(SP 2) Feb 23 10 Page 4/4 • sac structural associates inc. 11 Lof..is a h W Cis et, P _I Page No. of Job Name Tvlew,'f4 Job No. k 'S6 - 1435- Date 1/-L4 / 10 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 (616) 457-8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 fax (616) 457-8107 Name /44 kit sL IA P ail = Lust" F') Si = 3g5- 14 pi USi + 0,olr 3. I26,j1 9°1 ±- G A q3 ??ti S_4 LoaIS 0n SG.," 0 C. .,. y . . J P= 2z?iliPr $p... SQ.c - 1^0 y` f3� 1-1. S p 5L 20 „IF OL- 20rtt SL D;= 0.001_ +0,_p' Current Date: 2/25/2010 11:14 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 -185) \156 -165 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ • • DL =7.71 [Kip] f. . y =16.28 [Kip] ty =4.12 ty=4.84 [Kip] ¶y =16.58 [Kip] try =3.43 [Kip] ,Fy =2.78 [Kip] f-- - - --ZVy =0.26 [Kip] =16.2 [Kip] �+ y -1.3 [Kip] rY =8.71 [Kip] Y � X Current Date: 2/25/2010 11:13 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ • • DL + SL --j %' r tFy =6.4 [Kip] try =9.41 [Kip]..------ try =7.94 [Kip] y =17.33 [Kip] II y =30.75 [Kip] ?y =17.78 [Kip] ?y =6.98 [Kip] 1 DZI f� y�Fy =0.49 [Kip] y =30.7 [Kip] y=1.33 [Kip] IFy =8.87 [Kip] Y A x r� Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:35 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ • • Y A X N n Be AllPeys. Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:36 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 -185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ • • 25 32 olo 12 35 ew.6er Y e x -+, Bellew Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:35 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ • • 3 Ndq WV e. * • • • ent(ey . C7 Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:35 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr \156 -185 no cols.etz\ Geometry data GLOSSARY Cb22, Cb33 : Moment gradient coefficients Cm22, Cm33 : Coefficients applied to bending term in interaction formula dO : Tapered member section depth at J end of member DJX : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis X DJY : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis Y DJZ : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis Z DKX : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis X DKY : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis Y DKZ : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis Z dL : Tapered member section depth at K end of member Ig factor : Inertia reduction factor (Effective Inertia/Gross Inertia) for reinforced concrete members K22 : Effective length factor about axis 2 K33 : Effective length factor about axis 3 L22 : Member length for calculation of axial capacity L33 : Member length for calculation of axial capacity LB pos : Lateral unbraced length of the compression flange in the positive side of local axis 2 LB neg : Lateral unbraced length of the compression flange in the negative side of local axis 2 RX : Rotation about X RY : Rotation about Y RZ : Rotation about Z TO : 1 = Tension only member 0 = Normal member TX : Translation in X TY : Translation in Y TZ : Translation in Z Nodes Node X Y Z Rigid Floor [ft] [ft] [ft] 1 0.00 13.00 - 1.0833 0 3 0.00 13.00 - 9.0833 0 5 24.7175 25.1667 - 2.5833 0 6 0.7917 25.1667 - 2.5833 0 7 24.7175 25.1667 0.00 0 8 24.7175 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 10 39.7175 25.1667 0.00 0 13 86.1242 25.1667 0.00 0 14 44.7175 25.1667 0.00 0 15 81.1242 25.1667 0.00 0 16 101.1237 25.1667 0.00 0 18 101.1237 13.00 0.00 0 19 101.1237 13.00 - 9.0833 0 22 6.8226 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 23 44.8228 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 26 46.1979 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 27 82.8228 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 30 0.00 13.00 - 2.5833 0 32 70.1874 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 33 57.5832 25.1667 - 9.3125 0 Pagel • • • Restraints Node TX TY TZ RX RY RZ 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -3 . 1 1 1. 0 0 0 6 0 1 1 0 0 0 7 0 1 1 0 0 0 10 1 1 1 0 0 0 13 0 1 1 0 0 0 16 0 1 1 0 0 0 18 1 1 0 0 0 0 19 1 1 1 0 0 0 22 0 1 1 0 0 0 23 1 1 1 0 0 0 27 0 1 1 0 0 0 30 1 1 0 0 0 0 32 0 1 1 0 0 0 33 0 1 1 0 0 0 Members Member NJ NK Description Section Material d0 dL Ig factor [in] [in] 6 5 7 W 21X44 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 5 8 W 21X44 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 7 10 W 18X35 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 12 10 14 W 18X35 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 13 13 15 W 18X35 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 14 14 15 W 18X60 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 16 13 16 W 18X35 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 19 18 19 W 14X22 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 24 22 8 W 27X84 A36 0.00 0.00 0.00 25 8 23 W 27X84 A36 0.00 0.00 0.00 26 23 26 W 27X84 A36 0.00 0.00 0.00 29 26 33 W 16X40 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 30 1 30 W 14X22 A36 0.00 0.00 0.00 31 30 3 W 14X22 A36 0.00 0.00 0.00 32 6 5 W 16X26 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 34 32 27 W 16X40 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 35 33 32 W 16X40 A992 Gr50 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hinges Node -J Node -K Member M33 M22 V3 V2 M33 M22 V3 V2 TOR AXL Axial rigidity 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Full 14 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Full 29 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Full 35 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Full • • lien ey.. Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:39 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ Analysis Results - Reactions Ma Direction of positive forces and moments Forces Kid] Moments FKip *in' Node FX FY FZ MX MY MZ Condition DC1 =DL 3 0.00000 - 3.01941 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 6 0.00000 4.84021 0.00294 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 7 0.00000 3.81948 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 10 - 0.03511 16.53016 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 13 0.00000 16.53702 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16 0.00000 0.10383 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 18 0.00000 8.70855 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 19 0.00000 1.30379 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 22 0.00000 4.20591 0.00520 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 23 0.03511 5.82599 - 0.00814 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 27 0.00000 1.04812 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 30 0.00000 16.57535 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 32 0.00000 2.09365 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 33 0.00000 1.98996 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 SUM 0.00000 80.56262 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 Condition DC2 =DL +SL 3 0.00000 - 3.24602 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 6 0.00000 7.93594 0.00576 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 7 0.00000 6.29568 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 10 - 0.06900 31.00306 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 13 0.00000 31.01472 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16 0.00000 0.33422 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 18 0.00000 8.86647 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 19 0.00000 1.32588 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 22 0.00000 9.60202 0.01023 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 23 0.06900 12.45177 - 0.01600 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 27 0.00000 2.49487 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 30 0.00000 17.78397 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 32 0.00000 4.98359 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 33 0.00000 4.73676 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 • SUM 0.00000 135.58291 0.00000 0.00000 Pagel 0.00000 0.00000 • ent e ClL Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:36 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr \156 -185 no cols.etz\ Load data GLOSSARY Comb : Indicates if load condition is a load combination Load conditions Condition Description Comb. Category DL Dead Load No DL SL Snow Load No SNOW WL Wind Load No WIND DC1 DL Yes DC2 DL +SL Yes DC3 0.6DL +WL Yes Load on nodes • Condition Node FX FY FZ MX MY MZ [Kip] [Kip] [Kip] [Kip *in] [Kip *in] [Kip *in] DL SL 1 1 0.00 - 13.379 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.982 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Distributed force on members Condition Member Dirt Val1 [Lb /ft] Val2 Dist' % Dist2 % [Lb /ft] [ft] [ft] DL 10 Y - 389.00 - 389.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 12 Y - 389.00 - 389.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 13 Y - 389.00 - 389.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 14 Y - 389.00 - 389.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 16 Y - 389.00 - 389.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 24 Y -84.00 -84.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 25 Y - 126.00 - 126.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 26 Y - 126.00 - 126.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 29 Y - 126.00 - 126.00 0.00 No 11.3853 No 32 Y - 379.00 - 379.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 34 Y - 126.00 - 126.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 35 Y - 126.00 - 126.00 0.00 No 12.6042 No Pagel • III SL 10 Y - 385.00 - 385.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 12 Y - 385.00 - 385.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 13 Y - 385.00 - 385.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 14 Y - 385.00 - 385.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 16 Y - 385.00 - 385.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 24 Y - 276.00 - 276.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 25 Y - 229.00 - 229.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 26 Y - 229.00 - 229.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 29 Y - 229.00. - 229.00 0.00 No 11.3853 - No 32 Y - 259.00 - 259.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 34 Y - 229.00 - 229.00 0.00 No 100.00 Yes 35 Y - 229.00 - 229.00 0.00 No 12.6042 No Concentrated forces on members Condition Member Dirt Valuel Dist1 [Kip] [ft] DL 19 Y -9.813 1.1146 No SL 19 Y -0.18 1.1146 No 411 Self weight multipliers for load conditions Self weight multiplier Condition Description Comb. MuItX MultY MuItZ DL Dead Load No 0.00 -1.00 0.00 SL Snow Load No 0.00 0.00 0.00 WL Wind Load No 0.00 0.00 0.00 DC1 DL Yes 0.00 0.00 0.00 DC2 DL +SL Yes 0.00 0.00 0.00 DC3 0.6DL +WL Yes 0.00 0.00 0.00 Earthquake (Dynamic analysis only) Condition a/g Ang. Damp. [Deg] [%] DL 0.00 0.00 0.00 SL 0.00 0.00 0.00 WL 0.00 0.00 0.00 DC1 0.00 0.00 0.00 DC2 0.00 0.00 0.00 • DC3 0.00 0.00 0.00 • • • Page3 CIL • • • entLe I° Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:37 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 - 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 no cols.etz\ Stool Code Chock Report: Concise Members: Hot - rolled Design code: AISC 360 -05 ASD Member 6 Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : W 21X44 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.50 [in] 20.70 [in] 0.95 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.45 [in] 0.35 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 13.00 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 843.00 20.70 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 843.00 20.70 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 8.05 1.26 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 8.05 1.26 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.77 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 2110.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [n3] 81.60 6.37 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [n3] 95.40 10.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 95.40 10.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 8.15 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.85 7.25 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1M3] 6.58E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Pagel • • Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 2.58 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 2.58 Effective length factor (K) 1.00 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 2.58 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 2.58 2.58 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 2.58 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint No Tension field action No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KL/r) 24.57 (Sec. 01) — 24.57 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE n= 1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 Ratio 0.06 Capacity : 2856.29 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : 182.67 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 4770.00 (Sec. F) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Page2 ciq c �5 Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 305.15 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -2.14 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 509.60 (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 105.09 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -0.07 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( 0= 1.50) Ratio 0.04 Capacity 145.00 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -5.95 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION Q= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 389.22 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION Q= 1.67) Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 372.42 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.05 Capacity 27.32 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand -1.39 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION '1 Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.07 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.09 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 Page3 • • • CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio Ctrl Eq. 0.09 DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 Member 7 Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : W 21X44 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.50 [in] 20.70 [in] 0.95 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.45 [in] 0.35 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 13.00 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 843.00 20.70 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 843.00 20.70 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 8.05 1.26 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 8.05 1.26 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.77 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 2110.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 81.60 6.37 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 95.40 10.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 95.40 10.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 8.15 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.85 7.25 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 11n3] 6.58E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kiprn2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Page4 c ((,e • • Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsionandiateral- torsional buckling Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action [ft] 6.73 [ft] 6.73 1.00 1.00 [ft] 6.73 [ft] 6.73 [ft] 6.73 No No 1.00 6.73 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression 63.99 Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) — 63.99 (Sec. D1) (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.06 Capacity : 2856.29 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 182.61 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mph [Kip *in] 4770.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn] [Kip *in] 4770.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn] — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.02 Capacity : 305.15 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 6.06 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mt)] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' [Kip *in] 509.60 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Page5 c�7 • • • Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 105.09 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -0.07 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( S2 =1.50) Ratio 0.02 - Capacity : 145.00 [Kip] Reference Demand -2.41 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) rf Tension : (Sec. G) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 389.22 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.01 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression 1 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 288.51 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.02 Capacity 27.32 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.65 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION ¢ Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.07 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.04 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.07 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page6 C 18 Member Design status 10 OK • PROPERTIES Section : W 18X35 • • Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.00 [in] 17.70 [in] 0.83 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.43 [in] 0.30 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 10.30 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 510.00 15.30 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 510.00 15.30 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 7.04 1.22 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 7.04 1.22 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.51 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1140.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [n3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 66.50 8.06 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 66.50 8.06 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 7.14 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.10 5.31 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1M3] 9.19E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 15.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 15.00 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 15.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 15.00 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 15.00 Pagel 1.00 15.00 019' • • • Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification _ _ _ Unit .. _ Value Ctrl EQ _ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) 147.69 (Sec. D1) 147.69 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2= 1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 Ratio 0.52 Capacity : 1991.02 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : - 1031.08 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 241.32 [Kip *in] Reference Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — 403.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 91.62 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( C2= 1.501 Page8 CP Ratio 0.11 Capacity : 106.20 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -11.79 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% • DESIGN FOR TENSION 52 =1.67) • • Tension 1 Ratio . - __ 0.00 Capacity : 308.38 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression J Ratio 0.00 Capacity 70.98 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -0.07 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 19.55 [Kip'in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip'in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.52 CM Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.11 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 12 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 18X35 Page9 czf • • Width _(bf) _ ... Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.00 [in] 17.70 [in] 0.83 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.43 [in] 0.30 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 10.30 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (1) [in4] 510.00 15.30 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 510.00 15.30 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 7.04 1.22 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (f) [in] 7.04 1.22 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.51 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1140.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 66.50 8.06 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [1n3] 66.50 8.06 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 7.14 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.10 5.31 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1M3] 9.19E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kipfin2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kipfin2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kipfin2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 5.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 5.00 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 5.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 5.00 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 5.00 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 5.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS Page10 c 2Z • • • Verification Unit . Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) 49.23 (Sec. D1) 49.23 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES-2= 1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 Ratio 0.52 Capacity : 1991.02 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : - 1031.69 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO [Kipin] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 241.32 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — 403.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR i/ Shear parallel to maior axis. V3 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 91.62 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( S2= 1.501 Ratio 0.18 Capacity : 106.20 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 19.22 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION 52 =1.67) if Tension Pagell c23 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.38 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) d' Compression Ratio - : -- -0.00 Capacity : 258.31 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 52 =1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 19.55 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.18 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 13 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 18X35 rn f F1 .1. TJttt;3 7 1=-` 'vL. 41ni§ p" t w 4 Page12 • • • Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Range thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.00 [in] 17.70 [in] 0.83 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.43 [in] 0.30 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [n2] 1 0.30. Moment of Inertia (local axes) (1) [in4] 510.00 15.30 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [1n4] 510.00 15.30 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 7.04 1.22 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 7.04 1.22 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.51 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1140.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) ( S'sup) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 57.60 5.12 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 66.50 8.06 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [n3] 66.50 8.06 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 7.14 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.10 5.31 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 9.19E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kipfin2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip/in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 5.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 5.00 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 5.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 5.00 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 5.00 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint No Tension field action No 1.00 5.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (L/r) 49.23 (Sec. D1) Page13 CZS • • • Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KL/r) 49.23 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.52 Capacity : 1991.02 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : - 1031.69 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MD [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 241.32 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mo ) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — 403.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR v� Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 91.62 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V21 S2= 1.501 Ratio 0.18 Capacity • 106.20 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 19.22 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 308.38 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) 11, Pagel4 C Z (9 • • • Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 258.31 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION )= 1.67) yf - Torsion - Ratio 0.00 Capacity 19.55 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip'in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.18 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO �I Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 14 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 18X60 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 7.56 [in] 18.20 [in] 1.10 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.70 [in] 0.42 [in] Pagel5 cC • • Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 17.60 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 984.00 50.10 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 984.00 50.10 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 7.48 1.69 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 7.48 1.69 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 2.17 . - -... Warping constant - of.the section (Cw) [in6] 3850.00 - Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 108.00 13.30 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 108.00 13.30 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 108.00 13.30 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 108.00 13.30 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 123.00 20.60 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 123.00 20.60 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 7.67 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 10.51 7.55 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 3.30E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip/in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip/in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 36.41 [ft] 36.41 - 1.00 1.00 [ft] 36.41 [ft] 36.41 [ft] 36.41 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Yes Tension field action No 1.00 36.41 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) - 258.94 (Sec. D1) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) - 258.94 (Sec. E2) Slenderness greater than 200: Not recommended by the AISC Manual DESIGN CHECKS Page16 cZ$ • • DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 Ratio 0.45 Capacity : 3682.63 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : 1657.17 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 50.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 6150.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 616.77 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' [Kip *in] 1030.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR tI Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 188.80 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( 52 =1.501 Ratio 0.10 Capacity : 151.00 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -15.17 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 526.95 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) J Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity 39.45 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Page17 C2e( • Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 54.51 [Kip •in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value _ Ratio 0.45 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.10 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.45 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member 16 • Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : W 18X35 - 44...f ,--.4 an++1#4 YY Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 6.00 [in] 17.70 [in] 0.83 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.43 [in] 0.30 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [n2] 10.30 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 510.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 510.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 7.04 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 7.04 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.51 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1140.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 57.60 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 57.60 Pagel8 Minor axis 15.30 15.30 0.00 1.22 1.22 0.00 5.12 5.12 CV) • • • Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [n3] 57.60 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 57.60 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 66.50 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') - [in3] 66.50 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 7.14 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 5.10 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 9.19E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /n2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip/iin2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA 5.12 5.12 8.06 8.06 5.31 Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 15.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 15.00 Effective length factor (K) 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 15.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 15.00 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 15.00 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 15.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KL/r) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference — 147.68 (Sec. D1) 147.68 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE n= )= 1.67) Bending about maior axis. M33 Ratio 0.52 Capacity : 1991.02 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : - 1031.69 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Pagel9 • Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3325.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange Yielding (TFY Mn) _N /A - - - -(Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 241.32 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' 403.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR rj Shear parallel to malor axis. V3 ( )= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 91.62 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( n= 1.50) Ratio 0.11 Capacity : 106.20 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 11.80 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) d! Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.38 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION Q= 1.67) It Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity 70.98 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION n= 1.67) `f Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 19.55 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Page20 ��2 • • • Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio • -._ 0.11 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO d" Ratio 0.52 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 19 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 14X22 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 5.00 [in] 13.70 [in] 0.74 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.34 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 6.49 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 199.00 7.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 199.00 7.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 5.54 1.04 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 5.54 1.04 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.21 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 314.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 33.20 4.39 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 33.20 4.39 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 5.63 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 3.35 3.15 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 1.87E +00 Page21 G 3� • • • Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kiprn2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action [ft] 9.08 [ft] 9.08 — 1.00 — 1.00 [ft] 9.08 [ft] 9.08 [ft] 9.08 No No 1.00 9.08 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference 104.95 (Sec. D1) — 104.95 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2= 1.67) Bending about maior axis. M33 Ratio 0.12 Capacity : 994.01 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : 118.14 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 12.50% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mo) [Kip *in] 1660.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 1660.00 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Page22 c3t{ • • • Ratio 0.00 Capacity 131.44 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MP) [Kip *in] 219.50 (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn'. — N /A_. - (Sec. F) _ _ DESIGN FOR SHEAR t/ Shear parallel to maior axis. V3 ( 0=1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 60.18 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( 0= 1.501 Ratio 0.14 Capacity 63.00 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 8.87 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) �I Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity • 194.31 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION 0 =1.67) Compression 1, Ratio 0.00 Capacity 86.84 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. .: DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) d Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 9.63 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION 1l� Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.12 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 12.50% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.14 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 Page23 cis • • • CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO 1 Ratio 0.14 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Sec. G) Member Design status 24 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 27X84 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 10.00 [in] 26.70 [in] 1.24 [in] 1.06 [in] 0.64 [in] 0.46 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 24.80 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 10.72 2.07 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 10.72 2.07 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 2.81 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [1n6] 17900.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [n3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 244.00 33.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 244.00 33.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 10.92 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 12.80 12.28 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [111n3] 2.47E -01 Material : A36 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 36.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip/in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11507.94 DESIGN CRITERIA Page24 • • Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 17.89 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 17.89 Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling — 1.00 1.00 [ft] 17.89 [ft] 17.89 [ft] ._ 17.89 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Yes Tension field action No 1.00 17.89 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (L/r) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KL/r) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference 103.87 (Sec. D1) — 103.87 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.23 Capacity : 5259.88 [Kip *in] Reference Demand : 1207.84 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mol Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' Tension flange yielding (TFY Mnl [Kip *in] 8784.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 715.69 [Kip *inj Reference Demand -2.20 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' [Kip *in] 1195.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Page25 C31 • Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( 52= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity • 165.56 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.01 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.50) Ratio - - : - -0.05 Capacity : 176.83 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 9.60 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 534.61 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 302.95 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 52 =1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 52.41 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand -0.14 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION yt Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.23 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.06 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio Ctrl Eq. 0.23 DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page26 cs8 Member Design status 25 OK • PROPERTIES Section : W 27X84 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 10.00 [in] 26.70 [in] 1.24 [in] 1.06 [in] 0.64 [in] 0.46 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 24.80 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J) [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 10.72 2.07 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 10.72 2.07 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 2.81 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 17900.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 244.00 33.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 244.00 33.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 10.92 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 12.80 12.28 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [111n3] 2.47E -01 Material : A36 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip/in2] 36.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip/in2] 11507.94 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 20.11 [ft] 20.11 1.00 1.00 [ft] 20.11 [ft] 20.11 [ft] 20.11 Page27 1.00 20.11 • • Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Yes Tension field action No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification .- Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (L/r) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KL/r) Unit Value - -- Ctrl -EQ Reference — 116.70 (Sec. D1) 116.70 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2= 1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 1 Ratio 0.23 Capacity : 5259.88 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : 1206.99 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 8784.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 715.69 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 3.86 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — 1195.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 165.56 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.02 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2 =1.50) Page28 Ratio 0.05 Capacity : 176.83 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -9.60 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% • DESIGN FOR TENSION 52 =1.67) 1 Tension - Ratio - - 0.00 - Capacity : 534.61 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.07 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression 1 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 261.02 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 52 =1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 52.41 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand -0.21 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION 1 Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.23 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.06 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.23 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status . 26 . OK PROPERTIES Section : W 27X84 • Page29 CLU • • Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 10.00 [in] 26.70 [in] 1.24 [in] 1.06 [in] 0.64 [in] 0.46 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 24.80 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 2850.00 106.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 10.72 2.07 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 10.72 2.07 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 2.81 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [1n6] 17900.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 213.00 21.20 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 244.00 33.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [n3] 244.00 33.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 10.92 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 12.80 12.28 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 2.47E -01 Material : A36 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /1n2] 36.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11507.94 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 1.38 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 1.38 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 1.38 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 1.38 1.38 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 1.38 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Page30 c4Z • Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) 7.98 (Sec. D1) 7.98 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 5259.88 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -42.08 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mph [Kip *in] 8784.00 (Sec. F) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 715.69 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand • 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' 1195.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR r% Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( Q= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 165.56 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 0 =1.50) Ratio 0.02 Capacity : 176.83 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 2.85 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Page31 ey3 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 534.61 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression -Ratio - 0.00 — Capacity . 532.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion 1 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 52.41 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION 11 Combined axial and flexure Interaction value Ratio 0.01 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.02 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.02 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 Member Design status 29 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 16X40 • Page32 • • • Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 7.00 [in] 16.00 [in] 0.91 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.51 [in] 0.31 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag).. _ [in2] - 11.80. Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 518.00 28.90 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I) [in4] 518.00 28.90 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J) [n] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [n] 6.63 1.56 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [n] 6.63 1.56 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [n4] 0.79 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1730.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) ( S'sup) [n3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 73.00 12.70 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 73.00 12.70 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 6.81 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 7.07 4.88 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 6.76E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 11.39 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 11.39 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 11.39 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 11.39 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 11.39 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 11.39 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) - 87.30 (Sec. D1) Page33 • • • Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KL/r) 87.30 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.04 Capacity : 1950.57 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 76.78 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 50.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO [Kip *in] 3650.00 (Sec. F) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3257.44 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckfinp (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 380.24 [Kip *in] Reference Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MD) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' 635.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR yr Shear parallel to major axis, V3 j S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 127.01 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.50) Ratio 0.02 Capacity 97.60 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 2.25 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 353.29 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) ` Page34 • • Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 202.36 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 0= 1.67) r% - Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 26.59 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION lI Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.04 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.02 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.04 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 30 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 14X22 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 5.00 [in] 13.70 [in] 0.74 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.34 [in] 0.23 [in] Page35 Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 6.49 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 199.00 7.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 199.00 7.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 5.54 1.04 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 5.54 1.04 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.21 Warping constant of_the.section_(Cw)_ _ [in6] 314.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [n3] 29.00 2.80 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 33.20 4.39 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 33.20 4.39 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 5.63 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 3.35 3.15 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 1.87E +00 Material : A36 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 36.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11507.94 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 1.50 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 1.50 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 1.50 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 1.50 1.50 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 1.50 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint No Tension field action No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) 17.33 (Sec. D1) 17.33 (Sec. E2) • DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE SZ =1.67) Page36 • • • Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.36 Capacity : 715.69 [Kip *in] Demand : - 258.80 [Kip *in] Reference Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mr)) [Kip in] 1195.20 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 94.63 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO [Kip *in] 158.04 (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 43.33 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.50) Ratio 0.32 Capacity 45.36 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -14.39 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) ✓ Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 139.90 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION Q =1.67) ✓ Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 137.71 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION n= 1.67) yf Torsion Page37 of( Ratio 0.00 Capacity 6.93 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% • INTERACTION t% Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio - -. -- - 0.36 -- -- Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.32 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.36 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 31 OK III PROPERTIES Section : W 14X22 • Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 5.00 [in] 13.70 [in] 0.74 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.34 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 6.49 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 199.00 7.00 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 199.00 7.00 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 5.54 1.04 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 5.54 1.04 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.21 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 314.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) ( S'sup) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 29.00 2.80 Page38 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 33.20 4.39 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 33.20 4.39 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 5.63 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 3.35 3.15 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 1.87E +00 Material : A36 Properties .._ Unit - -Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip/1n2] 36.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /n2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /1n2] 11507.94 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 6.50 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 6.50 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 6.50 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 6.50 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 6.50 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 6.50 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (L/r) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KL/r) 75.10 (Sec. D1) 75.10 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 Ratio 0.36 Capacity : 715.69 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : - 258.80 [Kip *in) Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 1195.20 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 1195.20 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Page39 Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 94.63 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' 158.04 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 43.33 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.501 Ratio 0.07 Capacity 45.36 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 3.39 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) vI Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 139.90 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION 52 =1.67) d' Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 103.96 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) d Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 6.93 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION ►f Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.36 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page40 Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.07 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.36 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 32 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 16X26 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 5.50 [in] 15.70 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.75 [in] 0.35 [in] 0.25 [in] _Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 7.68 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 301.00 9.59 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 301.00 9.59 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 6.26 1.12 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 6.26 1.12 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.26 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 565.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 38.40 3.49 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 38.40 3.49 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 38.40 3.49 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 38.40 3.49 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 44.20 5.48 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 44.20 5.48 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 6.36 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 3.80 3.93 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 1.50E +00 Material : A992 Gr50 • Page41 c$3 • • • Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kipfin2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kipfin2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 23.93 [ft] 23.93 — 1.00 1.00 — 1.00 [ft] 23.93 [ft] 23.93 23.93 [ft] 23.93 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Yes Tension field action No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) — 256.93 (Sec. D1) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) — 256.93 (Sec. E2) Slenderness greater than 200: Not recommended by the AISC Manual DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.43 Capacity : 1323.35 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand : 569.11 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 50.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 2210.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Page42 • • • Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 164.07 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -1.65 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mpl Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' [Kip *in] 274.00 (Sec. F) N /A. ___..(Sec.F). DESIGN FOR SHEAR �I Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( 0 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 68.26 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.01 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 0= 1.672 Ratio 0.11 Capacity 70.60 [Kip] Reference Demand -7.95 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DESIGN FOR TENSION 0= 1.67) Tension : (Sec. G) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 229.94 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION 0= 1.67) �d Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity 17.49 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 0= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 12.00 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION ✓ Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.44 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.11 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 Page43 • • CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.44 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 34 OK PROPERTIES Section : W 16X40 Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 7.00 [in] 16.00 [in] 0.91 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.51 [in] 0.31 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [n2] 11.80 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [1n4] 518.00 28.90 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [n4] 518.00 28.90 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 6.63 1.56 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 6.63 1.56 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [n4] 0.79 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 1730.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [n3] 64.70 8.25 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) ( S'sup) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 73.00 12.70 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 73.00 12.70 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 6.81 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 7.07 4.88 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 6.76E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip/in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip/in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA • • Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 12.64 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 12.64 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 12.64 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 12.64 12.64 .Length- for_torsion and lateral- torsional buckling _ [ft] -_ -- - 12.64- Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) — 96.89 (Sec. D1) 96.89 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.05 Capacity : 1836.79 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 94.57 [Kip'in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 50.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 3650.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip "in] 3067.44 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 380.24 [Kip *in] Demand 0.00 [Kip'in] Reference : (Sec. F) Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MP] [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' 635.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) III DESIGN FOR SHEAR Page45 c51 • • • Shear parallel to malor axis, V3 ( 52 =1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 127.01 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.50) Ratio - 0.03 Capacity 97.60 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 2.49 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 353.29 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION n= 1.67) v► Compression Ratio 0.00 Capacity 177.85 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION n= 1.67) 1 Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 26.59 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.05 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.03 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.05 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page46 CSC Member Design status • PROPERTIES Section : W 16X40 35 OK Width (bf) Depth (d) Distance k (k) Distance k1 (k1) Flange thickness (tf) Web thickness (tw) 7.00 [in] 16.00 [in] 0.91 [in] 0.81 [in] 0.51 [in] 0.31 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 11.80 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [n4] 518.00 28.90 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 518.00 28.90 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 6.63 1.56 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 6.63 1.56 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 0.79 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [1n6] 1730.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 64.70 8.25 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 73.00 12.70 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 73.00 12.70 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 6.81 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 7.07 4.88 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/1n3] 6.76E -01 Material : A992 Gr50 Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip/in2] 50.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 65.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 12.60 [ft] 12.60 1.00 1.00 [ft] 12.60 [ft] 12.60 [ft] 12.60 Page47 1.00 12.60 • • • Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS _. _Verification _ Unit- Value -Ctrl EQ - - -- -- Reference Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (Ur) — 96.65 Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) — 96.65 (Sec. D1) (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 Ratio 0.05 Capacity : 1839.63 [Kip*in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 94.10 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 50.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MD) [Kip *in] 3650.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) [Kip *in] 3072.18 (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 380.24 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MD) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn' [Kip *in] 635.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( n=1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 127.01 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 5-2= 1.50) Page48 Ratio 0.03 Capacity 97.60 [Kip] Reference Demand -2.49 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. • DESIGN FOR TENSION Q= 1.67) • • Tension : (Sec. G) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio -- - - -- : -.- 0.00 -- - -- - Capacity 353.29 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION Q. 1.67) Compression if Ratio 0.00 Capacity 178.45 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand 0.00 [Kip] CM Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity 26.59 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.05 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined shear and torsion interaction value Ratio 0.03 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Ec. 4.9) DG 9 CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.05 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 50.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page49 CJ ( • • • C6Z Title : TRU Tukwila, WA Job # 156 -185 Dsgnr: Date: 1:39PM, 10 MAR 10 Description : Scope : Rev: 580002 User: KW -0602113, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Nov -2006 (c)1983 -2006 ENERCALC Engineering Software Steel Beam w/ Torsional Loads Page 1 156- 185.ecw:Calculatlons ■..:rw41.. uax "xax.��na,e rx^rm> en' a1MY -th }T: 1 *YCRL7I+11,11. fJngCYi: Description Roof beam w/ torsion General Information Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 UBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 Steel Section Beam Span Torsional End Fixity Bending End Fixity W16X40 12.75 ft Pin -Pin Pin -Pin Fy 50.00 ksi Load Duration Factor 1.00 Beam Wt. Added to Applied Loads Unbraced Length 12.75 ft Elastic Modulus 29,000.00 ksi Applied Loads Uniform Loads... #1 #2 or 1147.91111. Dead Load 0.126 Live Load 0.229 11wa+wwennveK...4111, cs.,wx.+m• Short Term Ecc. from Beam CL k/ft 3.500 in 0.175 k/ft 8.000 in Using: W16X40, Span = 12.75ft, Fy = 50.0ksi, End Fixity : Bending= Pinned - Pinned, Torsion= Pinned - Pinned Max Flange Bending Stress Allowable Flange Stress Ratio Max Flange Shear Stress Allowable Flange Stress Ratio 9.16 ksi 21.79 ksi 0.420 : 1 3.15 ksi 20.00 ksi 0.157 : 1 Max. Deflection Max. Rotation Beam OK 0.023 in 0.02196 rad Summary Analysis Flange Bend + Warp Allowable... Stress Ratio Flange Bend +Warp +Tors Web Bend + Warp Allowable... Stress Ratio Dead 1.80 ksi 21.79 ksi 0.082: 1 0.55 ksi 0.51 ksi 20.00 ksi 0.027: 1 Live 2.99 ksi 21.79 ksi 0.137 :1 0.97 ksi 0.82 ksi 20.00 ksi 0.049 : 1 DL + LL DL +LL +Short Term 4.78 ksi 9.16 ksi 21.79 ksi 21.79 ksi 0.220 : 1 0.420 : 1 21.79 ksi 3.15 ksi 1.32 ksi 2.42 ksi 20.00 ksi 20.00 ksi 0.076:1 0.157 : 1 Summary - Service Load Effects Moments Left Center Right Reactions Left Right Dead k -ft 3.37 k -ft k -ft 1.06 k 1.06 k Deflections 0.007 in ....X -Dist to maximum 6.37 ft Rotations 0.004 rad ....X -Dist to maximum 6.29 ft Live k -ft 4.65 k -ft k -ft 1.46 k 1.46 k 0.009 in 6.37 ft 0.007 rad 6.29 ft Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -2, K *Ur > Cc I Beam, Major Axis, (102,000 * Cb / Fy) ^.5 <= UrT <= (510,000 * Cb / Fy) ^.5 , Fb per Eq. F1-6 DL + LL k -ft 8.03 k -ft k -ft 2.52 k 2.52 k 0.016 in 6.37 ft 0.010 rad 6.29 ft DL +LL +Short Term k -ft 11.58 k -ft k -ft 3.63 k 3.63 k 0.023 in 6.37 ft 0.022 rad 6.29 ft Title : TRU Tukwila, WA Dsgnr: Description : Scope : c (03 Job # 156 -185 Date: 1:39PM, 10 MAR 10 Rev: 580002 User: KW -0602113, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Nov -2006 (c)1983 -2006 ENERCALC Engineering Software Steel Beam w/ Torsional Loads -.r sszxwer.�s�: cros- s.x- .aptsv^*.illnr+SIRRKO '.erirraawnne..v110,,, RIVE aIaMatret*,+c_ 411, re rAw.=mr.711014 n Page 2 156- 185.ecw:Calculati ons senauv.u.az:r rreca o..w...wv ae4 Description Roof beam w/ torsion Depth Web Thick Flange Width Flange Thick Area Rt • 16.010 in 0.305 in 6.995 in 0.505 in 11.80 in2 1.820 in Weight Ixx Sxx rxx Zx Iyy S yy ryy Zy 40.08 #/ft 518.000 in4 64.700 in3 6.630 in 73.000 in3 28.900 in4 8.250 in3 1.570 in 12.700 in3 Torsional Properties... J 0.790 in4 Cw 1,740.000 Sw 23.900 in4 Wno 27.100 in2 Qf 13.400 Qw 36.500 e . • Current Date: 3/10/2010 11:48 AM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 - 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 columns only.etz\ N 20 w 6 N21 N4 N 24 N 10 LID co N 5 N 11 N9 N 28 OD N 29 N 13 N 12 N 16 CO IN 18 N N 17 Y D X tr 1X9X9 210S SS TX9X9 2141S-35H tr TX9X9 2IbS SSH 8 £X8X8 2JOS SSH t tX9X9 21bS -SSH HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQ 6X6R X14S_SQ 6X1 4 enf ey° •Current Date: 3/10/2010 1:29 PM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 - 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr \156 -185 columns only.etz\ • • Geometry data GLOSSARY Cb22, Cb33 : Moment gradient coefficients Cm22, Cm33 : Coefficients applied to bending term in interaction formula dO : Tapered member section depth at J end of member DJX : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis X DJY : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis Y DJZ : Rigid end offset distance measured from J node in axis Z DKX : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis X DKY : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis Y DKZ : Rigid end offset distance measured from K node in axis Z dL : Tapered member section depth at K end of member Ig factor : Inertia reduction factor (Effective Inertia/Gross Inertia) for reinforced concrete members K22 : Effective length factor about axis 2 K33 : Effective length factor about axis 3 L22 : Member length for calculation of axial capacity L33 : Member length for calculation of axial capacity LB pos : Lateral unbraced length of the compression flange in the positive side of local axis 2 LB neg : Lateral unbraced length of the compression flange in the negative side of local axis 2 RX : Rotation about X RY : Rotation about Y RZ : Rotation about Z TO : 1 = Tension only member 0 = Normal member TX : Translation in X TY : Translation in Y TZ : Translation in Z Nodes Node X Y Z Rigid Floor [ft] [ft] [ft] 2 0.7917 13.00 - 2.5833 0 4 0.7917 0.00 - 2.5833 0 6 0.7917 25.1667 - 2.5833 0 7 24.7175 25.1667 0.00 0 9 24.7175 0.00 0.00 0 10 39.7175 25.1667 0.00 0 11 39.7175 0.00 0.00 0 12 86.1241 0.00 0.00 0 13 86.1242 25.1667 0.00 0 16 101.1237 25.1667 0.00 0 17 101.1237 0.00 0.00 0 18 101.1237 13.00 0.00 0 20 6.8226 25.1667 - 9.9167 0 21 6.8226 0.00 - 9.9167 0 24 44.8228 25.1667 - 9.9167 0 25 44.8206 0.00 - 9.9167 0 28 82.8228 25.1667 - 9.9167 0 29 82.8228 0.00 - 9.9167 0 Pagel P1 Restraints • Node • • TX TY TZ RX RY RZ 4 1 1 1 0 0 0 6 1 0 1 0 0 0 7 .1 0 1- -0 0 - 0 9 1 1 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 0 0 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 12 1 1 1 0 0 0 13 1 0 1 0 0 0 16 1 0 1 0 0 0 17 1 1 1 0 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 0 0 21 1 1 1 0 0 0 24 1 0 1 0 0 0 25 1 1 1 0 0 0 28 1 0 1 0 0 0 29 1 1 1 0 0 0 Members Member NJ NK Description Section Material d0 dL Ig factor [in] [in] 3 2 4 4 2 6 8 9 7 9 10 11 11 12 13 17 17 18 18 16 18 20 20 21 23 24 25 28 28 29 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 HSS_SQR 8X8X1_4 HSS_SQR 8X8X3_8 HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 A500 GrB rectangular 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hinges Node -J Node -K Member M33 M22 V3 V2 M33 M22 V3 V2 TOR AXL Axial rigidity 11 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Full Paget • enttew. . Current Date: 3/10/2010 1:29 PM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 -185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr \156 -185 columns only.etz\ Load data GLOSSARY Comb : Indicates if load condition is a load combination Load conditions Condition Description Comb. Category DL Dead Load No DL SL Snow Load No SNOW Load on nodes Condition Node FX FY FZ MX MY MZ [Kip] [Kip] [Kip] [Kip'in] [Kip *in] [Kip'in] • DL • SL 2 0.00 -16.58 0.00 0.00 0.00 99.48 6 0.00 -4.84 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 0.00 -3.93 0.00 0.00 0.00 -23.58 10 0.00 -16.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 32.56 13 0.00 -16.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 -32.56 16 0.00 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.56 18 0.00 -8.71 0.00 -52.26 0.00 0.00 20 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 24 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 28 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 0.00 -1.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 7.20 6 0.00 -3.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 0.00 -2.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 -14.82 10 0.00 -14.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 28.94 13 0.00 -14.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 -28.94 16 0.00 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.38 18 0.00 -0.16 0.00 -0.96 0.00 0.00 20 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 24 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 28 0.00 -16.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Self weight multipliers for load conditions Self weight multiplier Condition Description Comb. MuItX MultY MuItZ DL Dead Load SL Snow Load No 0.00 -1.00 0.00 No 0.00 0.00 0.00 Pagel Earthquake (Dynamic analysis only) Condition a/g Ang. Damp. [Deg] [ %] DL 0.00 0.00 0.00 SL 0.00 0.00 0.00 - • • Paget • • Bentley Current Date: 3/10/2010 1:30 PM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156- 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr\156 -185 columns only.etz\ Analysis Results Reactions 0? My J x ` FY Mx Fxw\ Fz /�� �+ Mz Direction of positive forces and moments Forces (Kiel Moments IKip *in' Node FX FY FZ MX MY MZ Condition DC1 =DL 4 - 0.32940 6 0.32940 7 - 0.07808 9 0.07808 10 0.10781 11 - 0.10781 12 0.00006 13 - 0.00005 16 0.00517 17 - 0.00517 21 0.00000 24 -0.00144 25 0.00152 29 0.00000 21.86593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 4.37593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16.72593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16.72593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.17305 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 9.41593 - 0.17305 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16.75422 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 17.03506 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16.59593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 SUM 0.00008 119.49489 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 Condition DC2 =DL +SL 4 - 0.35325 26.16593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 6 0.35325 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 7 - 0.12715 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 9 0.12715 6.84593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 10 0.20364 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 11 - 0.20364 31.19593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 12 0.00010 31.19593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 13 - 0.00010 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 16 0.00974 0.00000 0.17623 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 17 - 0.00974 9.80593 - 0.17623 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 21 0.00000 32.90422 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 24 - 0.00289 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 25 0.00297 33.18506 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 29 0.00000 32.74593 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 el SUM 0.00008 204.04489 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 Pagel Bentley °. •Current Date: 3/10/2010 1:30 PM Units system: English File name: W: \Progressive\2010 (156 - 185) \156 -185 TRU -BRU Tukwila, WA \Engr \156 -185 columns only.etz\ Steel Code Check Report: Concise Members: Hot - rolled Design code: AISC 360 -05 ASD Member 3 Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1 4 Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint-Venants torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Pagel • • • Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 13.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 13.00 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 13.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 13.00 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 13.00 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 13.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression 66.77 Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) — 66.77 (Sec. D1) (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 st Ratio 0.18 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -55.11 [Kip "in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Paget • Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mo) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) . - N/A (Sec. F)- DESIGN FOR SHEAR 1 Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( 52 =1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.01 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.35 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension 1 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION 1-2= 1.67) Compression 1 Ratio 0.24 Capacity 106.93 [Kip] Reference Demand -26.17 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DESIGN FOR TORSION S1= 1.67) d► Torsion : (Sec. E) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.40 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference Page3 • • • CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.40 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Member 4 Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in21 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [1n3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [n3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [111n3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kipfin2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kiprn2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip/in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kipfin2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Page4 • • Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action [ft] 12.17 [ft] 12.17 — 1.00 1.00 — 1.00 [ft] 12.17 [ft] 12.17 12.17 [ft] 12.17 No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference — 62.49 (Sec. D1) 62.49 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES)= 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.17 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -51.57 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mg) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) — 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR y+ Page5 plz • • • Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( CI= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.01 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.35 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION 0= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) �I Compression Ratio 0.07 Capacity : 110.99 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -8.16 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 5.2= 1.67) Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION V Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.20 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference 'CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.20 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Page6 D3 Member 8 Design status OK • PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 • • Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1M3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [KipTin2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) Effective length factor (K) Effective length factor for torsion Length for axial tension (L) Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 25.17 [ft] 25.17 1.00 1.00 [ft] 25.17 [ft] 25.17 [ft] 25.17 Pagel 1.00 25.17 ofy • Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) Unit Value Ctrl EQ - - Reference 129.27 (Sec. D1) 129.27 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2= 1.67) Bending about maior axis, M33 Ratio 0.12 Capacity . 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -38.40 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MP) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip*in] 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis, M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 308.50 [Kip*in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip*in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO [Kip'in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR �I Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( S2= 1.67 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 52 =1.671 Page8 P/6 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -0.13 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% EliDESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) • • Tension 1 Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression Ratio 0.15 Capacity 47.13 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -6.85 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) d Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION �I Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.19 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.19 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member 9 Design status OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 Page9 DUe • • Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (1) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] . 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip/in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip/in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip/in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip/in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 25.17 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 25.17 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 25.17 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 25.17 25.17 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 25.17 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No SERVICE CONDITIONS Page10 011 • • Verification Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference — 129.27 (Sec. D1) — 129.27 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES2 =1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 Ratio 0.20 Capacity . 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -61.50 [Kip`in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip'in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR of Shear parallel to major axis. V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference (Sec. G) Demand 0.20 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) �I Tension Pagel1 • • Ratio 0.00 Capacity 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctri Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression Ratio 0.66 Capacity 47.13 [Kip] Reference Demand -31.20 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DESIGN FOR TORSION S2 =1.67) Torsion 1 : (Sec. E) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION 1 Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.83 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctri Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.83 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Member Design status . OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1 4 Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Pagel2 Dittr • • Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [n4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [n4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section -(Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [1n3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 25.17 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 25.17 Effective length factor (K) - 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion - 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 25.17 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 25.17 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 25.17 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 25.17 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Tension Maximum geometric slenderness (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference 129.27 (Sec. D1) 129.27 (Sec. E2) • DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE Ci= 1.67) Page13 D2P • • • Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mg) Lateral- torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mr)) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR rtr Shear parallel to major axis, V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION 52 =1.67) ,' Compression Ratio 0.66 Capacity 47.13 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -31.20 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 52 =1.67) Torsion Page14 ozi • Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.66 Ctrl Eq. DC2at0.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and /or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.66 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 0.00% Reference : (Sec. E) Member Design status 17 OK • PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 • Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [1n4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [1n3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Page15 pzZ • • • Area for shear (Aw) Torsional modulus (1 /C) Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties [in2] 2.47 [1 /in3] 6.47E -02 Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA 2.47 Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 13.00 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 13.00 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 13.00 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 13.00 Length for torsion and lateral - torsional buckling [ft] 13.00 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 13.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) 66.77 (Sec. D1) 66.77 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURES/. 1.67) Bending about major axis, M33 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 308.50 [Kirin] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 1.52 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MD) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) Local buckling (LB Mn) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) Pagel6 • • Bending about minor axis, N122 Ratio 0.09 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip'in] Demand 27.49 [Kip *in] Reference Ctrl Eq. : (Sec. F) : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (MO) [Kip*in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn1 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR tI` Shear parallel to malor axis. V3 ( S2= 1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand -0.18 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( S2= 1.671 Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.01 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) Sf Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] CM Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) li Compression Ratio 0.09 Capacity : 106.93 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -9.81 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) sl' Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity . 255.31 [Kip•in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION y' Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.14 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Pagel7 pZ� • • • Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.14 CM Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 18 OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 6X6X1_4 Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 6.00 [in] 6.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross- sectional area (Ag) [in2] 5.24 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 28.60 28.60 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 28.60 28.60 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 2.34 2.34 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r') [in] 2.34 2.34 Saint- Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 45.60 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 9.50 9.50 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [1n3] 11.20 11.20 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z') [in3] 11.20 11.20 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 3.31 Area for shear (Aw) [in2] 2.47 2.47 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1/in3] 6.47E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular • • Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /in2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [Kip /in2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [Kip /in2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 12.17 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 12.17 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 12.17 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 12.17 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 12.17 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 12.17 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) Compression Geometric critical slendemess (KUr) 62.49 (Sec. D1) 62.49 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXUREn =1.67) Bending about major axis. M33 Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -2.94 [Kip'in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mol [Kip *in] 515.20 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn l — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Pagel9 • • • Ratio 0.08 Capacity 308.50 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand -25.73 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) [Kip *in] Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) — 515.20 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) DESIGN FOR SHEAR �f Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.18 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis. V2 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 40.82 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.01 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC2 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION n= Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 144.34 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) Compression Ratio 0.01 Capacity : 110.99 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. E) Demand -0.71 [Kip] CM Eq. : DC2 at 100.00% DESIGN FOR TORSION 52 =1.67) v► Torsion Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 255.31 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.09 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference Page20 022 • • • CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.09 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1b) Member Design status 20 OK PROPERTIES Section : HSS_SQR 8X8X1_4 Height (a) Width (b) Thickness (T) 8.00 [in] 8.00 [in] 0.23 [in] Section properties Unit Major axis Minor axis Full unreduced cross - sectional area (Ag) [in2] 7.10 Moment of Inertia (local axes) (I) [in4] 70.70 70.70 Moment of Inertia (principal axes) (I') [in4] 70.70 70.70 Bending constant for moments (principal axis) (J') [in] 0.00 0.00 Radius of gyration (local axes) (r) [in] 3.16 3.16 Radius of gyration (principal axes) (r) [in] 3.16 3.16 Saint - Venant's torsion constant (J) [in4] 111.00 Warping constant of the section (Cw) [in6] 0.00 Distance from centroid to shear center (principal axis) (xo,yo) [in] 0.00 0.00 Top elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Ssup) [in3] 17.70 17.70 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (local axis) (Sinf) [in3] 17.70 17.70 Top elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'sup) [in3] 17.70 17.70 Bottom elastic section modulus of the section (principal axis) (S'inf) [in3] 17.70 17.70 Plastic section modulus (local axis) (Z) [in3] 20.50 20.50 Plastic section modulus (principal axis) (Z) [in3] 20.50 20.50 Polar radius of gyration (ro) [in] 4.46 Area for shear (Aw) [in2) 3.40 3.40 Torsional modulus (1 /C) [1 /in3] 3.56E -02 Material : A500 GrB rectangular Properties Unit Value Yield stress (Fy): [Kip /n2] 46.00 Tensile strength (Fu): [Kip /in2] 58.00 Elasticity Modulus (E): [KipAn2] 29000.00 Shear modulus for steel (G): [KipAn2] 11153.85 DESIGN CRITERIA Page21 p • • Description Unit Major axis Minor axis Top unbraced length between lateral supports (LbTop) [ft] 25.17 Bottom unbraced length between lateral supports (LbBop) [ft] 25.17 Effective length factor (K) — 1.00 Effective length factor for torsion — 1.00 Length for axial tension (L) [ft] 25.17 Unbraced compression length (Lx, Ly) [ft] 25.17 Length for torsion and lateral- torsional buckling [ft] 25.17 Additional hypotheses Continuous lateral torsional restraint Tension field action No No 1.00 25.17 SERVICE CONDITIONS Verification Unit Value Ctrl EQ Reference Tension Maximum geometric slendemess (Ur) — 95.70 (Sec. D1) Compression Geometric critical slenderness (KUr) — 95.70 (Sec. E2) DESIGN CHECKS DESIGN FOR FLEXURE S2 =1.67) Bending about malor axis. M33 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 529.56 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mph [Kip *in] 943.00 (Sec. F) Lateral - torsional buckling (LTB Mnl — N/A (Sec. F) Web local buckling (WLB Mnl — N/A (Sec. F) Local buckling (LB Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) [Kip *in] 884.36 (Sec. F) Tension flange yielding (TFY Mn) — N/A (Sec. F) Bending about minor axis. M22 Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 564.67 [Kip *in] Reference : (Sec. F) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Intermediate results Unit Value Reference Yielding (Mp) Flange local buckling (FLB Mn) [Kip *in] 943.00 (Sec. F) N/A (Sec. F) • DESIGN FOR SHEAR Page22 • • • Shear parallel to maior axis, V3 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 56.19 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% Shear parallel to minor axis, V2 ( 52 =1.67) Ratio 0.00 Capacity 56.19 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. G) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR TENSION S2= 1.67) yI Tension Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 195.57 [Kip] Reference : (Sec. D) Demand 0.00 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION S2= 1.67) t% Compression Ratio 0.31 Capacity : 105.61 [Kip] Reference Demand -32.90 [Kip] Ctrl Eq. DESIGN FOR TORSION S2= 1.67) Torsion : (Sec. E) : DC2 at 100.00% Ratio 0.00 Capacity : 463.78 [Kip'in] Reference : (Sec. H3) Demand 0.00 [Kip *in] Ctrl Eq. : DC1 at 0.00% INTERACTION y1 Combined axial and flexure interaction value Ratio 0.31 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (H1 -1a) Combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or axial Ratio 0.00 Ctrl Eq. DC1 at 0.00% Reference CRITICAL STRENGTH RATIO Ratio 0.31 Ctrl Eq. DC2 at 100.00% Reference : (Sec. E) Page23 SEIZMIC MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING EST. 1985 STORAGE RACKS DRIVE -IN RACKS CANTILEVER RACKS MEZZANINES CONVEYORS CAROUSELS PUSHBACK RACKS RACKBUILDINGS STEEL SHELVING MOVABLE SHELVING STORAGE RACKS MODULAR OFFICES GONDOLAS BOOKSTACKS FLOW RACKS FOOTINGS SEISMIC ANALYSIS STRUCTURAL DESIGN CITY APPROVALS STATE APPROVALS PRODUCT TESTING FIELD INSPECTION SPECIAL FABRICATION PERMITTING SERVICES ALASKA ARIZONA CALIFORNIA COLORADO CONNECTICUT FLORIDA GEORGIA IDAHO ILLINOIS INDIANA KANSAS KENTUCKY MARYLAND MASSACHUSETTS MICHIGAN MINNESOTA MISSOURI MONTANA NEBRASKA NEVADA NEW JERSEY NEW MEXICO SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF STORAGE RACKS FOR TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US NORTH CAROLINA OHIO OKLAHOMA OREGON PENNSYLVANIA TENNESSEE TEXAS UTAH VIRGINIA WASHINGTON WISCONSIN iEVIEWED FOR .;ODE COMPLIANCI APPROVED P itAi 12 2010 17501 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA, 98188 Job No. 10 -0101 r 161 ATLANTIC STREET * POMONA * CA 91768 * TEL: (909) 869 -0989 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER FAX: (909) 869 -0981 MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT FOR SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY DATE TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US PROGRESSIVE AE 2 TC 1/27/2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS & SCOPE PARAMETERS COMPONENTS & SPECIFICATIONS LOADS & DISTRIBUTION LONGITUDINAL ANALYSIS COLUMN BEAM BEAM TO COLUMN BRACING OVERTURNING - BASE PLATE SLAB & SOIL GONDOLA ANALYSIS 16 -29 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 SCOPE: THIS ANALYSIS OF THE STORAGE SYSTEM IS TO DETERMINE ITS COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPROPRIATE BUILDING CODES WITH RESPECT TO STATIC AND SEISMIC FORCES. THE STORAGE RACKS ARE PREFABRICATED AND ARE TO BE FIELD ASSEMBLED ONLY, WITHOUT ANY FIELD WELDING. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT FOR SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY DATE TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US PROGRESSIVE AE 3 TC 1/27/2010 THE STORAGE RACKS CONSIST OF SEVERAL BAYS, INTERCONNECTED IN ONE OR BOTH DIRECTIONS, WITH THE COLUMNS OF THE VERTICAL FRAMES BEING COMMON BETWEEN AND ADJACENT BAYS. THE ANALYSIS WILL FOCUS ON A TRIBUTARY BAY TO BE ANALYSED IN BOTH THE LONGITUDINAL AND TRANSVERSE DIRECTION. STABILITY IN THE LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION IS MAINTAINED BY THE BEAM TO COLUMN MOMENT RESISTING CONNECTIONS, WHILE BRACING ACTS IN THE TRANSVERSE DIRECTION. CONCEPTUAL DRAWING Some components may not be used or may vary. LEGEND 1. COLUMN 2. BEAM 3. BEAM TO COLUMN 4. BASE PLATE 5. HORIZONTAL BRACING 6. DIAGONAL BRACING 7. BACK TO BACK CONNECTOR TRIBUTARY AREA / 1 TRANSVERSE 1 1 LONGITUDINAL NOTE: ACTUAL CONFIGURATION SHOWN ON COMPONENTS & SPECIFICATIONS SHEET MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET. POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES R US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 4 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1ni COMPONENTS & SPECIFICATIONS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) ANALYSIS PER SECTION 2208 OF THE 2006 IBC SITE CLASS = D . LEVELS = 4 HI =4 in. 1-12 = 54 in. PANELS = 2 H3 = 40 in. H4 = 22 in. LIVE LOAD = Load Varies FRAME HEIGHT = 120 in. FRAME DEPTH = 60 in. BEAM LENGTH= 96 in. SEISMIC CATEGORY = C (Fa = 1, Ss = 1.43) MANUFACTURER = RIDGU RAK W 4 _ WI =2500 lbs. Y1 = 52 in Y2 = 52 in H4 H3 H H2 H1 t W3 W2 =2500 lbs. W3 =500 lbs. W4 =2500 lbs. Y2 \ 1 W2 W1 H Y1 \ \ \ COLUMN BEAM @ Level 1 CONNECTOR @ Level 1 OK 3 X 1 5/8 X 14GA Steel = 55000 psi Stress =64% OK RB -L-410 / 4 X 2.5 X 15GA Steel = 55000 psi Max Static Capacity = 4574 Ib. Stress = 55% OK TWO PIN CONNECTOR Stress = 56% COLUMN BACKER BEAM @ Level 2+ CONNECTOR @ Level 2+ None Stress = OK RB -L-410 / 4 X 2.5 X 15GA Max Static Capacity = 4574 lb. Stress = 55% OK TWO PIN CONNECTOR Stress = 71% BRACING SLAB & SOIL HORIZONTAL OK RidguRak 1 3/4 X 1 1/4 X 16GA Stress = 25% DIAGONAL OK RidguRak 1 3/4 X 1 1/4 X 16G Stress = 72% Slab = 5" X 2500 psi OK Soil Bearing Pressure = 1000 psf Slab Puncture Stress = 50% Slab Bending Stress = 59% BASE PLATE ANCHORS OK 3.5 in X 6 in X 0.125 in Steel = 36000 psi MBase = 0 in. lb. Stress = 6% HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR -1917) 0.5 Dia. X 2 Min. Embd. OK Pullout Capacity = 970 lbs. Shear Capacity = 1050 lbs. No. Of Anchors = 1 per Base Plate Anchor Stress = 46% NOTES: MOBILE UNITS ARE OF THE SAME CONFIGURATION; OK BY SIMPLE INSPECTION. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA. CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 5 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1 /�i� COMPONENTS & SPECIFICATIONS : TYPE TRU (STATIONARY) ANALYSIS PER SECTION 2208 OF THE 2006 IBC SITE CLASS = D LEVELS = 4 H1 =3 in. H2 =37 in. PANELS = 2 H3 =40 in. H4 = 40 in. LIVE LOAD = 1000 Ibs. FRAME HEIGHT = 120 in. FRAME DEPTH = 60 in. BEAM LENGTH= 96 in. SEISMIC CATEGORY = C (Fa = 1, Ss = 1.43) MANUFACTURER = RIDGU RAK -} W4 W1 =1000 lbs. W2 =1000 Ibs. W3 =1000 Ibs. W4 =1000 lbs. \ Y1 = 52 in Y2 = 52 in H4 1. H3 H H2 . H1 I W 3 Y2 \ W2 W 1 H Y1 \ L .I ,k-- D' COLUMN BEAM @ Level 1 CONNECTOR @ Level 1 OK 3 X 1 5/8 X 14GA Steel = 55000 psi Stress =27% OK T2500 2 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 0.075 Steel = 55000 psi Max Static Capacity = 1923 lb. Stress = 52% OK TWO PIN CONNECTOR Stress = 21% COLUMN BACKER BEAM @ Level 2+ CONNECTOR @ Level 2+ None Stress = OK T2500 2 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 0.075 Max Static Capacity = 1923 lb. Stress = 52% OK TWO PIN CONNECTOR Stress = 32% BRACING SLAB & SOIL HORIZONTAL OK RidguRak 1 3/4 X 1 1/4 X 16GA Stress = 13% DIAGONAL OK RidguRak 1 3/4 X 1 1/4 X 16G Stress = 38% Slab = 5" X 2500 psi OK Soil Bearing Pressure = 1000 psf Slab Puncture Stress = 26% Slab Bending Stress = 19% BASE PLATE ANCHORS OK 3.5 in X 6 in X 0.125 in Steel = 36000 psi MBase = 0 in. lb. Stress = 3% HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR -1917) 0.5 Dia. X 2 Min. Embd. OK Pullout Capacity = 970 lbs. Shear Capacity = 1050 lbs. No. Of Anchors = 1 per Base Plate Anchor Stress = 25% NOTES: MOBILE UNITS ARE OF THE SAME CONFIGURATION; OK BY SIMPLE INSPECTION. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US/BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 6 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 LOADS AND DISTRIBUTION: TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) Determines Seismic Base Shear per Section Chap 2208, of the 2006 IBC. SITE CLASS: p Fa: 1.00 Number Of Levels: 4 Ss: 1.43 wLL (Sum of live loads) : 8000 Ibs Ie: 1.00 wDL (Sum of dead loads): 400 lbs Rw (Longitudinal): 6.00 TOTAL FRAME LOAD: 8400 lbs Rw (Transverse): 4.00 LONGTUDINAL DIRECTION 2 /3.Fa •SS •IE •(((2I3)•WLL) +WDL) VLong — Rw • 1.4 (2/3) X 1 X 1.43 X 1 X (((2/3)8000) + 400) / (6 X 1.4) //Long 651 lbs TRANSVERSE DIRECTION V _ 2 /3•Fa•SS•IE•(((2I3)•WLL) +WDL) Trans Rw • 1.4 (2/3) X 1 X 1.43 X 1 X (((2/3)8000) + 400) / (4 X 1.4) VTrans • • 976 lbs F. =V W.H. ■ EW,H, Levels hx LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE wx wxhx f wx w hx f, 1 4 2,600 10,400 13 2,600 10,400 19 2 58 2,600 150,800 184 2,600 150,800 277 3 98 600 58,800 72 600 58,800 108 4 120 2,600 312,000 382 2,600 312,000 572 532,000 651 lbs 532,000 976 lbs MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT FOR SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY DATE TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US PROGRESSIVE AE 7 TC 1/27/2010 LONGITUDINAL ANALYSIS: TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) THE ANALYSIS IS BASED ON THE PORTAL METHOD, WITH THE POINT OF CONTRA FLEXURE OF THE COLUMNS ASSUMED AT MID- HEIGHT BETWEEN BEAMS, EXCEPT FOR THE LOWEST PORTION, WHERE THE BASE PLATE PROVIDES ONLY PARTIAL FIXITY, THE CONTRA FLEXURE IS ASSUMED TO OCCUR CLOSER TO THE BASE. (OR AT THE BASE FOR PINNED CONDITION, WHERE THE BASE PLATE CANNOT CARRY MOMENT). MUpper + MLower = MConn'R' + MConn'L' MConn'R' = MConn'L' MConn . 2 = MUpper + MLower MUpper + MLower \ MConn VLong VCol = 2 2 = 325 lbs MBace = 0 in/lb + MEnds MEnds = 2564 in/lb Mn -n FRONT ELEVATION LEVELS h, f AXIAL LOAD MOMENT Mconn 1 2 6 4,200 650 7,196 2 54 92 2,900 8,613 9,140 3 40 36 1,600 4,540 3,884 4 22 191 1,300 2,101 3,614 SAMPLE CALC. M1 -I = (VCor ' h,) - MBase = (325 lbs X 2 in) - 0 in/lb = 650 in/lb MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT FOR SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY DATE TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US PROGRESSIVE AE 8 TC 1/27/2010 COLUMN ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) ANALYZED PER AISI AND THE 2006 IBC. SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON THE Axial P = 2900 lbs M = 8613 in/lb Kx Lx Rx Ky •Ly Ry Fe= (k •rMax Fy = 28 KSI 2 Since : Fe > Fy /2 — 1.2 X 52in / 1.242in = 50.2 — 1 X 52in / 0.63in = 82.5 II2E = 42.7 KSI -Max R 82.5 F = 55 KSI X [1 - 55 KSI / (4 X 42.73616KSI)] F„ = Fy 1 y 4 Fe = 37.3 KSI Pn = Aeff • F,, = 0.46 in ^2 X 37.3 KSI = 17160 lbs P – P' a S2c P = 0.32 Pa = 17160 lbs / 1.92 Flexure Since:— P > 0.15 Pa Myield = My = Sx • Fy = Check :P + M 1.33 Pa Max 0.473 In ^3 X 55000 PSI = 26015 in/lb M Max SZf �x = 1 89371bs = 26015 / 1.67 15578 in/lb = (3.14159) ^2 X 29500 KSI X 0.709 / (62.4i = 53015 lbs 11 —(S2c P Pcr = (1 / (1 - (1.92 X 2900 lb / 53015 1b))) ^ -1 (2900 lb / 8937 lb) + (0.85 X 8613 in/lb / 15578 in/lb X 0.89) = 0.85 < 1.33 = 0.89 (64%) EFFECTIVE SECTION. 1 B SECTION PROPERTIES A : 3 i B : 1.625 in C . t : 0.0747 in Aeff : 0.46 inA2 Ix : 0.709 in ^4 Sx : 0.473 in ^3 Rx : 1.242 in Iy : 0.183 in ^4 Sy : 0.212 in ^3 Ry : 0.63 in Kx : 1.2 Lx : 52 in Ky :1 Ly : 52 in Fy : 55 KSI E : 29500 KSI S2c : 1.92 • 1.67 C x : 0.85 Cb : 1 MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 9 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BEAM ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) BEAM TO COLUMN CONNECTIONS PROVIDE ADEQUATE MOMENT CAPACITY TO STABLIZE THE SYSTEM, ALTHOUGH IT DOES NOT PROVIDE FULL FIXITY. THUS, THE BEAMS WILL BE ANALYSED ASSUMING PARTIAL END FIXITY. FOR THE COMPUTATION OF BEAM TO COLUMN MOMENT CAPACITY, THE PARTIAL END FIXITY MOMENT OF THE BEAM WILL BE ADDED TO THE LONGITUDINAL FRAME MOMENT FOR THE ANALYSIS OF THE CONNECTION. EFFECTIVE MOMENT FOR PARTIALLY FIXED BEAM For a simply supported beam, the max moment at the center is given by wt 2/8 this maximum moment by the following method. Percentage of End Fixity = 25% MCenter = MCenter(Simple ends) - 0 *MCenter(Fixed ends) W12 /8 — (� wi 2/12 )= 0.104• YY72 Reduction Coefficient 13 = 0.104/0.125 = 0.833 MCenter = -W12 = 0.833 W/2 /8 Mad, = 0.MMI(FixedEnds) = W12112. 0.25 = 0.0208 • W12 An assumption of partial fixity will decrease 0 = 0.25 Mcenter(simpe) M ends (foxed) dIIIIIIII�IIIIIIII�b: .1 L ' M center (fued) EFFECTIVE DEFLECTION FOR PARTIALLY FIXED BEAM For a simply supported beam, the max deflection at the center is given byswr 4/384 El An assumption of partial fixity will decrease this maximum deflection by the following method. Amax = Q LiveLoad / 1v1= 2500 lbs 5w74 384•E•Ix DeadLoad / 1v1= 41b /ft X 2 X (96/12) = 64 lbs 0.104* j,V12 =12820 in /lb MCenter MEnds = 0.0208* YV/2 = 2564 in/lb Fb = 0.6.F, = 33000 PSI FBEff = 33000 PSI L ax TYPICAL BEAM FRONT VIEW MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 10 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BEAM ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) MAXIMUM STATIC LOAD PER LEVEL DEPENDS ON: 1. MAXIMUM MOMENT CAPACITY Fb =MISx /3'( 12/8) FBEff= S x FBEf •16•Sx Max.Weight / lvl = a t6•L = ((33000 X 16 X 0.792) / (0.833 X 96)) X 0.875 = 4574 lbs/Ivl 2. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION Hallow = L /180 = 0.533 In 5W14 0= fi 384•E•Ix Max.Weight / lvl = 384 • E • Ix • AAllow L3 5 -48 1- C T D = 1.72 in ^4 S = 0.792 in ^3 x Fv =55000 PSI a(impactCoefficient) = = 0.833 0 = 0.25 L(Length) = 96 in La = 96 in Step = 1.625 in TopWidth = 1.625 in 0.875 BeamThickness = 0.066 in BeamDepth = 4 in BottomWidth = 2.5 in = ((384 X 29000000 X 1.72 X 0.533) / (5 - (4 X 0.25))) X 96 ^3 = 5773 Ibs /Ivl MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LIVE LOAD PER LEVEL = 45741bs/lvl BeamStress = 55% ALLOWABLE AND ACTUAL BENDING MOMENT AT EACH LEVEL MAUaw,Seismic = S * Fb *1-33 Fb MSeismic — MConn W72 = = MStatic YY ` /8 `sx * M /mpact = MStatic *1.125 Level MStatic Mlmpact MAUow.Static MSeismic MAnow,Seismic Result 1 2 3 4 12820 12820 2820 12820 14422 14422 3172 14422 26136 26136 26136 26136 7196 9140 3884 3614 34848 34848 34848 34848 GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 11 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BEAM TO COLUMN ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY CONNECTION CAPACITY DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS: 1. SHEAR CAPACITY OF PIN PinDiameter = 0.438/n. Fy = 55000 PSI AShear = Diameter2 • 4 = 0.1507 inA2 PShear = 0.4 • Fy • `4Shear = 0.4 X 55000 X 0.1507 in^ = 33151bs 2. BEARING CAPACITY OF PIN ColumnThickness = 0.0747 F„ = 65000PS/ 52 =2.22 a = 2.22 PBearing = a • F„ • Dia. • Col.Thickness /S2 : AT LEVEL 1 = 2.22 X 65000 X 0.438 X 0.0747 / 2.22 = 2127 lbs 3. MOMENT CAPACITY OF BRACKET EdgeDist . = 1.0In. PinSpacing = 4 In • = 55000 PSI C= P +PZ = P +i (.5/4.5) = PIX1.11 Taw = 0.179 In. Scrp = 0.127/n3 MCapacity = Slip • FBending = 0.127 In ^3 X .66 X Fy = 4610 in-lb C• d= MCapacity — 1.11 P• d d = EdgeDist 12 = 0.5 Pap = Mcapaclty /( 1.11 • d) = 4610 / (1.11 X 0.5) = 83061bs MINIMUM VALUE OF PI GOVERNS P, = 21271bs Mconn —arrow = [I; * 4.5]+ [P, * (.5/4.5) *.5]* 1.33 = 12887in -lb > 7196in -lb OK MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT FOR SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY DATE TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US PROGRESSIVE AE 12 TC 1/27/2010 TRANSVERSE ANALYSIS: BRACING: TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE LOWER PANEL RESISTS THE FRAME SHEAR IN TENSION AND COMPRESSION. IF HORIZONTAL AND DIAGONAL MEMBERS ARE THE SAME, ANALYSIS WILL BE DONE ON THE DIAGONAL MEMBER AS IT WILL GOVERN. DIAGONAL BRACING : COMPRESSION MEMBER Ldiag = J(L — 6) 2 + (D — (2 . BCo1 ))2 = 74.8" Vdia Vtrans . LDiag g = d = 1287 lbs k • l (1 X 74.8139) / (0.439) = 170.4 In rMin F = IIZe = 9855.1 PSI (k rMin F F < e 2 Fn= Fe P„ = Area • F )c =1.92 Pa= P S2c Brace Stress = VDiag Pa = 27500 = 9855.1 PSI = 2582 lbs = 1345 lbs = 0.96 < 1.33 (72 %) 1 1 V„ Pma SIDE ELEVATION Panel Height (L) = 52 In Panel Depth (D) = 60 In Column Depth (B) = 1.625 In Clear Depth (d) = (D - 2 *B) = 56.7 MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 13 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 OVERTURNING ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) ANALYSIS OF OVERTURNING WILL BE BASED ON SECTION 2208 OF THE 2006 IBC. FULLY LOADED Total Shear = 9761bs Mov, = Vfa„s Ht • 1.15 Moor = 976 X 98 = 95648 in/lb MS, _ E (wp +.85wDL)• d/2 MS, = (8000 +(.85 X 400)) X 60/2 1(Movr — MS, ) PUpLift d TOP SHELF LOADED Shear = 4941bs M Vop • Ht • 1.15 Mov, 250200 in/lb = (95648 - 250200) / 60 _ -2576 lbs. Puplift <= 0 No Up Lift = 494 X 120 X 1.15 = 68129 in/lb MS, _E(wp +wDL)•d /2 MS, = (2500 + (.85 X 400)) X 60 /2 = 85200 in/lb 1(M0v, —M„) PUpLi d = (68129 - 85200) / 60 = -285 lbs. Puplift<=0 No up Lift ANCHORS No. of Anchors : 1 Pull Out Capacity : 970 Lbs. Shear Capacity : 1050 Lbs. COMBINED STRESS Fully Loaded = (0 / 970 X 1))+ ((976 /2)/(1050 X 1)) = 0.46 Top Shelf Loaded = (0 / (970 X 1))+ ((494 /2)/(1050 X 1)) = 0.24 oaf !!11 RIF PA �I F3 jFl P uplift CROSS AISLE ELEVATION USE 1 HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR -1917) 0.5 Dia. X 2 Min. Embd. Anchors per BasePlate. (or approved equal) MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 14 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BASE PLATE ANALYSIS : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) THE BASE PLATE WILL BE ANALYZED WITH THE RECTANGULAR STRESS RESULTING FROM THE VERTICAL LOAD P, COMBINED WITH THE TRIANGULAR STRESSES RESULTING FROM THE MOMENT Mb (IF ANY). THERE ARE 3 CRITERIA IN DETERMINING Mb. THEY ARE 1. MOMENT CAPACITY OF THE BASE PLATE, 2. MOMENT CAPACITY OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS, AND 3. Vcol *h /2 (FULL FIXITY). Mb IS THAT SMALLEST VALUE OBTAINED FROM THE 3 CRITERIA ABOVE. PCo! Al.., P _ Pco! A D•B = 4200 lbs = 0 in/lb Mb fb =D B2/6 _2•b, fb2 = B1 fbl = fb —42 wb2 b2 Mb = 2 , = , 2 '[ a Mb S= ose 6 FBase =.75F •1.33 fb _ Mb Fb SBase • FBase 1•t2 ANCHOR TENSION Base Plate Width (B) = 3.5 in b = 3 in Base Plate Depth (D) = 6 in bl = 0.25 in Base Plate Thickness (t) = 0.125 in Fv (base) = 36000 PSI = 200 PSI = 0 PSI = 0 PSI = 0 PSI +fb1 +.67fb2] = 6.25 in/lb = 0 in/cb = 36000 PSI = 0.06 <= 1 OK No. of Anchors Resistinz Tension (n) = 0.5 I Mo T•d2 = M Base — (Pcor'(b /2)) T = MBate 'Co! •b d2 n•d2 = 4.2477610851 fa b1 b .1` b 1 B — tb2 — ib1 T ;if— Danchor 4 SEIZMIC 1' MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL : (909)869 - 0989 FAX : (909)869 - 0981 161 ATLANTIC STREET, POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' USBABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 15 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 SLAB AND SOIL : TYPE BRU (STATIONARY) THE SLAB WILL BE CHECKED FOR PUNCTURE STRESS. IF NO PUNCTURE OCCURS, IT WILL BE ASSUMED TO DISTRIBUTE THE LOAD OVER A LARGER AREA OF SOIL AND WILL ACT AS A FOOTING. PUNCTURE Ps1aIrc = 4200 lbs M0, = 95648 in -lb Pn,ai = (1.2 • Ptnt;c +1.0 .(M 0, l d)) = 72981bs f� Fp�mct = 2 • c Apu»cr = B +— t t )±(W +— • 2 • t = 145 sq. in. 2 2 = 100 PSI f Pmax F Apund • Fp»nct SLAB TENSION A P mar •144 _ s »rr- 1.33• .%sou L=Asa B =-JB•W +t b= L —B 2 wb2 1.33•fsou•b2 144.2 Mconc = 2 1•t2 Sconc = 6 Fconc = 50 fc fb = MConc Fb 'Sconc • Fconc OK = 0.5 = 790 sq. in. = 28.11 in = 9.58 in = 9.26 in = 396 in -lb = 4.17 cb. in. = 162.5 PSI = 0.59 P FOOTING B = 3.5 in W =6in Frame Depth d = 60 in CONCRETE fc t 0 = 2500 PSI = 5 i = 0.65 SOIL fsoil = 1000 PSF SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 16 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 MADIX GONDOLA ANALYSIS PROJECT SCOPE: PROVIDE SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF LIGHT DUTY STORAGE RACK TO CONFORM TO THE REGULATIONS SET BY THE 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. CRITICAL CONFIGURATION ANALYZED. PARAMETERS: THE LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE USED IN THIS PROJECT CONSISTS OF GONDOLA TYPE SHELVING COMPONENTS. THE STABILITY OF THE SHELVING DEPENDS ON THE MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES IN THE TRANSVERSE DIRECTION AND ON THE HORIZONTAL BRACES AND PEG BOARD PANELS IN THE LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION. SPECIFICATIONS: - SEISMIC V= (2/3) x Fa x Ss x IE x W/R - MAIN STEEL Fy = 36,000 PSI - ANCHOR 3/8 "0 x 2" MIN. EMBED. HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR -1917) - SLAB 5 IN x 2,500PSI - SOIL 1,000 PSF 20 GA. END TRIM 22 GA. BASE BRACKET TRIM 20 GA. FRONT KICK PANEL SHELVING COMPONENTS: 1 = UPRIGHT 2 = BASE BRACKET 3 = ANCHOR 4 = ANCHOR PLATE 5= RAIL 6 =ARM 7 = BASE DECK 8 = SHELF ru.S1r1;11114111IlelliNI INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 17 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 SUMMARY & ELEVATIONS - 7 LEVEL SINGLE SIDED CODE = 2006 IBC LUSHELF = 100 LB SUMMARY: 144" GONDOLA PERIMETER WALLS 48° 144° FRONT VIEW COLUMN STRESS = 0.61 OK OVERTURNING STRESS = 0.16 OK 19° 19. 1 * * SIDE VIEW SINGLE SIDED SHELF STRESS = 0.53 OK BASE STRESS = 0.74 OK PANELS STRESS = 0.19 OK SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 18 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 LOADS & SEISMIC DISTRIBUTION V= (2/3) x Fa x Ss x IE x W/R Ss= 1.43 Fa= 1 W = (2/3 LL+ DL) R =3 IE = 1 1.4 = WORKING STRESS REDUCTION DL = 5 LB LL = 100 LB # of LVLS = 7 W= ((2/3 x 100 LB)+ 5 LB) x 7 LEVELS = 502 LB V= (2/3)x1 x1.43x1 xW /Rx1.4 = 0.681 W/R Vtrans. = 0.227 W = 114 LB LEVEL hx wx hx wx Fi(trans.) Movt. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19.0 IN 38.0 IN 57.0 IN 76.0 IN 95.0 IN 114.0 IN 133.0 IN 105 LB 105 LB 105 LB 105 LB 105 LB 105 LB 105 LB 1,995 IN-LB 3,990 IN -LB 5,985 IN-LB 7,980 IN-LB 9,975 IN -LB 11,970 IN-LB 13,965 IN -LB 4 LB 8 LB 12 LB 16 LB 20 LB 24 LB 28 LB 77 IN -LB 309 IN -LB 695 IN-LB 1,236 IN -LB 1,932 IN-LB 2,782 IN -LB 3,786 IN-LB TRANSVERSE ANALYSIS: Ptotal = 502 LB Mseis. Movt = 10,818 IN -LB 55,860 IN-LB 114 LB 10,818 IN -LB Mstatic = 8,085 IN -LB Mtotal = 18,903 IN -LB LONGITUDINAL ANALYSIS: SEISMIC SHEAR IS RESISTED BY BACK PEG BOARD PANELS FASTENED BY LOCKING TRACKS. Fp = 9.49 LB /FT d = 22.0 IN THE ENCLOSED BACK PANELS ARE SIMILAR TO GYPSUM BOARDS WITH AN ALLOWABLE VALUE OF: Vallow = 50.00 LB /FT INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 19 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 COLUMN ANALYSIS (TRANSVERSE) SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON THE EFFECTIVE SECTION. P= 502 LB M= 18,903 IN -LB KxLx/rx = 2.1 *133 IN/1.604 IN = 174.1 < = == (KI /r)max KyLy /ry = 1•48 IN/0.884 IN = 54.3 AXIAL Fe= Tr^2E/(KUr)max ^2 = 9.6 KSI Fy /2= 18.0 KSI SINCE, Fe < Fy /2 THEN, Fn= Fe = 36 KSI *[1 -36 KSI/(4 *9.6 KSI)] = 9.6 KSI Pn= Aeff *Fn = 7,298 LB Oc= 1.92 Pa= Pn /Dc = 7298 LB/1.92 = 3,801 LB SECTION PROPERTIES P /Pa= 0.13 < 0.15 Aeff = 0.760 IN "2 FLEXURE Ix = 1.956 INA4 CHECK: P /Pa + Mx/Max s 1.33 Sx = 1.526 INA3 rx = 1.604 IN Pno= Ae *Fy ly = 0.594 IN^4 = 0.76 IN ^2 *36000 PSI Sy = 0.639 INA3 = 27,360 LB ry = 0.884 IN Pao= Pno /Oc Kx = 2.1 = 27360 LB/1.92 Lx = 133.0 IN = 14,250 LB Ky = 1.00 Myield =My= Sx *Fy Ly = 48.0 IN = 1.526 INA3 * 36000 PSI Fy= 36 KSI = 54,936 IN -LB E= 29,500 KSI Max= My /Of flf= 1.67 = 54936 IN- LB/1.67 Cmx= 0.85 = 32,896 IN -LB Cb= 1.0 Pcr= n^2EI /(KL)max ^2 Nx= {1 /[1- (Oc *P /Pcr)] } ^ -1 = Tr ^2 *29500 KSI /(2.1 *133 IN) ^2 = {1/[1- (1.92 *502 LB/7300 LB)] } ^ -1 = 7,300 LB = 0.87 THUS, (502 LB/3801 LB) + (18903 IN- LB/32896 IN -LB) = 0.61 < 1.33, OK SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 20 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BASE AND ARM ANALYSIS ARM CHECK: CHECK TENSION CAPACITY: ARM SPAN = 22.0 IN LOAD = 105 LB /LEVEL M = LOAD x (ARM SPAN /2) = 105 LB /LEVEL x 22 IN /2 = 1,155 LB -IN ASSUME ONLY THE TOP CLIP IN TENSION TENSION CAPACITY = T= 0.6Fy x A = 0.6 x 36000 PSI x 0.09 IN "2 = 1,944 LB MOMENT CAPACITY = T x d = 1944 LB x 1.125 IN = 2,187 LB -IN > 1155 LB THEREFORE OK CHECK FOR SHEAR CAPACITY: Varm = LOAD /2 = (100 +5) /2 = 53 LB /LEVEL SHEAR CAPACITY = 0.4Fy * A = 0.4 x 36000 PSI x 0.09 IN "2 = 1,296 LB > 52.5 LB THEREFORE OK BASE BRACKET ANALYSIS: Mcol(total) = 18,903LB -IN fb = Mcol(total) /Sx = 18903LB -IN / 1.18 IN "3 = 16,019PSI Fb = 0.6 x 36000 PSI = 21,600PSI fb /Fb = 16019PSI / 21600PSI = 0.74 < 1.33 THEREFORE OK A = 0.090 INA2 Fy = 36,000 PSI d = 1.125 IN Sx = 1.18 IN "3 Fb = 36,000PSI SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 21 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 OVERTURNING ANALYSIS FULLY LOADED: Puplift = ((Movt - Mst) / danchor) x # of occurence = ([10818 - 5518] IN -LB / 22 IN) x 1 = 241 LB INTERACTION EQN. PER 4.2.2 OF ICC ESR -1917 [241 LB/ 1840 LB] + [57 LB/ 2100 LB] = TOP LOADED: Vtop = 38 LB 0.16 < 1.2 THEREFORE OK LEVEL hx wx hx wx Fi(trans.) Movt. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19.0 IN 38.0 IN 57.0 IN 76.0 IN 95.0 IN 114.0 IN 133.0 IN 5 LB 5 LB 5 LB 5 LB 5 LB 5 LB 105 LB 95 IN -LB 190 IN -LB 285 IN -LB 380 IN -LB 475 IN -LB 570 IN -LB 13,965 IN -LB 0 LB 0 LB 1 LB 1 LB 1 LB 1 LB 33 LB 4 IN-LB 17 IN -LB 39 IN -LB 69 IN -LB 108 IN -LB 156 IN -LB 4,448 IN -LB 15,960 IN -LB 38 LB 4,842 IN -LB Puplift = ((Movt - Mst) / danchor) x # of occurence = ([4842 IN -LB - 330 IN -LB) / 22 IN) x 1 = 205 LB INTERACTION EQN. PER 4.2.2 OF ICC ESR -1917 [205 LB/ 1840 LB] + [19 LB/ 2100 LB] = ALLOWABLE TENSION = 920 LB ALLOWABLE SHEAR = 1,050 LB # OF ANCHORS/ B.P. = 2 danchor = 22.0 IN # OF OCCURENCE = 1 0.12 < 1.2 THEREFORE OK 3/8 "0 x 2" MIN. EMBED. HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR -1917) SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING; TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 22 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 MADIX MULTIFUNCTION UNIT ANALYSIS PROJECT SCOPE: PROVIDE SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF LIGHT DUTY STORAGE RACK TO CONFORM TO THE REGULATIONS SET BY 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. PARAMETERS: THE LIGHT DUTY STORAGE RACK USED IN THIS PROJECT CONSISTS OF GONDOLA TYPE SHELVING COMPONENTS. THE STABILITY OF THE SHELVING DEPENDS ON THE MOMENT RESISTING FRAMES IN THE TRANSVERSE DIRECTION AND ON THE HORIZONTAL BRACES AND PEG BOARD PANELS IN THE LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION. SPECIFICATIONS: - SEISMIC - MAIN STEEL - ANCHOR - SLAB - SOIL V= (2/3) x Fa x Ss x IE x W/R Fy = 36,000 PSI 3/8 "0 x 2" MIN. EMBED. HILT! KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR -1917) 5 IN x 2,500PSI 1,000 PSF SINGLE ROW SHOWN SHELVES REMOVED FOR CLARITY SHELVING COMPONENTS: 1 = UPRIGHT 3 = ANCHORS 4 = ANCHOR PLATE 7 = BASE DECK 9 = REAR BEAM 11 = SUPPORT BEAM 14 = BASE DECK CONNECTOR 15 = SHELF SUPPORT INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 23 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 SUMMARY & ELEVATIONS - MULTIFUNCTION UNIT CODE = 2006 IBC LL/SHELF = 100 LB LL/TOP = 300 LB SUMMARY: MULTI - FUNCTION 96" 1 2° 22° I /-22° 1 0 DIVIDE EQUALLY FRONT VIEW COLUMN STRESS(g) = 0.46 STRESS(m) = 0.37 OK OVERTURNING STRESS = 0.08 ' OK SIDE VIEW DOUBLE SIDED SHELF /BEAM STRESS(S) = 0.53 STRESS(B) = 0.24 OK BASE STRESS = 0.55 OK PANELS STRESS = 0.31 OK INC. • MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING. TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 24 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 LOADS & SEISMIC DISTRIBUTION V = (2/3) x Fa x Ss x 1E x W/R Ss = 1.43 Fa = 1 IE = 1 DL = 5 LB Rgond. = 3 Rtrans.multi. = 4 Rlong. = 4 1.4 = WORKING STRESS REDUCTION LL -cant. = 100 LB # of LVLS = 4 Wg = (DL + (2 /3)LL) x # < == GONDOLA = 574 LB LL -top = 300 LB # of LVLS = 1 Wm = (DL + (2 /3)LL) x #LVL = 210 LB <= MULTI -UNIT top LEVEL V(max) = (2/3) x 1 x1.43x1 xW /Rx1.4 V(min) = (2/3) x 1 x1.43x 1 xW /Rx1.4 = 0.681 W/R = 0.681 W/R Vtrans.(g) = 0.227 Wg <_= Wg + Wm = 178 LB Vlong. = 0.170 W < == Wg + Wm = 133 LB Vtrans.(m) = 0.170 Wg = 18 LB < == Wm / [2 x 2 col] INTERIOR COLUMNS ARE TAKING HALF THE LOADS WITH REGARDS TO THE TOP LEVEL ONLY AND THE REST BY THE (2) EXTERIOR COLUMNS. LEVEL hx wx hx wx Fi(trans.) Fi(Iong.) Movt. 1 2 3 4 5 25.0 IN 44.0 IN 63.0 IN 82.0 IN 101.0 IN 205 LB 205 LB 205 LB 205 LB 310 LB 5,125 IN-LB 9,020 IN -LB 12,915 IN -LB 16,810 IN -LB 31,310 IN -LB 12 LB 21 LB 31 LB 40 LB 74 LB 9 LB 16 LB 23 LB 30 LB 56 LB 303 IN-LB 939 IN-LB 1,925 IN-LB 3,261 IN -LB 7,482 IN -LB TRANSVERSE ANALYSIS: Ptotal(g) = 574 LB Mcol(g) = Movt = 13,910 IN -LB LONGITUDINAL ANALYSIS: 75,180 IN-LB 178 LB 133 LB 13,910 IN -LB danchor = 46.6 IN Ptotal(m) = 135 LB < == Wm /4 + V(m) x 102/dshelf Mcoi(m) = 1,823 IN -LB SEISMIC SHEAR IS RESISTED BY BACK PEG BOARD PANELS FASTENED BY LOCKING TRACKS. Fp = 15.69 LB /FT THE ENCLOSED BACK PANELS ARE SIMILAR TO.GYPSUM BOARDS WITH AN ALLOWABLE VALUE OF: Vallow = 50.00 LB /FT INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 25 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 COLUMN ANALYSIS (TRANSVERSE) SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON THE EFFECTIVE SECTION. P= 574 LB M= 13,910 IN -LB KxLx/rx = 1*102 IN/1.604 IN = 63.6 < = == (KI /r)max KyLy /ry = 1*48 IN/0.884 IN = 54.3 AXIAL Fe= rrA2E/(KUr)maxA2 = 72.0 KSI Fy /2= 18.0 KSI SINCE, Fe > Fy /2 THEN, Fn= Fy(1- Fy /4Fe) = 36 KSI *[1 -36 KSI/(4 *72 KSI)] = 31.5 KSI Pn= Aeff*Fn = 23,940 LB Oc= 1.92 Pa= Pn /Dc = 23940 LB/1.92 = 12,469 LB SECTION PROPERTIES P /Pa= 0.05 < 0.15 Aeff = 0.760 INA2 FLEXURE Ix = 1.956 INA4 CHECK: P /Pa + Mx/Max <_ 1.33 Sx = 1.526 INA3 rx = 1.604 IN Pno= Ae *Fy ly = 0.594 INA4 = 0.76 INA2 *36000 PSI Sy = 0.639 INA3 = 27,360 LB ry = 0.884 IN Pao= Pno /Oc Kx = 1.0 = 27360 LB/1.92 Lx = 102.0 IN = 14,250 LB Ky = 1.00 Myield =My= Sx *Fy Ly = 48.0 IN = 1.526 INA3 * 36000 PSI Fy= 36 KSI = 54,936 IN -LB E= 29,500 KSI Max= My/ )f 0f= 1.67 = 54936 IN- LB/1.67 Cmx= 0.85 = 32,896 IN -LB Cb= 1.0 Pcr= rrA2EI /(KL)maxA2 px= {1 /[1- (Oc *P /Pcr)] }^ -1 = uM2 *29500 KSI /(1 *102 IN)A2 = {1/[1- (1.92 *574 LB/54738 LB)] } ^ -1 = 54,738 LB = 0.98 .158' THK TYP. ASTM A388 TYP. 18 GA 11 GA LEVEUNG LEG s/8'0 BOLT ANCHOR PLATE THUS, (574 LB/12469 LB) + (13910 IN- LB/32896 IN -LB) = 0.46 < 1.33, OK SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 26 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 COLUMN ANALYSIS (TRANSVERSE) SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON THE EFFECTIVE SECTION. P= 135 LB M= 1,823 IN -LB KxLx/rx = 1 * 102 IN/0.77 IN = 132.5 KyLy /ry = 1 *102 IN /0.611 IN = 166.9 < = == (KI /r)max AXIAL Fe= TT"2E/(KUr)max "2 = 10.4 KSI Fy /2= 18.0 KSI SINCE, Fe < Fy /2 THEN, Fn= Fe = 36 KSI *[1 -36 KSI /(4 *10.4 KSI)] = 10.4 KSI Pn= Aeff*Fn = 3,766 LB Oc= 1.92 14 GA. TYP. TYP. Pa= Pn /Dc = 3766 LB/1.92 = 1,962 LB SECTION PROPERTIES P /Pa= 0.07 < 0.15 Aeff = 0.361 INA2 FLEXURE Ix = 0.218 IN ^4 CHECK: P /Pa + Mx/Max <_ 1.33 Sx = 0.244 INA3 rx = 0.770 IN Pno= Ae *Fy ly = 0.135 INA4 = 0.361 IN "2 *36000 PSI Sy = 0.149 INA3 = 12,978 LB ry = 0.611 IN Pao= Pno /Oc Kx = 1.0 = 12978 LB/1.92 Lx = 102.0 IN = 6,759 LB Ky = 1.0 Myield =My= Sx *Fy Ly = 102.0 IN = 0.244 INA3 * 36000 PSI Fy= 36 KSI = 8,795 IN -LB E= 29,500 KSI Max= My/ Of Of= 1.67 = 8795 IN- LB/1.67 Cmx= 0.85 = 5,266 IN -LB Cb= 1.0 Pcr= TT^2EI /(KL)max ^2 px= {1 /[1- (0c *P /Pcr)] } ^ -1 = Tr ^2 *29500000 PSI /(1 *102 IN) "2 = {1/[1- (1.92 *135 LB/6109 LB)] } ^ -1 = 6,109 LB = 0.96 THUS, (135 LB/1962 LB) + (1823 IN- LB/5266 IN -LB) = 0.37 < 1.33, OK SEIZMIC INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 27 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 BASE AND ARM ANALYSIS ARM CHECK: CHECK TENSION CAPACITY: ARM SPAN = 22.0 IN LOAD = 105 LB /LEVEL M = LOAD x (ARM SPAN /2) = 105 LB /LEVEL x 22 IN /2 = 1,155 LB -IN ASSUME ONLY THE TOP CLIP IN TENSION TENSION CAPACITY = T= 0.6Fy x A = 0.6 x 36000 PSI x 0.09 INA2 = 1,944 LB MOMENT CAPACITY = T x d = 1944 LB x 1.125 IN = 2,187 LB -IN > 1155 LB THEREFORE OK CHECK FOR SHEAR CAPACITY: Varm = LOAD /2 = (100 +5) /2 = 53 LB /LEVEL SHEAR CAPACITY = 0.4Fy *A = 0.4 x 36000 PSI x 0.09 INA2 = 1,296 LB > 52.5 LB THEREFORE OK BASE BRACKET ANALYSIS: Mcol(total) = 13,910 LB -IN fb = Mcoi(total) /Sx = 13910 LB -IN / 1.18 INA3 = 11,788 PSI Fb = 0.6 x 36000 PSI = 21,600 PSI fb /Fb = 11788 PSI / 21600 PSI = 0.55 < 1.33 THEREFORE OK A = 0.090 INA2 Fy = 36,000 PSI d = 1.125 IN Sx = 1.18 INA3 Fb = 36,000PSI . ., • INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 28 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 MULTI - FUNCTION SHELVING ANALYSIS CONNECTION CHECK Mconn = Vcol * H 1 175 -- AREA OF TAB = 0.0788 INA2 = 1,823LB -IN SHEAR CAPACITY OF TAB: Pallow = 0.4Fy * AREA = 0.4 x36000PSI x 0.07875 INA2 = 1,134LB Mallow = Pallow * dist. * 1.33 = ((1134 LBx4IN)+ 1134 LBx2IN /2 )x 1.33 = 7,560 LB -IN > 1823 LB -IN THEREFORE OK BEAM CHECK Mbeam(seis) = 1,823LB -IN Mbeam(stat) = wIA2/8 w = 210 LB /LEVEL = 1.094 LB /IN Mbeam(stat) = 1.094LB /IN x 96IN ^2 / 8 = 1,260 IN -LB Mbeam(total) = Mbeam(stat) + Mbeam(seis) = 3,083 IN -LB fb = Mbeam(total) /Sx = 3083.25LB -IN / 0.894INA3 = 3,449 PSI Fb= 0.6xFy = 21,600 PSI fb /Fb = 0.16 < 1.0 THEREFORE OK LENGTH OF TAB = 4.0 IN LONGTITUDINAL LENGTH OF BEAM = 96.0IN Sx = 0.8940 IN "3 INC. MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING TEL: (909) 869 -0989 • FAX: (909) 869 -0981 161 ATLANTIC AVENUE • POMONA, CA 91768 PROJECT TOYS 'R' US /BABIES 'R' US FOR PROGRESSIVE AE SHEET NO. 29 CALCULATED BY TC DATE 1/27/2010 OVERTURNING ANANLYSIS FULLY LOADED: Puplift = [(Movt - Mst) / d] x # of occrence = ([13910 - 18243] IN -LB / 46.5625 IN) x 2 = -186 LB INTERACTION EQN. PER 4.2.2 OF ICC ESR -1917 [0 LB/ 1840 LB] + [178 LB/ 2100 LB] = 0.08 < 1.2 THEREFORE OK TOP LOADED: Vtop = 53 LB LEVEL hx wx hx wx Fi(trans.) Fi(Iong.) Movt. 1 25.0 IN 5 LB 125 IN -LB 0 LB 0 LB 7 IN -LB 2 44.0 IN 5 LB 220 IN -LB 1 LB 0 LB 23 IN -LB 3 63.0 IN 5 LB 315 IN -LB 1 LB 1 LB 46 IN -LB 4 82.0 IN 5 LB 410 IN -LB 1 LB 1 LB 79 IN -LB 5 101.0 IN 215 LB 21,715 IN -LB 51 LB 39 LB 5,134 IN -LB 22,785 IN -LB _ 53 LB 40 LB 5,290 IN -LB Puplift = [(Movt - Mst) / d] x # of occrence = ([5290 IN -LB - 5471 IN -LB) / 47 IN),x 2 = -8 LB ALLOWABLE TENSION = 920 LB ALLOWABLE SHEAR = 1,050 LB # OF ANCHORS/ B.P. = 2 d = 46.6 IN # OF OCCURENCE = 2 INTERACTION EQN. PER 4.2.2 OF ICC ESR -1917 [0 LB/ 1840 LB] + [53 LB/ 2100 LB] = 0.03 < 1.2 THEREFORE OK 3/8"0 x 2" MIN. EMBED. HILT! KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR -1917) 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Project Summary 2006 Washington State Nonr-.idential Energy Code Compliance Forms PRJ -SUM Revised July 2007 Project Info Project Address Park Place Shopping Center Date 3/8/2010 17501 Southcenter Parkway For Building Department Use Tukwila, WA Applicant Name: Page Interworks, P.A. Applicant Address: 923 Main Street, North Wilkesboro, NC 28659 Applicant Phone: 336.667.4225 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER CODESEWED FOR COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Interior Lighting Summary LTG -INT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Info Project Address Park Place Shopping Center Date 3/8/2010 17501 Southcenter Parkway For Building Department Use Tukwila, WA Applicant Name: Page Interworks, P.A. Applicant Address: 923 Main Street, North Wilkesboro, NC 28659 Applicant Phone: 336.667.4225 Project Description ❑ Plans Included requirements. ❑ New Building ❑ Addition a Alteration Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning Compliance Option 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.) Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) ❑ No changes are being made to the lighting ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft2" Area in ft2 Allowed x Area Sales/Offices/St orage Retail 1.50 58132.0 87198.0 Sales LT, LTE (9 - Lamp Pendant Fixture) 73 318.0 23214.0 Sales K, KE (3 - Lamp Lay -in Fluorescent) 6 92.0 552.0 " From Table 15-1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts 87198.0 Proposed Lighting Wattage Location (floor /room no.) Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Sales D, DE (4 - Lamp Hi -Bay Fluorescent) 321 136.0 43656.0 Sales LT, LTE (9 - Lamp Pendant Fixture) 73 318.0 23214.0 Sales K, KE (3 - Lamp Lay -in Fluorescent) 6 92.0 552.0 Sales D1 (1 - Lamp Hi -Bay Fluorescent) 7 31.0 217.0 Sales VL (1 - Lamp Rack Valance Light) 172 28.0 4816.0 Pre - Sales /Storage /Re ceiving F, FE (2 - Lamp Hi -Bay Fluorescent) 42 61.0 2562.0 Office Area El, EMI (2 - Lamp Lay -in Fluorescent) 18 61.0 1098.0 Office Area EE1, EEM1 (2 - Lamp Lay -in Fluorescent) 2 61.0 122.0 Office Area J1 (2 - Lamp Recessed Down Light) 6 36.0 216.0 Office Area GR1, GR2 (1 - Lamp Recessed Soffit Fixture) 2 99.0 198.0 Office Area GR3, GR7 (1 - Lamp Recessed Soffit Fixture) 2 213.0 426.0 Office Area GR4, GR8 (1 - Lamp Recessed Soffit Fixture) 2 31.0 62.0 Office Area GR5, GR6 (1 - Lamp Recessed Soffit Fixture) 2 122.0 244.0 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts 77383.0 Notes: 1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T -8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 2. For proposed Watts /Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. 3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts /Fixture blank. 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Interior Lighting Summary (back) LTG -INT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Prescriptive Spaces Occupancy: 0 Warehouses, storage areas or aircraft storage hangers O Other Qualification Checklist Note: If occupancy type is "Other" and fixture answer is checked, the number of fixtures in the space is not limited by Code. Clearly indicate these spaces on plans. If not qualified, do LPA Calculations. Lighting Fixtures: (Section 1521) Check if 95% or more of fixtures comply with 1,2 or 3 and rest are ballasted. 1. Fluorescent fixtures which are non - lensed with a) 1 or 2 two lamps, b) reflector or louvers, c) 5-60 watt T -1, T -2, T-4, T -5, T -8 lamps, and d) hard -wired elec- tronic dimming ballasts. Screw -in compact fluorescent fixtures do not qualify. 2. Metal Halide with a) reflector b) ceramic MH lamps <= 150w c) electronic ballasts 3. LED lights. TABLE 15 -1 Unit Liphtinq Power Allowance (LPA Use' LPA` (W /sf) Use' LPA` (W /sf) Automotive facility 0.9 Office buildings, office /administrative areas in facilities of other use types (including but not limited to schools, hospitals, institutions, museums, banks, churches) 1.0 Convention center 1.2 Penitentiary and other Group 1 -3 Occupancies 1.0 Courthouse 1.2 Police and fire stations" 1.0 Cafeterias, fast food establishments5, restaurants /bars5 1.3 Post office 1.1 Dormitory 1.0 Retail10, retail banking, mall concourses, wholesale stores (pallet rack shelving) 1.5 Exercise center 1.0 School buildings (Group E Occupancy only), school classrooms, day care centers 1.2 Gymnasiay, assembly spaces" 1.0 Theater, motion picture 1.2 Health care clinic 1.0 Theater, performing arts 1.6 Hospital, nursing homes, and other Group 1 -1 and 1 -2 Occupancies 1.2 Transportation 1.0 Hotel /motel 1.0 Warehouses'', storage areas 0.5 Hotel banquet/conference /exhibition hall °° 2.0 Workshops 1.4 Laboratory spaces (all spaces not classified "laboratory" shall meet office and other appropriate categories) 1.8 Parking garages 0.2 Laundries 1.2 Libraries5 1.3 Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only' Manufacturing facility 1.3 Main floor building lobbies' (except mall concourses) 1.2 Museum _ 1.1 Common areas, corridors, toilet facilities and washrooms, elevator lobbies 0.8 Footnotes for Table 15 -1 1) In cases in which a general use and a specific use are listed, the specific use shall apply. In cases in which a use is not mentioned specifically, the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be based upon the most comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas. 2) The watts per square foot may be increased, by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twenty feet, unless specifically directed otherwise by subsequent footnotes. 3) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twelve feet. 4) For all other spaces, such as seating and common areas, use the Unit Light Power Allowance for assembly. 5) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above nine feet. 6) Reserved. 7) For conference rooms and offices less than 150ft2 with full height partitions, a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.10 w /ft2 may be used. 8) Reserved. 9) For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating over 5,000, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is 2.60 W /ft2. 10) Display window illumination installed within 2 feet of the window, provided that the display window is separated from the retail space by walls or at least three - quarter- height partitions (transparent or opaque). and lighting for free- standing display where the lighting moves with the display are exempt. An additional 1.5 w /ft2 of merchandise display luminaires are exempt provided that they comply with all three of the following: a) located on ceiling- mounted track or directly on or recessed into the ceiling itself (not on the wall). b) adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical axes (vertical axis only is acceptable for fluorescent and other fixtures with two points of track attachment). c) fitted with LED, tungsten halogen, fluorescent, or high intensity discharge lamps. This additional lighting power is allowed only if the lighting is actually installed. 11) Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, is submitted, the square footage for a warehouse may be defined, for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical face area (access side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not covered by racks. 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Exterior Lighting Summary LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Info Proj Addres: Park Place Shopping Center Date 3/8/2010 17501 Southcenter Parkway For Building Department Use Tukwila, WA Name: Page Interworks, P.A. Appl. Name 923 Main Street, North Wilkesboro, NC 28659 Appl. Phone 336.667.4225 Project Description ❑ New ❑Addition ❑Alteration ❑Plans Included Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning requirements. Compliance Option O Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis Building Grounds (luminaires > 100 Watts) ❑ Efficacy > 60 lumens/VV ❑ Controlled by motion Sensor d Exemption (list) Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) ❑ No changes are being made to the lighting ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Tradable Locations Description Allowed Watts per ft2 or per If Area (ft2), perimeter (If) or # of items Allowed Watts x ft2 (or x If) Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage Total Allowed Watts Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. Location Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Total Proposed Watts Non - Tradable Locations Description Allowed Watts per ft2 or per If Area (ft2), perimeter (If) or # of items Allowed Watts x ft2 (or x If) Non - Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage Location Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Proposed Watts may not exceed Allowed Watts for Category 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Exterior Lighting Summary (back) LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms TABLE 15 -2 LIGHTING POWER DENSITIES FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS Revised July 2007 Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power densities for uncovered parking areas, building grounds, building entrances and exits, canopies and overhangs and outdoor sales areas may be traded.) 1 Uncovered Parking Areas Parking lots and drives 0.15 W /ftz Building Grounds Walkways less than 10 feet wide 1.0 W /linear foot Walkways 10 feet wide or greater Plaza areas Special feature areas 0.2W /ft2 Stairways 1.0 W /ftz Building Entrances and Exits Main entries 30 W /linear foot of door width Other doors 20 W /linear foot of door width Canopies and Overhangs Canopies (free standing and attached and overhangs) 1.25 W /ft£ Outdoor Sales Open areas (including vehicle sales lots) 0.5 W/ft2 Street frontage for vehicle sales lots in addition to "open area" allowance 20 W /linear foot Non - Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power density calculations for the following applications can be used only for the specific application and cannot be traded between surfaces or with other exterior lighting. The following allowances are in addition to any allowance otherwise permitted in the "Tradable Surfaces" section of this table.) Building Facades 0.2 W /ftz for each illuminated wall or surface or 5.0W /linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length Automated teller machines and night depositories 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location Entrances and gatehouse inspection stations at guarded facilities 1.25 W/ft2 of uncovered area (covered areas are included in the "Canopies and Overhangs" section of "Tradable Surfaces") Loading areas for law enforcement, fire, ambulance and other emergency service vehicles 0.5 W /ft 2 of uncovered area (covered areas are included in the "Canopies and Overhangs" section of "Tradable Surfaces") Material handling and associated storage 0.5 W /ft2 Drive -up windows at fast food restaurants 400W per drive- through Parking near 24 -hour retail entrances 800 W per main entry 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Lighting, 2006 Washington State Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checklist LTG -CHK Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address Park Place Shopping Center Date 3/8/2010 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Ene gy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) 1513.1 Local control /access Schedule with type, indicate locations EMS1 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch E301/E3 02 /EMS1 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans ' 1513.4 Display /exhib /special Indicate separate controls E103 /EM si 1513.5 Exterior shut -off Schedule with type and features, indicate location (a) timer w /backup Indicate location (b) photocell. Indicate location EMS1 1513.6 Inter. auto shut -off Indicate location 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations E102 1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) I1514 IMax. watts 'Indicate watts for each exit sign 1E102 LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530 -1532) 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) I 1511 IElec motor efficiency IMECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency I TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) I1540 'Transformers 'Indicate size and efficiency 1E302 I If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Lighting, Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checklist LTG -CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Lighting - General Requirements 1513 Lighting Controls: Lighting, including exempt lighting in Section 1512, shall comply with this section. Where occupancy sensors are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.1. Where automatic time switches are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.2. 1513.1 Local Control and Accessibility: Each space, enclosed by walls or ceiling- height partitions, shall be provided with lighting controls located within that space. The lighting controls, whether one or more, shall be capable of turning off all lights within the space. The controls shall be readily accessible, at the point of entry/exit, to personnel occupying or using the space. EXCEPTIONS: The following lighting controls may be centralized in remote locations: 1. Lighting controls for spaces which must be used as a whole. 2. Automatic controls. 3. Controls requiring trained operators. 4. Controls for safety hazards and security. 1513.2 Area Controls: The maximum lighting power that may be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not exceed that which is provided by a 20 ampere circuit loaded to not more than 80 %. A master control may be installed provided the individual switches retain their capability to function independently. Circuit breakers may not be used as the sole means of switching. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as may be required for production. 2. Areas less than 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft2. 1513.3 Daylight Zone Control: All daylighted zones, as defined in Chapter 2, both under overhead glazing and adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with individual controls, or daylight- or occupant- sensing automatic controls, which control the lights independent of general area lighting. Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing are allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device provided that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent cardinal orientations (i.e. north, east, south. west). Daylight zones under overhead glazing more than 15 feet from the perimeter shall be controlled separately from daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing. EXCEPTION: Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing 2 or fewer light fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. 1513.4 Display, Exhibition and Specialty Lighting Controls: All display, exhibition or specialty lighting shall be controlled independently of general area lighting. 1513.5 Automatic Shut -off Controls, Exterior: Lighting for all exterior applications shall have automatic controls capable of tuming off exterior lighting when sufficient daylight is available or when the lighting is not required during nighttime hours. Lighting not designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by either: a. A combination of a photosensor and a time switch; or b. An astronomical time switch. Lighting designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosensor. All time switches shall be capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a period of at least 10 hours. EXCEPTION: Lighting for covered vehicle entrances or exits from buildings or parking structures where required for safety, security, or eye adaptation. 1513.6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls, Interior: Buildings greater than 5,000 ft2 and all school classrooms shall be equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the lighting during unoccupied hours. Within these buildings, all office areas less than 300 ft2 enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, and all meeting and conference rooms, and all school classrooms, shall be equipped with occupancy sensors that comply with Section 1513.6.1. For other spaces, automatic controls may be an occupancy sensor, time switch or other device capable of automatically shutting off lighting. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Areas that must be continuously illuminated (e.g., 24 -hour convenience stores), or illuminated in a manner requiring manual operation of the lighting. 2. Emergency lighting systems. 3. Switching for industrial or manufacturing process facilities as may be required for production. 4. Hospitals and laboratory spaces. 5. Areas in which medical or dental tasks are performed are exempt from the occupancy sensor requirement. 1513.6.1 Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensors shall be capable of automatically turning off all the lights in an area, no more than 30 minutes after the area has been vacated. Light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have a wall- mounted, manual switch capable of turning off lights when the space is occupied. EXCEPTION: Occupancy sensors in stairwells are allowed to have two step lighting (high -light and low- light) provided the control fails in the high -light position. 1513.6.2 Automatic Time Switches: Automatic time switches shall have a minimum 7 day clock and be capable of being set for 7 different day types per week and incorporate an automatic holiday "shut -off" feature, which tums off all loads for at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. Automatic time switches shall incorporate an over -ride switching device which: a. is readily accessible; b. is located so that a person using the device can see the lights or the areas controlled by the switch, or so that the area being illuminated is annunciated; c. is manually operated; d. allows the lighting to remain on for no more than 2 hours when an over -ride is initiated; and e. controls an area not exceeding 5,000 ft2 or 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft2, whichever is greater. 1513.7 Commissioning Requirements: For lighting controls which include daylight or occupant sensing automatic controls, automatic shut -off controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic time switches, the lighting controls shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. A complete report of test procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the owner. Drawing notes shall require commissioning in accordance with this paragraph. 1514 Exit Signs: Exit signs shall have an input power demand of 5 Watts or less per sign. Motors - General Requirements 1511 Electric Motors: All permanently wired polyphase motors of 1 hp or more, which are not part of an HVAC system, shall comply with Section 1437. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Motors that are an integral part of specialized process equipment. 2. Where the motor is integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no complying motor has been approved. Transformers - General Requirements SECTION 1540 — TRANSFORMERS The minimum efficiency of a low voltage dry-type distribution transformer shall be the Class I Efficiency Levels for distribution transformers specified in Table 4 -2 of the "Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers" published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA TP -1- 2002). 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Info i � * litsl Equip. ID Project Address Park Place Shopping Center Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER AVIEWEnfrej i _""�IAN A PPPfVFD MM' 12 20)1J A.L Location 17501 Southcenter Parkway LENNOX LGH060H4E 60000 1900 120 / +ECON Tukwila, WA 85500 ROOF RTU -9 LENNOX �:w 7 :..pl ant Name: Brian Peceny 185 / +ECON 17.00 81.000 ROOF Applicant Addre s: 1811 4 Mile Rd NE, Grand Rapids, MI 49525 3000 180 / +ECON pllcant Phone: 616 -361 -2664 ROOF RTU -11 1 Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features. Includes Plans 6y/s7 y N /elver Jc j New 6F BUI �zyN t Tukwila 02.e•,/ dvo - /.err S� G DIVI.Smhi 4 0 Ai., i.- i r5 re- Drawings must contain notes requireing compliance with commissioning requirements - Section 1416 Compliance Option QQ Simple System 0 Complex System 0 Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No.' Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV3 Location RTU -8 LENNOX LGH060H4E 60000 1900 120 / +ECON 17.00 85500 ROOF RTU -9 LENNOX LGH036H4E 35000 1100 185 / +ECON 17.00 81.000 ROOF RTU -10 LENNOX LGH090H4E 90000 3000 180 / +ECON 12.50 81.000 ROOF RTU -11 LENNOX LGH048H4E 48000 1600 220 / +ECON 17.00 81.000 ROOF CU -1 (AHU -1) EMI S1CA4D 24000 COOK 135C3B 13.00 0.33 ROOF /SPLIT ROOF Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No.' Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency' 81.000 RTU -8 LENNOX LGH060H4E 105000 1900 120 / +ECON 105000 85500 RTU -9 LENNOX LGH036H4E 65000 1100 185 / +ECON 65000 52000 81.000 RTU -10 LENNOX LGH090H4E 130000 3000 180 / +ECON 130000 104000 81.000 RTU -11 LENNOX LGH048H4E 65000 1600 220 / +ECON 65000 52000 81.000 0.33 0.25 WALL/ERMITCENTE EF -1 COOK 135C3B 1100 0.33 0.25 ROOF Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. I' D D Brand Name Model No. CFM sip, HP /BHP Flow Controls Location of Service RTU -8 LENNOX LGH060H4E 1900 0.70 1.00 ROOF RTU -9 LENNOX LGH036H4E 1100 0.60 0.50 ROOF RECEIVE �'�� RTU -10 LENNOX LGH090H4E 3000 0.50 2.00 ROOF MAR 112010 RTU -11 LENNOX LGH048H4E 1600 0.65 0.75 ROOF AHII -1 (CU -1) EMI WHP24D 750 0.33 0.25 WALL/ERMITCENTE EF -1 COOK 135C3B 1100 0.33 0.25 ROOF 'If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14 -1A through 14-1G. 3 If required. 4 COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS). Y72. �chanical��.: dxv�.2 �•.�..tr,.e*.v.?r..1r _N, Wsw 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form tat i. aTV,V, 4 +"? rnmar + ;t5 w,a ewe • System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. If Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only: • Constant vol? ✓ Air cooled? ✓ Packaged sys? <20,000 Btuh? Split system? ✓ Economizer included? If Heating Only: <5000 cfm? fl <70% outside air? Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies forSimple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. Heating Only <5000 cfm? Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only Reference Section 1421 Yes ingle Package Unit? Yes Air Cooled, Constant Vol? Yes plit Syste < =84,000 Btuh? <70% OSA Yes Econo ncluded? •oI Ca• <20,000 Btuh? Outd or Adjacent to utdoor Yes of Ca <54,000 Btuh? otal Ca . wo economize <240,000 Btuh or 10 %? Simple System Allowed (section 1420) Use Complex Systems (section 1430) Complex Systems Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form x . ,1 ?,, f ., .44 .4 -..N M i '. ;,; . , ,*i :; echanicami ? 0. u. s . us.. { e ' : n 'i,sf.• -,..t., ecki ,,..kr..r tr..„...„..sr:r..... r ' ;^ Nonresidential ECHx- f H Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 2006 Washington State Project Address Park Place Shopping center Date 3/9/2 010 The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. . Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424) 1411 Equipment performance yes 1411.4 Pkg. elec. htg.& clg. List heat pumps on schedule M201 yes 1411.1 Minimum efficiency Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency M301 n.a. 1411.1 Combustion htg. Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper & jacket loss 1412 HVAC controls yes 1412.1 Temperature zones Indicate locations on plans E104 yes 1412.2 Deadband control Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum EMS1 no 1412.3 Humidity control Indicate humidistat yes 1412.4 Automatic setback Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types EMS1 yes 1412.4.1 Dampers Indicate damper location and auto. controls & max. leakage RTII yes 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Indicate optimum start controls n.a. 1412.5 Heat pump control Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule EMS1 yes 1412.6 Combustion htg. Indicate modulating or staged control M301 yes 1412.7 Balancing Indicate balancing features on plans ALL M 1412.8 Ventilation Control Indicate demand control ventilation for high- occupancy areas EMS1 n.a. 1422 Thermostat interlock Indicate thermostat interlock on plans yes 1423 Economizers Equipment schedule M301 1413 Air economizers yes 1413.1 Air Econo Operation Indicate 100% capability on schedule M301 n.a. 1413.1 Wtr Econo Operation Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F wb n.a. 1413.2 Water Econo Doc Indicate Gig load & water econoe & clg tower performance n.a. 1413.3 Integrated operation Indicate capability for partial cooling n.a. 1413.4 Humidification Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer 1414 Ducting systems yes 1414.1 Duct sealing Indicate sealing necessary SPEC yes 1414.2 Duct insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on duct SPEC yes 1415.1 Piping insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping SPEC 1416 Completion Requirements n.a. 1416.2.1 Commissioning Provide commissioning plan yes 1416.2.2 -3 Sys.Bal & Func.Test Indicate air and water system balancing & functional testing SPEC n.a. 1416.2.4 Commissioning Indicate O &M manuals, record drawings, staff training n.a. 1416.2.5 Comm. Report Indicate requirements for prelim. & final commissioning report n.a. 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans yes Mechanical Summary Form Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer sum. SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454) 1440 Service water htg. yes 1441 Elec. water heater Indicate R -10 insulation under tank P301 yes 1442 Shut -off controls Indicate automatic shut -off P301 yes 1443 Pipe Insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping SPEC 1452 Heat Pump COP Indicate minimum COP of 4.0 1452 Heater Efficiency Indicate pool heater efficiency 1453 Pool heater controls Indicate switch and 65 degree control 1454 Pool covers Indicate vapor retardant cover 1454 Pools 90+ degrees Indicate R -12 pool cover If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form pu_ aw was Itiff aw �', i. 13:1 echanical;P:errnitPfans Chueck�lis� '1t^edN.a. , f1r +'• -e - , lse'�xi. wx dA -,,• -N �'t «7 "#! !iu. �3ta h..l.:.. -r.� ,•ls .... .;:i.,.5 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Btulh (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device (IID), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW), including electric furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have either an Energy FActor (EF) or a CAE of not less than the following: 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be a heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu /h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off-hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than 3 stories in height. 4. Gravity ( nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust and relief outlets in the first story and levels below the first story of buildings three or more stories in height. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply Revised July 2007 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1436. 2. Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4. Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 °F dry- bulb /40 °F wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air - cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 °F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 65,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling. 2. Water-cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAC 246- 320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches; seal transverse joints. 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or greater. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any exterior envelope surfaces per Chapter 13. Outside air ducts serving individual supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they, 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 2. are Isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying EF CAE < 50 gal storage 0.58 0.71 50 to 70 gal storage 0.57 0.71 > 70 gal storage 0.55 0.70 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be a heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu /h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off-hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than 3 stories in height. 4. Gravity ( nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust and relief outlets in the first story and levels below the first story of buildings three or more stories in height. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply Revised July 2007 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1436. 2. Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4. Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 °F dry- bulb /40 °F wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air - cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 °F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 65,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling. 2. Water-cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAC 246- 320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches; seal transverse joints. 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or greater. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any exterior envelope surfaces per Chapter 13. Outside air ducts serving individual supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they, 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 2. are Isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 141244.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying air capacities exceeding 10,000 cfm shall have optimum start controls. Optimum with Section 1412.4.1. start controls shall be designed to automatically adjust the start time of an HVAC Once outside air ducts meet the above listed requirements, any runs within system each day to bring the space to desired occupied temperature levels conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements. immediately before scheduled occupancy. The control algorithm shall, as a Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14 -5. minimum, be a function of the difference between space temperature and occupied Exceptions: setpoint and the amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy. 1. Within the HVAC equipment. 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set- up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use 3. Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone. compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall indicate when 1415 Piping Systems supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g., LED indicators). 1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally insulated in accordance with Table 14 -6. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment Exception: Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment. with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with control. 000 Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -26) EXCEPTIONS: 1. Boilers. 2. Radiant heaters. 1416 Completion Requirements (Refer to NREC Section 1416 and the Building 1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have Commissioning Guidelines, published by the Building Commissioning Association, a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers, temperature and for complete text and guidelines for building completion and commissioning pressure test connections and balancing valves. requirements.) "._SHERWJN'W LIAMS 'PACER. '� •A• FTCCSHERWJNWIUAMS� • ;PRAE TIGALr(iEIG[`_- x ,FEES TO MATCH EXISTING UGHTTAUPE'„ TILE BAND TO MAT! H �DOSING 'LAFAYEI TEGM:EN FILE C yPY Permit No. CAR �roF.. 7 a146Tc1 l ' ` =M lln� en w. EFsgp w: SFIERWJN WILUAMS r • - $ !'�`SHERWIN WI LIMNS 'PRACTICALLBEIGE'raIA `+i f�ie,,y"'r t'. PACE' 11 EXISTING TO REMAIN- 4 MATCH EXISTING ELF S. TO MATCH 'TAUPE' EXISTING 'LIGHT TAUPE' FRONT ELEVATION SPLIT •FACE CMU TO MATCH SHERWIN WILLIAMS 'SPALDING GREY' SHERWIN WILLIAMS 'PRACTICAL BEIGE' DES W/ REVEALS MATCH EXISTING 'TAUPE" SHERWIN WILLIAMS '. RACTICAL BEIGE' En W/ REVEALS SPLIT -FACE CMU TO MATCH SHERWIN WIWAMS 'SPALDING GREY MATCH EXISTING 'TAUPE' LEES TO MATCH EXISTING 'LIGHT TAUPE' SIDE / REAR ELEVATION (TYP.) SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6098 'PACER WHITE" SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6100 "PRACTICAL BEIGE" ti SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6074 "SPALDING GREY" OQSTING EXISTING 'LIGHT TAUPE" 'OFF-WHITE' RSHERWIN WILLIAM EIFSW/'PRACTICAL REVEALS BEIGE' ` \ E[FS W/ ors REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION EXISTING CONDITIONS APR 29 2010 CORRECTION 1,) 1U - 012 PERMIT CENTER LTR# 0. W 0. PROPOSED SSBS ELEVATIONS TUKWILA, WA 1 DATE: 04/26/10 • Petuat rost.N. r COrWECOMEMLIA E APPROVED MAY 12 11110 City °Matta (JOIN° CIVISION PROJECT MANUAL For Super Side By Side Renovation Tukwila, WA PROJECT NO. 55252805 Program Year: 2010 Papp architecture engineering. P.C. 1811 4 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, MI 49525 616 361 2664 OFFICE 616 361-1493 FAX www.progressiveae.com RECEI\ MAR 112 PERMIT CEN 1) 1 0 7 • • • GENERAL INDEX PAGE -1 TITLE COVER SHEET General Index DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE NOS. Pages 1 thru 3 Construction Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Pages 1 thru 27 1A General Information and Bidding Information 1A -1 thru 1A -12 1B General Provisions - Mechanical & Electrical Work 1B -1 thru 1B -5 1C General Provisions for Renovation Work 1C -1 thru 1C -5 1D Proposal Form 1D -1 thru 1D -5 1E List of Drawings and Revisions Under Separate Cover 1F Exhibit "B-1" Guarantee 1F -1 Exhibit "B -2" Affidavit 1F -2 Exhibit "B -3" Final Release 1F -3 Exhibit "B -4" Tax Form 1F -4 thru 1F -7 1G Not Used 1H Quality Assurance Testing & Inspection and Surveillance by a Local Professional 1H -1 thru 1H -6 11 Alternates 11 -1 1J Owner Furnished Items 1J -1 DMSION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 2A Site Testing 2AA Soil Treatment 2B Demolition 2BB Not Used 2C Site Preparation 2D Earthwork 2E Excavation, Backfilling & Compacting for Structure 2F Excavation, Backfilling & Compaction for Utilities 2G Excavation, Backfilling & Compacting for Pavement 2H Aggregate Materials 21 Rock Removal 2J Soil Stabilization 2K Slope Protection and Erosion Control 2L Paving Base Course 2M Asphaltic Concrete Paving 2N Portland Cement Concrete Paving 20 Curbs and Sidewalks 2P Pavement Markings 2Q Sewer Structures 2R Water Distribution Systems 2S Site Gas Lines 2T Storm Sewer Systems 2U Sanitary Sewer System 2V Landscape Irrigation 2W Chain Link Fences and Gates 2X Signage 2Y Landscaping, Seeding, and Sodding 2Z Site Lighting DMSION 3 - CONCRETE 2A -1 2AA -1 2B -1 thru 2B -2 2C -1 2D -1 thru 2D -4 2E -1 thru 2E -2 2F -1 thru 2F -4 2G -1 thru 2G -3 2H -1 thru 2H -2 21 -1 21 -1 thru 2J -2 2K -1 2L -1 thru 2L -2 2M -1 thru 2M -3 2N -1 thru 2N -3 20 -1 thru 20 -3 2P -1 2Q -1 thru 2Q -2 2R -1 thru 2R -4 2S -1 thru 25 -3 2T -1 thru 2T -3 2U -1 thru 2U -3 2V -1 thru 2V -4 2W -1 thru 2W -3 2X -1 2Y -1 thru 2Y -8 2Z -1 thru 2Z -3 3A Concrete 3A -1 thru 3A -10 3B Concrete Patching DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 4A Unit Masonry Work 4B Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS 3B -1 4A -1 thru 4A -9 5A Structural Steel 5A -1 thru 5A -4 5B Steel Joist Girders 5B -1 thru 5B -2 5C Steel Joists 5C -1 thru SC -2 5D Metal Roof Deck 5D -1 thru 5D -3 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 GENERAL INDEX PAGE -2 TITLE PAGE NOS. 5E Miscellaneous Metals 5E -1 thru 5E -6 5F Cold Formed Structural Metals 5F -1 thru 5F -2 DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 6A Carpentry 6A -1 thru 6A -5 6B Architectural Woodwork 6B -1 thru 6B -3 6C Not Used DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 7A Building Perimeter Insulation 7A -1 7B Building Insulation 7B -1 7C Not Used 7D Roofing, Flashing, & Associated Sheet Metal (Built -Up) 7D -1 thru 7D -8 7E Waterproofing 7E -1 thru 7E -3 7F Roof Patching 7F -1 7G Joint Sealants 7G -1 thru 7G -2 7H Not Used 71 Not Used 7J Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems -Class PB 714 thru 7J -3 7K Not Used 7L Not Used 7M Not Used DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 8A Hollow Metal Work 8B Curtain Wall (for High Areas Only) 8C Glass and Glazing 8D Aluminum Storefront 8E Special Doors 8F Sliding Automatic Entrance Exit Doors 8G Not Used 8H Not Used 81 Finish Hardware 8J Truck Dock Doors 8K Not Used 8L Not Used DIVISION 9 — FINISHES q,..1 ^a t 8A -1 thru 8A -3 8B -1 thru 8B -3 8C -1 thru 8C -2 8D -1 thru 8D -3 8E -1 8F -1 thru 8F -2 8I -1 81 -1 9A Not Used 9B Gypsum Drywall 9B -1 thru 9B -4 9C Ceramic and Porcelain Tile 9C -1 thru 9C -3 9D Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Systems 9D -1 thru 9D -3 9E Resilient Flooring 9E -1 thru 9E -3 9F Carpeting 9F -1 9G Vinyl Wall Covering 9G -1 9H Painting 9H -1 thru 9H -8 91 Special Coatings 91 -1 thru 91 -4 9J Metal Soffits 91 -1 thru 9J -4 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10A Stainless Steel Toilet Partitions 10B Toilet Room Accessories 10A -1 thru 10A -2 10B -1 10C Wall Standards 10C -1 10D Wall & Storefront Protection 10D -1 10E Portable Fire Extinguishers 10E -1 DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT 11A Dock Seals 11A -1 11B Dock Leveler and Bumpers 11B -1 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 GENERAL INDEX TITLE DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PAGE -3 13A Exterior Building Signage DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS — NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PAGE NOS. 13A -1 thru 13A -2 15A Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements 15A -1 thru 15A -3 15B Basic Requirements for Piping Systems 15B -1 thru 15B -6 15C Plumbing Systems 15C -1 thru 15C -6 15D HVAC Systems and Equipment 15D -1 thru 15D -7 15E Air Distribution Systems and Accessories 15E -1 thru 15E -3 15F Fuel Systems 15F -1 15G Automatic Sprinklers 15G -1 thru 15G -5 15H Packaged Roof - Mounted Heating and Cooling Units 15H -1 thru 15H -6 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16A Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements 16A -1 thru 16A -8 16B Technical Requirements 16B -1 thru 16B -2 16C Lighting Systems 16C -1 thru 16C -2 16D Not Used 16E Special & Auxiliary Systems 16E -1 16F Fire Alarm 16F -1 thru 16F -9 Exhibit Zone List FA 1 thru 3 16FF Not Used 16G Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) 16G -1 thru 16G -3 16H Communications (New) 16H -1 thru 16H -3 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • 12640 -3 Form 8(b CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT REVISED 06/09/04 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT between TOYS "R" US - DELAWARE, INC. Owner and Contractor Name Contractor Dated as of: , Location: (Store Type) "R" Us — Store #xxxx Address City, State, Zip i 04/20/05 12640 -3 Form 8(b) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ii 04/20/05 • • • Form 8(b TABLE OF CONTENTS ARTICLE TITLE PAGE Preliminary Statement 1. The Contract Documents 1 2. The Work 1 3. Architect 2 4. Contractor's Duties ' 2 5. Subcontractors 6 6. Work by Owner or By Separate Contractors 6 7. Miscellaneous Provisions 7 8. Time of Performance 8 9. Examination of Documents and Site 9 10. Lien Rights 9 11. Payment to Contractor 9 12. Protection of Persons and Property 11 13. Insurance 12 14. Changes in the Work 13 15. Uncovering and Correction of Work 14 16. Accounting Records 15 17. Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion; Bonus for Early Completion 15 18. Notices 15 19. Overtime 16 20. Termination 16 21. Entire Agreement 16 12640 -3 Exhibit A - Schedule of Values Exhibit B - Labor Rates Exhibit C - Material Quantity Estimates Exhibit D - List of Drawings Exhibit E - Scope of Work / Inclusions and Agreements Exhibit F - OSHA Requirements Exhibit G - Project Schedule Exhibit H - Letter of Intent Exhibit I - Conduct Guidelines Exhibit J - MIS Construction Requirements Exhibit K - OSI Delivery Schedule Exhibit L - Lock In Policy Exhibit M - Week #3 Cutover iii 04/20/05 12640 -3 Form 8(b) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK iv 04/20/05 • • • Form 8 b CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made as of January 5, 2010, by and between TOYS "R" US - Delaware, Inc. a Delaware Corporation having an office at One Geoffrey Way, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (herein called "Owner "), and Contractor Name having an office at Contractor Address (herein called "Contractor). PRELIMINARY STATEMENT Owner is the lessee /owner of a parcel of land (herein called the "Site ") situated at: Project Address Owner desires to have a Proiect Type with related improvements (herein called the "Project ") constructed on the Site, and the Contractor has agreed to construct the Project in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. NOW, THEREFORE, Owner and Contractor, for the consideration herein set forth, hereby agree as follows: 12640 -3 v 04/20/05 12640 -3 Form 8(bi THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK vi 04/20/05 • • • Form 8(b ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 The Contract Documents (herein collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents ") consist of the following: (a) This Agreement, (b) The Drawings (herein called "Drawings "), dated Drawings Date and consisting of the following: See Exhibit "D" The general character of the detail work is shown on the Drawings, but Owner may require modifications thereto. If in any Drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder indicated by outline or note, the drawn out parts shall apply to all other like portions of the Work. (c) The Specifications (herein called "Specifications"), dated Specs Date and prepared by Architect Name. (d) The following addenda, modifications and revisions to the foregoing: Any of the Contract Documents not attached hereto are hereby incorporated by reference and shall be deemed to be of the same force and effect as if actually attached hereto. 1.2 In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between: (a) This Agreement and the Drawings or the Specifications, this Agreement shall control; (b) The Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall control; however, notes or other details on Drawings shall control over Specifications if such notes or details are not explained in the Specifications; (c) Larger scale drawings and smaller scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall control. 1.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent herewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents. Words and abbreviations which have well - known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of the Drawings, shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.5 Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications, and if, in order to install any materials or finish, it is necessary to temporarily omit certain portions of the Work in any sections thereof, Contractor shall cause such portions of the Work to be omitted until the materials and finish have been installed, and then to be completed without delay or extra cost to Owner. 1.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall be fumished, free of charge, all copies of the Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Owner may, at his option, fumish Contractor with one (1) sepia transparency of the Drawings, in which case the Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for fumishing all further copies of the Drawings. Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, alter the sepia transparency in any way whatsoever. 1.7 This Agreement shall not be construed so as to create any contractual relationship of any kind between Architect and Contractor, but Architect shall be entitled to the performance of obligations intended for his benefit, and to the enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall create any contractual relationship between Owner or Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. ARTICLE Z THE WORK 2.1 All work required pursuant to the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, all labor, materials and equipment utilized or incorporated therein, is herein called the "Work ". 2.2 The 'Work" consists of: See Exhibit "E" - Scope of Work, 12640 -3 1 04/20/05 Form 8(b) ARTICLE 3 ARCHITECT 3.1 The architect for the Project is: (herein called "Architect "). 3.2 Owner may, from time to time and at any time during the construction of the Project, designate a new Architect, and, in the event of such designation, Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof. 3.3 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.3.1 (a) Owner's Representative will administer the Contract Documents in accordance with the provisions hereof. As used herein, "Owner's Representative' shall mean any party or parties authorized or designated by Owner, as such, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Architect, Owner's Architectural Project Manager, Owner's Construction Project Manager or any other employee or designee of Owner. Owner's Representative will have authority to act on behalf of Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents. Owner's instruction to Contractor may be forwarded directly by Owner to Contractor, or through Owner's Representative. Any action, duty or responsibility authorized by Owner to be performed or undertaken by Owner's Representative may in Owner's discretion, at any time and from time to time, be performed or undertaken in whole or in part directly by Owner, in lieu of or in conjunction with Owner's Representative. (b) Unless and until Contractor is otherwise notified by Owner, Owner's Representative shall be: NAME(S): Rick Hansen — Regional Dir. of Const. (CPM Name) — Const. Project Manager ADDRESS: Toys 'R' Us — Midwest Engineering Center 2695 Plainfield Road Joliet, IL 60435 -1164 3.3.2 Architect and /or Owner's Representative may visit the Site during construction to observe the progress and quality of the Work, to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents, to protect Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and to establish the "Substantial Completion Date" and "Completion Date' (as those terms are hereinafter defined). 3.3.3 Neither the designation of Owner's Representative, nor any action taken or duty performed by Architect or Owner's Representative shall relieve Contractor of any of its responsibility hereunder. 3.3.4 Architect, Owner's Representative and Owner shall at all times have access to the Work, and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 3.3.5 Owner's Representative will, pursuant to the provisions of Article 11 recommend to Owner the amounts to be paid to Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts as provided in said Article 11. 3.3.6 Claims, disputes and other matters in question between Contractor and Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents may be referred by Owner to Architect for his recommendation, but no such recommendation shall be binding upon Owner unless Owner shall accept same, in writing, and shall notify Contractor of such acceptance. 3.3.7 All interpretations and recommendations of Architect shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be fumished in writing or in the form of drawings within a reasonable time after submission to Architect. 3.3.8 Owner's Representative and /or Owner will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 7.6.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. 3.3.9 Architect, Owner's Representative and/or Owner will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon items submitted by Contractor, including without limitation Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The approval by Architect, Owner's Representative or Owner of a specific item shall not constitute approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 3.3.10 Owner's Representative will receive and forward to Owner written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents to be provided by Contractor. 3.3.11 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of Architect and/or Owner's Representative during construction as set forth in the Contract Documents may be modified in any respect by Owner, and Contractor shall be given notice by Owner of any such modification. 12640 -3 2 04/20/05 • • • • • • Form 8(b ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES 4.1 Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with, and shall in all respects comply with, the Contract Documents. 4.2 REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall immediately report any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover to Owner and Owner's Representative. Except as may otherwise be provided in this Agreement, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.2.2 Before ordering any material or performing any of the Work, Contractor and each Subcontractor shall verify measurements at the building which apply to them, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of any inconsistency between actual measurements and the measurements indicated on any Drawing. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE 4.3.1 Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures (including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, all safety precautions and programs) and for coordinating all portions of the Work. 4.3.2 Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of his employees, subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with, or otherwise on behalf of, Contractor. 4.3.3 Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of Owner's Representative in his administration of the Contract Documents, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed pursuant to Section 7.6. 4.3.4 Contractor shall establish permanent benchmarks in not less than two widely separated places; shall establish the lines and levels of the Work upon substantial batter boards, and shall be responsible for their continued accuracy during the progress of the Work. 4.3.5 Contractor shall at all times keep on the Site a complete and accurate level transit and rod in good working condition and shall allow Architect and Owner's Representative the unrestricted use of the same. 4.3.6 Owner or Architect shall provide Contractor with a survey of the Site showing, among other things, property lines, comer stakes, roads, utilities and sewer facilities. Using the established survey points, Contractor shall locate the building, sewer lines and other construction features at locations to be approved by Owner. Contractor shall set up batter boards as required by Paragraph 4.3.4 and shall establish and maintain the elevation called for. Upon completion, Contractor shall fumish Owner with reproducible sepias of (1) a site plan accurately marked to show all buried services and facilities, (2) as built drawings showing the location of the facilities within the structure, and (3) a final survey, prepared by a surveyor licensed to do business in the state in which the Project is located, indicating the exterior location and layout of all buildings, structures and other improvements comprising the Project. Contractor shall be liable for failure to maintain the minimum clearance, set -backs and similar requirements of applicable codes, ordinances, leases, or other agreements and/or goveming authorities. 4.3.7 Contractor shall be responsible for all locations, dimensions and levels, and no instructions or orders received from any source, other than the information contained in the surveys, plot drawings and Specifications, or on written orders of Owner, shall justify departure from the dimensions and levels required by the Drawings. 4.3.8 Contractor shall employ a competent surveyor, licensed by the state in which the Site is located and acceptable to Owner, to take measurements at the Site and establish all lines, levels and benchmarks, all of which shall be verified with drawings. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall be responsible for the proper laying out and location of the Work. 4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 4.4.2 Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. 12640 -3 3 04/20/05 Form 8 b 4.4.3 All material shall be arranged and maintained in an orderly manner on the Site. The streets, sidewalks, and other passageways are to be left open for traffic, or maintained in accordance with instructions of local building authorities. Contractor shall allot suitable and proper space to his Subcontractors for storage of their materials, equipment and supplies. 4.4.4 Contractor shall use local labor and materials to the extent possible and practicable without causing any delay in or damage to the Work. Owner assumes no responsibility and shall not be deemed to have any liability for any delays, poor workmanship or faulty materials resulting from or in any way attributable to such use. 4.4.5 Contractor and any Subcontractor shall make all provisions necessary to avoid any disputes with labor unions and shall be responsible for any delays, damages, or extra costs incurred as a result of such disputes. 4.4.6 Contractor shall keep the working areas of the Site free of standing water, providing all pumps, maintenance and means of removal necessary to accomplish same, and also shall arrange for the removal of snow and ice from the approaches to the Site in order to keep the Site clear and unobstructed. 4.4.7 Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, alter and remove all runways, planks, walks, ladders, rigging, barricades, shores, rails, hoists, derricks, scaffolding, and other equipment and apparatus necessary for the proper and expeditious performance of the Work, in compliance with all applicable laws. 4.4.8 Contractor shall remove all rubbish resulting from the performance of the Work on a daily basis, and shall keep all adjacent streets and driveways clear and unobstructed at all times. Upon completion of construction, Contractor shall remove all waste, surplus material, debris, construction equipment, machinery and tools relating to this Contract from the Site and the Project. Adjoining land shall be left in a clean and neat condition. Contractor shall wash and /or clean all floors, walls, ceilings, and both sides of glass and glazing, before final acceptance of the Work by Owner. 4.4.9 Water required for the performance of the Work shall be provided by Contractor who shall pay maintenance costs, obtain necessary permits, pay all fees required, and provide temporary water where necessary. 4.4.10 Contractor shall provide and install ample temporary toilet accommodations, in accordance with all applicable govemmental requirements, for the use of all workers at the Site and shall maintain same in a clean, sanitary and functioning condition at all times. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove all temporary toilet accommodations. 4.4.11 Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for all temporary wiring, transformers, meters, lamps, lighting and electric power in sufficient amount required for the performance of the Work, and shall provide temporary electric light and power sufficient in Owner's judgment for store fixture installation in the building. 4.4.12 Contractor shall pay all charges for utilities up to and including the date prior to the date on which the Work shall be fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature. Contractor shall cause all utilities to be connected, turned on and ready for use by Owner by the date prior to the Substantial Completion Date. 4.4.13 Contractor shall fumish, pay for and maintain temporary heat for all workers at the Site when the outside temperature is below 50 degrees F. in order to protect the Work from freezing and to prevent any delay in the performance of the Work. 4.4.14 Contractor shall arrange for the heating and ventilating equipment in all areas to be in operation as soon as the building interior is complete, and shall provide meter and electrical service for temporary power for these areas until completion. Prior to completion of the building interior, Contractor shall provide Owner's personnel with proper Instruction for the operating procedures for all such equipment. 4.4.15 Contractor shall cooperate with and work in harmony with all other contractors engaged in the installation of features not included in this Contract, but necessary or proper, in Owner's sole judgment, to the completion of the Project. Any dispute or misunderstanding relating to the foregoing shall be submitted to Owner, and Contractor shall comply with Owner's directions given in connection therewith. 4.4.16 If any exterior areas are designated on the site plan for the storage and transporting of materials and equipment, Contractor shall utilize only such areas for such purposes. 4.4.17 Prior to "Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), Contractor shall deliver to Owner's Representative all books, brochures and lists of manufacturer's operating instructions for all operable equipment included in the building and, in addition, shall thoroughly acquaint Owner with all maintenance and operational requirements of said equipment. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished pursuant to the Contract Documents will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may, at Owner's Representative's discretion, be considered defective. If required by Owner, Contractor shall fumish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Section 15.2. 12640 -3 4 04/20/05 • • • Form 8 b 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes relating to the Work or portions thereof performed by Contractor. provided such taxes had been legally enacted at the time bids were received, but regardless of whether or not they were effective at such time. 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall secure the building permit at Owner's expense and shall secure at Contractor's expense all other permits and govemmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, including, without limitation, any permit, license or inspection which may be necessary to allow Owner to commence its fuduring and merchandising operations and other preparatory work necessary or proper to enable the Project to be in full operation for its intended purposes no later than the day following the Completion Date, and a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of occupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction). 4.7.2 If Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance in any respect with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any govemmental authority, he shall promptly notify Owner's Representative to enable Owner to make any necessary or appropriate modifications. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for and bear all costs attributable to the performance of any Work known by Contractor to be contrary to any such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders, unless prior written notice to such effect has been given to Owner's Representative and Owner, and Owner has failed or refused to make necessary or appropriate modifications. 4.8 ALLOWANCES 4.8.1 Contractor shall include in the Project Cost all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as Owner may direct. 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, these allowances are intended to cover the actual cost to Contractor of the materials and equipment covered by the allowance, reflecting any applicable trade discount and including the cost of delivery to the Site and all applicable taxes. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowance shall be included in the Project Cost and not in the allowance. Whenever the actual cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Project Cost shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT AND PROJECT MANAGER 4.9.1 Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent, a competent project manager and necessary assistants (all of whom must be acceptable to Owner) to supervise the Work and who shall be in attendance at the Site until completion of the Work. The superintendent and the project manager shall represent Contractor and all communications given to either the superintendent or the project manager shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Unless otherwise provided herein, all such communications shall be in writing. The names and qualifications of the superintendent and the project manager which Contractor wishes to employ shall be supplied to Owner simultaneously with Contractor's execution of this Agreement. 4.9.2 Neither the superintendent nor the project manager shall be transferred from this Project to another without the consent of Owner. 4.9.3 Without limiting Contractor's obligations pursuant to Paragraph 4.2.1, the superintendent and the project manager shall carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and advise Owner's Representative of any inconsistency or discrepancy that may appear before proceeding with the Work. 4.9.4 The superintendent and the project manager shall, at all times, enforce good order among all workers, and shall relieve from employment on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him. 4.9.5 Owner shall have the right to refuse admittance to the Site to any employee of Contractor or its Subcontractors whose presence Owner or Owner's Representative, in either's' sole judgment, deems hostile to Owner's interest. 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.10.1 Contractor, simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement, shall submit to Owner a proposed progress schedule for the Work providing for the expeditious and practicable performance thereof and setting forth commencement and completion dates for the different portions of the Work, broken down according to the Specifications subsections (which progress schedule, as approved by Owner, is herein called the "Progress Schedule"). 4.10.2 Contractor, simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement, shall submit to Owner a proposed manpower chart for the Work providing for the expeditious and practicable performance thereof and setting forth manpower requirements for different portions of the Work, broken down by major trades and/or Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors (which manpower chart, as approved by Owner, is herein called the "Manpower Chart"). The Manpower Chart shall be in a form satisfactory to Owner and which may be easily revised for both planned and actual manpower utilized during the execution of the Work. 12640 -3 5 04/20/05 Form 8(b) 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.11.1 Contractor shall maintain at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to Architect, Owner and Owner's Representative, and shall be delivered to Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate a portion of the Work. 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for a portion of the Work. 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.12.4 Contractor shall thoroughly review all Shop Drawings, clearly marking all discrepancies of design concept, compliance with Contract Documents, dimensions, fabrication processes, techniques of construction and coordination of the work of all trades, and shall stamp drawings with corrections or approval noted thereon, and submit five (5) copies of same to Architect and Owner's Representative with reasonable promptness, in order to avoid delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. 4.12.5 Shop Drawings of all Subcontractors shall be thoroughly reviewed, approved and submitted by Contractor to Architect and Owner's Representative, all in accordance with Paragraph 4.12.4 hereof. 4.12.6 Contractor's approval and submission to Architect and Owner's Representative of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall constitute a representation by Contractor that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 4.12.7 Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect's, Owner's or Owner's Representative's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Paragraph 3.3.9 unless Contractor has specifically informed Architect and Owner's Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect and Owner have given written approval specifically thereto. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Architect's Owner's or Owner's Representative's approval thereof. 4.12.8 Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions, other than those requested by Owner's Representative on previous submittals. 4.12.9 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative as provided in Paragraph 3.3.9. All such portions of the Work shall be performed in accordance with approved submittals, as such approvals may, from time to time, be modified by Owner. 4.13 USE OF SITE 4.13.1 Contractor shall confine operations at the Site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site with any materials or equipment. 4.13.2 Contractor shall provide two (2) separate construction trailers at the Site, each in a location as close to the construction area as practical and otherwise acceptable to Owner. One such trailer shall serve as a Project field office for Contractor and Contractor's supervisory personnel and the other trailer shall serve as a Project field office for Owner's Representative, Architect and other personnel of Owner. Each trailer shall be of the dimensions and shall include the fumishings and equipment set forth in Sections 1C -3(C) and 1C -4(D), respectively, of the Supplementary General Provisions of the Specifications, and shall otherwise comply with said Sections of the Specifications. 4.13.3 All telephones and photocopy and fax machines required to be provided by Contractor under Sections 1C -3(C) and 1C- 4(D) of the Supplementary General Provisions of the Specifications shall be maintained at Contractor's expense until the "Completion Date" (as that term is defined in Section 8.1.3). Their use for calls, photocopying and fax transmissions shall be free of charge to Owner's Representative, Architect and other personnel of Owner. 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.14.1 Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. Such work shall be performed by skilled mechanics. 4.14.2 Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portions of the Work or the work of Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any portion of the Work or any such separate work, or by excavation. Contractor shall not cut 12640 -3 6 04/20/05 • • • • • • Form 8(b or otherwise alter the work of Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of Owner and of such separate contractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner shall have the right to cut or otherwise alter the Work without the consent of Contractor. 4.14.3 Work that may be cut, damaged, disturbed or otherwise interfered with during progress of the Work of various trades shall be fully, property and carefully repaired by the trade responsible for such cutting, damage or disturbances, made good in a first -class manner to the satisfaction of Owner, and shall match similar existing adjoining work. 4.14.4 Cut, patched or altered structural framing, or other materials providing structural support, shall be properly braced and shored throughout the performance of the Work. 4.14.5 Mechanical and electrical contractors shall perform all of their cutting to limits as prescribed by Contractor. 4.15 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.15.1 Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall be responsible for all such Toss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; but if Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent; he shall be responsible for such loss unless he shall promptly give such information to Architect and Owner. 4.16 INDEMNIFICATION 4.16.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Architect and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attomey's fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is alleged or claimed to be caused in whole or part by any willful or negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, Owner or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not alleged or claimed to be caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 4.16.2 In any and all claims against Owner or Architect or any of their agents or employees by any employee of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligations under this Section 4.16 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any Subcontractor under worker's or workmen's' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.16.3 Nothing contained in this Section 4.16 shall constitute, or be deemed or construed to constitute, a modification, alteration or limitation of Contractor's liability and responsibility as set forth in Sections 6.2 and 10.3 hereof, it being understood and agreed by Contractor that such liability and responsibility shall be In addition to Contractor's obligations under this Section 4.16. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the Site or to fumish any materials or equipment to the Contractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the Site or to fumish any materials or equipment to such Subcontractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, simultaneously with Contractor's execution of this Agreement Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a list setting forth the names of the proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers, with no more than three (3) names for each portion of the Work. Owner or Owner's Representative shall, promptly thereafter, notify Contractor if he objects to any such proposed Subcontractor, it being understood and agreed that Owner or Owner's Representative has the right, in either's' sole discretion, to reject any proposed Subcontractor. Within five (5) days after Contractor's execution of this Agreement, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, of the specific Subcontractors and Suppliers selected by Contractor. 5.2.2 If Owner or Owner's Representative objects to any such proposed person or entity, Contractor shall delete his name from the list of proposed Subcontractors, and may submit the name of a substitute for acceptance by Owner. Owner shall have the right, at no increased cost to Owner, to require Contractor to subcontract with any such proposed Subcontractors designated by Owner. 5.2.3 The subcontracting of any portion of the Work and Owner's approval thereof shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for the improper performance thereof or any other responsibility under the Contract Documents. 12640 -3 7 04/20/05 Form 8(b 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume for the benefit of Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has assumed. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in said agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against Owner. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with his Sub - subcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound pursuant to this Section 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such documents available to his Sub - subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 Owner reserves the right to perform portions of the Work required to complete the Project with its own forces or separate contractors, and to award separate contracts in connection therewith. Any claim by Contractor that such action by Owner will result in delay or additional cost shall be made as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITIES 6.2.1 Contractor shall afford Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate the Work with their work as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the work of Owner or any separate contractor, Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify Owner's Representative of any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor to give such notice shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of its right to object that such work was not fit and proper to receive his work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be bome by the party responsible therefor, except that each Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed by him or by any of his Subcontractors. 6.2.4 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to any of the work or property on the Site, Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage in accordance with Paragraph 12.2.5. 6.2.5 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, Contractor shall promptly correct same at his sole cost and expense. If such separate contractor sues Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by Contractor, Owner shall so notify Contractor who shall defend, indemnify and hold Owner harmless from and against any and all claims, judgments, awards or other liability resulting from damage caused or allegedly caused by Contractor. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 This Agreement shall be govemed by laws of the state where the Site is located. 1 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, Contractor shall have no right to assign this Agreement. 7.3 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.3.1 Should either party hereto suffer injury or damage because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury or damage. 12640 -3 8 04/20/05 • • • Form 8(b 7.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.4.1 If required by Owner, Contractor shall, at Owner's expense, fumish bonds covering the faithful performance of this Agreement and the payment of all obligations arising hereunder. Such payment and performance bonds shall be in such amounts and issued by such bonding or surety company or companies as may be designated by Owner. 7.5 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.5.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available at law. 7.5.2 No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract Documents, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence to any breach thereunder, except as may otherwise be expressly provided in this Agreement or specifically confirmed in writing. 7.6 TESTS 7.6.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor shall give Owner's Representative timely notice of its readiness so that Owner's Representative and/or Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals conducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or approvals. 7.6.2 If Owner's Representative determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Paragraph 7.6.1 does not cover, he will, upon written authorization from Owner, instruct Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and Contractor shall give notice as provided in Paragraph 7.6.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract bocuments, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including inspection fees and compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary buy such failure; otherwise Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.6.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered by him to Owner's Representative. 7.6.4 If Architect and/or Owner's Representative is to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he shall do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 7.6.5 Contractor shall not be entitled to interest on any monies due hereunder or any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute or other matter in question. 7.7 INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR 7.7.1 Prior to submission of Contractor's bid, Contractor shall examine all locations and areas where Work is to be done, and shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions which would be detrimental to the proper installation of any portion of the Work. 7.8 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS 7.8.1 Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative certificates or affidavits from all manufacturers of materials used, certifying that materials conform to the requirements of the Specifications. 7.9 USAGE 7.9.1 Wherever the words "or equal," "similar to," or words of similar meaning are mentioned, they shall mean that the quality of materials, appliances or workmanship to which they refer shall be equal in the opinion of Owner. 7.9.2 Contractor shall base his bid on the name or make of any article, device, material, form of construction, fixture, or similar item specified in the Specifications unless the term "or equal" is used. 7.9.3 After entering into this Agreement, substitutions will be considered for proprietary brands specified, other than those listed on a "Substitution Sheet" submitted with the bids, only if evidence that the proposed substitution is equal to the specified item is submitted to Owner's Representative and such substitution is approved in writing by Owner. 7.9.4 Owner reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, to reject any and all bids. 7.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 7.11.1 Contractor hereby acknowledges that it has established its bid for the Project based upon the quantities of materials set forth on Exhibit C attached hereto and made a part hereof and that Owner has entered into this Agreement in reliance upon Contractor's assurances to Owner that such quantities represent Contractor's good faith estimate of the requirements for the Project as determined by the exercise of sound construction practices. 12640 -3 9 04/20/05 Form 8 b 7.11.2 The construction of the Project shall be solely at Contractor's risk conceming the damage or Toss of any equipment or materials incorporated into the Work or located on the Site, except to the extent such damage or loss is to real property covered by the insurance Owner is required to carry pursuant to Paragraph 13.2.1. 7.11.3 Owner's Code of Ethical Standards and Business Practices and Conduct (the "Policy") requires that the selection of a vendor or other supplier of goods and services to Owner must be based on quality, need, performance and cost. Owner's Policy further prohibits the acceptance from suppliers by Owner's employees or agents of gifts or gratuities, whether in the form of money, merchandise, services, lavish entertainment, travel or any other form. If any employee or agent of Owner shall solicit from Contractor, or any of Contractors employees or agents, any such gifts or gratuities , it shall be Contractor's obligation and responsibility to promptly notify Owner of any such solicitation. Such notice shall be sent to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.1 hereof, except that no copy of such notice shall be sent to Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 8 TIME OF PERFORMANCE 8.1 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION 8.1.1 The Work shall be commenced within 3 calendar days after Owner's Representative notifies Contractor (which notice may be given verbally) that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon, and shall progress in accordance with the Progress Schedule. If the Site is not ready for the work to be commenced thereon by January 2. 2001 then all dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall automatically be deemed extended for a period equivalent to the number of days between said date and the date that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon. 8.1.2 Owners Representative's determination that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon shall be binding upon Contractor unless, within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of notice of such determination, Contractor notifies Owner of its objection thereto (which notice shall be given verbally, but shall immediately thereafter be followed up in writing in accordance with Article 18). 8.1.3 The Work shall be substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof no later than March 1. 2001 (herein called the "Substantial Completion Date "). The Work shall be fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, no later than March 15, 2001 (herein called the "Completion Date "). Contractor shall complete the work on all such punch list items within the time period specified in Paragraph 11.7.1, except that no such work shall be performed during the months of November and December without the prior written consent of Owner. 8.1.4 The Work shall be deemed to be substantially completed when the Work has been completed (including the procurement by Contractor of a Certificate of Occupancy or other occupancy permit, if required by the govemmental authority having jurisdiction) to such an extent as to allow Owner, without interference or interruption resulting from continuance of the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, to commence and perform its fixturing and merchandising operations and other preparatory work in order that the Project may be in full operation for its intended purposes (including the issuance of a permanent certificate of occupancy or its equivalent) no later than the day following the Completion Date, with nothing other than minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, remaining to be done on the Completion Date, and Owner's Representative has certified to such effect. Contractor shall, on the Substantial Completion Date, fumish Owner with a complete set of keys sufficient to provide Owner independent access to the Project, but delivery of such keys to Owner shall not constitute, or be deemed or construed to constitute acceptance by Owner of the Work or the Project, in whole or in part. 8.1.5 If the Work is not being performed in compliance with the Progress Schedule, Owner shall have the right, in addition to any other rights it may have, to: (a) give notice to Contractor compelling him to perform the Work on an overtime basis (which shall include weekends, if necessary), at no additional cost to Owner, in order to assure that the Substantial Completion Date and Completion Date are met, and Contractor shall promptly comply with any such notice, whether or not Owner shall have exercised the foregoing right; or (b) assume responsibility for the construction of the Project in accordance with Article 20 hereof and Contractor shall be liable to Owner for all damages sustained by Owner as a result of Contractor's failure to comply. In addition, Owner shall have the right to apply amounts previously retained from the Progress Payments to costs incurred by Owner in performing the Work. Failure of Owner to exercise its rights pursuant hereto shall not be deemed a waiver thereof, nor prevent Owner from exercising such rights at a later date. Contractor shall insert in all agreements between Contractor and any Subcontractor a provision whereby the Subcontractor recognizes the right of Owner to assume responsibility for the construction of the Project, with such agreements to continue as direct agreements between Owner and the Subcontractor. 8.1.6 Unless otherwise provided, all of the dates and time periods set forth herein are of the essence of this Agreement. 8.2 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.2.1 If Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or negligence of Owner or an employee of Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by delay authorized by Owner, then the dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall, subject to Paragraph 8.2.2, be appropriately extended. 12640 -3 10 04/20/05 • • • • • • Form 8 b 8.2.2 Any claim for extension of time pursuant to Paragraph 8.2.1 shall be made in writing to Owner's Representative not more than two (2) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of any such delay on the progress of the Work at the time such claim is made. 8.2.3 This section 8.2 does not exclude the recovery of damages for the delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE 9.1 Contractor acknowledges that before making his proposal he carefully examined the Contract Documents, the Site and the surrounding area, and that he is fully informed regarding all of the conditions affecting the work to be done and labor and materials to be fumished in connection herewith. Contractor further acknowledges that he has not relied on any representations or estimates which may have been made by Owner or Architect (or any of its or their representatives, agents or employees), and Contractor shall make no claim against Owner by reason of any such representation or estimate. ARTICLE 10 LIEN RIGHTS 10.1 Contractor hereby stipulates and agrees that any and all of its lien rights, however created, now existing or which may exist in the future, are and shall be subject and subordinate to: (a) all existing mortgages affecting the Site, including future advances thereon; (b) all interim, construction and permanent mortgages, including future advances thereon, given in connection with the financing of (or reimbursement for) all or any part of the cost of the acquisition of the Site and the construction of the Project; (c) all existing or future grants, easements, rights of way, and dedications affecting all or any part of the Site; (d) all existing or future leases covering all or. any part of the Site; (e) all renewals, replacements, extensions or modifications of any of the foregoing. 10.2 Contractor shall not, at any time, suffer or permit any lien, attachment, notice of intention to lien, stop notice, mechanic's lien or other similar lien or encumbrance permitted under the law of the jurisdiction in which the Site is located (all of the foregoing being herein individually and collectively called "Contractor's Uen") filed or served upon Owner by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, to remain on file against the Site, the improvements thereon, or money due or to become due for any work performed or materials fumished in connections with the construction of the Project, or to otherwise establish or create any liability or potential liability as between Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. In the event a Contractor's lien is so filed or served, whether during or after the performance of the Work, Contractor shall cause same to be released or discharged of record or otherwise eliminated, by bonding or otherwise, at no cost or expense to Owner, within ten (10) days after Contractor receives notice of such filing or service, failing which, until same has been so released, discharged or eliminated, Owner may, at its option, in addition to any other remedies available to it, withhold any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement or cause same to be so released, discharged or eliminated, in which event Contractor shall, promptly on demand, reimburse Owner for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, failing which, Owner may deduct all such costs and expenses from any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement. 10.3 Contractor hereby agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all loss, cost, damage or expense (including attomeys' fees) arising out of or in any way resulting from any claim, suit, action or other proceeding instituted against Owner or the Project by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, whether or not such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be instituted in connection with any Contractor's Uen. 10.4 In the event either party to this Agreement shall institute any claim, suit, action or other proceeding involving the other party hereto, then the party prevailing in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be entitled to recover and receive from the non - prevailing party all costs and expenses (including attomeys' fees) actually incurred by the prevailing party in prosecuting or defending, as the case may be, its interest in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. Such recovery shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other relief to which the prevailing party may be entitled in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. ARTICLE 11 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR 11.1 PROJECT COST 11.1.1 Contractor agrees to perform the Work and to complete the Project, all in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the total cost (the "Project Cost ") set forth on Exhibit A attached hereto and made a part hereof. Contractor acknowledges that the Project Cost includes all costs and expenses, including, without limitation, for labor, material, equipment rentals and payments to Subcontractors, plus profit and overhead. Owner shall pay to Contractor the Project Cost, as hereinafter provided. Except as provided in Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof, Owner's liability for payment to Contractor pursuant hereto shall in no event exceed the Project Cost. 11.1.2 If Contractor's costs and expenses exceed the Project Cost, then the amount of such excess shall be paid by Contractor without reimbursement by Owner; except that, if Owner, pursuant to approved change order(s), has required changes in the scope 12640 -3 11 04/20/05 Form 8(b) of the Work, and if such changes have resulted in a net increase in Contractor's costs and expenses (after taking into account all such changes), then Owner shall pay Contractor the net amount by which Contractor's cost and expenses were thereby increased. 112 DRAW REQUESTS 11.2.1 On or before the tenth (10th) day of each month, Contractor shall request payment by delivering to Owner's Representative (personal delivery or delivery by regular mail shall be permitted) AIA Document G702- Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G702A- Continuation Sheets (herein called "Draw Request"), together with all supporting documentation necessary to verify the items and amounts included in the Draw Request. With each Draw Request, Contractor shall submit an updated schedule, in the form of a bar graph, showing the actual (or estimated) time for commencement and completion of the different portions of the Work broken down according to the Specifications subsections, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by Owner's Representative. 11.2.2 Contractor warrants that; (i) title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by each Draw Request will pass to Owner either by incorporation into the Project or upon the receipt of payment by Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to in this Article 11 as "liens "; and (ii) no Work, materials or equipment covered by any Draw Request will have been acquired by Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the Site or fumishing materials and equipment for the Project, for or on behalf of Contractor, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or provider thereof or is otherwise imposed by or on Contractor or such other person. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments will not be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated into the Project. 11.2.3 Within five (5) days after the date hereof, Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a schedule of values allocated to each portion of the Work according to the various subheadings of the Specifications, prepared on Practical Standard Form for Contractors No. 591 (or such other form as Owner's Representative may designate) and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Owners Representative may require. The total of all amounts set forth in the schedule of values shall equal the Project Cost and shall be used in verifying the amounts contained in the Draw Requests. 11.3 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 11.3.1 Owner's Representative will, within seven (7) days after the receipt of each Draw Request, either issue a Certificate for Payment to Owner, with a copy to Contractor, for such amount as Owner's Representative considers to be properly due, or notify the Contractor in writing of his reasons for withholding the Certificate for Payment in accordance with Paragraph 11.4.1. 11.3.2 By issuing a Certificate for Payment, Owner's Representative shall not hereby be deemed to represent that he has made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work or that he has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or that he has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used any payments previously made. 11.4 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 11.4.1 Owner's Representative may withhold his Certificate for Payment, in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner, if, in Owner's Representative's opinion, he is unable to represent to Owner that: (i) the Work has progressed to the point indicated in the Draw Request; (ii) to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to later evaluation, to subsequent tests, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications set forth in his Certificate); and (iii) the Contractor is entitled to payment. If Owners Representative is unable to make such representations and to certify payment in the amount of the Draw Request, he will notify Contractor as provided in Paragraph 11.3.1. If Contractor and Owner's Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, Owner's Representative will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount, if any, for which it is able to make such representations to Owner. Owner's Representative may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: (a) defective work not remedied; (b) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; (c) failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; (d) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Project Cost; (e) damage to Owner or another contractor, (f) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed in accordance with the Progress Schedule; or (g) persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 11.5.1 Within thirty (30) days after receipt by Owner of a Certificate for Payment, Owner shall either (i) approve same and pay Contractor the approved amount less ten percent (10 %) of said amount, which shall be retained until the Final Payment is made (such payment being herein called a "Progress Payment ") or (ii) disapprove same and notify Contractor in writing of the reasons for such disapproval. 11.5.2 Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, on account of that portion of such Subcontractor's work completed through the date of Contractor's then current Draw Request, the amount to which such Subcontractor Is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments by Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work. Contractor shall, by an 12640 -3 12 04/20/05 • • • Form 8(b appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 11.5.3 Owner's Representative may, at its discretion, fumish to any Subcontractor information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by Contractor and the action taken thereon account of work done by such Subcontractor. 11.5.4 Owner shall have no obligations to pay or to see to the payment of any money to any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may, in his discretion, make all or any portion of any Progress Payment by check payable jointly to the order of Contractor and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor which is entitled to payment on account of such Subcontractor's or Sub - subcontractor's work. Nothing herein shall be construed to permit Contractor to withhold or delay payment to any Subcontractor not involved in disputed amount pending receipt of payment to Contractor by Owner. 11.5.5 Prior to or simultaneously with the submission of any Draw Request, Contractor shall deliver to Owner's Representative unconditional waivers or releases (in form satisfactory to Owner) of all liens or other claims relating to items covered by the Progress Payment made with respect to such Draw Request, together with affidavits in form and substance acceptable to Owner from each Subcontractor certifying that payment was made by Contractor to Subcontractor in the proper amounts. Until such waivers, releases or affidavits have been delivered, Owner shall have the right to refuse to make any further Progress Payments. 11.5.6 No Certificate for Payment, nor any Progress Payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by Owner, shall constitute an acceptance by Owner of any Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11.6 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 11.6.1 If Owner's Representative does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of Contractor, within seven (7) days after receipt of a Draw Request, or, subject to Paragraphs 11.5.1 and 11.5.5, if Owner does not pay Contractor within thirty (30) days after approval of a Certificate for Payment, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been made. 11.7 PUNCH LISTS 11.7.1 Within a reasonable time after the Work has been fully completed, subject to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, Owner's Representative may prepare a punch list setting forth those items of work remaining to be completed, or those items to be repaired or replaced. Subject to Paragraph 8.1.3, Contractor shall promptly perform all work set forth on said punch list, completing same within fourteen (14) days after receipt thereof, failing which, without the giving of additional notice to Contractor, Owner shall have the right to perform same and deduct the cost hereof from the Final Payment. Nothing herein shall limit Contractor's obligations pursuant to Section 15.2. 11.7.2 Upon full completion of the Work, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, and upon ,application by Contractor and certification by Owner's Representative, Owner may, at Owner's discretion (but taking into account any bonds of the type enumerated in Paragraph 11.8.2(f) still outstanding) make payment reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Contract Documents. 11.8 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 11.8.1 Upon completion by Contractor of all work, set forth on the punch list referred to in Paragraph 11.7.1 hereof, Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a final Draw Request. Upon approval by Owner's Representation of said final Draw Request and receipt thereof by Owner, Owner shall promptly make or cause to be made a final inspection of the Work and, if, in Owner's view, the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items) in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractor's obligations thereunder have been fully performed, he will make the "Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), in accordance with and subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.8.2 hereof and the Guarantee Retention as provided in Section 11.8.5.below. 11.8.2 Owner shall pay the entire amount remaining to be paid pursuant to this Agreement, including any retainage (other than the Guarantee Retention as provided in Section 11.8.5.below), (herein called the "Final Payment "), within thirty (30) days after all of the following shall have occurred: (a) Receipt by Owner of a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of occupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction) permitting the use of the Project for its intended purposes. (b) Receipt by Owner of the final Draw Request, setting forth the amount of the Final Payment and approved by Owner's Representative (which approval shall indicate that to the best of Owner's Representative's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observations and inspections, the Work has been fully completed, including the completion of all punch list items, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the Final Payment is due and payable). (c) Receipt by Owner of an affidavit of Contractor that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, and such other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, unconditional releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract Documents, to the extent and in such form as may be required by Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by Owner, Contractor, at no cost to Owner, shall fumish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If any such lien is filed and remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, Contractor shall refund to Owner, promptly on demand, all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attomeys' fees; (d) Receipt by Owner of consent of the surety, if any, to Final Payment. 12640 -3 13 04/20/05 Form 8(b) (e) Receipt by Owner of all warranties, guarantees and as -built drawings relating to the Work required under the Plans and Specifications or under any of the other Contract Documents. (f) Acceptance by Owner of the Work as being fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), which acceptance shall be acknowledged in writing; (g) Return to Owner of all payment or performance bonds (or other security) paid for by Owner and deposited with any govemmental authority having jurisdiction to secure the performance of any portion of the Work required by such govemmental authority. (h) Receipt by Owner of fully completed cost collection sheet as provided in the Specifications. 11.8.3 The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Owner of all claims against Contractor arising out of the performance of the Work, except those arising from: (a) unsettled liens filed prior to the date Final Payment is made, all liens filed thereafter, (b) faulty or defective Work, regardless of when appearing; (c) failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; (d) terms of any special warranties or guarantees required by the Contract Documents; (e) claims relating to the liability of Contractor under the Contract Documents which, either by their nature or pursuant to the Contract Documents, are intended to survive Final Payment; (f) any audit by Owner of Contractor's books and records relating to sums paid by Owner to Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof; or (g) claims against the Guarantee Retention as provided In Section 11.8.5. 11.8.4 The acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims against Owner arising out of the performance of the Work other than as provided in Section 11.8.5. 11.8.5 Notwithstanding anything in this Contract to the contrary, the Final Payment shall be subject to the Guarantee Retention set forth in Section 1.24.3 of the "General Provisions" of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 12.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 12.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.2.1 Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees performing any portion of the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; (b) all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and (c) other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 12.2.2 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 12.2.3 Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other wamings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 12.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 12.2.5 Subject to Section 13.2, Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1 caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which Contractor is responsible under subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1, except damage or loss attributable to the acts or omissions of Owner, Owner's Representative or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of Contractor. The foregoing obligations of Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Section 4.16. 12.2.6 Contractor's superintendent, or another responsible member of Contractor's organization at the Site designated by Contractor in writing to Owner shall be responsible for the prevention of accidents. 12640 -3 14 04/20/05 • • • • • • Form 8 b 12.2.7 Contractor shall: (a) Protect the excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, back up from drains and sewers and all other water. (b) Provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing required for the proper execution of the Work, and have same removed when the Work is completed. (c) Provide and maintain guard lights at all barricades, railings, obstructions in the street, sidewalks and all trenches or pits adjacent to walks or streets, in accordance with all applicable codes or requirements. (d) Protect all underground and above ground utility lines, including gas, telephone, electricity, water, sewage and storm drains. In addition, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative of any utility encountered which is not indicated or is indicated incorrectly. (e) Provide protection against the elements at all times, so as to maintain all Work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage therefrom. At the end of each day, all new work likely to be damaged shall be covered. (f) Provide and maintain suitable fire protection equipment which shall be subject to approval of the local fire authorities. (9) Erect and maintain all necessary and proper temporary dustproof enclosures, screens, fences, barriers, guards, lights and other protective devices for the prevention of accidents and for the protection of the workmen and the public in accordance with the requirements of all govemmental authorities having jurisdiction, and post danger signs waming against the hazards created by performance of the Work. Contractor shall observe all laws and regulations relating to obstructing the street, keeping passageways open and protecting the same where they are exposed and may be dangerous to the public, the Work or employees of other contractors. Contractor shall plank or bridge passageways, place proper guards upon and around the same, and take such other measures as may be necessary to prevent accidents. All excavations, embankments, materials, rubbish heaps and other obstacles, and encumbrances incident to the Work must be strongly barricaded and their presence clearly indicated by red or amber blinking or buming lights, which shall continuously operate between sunset and sunrise. (h) Be responsible for the management, care and maintenance of the Site and except as may be otherwise expressly provided herein, shall be solely responsible for damage thereto and pay for any and all injury to persons or property incident to or on account of the execution of the Work as a result of this Contract, and shall adjust all claims or suits arising therefrom, without loss, expense or annoyance to Owner or Architect. 12.3 EMERGENCIES 12.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall take such measures as may be reasonably necessary to prevent potential damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 14 for changes in the Work. ARTICLE 13 INSURANCE 13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13.1.1 Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect Owner and Contractor from claims arising out of or as a result of Contractor's operations under the Contract Documents, whether directly performed by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of the location of such operation or act, the place of business of contractor or subcontractor. the state of incorporation of any contractor or subcontractor or the state of residency of any employee or worker. Such insurance shall include, but not be limited to: (a) workers' compensation insurance, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit coverages (including similar coverage for any class of employees engaged in hazardous work at the Site who are not protected under the applicable workers' compensation statute). The worker's compensation policy must satisfy the statutory limits of the state in which the work is to be performed, with employer's liability limits of $500,000.00; (b) comprehensive general liability insurance, including contractual liability coverage, in an amount not less than $3,000,000.00 for personal and bodily injury to all persons in any one occurrence and for damage to property; and (c) motor vehicle liability coverage, with coverage limits not less than the amounts required by subparagraph (b) above. 13.1.2 Certificates of insurance, satisfactory to Owner and naming Owner as an additional insured, (except for worker's compensation) shall be delivered to Owner prior to the commencement of Work, and said certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled without thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Owner. 13.1.3 All insurance required to be carried by Contractor pursuant hereto shall be taken out with insurance companies approved by Owner in advance and licensed to do business in the state in which the Work is to be performed. 13.2 PROPERTY INSURANCE 13.2.1 Unless otherwise provided, Owner may, but shall not be required to, maintain with respect to the entire Work at the site property insurance coverage of such type and in such amount as Owner, in its sole judgment, shall deem proper. Any such policy shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate, as their interests may appear, and the proceeds of any loss shall be payable in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 13.2.3. If Owner does not intend to maintain such insurance, he shall inform Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontractors and the Sub - subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to Owner. If Contractor is damaged by failure of Owner to maintain such insurance and to so notify Contractor, then Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 12640 -3 15 04/20/05 Form 8(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner's insurance shall not cover hoists or equipment (including tools) belonging to Contractor or any Subcontractor or any other person or entity acting through or under Contractor or any Subcontractor. 13.2.2 Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. The Policies shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate, as their interests may appear. 13.2.3 Any loss insured under Paragraph 13.2.1 or 13.2.2 is to be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by Contractor, and by appropriate written agreement, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 13.2.4 Owner hereby waives all rights against Contractor, his Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, and their agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance maintained by Owner pursuant to this Article 13. Contractor hereby waives all rights against Owner, Owner's Representative, Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their respective subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance carried by Contractor. Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of Architect, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, by appropriate written agreements, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Paragraph 13.2.4. 13.2.5 Owner shall have the right to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers in any manner it deems appropriate. 13.2.6 Owner shall have the right to use or occupy portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof provided such use or occupancy shall not unreasonably interfere with Contractor's performance of the Work. The insurance required hereunder shall not lapse or be canceled on account of such use or occupancy. 13.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 13.3.1 To the extent of any insurance proceeds actually received by Owner with respect thereto, Owner waives all rights of action against Contractor for loss of use of his property due to fire or other hazards, including consequential losses. 13.4 SELF - INSURANCE 13.4.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, Owner shall have the right to be a self - insurer with respect to any insurance which Owner may carry hereunder. ARTICLE 14 CHANGES IN THE W0RIS 14.1 CHANGE ORDERS 14.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by Owner and /or Owner's Representative, issued after execution of this Agreement, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Project Cost or in the time for performance of the Work. There shall be no deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents except as authorized by Change Orders. A Change Order signed by Contractor indicates his agreement with respect to the items contained therein. 14.1.2 Owner, without invalidating this Agreement, may from time to time and at any time, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions and the Project Cost and /or the time for performance shall be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Except as may be set forth in a Change Order, Owner shall have no liability whatsoever to Contractor as a result of any such changes, notwithstanding that said changes may result in, among other things, loss of anticipated profits or variations between estimated actual work required to construct the Project. 14.1.3 The cost or credit to Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by the Owner in one or more of the following ways, in Owner's discretion: (a) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; (b) by unit prices as set forth on Exhibit B attached hereto and made a part hereof; (c) by determination in a manner agreed upon by the parties of a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or (d) by the method provided in Paragraph 14.1.4. 14.1.4 Contractor shall promptly comply with all Change Orders notwithstanding that no agreement may have been reached with respect to determination of the cost or credit to Owner as provided in Paragraphs 14.1.3. The cost of such Work shall then be determined on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, and in such case Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as Owner's Representative may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate data for inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited as set forth in Section 14.1.6 hereof. Pending final determination of the cost or credit to Owner, payments on account shall be made on portions of Certificates for Payment relating thereto that are approved by Owner. The amount of credit to be allowed by 12640 -3 16 04/20/05 • • • Form 8(b Contractor to Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Project Cost will be the amount of the actual net savings, determined, to the extent possible, in accordance with the above. 14.1.5 All "extras" must be authorized by Owner on a duly executed Change Order form signed by Contractor and any one of Owner's Representative, Owner's Vice President - Real Estate, Design & Construction . No other representative of Owner shall be authorized to sign any Change Order on behalf of Owner unless such authorization is set forth in writing signed by Owner's Vice President - Real Estate., Design & Construction. 14.1.6 All 'extras" shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative no later than five (5) days after the work covered by such "extra" is commenced, in either or both of the following ways, as specified by Owner. (a) Lump sum proposal outlining the work to be performed; or (b) Labor and material plus overhead and profit: general contractor, subcontractor and subordinate subcontractors shall all agree to be limited to and perform any additional work which may be ordered in accordance with this Article 14 and the following conditions: 1. The total number of tiers involved in performing "extras" shall be limited to a maximum of three (3) (the Contractor, One Subcontractor and one Sub - subcontractor). 2. Overhead and profit shall be allowed only in accordance with the following schedule: (a) Single tier (Contractor only) - 10% upon all materials, labor and/or rentals supplied. (b) Double tier (Contractor and Subcontractor) Subcontractor may increase price upon materials, labor and/or rentals supplied by 10 %, with the Contractor being permitted a 5% increase thereon (Total overhead and profit 15.5 %). (c) Triple tier Sub - subcontractor may increase price of any materials, labor or rentals supplied by 10 %. The Subcontractor may increase such price by 5% and the Contractor may thereafter increase such price by 5% (Total overhead and profit - 21.25 %). In determining overhead and profit, the foregoing percentages shall be applied to the net cost of materials, labor and rentals only, and such percentage shall be deemed to include all overhead and profit of every type and nature. The net cost of labor shall include the cash wages and ordinary benefits actually paid. Persons performing services other than so- called 'trade persons" and 'foreman' including and not limited to office, support and supervisory staff shall not be included in any calculation of the cost of labor and shall be deemed a part of overhead profit included in the foregoing percentages. 14.1.7 If the unit quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the unit prices set forth in Exhibit B to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 14.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 14.2.1 Should concealed conditions be encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this agreement, be encountered, the Project Cost shall be equitably adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within two (2) days after the observance of the conditions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a concealed or unknown condition requires modification in the amount of excavation or concrete work, the adjustment in the Project Cost may, in Owner's discretion, be determined in accordance with Exhibit B attached hereto and made a part hereof. 14.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 14.3.1 If Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Project Cost, he shall give Owner's Representative written notice thereof within two (2) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim (including, without limitation, a claim arising out of (i) any written interpretation pursuant to Paragraph 3.3.7, (ii) any order by Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section 15.3 where Contractor was not at fault, or (iii) failure of payment by Owner as provided in Section 11.6, but excluding any claims pursuant to Section 14.2). This notice shall be given by Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, in which case Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section 12.3. No such claim shall be valid unless made in accordance with the foregoing. Any change in the Project Cost resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order ARTICLE 15 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 15.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 15.1.1 If any portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of Owner's Representative or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, said Work shall, at the direction of Owner's Representative, be uncovered for inspection and then replaced at Contractor's expense. 15.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered which Owner's Representative did not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, Owner's Representative may direct that such Work be uncovered by Contractor for inspection. If such Work is found to be in accordance with The Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall be charged to Owner by appropriate Change Order. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay such 12640 -3 17 04/20/05 Form 8 b cost unless this condition was caused by Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 15.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 15.2.1 Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by Owner's Representative as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of and expenses relating to the correction of rejected Work, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, and the costs of transportation incident to the repairing or replacement of defective work, removal and reinstallation as well as any damage to the work or property of others resulting from, or specifically attributable to, the remedial or corrective work. 15.2.2 If, within one (1) year after the date on which the Work, or any designated portion thereof, has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), or within one (1) year after acceptance by Owner of designated equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct same promptly after receipt of a written notice from Owner or Owner's Representative to do so. This obligation shall survive termination of this Agreement. 15.2.3 Contractor shall remove from the Site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected under Paragraphs 15.2.1 and 15.2.2, unless such removal has been waived in writing by Owner. 15.2.4 If Contractor fails to correct defective or nonconforming Work in accordance with this Section 15.2, Owner may correct it as provided in the Article. 15.2.5 If Contractor does not proceed with the correction of such defective or nonconforming Work within the time fixed by written notice from Owner or Owner's Representative, Owner may remove same and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) days after demand therefor is made, Owner may, upon ten (10) additional days' written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale. If the proceeds of such sale are not equal to or greater than all the costs that should have been bome by Contractor, including compensation for Architect's additional services, If any, made necessary thereby, the deficiency shall be charged to Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay such amount to Owner promptly on demand. 15.2.6 Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 15.2.7 Nothing contained in this Section 15.2 shall be construed as establishing a period of. limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor may have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5.1 hereof. Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that the establishment of the time period on one (1) year after the date on which the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of punch list items), or after the date of acceptance, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, shall relate only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and shall not constitute a limitation upon the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor upon the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations ( other than specifically to correct the Work). 15.2.8 Contractor shall deliver to Owner's Representative, together with his final Draw Request, his written guarantee, made out to Owner and in a form satisfactory to Owner, guaranteeing all of the Work under the Contract Documents to be free from faulty materials and workmanship, watertight and leakproof in every particular. Contractor shall also agree to replace or to re- execute without cost to Owner such Work as may be found to be defective, and to make good all damage caused to other work or materials due to such required replacement or re- execution. This Agreement shall cover all Work under the Contract Documents and shall run for a period of one (1) year from the date the Project is in full operation, except as may be otherwise noted in the Specifications, or for a longer period where so stipulated in the Contract Documents. 15.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 15.3.1 If Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with Contract Documents or fails to correct defective Work as required by Section 15.2, Owner, by written notice, may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person or entity. 15.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 15.4.1 If, within two (2) days after written notice from Owner, Contractor fails to commence to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or to correct any defective Work as required by Section 15.2, and thereafter to complete said performance or correction with due diligence, Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, perform or correct said Work on behalf of Contractor. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due Contractor all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. If the payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner promptly on demand. 12640 -3 18 04/20/05 • • • • • Form 8(b 15.5 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NONCONFORMING WORK 15.5.1 Owner may, in his discretion, accept defective or nonconforming Work, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Project Cost where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not Final Payment has been made. Owner shall not be deemed to have accepted any defective or nonconforming Work unless such acceptance has been specifically acknowledged in writing. ARTICLE 16 ACCOUNTING RECORDS 16.1 Contractor shall keep and maintain complete and accurate books and records in accordance with sound accounting principles, relating to the cost and /or performance of the Work and the materials and supplies incorporated therein. Owner shall have the right, on ten (10) days prior notice given at any time and from time to time, to audit such books and records relating to the Project Cost (including any additions or reductions thereof pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof), the Work, the Project and all such other matters relating to this Agreement. The books and records required to be maintained by Contractor in accordance with this Section 16.1 shall be kept and preserved at Contractor's principal place of business for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date upon which Final Payment is made. ARTICLE 17 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION 17.1 Contractor acknowledges that Owner is relying upon Contractor to perform the Work and construct the Project in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, and that Owner may suffer damages (whether by Toss of sales and profits, increased costs or otherwise) in the event completion is delayed. 17.2 In view of the difficulty in ascertaining the actual damages Owner may suffer as a result of such delay, Contractor and Owner hereby agree that the sum of $N /A per day represents a fair measure of such damages (said sum being fixed as liquidated damages and not as a penalty). In accordance therewith, if by the Substantial Completion Date the Work has not been substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof: or, if by the Completion Date the Work has not been fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature: then in either such event Contractor shall pay Owner the sum of $N /A for each calendar day after the Substantial Completion Date until the Work is fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature. Owner may take and retain such amount from any payment to be made to the Contractor hereunder, and in the event of a deficiency, Contractor shall pay the deficiency to the Owner promptly upon demand. 17.3 Owner hereby agrees that if Contractor shall substantially complete the Work to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof prior to the Substantial Completion Date, and shall fully complete the Work (subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature) within fourteen (14) days after the Work is substantially completed as aforesaid, and provided that Contractor has otherwise fully and faithfully performed and discharged all of its obligations and responsibilities under this Agreement, then Owner shall pay to Contractor, in addition to all other sums payable by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement, an amount equal to N/A for each calendar day by which the date on which the Work is so substantially completed precedes the Substantial Completion Date. Such amount shall be paid by Owner to Contractor at the same time as, and subject to the same conditions pursuant to which, the Final Payment is made. ARTICLE 18 NOTICES 18.1 Unless otherwise provided herein, all notices, consents or other communications given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given if sent by registered or certified mail, retum receipt requested, postage paid, as follows: 1. If to Owner, addressed: (a) TOYS "R" US, INC. One Geoffrey Way Wayne, NJ 07470 One copy to the attention of: Vice President - Real Estate, Design & Construction with a copy to Owner's Representative 2. If to Architect, addressed: 12640 -3 19 04/20/05 Form 8(b1 3. If to Contractor, addressed: 4. If to Owner's Representative, to the address set forth in Paragraph 3.3.1 (b) hereof, with a copy to Owner (if Owner's Representative's address is not the address herein above set forth for Owner) or to such other persons or addresses as the party to be given such notice may designate by notice to the other party. ARTICLE 19 OVERTIME 19.1 Contractor shall omit any markup for overhead and profit for any overtime labor (premium time only) for which Contractor is compensated. ARTICLE 20 TERMINATION 20i TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR 20.1.1 If the Work is stopped for period of thirty (30) consecutive days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of govemment, such as declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of Contractor or Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor or a Subcontractor, or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days by Contractor because Owner's Representative has not issued a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 11.6 or because Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in Section 11.6, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to Owner terminate this Agreement and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no such termination shall occur if, within said seven (7) days, either Owner's Representative issues the Certificate for Payment or Owner makes the payment. 20.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER 20.2.1 If a petition under any federal bankruptcy law or an action under any insolvency law or statute is filed by or against Contractor and not dismissed within ten (10) days after such filing, or if Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough property skilled workers or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractor or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or is otherwise in violation of any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have and after giving Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of Contractor and take possession of the Site and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor, and thereafter Owner may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment then or thereafter due under this Agreement. 20.2.2 If, after termination of this Agreement by Owner (other than a termination pursuant to Paragraph 20.2.3), the cost to Owner of completing the Work, including compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, exceeds the Project Cost, Contractor shall pay such excess to Owner promptly on demand. This obligation for payment shall survive the termination of this Agreement. 20.2.3 Without limiting the generality of Paragraph 20.2.1, if Contractor fails to deliver to Owner, at the time or times required by this Agreement, any items or information required to be delivered prior to the commencement of the Work (including, without limitation, the name and qualifications of his superintendent and the project manager, the proposed progress schedule and manpower chart, the name of his Subcontractors and the schedule of values for the portions of the Work), Owner may, at any time until the commencement of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 8.11, or seven (7) days after all of such items or information have been submitted, whichever occurs first, terminate this Agreement by giving Contractor written notice to such effect. In the event of the giving of such notice, this Agreement shall be deemed terminated and neither party shall have any further rights, obligations or liability hereunder. ARTICLE 21 ENTIRE AGREEMENT 21.1 This Agreement represents the entire agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. This Agreement may be amended or modified only in writing, or as otherwise specifically provided herein. 12640 -3 20 04/20/05 • • • IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been executed as of the day and year first above written. OWNER: TOYS *R' US - Delaware, Inc. Date: By: David Picot Vice President - Real Estate, Design & Construction CONTRACTOR: Contractor Name Date: By: Name: Title: 12640 -3 Form 8(b) 21 04/20/05 DIVISION 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -1 .1 Throughout the drawings and specifications, addenda and other contract documents, the term "Owner" shall mean "Toys "R" Us." .2 Throughout the plans, specifications, addenda, and other contract documents, the term "Contractors" shall be taken to mean the Contractor or his Subcontractors. .3 In the plans, specifications, addenda, and other contract documents, the abbreviation CONTR is used. CONTR shall be taken to mean the Contractor. .4 The words "plans" and "drawings" shall be taken to have the same meaning, unless in context specifically referencing plan view or views. .5 The drawings and specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. However, the drawings and specifications shall be considered inseparable documents and the Contractor shall consider both instruments in order to perform the work in accordance with their combined intent. .6 The term "Owner's Representative" shall be taken to mean the person or persons authorized by the Owner to act in his behalf. .7 References to the "Project Manager or Construction Project Manager (CPM)" in the specifications or on the drawings shall be taken to mean an authorized professional representative of the Owner. .8 In case of discrepancies in the contract documents, Contractor shall first consult with the Owner and Project Manager for clarifications, revisions, or further action as may be required. Any discrepancy, which results in, any claim for additional time or money, must be addressed to the Owner in writing. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in all the technical sections, Division 2 through Division 16. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 PROPOSALS .1 Proposals will be received by the Owner at the following address, with the time and date as indicated in the "Invitation to Bid" letter. .2 Proposals shall be submitted in duplicate on the enclosed "Proposal Form" sealed in an opaque envelope marked "Proposal ". Proposals will not be accepted over the telephone. No exceptions to procedure will be allowed and 2010 SSBS Renovation any bid received after the specified time will be subject to rejection. To be considered a valid bid, proposals must be filled in completely including category breakdowns and qualification data. .3 All proposals shall be in accordance with all requirements of all contract documents and subject to all conditions provided in same. .4 All proposals shall be in a lump sum and shall cover and include all materials, accessories, tools, equipment, expendable equipment, insurance, taxes, overhead, profit and performance of all services and labor required to completely execute the work in accordance with the contract documents. .5 Each bidder shall break his proposal into the categories per of the Proposal Form (Exhibit 'A'). This categorization is requested only to further clarify bids as well as assure understanding of the scope of work. These categories will not be considered as fixing the basis for any contract adjustment. .6 The base bid shall be a complete and total package but to avoid price duplications shall exclude those items for which alternates are requested. Each alternate price shall be a total including all charges associated with adding the said item to the scope of work such as general conditions, overhead and profit Reference Section 1A, Paragraph 11. 1.4 SCHEDULE .1 This is a "Time is of the Essence" project. Construction time shall not exceed 120 days, or the time period set by the owner's Representative at the time of bidding. .2 Due to the nature of the Owner's retail market this project must be completed in accordance with the agreed construction schedule. Site work must be so scheduled as to have asphaltic base course installed as early as possible in the job schedule. .3 Contractors shall carefully schedule and coordinate work so as to provide the maximum cooperation and the minimum of interference with the work of others. The Owner shall approve scheduling. .4 Contractor shall submit prior to the start of the work a schedule showing the various phases and indicating the starting and completion dates of all phases of the contract work. .5 After the work is commenced, the Contractor shall conduct weekly jobsite meetings with all major Subcontractors and shall advise the Construction Project Manager in writing with a copy to the Owner as to the then current status of the schedule, and indicating whether or not the Contractor contemplates, as of that time, any future deviation from the schedule. Such reports and meeting minutes shall include a statement indicating that the report is based on the then current information fumished by all subcontractors and material suppliers and shall be issued promptly after the weekly meeting. If Contractor determines that any part of the project has fallen behind schedule, he will, within 24 Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -2 hours of discovery, forward a corrective plan of action. This plan will specifically identify what Contractor actions will be taken to restore the project schedule. .6 Progress photos shall be taken biweekly, date stamped and forwarded to the Owner. Photos should be selected to accurately depict job status (elevations, site work, interior, etc.) and shall be identified as to the job location on the rear of the photo. Said photographs are not to be of professional quality but may be snap shots taken by the job superintendent. .7 No extension of time beyond date stipulated in proposal will be allowed on account of inclement weather or other causes which could have been avoided by exercise of reasonable foresight on contractor's part. .8 Any problems developing during the course of the job that would affect the schedule shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative immediately. 1.5 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 Before submitting proposal, each bidder should carefully examine all drawings, the project manual, addenda, and all other contract documents. .2 All inquiries regarding the meaning of drawings, specifications, and /or other contract documents shall be addressed to the TRU Project Manager (PM) or the professional of record: As indicated on the drawings. .3 Bidders Note: .1 Inquiries shall be limited to calls from pre - qualified general contractors bidding this project. Subcontractors shall make contacts only through one of these contractors. .2 Bidders shall not rely on verbal replies. Should clarifications or revisions be required, the bidding documents will be modified by written addendum distributed to all bidding contractors. .3 No pre - approvals will be given for substitute materials, equipment, or methods. Refer to separate paragraph this section for substitution procedure. .4 The Owner has a commitment to the minority community. One aspect of that commitment is to make every effort to ensure that a fair portion of monies expended for capital improvements be distributed to minority contractors. Bidders' assistance in helping meet that commitment is requested. Each bidder shall submit at the time of bid the name(s), trade(s), and dollar amount(s) that will be awarded to minority contractors if the contractor is the selected bidder. Every such listed minority contractor shall be certified as a bonafide minority owned and managed firm. Information relative to certified minority contractors may be obtained from the National Association of Minority Contractors 1.6 SITE INSPECTION .1 Each bidder shall visit the project site prior to the preparation of his bid to investigate and determine all conditions on and near the site, which could affect the execution of the work. Contractor's failure to fully acquaint himself with existing conditions under which the work is to be performed is not justification for additional compensation. .2 The location of the underground utilities, such as sewers, electrical power, water piping, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is as exact as can be determined from available information but its accuracy or completeness cannot be guaranteed. The Contractor prior to starting work shall verify exact location of these utilities. Contractor shall exercise special care when excavating at or near the general location of underground utilities for the safety of workers, as well as for protection of the utility services. .3 Any connections to or relocation of any existing utility line, requiring temporary discontinuation of utilities, which are in active use, shall be scheduled and coordinated with the utility companies and /or the representatives of the Owner. All premium time required for the installation of any such connections and /or relocations shall be included in Contractor's bid. In no case shall the utilities be left disconnected at the end of a working day or weekend unless authorized by representatives of the utilities and the Owner. The Contractor causing the damage, at no increase in the contract cost, shall repair any existing utilities damaged due to the operation of any Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner and utility company or agency. 1.7 INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION .1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor and his Subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. .2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and Contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 1.8 WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR .1 Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to perform and complete all work as shown and described in the contract documents, including all work indicated or specified in addenda, bulletins, accepted alternates or amendments. .2 The scope of work shall include all work noted in the plans or these specifications with the following clarifications: .1 Verification of the site conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor and no extra (time or money) shall be approved due to this Contractor's failure to review 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -3 conditions under which the work will be performed unless identified specifically by written exception as a part of his proposal. .2 The contract documents are intended to describe a total and completed facility. The specifications describe the various items of work, character of materials and quality of workmanship. Any appurtenances, parts, finish work, etc., essential to the entire completion of the work, though not specifically shown or specified shall be covered by the contract sum. .3 The Contractor will be required to furnish and install all temporary piping, power, electric wiring, lighting, etc., that is necessary to perform his work and shall remove same upon completion of the work. Point of connection, route and method of extension must meet the approval of the Owner's Representative and the utility. .4 Contractor shall repair and continuously maintain all existing pavements in a condition passable by automobile traffic. Temporary repairs shall be made at the end of each working day as a minimum. At the completion of construction, any and all existing pavements damaged shall be restored to their original condition (paving type, thickness, finish, striping, base and subbase) as part of the base bid work at no additional cost to Owner. .5 The Contractor is required to track the project schedule by trade, and is required to chart this information in the format provided by the Owner. These charts shall be maintained on a daily basis and shall be posted in the Project Field Office Trailer. .3 Project Field Office Trailer. Contractor is responsible, as part of the contract, for providing a separate trailer to serve as the project field office. The trailer is to be located on site as close to the construction area as practical. Minimum required trailer specifications to include: .1 Contractor to provide a 40 feet to 50 feet - 3 compartment construction office trailer that shall include an office for the CPM on one end and an office for the GC on the other end. A conference area will be provided in the center. One door to the conference room must have accessible access so a wood ramp can be built conforming to the local A.DA. requirements for handicapped access. .1 Trailer shall have 2 exterior doors with stairs at each. The trailer shall be blocked and leveled and be professional in appearance. .2 Trailer to have permanent tires, glazed windows, and lockable doors. .3 The trailer shall be heated and cooled, must be provided with appropriate utilities (telephone, power, etc.) and wired for convenience outlets. .2 Office Furniture: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 CPM office shall be equipped at a minimum with a desk, plan table, 2 chairs, overhead lighting and a 2 line speakerphone with dedicated lines. .2 GC office shall at a minimum include furnishings required by GC 1 fax with a dedicated phone line, 2 line speaker phone with phone line roll over feature, answering machine, and photo copy machine. .3 Conference area shall at a minimum include a conference table with seating for 20 people, drinking water dispenser, overhead lighting, plan table, phone service with a touch tone speaker phone, digital camera, PC work station and Internet access per Toys "R" Us requirements. .4 General Contractor to provide a digital camera, P.C. work station, a modem and Internet access per TRU requirements. .3 Phone beeper system for superintendent and answering machine for taking calls when no one is available. .4 All copies of plans and specifications with latest up -to -date revised drawings, addenda, and change orders in sequence for reference. Shop drawings to be kept on rack sets. .5 A complete set of as -built drawings, current with project. .6 A complete set of job documents including all field photos, tests, building permit set, copy of building permit, approval and inspection log, etc. .7 Bulletin board with Subcontractor list, latest construction schedule, calendar, all key phone numbers and contacts, posted for public viewing. .8 All OSHA safety requirements including but not limited to hardhats, first aid kit, and fire extinguisher. .9 Potable water dispenser with cups and extra boots for muddy conditions should also be available in the trailer. .10 The Contractor is responsible for all other provisions that may be dictated by abnormal construction circumstances, local, state, and federal requirements, unique site conditions, climate or topography, special construction materials or techniques and other conditions which may effect the safety, efficiency or completeness of the project. .4 Owners hiring Trailer. 8 weeks prior to fixture date the Contractor shall provide a 30 foot — 40 foot (2) compartment hiring trailer that shall include an office and conference room area. This trailer shall be on site for 60 days. .1 Trailer shall be blocked and leveled. Trailer to have permanent tires, glazed windows, lockable door, steps Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -4 (if required), trailer skirt, etc., and must be in professional appearing condition. .2 The trailer shall be heated and cooled, must be provided with appropriate utilities (telephone, power, etc.) and wired for convenience outlets. .3 Office Furniture: .1 Office area shall be equipped with a desk, table, 3 chairs, overhead lighting, and a 2 line touch tone speaker phone and service roll over feature. .2 Conference area shall be quipped with a conference table and seating for 10 people. .4 All OSHA safety requirements including but not limited to hardhats, first aid kit, and fire extinguisher. .5 Potable water dispenser with cups. .6 The Contractor is responsible for all other provisions that may be dictated by abnormal construction circumstances, local, state, and federal requirements, unique site conditions, climate or topography, special construction materials or techniques and other conditions which may effect the safety, efficiency or completeness of the project. 1.9 PAYMENTS .1 Within 2 weeks after award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a breakdown of the costs of the work including those of all the vendors and Subcontractors. .2 The Contractor shall furnish the initial breakdown on A.I.A. Form G703, Continuation Sheet, with the complete breakdown of the contract price so arranged and itemized as to meet the approval of the Project Manager. .3 All subsequent applications for payment will be submitted on A.I.A. Form G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, or a reasonable facsimile thereto, and shall be accompanied by A.I.A. Form G703, Continuation Sheet. .1 Column B, Description of Work, on Form G703 shall be listed by subcontract and spec division and shall include material supplier items. .2 Column C, Scheduled Value, on Form G703 shall be the actual subcontract value and not the estimated value for the corresponding line item of work. .3 Submit 2 embossed, notarized copies of applications with original signatures on each. .4 Contractor shall submit with the first application for payment a copy of the proposed lien release form for approval by the Project Manager. Contractor shall also submit along with this payment application a copy of the State Lien Law regulations. Lien release forms shall comply with State Lien Law regulations and shall include the following items: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Date of release and type (partial or final) of release. .2 Type of work or description of material for this release. .3 Project name and address including the county and state. .4 Name of the Owner for whom the lien waiver is releasing all claims. .5 Total amount of partial lien waiver. .6 Total amount of partial lien releases to date for the work described. .7 Total contract amount. .8 Total amount of the lien waiver that pertains to change orders. Indicate the corresponding change order number(s) for which work was performed. .9 Total amount of releases to date for change orders and the corresponding change order numbers. .10 State lien law verbiage. .11 Notarized with an embossed seal. .12 Signature and name of the Contractor or Subcontractor and /or material supplier company. .5 Payment applications shall be accompanied by conditional partial lien waivers (submitted in duplicate) for the application being submitted, and unconditional lien waivers for any previous draw. These partial lien waivers shall equal the total dollar amount for each line item listed under "Description of Work, Column B, Form G703," for which the Contractor is seeking payment. Final pay application will include all final waivers of liens. .6 Payment applications will not be processed until all such partial and /or final lien waivers have been submitted to the Owner's Representative. Partial and final lien waivers shall be accompanied by an itemized index of waivers, which covers the application for which payment is being made. .7 Payments to be made as follows: .1 The Contractor shall prepare a statement each month of all work performed the preceding month including all acceptable materials suitably stored on the site at that time. .2 When the statement is approved, the Owner will pay 90 percent of the amount due. .3 Release of retained funds shall be contingent upon receipt of all tax forms, guarantees, warranties, as -built drawings, and service /operating manuals. Release of retained funds will also not be approved until all final lien waivers have been submitted and the time period for which a lien can be filed against the project from Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -5 1.10 the date of substantial completion, as described by state law has lapsed. .4 Miscellaneous Provisions: Contractors and material suppliers shall not be entitled to service charges or interest on any monies due and not paid and on any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute, or other matter in question. .5 All change order cost breakdowns shall be notarized and shall be included on the Application and Certificate for Payment, Form G702, and Continuation Sheet, Form G703. .6 The Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due to him under the contract documents without prior consent of the Owner, nor shall either party to the contract assign the contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. INSURANCE .1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life of the contract, insurance with insurers satisfactory to the Owner and with not less than a B+ rating as established by "Best Insurance Rating." Coverages noted below shall be provided. Any Contractor not having these limits shall so state in his proposal, otherwise it will be assumed the noted coverages are to be provided. .1 Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability: Workers' Compensation as required by statute and, if such exposures exist, Contractor's liability under the Federal Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act. Employer's liability shall be for a minimum limit of $100,000. In case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require any and all of his subcontractors similarly to provide such coverages for all the latter's employees employed in connection with the work, unless such employees are covered by the protection of the Contractor. Provide similar coverage for any class of employees engaged in work at the site, not protected under the applicable workers' compensation statute. .2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, including contractual liability coverage, in an amount not less than $3,000,000.00 for personal and bodily injury to all persons in any one occurrence and for damage to property. .3 Motor Vehicle Liability Coverage, with coverage limits not less than the amounts required by Paragraph 1.10.1.2 above. .4 Certificates of insurance, satisfactory to Owner and naming Owner as an additional insured, shall be delivered to Owner prior to the commencement of work, and said certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled without 30 days' prior written notice to Owner. All insurance required to be carried by Contractor pursuant hereto shall be taken out with insurance companies approved by Owner in advance. .5 Builder's Risk Insurance: The Owner shall maintain a policy for the duration of the project upon all structures and upon all materials in or adjacent thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to the insurable value thereof less a deductible amount of $100,000.00 (Owner paid) for each occurrence. This coverage will not include Contractor and Subcontractor's equipment, and may not necessarily be all- inclusive as to Contractor's desired protection. 1.11 SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND ALTERNATES .1 The following provisions shall govern the bidding of all work. The provisions specified below shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting other requirements set forth elsewhere in the bidding or contract documents. .2 When a brand name is not specified: .1 Product used shall meet the specified standard, such as ASTM, etc., if specified, and shall be of the appropriate design, configuration, type, and finish as required to meet the requirements of the intended service. .3 When 2 or more brand names are specified without further qualifying stipulations: .1 In all cases, the first -named brand or manufacturer's equipment has been used for the basic design and to determine the space requirements. .2 Any one of the specified brands or manufacturer's products equivalent to the first -named may be used for the base bid price. .3 Should other than the first -named brand be used in preparation of the bid, the Contractor shall be responsible to determine and assure that the product or equipment being bid will fit and function in the space allocated. Submission of shop drawings to the Contractor shall be construed as evidence that the Subcontractor has made this determination and that the equipment will fit and function in the allocated space. .4 In all cases, the product used shall meet the requirements of the intended service, including specified optional accessories, performance, and basic features. Should one of the named manufacturers offer a range of quality for a particular item, the Contractor shall provide the selection of equal or greater quality compared with the first -named brand in the specifications. All equality determinations rest with the Construction Project Manager, and his decisions shall be final. .4 When 1 brand name only is specified without further qualifying stipulations: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -6 .1 Contractor's base bid price shall be based on the product specified. .2 The Contractors are invited and encouraged to propose, as substitutions, the products or equipment of other manufacturers potentially suitable for the intended services and /or applications. See paragraph below regarding substitutions for further requirements. .5 Substitutions: .1 Any material, product, or equipment (other than specified materials, brands, or manufacturers) proposed by the Contractor shall be considered a substitution. .2 Except as otherwise specified herein below, in order to qualify for review by the Construction Project Manager for a decision on approval, a substitution shall be submitted at the time of bidding. The proposed substitution shall be clearly identified and shall include the respective add or deduct to the contract base bid amount as defined above. The Contractor shall submit complete data (including samples, if requested) regarding the substitution to the Construction Project Manager for review and decision. .6 Alternates /Unit Prices: .1 When requested in the specifications or on the drawings, Contractor shall include the appropriate add or deduct to the contract amount for the Alternate as specified. The add or deduct shall include all related charges including general conditions, overhead, and profit. .2 Requested alternates shall be numbered and shall be dearly identified in the Contractor's bid. .3 Each bidder is encouraged to submit any voluntary altemates he feels appropriate. .7 Associated Costs and Delays: .1 All additional costs associated with the use of any product, material, or equipment (other than the first -named brand, a specified material, or a requested alternate) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor making the substitution or electing to use other than the first -named brand. .2 For example, if a Contractor elects to use the third -named brand in the specifications covering a particular item of equipment, and the choice of that brand necessitates an increase in electrical feeder size, additional structural support, access panels, or any other changes whatsoever in this work and /or the work of others, the Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of all such changes. .3 The approval of a substitution and /or the discovery of associated costs during construction shall not relieve the Contractor from paying for changes in his work and /or the work of others. .4 To avoid the associated costs as described above due to an untimely discovery of necessary changes, the Contractor may be permitted to revert to the use of the specified product, material, or equipment provided a delay in the project does not result. The Construction Project Manager shall first be consulted and his decision regarding the interpretation of "delay" shall be final. .5 It shall be further understood that the use of any approved substitution or other than the first -named brand in the specifications shall involve no extension of the project completion date and /or shall not cause delays in the work of other Contractors unless otherwise stipulated in writing with the respective Contractor's bid and /or proposal for substitution. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD .1 In the event the Contractor (or his Subcontractors) proposes substitutions to the Construction Project Manager or to the Owner after the Contract has been awarded, the CPM will record all time used by him, his employees, and /or his consultants in the evaluation of each such proposed substitution. .2 Regardless of whether or not the CPM approves a proposed substitution, the CPM shall be reimbursed at the rate of 2 -1/2 times the direct cost for all time spent by the CPM and /or his consultants in evaluating each proposed substitution. A change order will be issued to reduce the construction contract by an amount equal to the fees charged by the Project Manager for reviewing one or more proposed substitutions. The Contractor in accordance with the change order amounts will reimburse the CPM. 1.13 MODEL NUMBERS AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS .1 References used throughout the specifications are made to manufacturer's names and model numbers in conjunction with a written specification description of the product. In the event any specified model number has been superseded and /or been rendered out of date by the manufacturer's product line revisions, or in the event any specified model number identifies a product which is not identical with the specified written description in all respects, the Contractor shall notify the CPM for clarification and directions prior to ordering and /or purchasing the product in question. Contractor's failure to consider the combined intent of model numbers and specified product descriptions shall not be justification for additional payments. 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA .1 After award of the contract, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall promptly prepare and submit to the Architectural Consultant complete lists of all products and equipment proposed for use in constructing this project. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -7 .1 The required lists shall include the equipment mark noted on the drawings (if applicable), the manufacturer's name and model number, and /or a brief description of the product, equipment, or material. .2 The lists shall clearly identify any and all deviations from the drawings and specifications, if applicable. .3 If use of the first -named brand in the specifications is proposed by the Contractor or required by the contract documents, the required lists may include the specification page and paragraph reference to augment or replace the product description. .4 Any and all substitutions accepted at the time the contract was signed and appropriately identified in the Contract shall be identified on the lists as "Accepted Substitutes." .5 For construction based on a "Performance Specification" such as lawn irrigation systems, the lists shall include a line item for each product plus separate line items for hydraulic calculations and detailed shop drawings. .6 Structural systems shall be entered on the lists by categories or types of shop drawings required to properly fabricate, install, and erect the systems. .2 Each list shall be accompanied by a notarized certification signed by the Contractor and Subcontractor (as applicable) attesting to the fact that the products, equipment, and materials will be furnished in accordance with the contract documents and the list, including all specified options, features, characteristics, and performance. The Contractor's certification shall be construed and interpreted to mean that the contract documents are clearly and fully understood and that corrections to non - complying work will be made promptly without delaying the project completion schedule and without additional costs to the Owner, unless otherwise qualified or stipulated. .3 Upon receipt of the required list of products, materials, and equipment. The Architectural Consultant will review same and exercise the option to request selected shop drawings and /or submittals for review. .1 The Contractor should anticipate that selected shop drawings /submittals will be requested. The following list represents the minimum required submissions. The Contractor will verify all submittal requirements with the project specification and construction documents. .1 Selected reinforcing and structural steel shop drawings. .2 Concrete block and other exterior material samples. .3 Fire protection sprinkler system shop drawings. .4 Lawn irrigation system shop drawings (if applicable). .5 Storefront framing shop drawings. .6 Roofing system submittals and specialty roof top accessories. .7 Hollow metal doors and frames, door hardware, and specialty submittals. .8 Composite wall panels. .4 All shop drawings, submittals, or product data shall be submitted to the Architectural Consultant for review. The Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager will not review shop drawings, submittals, or product data. Submittals received by the Toys "R" Us CPM will be retumed to the Contractor without review or comment. Contractor will copy the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager on the transmittal only for all submittals. .1 Contractor's request for clarifications and /or interpretations of the contract documents shall be made in writing on an individual and specific basis. The Contractor shall first review all such requests. .2 In the event specific approvals are required by the manufacturer of a product, material, or fabrication, the Contractor (and his Subcontractors) shall provide said "approval" of the shop drawings or submittals as required to release for fabrication and /or shipment on a timely basis. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall advise suppliers, vendors, distributors, and manufacturers of the terms stated in this paragraph regarding release or "approval" for manufacturing, fabrication, and /or shipment to insure timely delivery of respective products, materials, equipment, and fabrications. .5 The above stated procedures and policies regarding shop drawings and submittals are intended to simplify and expedite the construction process and emphasize the Contractor's role and responsibility for coordinating the work of all trades in a proper and timely manner consistent with the contract documents. In keeping with this intent and concept, review comments received by the Contractor (and Subcontractors) from the Architectural Consultant on selected and requested shop drawings and /or submittals shall not be interpreted or construed as relieving the Contractor (or his subcontractors) from complying with the requirements set forth in the contract documents. .6 For all shop drawings, or product data, including those requested by the Construction Project Manager, the Contractor shall review same thoroughly and carefully, clearly marking and /or noting all discrepancies and deviations from the contract documents, and affixing an appropriate review stamp, signed and dated. Contractor's review (and submittal if requested) shall constitute a representation by the Contractor that he has verified compliance with the Contract Documents; and that he has determined and /or verified that field measurements, coordination, materials, and requirements relating to the work and information contained therein are consistent with the project criteria and Contract Documents. The 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -8 Contractor shall be responsible to distribute all shop drawings and product data to the appropriate subcontractor, as applicable, on a timely basis after his review. .7 Requested shop drawings and submittal data shall be mailed with a transmittal letter or form prepared by the Contractor which shall include the number of copies and identification of each item submitted. The transmittal shall not be used as the only source for identifying deviations, if any, from the contract documents. .8 Requested shop drawings for inter - related equipment must be submitted at one time, since the performance of one piece of equipment must be matched in performance by all other equipment of the overall system. 1.15 EXPEDITING PRODUCT DELIVERIES .1 Contractor shall be responsible for ordering and purchasing products, equipment, and materials on a prompt and timely basis to avoid delays in construction due to deliveries. .2 Contractor shall submit the lists of products, equipment, and materials within not more than 14 calendar days after award of contract. .3 Orders shall be placed with suppliers immediately upon return receipt of the above referenced "lists" from the Architectural Consultant and /or upon retum receipt of requested submittals reviewed by the Architectural Consultant, as applicable. No excuse for delivery delay will be entertained unless the following items have been previously submitted to the Architectural Consultant. .1 Photocopy of the order form forwarded not later than seven days after placement of the said order. .2 Letter from the supplier explaining the said delay. 1.16 OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND /OR MATERIALS .1 The Contractor shall receive, unload, inventory, rig temporarily store and safeguard, uncrate, erect, install, and place into proper operation all Owner furnished equipment, material and accessories in accordance with the drawings and specifications and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's detailed working drawings and installation recommendations. Contractor shall provide all materials, accessories, devices, and equipment as required to properly install and place into operation all Owner- furnished material and /or equipment. .1 For Owner supplied safes, Contractor shall have on hand at the time of delivery a forklift or similar equipment capable of transporting and placing 4200 lbs safe in the vertical position. .2 The material and equipment furnished by the Owner will carry the manufacturer's standard warranty. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative should any defective components or feature be discovered during receiving, inventory, uncrating, installation, or testing. All packing slips, bills of lading, and related paperwork must be held for the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all shortages and damages after accepting delivery, NO EXCEPTIONS. The Owner will notify the manufacturer for replacement or repairs. .3 Any repairs and /or replacements required due to Contractor's negligence shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. .4 The Contractor shall provide all labor and work for repairs and /or replacements related to Owner furnished material and equipment during the term of the manufacturer's warranty, including warranty extensions (if any), purchased with the equipment. All work, materials, and labor related to repairs and /or the Contractor for all defects, malfunctions, or deficiencies occurring within the full warranty period shall provide replacements excluded from the manufacturer's warranty. .5 The maintenance service requirements specified on the drawings and /or in the respective sections of the specifications shall apply to all Owner furnished equipment, unless noted or specified otherwise. .6 Data relating to Owner furnished equipment shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided by the Contractor in accordance with this section of the specifications unless noted or specified otherwise. .7 Each item of Owner furnished equipment and /or material is shown or identified on the drawings and /or in the appropriate section of the specifications. .8 The Contractor shall make notifications and coordinate with the Owner's Representative and the manufacturer to assure a timely, properly functioning installation of Owner- furnished material and equipment. .9 Contractor is responsible for complete installation of material or equipment, unless otherwise specified. If additional information is required this must be made known at bidding time as an extra for this work will not be considered by Owner. .10 All surplus Owner supplied equipment and material shall be stored and safeguarded during the course of the work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be permanently stored and /or distributed as directed by the Owner's Representative at final completion. 1.17 SAFETY AND PROTECTION .1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for complete and absolute compliance with all provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), including all amendments, pertaining to the work. .2 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain for his portion of all the work all danger signals, signs, lights, guard barricades, etc., required by good practice and by law during the entire period of his contract. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of materials and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -9 Contractor shall not load or permit the loading of any part of the structure with a weight that will endanger its safety. .3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper protection of all materials and equipment delivered to the site from the time of such delivery until final approval and acceptance by the Owner. This protection and security provision shall include all Owner supplied items. .4 The Contractor shall, at all times, protect the excavations, trenches and /or the portions of the building pertaining to his work from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. He shall provide all pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection. He shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations free of water. .5 The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing as required for safety and for the proper execution of the work, and have it removed when the work is completed. Special attention shall be given to foundations for buildings and basements. Where cuts for utilities exceed 4 feet, they shall be sloped or shored as required by a registered Engineer, in accord with both OSHA and local regulations. .6 Any work damaged by failure to provide protection as required above shall be removed and replaced with new work at the Contractor's expense. (Special attention is drawn to this provision as it relates to Owner supplied items including lighting fixtures and lamps.) 1.18 PERMITS, REGULATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS .1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all required permits necessary for the execution of his work. .2 The Owner is responsible for filing the plans for the Building Permit. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in expediting acquisition of this Permit. The Owner shall pay the main building permit fee. Any other fees are to be paid for by the Contractor or his Subcontractors. No extra for such fees or one time charges will be considered. .3 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. .4 All work installed by the Contractors shall be in compliance with goveming federal, state, and local codes. All electrical work shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC - latest), except where more stringent local or other codes must govern. If any portion of work called for in the specifications or shown on the drawings is deemed contrary to the Codes and requirements, Contractor shall be required to bring the matter to the attention of the Contractor prior to roughing -in so that same can be reviewed for clarification or revision. The Contractor or Contractors must correct installations made without regard to Code requirements without an increase in the contract amount. 2010 SSBS Renovation .5 Existing fluorescent fixtures to be removed or relocated may have ballasts containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Handling and disposal of such ballasts is regulated by federal and /or state agencies. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if fixture ballasts contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or fluorescent lamps require special handling, and, if so, to handle and dispose of them properly and in accordance with all applicable regulations. .6 Any "Standard" (ASTM, ASA; etc.) referenced in these specifications shall be based on the edition and /or amendments of the standard as specified herein. In cases where the edition or date of the "Standard" is not specified, the edition and /or amendments of the Standard, which are current on the date the bids are submitted, shall govern. Should a more current edition of a standard become effective during construction, the Contractor may, with the approval of the Architect or Engineer apply the latest edition of the specified standard. 1.19 SUPERVISION, COORDINATION AND LAYOUT .1 All work included in the respective contracts shall be under the constant supervision of qualified superintendents or foremen. .2 Considering the Time of Essence Contract the Contractor shall conduct weekly job meetings with all major subcontractors in attendance for the purpose of coordination and expediting. The Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager will be copied on minutes of these meetings. .3 The Contractor will be required to submit the name of all Subcontractors to the CPM for approval prior to awarding of the subcontract work. The Owner reserves the right to approve or disapprove any Subcontractors. After their approval and the subsequent award of subcontracts, the Contractor shall provide a type written list of the subcontractors with their work identified, address, phone number(s), and prime contact(s) to both the Owner and the Construction Project Manager. .4 In order to maintain proper coordination and continuation of all branches of work, job superintendents or foremen shall not be replaced without prior notice and approval of the CPM. .5 The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings, the project manual, and specifications for the total project and coordinate his work with others to avoid delay and shall be responsible to ascertain that the work he installs does not interfere with work of other Contractors. If work is installed which does interfere, it shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Preoccupation of space by any Contractor or subcontractor does not give him the right of priority to the space. .6 When piping, conduits, ducts or other items are to run in the same general direction, elevation or location, the Contractors involved shall request the Contractor to arrange a conference to determine the proper allocation of the space or position. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -10 .7 When work is to be installed above ceilings, adequate clearance must be maintained to allow for access, repairs, and removal of all devices. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting his installation from being blocked off by others. Should this condition occur, he shall bring the matter to the attention of the other Contractor for correction. .8 The Contractor shall be responsible for any layout associated with the performance of his work. Should a Subcontractor's work be subsequent to and contingent upon layout by another, he shall check said layout prior to proceeding with his work, reporting any discrepancies to the Contractor. Proceeding with the layout shall be considered as acceptance of the layout. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 No Contractor shall endanger and /or damage any work by cutting, drilling, digging or other actions. No Contractor shall cut or alter the work of another Contractor without prior written approval by the CPM. .2 Any cost caused by defective and /or ill -timed work shall be borne by the responsible Contractor. .3 In no case shall any Contractor cut into any structural element, beam, or column without prior written approval from the Structural Engineer of record. .4 The Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that his portion of the work is installed at the appropriate time to avoid unnecessary cutting, patching, or modifications to his work and /or the work of other Contractors. .1 Special effort shall be undertaken to ensure that all conduit and embedded items are properly installed in the masonry work. .5 In case any Contractor is required to cut existing work in order to install the work required under his portion of the contract, the Contractor requiring the cutting shall bear the expense of the cutting and all subsequent repairing, patching, and /or replacement. All cutting, patching, repairing, and /or replacing shall meet with the approval of the CPM and Architect/Engineer consultants. .6 The Cleaning Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up packing materials, trash, and any debris related to his portion of the work and /or generated by his workmen. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning walls, floors and other finished surfaces soiled as a result of his portion of the work or due to his workmen. All work by the Contractor shall be clean at the completion of the respective portion of the contract. .1 Special attention shall be given to cleaning dirt, stains, etc., from interior and exterior masonry. 121 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK .1 The Subcontractor or material supplier shall promptly correct all work rejected by the CPM or the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the contract documents whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or riot fabricated, installed or completed. The subcontractor or material supplier shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work or materials, including the cost of the Construction Project Manager's additional services thereby made necessary. .2 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non - conforming work or materials, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a change order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the contract sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Subcontractor or material supplier. 1.22 OWNER OCCUPANCY .1 The Owner reserves the right to take initial occupancy of the building at the earliest possible date, particularly with regard to delivery and installation of fixtures, and merchandise. Depending on the progress of the Subcontractor's work, this may or may not create some inconvenience. The subcontractor should anticipate this possibility. Claims for time delays and /or extra costs due to such inconveniences will not be allowed. .2 At the time of the owner fixture date, the site shall no longer be considered as a construction site. Subsequent to beneficial occupancy, the Contractor will be subject to the rules of the store management regarding access, security, smoking, etc. 1.23 FINAL INSPECTION .1 As the work nears completion, the Contractor shall review the requirements of the contract documents, inspect the work, and inform all parties involved of work to be corrected or completed before the project can be deemed substantially complete. .2 When, in the opinion of the Contractor, the project is substantially complete, he shall notify the Construction Project Manager in writing of this fact, listing those items of work remaining incomplete, the reason therefore, and the anticipated date that all remaining work will be completed. Final inspection of the project will then be scheduled. .3 The Construction Project Manager reserves the right to cancel and reschedule the inspection in the event considerably more work remains to be completed or corrected than indicated on the written request. .4 A representative of the Contractor shall be present at the time of inspection. 1.24 GUARANTEE .1 General Guarantee - See Section 1F, Exhibit B -1. .1 The Contractor and /or his Subcontractor shall guarantee his work in writing, including labor and materials, for a period of 1 year or longer if so 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -11 specified elsewhere, from the date of final completion of the contract by the Contractor or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner, whichever date is earlier. .2 However, if at, the time of full occupancy of the building by Owner, a portion of the work has not been completed or is found to be defective, the starting date of guarantee for the defective or incomplete portion shall be effective only after same has been completed or corrected by the Contractor. .3 If a portion of the building and /or the work is tumed over to the Owner for occupancy and /or operation prior to the completion of the work under contract, the beginning of the guarantee period for the portion occupied will begin from the date of occupancy. In order to receive an adjustment in the guarantee period, the Contractors involved shall each submit a written certificate describing the portion of the work involved. The certificate shall be submitted for signature and shall become effective when signed by Construction Project Manager. .4 Defective work and all damages resulting from work by the Contractor occurring within 1 year from the date of completion of work under contract shall be corrected by the responsible Contractor at his own expense. .5 Contractor shall be required to submit his written guarantee to Construction Project Manager prior to receiving final payment. .2 Specific Warranty .1 Manufacturer's equipment warranties shall be for at least a period of 1 year as defined in the General Guarantee paragraph (1.24.1). When manufacturer's standard warranty is for a longer period, or if a longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, then the longer warranty period as defined by the manufacturer shall govern. In any case, the overall effective guarantee period shall not be shorter than the 1 year period dating from the final completion of the contract. .2 Contractor shall be required to turn over manufacturer's written guarantees, along with operating and service manuals to CPM prior to receiving final payment. Refer to Section 1B, Paragraph 1.12 for specific requirements. .3 Guarantee Retention .1 Owner shall withhold from the Final Payment and retain an amount equal to one half percent (1/2 %) of the Project Cost, including any Change Orders, amount for a period of one (1) year, or longer if so specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.. The monies withheld and retained shall be referred to herein as the "Guarantee Retention." The Guarantee Retention shall be held to ensure the availability of funds should the Contractor fail to respond in a timely manner (as defined in Paragraph 1:24:3:2 below) to any deficiencies or faults in the Work, or any issues otherwise covered by the Contractor's Guarantee. .2 The Work subject to the Guarantee Retention shall be deemed "Guarantee Work." Guarantee Work shall be comprised of two categories: "Emergency Guarantee Work" and "Non - Emergency Guarantee Work." Contractor must dispatch repair personnel immediately for Emergency Guarantee Work upon notification by the Owner's Representative. Non - Emergency Guarantee Work must be addressed within 48 hours after being reported to the Contractor by a Owner's Representative. Emergency Guarantee Work shall be defined as those deficiencies or defaults in the Work that hinder the Store from normal operations, or otherwise create unsafe operating conditions placing store staff and /or customers at risk of life - safety issues. All other Guarantee Work not fitting the "Emergency Guarantee Work" definition shall be known as Non - Emergency Guarantee Work. .3 Owner reserves the right to perform the Guarantee Work should the Contractor fail to perform the Guarantee Work within the time frames described above. Any and all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in performing the Guarantee Work shall be deducted from the Guarantee Retention by Owner. Should the cost to perform the Guarantee Work by Owner exceed the funds withdrawn and held as the Guarantee Retention, the Contractor will be obligated to reimburse the Owner for any cost or expense in excess of the Guarantee Retention. .4 Contractor is obligated to attend a post - completion walk- though with respect to the Project with the Owner's Representative to inspect and ensure that the Guarantee Work covered by the Guarantee, as described above, is in proper and full operational condition. Such walk- through shall take place at a time designated by the Owner's Representative no later than two hundred seventy (270) days after the completion of the Project. Contractor may reasonably adjoum such date designated by the Owner's Representative for a period not in excess of thirty (30) days thereafter, TIME BEING OF THE ESSENCE. Failure to attend this walk- though by Contractor shall result in Contractor' automatic forfeiture of all claims to the Guarantee Retention, which amount shall be disbursed in full to Owner. At the end of the Guarantee period, the Contractor may bill Owner for any portion of the Guarantee Retention then being held by Owner. If all obligations of the Contractor's Guarantee have been met, Owner will pay Contractor said Guarantee Retention remaining, together with any interest which may have accrued thereon. PART 2: PRODUCTS Not Used. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 PART 3: EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 1A -12 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 1B -1 .1 All work under Divisions 15 and 16 of these specifications will be subject to and governed by Section 1A - General Information and Bidding Information. 1.2 DEFINITIONS .1 The term "Mechanical" Contractors shall mean the Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, and Fire Protection Contractor. The term "Electrical" Contractor shall mean the building Electrical Contractor. For ease of reference, the following abbreviations may be used in the specifications and drawings: .1 CONTR: Contractor who shall be the prime Contractor for this project and who shall be responsible to the Owner. .2 HAC: Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. .3 PBC: Plumbing Contractor, a Subcontractor to the Contractor. .4 ELC: Electrical Contractor, a Subcontractor to the Contractor. .5 FPC: Fire Protection Contractor, a Subcontractor to the Contractor. .6 CPM: Construction Project Manager. 1.3 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP .1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the work under the contract shall be new. Persons qualified in their respective trades shall perform all work. .2 All material shall conform to the governing Codes or regulations. .3 All material and equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), if U.L. has an established certifications for the particular type of material, device, or equipment. .4 Contractors shall not scale the drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for the building construction and dimensions, and refer to "Room Finish Schedule" on architectural drawings for material, finish, and construction method of walls, floors and ceilings, so that proper roughing -in Contractor's work can be provided. .5 Where the word "provide" is used this shall be taken to mean, "furnish and install ", unless otherwise noted or specified. .6 It is the intent of the drawings and specifications that all labor, materials and equipment be provided as required to complete the installation of all mechanical and electrical systems and work described, shown, or indicated in the Contract Documents for proper functioning and finished appearance. The respective Contractors shall provide all necessary components, hardware, accessories, and devices as required to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents, whether or note such items are shown on the drawings or referenced in the specifications. .7 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified, the Contractor shall provide structural members, brackets, bracing, hardware, and related accessories as required to securely install all equipment, devices, and materials under his portion of the work. This shall include flashing, gaskets, sealants, and caulking as required to prevent entrance of or damage from rain or wind. .8 In all cases, route utilities to cause the least interference with the fixture plan (e.g., mount sprinkler mains as high as possible). 1.4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL .1 Excavation: .1 Excavation shall be in accordance with Division 2 of these specifications. .2 Excavation required for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by the respective Contractor, and shall be done in as short a tie as practical before the work is placed. .3 When services are shown in the same general location, a common excavation may be used. However separation between services as specified or as required by governing code shall be maintained. Contractors involved shall make their own agreement as to the sharing of cost for the common excavation work. .4 No excavation or soil stock piling shall be done within drip line of trees not shown to be removed on Architectural drawings. No trees shall be removed without prior approval of the Owner. .5 Excavation for utility lines in the parking area will be undertaken as soon as possible after contract award to allow for accelerated parking lot installation. Utility lines under curbing and for parking lot lights shall be the first utility lines installed where practical. .2 Backfill: .1 Backfill shall be in accordance with Division 2 of these specifications. .2 Backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by respective Contractor and shall comply with the following specifications. .3 Within building lines and under areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be performed in 2 operations. The backfill around and to 12 inches above the pipe or conduit shall be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 6 inches, and thoroughly tamped and compacted. The balance of the backfill shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches. All backfill material shall be clean soil, free from rock, debris, cinders, frozen earth, or materials, which could cause pipe or conduit damage or corrosion. Each lift shall be compacted to a maximum density to comply with the requirements specified in the section of the specifications governing backfill around foundations. .4 Backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall not be placed until all required inspections, tests, and approvals have been performed and given, including inspection and approval by the Owner's Representative. .5 Exterior building lines and exterior of areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be placed in 12 inch lifts above the top of pipe or conduit. Backfill around and to the top of the pipe or conduit shall be placed in thin lifts as specified above. Backfill materials shall be as specified above. Each lift shall be compacted as required to prevent settlement of trench backfill. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 1B -2 .6 All backfill shall be placed with care that piping, conduit or other work is not disturbed or damaged. Compaction by flooding or pooling shall not be used. Immersion -type vibrators are acceptable for compaction of granular backfill. .3 Shoring and Protection: The Contractor is responsible for excavation work and shall provide all necessary barricades, fencing, bracing, warning signs, pumping, etc., for the protection of workers, general public, and properties. .4 Sheet piling and pumping if required, shall be provided by the Contractor for all work. .5 Dewatering: .1 Excavations shall be dewatered before the work is placed and shall be kept dewatered until backfill is completed. .2 Local site conditions and time of year must be taken into account when bidding dewaterng costs; and included in base contract price. All over excavation required of trench bottoms to meet required densities will be to Contractor's account. .6 Excess Earth from Excavation: .1 Excess earth from excavation shall be trucked away by the Contractor making the excavation, or may be piled on the site at location designated by the Contractor, if the excess earth is needed by Contractor, and if approved by the Construction Project Manager as fill material. .2 Debris, trash, or rock not usable for fill shall be removed from the Owner's property by the respective Contractor. .7 Restoration of Existing Conditions: .1 When the excavation is within the area of finished site work by the Contractor, backfill to the height of rough grade. Final surfacing by Contractor. .2 When the excavation is beyond the area of general construction work, final surface of the excavation and adjacent disturbed areas shall be restored to match the original condition by sodding, seeding, asphalt paving, concrete, etc., as required. Work shall conform to applicable sections of the specifications and shall be provided by the respective Contractor. .3 When the excavation is on public property, restoration of surface conditions shall meet the requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction, and be maintained for a minimum of 1 year. 1.5 CONCRETE WORK .1 Concrete encasement, cradles, or trenches for underground pipe conduits and the respective Contractor shall provide ducts, unless otherwise noted or specified. .2 Composition and quality of concrete work shall comply with Division 3 of the specifications. 1.6 SLEEVES THROUGH WALLS AND FLOORS .1 Exterior and Foundation Walls: .1 Piping or conduit through exterior walls and foundation walls shall pass through schedule 40 steel sleeves, which shall be large enough to allow for caulking material. No sleeves are permitted through 2010 SSBS Renovation concrete structural members unless indicated on the structural drawings. .2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve shall first be packed with jute, hemp, or oakum and then be finally caulked flush with finished surfaces. .2 Interior Walls and Partitions: .1 Piping or conduit through interior walls and partitions shall pass through either Schedule 40 black steel, plastic or galvanized steel sheet metal sleeves. Schedule 40 sleeves must be used with concrete or masonry construction. Sleeves will not be required for temperature control tubing. .2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve, or between insulation and sleeve shall be caulked when passing through mechanical room walls or fire -rated walls. .3 Ducts: Space between duct and opening shall be grouted with non - shrinking cement or plaster for fire rating and noise isolation. Openings in stud walls shall be sleeved with galvanized sheet metal collar and grouted as above fire dampers shall be provided in all ducts penetrating fire -rated walls. .3 Floors: .1 Piping or conduit through floors shall be provided with schedule 40 pipe sleeves, extending 1 inch above floor, except in finished areas. Sleeves in finished areas shall terminate flush with floor, and shall be Schedule 40 pipe, plastic, or sheet metal. .1 When opening is on the lowest floor grout space between pipe or conduit and sleeve with non - shrinking cement. .2 When opening is above lowest floor space between pipe or conduit or insulation and sleeve shall be grouted with non - shrinking cement or shall be caulked from above and below to provide watertight construction and to maintain fire rating of floor structure. .2 Ducts through floors shall be provided with galvanized or painted steel angle frame for support of duct and closure of opening. Provide grouting in the same manner as for ducts through walls. Fire dampers are required in all ducts penetrating fire - rated floors. 1.7 LINTELS .1 Lintels required for supporting building construction above pipes, boxes, panels, ducts, etc., shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. .2 Contractor requiring the opening or recess shall be responsible for the size, location, and configuration of the opening. 1.8 ROOF OPENINGS .1 Roof openings for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be sleeved by the respective Contractor. .2 Framed openings on roof shall be provided by Contractor in accordance with details, dimensions and locations as shown on the structural and architectural drawings. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS- MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 1B -3 1.9 ROOF CURBS (RTU Curbs are Owner Supplied) .1 Unless prefabricated type curbs are specified, the Contractor shall construct curbs in accordance with details and dimensions shown on the structural and architectural plans. Respective Contractor shall provide correct dimensions to the Contractor prior to fabrication of curbs. .2 Flashing for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be made watertight by means of sleeves, flashing, and draw collars. Materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. Sleeves, flashing, and flashing draw collars shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor requiring the opening. If piping is insulated, the insulation shall be sealed off by insulation cement or weatherproof mastic in a manner and with materials as required to prevent rain leakage. Contractors requiring openings shall coordinate all flashing, counter flashing, and related details with the roofing Subcontractor. .3 .4 Plumbing vent terminals shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Special flashing and counter flashing if required shall be as shown on the drawings and /or as specified elsewhere in Division 15. .5 Prefabricated roof curbs, if required shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Section of Division 15 of these specifications and /or noted on the drawings. 1.10 FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING .1 Flashing around roof curbs shall be provided by the Roofing Subcontractor under Contractor. Counter flashing shall be by the Contractor requiring such curbed openings, except where counter flashing is a component part of the equipment, all counter flashing materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. .2 Roofing and /or weatherproofing of any installation and /or penetration of the roof, by respective Contractor must be coordinated with and installed by the Contractor roofing Subcontractor to assure the roofing guarantee will not be invalidated. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 New Construction: .1 Field -cut openings in roof deck shall be cut by various Subcontractors under Contractor. The size and location of such openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. .2 Openings in stud walls shall be cut and /or framed by various Subcontractors under Contractor. Openings in concrete and masonry work shall be sleeved prior to or at the placing of the concrete and masonry work. The sizes and locations of openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. .3 Openings, lintels, frames, etc., as required for flush mounted panels and recessed equipment shall be provided by various Subcontractors under Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. .4 The Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that all sleeves, openings, rough -in boxes, frames, etc., are placed at the proper time. Any and all subsequent cutting and patching and /or unnecessary modifications to the work of other Subcontractors shall be done at the expense of the Contractor requiring the opening. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load bearing walls, footings, or foundations be cut without first obtaining written permission from the Project manager. .2 Remodeling /Alterations: .1 Required cutting shall be performed by the contractor. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, Toad bearing walls, footings or foundations be cut without first obtaining permission from the Construction Project Manager unless the location and size of openings are predetermined as noted on the drawings. .2 Contractor shall make thorough investigation and /or field measurement by use of magnetic detection instruments or other approved means to detect any concealed ferrous metal piping or conduits prior to cutting. Should any existing and active piping or conduits be damaged by the Contractor's work, same shall be restored to service immediately without additional cost to the Owner. .3 Cutting shall be limited to the size necessary for working conditions. When cutting surfaces are difficult or costly to replace, such as marble, ceramic tile, wood paneling, etc., al trades shall consult with the Contractor in advance and they shall jointly develop a method of cutting. .4 Patching shall be done with materials and by methods consistent with the construction and materials being patched. Cement grout shall be used with masonry, and filler compound shall be used with dry wall or plastered surfaces. Quality and final appearance of all patching work shall be subject to the approval of the CPM. 1.12 OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUALS .1 Near the completion of the project, and (in order to allow Owner time in which to become familiar with its contents) at least 1 month prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, all trades shall be required to provide 2 volumes of Operating and Service Manuals containing the following: .1 Start-up and Shut -down Procedures: Provide a step - by -step write -up of all major equipment furnished by Contractor. When manufacturer's printed start-up, trouble shooting and shutdown procedures are available, they shall be incorporated into the operating manual for reference. .2 Operating Instructions: Written operating instructions shall be included for the efficient and safe operation of all equipment. .3 Equipment List: List of all major equipment as installed shall include model number, serial numbers, capacities, flow rates, and nameplate data. (The list shall include all equipment furnished by Owner.) .4 Contractor will, before the store opens, familiarize store personnel with operating instructions on each piece of equipment (e.g., set temperature controls, timers for lights, etc.). .5 Service Instructions: The Contractor shall be required to provide the following information for all pieces of equipment: .1 Recommended spare parts, including catalog number, name of local suppliers, and /or factory representative. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 .2 Lubrication and maintenance instructions for all equipment including all electric motors. GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 1B -4 .3 Belt sizes, filter types and lengths (mechanical only). .6 Manufacturer's Certificate of Warranty: Manufacturer's certificate of warranty shall be obtained for all major equipment furnished by the Contractor. Warranty shall be obtained for at least 1 year as defined in the guarantee paragraph of Section 1A. Where longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, the longer period shall govern. Warranty information shall include warranty number, contact, and phone number. .7 The Contractor shall include, in the manuals, parts catalogs for each item of equipment furnished by him on the project with the components identified by number for replacement ordering. .2 Submission: .1 Manuals shall be in duplicate, and all materials shall be bound into volumes of standard black, 1 inch wide 8 -1/2 inch x 11 inch hard binders, with 2 -1/4 inch clear plastic label sleeve. Large drawings too bulky to be folded into 8 -1/2 inch x 11 inch size shall be separately bound or folded into brown envelopes, cross referenced and indexed with the manuals. .2 The manuals shall include the name of Project Manager, Contractors, and major Subcontractors. .3 In order not to duplicate Contractor's effort, it is suggested that all trades shall submit 1 preliminary copy of the manual to the Owner's Representative for a pre- check, and when approved, Contractor shall then submit the final copies through normal channels. 1.13 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT .1 Accessibility: .1 Control devices, specialties, valves, and removable panels on equipment shall be so located as to provide easy access for inspection and maintenance including ease of removal of any interior components. .2 Should any Contractor's work, such as piping, ducts, conduits, etc., be installed without due regard to the accessibility of devices installed by other Contractors, the installation shall be relocated, offset, or re- routed without cost to the Owner. .2 Access Panels: .1 Where devices are to be concealed in walls or above non - removable ceilings, Contractor shall be required to furnish the required access panels for installation. .2 Size of panels shall be larger than the devices for accessibility, and shall be not less than 6 inches square for wall panels and not less than 12 inches square for ceiling panels. Where the opening must allow adequate room for a person to pass through, a 24 inch x 24 inch panel shall be provided. .3 Construction: .1 For masonry, tile, wood or wallboard surfaces - extruded aluminum frames, 3/4 inch border, aluminum piano hinges, screwdriver operated cam lock, brushed satin aluminum finish. Final painting to match decor by Contractor. .2 For acoustical tile ceiling, flangeless construction of even -tile module, recessed door panel for receiving acoustical tile by Contractor, piano hinges, flush screwdriver- operated cam latch, white prime coat finish. Access panels will not be required in accessible type ceilings. .3 For plastered ceiling or wall, concealed flange, recessed door panel to receive plaster by Contractor, continuous hinges, flush latch, and white prime coat finish. Final painting to match interior decor by Contractor. 1.14 OPERATION OF DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT .1 If after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to Owner by reasons of defects, errors or omissions, Owner reserves the right to operate the equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall be liable for any damage to equipment resulting from such continued operation. 1.15 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Contractor shall wire all mechanical equipment furnished by various Contractors and the Owner, in accordance with the following general provisions: .1 Power wiring from panel to motor controllers, relays, etc., and controllers to motor terminals per equipment manufacturer's wiring diagram. .2 Furnish, install and wire local disconnect switches, manual push buttons and other control wiring specifically called for or noted in electrical specifications. .3 Initial field oiling of all motors prior to the test running of same. .4 Receive, unload, set and align all separately shipped motors. Adjust and align drive and adjust belt tension. .5 Furnish and install motor starters specifically called for on plans. .6 Install and wire all field- mounted devices, such as selector switches push button stations, etc., specifically called for to be furnished by other Contractors when not a factory pre -wired component. .7 Owner supplied items: Refer to project drawings for a detailed list of Owner supplied electrical items. .2 Contractors shall include the following: .1 Motor starters or control devices specifically called for to be factory pre - wired. .2 Furnish individual motor starters or control devices specifically called for in accordance with the specifications, or as noted on the drawings. .3 Automatic control and interlock wiring as called for under Division 15. .4 Furnish complete and accurate wiring diagrams to ELC for all equipment requiring electrical power wiring and /or control wiring. .5 Separately shipped motors shall be delivered to ELC for installation. Adjustable motor base and all bolts 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 1B -5 and nuts required for installation of base and respective Contractor shall furnish motor. .6 Fumish motor terminal connection diagram as prepared by motor manufacturers. .3 Motor Starters: Motor starters mechanical the respective Contractors as shall furnish equipment called for on the drawings. In general, the following principles shall be followed: .1 Magnetic motor starters to be built -in in motor control panel boards will be furnished and installed by ELC. .2 Magnetic motor starters to be factory prewired shall be furnished and installed at the factory and shall be included in the respective Mechanical Contract .3 Individual motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the ELC, unless noted to be furnished by others on plans. The ELC will install and wire individual motor starters, including those furnished by others. .4 Magnetic motor starters furnished by ELC will be provided with auxiliary contacts required for operation of starting device only. Additional auxiliary contacts required for electrical interlock and automatic controls shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor responsible for the interlock wiring. .5 In order to be properly sized, heater elements for overload relays on magnetic motor starters (except the starters factory prewired with equipment) shall be furnished and installed by the ELC in the field. The Contractor furnishing the motorized equipment shall be required to furnish a list of motor characteristics to the ELC so that properly sized heater elements may be provided. The list shall include equipment identification by name and by number, full load current, locked rotor current, voltage rating, and suggested service factor to compensate for operating duty cycle and ambient temperature. 1.16 PAINTING .1 General .1 The required field painting of piping, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical systems and components shall be done by subcontractor under the Contractor. However, all painting or finishing, which is required for special results and /or wherever painting or finishing is specifically referenced within the context of Divisions 15 and 16, all such painting or finishing shall be provided by the respective Contractor, except as otherwise noted. Other painting to be provided under the mechanical and electrical work is described below. .2 Refer to Section 9H for further clarification and scope of painting work for this project. .3 Miscellaneous structural members, brackets, braces, rods, unistrut, hardware, and accessories provided by the Contractor shall be painted with light gray rust inhibiting metal primer, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. Items in this category, which are galvanized, cadmium or copper plated, stainless steel, or finished with a factory finish shall not be painted. .4 Nameplates and equipment identifications shall be masked -off or suitably protected from paint during touch -up or adjacent painting required by the respective Contractors. That painting subcontractor, as may be required during paint operations performed by the painting subcontractor under the contractor, shall provide protection of nameplates and similar identifications. .2 Workmanship: .1 Painting work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Painting materials shall be of the best quality and suitable for the service intended. Finish paints shall present a glossy finish and /or shall match the color and texture of the adjacent areas and surfaces. .2 Surfaces to be painted by the respective mechanical or electrical Contractor shall be free of rust, scale, peeling, blistering, grease, oil, or deteriorating film prior to application of primer. .3 Applicable parts of Section 9H of these specifications shall govern work under this Section. PART 2: PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3: EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RENOVATION WORK SECTION 1C -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY .1 Drawings and all general provisions of Contract, including other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. .2 This section specifies administration and procedural requirements for Owner's continued operations, construction facilities and temporary controls, selective demolition and cutting and patching. .3 Refer to other sections and drawings for specific requirements and limitations applicable to demolition, and cutting and patching individual parts of work. .4 Requirements of this section apply to all trade installation, removals, repairs, replacements, etc. 1.2 DEFINITIONS .1 Renovation: Converting an existing space for a new use or upgrade in finishes. .2 Remodel: Modification of an entire store facility. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE .1 The work will be conducted in several phases to provide the least possible interference to the activities of the Owner's personnel and operation. .2 The Owner will provide a phasing plan and schedule and will instruct the Contractor as to the sequence of construction to permit the Owner's uninterrupted operation. The Contractor shall maintain a safe and clean environment during the construction period. 1.4 OWNER'S CONTINUING OPERATIONS .1 Work for this Project is within existing facilities, which will remain in full operation throughout construction period. .2 Renovation work, new construction, etc., must be conducted so as to cause absolute minimum of interference with and inconvenience to Owner's continuing operations. .3 Construction and renovation operations must be conducted as required to insure complete safety to persons (Owner's personnel, Contractor's personnel, general public and others) who may be on site or adjacent to work. .4 Entrances to and exits from existing buildings must be protected, kept free of restrictions or obstructions and maintained in full use at all times. Safety and well -being of occupants of this building and other persons must be prime concern of Contractor at all times. .5 Use by Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, delivery persons, etc., of Owner's property (buildings and site) must be restricted to those areas designated by Owner for such use. Contractor must obtain permission from Owner before beginning any use of property. .6 Provide adequate safeguards for control of dust and moisture during construction. Close coordination with Owner for these environmental controls is mandatory. .7 General Contractor will hold a pre - construction meeting with the Toys 'R' Us Construction Project Manager to describe and coordinate in -store activities. Weekly progress meetings should also be held. .8 Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect public from injury. .1 Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. .2 Erect temporary covered passageways whenever overhead work is performed. Paint temporary passageway, inside and outside, if required. .3 Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. .4 Protect existing floors to remain and new floors with suitable coverings. .5 Construct temporary insulated clear /white visqueen dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. .6 Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. .7 Remove protections at completion of work. .8 Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. .9 Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. .1 Construct temporary barrier partition as required per state and local building codes and rules and OSHA standards to ensure public and employee safety. .2 Where necessary, construct temporary partition to maintain fire rating required by governing authority. .3 Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES .1 Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. .1 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the general public at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. .2 Maintain existing building in weather tight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building during the construction period. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RENOVATION WORK SECTION 1C -2 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY .1 Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. .2 The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. .1 Obtain Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. .2 Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in completed portions of the building. 1.7 TEMPORARY UTILITIES .1 Water and electrical energy will be made available only as they presently exist. General Contractor will provide and pay for such connections to, extensions from, and means of using these utilities as may be required. .2 Except as noted in following paragraph, Owner will pay utility company bills for water and electrical energy which is required for project and which passes through Owner's meters. .3 Owner will not pay for following: .1 Water, which is wasted needlessly or expended without proper regard for conservational or ecological considerations. .2 Electrical energy expended in electric heating devices. 1.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITY INSTALLATIONS .1 Before work is started, consult with public and private utility companies and agencies and with Owner relative to location, conditions, protection, maintenance, relocation, etc., of utility installations within boundaries of site or adjacent thereto. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to, companies and agencies providing gas, water, electrical, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, telephone, and site utilities and /or services: .2 Before item of work is started, carefully review information relative to existing utility installations, and plan and schedule work so as to avoid damage to equipment or work, or other adverse results. .3 Should utility installation be damaged or destroyed, or should injury or damage be caused to persons or property, party or parties (Contractors and /or Subcontractors) responsible for such injury and /or damage shall be fully and exclusively liable and claims resulting there from. 1.9 WEATHER PROTECTION .1 Weather protection consists of temporary enclosures, heating devices, fuel, etc., and labor and services required to protect materials in storage, work in progress and completed construction from damage or defacement. Due to usual or unusual condition(s) of weather prior to time that building is completely and permanently enclosed. Weathertight means all exterior building construction, walls, doors, windows, louvers, roofs, etc., are 100 percent complete, weathertight, and insulated at R -11 minimum. .2 Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection as may be required by trades to properly protect work from damage during construction. 1.10 TEMPORARY HEAT .1 Except as provided in Paragraphs 1.10.2, 1.10.3, and 1.10.4, the Contractor shall provide temporary heat required for proper and timely completion of total project including temporary space heaters with vent pipes, adequate controls, fuel, attendants, supervision, etc. .2 Mechanical trades shall provide early use of or part of permanent heating system for supplementary heating subject to approval by CPM. .3 When permanent heating equipment is used for temporary heating, units shall be fitted with disposable type filters, which shall be changed at regular intervals as directed by CPM. At end of temporary heating period and prior to being turned over to Owner, heating units shall be thoroughly cleaned and permanent filters installed. Mechanical Tradesman shall be responsible for operation, maintenance, cleaning, and warranty of these units during temporary heating period. .4 Owner will only pay fuel bills for temporary heat provided by permanent heating system. Owner will not pay for fuel used in temporary heating devices. 1.11 EXISTING TOILET FACILITIES .1 Owner will not permit use of existing toilet facilities. Contractor shall provide portable toilets for subcontractors and enforce their use. 1.12 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES .1 Provide and maintain temporary first aid facilities as required by OSHA and other federal, state and local authorities, laws, ordinances, regulations, etc. 1.13 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION .1 Contractor and Subcontractor shall exercise every precaution for prevention of fire and make timely and adequate provisions for protection and safety of persons and property in event of fire. .2 Contractor shall provide fire protection for work and shall furnish fire extinguishers and /or other firefighting devices, equipment, etc. of types and in such quantities as required by appropriate officials. Contractor shall maintain same in fully operable condition and keep them readily available on site at all times. .3 Whenever work of particularly hazardous nature is being done, party doing such work shall provide additional and /or special fire protection as may be required. .4 Electrical arc welding and flame cutting equipment must be approved by Owner before they may be used within building. Gas welding equipment may not be used. Gasoline torches or burners will not be permitted. When welding or flame cutting is permitted, Contractor shall provide full -time stand -by watchperson, with fire - extinguisher mounted on cart or other means of transportation located immediately adjacent to work and ready for immediate use. .5 All trash, refuse, etc., must be removed from the building and legally disposed of after each day's work. .6 Smoking is prohibited in all portions of building. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RENOVATION WORK SECTION 1C -3 1.14 SECURITY .1 Owner maintains full -time security watch at store. AD traffic is subject to control and search by Owner's security personnel. At times, and with prior agreement between Owner and Contractor, overnight lock -in will be utilized. .2 Contractors, Subcontractors, material persons, suppliers, delivery people, etc., will be required to cooperate fully with Owner's personnel in maintaining integrity of Owner's security program. .3 Provide security for tools, equipment,.devices, etc., required or otherwise used for construction of project, and for materials which have been paid for by Owner but not yet incorporated into new construction. 1.15 RESTORATION .1 Leave facilities and site in same condition as prior to start of this work. .2 If existing construction, paving, landscaping, etc., is defaced, damaged or destroyed, it shall be repaired or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and local building official having jurisdiction. .3 Where specific damage can be attributed to specific party that party shall pay for repair or replacement of such damage. .4 Where damage cannot be attributed to specific party, Construction Project Manager shall allocate cost of necessary repairs or replacement among various parties in such manner as seems appropriate. .5 In event of delay or dispute involving repair and /or replacement of damaged construction, CPM reserves right to order execution of work and to deduct full cost thereof from monies due Contractor. .6 Photographs of existing exterior conditions of structural surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that may be misinterpreted as damage related to current work and operations must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 1.16 PROTECTION OF FINISHED ROOFS .1 Protection shall be provided at existing roof area where heavy construction traffic will occur. .2 Provide temporary protective covering consisting of one layer of 3/4 inch thick Dow Chemical STYROFOAM or similar polystyrene or urethane foam type roof insulation, with full coverage overlay of 5/8 -inch thick minimum exterior grade plywood in largest sheets available. .3 Place protection in accordance with following: .1 Set first layer of foam board firmly onto roof, with butt tight joints throughout. .2 Tape boards of layer together as necessary to retain firmly in place until succeeding work is placed. .3 Lay plywood over entire area with joints staggered from joints in layer of foam board below, and provide suitable method of fastening boards at corners so they remain in place under traffic. .4 Provide sand bag ballast to hold plywood in place. 2010 SSBS Renovation .4 Areas protected may be modified during course of work to suit changing requirements, but must be maintained in good condition at all times. 1.17 PROTECTION OF AREAS WHERE EXISTING ROOFING IS REMOVED .1 Provide temporary plywood, waterproof covers, flashings; and accessories as required to keep roof deck dry and to maintain weather tightness of occupied space below roof while existing roofing is removed. .2 Protect existing remaining roof insulation to keep water from penetrating insulation, causing reduction of thermal insulating value, and possible leakage below. .3 Coordinate timing of protection work with cutting of openings in roof deck to avoid duplication of effort and to assure that others do not undo completed protection work. 1.18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION .1 The following paragraphs direct the selective removal and off -site disposal: .1 Removal of portions of existing building as indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. .2 Removal of interior partitions as indicated on drawings. .3 Removal of doors and frames as indicated on drawings. .4 Removal of built -in casework as indicated on drawings. .5 Removal of existing windows indicated to be filled in as indicated on drawings. .6 Removal and protection of existing fixtures, materials, and equipment items indicated "salvage." .7 Removal of roofing and roof insulation as indicated on drawings. .8 Cutting nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping, ducts, and conduits are included with the work of the respective Mechanical and Electrical sections in Divisions 15 and 16. .9 Cutting holes in roof deck for installation of new rooftop mechanical equipment. .2 Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to CPM for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. .1 Coordinate with Owner's 'schedule for partial occupancy of work complete. .3 Photographs of existing exterior conditions of structural surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that may be misinterpreted as damage related to current work and operations must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. .4 Conduct demolition in manner that will not disrupt adjacent operations. .5 Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RENOVATION WORK SECTION 1C -4 .6 Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. .7 Conduct demolition operations and debris removal to ensure no interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent facilities. .1 Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. Use signalman to ensure safe passage and egress. .8 Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. .1 At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. .2 Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. .3 Provide fire watch in areas not visible to flame cutter operator. .9 Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. .1 Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Ilrovide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities and Owner. .2 Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations unless otherwise noted. .3 Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. .4 Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. .5 Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to landlord if shutdown of service is necessary during .changeover. .10 Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. .1 Cease operations and notify CPM immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. .2 Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed and are so designated for protection by CPM. .11 Perform demolition work in systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. .1 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Unless otherwise noted on drawings cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power- driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power- driven impact tools. Tooth -in masonry where an exposed masonry opening is required. .2 Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing dangerous and /or improper loads on existing structures. .3 Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. .4 Demolish foundation walls to depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below -grade wood or metal construction. Break up below -grade concrete slabs. .5 For interior slabs on grade use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw at all times. .6 Completely fill and compact below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter. .12 If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit written report to CPM in accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from CPM, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. .13 Salvaged Items: Where salvaged material is indicated on the drawings, carefully remove indicated items, dean, store, turn over to Owner, and obtain receipt. .14 Remove from site all debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. Provide dumpster and locate on site per CPM. .1 If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. .2 Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. .15 Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. .1 Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. .2 Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. .3 Retum elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. .4 Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RENOVATION WORK SECTION 1C -5 1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Refer to other sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the work. .2 Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. .3 Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. .1 Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. .4 Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. .1 Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. .2 Temporary Support Provide temporary support of work to be cut. .3 Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. .4 Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. .5 Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, and scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. .5 Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. .1 Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. .6 Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage adjoining construction. Review proposed procedures with the original installer, comply with the original installer's recommendations whenever possible. .1 Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. .2 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. .3 Cut through concrete and masonry using carborundum saw or diamond core drill. .4 Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. .5 By pass utility services before cutting where services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. .1 Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. .2 Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by- passing and cutting. .7 Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. .8 Cleaning: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. PART 2: PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3: EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DIVISION 1 PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 1D -1 CONTRACTOR'S NAME: Date: CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: TOYS "R" US, INC. One Geoffrey Way Wayne, New Jersey 07470 Attn: Bid Committee Re: [PROJECT NAME] - TOYS "R" US /BABIES "R" US Gentlemen: The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work with the drawings and specifications for the proposed above referenced project as prepared by <Architect> <Architect's Address >, hereby proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted to enter into a contract to supply any labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the complete execution of all general construction work in strict accordance with the plans and specifications for a lump sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) DOLLARS ($ ) Write Out in Words Write in Figures (not to exceed 120 days construction condition date listed in specification). This bid is based upon proprietary brands as shown on plans and /or specified. The undersigned further proposes and agrees hereby to commence work with an adequate force and equipment immediately after being notified in writing to do so, and to complete all work as required by the plans and specifications within the number of consecutive calendar days as itemized above. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner or his representative to reject any or all bids, and it is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days from bid date. It is further acknowledged that, after thorough examination of the site, drawings and specifications, the above quoted prices do not include any changes or substitutions to specified materials or methods. Any proposed changes or substitutions are itemized by attachment herewith for consideration noting the appropriate Add or Deduct amount. (Reference documents for specifically requested alternates.) We propose to subcontract the following items of work to other firms as follows: Item of Work Subcontractor Name and Address Alternates: Fill in Add /Deduct amounts as indicated at end of Exhibit A. At the time of submission of this proposal, the undersigned has received the following addenda (if any): Addendum No, Date 2010 SSBS Renovation Name of Firm By (Typed) By (Signature) Title Official Address Telephone Attest: Enclosures: Exhibit A (Pages 3 thru 5) Secretary THE FOLLOWING EXHIBIT A (SECTIONS 1D -3 THRU SECTIONS 1D -6) IS TO BE USED BY BIDDERS IN SUBMITTING THEIR PROPOSALS TO Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 SEAL DIVISION 1 PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 1D -2 2010 SSBS Renovation OWNER. THIS SAME EXHIBIT WILL BE MADE AN ATTACHMENT TO THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 1D -3 EXHIBIT "A" Project Cost Breakdown of Major Categories of Work PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS 1 -010 TEMPORARY FACILITIES $ 0.00 1 -020 TEMPORARY UTILITIES $ 0.00 1 -030 SUPERVISION $ 0.00 1 -040 ADMINISTRATIVE (INCLUDING INSURANCE) $ 0.00 1 -050 SURVEYING $ 0.00 1 -060 CLEAN UP $ 0.00 1 -070 SECURITY $ 0.00 1 -080 MISCELLANEOUS $ 0.00 Total General Conditions $ DMSION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 2 -010 DEMOLITION $ 0.00 2 -020 SITE CLEARING /GRADING $ 0.00 2 -030 UTILITIES $ 0.00 2 -040 BUILDING EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL $ 0.00 2 -050 BITUMINOUS PAVING, STRIPING, STOP SIGNS $ 0.00 2 -060 LANDSCAPING $ 0.00 2 -070 MISCELLANEOUS SITE $ 0.00 2 -080 PILE INSTALLATION $ 0.00 2 -090 SITE CONCRETE $ 0.00 Total Site Improvements $ DMSION 3 - CONCRETE 3 -010 BUILDING FOUNDATIONS $ 0.00 3 -020 SLAB AND SIDEWALKS AT BUILDING INSTALLATION $ 0.00 3 -030 REINFORCING RODS AND MESH $ 0.00 Total Concrete $ DMSION 4 - MASONRY 4 -010 MASONRY $ 0.00 Total Masonry $ DIVISION 5 - METALS 5 -010 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 0.00 5 -020 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL $ 0.00 5 -030 STEEL ERECTION $ 0.00 5 -040 BAR JOISTS $ 0.00 5 -060 DECKING $ 0.00 5 -070 PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING $ 0.00 Total Steel $ 2010 SSBS Renovation 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 1D -4 EXHIBIT "A" Project Cost Breakdown of Major Categories of Work PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 6 -010 CARPENTRY $ 0.00 Total Carpentry $ DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 7 -010 BUILT -UP ROOF $ 0.00 7 -020 FLASHING......... $ 0.00 7 -030 METAL ROOFING AND SIDING $ 0.00 7 -040 MOISTURE CONTROL $ 0.00 7 -050 CAULKING $ 0.00 Total Roofing $ DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 8 -010 H/M DOORS $ 0.00 8 -020 GLASS AND GLAZING $ 0.00 8 -030 FINISH HARDWARE $ 0.00 Total Glass and Glazing $ DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 9 -010 PAINTING - $ 0.00 9 -020 CERAMIC TILE $ 0.00 9 -030 VCT FLOOR / RESILIENT TILE $ 0.00 9 -040 ACOUSTICAL CEILING $ 0.00 9 -050 DRYWALL $ 0.00 9 -060 DRYVIT / STUCCO $ 0.00 9 -070 CARPET WORK $ 0.00 Total Finishes $ DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 -010 PARTITIONS $ 0.00 10 -020 TOILET ACCESSORIES $ 0.00 10 -030 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS $ 0.00 10 -040 OSI INSTALLATION $ 0.00 Total Specialties $ 2010 SSBS Renovation 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 1D -5 EXHIBIT "A" Project Cost Breakdown of Major Categories of Work PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15 -010 HVAC $ 0.00 15 -020 SPRINKLERS $ 0.00 15 -030 PLUMBING $ 0.00 15 -050 GAS PIPING $ 0.00 Total Mechanical $ DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16 -010 ELECTRICAL (INSIDE 5 FT) $ 0.00 16 -020 ELECTRICAL (OUTSIDE 5 FT) $ 0.00 Total Electrical $ CONTRACTOR SUBTOTAL $ 19 -010 TAXES $ 0.00 20 -010 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT $ 0.00 34 -010 SIGNAGE $ 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 TOTAL BASE CONTRACT $ 0.00 50 -010 DEDUCTIONS (ACCEPTED) $ 0.00 (Only as specifically requested by Toys "R" Us ) Alternate No. 1 Add /Deduct $ 0.00 (Brief Description of Alternate) Alternate No. 2 Add /Deduct $ 0.00 (Brief Description of Alternate) 60 -010 ALTERNATES (ACCEPTED) Subtotal $ 0.00 (Only as specifically requested by Toys "R" Us ) GRAND TOTAL $ 0.00 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 LIST OF DRAWINGS AND REVISIONS SECTION 1E-1 TOYS "R" US / BABIES "R" US SIDE- BY-SIDE RENOVATION TUKWILA, WA ISSUED FOR 90% LANDLORD REVIEW — FEBRUARY 26, 2010 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS — MARCH 9, 2010 DRAWING NUMBER DRAWING TITLE REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A001 COVER SHEET 0 03/09/10 A002 LIFE SAFETY PLAN 0 03/09/10 D101 DEMOLITION PLAN 0 03/09/10 A100 NOT USED A101 FLOOR PLAN 0 03/09/10 A102 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A103 FINISH PLAN & DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 0 03/09/10 A202 NOT USED A301 EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS 0 03/09/10 A302 EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS 0 03/09/10 A303 NOT USED A304 EXTERIOR MISC. DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A401 ENLARGED PLANS 0 03/09/10 A402 ENLARGED PLANS & DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A403 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 0 03/09/10 A404 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 0 03/09/10 A405 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A406 INTERIOR DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A407 INTERIOR DETAILS 0 03/09/10 A501 DOOR & FINISH SCHEDULES 0 03/09/10 SI01 SIGN INSTALLATION 0 03/09/10 LRO1 LIGHTING REFERENCE 0 03/09/10 OWNER LAYOUT PLANS F1 1 2010 58K SSBS FIXTURE PLAN (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) I 0 I 02/19/10 SEISMIC PLANS 09- 0070 -A STORAGE RACK & MOVABLE BASE DETAILS 0 01/26/10 09- 0070 -B GONDOLA & MULTI - FUNCTION SHELVING DETAILS 0 01/26/10 STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S001 GENERAL NOTES & TYPICAL DETAILS 0 03/09/10 S100 STRUCTURAL PLANS 0 03/09/10 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 LIST OF DRAWINGS AND REVISIONS SECTION 1E-2 DRAWING NUMBER DRAWING TITLE REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE S200 STRUCTURAL DETAILS 0 03/09/10 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS MD101 MECH. & PLUMB. DEMOLITION PLAN 0 03/09/10 M101 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN 0 03/09/10 M201 ENLARGED HVAC PLANS & SECTIONS 0 03/09/10 M202 ENLARGED HVAC PLAN & SECTIONS 0 03/09/10 M301 MECH SCHEDULES AND DETAILS 0 03/09/10 P101 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN 0 03/09/10 P201 ENLARGED PLUMBING PLANS & SCHEMATICS 0 03/09/10 P301 PLUMBING SCHED. AND DETAILS 0 03/09/10 FIRE PROTECTION FP101 FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN 0 03/09/10 FA101 FIRE ALARM PLAN 0 03/09/10 FA201 FIRE ALARM NOTES AND DETAILS 0 03/09/10 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E101 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN 0 03/09/10 E102 LIGHTING PLAN 0 03/09/10 E103 DISPLAY POWER AND LIGHTING 0 03/09/10 E104 LOW VOLTAGE PLAN 0 03/09/10 E201 ENLARGED VIEWS AND DETAILS 0 03/09/10 E202 DETAILS 0 03/09/10 E301 PANEL SCHEDULES 0 03/09/10 E302 ONE -LINE DIAGRAM 0 03/09/10 EMS1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT 0 03/09/10 END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1F -1 EXHIBIT "B -1" GUARANTEE DATE: TO: TOYS "R" US One Geoffrey Way Wayne, New Jersey 07470 The undersigned having heretofore entered into a contract with Toys "R" Us, inc. dated locate at according to certain plans and specifications as identified in the contract and in accordance with the terms of said contract, do hereby guarantee that all the labor and material furnished and work performed by us under sad contract is in conformity with such plans and specifications and authorized alterations thereto and that such materials and equipment installed pursuant to said contract is free from imperfect workmanship, and we agree to repair at our own cost and expense all of the work covered under said contract and change orders which may prove to be defective for a period of year(s) from the date hereof. Furthermore, we agree to repair at our sole cost any work which we may affect or disturb in making the repairs herein contemplated. By: Title: Guarantee Period Begins (Date) 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • DMSION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1F -2 EXHIBIT "B -2" SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE LIENS TO: TOYS "R" US One Geoffrey Way Wayne, New Jersey 07470 PROJECT: (name & address) State of: County of: The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or Waivers of lien attached hereto include this contractor, all of his subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of work, labor or services who have or may have liens against any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: (if none, write "None." If required by the Owner, the subcontractor shall fumish Bond satisfactory to the owner for each exception.) SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: 1. Contractor's Final Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, accompanied by a list thereof. CONTRACTOR: Address: By: Subscribed and sworn before me this day of . 200_. • Notary Public: My Commission Expires: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1F -3 EXHIBIT "B -3" FINAL RELEASE TO: TOYS "R" US One Geoffrey Way Wayne, New Jersey 07470 WHEREAS, pursuant to contract made by and between, the Owner hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, for final payment is about to be made, NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and of the sum of DOLLARS $ lawful money of the United States being the full and entire sum due upon the completion of the contract aforesaid to the said Contractor in hand paid by receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, said Contractor does hereby remise, release and forever discharge of and from any and all manner of actions, suits, debts, dues, sums of money, accounts, reckonings, Bonds, bills, covenants, controversies, agreements, promises, claims, demands and liens whatsoever in law or in equity which the said Contractor has or may have for or on account of or in connection with the contract aforesaid. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Contractor has caused its name to be hereunto subscribed and its seal to be hereunto affixed this day of two thousand and ATTEST OR WITNESS: (SEAL) CONTRACTOR By: Title: Address: WITNESS By: Title: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • DMSION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1F -4 Exhibit "B -4" Page 1 of 4 New Store Section 1245 — Tax Form As Applies to Toys "R" Us Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Electrical Contractor's cost to furnish and /or install the following: 5 1. Isolated power wiring 2. Telephones which are required, as applicable, for operation of the following cash registers, price checkers, bas stations, telephone and data system equipment 3. Paging equipment 4. Cash register lane lights 5. Refund /exchange desk equipment 6. Uninterrupted power supply (UPS) and by -pass switch 7. Power poles 8. Panels LF and LC 9. 10KVA transformer T1 10. Switches 11. CCTV and burglar alarm wiring and equipment 12. Telephone equipment 13. Paging equipment 14. Pull boxes 15. Empty conduit 16. Receptacles 17. Wireway supports and rods 18. Junction boxes 19. Insulated /isolated ground bus 20. Prewired cable whips 21. Branch circuit conduit and wiring 22. Empty conduits 23. Conduit and wiring Electrical Contractor's cost to install the following: 5 1. Rack mounted (valence) lighting fixtures 2. Bike rack lighting fixtures 3. Branch circuit conduit and wiring 4. Conduit and wiring on junction boxes 5. Switches 6. All other materials and components necessary to complete and install the subject fixtures. • 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1F-5 Exhibit "B -4" Page 2 of 4 New Store Section 1245 — Tax Form As Applies to Toys "R" Us Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Indicate the Electrical Contractor's cost to furnish and install or installation of electric power service as follows. Include branch circuit conduit and wiring, conduit and wiring on plugmolds, junction boxes, receptacles, power poles, wireways and all other materials and components necessary to complete and install the subject electric service for the items listed below: 5 1. Racks 2. Interior and exterior automatic sliding doors 3. Pylon sign, TRU signs, CPU signs 4. Kiddie rides 5. Ice cream and soda coolers 6. Baler 7. Compactor 8. Display cases Contractor's cost to install: 5 1. Wood register tandems 2. Tandem register casework 3. Refund counters 4. Other counters, workstations, service desk, bins, shelves and countertops Plastic laminate wainscot panels 5 Vinyl wall and column coverings 7 Contractor's cost to construct boxed corners and end panels where store fixture forms an open corner or terminate without end closure 5 Bumpers and corner guards 5 Suspended acoustical ceiling the system including metal grid system 7 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • DIVISION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1 F -6 Exhibit "B -4" Page 3 of 4 New Store Section 1245 — Tax Form As applies to Toys "R" Us Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Contractor's cost to install exterior and interior automatic sliding doors 5 Cart rail 5 Mirrors 7 Pre - finished exterior aluminum panel system attached to plywood 5 Contractor's cost to install time clock 7 Coat rack in Break Room 7 1/4" safety mirror 7 Contractor's cost to install impact doors 5 Contractor's cost to install bi -fold doors with track assembly in Training Room and operable partition in the Party Rooms 5 Steel support for gondolas including gondola channel, steel plate, angles, steel hanger rods, steel angle braces, and cost to paint the subject steel supports 5 Break room plumbing and plumbing fixtures (installation and materials) 7 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 1 EXHIBITS SECTION 1 F -7 Exhibit "B-4" Page 4 of .0 New Store Section 1245 — Tax Form As Applies to Toys "R" Us Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Demolition Expense Vinyl composition tiles (VCT) 7 Carpet 7 General conditions Allocable General contractor's fee Allocable SUB TOTAL PROJECT COST Architect's fee Allocable TOTAL PROJECT COST • Cost amount to be fumished by Architectural Project Manager. Signature of General Contractor Print Authorized Signatory's Name Title of Signatory Print General Contractors Name Date: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -1 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTIONS .1 The owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide certain quality assurance testing and inspections for paving, solid soils, concrete, masonry, structural steel, joists and deck. The Owner is employing the testing agency for his benefit and not to guide the general contractor in the operation of his project. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the TRU Construction Project Manager and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all work the testing agency shall submit a quality assurance certification (control inspection report for site work, concrete, masonry, structural steel, etc.) signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all work subject to quality assurance testing and inspections has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. Submit a quality assurance certification for each specifications section requiring quality assurance testing and inspections on the attached form. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the testing agency. .8 Testing agency personnel shall have their time sheets signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Copies of signed time sheets must be submitted with all invoices for payment. All invoices shall indicate testing expenses to date. Any re -tests shall be clearly identified and invoiced separately. Costs for re -tests are the responsibility of the Contractor. .9 Professional Liability, General Liability and Worker's Compensation Insurance are required. Minimum coverage for Professional Liability Insurance is $500,000. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK OF QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING_AND INSPECTION .1 The specification sections requiring quality assurance testing and inspections are shown in Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Proposal Breakdown Form. Specific requirements are shown in the project specifications for each section. .2 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and supplies, and perform operations in connection with quality assurance testing and inspections. 1.3 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL .1 Where required by local or state code or authority, the Contractor shall retain an Architect or Civil Engineer, licensed in the State, to provide construction surveillance and final sign off of the project. PART 2: PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3: EXECUTION Not Used. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -2 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PROPOSAL for TESTING & INSPECTION SERVICES TO TOYS "R" US, INC. PROJECT: DATE: TESTING FIRM: Federal Tax ID# Phone #( ) The Testing Firm agrees to perform the indicated testing services in accordance with the attached Specifications. The Testing Firm shall perform the engineering testing in a timely manner with adequate personnel and equipment as required by the construction work schedule. The Testing •Firm shall be responsible for contacting the job site as necessary to determine when engineering services are required. Frequency of testing shall not be less than that stated in the Specifications. Furthermore, unless specifically requested by the owner, the Testing Firm shall not perform testing in excess of the frequencies stated in the Specifications. All work shall be performed by qualified personnel under the supervision of a registered professional engineer. The Testing Firm shall complete the attached proposal breakdown. The cost of the testing services, materials, apparatus, labor, incidental materials, insurance, overhead and profit, and report preparation shall be included in the fees shown on the rate schedule. Billing for testing services shall be made at the end of each calendar month and sent to the attention of Construction Clerk c/o the appropriate Toys "R" Us Us Engineering Center. All invoices shall indicate testing expenses to date. All invoices shall contain the testing Company's Tax ID Number as well as the Toys "R" Us Vendor Number. Any invoice not containing complete descriptive information about the project shall be returned for reprocessing. Any re -tests shall be clearly identified and invoiced separately. The Testing Firm shall at all times keep in effect a policy of Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, in an amount not less than $500,000 and upon request shall deliver to Toys "R" Us a Certificate of Insurance evidencing that coverage. In addition, Testing Firm shall maintain and keep in force all Workers Compensation Insurance required under the applicable Workers Compensation Acts and Professional Liability Insurance of at least $500,000. • 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -3 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PROPOSAL for TESTING & INSPECTION SERVICES TO TOYS "R" US, INC. The Testing Firm further agrees to indemnify and hold Toys "R" Us free and harmless from any claim, demand, loss, damage, or injury (including Attorney's fees) caused by any negligent act or omission by either Toys "R" Us, its agents, servants, contractors, or employees, or the Testing Firm, its agents, servants, or employees. Upon request, the Testing Firm shall analyze information developed by its investigations and submit its professional evaluation and recommendations for the affected areas. Upon completion of the project, the Testing Firm shall submit a letter certifying the material's compliance with the project specifications. Attachments have been provided and are made a part hereof as if fully written herein: 1. Proposal Breakdown 2. Project Specifications 3. Project Drawings This proposal is accepted and agreed to this day of 20 . and upon execution by both parties this proposal and all attachments shall be binding. (Testing Firm) TOYS "R" US, INC. By: By (Title) Construction Project Manager 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -4 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN PROJECT: LOCATION: 1. GRADING AND SITEWORK Site Monitoring — "On -call" basis monitoring of site preparation and fill placement, review of compaction procedures, monitoring of utility installation, checking soil moisture, determining percent compaction, etc. 1. In -Place Density Tests: 1. Mass Grading: 2. Standard (Proctor or Nuclear Density) Compaction Tests: 2. Subgrade Evaluation for footings, foundation piers, foundation walls, grade beams and slabs (other than pile- supported foundations); backfill for utility lines and above foundations. 3. Pile Installation (if required). 1. Monitoring, installation and testing of load test piles: 2. Monitoring production pile installation: 4. Pavement - Asphalt Surface and Graded Aggregate Base Course (if required). 1. Inspection of asphalt placement and compaction, measurement of thickness, temperature, in -place density testing and sampling of mix for physical testing: 2. CONCRETE/MASONRY $ per hour $ per day $ per hour $ per hour $ per day $ per hour $ per day $ per hour $ per day $ per hour $ per day $ per hour Field Testing: May include sampling and testing fresh concrete for slump, reinforcing steel installation for concrete and masonry, forms, air content, unit weight (if required), molding and transporting test specimens to laboratory, and concrete and masonry compression testing. 1. Concrete and Masonry Testing and Placement Evaluation: $ per hour $ per day 2. Concrete Compression Testing: $ per cylinder 3. Masonry Prisms Compression Testing: $ per test 4. Concrete Grout Cylinder /Mortar Cubes $ per test 3. STRUCTURAL STEEL, BAR JOIST AND DECKING Erection Evaluation: Evaluation of any or all of the following, as established by project specifications: material storage conditions, column alignment, elevation verification, bolt hole alignment and bolt torque, welds by visual techniques, steel decking, built -up roofs, prime coat touch -up and /or final painting. 1. Erection Evaluation of Structural Steel and Bar Joists 2010 SSBS Renovation $ per hour $ per day Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -5 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL TOTAL LUMP SUM PRICE $ Engineering Consultation /Report (P.E.) (By request only) $ per hour NOTE: All of the above pricing includes incidental materials, transportation to the laboratory, engineering review, overhead, clerical work, miscellaneous fees and profit. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SECTION 1H -6 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL "SAMPLE" CONTROLLED INSPECTION REPORT FOR PROJECT: LOCATION: DATE: 20 NAME: Professional Engineer or Registered Architect ADDRESS: City State Zip Code have assumed responsibility for the inspection work designated above. I personally, or qualified personnel under my direct supervision, did perform the required inspections and tests; and all required inspection and test reports signed by me and tests are substantially in compliance to quantity required by project specifications. • SIGNATURE: DATE: 20 Supervising Engineer or Architect • It is my professional opinion that: II 1_I All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements. All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements, except as described below: SIGNATURE: DATE: 20 Professional Engineer or Architect 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ALTERNATES PART 4:PREDETERMINED BUILDING SYSTEMS 4.1 Roofing, Section 7D .1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS .1 Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Proposal Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bi amount if the Owner decided to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. .1 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES .1 Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. .1 Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Altemate. .2 Notification: Immediately following the award of the contract notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each altemate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. .3 Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. .4 Schedule: An "Alternates Schedule" is included at the end of the Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under the alternate. PART 2: PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 ALTERNATE SCHEDULE .1 ALTERNATE No. 1: Section 4A Unit Masonry Work. Provide alternate only if requested by TRU APM. In lieu of normal weight block, provide lightweight block. All details and Standards must comply with current industry standards. 2010 SSBS Renovation *SECTION 1I -1 .1 Masterspec has 2 complete and separate sections 7D PVC Roofing and Built -up Roofing CPM, APM, and consultant to choose roof system prior to bid, then can use other section for alternate bid if desired. - -END OF SECTION -- Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 1 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS SECTION 1J -1 PART 1: GENERAL There are no tenant (Toys R Us) supplied items in a Developer Build -to -Suit project, except as noted on cover sheet of construction drawings. Any items noted as "Owner Supplied" or "TRU Supplied" in these specifications shall be taken to refer as the "Developer" as the "Owner". All items to be installed by Landlord unless noted otherwise. Landlord shall reference future installation package for installation of all fixtures and racking, including electrical coordination (power drops, etc.). Landlord /Developer shall hire TRU approved venders for all IT voice /data, POS, burglar /LP and CCTV installation and wiring (Landlord to supply all wire per TRU specifications). Refer to cover Sheet of . construction drawings for list of TRU supplied items. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to the section. 1.2 SUMMARY .1 Section includes: .1 On site reception, unloading, inventory, storage, safeguarding, installation, coordination, and start-up operation of all Owner furnished material and equipment as detailed in Section 1A, Article 1.16. .2 See individual specification sections for items appearing in schedule. .3 Related Sections: .1 Section 1A, Article 1.16. .2 Section 1B, Article 1.12. .3 Division 15 and 16: Connection to building services. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .1 Provide labor, tools, and equipment using manufacturer's recommended methods of assembly and installation for materials and equipment. .2 Coordinate with Owner for acquisition, shipping and receiving of specified items. .3 For a complete list, review schedule on construction documents. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE .1 For a complete list of Owner supplied items, consult the Cover Sheet of the construction drawings. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SITE TESTING SECTION 2A -1 .1 Include all labor, material and equipment to perform all work in this section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Division 1 for requirements relating to base bid products, altemates, and substitutions. .5 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of soil work and paving work for the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate his work with the testing agency. Should the Contractor require consultation or advice on geotechnical issues, he may employ Owner =s testing agency or another agency at this own expense. .6 The testing agency shall be selected by the Owner prior to beginning work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .7 The Owner may elect to change testing agencies at his own discretion. .8 Invoices for testing work shall be routed through the Owner as stated in the Quality Assurance Proposal document (Section 1H of these specifications). Testing agency personnel shall have their time sheets signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Copies of signed time sheets must be submitted with all invoices for payment. PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Testing of compaction throughout site for compliance with these specifications. .2 Inspection and approval of subgrade prior to placement of all footings, foundations, and slabs. All footing subgrades 2010 SSBS Renovation shall meet the design bearing capacity criteria as outlined in the Geotechnical Report. .3 Testing of all excavation and backfill compaction including that for mechanical and electrical trades to comply with these specifications. .4 Off site fill must be tested for approval by Owner. .5 Inspection and testing of all site grading operations for compliance with these specifications. .6 Inspection and testing of site drainage work for compliance with these specifications. .7 Inspection and testing of asphaltic concrete and stone base materials, installation, and compaction. Refer to Specification Section 2E for paving and stone base criteria. 3.2 COMPACTION TEST REQUIREMENTS .1 Compaction test shall include but not be limited to site inspections with a minimum of 1 density test per 5,000 square feet of area per lift in the building area and 1 density test for every 7,500 square feet of area per lift in the pavement area. .1 Said inspections shall be prescheduled; however, the Owner shall reserve the right to reschedule. .2 A report shall be submitted, following each inspection, and prior to next inspection, that shall include observations, recommendations, and test results. 3.3 REPORTING .1 Passing reports shall be distributed to the Grading Contractor, Contractor, Project Manager, and the Owner. .2 Failing reports shall be distributed in the same manner, however, the Field Superintendent shall be notified immediately to facilitate corrective action. .3 All field reports and test reports shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Engineer in the state where the structure is located. .4 At the completion of all work the testing agency shall submit a quality assurance certification signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all work subject to quality assurance testing and inspections has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. Submit a quality assurance certification for each specification section requiring quality assurance testing and inspections. (See Section 1H -6). .5 Records of inspection shall be kept available for the building official during progress of work. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency for 2 years after completion of the project. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SOIL TREATMENT SECTION 2AA -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Include all labor, materials, and equipment to perform all work in this section. The area to be treated shall be soils under the building. .2 Work included shall be all labor, materials, and installation required to complete the project. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all materials, equipment, supervision, and all incidentals necessary to complete all termite treatment of soil. .2 The following areas are to be chemically treated before vapor retarder is installed and /or concrete slabs are poured. .1 The compacted soil under all concrete slabs, within a line 1 foot outside of building line. 1.3 WARRANTY .1 Furnish a written warranty covering the following: .1 That materials, and application was made at the concentration, rate and methods specified herein. .2 Effectiveness of treatment against termites for a period of 5 years from date of acceptance of the project. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 The type and application of all chemicals must be approved by and meet requirements of federal, state, and local governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Application shall be by a Certified Pest Control Operator and the type and application of all chemicals must be approved by and meet requirements of federal, state, and local governmental agencies having jurisdiction. .2 Treatment shall not be made when soil is excessively wet nor when rains are expected during that day. .3 Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all surfaces to be covered with vapor barrier as soon as work is completed for any or all areas treated. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation • Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 2 DEMOLITION SECTION 2B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Demolition of designated site structures, retaining walls, foundations, and removal of materials from site. .2 Demolition and removal of pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures, utilities, signage, or landscaping. .3 Disconnecting and capping or removal of identified utilities. .4 Filling or removal of underground tanks and piping. .5 Filling voids in subgrade created as a result of removals or demolition. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2C - Site Preparation: Clearing outside periphery of structures. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials: Backfill materials. .3 Construction drawings. 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to applicable local code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, and run -off control. .2 Obtain required permits and licenses from authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal charges. .3 Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. .4 Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or hydrants without permits. .5 Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. .6 Test soils around buried tanks for contamination. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Structures to be demolished will be discontinued in use and vacated prior to start of work. .2 Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of structures to be demolished. .3 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practicable. Variations within structures may occur by Owners removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition work. .4 Items of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted and shall not interfere with any other work specified in the contract documents. .5 Explosives shall not be brought to site or used without written consent of authorities having jurisdiction. Such written consent will not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for injury to persons or for damage to property due to blasting operations. The performance of any required blasting shall comply with governing regulations. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwil PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS .1 Aggregate materials specified in Section 2H. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices at locations indicated. .2 Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures, which are not to be demolished. Repair damage caused by demolition operations at no cost to Owner. .3 Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring. .4 Mark location of utilities. Protect and maintain in safe and operable condition the utilities to remain. Prevent interruption of existing utility service to occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. 3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS .1 Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or pavements. .2 Cease operations if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction. Do not resume operations until directed. .3 Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private access. Maintain access and egress at all times. .4 Obtain written permission from adjacent property Owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. .5 Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. .6 Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. .7 Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 3.3 DEMOLITION .1 Demolish buildings completely and remove from site using methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations. Small structures may be removed intact when acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Proceed with demolition in systematic manner, from top of structure to ground and complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels. .3 Locate demolition equipment and remove materials so as to prevent excessive loading to supporting walls, floors, or framing. .4 Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by hoists, derricks, or other suitable methods. .5 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Break up concrete slabs -on -grade that are 2 or more feet below a, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 DEMOLITION SECTION 2B -2 finished grade. Remove slabs within 2 feet of finished grade. .6 Demolish and remove below grade construction and concrete slabs -on -grade to a minimum depth of 2 feet below proposed subgrade, and a minimum of 5 feet in areas of new foundations. 3.4 FILLING BASEMENTS AND VOIDS .1 Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition or removal of structure (underground fuel storage tanks, wells, cisterns, etc.) using approved select fill materials consisting of stone, gravel, and sand free from debris, trash, frozen materials, roots, and other organic matter. .2 Ensure that areas to be filled are free to standing water, frost, frozen, or unsuitable materials, trash, and debris prior to fill placement. .3 Place fill materials in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose depth and compact each layer at optimum moisture content of fill material to proposed density, unless subsequent excavation of new work is required. .4 Grade surface to match adjacent grades and to provide positive flow of surface drainage away from buildings after fill placement and compaction. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS .1 Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. .2 No burning of any materials, debris, or trash on site or off site will be allowed, except when allowed by the appropriate governing authority. If allowed as stated above, buming shall be performed in a manner prescribed by governing authority. Attend buming materials until fires have burned out or have been extinguished. .3 Transport materials removed from demolished structures with appropriate vehicles and dispose off site to areas, which are approved for disposal by governing authorities and appropriate property Owners. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SITE PREPARATION SECTION 2C -1 .1 Cleaning site of debris, grass, trees, and other plant life in preparation for site or building excavation work. .2 Protection of existing structures, trees, or vegetation indicated on the contract documents to remain. .3 Stripping topsoil from areas that are to be incorporated into the limits of the project and where so indicated on the construction drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2B - Demolition. .2 Section 2D - Earthwork. .3 Section 2K - Slope Protection and Erosion Control. .4 Construction drawings. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Construct temporary erosion control systems as shown on the plans or as directed by the engineer to protect adjacent properties and water resources from erosion and sedimentation. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practical. .2 Variations to conditions or discrepancy in actual conditions as they apply to site preparation operations are to be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to the commencement of any site work. PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Verify that existing plant life and clearing limits are clearly tagged, identified, and marked in such a manner as to insure their safety throughout construction operations. 3.2 PROTECTION .1 Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage. .2 Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscape. .3 Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses and facilities. Maintain ingress and egress at all times and clean or sweep any roadways daily or as required by the governing authority. At such times as deemed necessary by the Owner, dust control shall be provided with sprinkling systems or equipment provided by the Contractor. .4 Protect bench marks, property corners and all other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If a marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by a licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by the same. .5 Provide traffic control as required, in accordance with the US Department of Transportation "Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and the state highway department requirements. 3.3 CLEARING .1 Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work. .2 Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, remove trees, shrubs, grass, other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots. Depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations are to be filled to subgrade elevation to avoid water ponding. Satisfactory fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compacted per fill requirements of this section and Section 2D. .3 Remove grass, trees plant life, stumps, and all other construction debris from the site to a dump site that is suitable for handling such material according to state laws and regulations. 3.4 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION .1 Strip topsoil from areas that are to be filled, excavated, landscaped, or regraded to such a depth that it prevents intermingling with underlying subsoil or questionable material. .2 Cut heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping and remove with the rest of the cleared vegetative material. .3 Topsoil shall consist of organic surficial soil found in depth of not less than 6 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. .4 Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown or where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles as required to prevent windblown dust. Dispose of unsuitable topsoil as specified for waste material, unless otherwise specified by the Owner. Excess topsoil shall be removed from the site by the Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EARTHWORK SECTION 2D -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Protection, modification and /or installation of utilities as site work progresses paying particular attention to grade changes and any necessary staging of work. A ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). .5 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth). .2 Cutting, filling and grading to required lines, dimensions, .6 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water contours, and proposed elevations for proposed Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods • improvements. (Shallow Depths). .3 Scarifying, compaction, drying, and removal of unsuitable material to ensure proper preparation of areas for fills or proposed improvements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2B - Demolition. .2 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .3 Section 2E - Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for Structures. .7 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .8 ASTM C25 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime and Hydrate Lime. .9 ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing for Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone. .10 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .4 Section 2F - Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting for .11 ASTM C977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime Utilities. and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. .5 Section 2G - Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting for Pavement. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ( AASHTO) latest edition. .6 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .1 AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. .7 Section 2I - Rock Removal. .8 Section 21 - Soil Stabilization. .9 Section 2Y - Landscaping, Seeding, and Sodding. .10 Geotechnical Report (if available) for boring locations and findings of subsurface materials and conditions. .11 Construction drawings. .12 Architectural plans and specifications as they relate specifically to the earthwork beneath the buildings, where the architectural requirements are more stringent than the civil requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D422 -63 - Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. .2 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. 2010 SSBS Renovation 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Construct temporary erosion control systems as shown on the plans or as directed by the engineer to protect adjacent properties and water resources from erosion and sediment damage. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to perform construction testing on site based on the following: .1 Building subgrade areas, including 10 feet -0 inches Outside Exterior Building Lines: In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 2,500 square feet. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8 inch lift (measured loose). .2 Areas of Construction exclusive of building subgrade: In cut areas, not less than one compaction test for every 10,000 square feet. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8 inch lift (measured loose). .2 If compaction requirements are not complied with at any time during construction process, remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to Owner. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EARTHWORK .3 In all areas to receive pavement, a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) or Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) test shall be performed for each type of material imported from off-site. .4 The following tests shall be performed on each type of on site or imported soil material used as compacted fill as part of construction testing requirements. .1 Moisture and Density Relationship: ASTM D1557. .2 Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T -88. .3 Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318. .5 Field density tests for in place materials shall be performed according to 1 of the following standards as part of construction testing requirements. .1 Nuclear Method: ASTM D2922 (Method B, Direct Transmission). .6 Independent testing laboratory shall prepare test reports that indicate test location, elevation data, and test results. Owner, Architect, and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports within 96 hours of time test was performed. In event that any test performed fails to meet these specifications, Owner, and Contractor shall be notified immediately by independent testing laboratory. .7 All costs related to retesting due to failures shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. Owner reserves the right to employ an independent testing laboratory and to direct any testing that is deemed necessary. Contractor shall provide free access to site for testing activities. 1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit a sample of each type of off site fill material that is to be used at the site in an airtight, 10 pound container for the testing laboratory. .2 Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the job requires approval of the Owner or Engineer. .3 For use of fabrics or geogrids, a Toys "R" Us approved design shall be submitted. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Excavated and reused material for subsoil fill as specified herein. .2 Aggregate fill as specified in Section 2H. .3 Imported subsoil material approved by the Owner and specified herein. .4 Topsoil fill as specified led in Section 2C. SECTION 2D -2 .5 Acceptable stabilization fabrics as Geogrids: .1 Mirafi 500X or 600X. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 6W5(UV). .3 Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601. .4 Trevira S1135 and 51145. .5 Tensar SS -1 and SS2. .6 Exxon GTF -200 or 350. .6 Filter /Drainage Fabrics. .1 Mirafi 14ONS. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 4NP. .3 Dupont Typar 3341. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. .2 Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage. .3 Notify utility companies to remove and /or relocate any utilities that are in conflict with the proposed improvements. .4 Protect plant life, lawns, fences, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. .5 Protect benchmarks, property corners, and all other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If a marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by a licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by the same. .6 Remove from site material encountered in grading operations that, in opinion of Owner or Owner's Representative, is unsuitable or undesirable for backfilling, subgrade or foundation purposes. Dispose of in a manner satisfactory to Owner. Backfill areas with layers of suitable material and compact as specified. .7 Prior to placing fill in low areas, such as previously existing creeks, ponds, or lakes, perform following procedures: .1 Drain water out by gravity with ditch having flow line lower than lowest elevation in low area if drainage cannot be performed by gravity ditch, use adequate pump to obtain same results. .2 After drainage of low area is complete, remove mulch, mud, debris, and other suitable material by using acceptable equipment and methods that will keep natural soils underlying low areas dry and undisturbed. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EARTHWORK SECTION 2D -3 3 If proposed for fill, all muck, mud, and other materials removed from above low areas shall be dried on site by spreading in thin layers for observation by Owner or Owner's Representative. Material shall be inspected and, if found to be suitable for use as fill material, shall be incorporated into lowest elevation of site filling operation, but not under the building area or within 10 feet -0 inches of perimeter of building pad or paving subgrade. If, after observation by Owner or Owner's Representative, material is found to be unsuitable, all unsuitable material shall be removed from 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR FILLING AND GRADING .1 Classification of Excavation: Contractor by submitting bid acknowledges that he has investigated site to determine type, quantity, quality, and character of excavation work to be performed. Excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation. .2 Perform excavation using capable, well- maintained equipment, and methods acceptable to Owner and governing agencies. .3 When performing grading operations during periods of wet weather, provide adequate drainage and ground water management to control moisture of soils. .4 Shore, brace, and drain excavations as necessary to maintain safe, secure, and free of water at all times. .5 Excavated material containing rock or stone greater than 2 inches in largest dimension is unacceptable as fill to within the proposed building and paving area. .6 Rock or stone less than 2 inches in largest dimension and mixed with suitable material is acceptable as fill within the upper 2 foot of proposed subgrade. 3.3 FILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION .1 Fill areas to contours and elevations shown with unfrozen materials. .2 Place fill in continuous lifts specified herein. .3 Refer to Section 2E for filling requirements for structures. .4 Refer to Section 2G for filling requirements for pavements. .5 Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations are to be performed shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8 inches and compacted to minimum of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. These areas shall then be proof rolled to detect any areas of insufficient compaction. Proof rolling shall be accomplished by making a minimum of 2 complete passes with a fully loaded tandem -axle dump truck, or approved equivalent, in each of the 2 perpendicular directions under the supervision and 2010 SSBS Renovation direction of a field Geotechnical engineer. Areas of failure shall be excavated and recompacted as stated above. .6 Fill materials used in preparation of subgrade shall be placed in lifts or layers not to exceed 8 inch loose measure and compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. .7 Material imported from off -site shall have a CBR (California Bearing Ratio) or LBR (Limerock Bearing Ratio) value equal to or above the pavement design subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on the drawings. 3.4 MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE .1 Finished subgrades shall be verified to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. .2 Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including concrete trucks and dump trucks. .3 Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in a manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross section. 3.5 RIP RAP .1 Place riprap in all area where indicated on the drawings. The stone for riprap shall consist of fieldstone or rough practical. The stones shall be dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all aspects for the purpose intended. Unless otherwise specified, all stones used as riprap shall weigh between 50 pounds and 150 pounds each, and at least 60 percent of the stones shall weigh more than 100 pounds each. .2 Slopes and other areas to be protected shall be dressed to the line and grade shown on the plans prior to the placing of riprap. Contractor shall then undercut the areas to receive riprap to an elevation equal to the final elevation less the average diameter of the stones before placing the riprap. .3 Filter fabric and bedding stone shall be installed prior to the placement of the stones if so indicated on the drawings. The bedding stone shall be quarried and crushed angular limestone in accordance with Section 2H and shall be 6 inches in depth. Filter fabric shall be as specified herein and as detailed on the plans. .4 Stones shall be placed so that the greater portion of their weight is carried by the earth and not by the adjacent stones. The stones shall be placed in a single layer with close joints. The upright areas of the stone shall make an angle of approximately 90 degree with the embankment slope. The courses shall be placed from the bottom of the embankment upward, the larger stones being placed in the lower courses. Open joints shall be filled with spalls. Stones Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EARTHWORK SECTION 2D -4 shall be embedded in the embankment as necessary to present a uniform top surface such that the variation between tops of adjacent stones shall not exceed 3 inches. 3.6 FINISH GRADING .1 Grade all areas where finish grade elevations or contours are indicated on drawings, other than paved areas and buildings, including excavated areas, filled and transition areas, and landscaped areas. Graded areas shall be uniforrn and smooth, free from rock, debris, or irregular surface changes. Finished subgrade surface shall not be more than 0.10 feet above or below established finished subgrade elevation, and all ground surfaces shall vary uniformly between indicated elevations. Finish ditches shall be graded to allow for proper drainage without ponding and in a manner that will minimize erosion potential. For topsoil application, refer to Section 2Y Landscaping. .2 Correct all settlement and eroded areas within 1 year after date of completion at no additional expense to Owner. Bring grades to proper elevation. Replant or replace any grass, shrubs, bushes, or other vegetation disturbed by construction using corrective measures. Refer to Section 2K for slope protection and erosion control. .3 Refer to Section 21 for soil stabilization using lime, cement, fly ash, and geotextile fabric methods for subbase materials. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING FOR STRUCTURE SECTION 2E -1 .1 Excavate to line, grade, and configuration as shown in the plans and specifications for proposed structures. .2 Fill to line, grade and configuration as shown in the plans and specifications for proposed structures. .3 Compacting fill materials in an acceptable manner as stated herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .3 Section 2I - Rock Removal. .4 Section 2J - Soil Stabilization. .6 Section 2M - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. .7 Section 2N - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. .8 Geotechnical Report (if available) for Boring Locations and Findings of Subsurface Materials and Conditions. .9 Construction Drawings: .1 Architectural plans and specifications as they relate specifically to earthwork beneath the buildings, where the architectural requirements are more stringent than the civil requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D422 -63 - Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. .2 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) content of Soil and Rock by Mass. .4 ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). .5 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth). .6 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depths). 2010 SSBS Renovation .7 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .8 ASTM C25 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime and Hydrate Lime. .9 ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing for Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone. .10 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .11 ASTM C977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Owner shall be retained to perform construction testing on filling operations and subgrade analysis as specified in Section 2D and as stated herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling for structures are not required unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifications or if contrary procedures to the project documents are proposed. .2 Submit a sample of each type of off site fill material that is to be used for backfilling in an airtight, 10 pound container for the testing laboratory or submit a gradation and certification of the aggregate material that is to be used to the testing laboratory for review. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Fill material from on site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .2 Fill material from off site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .3 Aggregate material as specified in Section 2H. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Identify all lines, elevations, and grades necessary to construct building subgrades as shown in the plans and specifications. .2 Protect benchmarks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING FOR STRUCTURE SECTION 2E -2 .3 Locate and identify all site utilities that have previously been installed and may be in danger of damage by grading operations. .4 Locate and identify all existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage. .5 Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting the proposed systems. These areas are to be stabilized by using acceptable backfill materials placed and compacted as specified, filter fabrics and /or aggregate materials. 3.2 EXCAVATION .1 Excavate building areas to line and grade as shown in the plans and specifications being careful not to over excavate beyond the elevation needed for building subgrades. .2 Engage all suitable material into the project fill areas as specified in Section D. .3 Unsuitable excavated material is to be disposed of in a manner and location that is acceptable to the Owner and the local governing agencies. .4 Perform excavation using capable, well maintained equipment and methods acceptable to the Owner and the project document requirements. 3.3 FILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION .1 Building area subgrade pad shall be that portion of site directly beneath and 10 feet beyond he building and appurtenances including the limits of any future building expansion areas as shown on the civil site drawings. .2 The building area subgrade pad shall be prepared in strict accordance with the foundation subsurface preparation as shown on the civil site drawings and /or the architectural - structural drawings whichever is more stringent. Rock larger than 2 inches shall not be part of building subgrade fill. .3 Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations are to be performed shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8 inches and compacted to minimum of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. These areas shall then be proof rolled to detect any areas of insufficient compaction. Proof rolling shall be accomplished by making a minimum of 2 complete passes with a fully loaded tandem -axle dump truck, or approved equivalent, in each of the 2 perpendicular directions under the supervision and direction of a field Geotechnical engineer. Areas of failure shall be excavated and recompacted as stated above. 4 Fill materials used in preparation of building shall be placed in lifts or layers not to exceed 8 inches loose measure and compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. Unless specifically stated otherwise in the foundation subsurface preparation on the drawings, the following table stipulates maximum allowable values for Plasticity Index (PI) and Liquid Limit (LL) of suitable materials to be used as fill in the specified areas: Location E LL Building area, below upper 4 feet 20 50 Building area, upper4 feet 12 40 3.4 COMPACTION .1 Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. .2 All materials shall be tested in accordance with Section 2D. .3 An independent testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner shall be retained to perform testing on site. .4 Compaction tests will be as specified in Section 2D together with the following for building subgrade areas including 10 feet -0 inches outside exterior building lines. In cut areas, not less than one compaction test for every 2,500 square feet. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8 inch lift (measured loose). 3.5 MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE .1 Finished subgrades shall be verified to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. .2 Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including concrete trucks and dump trucks. .3 Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in a manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross section. 3.6 FINISH GRADING .1 Finish grading shall be in accordance with Section 2D and as more specifically stated herein. .2 Grading of paving areas shall be checked by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set at not more than 50 foot centers. Tolerances of 0.10 feet, more or less, will be permitted. Contractor to provide engineering and field staking necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Excavating trenches for the installation of utilities. EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 2F -1 .2 Backfilling trench with bedding materials as specified and indicated and finishing filling trench with suitable materials to proposed subgrade. .3 Compacting backfill materials in an acceptable manner. . .4 Borings and casings under roads. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .3 Section 2I - Rock Removal. .4 Section 2Q - Sewer Structures. .5 Section 2R - Water Distribution Systems. .6 Section 2S - Site Gas Lines. .7 Section 2T - Storm Sewer Systems. .8 Section 2U - Sanitary Sewer Systems. .9 Section 2V - Landscape Irrigation. .10 Geotechnical Report (if available) for boring locations and findings of subsurface materials and conditions. .11 Construction drawings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D422 -63 - Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. .2 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) content of Soil and Rock by Mass. .4 ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). .5 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth). .6 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depths). .7 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .8 ASTM C25 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime and Hydrate Lime. .9 ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing for Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone. .10 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .11 ASTM C977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to perform construction testing on backfilling operations as specified in Section 2D and as stated herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop drawings or details pertaining to site utilities are not required unless use of materials, methods, equipment, or procedures contrary to drawings or these specifications are proposed. Do not perform work until required shop drawings have been accepted by Owner. .2 The Contractor shall contact all utility companies and determine if additional easements will be required to complete the project. Contractor shall provide written confirmation of the status of all easements to the Toys 'R' Us Construction Manager at the time of the preconstruction conference or no later than 90 days prior to the projection possession date. .3 Submit a sample of each type of off site fill material that is to be used in backfilling in an airtight, 10 pound container for the testing laboratory or submit a gradation and certification of the aggregate material that is to be used to the testing laboratory for review. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of all subsurface utilities, structures and obstructions encountered. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS EXCAVATION. BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 2F -2 .1 Bedding Material: Processed sand and gravel free from clay lumps, organic, or other deleterious material, and complying with following gradation requirements: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing (by weight? 1 Inch 100 3/4 Inch 90 -100 3/8 Inch 20 -55 No. 4 0 -10 No. 8 0 -5 .2 Backfill material from site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .3 Backfill material from off site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .4 Steel Casing Pipe: Comply with AWWA C -201 or C -202, minimum Grade B, size and wall thickness as indicated on drawings. .5 Acceptable Stabilization Fabrics and Geogrids: 1 Mirafi 500 X or 600X. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 6WS (UV). .3 Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601. .4 Trevira S1135 and S1145. .5 Tensar SS -1 and SS -2. .6 Exxon GTF -200 or 350. .6 Filter /Drainage Fabrics: .1 Mirafi 140 NS. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 4NP (UV). .3 Dupont Typar 3341. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Set all lines, elevations, and grades for utility and drainage system work and control system for duration of work, including careful maintenance of bench marks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points. .2 Maintain in operating condition existing utilities, activities utilities, and drainage systems encountered in utility installation. Repair any surface or subsurface improvements shown on drawings. .3 Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required to make connections to existing utilities and drainage systems as indicated on drawings. Contractor shall comply with local codes and regulations. .4 Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting the proposed systems. These areas are to be stabilized by using acceptable backfill materials placed and compacted as specified, filter fabrics and /or additional bedding material. .5 Install dewatering systems that will be required to construct the proposed utilities in a manner that is described herein. 3.2 EXCAVATION .1 The local utility companies shall be contacted before excavation shall begin. Dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe, conduit, or cable. Cut trench banks practically and remove stones as necessary to avoid point bearing. Over excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, from trench bottom as necessary to provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding. .2 All trench excavation side walls greater than 5 feet in depth shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced or otherwise supported by means of the sufficient strength to protect the workmen within them in accordance the applicable rules and regulations established for construction by the Department of Labor and by local ordinances. Lateral travel distance to an exit ladder or steps shall not be greater than 25 feet in trenches 4 feet or deeper. .3 Perform excavation as indicated for specified depths. During excavation, stockpile materials suitable for backfiliing in orderly manner far enough from bank of trench to avoid overloading, slides, or cave -ins. .4 Remove excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill or embankments and waste as specified. Any structures discovered during excavation(s) shall be disposed of as specified. .5 Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or other methods, as required. Remove accumulated water in trenches or other excavations by pumping or other acceptable methods. .6 Open cut excavation with trenching machine or backhoe. Where machines other than ladder or wheel type trenching machines are used, do not use clods for backfill. Dispose of unsuitable material and provide other suitable material at no additional cost to Owner. .7 Accurately grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on bedding material at every point along entire length, except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, proper sealing of pipe joints, or other required connections. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Dig no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make joint connection properly. .8 Trench width requirements below the top of other pipe shall not be less than 12 inches nor more than 18 inches wider than outside surface of any pipe or conduit that is 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 2F -3 not to be installed to designated elevations and grades. All other trench width requirements for pipe, conduit, or cable shall be least practical width that will allow for proper compaction of trench backfill. .9 Trench depth requirements measured from finished grade or paved surface shall meet the following requirements or applicable codes and ordinances: .1 Water Mains: 30 inches to top of pipe barrel or 6 feet below the frost line (established by the local building official), whichever is deeper. .2 Sanitary Sewer. Elevations, and grades as indicated on drawings. .3 Storm Sewer. Depths, elevations, and grades as shown on drawings. .4 Electrical Conduits: 24 inch minimum to top of conch or as required by NEC 300 -5, Appendix B, Figure B310-3 codes, or the local utility company requirements, whichever is deeper .5 TV Conduits: 18 inch minimum to top of conduit or as required by the local utility company, whichever is deeper. .6 Telephone Conduits: 18 inch minimum to top of conduit, or as required by the local utility company, whichever is deeper. .7 Gas Mains and Service: 30 inch minimum to top of pipe, or as required by the local utility company, whichever is deeper. .10 Provide sheeting and bracing, when necessary, in trenches and other excavations where protection of workmen required. Sheeting may be removed after sufficient backfilling to protect against damaging or injurious caving. 3.3 PIPE BEDDING .1 Accurately cut trenches for pipe or conduit that is to be installed to designated elevations and grades to line and grade from 4 feet below bottom of pipe and to width as specified. Place 4 inches of bedding material, compact in bottom of trench, and accurately shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. After pipe installation, place select backfill and compact in maximum 8 inch layers measured loose the top of the trench. .2 Place geotextile fabric as specified on the plans and specifications. 3.4 BACKFILLING .1 Criteria: Trenches shall not be backfilled until required tests are performed and the utility systems comply with and are accepted by applicable governing authorities. Backfill trenches as specified. If improperly backfilled, reopen to depth required to obtain proper compaction. Backfill and compact, as specified, to properly correct condition in an acceptable manner. .2 Backfilling: After pipe or conduit has been installed, bedded, and tested and specified, backfill trench or structure excavation with specified material placed in 8 inch maximum loose lifts. .3 Backfill trenches to the contours and elevations shown on the plans with unfrozen materials. .4 Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. 3.5 COMPACTION .1 Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is not permitted as method of compaction. .2 Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. .3 An independent testing laboratory shall perform test at intervals not exceeding 200 feet -0 inches of trench for the first and every other 8 inch lift to compacted trench backfill and furnish copies of test results as specified. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of optimum density in accordance with ASTM D1557. .4 All materials used for backfill shall be tested in with Section 2D. 3.6 BORINGS AND CASINGS UNDER ROADS, HIGHWAYS AND RAILROAD CROSSINGS .1 When indicated on drawings and specifications, make certain street, road, highway, or railroad crossings for utility mains by jacking and boring method, and install utility pipe in accordance with municipal, state highway, or railroad specifications. .2 Excavation of approach pits and trenches within right -of- way street, road, highway, or railroad shall be of sufficient distance from paving or railroad tracks to permit traffic to pass without interference. Tamp backfill for approach pits and trenches within right -of -way in layers not greater than 6 inches thick for entire length and depth of trench or pit. Compact backfill to 95 percent of maximum density obtained at optimum moisture as determined by AASHTO 180 -57, Method A. Mechanical tampers may be used after cover of 6 inches has been obtained over top of barrel pipe. .3 Accomplish boring operation using commercial type boring rig and bored hole to proper alignment and grade and within 2 inches of the same diameter as largest outside joint diameter of pipe installed. Install pipe in hole immediately after bore has been made, and in no instance shall hole be left open while unattended. .4 In event subsurface operations result in failure or damage to pavement within 1 year of construction, Contractor to make necessary repairs to pavement at no additional cost to Owner. In the event paving cracks on either side of 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 2F -4 pipeline or is otherwise disturbed or broke due to construction operations, repair or replace disturbed or broken area without further compensation. .5 Clean and prime interior and exterior of casing pipe; and line with 2 coats of asphalt in accordance with municipal, state highway, or railroad specifications. .6 Butt weld steel casing. Welds shall be full penetration single butt-welds in accordance with AWWA C205 and AWS D7 -0 -62. .7 Install casing and utility pipe with end seals, vent pipe, and in accordance with other special requirements of municipal, state highway, or railroad specifications and governing authorities. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT SECTION 2G -1 .1 Excavate to line, grade, and configuration as shown in the plans and specifications for proposed pavements. .2 Fill to line, grade, and configuration as shown in the plans and specifications for proposed pavements. .3 Compacting fill materials in an acceptable manner as stated herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .3 Section 2I - Rock Removal. .4 Section 2J - Soil Stabilization. .5 Section 2L - Paving Base Course. .6 Section 2M - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. .7 Section 2N - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. .8 Section 20 - Curbs and Sidewalks. .9 Geotechnical Report (if available) for Boring Locations and Findings of Subsurface Materials and Conditions. .10 Construction drawings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D422 -63 - Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. .2 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) content of Soil and Rock by Mass. .4 ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). .5 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth). .6 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depths). .7 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .8 ASTM C25 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime and Hydrate Lime. .9 ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing for Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone. .10 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .11 ASTM C977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Owner shall be retained to perform construction testing on filling operations and subgrade analysis as specified in Section 2D and as stated herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling for pavement are not required unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifications or if contrary procedures to the project documents are proposed. .2 Submit a sample of each type of off site fill material that is to be used for backfilling in an airtight, 10 pound container for the testing laboratory or submit a gradation and certification of the aggregate material that is to be used to the testing laboratory for review. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Fill material from on site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .2 Fill material from off site as specified in Section 2D and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative. .3 Aggregate material as specified in Section 2H. .4 Acceptable stabilization fabrics and geogrids: .1 Mirafi 500 X or 600X. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 6WS (UV). .3 Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601. .4 Trevira S1135 and S1145. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT SECTION 2G -2 .5 Tensar SS -1 and SS -2. .6 Exxon GTF -200 or 350. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Identify all lines, elevations, and grades necessary to construct pavements, curb and gutter, bases, walkways, and roadways as shown in the plans and specifications. .2 Carefully protect benchmarks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points. .3 Locate and identify all site utilities that have previously been installed and may be in danger of damage by grading operations. .4 Locate and identify all existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage. .5 Over excavate and property prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting the proposed systems. These areas are to be stabilized by using acceptable backfill materials placed and compacted as specified, filter fabrics and /or aggregate material. 3.2 EXCAVATION .1 Excavate roadway and pavement areas to line and grade as shown in the plans and specifications. .2 Engage all suitable material into the project fill areas as specified in Section 2D. .3 Unsuitable excavated material is to be disposed of in a manner and location that is acceptable to the Owner and the project document requirements. .4 Perform excavation using capable, well- maintained equipment and methods acceptable to the Owner and the project document requirements. 3.3 FILLING .1 Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations are to be performed shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8 inches and compacted to minimum of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. These areas shall then be proof rolled to detect any areas of insufficient compaction. Proof rolling shall be accomplished by making a minimum of 2 complete passes with a fully loaded tandem -axle dump truck, or approved equivalent, in each of the 2 perpendicular directions under the supervision and direction of a field Geotechnical Engineer. Areas of failure shall be excavated and recompacted as stated above. .2 Fill materials used in preparation of subgrade shall be placed in lifts or layers not to exceed 8 inch loose measure and compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557, at a moisture content of not Tess than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. Location PI LL *Paving area, below upper 4 feet 20 50 *Paving area, upper 4 feet 15 40 * References to Depth are to Proposed Sub -grade Elevations. .4 Material imported from off site shall have a CBR (California Bearing Ratio) or LBR (Limerock Bearing Ratio) value equal to or above the pavement design subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on the drawings. 3.4 COMPACTION .1 Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. .2 All materials shall be tested in accordance with Section 2D. .3 An independent testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner, shall be retained to perform testing on site. .4 Compaction test will be as specified in Section 2D together with the following for paving areas: .1 In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 10,000 square feet. .2 In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8 inch lift (measured loose). .5 If compaction requirements are not complied with at any time during construction process, remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to Owner. 3.5 MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE .1 Finished subgrades shall be verified to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. .2 Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction including concrete trucks and dump trucks. .3 Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in a manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross - section. 3.6 FINISH GRADING .1 Finish grading shall be in accordance with Section 2D and as more specifically stated herein. .2 Grading of paving areas shall be checked by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set at not more than 50 foot centers. Tolerances of 0.10 feet, more or less, will be Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT SECTION 2G -3 permitted. Contractor to provide engineering and field staking necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Aggregate materials 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2B - Demolition. .2 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .3 Section 2D - Earthwork. AGGREGATE MATERIALS SECTION 2H -1 .4 Section 2E - Excavation, Backfill and Compaction for Structures. .5 Section 2F - Excavation, Backfill and Compaction for Utilities. .6 Section 2G - Excavation, Backfill and Compaction for Pavement. .7 Section 2J - Soil Stabilization. .8 Section 2K - Slope Protection and Erosion Control. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method of Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. .2 ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft- Ibf /ft3 (600 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .4 ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon method. .5 ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. .6 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .7 ASTM 03017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .8 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO T180 - Moisture - Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 pound (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 inch (457mm) Drop. .2 AASHTO M147 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil - Aggregate. Subbase, base, and surface courses. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Tests and analysis of aggregate material will be performed in accordance with standard ASTM and AASHTO procedures listed herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit in airtight containers a 10 pound sample of each aggregate or mixture that is to be incorporated into the project to the testing laboratory designated by the Owner. .2 Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the job requires approval of the Owner or Engineer. .3 Submit materials certificate to on site independent testing laboratory, which is signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 All construction and materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of this section and any state highway department specification section referred to or noted on the drawings, which pertain to paving base course design, materials, preparation, and /or execution. All materials shall be as indicated on drawings and shall comply with applicable state highway specification regarding source, quality, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, admix proportioning. .2 The following tables serve as a guidance for the gradations of the various aggregate materials. Local availability and variances with each state's requirements may change the gradations and parameters of these materials. The Contractor shall indicate when submitting materials to be tested what the various applications will be. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 AGGREGATE MATERIALS SECTION 2H -2 2.2 MATERIALS TABLE Material Description 3" 2 -1/2" 2" 1 -3/4" 1 -1/2" 1" 1/2" #4 #16 #50 #200 3" Surface and Roadstone 100 90 -100 -- -- 60 -90' 35 -70 20 -40 5 -35 4 -12 4 -1 -- Large Stone Aggregate -- 100 86 -100 -- 35 -75 0 -16 0 -6 -- -- -- -- RR Ballast, RipRap Bedding 100 -- 100 94- 100 15 -65 0 -10 0 -6 -- -- -- -- Stabilized Base Course -- -- -- -- 100 90- 100 60 -90 35 -56 10 -40 -- 4 -12 Utility Trench Bedding -- -- 100 90 -100 30 -60 0 -10 -- -- -- -- Pea Gravel -- - -- -- -- -- -- 100 15 -45 0 -4 -- Nonporous Embankment and Backfill 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 45 -85 25 -65 10 -30 5 -15 Porous Embankment and Backfli 100 -- -- -- -- 90- 100 -- 50- 100 30 -80 0 -20 0 -4 Large Subbase (No Fines) 2 " -4" Limestone Small Rip Rap 4" - 12" Pieces Rip Rap 6" - 18" Pieces Material Description 3/8" #4 #8 #16 #40 #50 #100 #200 Fill Sand -- 100 94 -100 -- 45 -85 -- 3 -29 0 -10 Mason Sand -- -- -- 100 -- -- 15 -45 0 -10 Agriculture Lime 100 94 -100 60 -100 40 -75 -- 20 -40 10 -30 0 -18 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 STOCKPILING .1 Stockpile on site at locations indicated by the Owner in such a manner that there will be no standing water or mixing with other materials. 3.2 BORROW SITES .1 Upon completion of borrow operations, clean up borrow areas as indicated on the plans and in a neat and reasonable manner to the satisfaction of the property Owner or the Engineer. 3.3 TRANSPORTATION .1 Off site materials shall be transported to the project using well- maintained and operating vehicles. Once on the job site, all transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger any of the improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping the haul road. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ROCK REMOVAL SECTION 2I -1 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Removal of identified and discovered rock during excavation. .2 Use of explosives to assist rock removal. .3 Incorporating removed rock into fills and embankments. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. •2 Section 2E Structures. •3 Section 2F Utilities. .4 Section 2G Pavement. - Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for - Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for .5 Geotechnical report for boring locations and findings of subsurface materials and conditions. .6 Construction documents. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 NFPA 495 - Explosive Materials Code. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Determine all environmental effects associated with proposed work and safeguard those concems as regulated by law and all others by reasonable and practiced methods. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Any discrepancy with plans and specifications regarding amount and type of rock to be removed shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer. A revised removal plan and schedule shall subsequently be provided and followed by the Contractor. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS .1 Contractor to remove rock by blasting shall submit records of documented experience to Toys 'R' Us. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Explosives, delay devices, and blast mat materials shall be the type recommended by the explosives firm that will comply with the requirements of this section. 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Verify site conditions and note subsurface conditions affecting work of this section. .2 Identify required lines, levels, and elevations that will determine the extent of the proposed removals. 3.2 ROCK EXCAVATION .1 Rock Excavation - definition - igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock that cannot be removed by rippers or other mechanical methods and; therefore, requires drilling and blasting. Cut rock to form level bearing at bottom of trench. In utility trenches, excavate to 6 inches below invert elevation of pipe. Remove shaled layers to provide sound and unshattered base for footings or foundations. Reuse excavated materials on site in accordance with Section 2D, if applicable. .2 Comply with laws, rules, and regulations of federal, state, local authorities, and insurer, which govern storage, use, manufacture, sale, handling, transportation, licensing, or other disposition of explosives. Take special precautions for proper use of explosives to prevent harm to human life and damage to surface structures, all utility lines, or other subsurface structures. Do not conduct blasting operations until persons in vicinity have had ample notice and have reached positions of safety. .3 Contractor shall save harmless Owner, Architect, and Owner's Representative form any claim growing out of use of such explosives. Removal of materials of any nature by blasting shall be done in such a manner and such time as to avoid damage affecting integrity of design and to avoid damage to any new or existing structure included in or adjacent to work. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to determine method of operation to ensure desired results and integrity of completed work. .4 Perform rock excavation in a manner that will produce material of such size as to permit it being placed in embankments in accordance with Section 2D. Remove rock to limits as indicated. Remove loose or shattered rock, overhanging ledges and boulders, which might dislodge. .5 Use lean concrete or suitable materials to replace rock over blast or over excavation in building area and in expansion area to facilitate placement of utilities and future footings. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SOIL STABILIZATION SECTION 2J -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Lime of electrochemically stabilized subgrade. .2 Cement stabilized subgrade. .3 Fly ash stabilized subgrade. .4 Geotextile fabric. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. .2 Section 2G - Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for Pavement. .3 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .4 Geotechnical Report (if available) for boring locations and findings of subsurface materials and conditions. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .2 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .3 ASTM C977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. .4 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .5 ASTM D1633 - Standard Test Method For Compressive Strength Of Molded Soil Cement Cylinders. .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ( AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO M216 - Lime for Soil Stabilization. .3 National Lime Association (NLA). .1 NLA BULLETIN 326 Lime Stabilization Construction Manual 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not install mixed materials in wind in excess of 10 miles per hour or when temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work in accordance with state and local standards in conjunction with requirements specified herein. 1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit a sample of each material to be used in a 10 pound airtight container to the testing laboratory. .2 Submit the name of each materials supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the job requires approval of the Owner or Engineer. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Submit mix design and materials mix ratio that will achieve specified requirements for soil stabilization of state and local agencies. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Lime or electrochemical additive. .2 Portland cement. .3 Fly ash. .4 Coarse aggregate. .5 Fine aggregate. .6 Subsoil: Existing reused. .7 Geotextile Fabric for Stabilization: .1 Mirafi 500X or 600X. .2 Phillips 66 Supac 6WS (UV). .3 Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601. .4 Trevira S1135 and S1145. .5 Tensar SS -1 and SS -2. .6 Exxon GTF -200 or 350. 2.2 EQUIPMENT .1 Capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing materials, wetting, consolidation and compaction of material. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Obtain Engineer's approval of the mix design before proceeding with the placement. .2 Do not start stabilization without weather and soil conditions being favorable for the successful application of the proposed material. .3 Proof roll subgrade to identify areas in need of stabilization. 3.2 EXCAVATION .1 Excavate subsoil to a depth sufficient to accommodate soil stabilization. .2 Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock that interferes with achieving uniform subsoil conditions. 3.3 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING .1 Lime Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on drawings, treat prepared subgrade with hydrated lime in accordance with applicable state highway specification. Compact to not less than 95 percent of optimum density as determined by ASTM D1557. .2 Cement Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on drawings, treat prepared subgrade with portland cement in accordance with applicable state highway specification. Compact to not less than 95 percent of optimum density as determined by ASTM D1557. .3 Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on drawings, treat prepared subgrade with fly ash in accordance with applicable state highway specification. Compact to not less Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SOIL STABILIZATION SECTION 21 -2 than 95 percent of optimum density as determined by ASTM D1557. .4 Maintain optimum moisture of mix materials to attain required stabilization. .5 Finish surface within plus or minus 1 inch from required elevation. 3.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC .1 Place fabric in those areas that are shown on the plans or in those areas that need additional stabilization prior to the placement of the base course. .2 Place fabric specified in the plans and specifications in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL SECTION 2K -1 PART 1: GENERAL .2 The Engineer has the authority to limit the surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and grubbing, 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES excavation, borrow and embankment operations and to direct the Contractor to provide immediate permanent or .1 Temporary and permanent erosion control systems. temporary pollution control measures. The Contractor will be required to incorporate all permanent erosion control .2 Slope protection systems. features into the project at the earliest practical time to minimize the need for temporary controls. Cut slopes shall 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS be permanently seeded and mulched as the excavation proceeds to the extent considered desirable and practical. .1 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .3 The temporary erosion control systems installed by the .2 Section 2D - Earthwork. Contractor shall be maintained as directed by the Engineer to control siltation at all times during the life of the .3 Section 2Y - Landscaping, Seeding and Sodding. contract The Contractor must respond to any maintenance or additional work ordered by the Engineer within a 48 .4 Erosion control plan. hour period. .5 Construction requirements. .4 Any additional material and work required beyond the extent of the erosion control plan shall be paid for by the 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Owner. .1 The Contractor shall protect adjacent properties and water .5 Slopes that erode easily shall be temporarily seeded as the resources from erosion and sediment damage throughout work progresses with a cereal grain of wheat, rye, or oats. the life of the contract. (See Section 2Y). PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Quick growing grasses such as wheat, rye or oats. (See Section 2Y). .2 Hay or straw bales. .3 Fencing for siltation control as specified on the plans. .4 Curlex blankets by American Excelsior Company or approved equal. .5 Bale stakes shall be a minimum of 4 feet in length and 1 inch in width. .6 Temporary mulches such as loose hay, straw, netting, wood cellulose, or agricultural silage. .7 Fence stakes shall be metal stakes a minimum of 8 feet in length. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Review site erosion control plan. .2 Deficiencies or changes in the erosion control plan as it is applied to current conditions will be brought to the attention of the Engineer for remedial action. 3.2 EROSION CONTROL AND SLOPE PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION .1 Place erosion control systems in accordance with the erosion control plan. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PAVING BASE COURSE SECTION 2L -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Granular base. .2 Sand /shell base. .3 Full depth asphalt base. .4 Hot mix sand asphalt base. .5 Soil cement stabilized base. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .2 Section 2D - Earthwork. .3 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .4 Section 2K - Soil Stabilization. .5 Section 2M - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. .6 Section 2N - Portland Cement Concrete. .7 Section 20 - Curbs and Sidewalks. .8 Section 2Y - Landscape, Seeding and Sodding. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .2 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth). .3 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depths). .4 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. .5 ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,900 ft- Ibf /ft3 (600 kN- m /m3)). .2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ( AASHTO) latest edition. .1 AASHTO T88 - Standard Specification for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS .1 Submit materials certificate to on site independent testing laboratory, which is signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify substrate has been inspected; gradients and elevations are correct and dry. 2010 SSBS Renovation 3.2 CONSTRUCTION .1 Perform base course construction in a manner that will drain surface properly at all times and at the same time prevent runoff from adjacent areas from draining onto base course construction. .2 Compact base material to not less than 95 percent of optimum density as determined by ASTM D1557 or 98 percent of optimum density, as determined by ASTM D698, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .3 Granular Base: Construct to thickness indicated on drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 8 inches measured loose. .4 Sand /Shell Base: Construct to thickness indicated on drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 4 inches measured loose. .5 Asphalt Institute Type IV Mix for Full Depth Asphalt Base: Construct to thickness indicated on drawings in maximum lifts or layers of 3 inches measured loose. .6 Asphalt Institute Type VI, VII, or VIII Mixes for Hot -Mix Sand Asphalt Bases: Construct to thickness indicated on drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 3 inches measure loose. .7 Soil Cement Stabilized Base: Construct to thickness and strength as indicated on drawings and in accordance with applicable state highway specifications. If not indicated on the drawings, the minimum compressive strength shall be 500 psi. (measured at 28 days). 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to perform construction testing of in -place base courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and tolerance. Paving base course tolerances shall be verified (by rod and level readings on no more than 50 foot centers) to +0.05 feet of design elevation that allow for paving thickness as shown in the drawings. Contractor shall provide instruments and a suitable benchmark. .2 The following tests shall be performed on each type of material used as base course material: .1 Moisture and Density Relationship: ASTM D1557. .2 Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T -88. .3 Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318. .4 Base Material Thickness: Perform 1 test for each 20,000 square feet in -place base material area. .5 Base Material Compaction: Perform 1 test in each lift for each 20,000 square feet in -place base material area. .6 Test each source of base material for compliance with applicable state highway specifications. .3 Field density tests for in -place materials shall be performed according to 1 of the following standards as part of construction testing requirements: .1 Nuclear Method: ASTM D2922, Method B (Direct Transmission). r .4 Independent testing laboratory shall prepare test reports that indicate test location, elevation data, and test results. Toys "R" Us, Architect, and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports within 96 hours of time test was Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PAVING BASE COURSE SECTION 2L -2 performed. In event that any test performed fails to meet these specifications, Toys "R" Us and Contractor shall be notified immediately by independent testing laboratory. Toys "R" Us reserves the right to employ independent testing laboratory and to direct any testing that is deemed necessary by them. Contractor shall provide open access to site for testing activities. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2M -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Asphaltic concrete paving, surface course, binder course, and base course. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2G - Excavation, Backfill and Compacting for Pavement. .2 Section 2L - Paving Base Course. .3 Section 2N - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. .4 Section 20 - Curbs and Sidewalks. .5 Section 2P - Pavement Markings. .6 Construction drawings. .7 State highway department standard specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Design Mix: Before any asphaltic concrete paving is constructed, submit actual design mix to the Toys "R" Us Construction Department for review and /or approval. Design mix submittal shall follow the format as indicated in the Asphalt Institute Manual MS -2, Marshall Stability Method; and shall include the type /name of the mix, gradation analysis, grade of asphalt cement used, Marshall Stability (pounds), flow, effective asphalt content (percent), and direct references to the applicable highway department specifications sections for each material. The design shall be for a mixture listed in the current edition of the applicable state roadway specifications. Mix designs over 3 years old will not be accepted by the Owner. .2 Material Certificates:, Submit materials certificate to on site independent testing laboratory, which is signed by material producer, and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Weather Limitations: .1 Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F, and when temperature has been above 35 degrees F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet, contains excess moisture, or during rain. .2 Construct asphaltic concrete paving when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F. 1.5 REFERENCES .1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition. .1 AASHTO M -17 - Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. .2 AASHTO. M -140 - Emulsified Asphalt. .3 AASHTO M -208 - Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. .4 AASHTO M -226 - Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 ASTM D242 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. .2 ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. .3 ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin- Coated Specimens. .4 ASTM D2397 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. .5 ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non - Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. .6 ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity - Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. .7 ASTM D5276 - Standard Test Method for Drop Test of Loaded Containers by Free Fall. .3 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving Handbook - US Army Corps of Engineers, UN -13 (CE MP -ET). .4 MS -2 -Mix design methods for asphalt concrete and other hot mix types - The Asphalt Institute (AI). .5 MS- 3- Asphalt Plant Manual - The Asphalt Institute (AI). .6 MS -19 -Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual - The Asphalt Institute (AI). PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Provide asphalt- aggregate mixture as recommended by local or state paving authorities to suit project conditions. Use locally available materials and gradations, which meet state highway specifications and exhibit satisfactory record on previous installations. .2 Asphalt Cement: Comply with AASHTO M -226 and ASTM D3381; Table 2 AC -10, AC -20, or AC -30, AR -80, viscosity grade, depending on local mean annual air temperature. (See chart below): Temperature Condition Asphalt Grades Cold, mean annual air temperature 7 degrees C (45 degrees F) AC -10 85/100 pen. Warm, mean annual air temperature between 7 degrees C (45 degrees F) and 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) AC -20 60/70 pen Hot, mean annual air temperature > 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) AC -30 Final acceptance of the proper grade of AC shall be made by the TRU Staff Engineer. .3 Prime Coat: A medium curing cutback asphalt or an asphalt penetrating prime coat consisting of either MC -30 or SS -1h. .4 Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt AASHTO M- 140 /ASTM D5276 or AASHTO M208 /ASTM D2397, SS -1h, CSS -1, or CSS -1h, diluted with one part water to one part emulsified asphalt. .5 Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with AASHTO M -17 /ASTM D242, if recommended by applicable state highway standards. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2M -2 .6 Asphalt- Aggregate Mixture: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the design mix shall have a minimum stability based on a 50 -blow Marshall of 1000 pounds with a flow between 8 and 16. The design mix shall be within sieve analysis and bitumen ranges below: SIEVE ANALYSIS OF MIX Square Sieve Total Percent Passing Percent Tolerance 3/4" 100 7% 1/2" 80 - 100 5% 3/8" 65 - 93% 4% #8 40 -55% 4% #50 12 -27% 2% #200 0 - 10% Percent bitumen by weight of total mix: 5.0 - 8.5. Air voids: 3 percent - 6 percent. Percent - aggregate voids filled with asphalt cement: 70 percent - 82 percent. Allowable variance of percent bitumen by weight of total mix = 0.4. 2.2 EQUIPMENT .1 Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct breakdowns in a manner that will not delay or be detrimental to progress of paving operations. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before applying prime coat. .2 Proof roll prepared base material surface to check for areas requiring additional compaction and areas requiring removal and recompaction. .3 Do not begin paving work until deficient base material areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 3.2 APPLICATIONS .1 Prime Coat .1 Apply bituminous prime coat to all base material surfaces where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed. .2 Apply bituminous prime coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable state highway specifications. .3 Apply at minimum rate of 0.25 gallon per square yard over compacted base material, Apply to penetrate and seal, but not flood surface. .4 Make necessary precautions to protect adjacent areas from over spray. .5 Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. .2 Tack Coat .1 Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphaltic concrete base courses or portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement. .2 Apply tack coat to asphaltic concrete base course or sand asphalt base course. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat between each lift or layer of full depth asphaltic concrete and sand asphalt bases and on surface of all such bases where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed. .3 Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable state highway specifications. .4 Apply at minimum rate of 0.05 gallon per square yard of surface. .5 Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. 3.3 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PLACEMENT .1 Place asphalt concrete mixture on completed compacted subgrade surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at following minimum temperatures: .1 When ambient temperature is between 40 degrees F and 50 degrees F: 285 degrees F. .2 When ambient temperature is between 50 degrees F and 60 degrees F: 280 degrees F. .3 When ambient temperature is higher than 60 degrees F: 275 degrees F. .2 Whenever possible, all pavement shall be spread by a finishing machine. Inaccessible or irregular areas, pavement may be placed by hand methods. The hot mixture shall be spread uniformly to the required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, the hot mixture shall be carefully smoothed to remove all segregated course aggregate and rake marks. Rakes and lutes used for hand spreading shall be of the type designed for use on asphalt mixtures. Loads shall not be dumped faster that they can properly spread. Workers shall not stand on the loose mixture while spreading. .3 Paving Machine Placement Apply successive lifts of asphaltic concrete in transverse directions with the surface course placed in the direction of surface water flow. Place in typical strips not less than 10 feet -0 inches wide. .4 Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 3.4 ROLLING AND COMPACTION .1 The mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling as soon as it will bear the weight of the rollers without undue displacement. The number, weight, and types of rollers and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that the required density and surface are consistently attained while the mixture is in a workable condition. .2 Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. .3 Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2M -3 .4 Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. .5 Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density. .6 Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness. .7 Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to perform construction testing of in -place asphaltic concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness. Asphaltic surface and base courses shall be randomly cored at a minimum rate of one core for every 20,000 square feet of paving. However, no less than 3 cores in light duty areas and three cores in heavy -duty areas shall be obtained. Coring holes shall be immediately filled with full -depth asphalt or with concrete. Asphaltic concrete pavement samples shall be tested for conformance with the mix design. .2 Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. .3 Thickness: In -place compacted thickness shall not be less than thickness specified on the drawings. Areas of deficient paving thickness shall receive a tack coat and a minimum 1 inch overlay; or shall be removed and replaced to the proper thickness, at the discretion of Toys "R" Us; until specified thickness of the course is met or exceeded at no additional expense to Toys "R" Us. .4 Surface Smoothness: Testing shall be performed on the finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline of paved area. The results of these tests shall be made available to the Owner upon request. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding following tolerances for smoothness: .1 Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch. .2 Wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch. .5 Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner. .6 Compaction: Field density test for in place materials shall be performed by examination of field codes in accordance with one of the following standards: .1 Bulk specific gravity of paraffin- coated specimens: ASTM D1188. .2 Bulk specific gravity using saturated surface -dry specimens: ASTM D2726. .3 Rate of testing shall be 1 core per 20,000 square feet of pavement, with a minimum of 3 cores from heavy - duty areas and 3 cores from standard -duty areas. Cores shall be cut from areas representative of the project. .4 Areas of insufficient compaction shall be delineated, removed and replaced in compliance with the specifications at no expense to Toys "R" Us. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2N -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Concrete, integral curbs, median barriers, parking areas, and roads. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Material. .3 Section 2L - Paving Base Course. .4 Section 20 - Curbs and Sidewalk. .5 Section 2P - Pavement Markings. .6 Section 3A - Concrete. .7 State highway department standard specifications. .8 Construction documents. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition. .1 ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. .2 ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (non - extruding and resilient bituminous types). .2 ASTM 01752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. .3 ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement .4 ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. .5 ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .7 ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. .8 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .9 ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .10 ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .11 ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Contractor shall maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bonds as required. Coat forms with non - staining type coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. .2 Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold -drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner. .3 Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40. .4 Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. .5 Joint Fillers: Resilient pre - molded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM 01751. .6 Joint Sealers: Non - priming, pourable, self - leveling polyurethane. Acceptable sealants are: .1 Sonneborn "Sonolastic paving Joint Sealant" .2 Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT 1 Sealant." .3 Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT 2 Sealant" .4 Mameco "Vulken 45." .5 Woodmont Products "Chem- Caulk." 2.2 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING .1 Concrete mix design and testing shall comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections. .2 Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, water - reducing admixture, air- entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: .1 Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .2 Slump Range: 3 inches - 5 inches for normal concrete. .3 Air Entrainment: 5 percent - 8 percent. .4 Limestone or Granite Aggregate: To be used for all exterior concrete. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Proof -roll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. The paving work shall begin after the unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PORTLAND CEM ENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2N -2 receive paving. Compaction testing for the base material shall be completed prior to the placement of the paving. .2 Surface Preparation: Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Form Construction: .1 Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. .2 Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place a minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. .3 Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: .1 Top of forms aligned to not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet -0 inches. .2 Vertical face on longitudinal axis, aligned to not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet -0 inches. .4 Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. .2 Reinforcement: Locate, place and support reinforcement per Division 3 sections. .3 Concrete Placement: .1 Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections. .2 Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. .3 Place concrete using methods, which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. .4 Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint. .4 Joint Construction: Construct expansion, weakened -plane control (contraction), and construction joints straight with face perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless otherwise detailed. .1 Weakened -Plane Control (Contraction) Joints: Provide joints at a spacing of 15 feet -0 inches o.c. maximum each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: .1 Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with recommended tool and finishing edges with jointer. soon as surface will not be tom, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. .2 Construction Joints: Place concrete joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints using standard metal keyway - section forms. .3 Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints at 180 feet- 0 inches o.c. maximum each way. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects. .5 Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. Furnish joint fillers in 1 piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. .6 Joint Sealants: All joints shall be sealed. Exterior pavement joint sealants shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING .1 After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening, and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for levelness with a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish. .2 Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of integral curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2 inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: .1 Inclined Slab Surfaces: Provide coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with stiff - bristled broom perpendicular to line of traffic. .2 Paving: Provide coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with stiff- bristled broom perpendicular to line of traffic. .3 Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and place areas or sections with major defects, as directed. .4 Protect and cure finished concrete paving using acceptable moist - curinq methods, more particularly described in the "water- curing" section of ACI 308 -92. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING .1 Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. .2 Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials. .2 Form sawed joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • DMSION 2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 2N -3 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 An independent testing laboratory shall randomly core the pavement at a minimum rate of 1 core and 1 core per 20,000 square feet of paving. Core shall be tested for thickness and quality of aggregate distribution. Core holes shall be patched immediately with portland cement concrete conforming to Article 2.2 and shall be finished to provide a level surface conforming to Articles 3.2 and 3.3. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • DMSION 2 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS SECTION 20 -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Combination concrete curb and gutter. .2 Concrete curb. .3 Concrete flume. .4 Concrete sidewalk. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2C - Site Preparation. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Material. .3 Section 2L - Paving Base Course. .4 Section 2P - Pavement Markings .5 Section 3A - Concrete. .6 State highway department of transportation standard specifications. .7 Construction documents. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition. .1 ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (non - extruding and resilient bituminous types). .2 ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. .3 ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .4 ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. .5 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .6 ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .7 ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .8 ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Contractor shall maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bonds as required. The forms shall be of a depth equal to the depth of curbing or sidewalk, and so designed as to permit secure fastening together at the tops. Coat forms with non - staining type coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. .2 Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. .3 Joint Fillers: Resilient premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D1751. .4 Joint Sealers: Non - priming, pourable, self - leveling polyurethane. Acceptable sealants are: .1 Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant." .2 Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT 1 Sealant" .3 Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT 2 Sealant." .4 Mameco "Vulken 45." .5 Woodmont Products "Chem- Caulk." 2.2 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING .1 Concrete mix design and testing shall comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections. .2 Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, water reducing admixture, air - entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: .1 Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .2 Slump Range: 3 inches - 5 inches for normal concrete. .3 Air Entrainment: 5 percent - 8 percent. .4 Limestone or Granite Aggregate: To be used for all exterior concrete. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Proof -roll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. The paving work shall begin after the unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. Compaction testing for the base material shall be completed prior to the placement of the paving. .2 Surface Preparation: Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce a firm, smooth surface immediately before placing concrete. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Form Construction: CURBS AND SIDEWALKS SECTION 20 -2 .1 Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. .2 Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place a minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. .3 Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: .1 Top of forms adhered to not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet -0 inches. .2 Vertical face on longitudinal axis, aligned to not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet -0 inches. .4 Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. .2 Concrete Placement .1 Compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repair areas to provide continuous smooth finish. .2 Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections. .3 Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. .4 Place concrete using methods, which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of dowels and joint devices. .5 Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 2 hour, place construction joint. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. .3 Joint Construction: .1 Contraction Joints: If joints are specified, the curb or gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of the length specified on the plans. The joints between sections shall be formed either by steel templates 1/8 inch in thickness, or a length equal to the width of the gutter or curb, and with a depth which will penetrate at least 2 inches below the surface of the curb and gutter, or with 3/4 inch thick preformed expansion joint filler cut to the exact cross section of the curb or gutter, or by sawing to a depth of at least 2 inches while the concrete is between 4 hours to 24 hours old. If steel templates are used, they shall be left in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape, but shall be removed while the forms are still in place. .2 Longitudinal Construction Joints: Concrete curb, concrete gutter, combination concrete curb and gutter, where specified on the plans, shall be tied to concrete pavement with No. 4 reinforcement bars (1/2 inch diameter) of the length and spacing shown on the plans. .3 Transverse Expansion Joints: Transverse expansion joint in curb, curb and gutter, gutter or sidewalk shall be the filler cut to the exact cross section of the curb, curb and gutter, gutter or sidewalk. The joints shall be similar to the type of expansion joint used in the adjacent pavement. .4 Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 2 inches or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. Furnish joint fillers in 1 piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING .1 After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and re -float repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish. .2 Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of integral curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 2 inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: .1 Inclined Slab Surfaces: Provide coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with stiff - bristled broom perpendicular to line of traffic. .2 Curbs, Gutters, and Walks: Broom finish by drawing fine hair broom across surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation as necessary to produce a fine line texture. .3 Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and place areas or sections with major defects, as directed. .4 Protect and cure finished concrete paving using acceptable moist - curing methods, more particularly described in the "water- curing" section of ACI 308 -92. 3.4 BACKFILL .1 After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces in front and back of the curb and gutter or sidewalk shall be refilled to the required elevation with suitable material, which shall be compacted until firm and solid and neatly graded. 3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING .1 Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. .2 Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS SECTION 20 -3 placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS SECTION 2P -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Construction Drawings. .2 Section 2D - Earthwork. .3 Section 2L - Paving Base Course. .4 Section 2M - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. .5 Section 2N - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 The paints shall be non - bleeding, quick- drying, alkyd petroleum base paint suitable for traffic- bearing surface and shall meet FS TTP -85E and mixed in accordance with manufacturer =s instructions before application. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 3.2 APPLICATION .1 Apply 2 coats of paint at manufacturer's recommended rate without the addition of thinner, with a maximum of 100 square feet per gallon. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. At sidewalk curbs and crosswalks, use a straightedge to ensure a uniform, clean and straight stripe at the front of the store. .2 The following items are to be painted with the colors noted below: .1 Pedestrian Crosswalks: Yellow. .2 Exterior Sidewalk Curbs and Guardposts: Yellow. .3 Fire Lanes: Red or per local code. .4 Lane Striping and Parking Lot Light Pole Bases: Yellow. .5 Handicap Symbols: Per local code. .6 Parking Stall Striping: Yellow, unless otherwise noted on plans. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 2 SEWER STRUCTURES PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. .2 Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue and groove joints with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage and accessories. .3 Masonry manhole sections with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 2F Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities. .2 Section 2T - Storm Sewer Systems .3 Section 2U - Sanitary Sewer Systems. .4 Section 3 - Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) latest edition. .1 ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. .2 ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. .3 ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. .4 ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Laterals. .5 ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Extrusion Material for Wire and Cable. .6 ASTM D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel -Plate Loading. .7 ASTM D1248 - Precast Polyethylene Manholes. .2 International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Indicate manholes, locations, elevations, piping, sizes, and elevations of penetrations. .2 Product ,Data: Provide manhole covers, component construction, features, configuration, and dimensions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS SECTION 2Q -1 .1 Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 with gaskets in accordance with ASTM C923. Construct manholes of precast concrete sections as required by drawings to size, shape, and depth indicated, but never less than 4 feet 0 inch inside diameter. .2 Manhole Sections: Reinforced cast -in -place concrete as specified in Division 3 Sections. .1 Cast -in -place manholes shall be constructed of 3000 psi concrete. .2 Forms shall be accurately made of steel sheets and of sufficient strength to form dense watertight walls to true dimensions. .3 Concrete shall be deposited in evenly distributed layers of about 18 inches, with each layer vibrated to bond it to the preceding layer. .3 Manhole Sections: Precast Polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D1248. Manholes shall be manufactured with factory- molded steps. The nominal cylinder internal diameter shall be 48 feet and shall be designed to accept concrete filled polyethylene manhole lids and standard cast iron frames with lid or grate. Manholes shall have compressive strength, which meet ASTM D2412 standards. Acceptable Manufacturers: Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS) or owner approved equivalent manufacturer. .4 Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, Grade N Type I - Moisture Controlled, normal weight, of same Grade, Type and weight as block units, normal modular size of 3 -5/8 by 7 -5/8 by 2- 1/4 inches. .5 Mortar and Grout: Mortar for finishing and sealing shall be Class "C ". Honeycombing less than 2 inches deep shall be repaired using Class "D" mortar. .6. Reinforcement: Formed steel wire, gauge thick, galvanized finish. 2.2 COMPONENTS .1 Lid and Frame: ASTM A48, Class 30B Heavy Duty Cast Iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable lid, closed or open as specified on plans, sealing gasket; manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company or approved equal. .2 Manhole Steps: Neenah Foundry Company Catalog No. R- 1982-F or M.A. Industries PS -1 or approved equal. .3 Base Pad: Precast reinforced concrete or cast -in -place concrete of type specified in Division 3 Sections with leveled top surface. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SEWER STRUCTURES SECTION 2Q -2 2.3 CONFIGURATION .1 Shaft Construction: Concentric with eccentric cone top section; lipped male /female dry joints; sleeve to receive pipe sections. .2 Shape: Cylindrical. .3 Clear Inside Dimensions: 48 inch diameter or as indicated on plans. .4 Design Depth: As indicated on plans. .5 Clear Lid Opening: 24 inches diameter. .6 Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated. .7 Main and Lateral Pipes: Neatly cut off main and lateral pipes flush with inside of manhole or inlet where they enter structure walls, and point up irregularities and rough edges with non - shrinking grout .8 Inverts: Shape inverts for smooth flow across structure floor as shown on drawings. Use concrete and mortar to obtain proper grade and contour and finish surface with fine textured wood float. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. .2 Verify that built -in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into work. .3 Verify excavation for manholes is correct. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections. 3.3 PLACING MANHOLE SECTIONS .1 Place base pad, trowel top surface level for cast -in -place bases. .2 Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad. .3 After completion of excavation, setting reinforcing steel and placing inlet and outlet pipes, but prior to placing concrete for invert slab, set precast concrete blocks on slab foundation, the top of pipe to support first joint of manhole barrel which shall be lowered into excavation, grooved end first, and set on concrete blocks. Align and adjust to proper grade prior to placing invert slab, which shall be poured immediately after setting of first section of manhole barrel. .4 Prior to setting subsequent manhole barrel sections, apply primer to tongue and groove ends and allow to set in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Place 0-ring gasket, "Ramnek ", or equivalent, plastic rope on tongue end. Lower next section into position and remove excess material from interior of structure. Add additional material on exterior of joint, if necessary, for completely watertight joint. 3.4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION .1 Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. .2 Lay masonry units in running bond. Course 1 unit and 1 mortar joint to equal 8 inches. .3 Form flush mortar joints. .4 Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints uniformly jointed with other work. .5 Install joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. .6 Place joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above base pad and below lid frame opening. .7 As work progresses, build -in fabricated metal items. .8 Cut and fit for pipes. .9 Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations. .10 Ground base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required. .11 Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SECTION 2R -1 .1 Furnish labor, materials, services, equipment and other necessary items required for accompanying the construction of the water systems. This shall include, but not be limited to the following: pipe and fittings for site water line including domestic water line and fire water line, including domestic water line and fire water line, valves and fire hydrants, set lines, elevations and grades for water distribution systems work, and control system for duration of work including careful maintenance of benchmarks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2F - Excavating, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities. .2 Section 2H - Aggregate Materials. .3 Section 2Q - Sewer Structures. .4 Local Governing Authority and Code Requirements. .5 All Necessary Construction Permits. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition. .1 AASHTO T180 - Moisture - Density Relations of Soil Using a 10 -pound (4.54kg) Rammer and an 18 -inch (457mm) Drop. .2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), latest edition. .1 ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .2 ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition. .1 ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. .4 American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition. .1 AWWA C104 - Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. .2 AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile - Iron Pipe Systems. .3 AWWA C111 - Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .4 AWWA C151 - Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water. 2010 SSBS Renovation .5 AWWA C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. .6 AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants. .7 AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves. .8 AWWA C508 - Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 inches through 24 inches NPS. .9 AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. .10 AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. .11 AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. .12 AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Watermains. .13 AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inches through 12 inches, for Water Distribution. .14 AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 inch through 3 inches for water service. 5. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. .2 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3- (2,700 kN- m /m3)). .3 ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compound. .4 ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. .5 ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe - Rated Pipe (SDR- Series). .6 ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. .7 ASTM D2855 - Standard Specification for Making Solvent- Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. .8 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .9 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .10 ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SECTION 2R -2 .11 ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. . .12 ASTM D3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR -PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. .6 US 246 - Hydrants for Fire - Protection Service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipefittings, hydrants, valves, and accessories. .2 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed state or local requirements. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. .2 Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work in accordance with utility company and /or municipality requirements. .2 Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE .1 Pipe sizes less than 3 inches that are installed below grade and outside building shall comply with 1 or combination of following: .1 Seamless Copper tubing: Type "K" roll to comply with ASTM B88 -62 and installed with wrought copper (95 -5 Tin Antimony solder joint) fittings in accordance with ASME B16.22. .2 Polyvinyl Chloride Water Pipe: Pipe shall conform to ASTM D2241 with an SDR rating and ASTM D1784 classification. Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends in accordance with ASTM D3139 with factory supplied electrometric gaskets and lubricant. .2 Pipe sizes 3 inches and larger that are installed below grade and outside building shall comply with 1 of the following: .1 Gray Cast Iron Water Pipe: Thickness Class 22, and pressure Class 150. Fittings shall be either mechanical joint or push -on joint. .2 Ductile Iron Water Pipe: Fitting shall be either mechanical joint or push -on joint complying with AWWA C -151, Class 50. .3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe: Pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C -900 and comply with ASTM D2241, rated SDR 21 (Class 150). Pipe shall be continually marked. Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends in accordance with ASTM D3034, Table 2, with factory supplied electrometric gaskets and lubricant. 2.2 GATE VALVES - 2 INCHES AND OVER .1 Manufacturers: Mueller Resilient Seat Gate Valves or approved equal. .2 AWWA C509, Iron body, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat type, non - rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, flanged or mechanical joint ends, control rod, post indicator where indicated on plans, extension box and valve key. 2.3 BALL VALVES - UP TO 2 INCHES .1 Manufacturers: Mueller Oriseal or approved equal. .2 Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, tee stem pre - drilled for control rod, AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod, extension box and valve key. 2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES - FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES .1 AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, infinite position lever handle. 2.5 HYDRANT .1 Hydrant Type as required by utility company and as shown on plans. .2 Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6 inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length. .3 Hose and Steamer Connection: Match sizes with utility company, 2 hose nozzles, and 1 pumper nozzle. .4 Finish: Primer and 2 coats of enamel or special coating to color as required by utility company. 2.6 ACCESSORIES .1 Concrete for Thrust Blocks: Place thrust blocking consisting of 2,500 psi concrete to provide sufficient bearing area to transmit unbalanced thrust from bends, tees, caps, or plugs to undisturbed soil without loading undisturbed soil in excess of 2,500 pounds per square foot when water main pressure is 100 psi. MINIMUM THRUST BLOCKING BEARING AREAS Pipe Diameter Tees Sq. Ft. 90° Bend Sq. Ft. 45° Bend Sq. Ft. 22° Bend Sq. Ft. 4" 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 6" 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SECTION 2R -3 8" 2.5 .5 1.8 1.0 10" 4.0 5.5 2.8 1.5 12° 6.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 14" 8.0 11.0 5.5 3.0 16" 10.0 14.2 7.0 4.0 .2 Manhole and Cover. Refer to Section 2Q. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify existing conditions. .2 Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. .2 Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. .3 Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 BEDDING .1 Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 2F for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. .2 Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in 1 continuous layer not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent. .3 Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with fill, tamped in place and compacted to 95 percent .4 Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE .1 Maintain separation of water main from sanitary and storm sewer piping in accordance with state or local code. .2 Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 1 inch. .3 Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. .4 Route pipe in straight line. .5 Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. .6 Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under this Section. .7 Slope water pipe and position drain at low points. .8 Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new work and existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions which least interfere with operation of existing pipeline. .9 Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main. .10 Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 30 inches of cover over the top of pipe: In northern climates, establish elevations of buried piping to ensure 6 inches between top of pipe and frost line. .11 Backfill trench in accordance with Section 2F. 3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS .1 Install gate vales as indicted on drawings and supported on concrete pads with valve stem vertical and plumb. Install valve boxes in a manner that will not transmit loads, stress, or shock to valve body. Center valve box over operating nut of valve vertical and plumb. Securely fit valve box together leaving cover flush with finished surface. .2 Set hydrants plumb and locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to roadway. .3 Install fire hydrant assemblies as indicated on drawings in vertical and plum position with steamer nozzle pointed toward building unless otherwise directed by local authorities. Support hydrant assembly on concrete pad and firmly braced on side opposite inlet pipe against undisturbed soil and concrete blocking. Place minimum of 6 cubic feet of crushed stone or gravel around hydrant base and barrel after thrust blocking has cured at least 24 hours. Exercise care when backfilling and compacting so proper vertical position will not be altered. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM .1 Sterilize distribution system with chlorines before acceptance for domestic operation. Amount of chlorine shall be such as to provide dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Thoroughly flush lines before introduction of chlorinating materials and after contact period of not less than 24 hours, system shall be flushed with dean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 part per million. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contract period. After sterilization, take water and bacteriologically test in accordance with AWWA C651 specifications. Do not place distribution system in service until approval is obtained from applicable governing authorities. 3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS .1 Provide water service utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow preventor required and water meter with by -pass valves and sand strainer. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SECTION 2R -4 3.8 FILED QUALITY CONTROL .1 Test water distribution system pipe sized installed below grade and outside building in accordance with following procedures: .1 All pipe work shall be tested at the pressure and leakage tests equal to the design working pressure of the pipe and maintain said pressure for not less than 2 hours. .2 Furnish, install, and operate the necessary connections, pump, meter, and gauges. Leakage shall not exceed that permitted by AWWA C600 for installation of ductile -iron watermains. Prior to running any field test, meter shall be tested, sealed, and approved by applicable governing authority at Contractor's expense. .3 Locate and repair all leaks and repeat tests until test results are satisfactory and in compliance with this section. .2 Furnish copy of results of meter test and hydrostatic pressure test to Owner upon completion of water distribution backfilling operations. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE GAS LINES PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Pipe and fittings for site utility natural or propane gas distribution. .2 Propane storage tanks. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 2D - Earthwork. .2 Section 2F - Excavating, Backfill, and Compacting for Utilities. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition. .1 AASHTO T180 - Moisture - Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 -pound (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 -inch (457mm) Drop. .2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), latest edition. .1 ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. .2 ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings. Socket - Welding and Threaded. .3 ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .5 ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fitting for Flared Copper Tubes. .6 ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping. .7 ASME B31.8 - Gas Transmission Distribution and Piping Systems. .8 ASME Sec. 8D - Pressure Vessels. .9 ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. .10 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. .3 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A234 - Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. SECTION 2S -1 .3 ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .4 ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. .5 ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. .6 ASTM D1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf /ft3). .7 ASTM D2513 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. .8 ASTM D2517 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .9 ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket -Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter - Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing. .10 ASTM D2922 - Standard Specification for Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .11 ASTM D3017 - Standard Specification for Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .4 American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition. .1 AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. .5 American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition. .1 AWWA C105 - American National Standards for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping Systems. .6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), latest edition. .1 NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipefittings, valves, and accessories. .2 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified local requirements. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. .2 Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE GAS LINES SECTION 2S -2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work in accordance with utility company and /or municipality. .2 Gas Cock: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. .3 Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable state regulations. .4 Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Section 9. .5 Conform to NFPA 54, ASME B31.2 and /or ASME B31.8. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site. .2 Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE .1 Steel Pipe Below Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black: .1 Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234 forged steel welding type. .2 Joints: Welded and seamless. .3 Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, double layer, half lapped, 10 mil polyethylene tape. .2 Steel Pipe Above Ground: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black: .1 Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, ASME 816.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. .2 Joints: Threaded. .3 For Propane Systems: Copper tubing below ground: ASTM B88, Type K, internally tinned: .1 Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper, internally tinned. .2 Joint: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver brazed. .4 For Propane Systems: Copper tubing above ground: ASTM B88, Type K, L or ASTM B75, Type GP internally tinned: .1 Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper, ASME B16.22, wrought copper, or ASME B16.26, cast copper, internally tinned. .2 Joint ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95TA or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver brazed. .5 Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11: .1 Fittings: ASTM D2513. .2 Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit. .3 Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters. .6 Reinforced Epoxy Resin Piping: ASTM D2517: .1 Fittings: ASTM D2517. .2 Joints: Bell and spigot with epoxy resin. .3 Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters. 2.2 GAS COCKS .1 Up to 2 Inches: 150 psig (1040 kPa) WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non - lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. .2 Over 2 Inches: 125 psig (860 kPa) WOG, Steel or Cast iron body and tapered plug, non - lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. .3 Fore Applications With Line Pressure Greater Than 60 psig (415 KPA): Over 2 inches (50mm): Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES .1 Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion - resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator, with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends larger than 2 inch. .2 Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated. 2.4 PROPANE STORAGE TANKS .1 Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section 8D; minimum 250 psig (1700 kPa) rating; cleaned, prime coated and painted with two coats of silver anti -rust paint, and supplied with steel support saddles, pressure gauge; tapping for installation of piping and accessories. .2 Vaporizer. 1,000 watts, heating cable bedded in 1 inch of glass fiber insulation and covered by flexible stainless steel plate, with thermostat in weatherproof box set to turn on at -13 degrees F with manual off -on switch. .3 Size, capacity, diameter, and length as shown on plans. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE GAS LINES SECTION 2S -3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify existing conditions. .2 Verify that building service connections and utility gas main size, location, and invert are as indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Ream pipe ends and remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2 inches diameter. Thread ferrous pipe 2 inches diameter and under. .2 Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. .3 Prepare piping connections with flanges or threading and unions. 3.3 BEDDING .1 Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 2F for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. .2 Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in 1 continuous layer not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent per ASTM D1557. .3 Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with fill, tamped in place and compacted to 95 percent per ASTM D1557. .4 Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPING .1 Maintain separation of gas line from sewer, water or storm water piping in accordance with state or local code. .2 Route piping in straight line. .3 Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space. .4 Install cocks and other fittings. .5 Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 36 inches of cover in non - traveled areas and 48 inches of cover in driveways and parking areas. .6 Lay pipe on bedding. .7 Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat shrink over pipe. .8 For nonmetallic Pipe: Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. Coordinate with Section 2F. .9 Backfill trench in accordance with Section 2F. .10 Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve. .11 Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink or paint valves and valve boxes with red anti -rust primer and one coat of epoxy paint. 3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS .1 Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Caulk enlarged sleeve watertight. .2 Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. .3 Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location. .4 Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress upon service pipe. For plastic service pipe, use steel pipe riser from below ground to regulator. .5 Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating away from building openings. 3.6 PROPANE TANK INSTALLATION .1 Place tank legs on concrete footings, level within tolerance of 2 inches. Provide footings in accordance with Section 3. .2 Prepare and grade an area outside tank perimeter, for a distance of 6 feet. Grade, place and compact gravel fill to a compacted depth of 3 inches. Compact to 95 percent per ASTM D1557. .3 Provide tank with relief valve, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, pressure gauge and removable protection cover. Install piping, shutoff valve and pressure gauge to underground piping. .4 Set tank regulator to outlet pressure as indicated on plans. .5 Install vaporizer to under side of tank and secure to tank with aluminum tray and 2 stainless steel straps. .6 Install weatherproof control box for vaporizer 40 inches above ground surface. Install to 4 by 4 inch cedar post, driven into ground 40 inches. .7 Install wiring. Install from vaporizer to control box 20 inches below ground surface. Install service wiring 24 inches below ground from control box to building. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES STORM SEWER SYSTEMS SECTION 2T -1 .1 Site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and accessories, and bedding. .2 Connection of building storm water drainage system to municipal sewers. .3 Catch basins, paved area drainage, site surface drainage, and storm water detention facilities. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 2F - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities. .2 Section 2Q - Sewer Structures. .3 Section 2U - Sanitary Sewer System. .4 Section 3A - Concrete: Concrete type for catch basin, cleanout, or head wall base pad construction. .5 Local governing authority and code requirements. .6 All necessary construction permits. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition. .1 AASHTO M198 - Standard Specification for Joints of Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. .2 AASHTO M252 - Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe. .3 AASHTO M294 - Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 12 Inch to 48 Inch Diameter. .4 AASHTO M36 - Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated, for Sewers and Drains. .5 AASHTO T180 - Moisture - Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 -pound (4.54kg) Rammer and an 18 -inch (457mm) Drop. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. .2 ASTM C12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. .3 ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. .4 ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. .5 ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. .6 ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. .7 ASTM A760 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic- Coated for Sewers and Drains. .8 ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. .9 ASTM D1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft Ib /ft;). .10 ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. .11 ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated. .12 ASTM D2321 - Standard Specification for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and other Gravity -Flow Applications. .13 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .14 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .15 ASTM F794 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fitting Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent back fill operations. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. .2 Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.6 COORDINATION .1 Coordinate the work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES STORM SEWER SYSTEMS SECTION 2T -2 .1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Comply with requirements of ASTM C76, Class III, unless another class type is indicated on drawings, installed with flexible plastic (Bitumen) gaskets at all joints. Gaskets shall comply with AASHTO M198 and shall be installed in strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Corrugated Steel Pipe: Only permitted when specifically indicated on drawings and shall comply with requirements of ASTM A760; 16 gauge, unless another gauge is indicated on drawings. Install with matching band connectors. Install sleeve gaskets if indicated on drawings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Corrugated steel pipe may be round pipe, arch pipe, or slotted drainpipe as indicated on drawings. Slotted drainpipe shall have 1.75 foot wide drain guide waterway openings and 6 foot minimum height drain guide. .3 Spiral Rib Metal Pipe Type I R: Galvanized or aluminized as specified on drawings. Only permitted when specified led on drawings. Pipe ends shall be re- corrugated and installed with semi - corrugated hugger -type bands and "0" ring gaskets in accordance with pipe manufacturers installation requirements. Spiral rib metal pipe must comply with ASTM A760 Type 1 R. Acceptable manufacturers: CONTECH, INC. "ULTRA FLO ", "ULTRA FLO 11 ", CALDWELL CULVERT CO. "SMOOTH RIB ", or approved equal. .4 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Only permitted when specifically indicated on drawings. Pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM D3034, rated SDR 35. Pipe shall be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D3034 classification. Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends with accordance with ASTM D3034, Table 2, with factory supplied elastomeric gaskets and lubricants. .5 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) Smooth Interior. Only permitted when specifically indicated on drawings and shall conform with AASHTO Designation M294 and M252. Pipe must be installed in accordance with pipe manufacturers installation guidelines for Culvert and Other Heavy -Duty Drainage Applications. Acceptable manufacturers: Advanced Drainage System, Inc. (ADS) N -12 & RANCOR, INC. (Hi -Q smooth interior). .6 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) large diameter closed profile gravity sewer pipe, UNL -B -9: Only permitted when specifically indicated on drawings. Pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM F789. Pipe must be installed in accordance with pipe manufacturers installation guidelines. Acceptable manufacturer. Carlon (Vylon H.C.). 2.2 INLETS AND CATCH BASINS .1 Lid and frame per details shown on plans. .2 Shaft Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast or cast -in -place concrete pipe sections, lipped male /female dry joints, nominal shaft diameter of 48 inches. .3 Base Pad: Cast -in -place concrete of type specified in Division 3 Sections or precast reinforced concrete pad. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that trench cut and excavation base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on civil engineering drawings. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate. .2 Remove large stones or other hard matter, which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.3 BEDDING .1 Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 2F for work of this section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. .2 Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. .3 Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE .1 Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM C12, ASTM D2321 manufacturer's instructions and /or state or local requirements. Seal joints watertight. .2 Place pipe on minimum 4 inches deep bed of filter aggregate. .3 Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on civil engineering drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. .4 Install aggregate at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches, compact to 95 percent standard per ASTM D1557. .5 Refer to Section 2F for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. .6 Refer to Section 2Q for manhole requirements. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND INLETS .1 Form bottom of excavation dean and smooth to correct elevation. .2 Form and place cast -in -place concrete base pad, with provision for storm sewer pipe end sections, or place 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 STORM SEWER SYSTEMS SECTION 2T -3 precast reinforced concrete pad at the locations and elevations as specified on the plans. .3 Level top surface of base pad to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive storm sewer pipe sections. .4 Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. .5 Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SANITARY SEWER SYST EM SECTION 2U -1 .1 Furnish labor, materials, services, equipment, and other necessary items required for accompanying the construction of the sanitary systems. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following: .2 Sanitary sewer drainage piping, fittings and accessories, cleanouts, and bedding. .3 Set lines, elevations, and grades for sanitary sewer system work and control system for duration of work, including careful maintenance of benchmarks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Construction Drawings. .2 Specifications Section 2F Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities. .3 Specifications Section 2Q Sewer Structures. .4 Local governing authority and code requirements. .5 All necessary construction permits. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. .2 ASTM C12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. .3 ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. .4 ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. .5 ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. .6 ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. .7 ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. .8 ASTM A746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe. .9 ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. .10 ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and perforated. .11 ASTM D6987 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,000 ft- Ib /ft3). .12 ASTM D1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ib /ft). .13 ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. .14 ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .15 ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). .16 ASTM F949 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings. 1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Provide catalog materials indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and fittings. .2 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products specified. .3 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed ASTM designations. 1.6 COORDINATION .1 Coordinate the work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS .1 Polyvinyl Chloride Sanitary Sewer. .1 Pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM D3034, rated SDR 35. Pipe shall be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D3034 classification. .2 Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends per ASTM D3034, Table 2, with factory supplied elastomeric gaskets and lubricant. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SECTION 2U -2 .3 Corrugated polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM F949. Pipe must be marked with manufacturers name, pipe size, call classification and ASTM F949 Classification. Pipe must be installed per the manufacturer's installation requirements. Acceptable manufacturer. CONTECH, INC. 'A -2000' PVC sewer pipe or Owner - approved equivalent. .2 Vitrified Clay Sanitary Sewer. .1 Sanitary Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Vitrified clay pipe meeting or exceeding requirements of ASTM C700. .2 Joints: ASTM C425 specifications for "Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings." .3 Gaskets: ASTM C425 specification for "Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings." Gaskets shall be manufactured from high grade, property vulcanized elastomeric compound consisting of either basic natural or synthetic rubber. Gasket manufacturing tolerances shall comply with Rubber Manufacturer's Association tolerances for gaskets. .4 Lubricant: Suitable for lubricating joint components; no deteriorating effects on gasket or pipe material, will not support growth of fungi or bacteria, and shall be of type recommended by gasket manufacturer. .5 Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer. .1 Ductile Iron Pipe: ASTM A746, extra heavy type, inside nominal diameter as specified on plans, bell and spigot end. Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Device: ANSI A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joint Devices. .6 Cast Iron Sanitary Sewer. .1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, extra heavy type, inside nominal diameter as specified on plans, bell and spigot end. .2 Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices. .7 Concrete Sanitary Sewer. .1 Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14, Class 1, 2, or 3 as specified on plans; un- reinforced; inside nominal diameter as specified, bell and spigot, and joints. .2 Concrete Pipe Joint Devices: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint. .8 Reinforced Concrete Sanitary Sewer. .1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, Class I, II, III, IV, or V as specified led on plans, with Wall Type A, B, or C; mesh reinforcement inside nominal diameter as specified, bell and spigot end joints. .2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint. 2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES .1 Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene- ribbed gasket for positive seal. .2 Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.3 CLEANOUTS .1 Lid and Frame: Heavy -duty cast iron construction, manufactured by Mueller. Lid Design: Closed Lid. .2 Shaft Construction: Cast iron shaft of internal diameter as specified on plans with 2500 -psi concrete collar for cleanouts located in paved areas. .3 Base Pad: Cast -in -place concrete, 2500 psi leveled top surface to receive cast iron shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate. .2 Remove large stones or other hard matter, which could damage pipe or impeded consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.2 BEDDING .1 Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 2F for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. .2 Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent per ASTM D1557. .3 Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE .1 Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM C12, ASTM C14 and /or manufacturers instructions. Seal joints watertight. .2 Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on civil engineering drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. .3 Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches compacted to 95 percent per ASTM D1557. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DIVISION 2 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SECTION 2U -3 .4 Refer to Section 2F for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. .5 Refer to Section 2Q for manhole requirements. .6 Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system through installed sleeves. 3.4 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS .1 Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. .2 Form and place cast -in -place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. .3 Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. .4 Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM D2922 or ASTM D3017. .2 If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. .3 Deflection Test .1 Deflection tests shall be performed on all flexible pipes. The test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. .2 No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5 percent. .3 If the deflection test is to be run using a rigid ball or mandrel, it shall have a diameter equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The test shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY LANDSC APE IRRIGATION SECTION 2V -1 .1 When indicated on the drawings, Contractor shall provide material and installation of a complete, automatically controlled, underground, irrigation system including the following: .2 Piping Backflow Preventor, Sprinkler Heads and Nozzles, Valves, Controllers, Control Wiring, Fittings, Electrical Connections, Connections to Mains, and all necessary accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 2F - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities .2 Section 2R - Water Distribution Systems. .3 Section 2Y - Landscaping, Seeding and Sodding. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM D2282 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrite- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SDR -PR). .2 ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. .3 ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .4 ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. .5 ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. .6 ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. .7 ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series). .8 ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. .2 FS 0 -F -506 - Flux, Soldering; Paste and Liquid. .3 NEMA 250 (1997) - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for underground irrigation system. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Submit as -built layout plan and details illustrating the location and type of heads, valves, piping circuits, controls, and accessories. .2 Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .1 Rain Bird Sprinkler Manufacturing Corporation. .2 The Toro Company, Irrigation Division. 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Pipe: .1 All main line pipe to circuit control valves shall be rigid PVC Class 160, SDR 26 conforming to ASTM D2241. .2 All circuit pipe 1 -1/4 inch diameter and larger shall be rigid PVC Class 160 conforming to ASTM D2241. .3 AU circuit pipes less that 1 -1/4 inch diameter shall be rigid PVC Class 200 conforming to ASTM D2241. .2 Pipe Fittings: For PVC pipe, ASTM D2466, socket fittings with ASTM A2564 solvent cement. For copper tube filings, provide cast brass or wrought copper, sweet - solder type. .3 PVC sleeves for water lines shall be rigid PVC Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM D2241 and be sized as indicated on the drawings. .4 PVC sleeves for pulling electrical control wires shall be rigid PVC Class 160 conforming to ASTM D2241 and be sized as indicated on the drawings. .5 Screw -type Valves: .1 Provide straight globe valves of brass construction. .2 Provide valves fitted with a key head for key operation. .6 Remote Control Valves: .1 Provide valves of heavy cast bronze body and cover with stainless steel spring and metal parts of brass. .2 Solenoid operated diaphragm, globe -type 150 psi CWP- Rated, FIP threads. .3 Packless valve, without sliding seals and completely serviceable without removing from pipeline. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SECTION 2V -2 .4 Solenoid complying with Class 11 National Electric Code, requiring a maximum of 0.46 amperes, 10.0 watts at 24 volts AC. .7 Automatic Sprinkler Controllers: Provide unit capable of controlling 6 stations and complying with the following: .1 Microprocessor based /microelectronics solid -state type, capable of fully automatic or manual operation. .2 Controller in wall mounted, weatherproof lockable steel cabinet. .3 Primary of 117 volts AC, secondary of 24 volts AC. .4 0 to 60 minutes in 1 minute increments with master on -off switch. .5 2 independent programs with 3 automatic starts per day for each. .6 24 -hour program clock readout, 14 -day dock. .8 Sprinkler Head .1 Pop -up spray and shrub heads: .1 Provide Rain Bird Series 1804 (or Toro equivalent) 4 -inch - lawn and 1812 12 -inch shrub /ground cover beds. Pop -up spray heads. .2 The sprinkler body, stem nozzle, and screen of heavy -duty plastic. .3 The sprinkler shall have a soft elastomer pressure activated comolded wiper seal for cleaning debris from pop -up stem at it retracts into case to prevent sprinkler from sticking up. .4 The sprinkler shall have a strong stainless steel retract spring for positive pop down. Pop -up height shall be no less than 2 inches. .5 The sprinkler shall have a screen under nozzle to protect it from clogging and for easy removal for cleaning and flushing system. .2 Impact Rotor Pop -Up Sprinklers: .1 Provide Gear Drive Rotors: Rain Bird 3500 Series or 5000 Series. .2 The full or part circle pop -up rotor sprinkler shall be a single nozzle gear drive type. .3 Part circle sprinkler shall have an infinitely adjustable arc of coverage from 40 degrees to 360 degrees. .4 Sprinkler case and internal assembly made of durable plastic. .5 The rotation of the sprinkler is accomplished by a horizontal oscillating precision jet arm, actuated by outlet water stream. .6 Sprinkler with adjustable cliff user pin for distance and distribution control. .7 Sprinkler with strong stainless steel retract spring for positive pop down. .9 Quick Coupling Equipment: .1 Valves: 1 -piece body constructed from heavy -duty cast bronze with a 3/4 -inch FIP riser connection. .2 Swivel Hose EI.1: Heavy cast bronze, connected to quick couplers for hose connection. .3 Hose ells 3/4 -inch FIPX 3/4 -inch male hose threads. .4 Each quick coupler should be installed in a 6 -inch diameter valve box by Ametak, Sheboygan, Wisconsin and packed with pea gravel, 4 inches in depth. .10 Wire: .1 Provide No. 1 2RW wire to electric control valves from automatic controller which is U.L. approved for direct underground burial. .2 Provide a single wire to each solenoid from controller and a common neutral wire to all solenoids from controller as power supply. .3 Colored wiring shall have color coding shown on the controller. .11 Automatic Drain Valves: .1 Automatic drain valves by Tom King Harmony Products, Inc., St. Louis, MO. .2 Valve body all of PVC plastic with valve material of rubber E.P. .3 Piping connection 2 -inch MPT or insert fittings, metal clamps. .4 Actuating plunger spring to close at 10 -11 psi and open at 9 - 10 psi. .5 Dispersing pad of polyester non -woven mat. .12 Backflow Preventor .1 805Y Double Backflow Preventor, 3 feet, as manufactured by Fabco, P.O. Box 8070, Fresno, CA 93747, (209) 252 -0791, or Owner- approved equal. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Summary: LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SECTION 2V -3 .3 Laying Plastic Pipe: .1 Snake in trench at least 1 foot per every 100 feet to allow for thermal expansion. .1 Solvent welded socket type .1 Stake locations for each sprinkler in accordance with drawings. .2 Threaded type: apply liquid Teflon thread lubricant to Teflon thread type. .2 If discrepancies in plan become apparent at this time, point out discrepancy to Owner's Representative. .4 Install Sprinkler heads: .3 Do not proceed with work until necessary design .1 Install rotary heads, pop -up spray and shrub heads, engineering changes have been made and approved and quick couplers so they will be flush with finished, by Owner's representative. settled ground surface. .4 Install sprinkler system equipment with necessary hardware in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. .2 Piece part circle heads no more than 4 inches from edge of paved surfaces. .3 Place swing joints on all sprinkler heads adjacent to .5 Verify system design pressures prior to installation. curbs or walks. .2 Pipe Laying: .5 Wiring: .1 Do not lay pipe on unstable material or blocking, or when in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, conditions are unsuitable. .1 Hold splicing to a minimum. .2 Provide 12 -inch expansion loops in wiring at each wire connection or change in wire direction. .2 Minimum of 3 inches between parallel pipes in the same trench. .3 Provide 24 -inch expansion loop at remote control valves. .3 Hold pipe securely in place while joint is being made. .4 Do not run power wiring in the same conduit as .4 Rest full length of each pipe section firmly on control wiring. bedding, excavating recesses to accommodate joints. .5 Solder splices, coat with general Bakelite cement, wrap .5 Avoid heating trenches, electric dusts, storm and with electrical tape and coat again with general sanitary sewer lines, existing water and gas mains, all Bakelite cement. Crimp type connectors may be of which have right -of -way. substituted. .6 Sprinkler sections shall drain to an automatic drain placed at a low point in section. .7 Minimum cover over mains and control valves is 18 inches below finish grade. .8 Minimum cover over laterals is 12 inches. .9 Do not cut sidewalk, drives, or curb during trenching for piping .10 Use PVC sleeves under paved areas where possible; otherwise auger bore or tunnel. Repair damaged paved surfaces during guarantee period. .6 Setting of Valves: .1 Do not locate valves beneath paved surfaces. .2 Install valves in a level position. .3 Install valves with minimum 18 inches cover. .7 Sleeving: .1 Furnish and install PVC sleeving where control wires or pipe pass under paved surfaces as follows: .1 Provide sleeving of adequate size to allow retrieval for repair. .11 Cover and protect open pipe ends, fixtures, and equipment from dirt, water and chemical or .2 Extend sleeving 12 inches beyond end of paving mechanical damage during installation. at each end. .12 At completion of work, thoroughly clean fixtures, .3 Bed sleeves with 4 inches sand backfill above exposed materials and equipment. pipe. 2010 SSBS Renovation .4 Install pipe with 24 inches of cover. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SECTION 2V -4 .5 Install permanent benchmark in curb for .5 Complete chart and receive approval prior to reference to all sleeve locations. final inspection of irrigation system. 3.2 TEST AND FLUSHING .1 Following installation, make final adjustments for lawn irrigation system preparatory to Owner's representative's final inspection: .1 Flush system completely to remove debris, with nozzle removed. .2 Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw. .3 Check pop -up spray nozzling for proper arc of spray. .4 Determine whether uniform distribution exists over all areas. .2 Following final adjustment, operate the entire installation to demonstrate the complete and successful operation of all equipment. 3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .1 Maintenance: .1 Provide on hour operating instructions prior to final acceptance. .2 Provide on job site consultation with Owner's operating personnel for 6 months, not to exceed 4 hours per month, at no charge to Owner. .3 Provide Toys "R" Us with a bonded written 2 -year maintenance /warranty agreement (beginning on the Toys "R" Us possession date) with an experienced local nursery business capable of performing the work. This agreement shall include labor and materials for maintenance of the Irrigation system. .2 Record Drawings and Controller Chart: .1 Maintain a complete set of up -to -date as -built drawings. .2 Prepare a controller chart showing: .1 Location of all sections, valves, lateral lines, and routes of control wires. .2 Identify all valves as to size, station, number, and type of control wires. .3 Provide chart as a black -line point with a different color used to show area of coverage for each station. .4 Locate chart inside controller door. Seal chart • between 2 pieces of plastic. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 2W -1 .1 Provide chain -link fences and gates units controlled by single source including erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings as indicated on drawings. Refer to architectural building plans for fencing attached to building. .2 If not specified otherwise, all references to pipe diameters in this section shall refer to exterior measurements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Construction Drawings - Site Plans. .2 Manufacturer's technical data and installation requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM F567 - Standard Specification for Installation of Chain -Link Fence. .3 ASTM A116 - Standard Specification for Metallic - Coated Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. .4 ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Block and Hot - Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. .5 ASTM A121 - Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire. .6 ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .7 ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. .8 ASTM A428 - Standard Specification for Weight/ Mass of Coating on Aluminum- Coated Iron or Steel Articles. .9 ASTM A491 - Standard Specification for Aluminum - Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. .10 ASTM A585 - Standard Specification for Aluminum - Coated Steel Barbed Wire. .11 ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low -Alloy and High- Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. .12 ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .13 ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. .14 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .15 ASTM F668 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer- Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. .16 ASTM F1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain -Link Fence Framework. .2 Chain -Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) - Product Manual. .3 FS RR -R -191 - Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain -Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories). 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: .1 Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. .2 Anchor Fence, Inc. .3 United States Steel. 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Fabric: .1 No. 9 gauge (0.148 inch diameter) finished size galvanized steel wires, 2 -inch mesh, with both top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed. .2 Furnish 1 -piece fabric widths for fencing. .2 End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights as follows: .1 Up to 6 Foot -0 Inch Fabric Height: 2.375 -inch OD pipe, 3.65 pounds per foot, or 3.5 inches by 3.5 inches roll - formed "C" sections, 4.85 pounds per foot .2 Over 6 Foot -0 Inch Fabric Height: 2.875 -inch OD pipe, 5.79 pounds per foot, or 3.5 inches by 3.5 inches roll - formed "C" sections, 4.85 pounds per foot. .3 Line Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights as follows: .1 Up to 6 Foot -0 Inch Fabric Height 1.90 -inch OD steel pipe, 2.72 pounds per foot or 1.875 -inch by 1.625 -inch C- sections, 2.28 pounds per foot. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 2W -2 .2 6 Foot -0 Inch to 8 Foot -0 Inch Fabric Height 2.375 - inch OD steel pipe, 3.65 pounds per foot or 2.25 inch by 1.875 inch H- sections, 2.64 pounds per foot. .3 Over 8 Foot -0 Inch Fabric Height 2.875 -inch OD steel pipe, 5.79 pounds per foot or 2.25 inch by 1.875 inch H- sections, 3.26 pounds per foot. .4 Gate Posts: Galvanized steel, posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of double gate installation, for nominal gate widths as follows: .1 Up to 6 Foot -0 Inch: 3.5 inch by 3.5 inch roll- formed "C" section, 4.85 pounds per foot, or 2.875 OD pipe, 5.79 pounds per 1 inch foot. .2 Over 6 Foot -0 Inch to 13 Foot -0 Inch: 4.00 inch OD pipe, 9.11 pounds per foot. .5 Top Rail: Rails: 1.66 inch OD pipe, 2.27 pounds per foot or 1.625 inch by 1.25 inch roll- formed sections, 1.35 pounds per foot; galvanized steel, manufacturer's longest lengths. .6 Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long, for each joint. .7 Attaching Devices: Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull and end post. .8 Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6 inches long and with inside diameter not less than 2 inches greater than outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. .9 Tension Wire: 7 gauge galvanized steel, coated coil spring wire, located at bottom of fabric. .10 Wire Ties: 11 gauge galvanized steel. .11 Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end of gateposts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid - height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375 -inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. .12 Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for each tubular post. Furnish caps with openings to permit passage of top rail. .13 Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, 1 -piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross - section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch. Provide 1 stretch bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post. .14 Stretch Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. .15 Gate Cross - bracing: 3/8 -inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. .16 Portland Cement ASTM C150. .17 Aggregates: ASTM C33. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" U .18 Water. Clean. .19 Non- shrink, non - Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory- packaged, non - corrosive non - staining, nongaseous, exterior grout complying with CE CRD -C621. .20 Swinging Gate Hardware: .1 Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non- lift- off type, offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide one and a half pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 foot -0 inch nominal height. .2 Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. .21 Double Gates Hardware: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with anchors set in concrete, to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eye as integral part of latch, using 1 padlock for locking both gate leaves. .22 Sliding Gate Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy -duty track, ball- bearing hanger sheavers, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories as required. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 GATE FABRICATION .1 Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90 -inch OD pipe, galvanized steel. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet 0 inch apart. .2 Assemble gate frames by welding or special fittings and rivets, for rigid connections. Install same fabric as for fence with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Install diagonal cross bracing on gates as required to ensure rigid frame without sag or twist. Bars may be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at 15 inches o.c. maximum. .3 Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 3.2 FINISH .1 Fabric Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A392, Class 1, with not less than 1.2 ounce zinc per square foot of surface. .2 Framing: Galvanized steel, ASTM A53, with not less than 1.8 ounce zinc per square foot of surface. .3 Hardware and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A153 with zinc weights in accordance with Table 1. 3.3 CONCRETE MIXING 1 Mix materials to obtain concrete with minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 2,500 psi; 1 inch maximum size s /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 2W -3 aggregate, maximum 3 inch slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air. 3.4 INSTALLATION .1 Comply with recommended procedures and instructions of fencing manufacturer. Provide secure, aligned installation with line posts spaced at 10 foot -0 inch o.c. maximum. .2 Grade Set Posts: Drill or hand excavate using posthole digger in firm undisturbed or compacted soil. .3 Excavate hole for each post to minimum diameter recommended by fence manufacturer but not less than 4 times largest cross - section of post. Excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface. .4 Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. .5 Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Extend concrete footing 2 inches above grade and trowel to crown to shed water. .6 Sleeve Set Posts: Anchor posts by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non - shrink, non - metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. .7 Top Rails: Run rail continuously, bending to form radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by manufacturer. .8 Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install in 1 piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. .9 Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. .10 Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced 24 inches o.c. .11 Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework sot that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. .12 Stretcher Bars: Secure at end, corner, pull, and gate posts by threading through or clamping to fabric at 4 inches o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 15 inches o.c. .13 Tie Wires: .1 Use U- shaped wire, conforming with diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly when ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. .2 Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24 inches o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24 inches o.c. .3 Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. .14 Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. .15 Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubrication. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SIGNAGE SECTION 2X -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY .1 Provide traffic control signs complying with US Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration's Manual of "Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and as specified. See drawings for type, location, and quantity of signs required. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Construction Drawings. .2 Manufacturer's mounting instructions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER .1 Signs to be equivalent to those manufactured by SA -SO, Inc.; website: sa- so.com. 2.2 SIGNS .1 "STOP" Signs: 24 inches by 24 inches, Octagon, reflectorized copy and border. .2 "SPEED LIMIT 15" Signs: 18 inches by 24 inches, black legend on white reflective baked enamel background. .3 "HANDICAPPED SYMBOL" Signs: 12 inches by 18 inches, white legend on blue reflective baked enamel background. .4 NO PARKING, FIRE LANE" Signs: 12 inches by 18 inches, red letters on white reflective or baked enamel background. .5 "KEEP RIGHT" Signs: 18 inches by 24 inches, black letters and symbol on white reflective or baked enamel background. .6 "DO NOT ENTER" Signs: Highway Department Standard red and white sign except 24 inches by 24 inches size with reflective baked enamel finish. 2.3 POSTS .1 Round galvanized posts with galvanized sign- mounting hardware for each sign. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install posts in 18 inch round by 24 inches deep concrete foundations. Set posts vertical and plumb with bottom of sign at 6 feet 5 inches above finish grade. Mount signs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY OF WORK AND MATERIALS LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -1 .1 The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work in accordance with these specifications, drawings, and instructions provided by the Landscape Architect or Toys "R" Us representative hereafter also referred to as Landscape Architect. The work shall include everything shown on the drawings or required by the specifications. All work completed and materials furnished and installed shall be of the best quality and shall be in strict accordance with the intention of the drawings, specifications, and samples. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Landscape Architect so that no error or discrepancy in the drawings or specifications shall cause defective or inappropriate materials to be used or poor workmanship to be allowed and so that the work may proceed in the most efficient and effective manner. 1.2 WEATHER CONDITIONS .1 Work must be carried out only during weather conditions favorable to landscape construction and to the health and welfare of plants. The Landscape Architect shall determine the suitability of such weather conditions. 1.3 PROTECTION .1 Before commencing work, all trees and shrubs, which are to be saved, must be protected from damage by the placement of fencing, flagged for visibility, or some other suitable protective procedure approved by Toys "R" Us Construction Manager. No work may begin until this requirement is fulfilled. .2 In order to avoid damage to roots, bark, or lower branches, no truck or other equipment shall be driven or parked within the drip line of any tree, unless the tree overspreads a paved way. .3 The contractor shall use any and all precautionary measures when performing work around trees, walks, pavements, utilities, and any other features either existing or previously installed under this Contract. .4 The Contractor shall adjust depth of earthwork and loaming when working immediately adjacent to any of the aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining walks and pavements, and damage in general to any existing or newly incorporated item. .5 Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be covered with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent injury to the plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the plants. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or storage shall be cause for rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such protection shall encompass the entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled, or are in temporary storage. 2010 SSBS Renovation .6 Where excavating, fill, or grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are to remain, the work shall be performed as follows: .1 TRENCHING: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, the tree roots shall not be cut, but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by careful hand digging and without injury to the roots. .2 RAISING GRADES: When the existing grade at tree is below the now finished grade, and fill not exceeding 16 inches is required, clean, washed gravel graded from 1 to 2 inches in size shall be placed directly around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18 inches and finish approximately 2 inches above the finished grade at tree. Install gravel before any earth fill is placed. New earth fill shall not be left in contact with the trunks of any trees requiring fill. Where fill exceeding 16 inches is required, a dry laid tree well shall be constructed around the trunk of the tree. The tree well shall extend out from the trunk on all sides a minimum of 3 feet and to 3 inches above finish grade. Coarse grade rock shall be placed directly around the tree well extending out the drip line of the tree. Clean, washed gravel graded from 1 to 2 inches in size shall be placed directly over the coarse rock to a depth of 3 inches. Approved backfill material shall be placed directly over the washed gravel to desired finished grade. .3 LOWERING GRADES: Existing trees in areas where the now finished grade is to be lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Roots as required shall be cut cleanly 3 inches below finished grade and scars covered with tree paint. .4 Trees marked for preservation that are located more than 6 inches above proposed grades shall stand on broad rounded mounds and be graded smoothly into the lower level. .5 Trees located more than 16 inches above proposed grades shall have a dry laid stonewall, or other retaining structure as detailed on the plans, constructed a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk. Exposed or broken roots shall be cut clean and covered with topsoil. 1.4 SAMPLES .1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor, before ordering or purchasing materials, to provide samples of those materials to the Landscape Architect for approval, if so requested. .2 The Contractor is to submit certification tags from trees, shrubs, and seed verifying type and purity. 1.5 QUALITY OF PLANTS .1 Plant shall in all cases conform with requirements of the American Standard for Nursery Stock latest versions of rules and grading adopted by the American Nursery and Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -2 Landscape Association (ANLA), but upgraded to meet the following additional requirements. .2 Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of selected specimen quality, exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry. All plants shall have a normal habit or sound, healthy, vigorous plants with well - developed root system. .3 Plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. .4 Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. .5 Trees with abrasion of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots or fresh cuts of limbs over 1 -1/4 inches which have not completely callused shall be rejected. .6 All plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have a normal habit of growth and be legibly tagged with the proper name. All plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the site of the project under construction or have been acclimated to such condition for at least 2 years. .7 The root system of each shall be well provided with fibrous roots. All parts shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, well branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. .8. All plants designated ball and burlap (B &B) must be moved with the root systems as solid units with balls of each firmly wrapped with burlap. The diameter and depth of the balls of earth must be sufficient to encompass the fibrous root feeding systems necessary for the healthy development of the plant. No plant shall be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding it roots has been badly cracked or broken preparatory to or during the process of planting. The balls shall remain intact during all operations. All plants that cannot be planted at once must be heeled -in by setting in the ground and covering the balls with soil or mulch and then watering. Hemp burlap and twine is preferable to treated. If treated burlap is used, all twine is to be cut from around trunk and all burlap is to be removed. .9 The trunk of each tree shall be a single trunk growing from a single unmutilated crown of roots. No part of the trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal trees of the same variety. .10 The thickness of each shrub shall correspond to the trade classification "No. 1 ". Single stemmed of thin plants shall not be accepted. The side branches must be generous, well twigged, and the plant as a whole well branched to ground. The plants must be in moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises or other root or branch injuries. 1.6 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING .1 Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. .2 Shrubs shall meet the requirements for spread, height or container size stated in the Plant List. The measurements are to be taken from the ground level to the average height of the shrub and not to the longest branch. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the trees (measured from the crown of the roots to the tip of the top branch) shall be not less than the minimum size designated. .3 Caliper measurements shall be taken at a point on the trunk 6 inches above natural ground line for trees up to 4 inches in caliper, and at a point 12 inches above the natural ground line for trees exceeding 4 inches in caliper. .4 If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the upper half of the range specified. .5 The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and, where pruning is required, are the measurements after pruning. 1.7 NOTIFICATION OF DELIVERY .1 Unless otherwise authorized by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours in advance of the anticipated delivery date of any plant materials. A legible copy of the invoice, showing kinds and sizes of materials included for each shipment shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect. 1.8 WARRANTY .1 The condition of all new plant materials is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. .2 Until final approval, any replacement of plant materials that may be necessary shall be at the expense of the Contractor. .3 In addition to other standard provisions, the Contractors bid amount shall also provide for the following: .1 Maintenance necessary during Establishment Period. .2 Replacement in kind, or with a substitute acceptable to the Landscape Architect, of all plant materials not in a healthy growing conditions or that has died back to the crown or beyond normal pruning limits. .3 The Contractor shall also be responsible for any damage caused by his operations and shall dispose of all rubbish and excess soils as directed. 1.9 RIGHT OF REJECTION .1 The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect and reject plants at any time and at any place. 1.10 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS BEFORE APPROVAL .1 Plant care shall begin immediately after each plant is satisfactorily installed and shall continue though the life of the contract until final acceptance of the project. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -3 .2 Care shall include, but not be limited to, replacing mulch that has been displaced by erosion or other means, repairing and reshaping water rings or saucers, maintaining stakes and guys as originally installed, watering when needed or directed, and performing any other work required to keep the plants in a healthy condition. .3 Contractor shall remove and replace all dead, defective and /or rejected plants as required before final acceptance. .4 Grassed areas damaged during the process of the work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall restore the disturbed areas to a condition satisfactory to the Landscape Architect This may include filling to grade, fertilizing, seeding and mulching. 1.11 FINAL APPROVAL .1 The Landscape Architect shall have the final approval for acceptance of the landscaping. 1.12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Construction Drawings. .2 Section 2F — Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities. .3 Section 2R - Water Distribution Systems. .4 Section 2V — Landscape Irrigation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 LOAM OR TOPSOIL .1 Work included - Place topsoil in areas designated on the drawings or as specified herein. .2 Area - All exterior ground within the limit of contract, except surfaces occupied by buildings and structures, paving, and except areas indicated to be undisturbed, shall be top soiled. .3 Placement of Topsoil - Place no topsoil until subgrade has been approved. Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones, debris, and roots. Compact topsoil to form a layer with minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 12 inches in shrub beds. Topsoil shall be placed so that after final settlement there will be good drainage (and conforming to elevations shown on drawings). Contractor is to maintain surfaces and place any additional topsoil necessary to replace that eroded before acceptance. .4 Preparation - Disk, drag, harrow or hand rake subgrade to a depth of 3 inches to provide bond for topsoil. Topsoil, which must be transported across finished walks, shall be delivered in such a manner that no damage will be done to the walks. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of such damage. .5 Topsoil - Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing the characteristics of representative top soils in the vicinity which produces a heavy growth; free from subsoil, objectionable seeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1 inch in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic substances, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. Contractor is to verify amount stockpiled and supply any additional as needed. 2.2 FERTILIZER .1 Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof place and in such a manner that it shall be kept dry and its effectiveness shall not be impaired. .2 Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash shall be based on laboratory test recommendations as approved by the Landscape Architect. For the purpose of bidding, assume 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent phosphorus and 4 percent potash by weight. At least 50 percent of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3 percent water - insoluble nitrogen. At least 60 percent of the nitrogen content shall be derived from super - phosphate containing not less than 18 percent phospheric acid or bone meal containing 25 percent to 30 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent to 3 percent nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55 percent to 60 percent potash. .3 Grass or sodded areas shall have fertilizer applied in 2 applications with a thorough watering immediately following application. The first application shall be 1 week before the seeding at the rate of 35 pounds per 1,000 square feet harrowed into the top 2 inches of seedbed. The second application shall be done at the rate of 25 pounds per 1,000 square feet, immediately following the second mowing. 2.3 PEAT MOSS .1 Peat moss shall be Michigan peat moss or approved equal in color and consistency, to be used for planting soil mixture only. .2 Peat moss shall be a moss peat, finely shredded to pass a 1/2 inch mesh and shall be no less then 90 percent organic material by weight, with an ash content by ignition of no more than 10 percent. .3 Material shall have a pH level between 4 and 5. .4 Material shall contain no less than 35 percent and no more than 66 percent moisture by weight, but shall have a water - holding capacity of 150 percent to 200 percent. .5 Material may be imported (supplied in bales) or domestic (furnished in bulk). If furnished in bulk, the material and its source must be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. .6 Peat moss shall not be used as mulch, except on ground cover. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -4 2.3 SHREDDED HARDWOOD BARK MULCH .1 Shredded hardwood bark mulch or approved equal shall be used as a 4 inch top dressing in all plant beds and around all trees planted by landscape contractor. Single trees or shrubs shall be mulched to the outside edge of the saucer. Mulch shall be of sufficient character as not to be easily displaced by wind or water runoff. 2.4 STAKING MATERIAL .1 Stakes shall be 2 inches by 3 inches by 8 foot pressure treated wood. 3 stakes per tree. .2 Wire tree staking shall be pliable No. 12 galvanized soft steel wire. .3 Hose shall be 2 -ply fiber- bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2 inch inside diameter, black or green, and of suitable length. . 2.5 WATER .1 On -site water shall be furnished by the Owner. Hose and other watering equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.6 LAWN SEED .1 Lawn seed mixture shall be shall be fresh, clean new, crop seed. The Contractor shall furnish to the Landscape Architect the dealer's guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the percentage of purity and germination of each variety. 2.7 WEED MAT .1 Weed mat shall be "Dewitt Weed Barrier" or approved equal. The weed mat shall be placed under all planting areas not to be seeded, or as directed on drawings. The mat shall be covered with mulch and secured in place by a soil anchor. 2.8 STEEL EDGE .1 Steel edge shall be 1/8 inch by 4 inch interlocking steel edge, staked with metal stakes sufficiently to hold in place. 2.9 STONE MULCH .1 Install stone mulch as per plans, details, and specifications. .2 The size and color of the stone mulch should be as per the plans placed to a depth of 4 inches. .3 Adjust grades allowing for thickness of mulch by cutting or filling. Assure slight pitch away from building. Rake surface smooth and even and roll or tramp, as that subgrade is uniformly firm. .4 Lay 3 mil sheets of "Visqueen" type polyethylene, on the compacted subgrade before placing stones, minimum 2010 SSBS Renovation overlap shall be 6 inches. Perforate sheeting in plant beds before placing stone. 2.10 SOD .1 Sod shall be a species recommended by an experienced local nursery. Sod to be strongly rooted, weed - disease and past free and uniform in thickness. .2 All slopes greater than 3:1 shall be pegged to hold sod in place. 2.11 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET /FABRIC NETTING .1 Contractor shall provide and install where indicated on civil drawings "Curlex" blankets: by American Excelsior Company; "Polyjute" Style 407 GT; by Synthetic Industries or approved equal. .2 The area to be covered shall be properly prepared, fertilized, and seeded before blanket is applied. When blanket is unrolled, the netting shall be on top and the fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area. In ditches the blanket shall be applied in the direction of the flow of water, butted snugly at ends and side and stapled. On slopes, the blankets shall be applied either horizontally or vertically to the slope. Ends and sides shall be butted snugly and stapled. Staple to manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING COORDINATION .1 The Contractor shall inform the Landscape Architect of the date when the planting shall commence, and of the anticipated delivery date of the material. .2 Failure to notify the Landscape Architect in advance of order to arrange proper scheduling may result in loss of time or rejection of a plant or plants not installed as specified led or directed. 3.2 DIGGING AND HANDLING .1 Bare rooted shrubs shall be dug with adequate fibrous roots. Roots of these plants shall be covered with a uniformly thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed in moist straw, or moss. .2 Balled or burlapped plants shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to include most of the fibrous roots. .3 Roots or balls of all plants shall be adequately protected at all times from the sun and from drying winds. .4 All balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on the ground and shall be well protected with soil, wet moss or other acceptable material. Bare rooted plants, which cannot be planted immediately, shall be heeled -in upon delivery. All shall be kept moist. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -5 .5 Bundles of plants shall be opened and the plants separated before the roots are covered. Care shall be taken to prevent air pockets among the roots. During planting operations, bare roots shall be covered with canvas, hay or other suitable material. No plant shall be bound with wire or more rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break the branches. 3.3 TREES AND SHRUB PLANTING OPERATIONS .1 Planting operations shall be performed at a steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it impossible to work. No plant material shall be planted in frozen ground. .2 The Contractor shall provide sufficient tools and equipment required to carry out the planting operation. .3 All plants too large for 2 men to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with a sling. Do not rock trees in holes to raise. .4 For soil mix for plant holes, see Article 2.1 - Loam or Topsoil. .5 If rock or other underground obstruction is encountered, the Landscape Architect may require plant pits to be relocated, the pits enlarged or the plants deleted from the contract ,.6 Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated in one of the following manners: .1 Where unsuitability within the construction site is deemed by the Landscape Architect to be due to excessive compaction caused by heavy equipment or by the presence of boards, mortar, concrete or other construction materials in subgrade, and where the natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of Al or A2 (AASHTO M145), the Contractor shall loosen such areas with spikes, discing, or other means to loosen the soils to a condition acceptable by the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall also remove all debris and objectionable material. Soil should be loosened to a minimal depth of 12 inches with additional loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or organic material into the subsoil to obtain adequate drainage should he so desire. All such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental to the work and no extra payment shall be made for this part of the work. .2 Where subgrade is deemed by the Landscape Architect to be unsuitable because the natural subsoil falls into an AASHTO classification of Al or A2 (AASHTO M145) and contains moisture in excess of 30 percent, then such a condition shall be rendered suitable by installation of a sub - drainage system or by other means described elsewhere in these specifications. Where such conditions have not been known or revealed prior to planting in time and where they have not been recognized in the preparation of plans and specifications, then the Landscape Architect shall issue a change order to install the proper remedial measure, all of which shall be in addition to the contract sum. .7 Adjustments in locations and outlines shall be made as directed. In the event that pits or areas for planting are prepared and backfilled with topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations, they shall be so marked that when the work of planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, location shall be changed under the direction of the Landscape Architect without charge. .8 Holes for trees shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than the spread of the root system and at least 6 inches deeper than the root ball. .9 Holes for shrubs and vines shall be at least 12 inches greater in diameter than the spread of the root system and at least 2 feet deep. .10 To the topsoil in the backfilling of tree holes and shrub beds, there shall be added as the progress of the work permits, manure as herein specified, ground limestone if soil tests indicate it is needed, and commercial fertilizer at the rate of 3 pounds for tree up to 3 inches in caliper, 1 pound per 1 inch in caliper for larger trees, 6 ounces for small shrubs and 8 ounces for each shrub 4 feet or over. Ground limestone and manure shall be omitted in the case of acid soil plants. The manure, limestone, and fertilizer shall be thoroughly mixed with the topsoil in the planting operation, care being taken that the manure does not come in immediate contact with the roots. .11 The plants shall be planted in the center of the holes and at the same depth as they previously grew. Loam shall be backfilled in layers of not more than 8 inches and each layer watered sufficiently to settle before the next layer is put in place. Loam shall be tamped under edges of balled plants. Enough topsoil shall be used to bring the surfaces to finish grade when settled. .1 A saucer shall be provide around each plant as shown on the drawings. 2 Plants shall be soaked with water twice within the first 24 hours of time of planting. Water shall be applied with low pressure so as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging the topsoil. .3 Approved weed mat shall be placed under all areas to be covered with mulch. Secure weed mat in place with a soils anchor, then cover with mulch as directed. .4 A 3 -inch layer (after settlement) of mulch or approved equal shall be applied directly on top of weed mat to the entire area of each saucer or planting bed. 3.4 PLANT BED EXCAVATIONS .1 Excavate tree pits and plant beds to the depth indicated on the detail sheet. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -6 3.5 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION .1 Maintenance shall begin immediately after planting. Plants shall be watered, mulched, weeded, pruned, sprayed, fertilized, cultivated, and otherwise maintained and protected until provisional acceptance. Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and position, planting saucer restored and dead material removed. Stakes and wires shall be tightened and repaired. Defective work shall be corrected as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. .2 If a substantial number of plants are sickly or dead at the time of inspection, acceptance shall not be granted and the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all plants shall be extended until replacements are made. .3 All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size specified on the Plant List. They shall be furnished and planted as specified above. The cost shall be borne by the Contractor. Replacements resulting from removal, loss, or damage due to occupancy of the project in any part, vandalism, physical damage by animals, vehicles, etc. and losses due to curtailment of water by local authorities shall be approved and paid for by the Owner. ,.4 Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of 1 year after inspection and provisional acceptance. .5 At the end of the Establishment Period, inspection shall be made again. Any plant required under this contract that is dead or unsatisfactory to the Owner shall be removed from the site. These shall be replaced during the normal planting season. 3.6 SEEDING .1 Area - All exterior ground within the limit of contract, except surfaces occupied by buildings and structures and paving, except areas indicated to be undisturbed, shall be seeded or planted as shown on drawings. Furnish topsoil, finish grading, prepare seed bed, seed and maintain areas as indicated on the drawings. .2 Seed Bed Preparation - Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus direct and floating areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on grading plans. All lawn areas shall slope to drain. Where no grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls (such as walks, curbs, catch basin, elevational steps or building) and elevations shown on plans. Roll, scarify, rake and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. AD finish grades shall meet approval of the Landscape Architect, before grass seed is sown. Loosen soil to a depth of 6 inches in lawn areas by approved method of scarification and grade to remove edges and depressions. Remove stones or foreign mater over 2 inches in diameter from the top 2 inches of soil. Float lawn areas to approximately finish grades. .3 Seed beds should be permitted to settle or should be firmed by rolling before seedings are made. .4 Seeding shall not be performed in windy weather. .5 Lawn areas shall be seeded by sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of a minimum of 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Culti- packer or approved similar equipment may be used to cover the seed and to form the seedbed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to culti- packer, the seeded ground shall be lightly raked with flexible rakes and rolled with a water ballast roller. After rolling, seeded areas are to be lightly mulched with wheat straw. .6 If the project completion dated prohibits in- season planting, the Contractor shall prepare himself for out -of- season seeding or sodding so that all lawns shall be completed and ready for acceptance at time of project completion, without additional cost to the Owner. Lawn maintenance shall be the same as for other planting. .7 Lawns shall be maintained by the Contractor for at least 30 days after sodding and 60 days after seeding, or as long as is necessary to establish a uniform stand of the specified grasses, or until substantial completion of the project or until acceptance of lawns, whichever is later. .8 In the event that lawn operations are completed too late in the fall for adequate germination and /or growth, maintenance shall continue into the following growing season or until a uniform stand of the specified grasses has been established. .9 Water seeded areas twice the first week to a minimum depth of 6 inches with a fine spray and once per week thereafter as necessary to supplement natural rain to the equivalent of 1 inch or to a 6 -inch depth. .10 The surface layer of soil for seeded areas must be kept moist during the germination period. After first cutting, water as specified above. .11 Make weekly inspections to determine the moisture content of the soil and adjust the watering schedule established by the irrigation system installer to fit conditions .12 After grass growth has started, all areas or parts of areas, which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason whatsoever shall be reseeded in accordance with the plans and as specified herein. Such areas and parts of areas shall be reseeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass at no additional cost to the Owner. .13 Watering shall be done in such a manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by the Landscape Architect to assure continued growth of healthy grass. All areas of the site shall be watered in such a way as to prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid damage to the finished surface due to the watering equipment .14 Water for the execution and maintenance of this work shall be provided by the Owner at no expense to the Contractor. The Contractor shall, however, furnish his own portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, connections, nozzles, and any 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -7 other equipment required to transport the water from the available outlets and apply it to the seeded area in an approved manner. .15 Mowing of the seeded areas shall be initiated when the grass has attained a height of 1 -1/2 to 2 inches. Grass height shall be maintained between 1 inch and 1 -1/2 inches at subsequent cutting depending on the time of year. Not more than 1/3 of the grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not occur closer than 10 days apart. .16 When the amount of grass is heavy, it shall be removed to prevent destruction of the underlying turf. If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother the planted species, such vegetation shall be mowed or, in the case of rank growths, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from the area by methods approved by the Landscape Architect. .17 Protect seeded area against trespassing while the grass is germinating. Furnish and install fences, signs, barriers or any other necessary temporary protective devices. Damage resulting from trespass, erosion, washout, settlement or other causes shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. .18 Remove all fences, signs, barriers, or other temporary protective devices after final acceptance. 3.7 SOD .1 Area — Provide a 3 -foot wide strip along walks, roadways, and parking areas to prevent washing and erosion. .2 Sod Bed Preparation - Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt, stone, debris, etc. and floating areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on grading plans. All lawn areas are to slope to drain. .3 Sod shall be cut and laid on site the same day. Only healthy vigorous growing sod is to be laid. .4 Always lay sod across slope and tightly together so as to make a solid area. .5 Roll or firmly but lightly tamp with suitable wooded or metal tamper all new sod sufficiently to set or press sod into underlying soil. .6 After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly moisten by sprinkler newly sodded areas. 3.8 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT .1 Contractor shall provide Toys "R" Us with 3 written proposals due no later than the established possession date for landscape maintenance from experienced local ANLA certified nursery businesses capable of performing the work outlined herein. The proposals shall be sent to the following address: Toys "R" Us, Inc., One Geoffrey Way, Wayne, NJ 07470, ATTN: Construction Project Manager. The proposal will be for a period of 1 year and renewable in 1 year increments. Maintenance will begin immediately after 2010 SSBS Renovation final approval and acceptance of the landscaping and irrigation by the Owner. .2 Landscape maintenance shall include all necessary watering, cultivation, weeding, pruning, wound dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, replacement of dead plant material (labor only), straightening plants which lean or sag, adjustments of plants which settle or are planted too low, mowing of turf areas, replacement of mulch that has been displaced by erosion or other means, repairing and reshaping of water rings or saucers, replacement of mulch that has been displaced by erosion or subsidence, and the reseeding or replanting of those areas affected. Removal of all rubbish, waste, tools, and equipment used in the execution of the contract at the end of each work day, and any other procedure consistent with good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all plant material are also part of this maintenance contract. .3 During the first year of the maintenance contract, any replacement of plant material shall be the responsibility of the general contractor with exceptions as listed in Section 2Y, 29.3. .4 Landscape maintenance contractor shall purchase and maintain Contractors general liability Insurance in the amounts of $1,000,000 to protect him from the Contractors operations under the maintenance contract. Certification of such insurance shall be filed with the Owner prior to the commencement of the work. 3.9 WATERING .1 The irrigation system, if installed on the site, shall be used by the maintenance contractor for the watering program, but any failure of the system does not eliminate the Contractor's responsibility of maintaining the desired level of moisture necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. .2 The quality of water applied at one time shall be sufficient to penetrate the soil to a minimum of 8 inches in shrub beds and 6 inches in turf areas at a rate, which will prevent saturation of the soil. .3 On -site water shall be fumished by the Owner. Hose and other watering equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. 3.10 WEEDING .1 Maintenance contractor shall keep all planting areas free from weeds and undesirable grasses by a method and by materials approved by the ANLA. 3.11 DISEASE AND INSECT PEST CONTROL .1 Inspect all plant material at least once a month to locate any disease or insect pest infestations. Upon the discovery of any disease or insect pest infestation, identify, or have identified, the nature or species of the infestation. A method of control in accordance with common ANLA standards shall be immediately implemented. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 LANDSCAPING, SEEDING, AND SODDING SECTION 2Y -8 3.12 FERTILIZING .1 Maintenance contractor is to fertilize plant material on a regularly scheduled program to fit the requirements of the plant material to maintain vigorous and healthy plant growth. 3.13 PRUNING AND REPAIR .1 The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of transplanting operation and /or to maintain safety in vehicular use areas. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as to not change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. 3.14 MOWING .1 Mow all grass areas at regular intervals to keep the grass height from exceeding 3 inches. Mow grass areas in such a manner as to prevent clippings from blowing on paved areas, and sidewalks. Cleanup after mowing shall include sweeping or blowing of paved areas and sidewalks to clear them from mowing debris. 3.15 CLEAN UP .1 Maintenance contractor shall provide a schedule and report to store management and to the address referenced in Section 2Y that details his planned maintenance activities including any subcontractors. 3.16 GENERAL IRRIGATION .1 Landscape maintenance contractor shall maintain the irrigation system in good operating condition through periodic monthly inspections of all system components and make repairs as necessary. This includes checking and verifying operation in each zone, the alignment of heads, rain sensors, controller, and check leaks. .2 Landscape maintenance contractor shall make every effort to conserve water by adjusting the programming to allow for weather changes and growth seasons. Irrigation operations should be conducted between 2:00 A.M. and 6:00 A.M. unless the store management requests other hours. 3.17 WINTER SHUT DOWN .1 When cold weather approaches and the chance for freezing conditions exist, the system should be drained after each use. .2 Winter shut down procedure as follows: .1 Shut water off at main gate valve. .2 Open all manual drain valves. .3 Blow out each section twice with compressed air. 2010 SSBS Renovation .4 Set controller to cycle through each section the minimum time available, once a day through winter months. .5 If backflow prevention is installed with unions, remove and store out of the weather. 3.18 SPRING STARTUP .1 Spring start up procedure as follows: .1 Reinstall backfill flow prevention. .2 Close all manual drain valves. .3 Slowly turn water on. .4 Check for leaks and proper alignment of heads. .5 Repair and adjust system as required for proper operation. 3.19 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT .1 If replacement of component parts in the irrigation system becomes necessary after normal use, and after the original period of warranty has expired, Toys "R" Us (or the owner) is responsible for the expense of these replacement components, if there has been no mishandling of these items on the part of the maintenance contractor. 3.20 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT .1 These terms and conditions herein outlined shall be attached and made a part of a contract with Toys "R" Us, Inc. (or the owner). 3.21 TERMINATION OF THE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT .1 If the owner (or Toys "R" Us, Inc.) fails to make payment for a period of 90 days without written clarification, the maintenance contractor may, upon 12 additional days' written notice to Toys "R" Us, Inc., One Geoffrey Way, Wayne, NJ 07470, ATTN: Construction Project Manager, terminate the contract and recover from Toys "R" Us payment for all work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, or tools, including reasonable profit applicable to the maintenance contract. .2 If the maintenance contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the maintenance contract, Toys "R" Us, Inc. After 12 days written notice to the maintenance contractor, and without prejudice to any other remedy they may have, may make good such deficiencies and deduct the cost thereof, including compensation for additional services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the contractor, or at their option, may terminate the contract. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE LIGHTING SECTION 2Z -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Exterior luminaries and accessories, underground conduit, wiring, and terminations. .2 Poles and foundations. .3 Component installation and system testing. .4 Underground conduit, wires and controls to illuminated pylon sign. Coordinate circuit requirements with owner. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ,1 Section 2F - Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for utilities. .2 Section 3A - Concrete: Foundations for poles. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI), latest edition. .1 ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps - Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. .2 ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast - Lamp Frequency Lamp Ballast. .3 ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High- Intensity- Discharge and Low- Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple - Supply Type). .4 ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. .5 ANSI/IESNA RP -8 - Roadway Lighting. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A595 - Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low - Carbon, Tapered for Structural Use. .2 ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .3 ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 1.4 OWNER - FURNISHED ITEMS .1 Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or in Special Conditions to the Contract, Owner will furnish lighting poles, anchor bolts, fixtures, lamps and paint for installation by General Contractor. .2 Owner will furnish and erect illuminated signage for over entry, roadside and mall entrance signs. 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE .1 The optical system specified herein shall be capable of maintaining a minimum of 1 horizontal foot - candle on areas of paved surface as measured at walking or driving surface based on a 4- fixture mounting style with Type V vertical lamps optics at a mounting height of 42 feet and a pole spacing of 190 feet. .2 Lighting Layout shall produce maximum to minimum uniformity ratio of not more than 5 to 1 and average to minimum uniformity ratio of 2.2 to 1 in accordance with IESNA visual comfort and lighting safety recommendations. .3 All point -by -point photometric performance test grids shall be based on the following criteria: .1 Maintenance Factor - 0.75 .2 Mounting Height = 42 feet. .3 Grid = 10 feet. Centers all points between 4 poles (484 points). .4 Initial Lumens = 40,000 (each of 4 lamps /poles). 1.6 WARRANTY .1 Provide owner with 1 -year warranty certificate signed by Contractor and by company providing actual warranty labor. Owner must receive this certificate prior to final payment. 1.7 SUBMITTALS: EACH SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTED FOR APPROVAL SHALL CONTAIN .1 Computer prepared photometric layout of proposed lighted area, which indicated by isofootcandle reading the system performance. .2 A photometric report from a national Independent testing laboratory with report number, date, fixture catalog number, luminaire and lamp specifications; IESNA classification, candlepower tabulations, zone lumen summary and isolux plot. .3 The Underwriters Laboratory listing and file number for the specific fixture(s) to be utilized. .4 Pole manufacturer AASHTO calculations indicating the pole and anchor bolts being submitted are capable of supporting the pole and fixture systems being utilized in accordance with specifications. .5 Catalog cuts providing complete conformance to specifications. 1.8 SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE .1 Toys AR@ Us reserves the right to request standard production model fixture samples for inspection and to order such test as Toys AR@ Us deems necessary to insure compliance with these specifications and to .reject those luminaries failing such tests, or those luminaries with improper or inadequate light distribution. Toys AR@ Us shall be the sole judge as to acceptability. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Poles: 1 piece, 39 feet 0 inches long, round, tapered at 0.14 inch per foot, single, uniform thickness, US domestic steel having a guaranteed minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi after fabrication complying with ASTM A595, Grade A, Steel with seamless appearing longitudinal weld. Erected poles and anchor bolts shall be capable of supporting maximum vertical and horizontal loads exerted on the completed structure in accordance with the latest AASHTO edition meeting the requirements of 120 mph winds with a 1.3 gust factor. The pole shall have a 4 inch by 6 inch reinforced hand hole located approximately 18 inches above base plate and grounding lug welded to interior of pole opposite hand hole. Poles shall be factory primed inside and outside and delivered to jobsite with an adequate amount of No. DU313 Dark Bronze or No. DU314 Black paint to provide 2 coats of paint totaling 5 mils thick. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE LIGHTING SECTION 2Z -2 .2 Pole Base Plates: The base plate shall be fabricated from a commercial quality, hot - rolled carbon steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36 having a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. The base plate shall telescope the pole =s shaft and be circumferentially welded top and bottom. The base plate shall be slotted to accommodate a +/- 1/2 inch variation in the nominal bolt circle. .3 Anchor Bolt Supply 4 anchor bolts with each pole. Anchor bolts shall be 1 -inch minimum diameter hot - rolled domestic steel bar complying with ASTM A36 (modified) and have minimum guaranteed yield strength of 55,000 psi and shall be 36 inches long with additional 4 inch hook at 90 degrees totally galvanized. Each anchor bolt shall be supplied with 2 galvanized hex -nuts per ASTM A307, 2 galvanized flat washers, 1 galvanized lock washer and 1 die -cast nut cover with a 1/4 inch stainless steel, hex -head, self tapping screw. .4 Fixtures: Fabricate fixtures form formed or extruded aluminum only. Assemble to form weatherproof and bug - proof unit. Each fixture shall bear the UL label for wet location and shall have an Architectural Class I anodized finish or an Owner approved baked -on polyester finish. Color shall be No. DU313 Dark Bronze or No. DU314 Black. Injected silicon used as a weatherproofing seal shall not be directly exposed to sunlight and shall not be the sole means to prevent water intrusion. Lens frame shall be mitered, extruded anodized aluminum with stainless steel spring loaded latches and hinge pins. Tool -less access is required to optic changer and ballast. Lens doorframe shall be essentially watertight with a memory retentive extruded silicon rubber gasket. Lens shall be heat tempered glass of polycarbonate material. Bolts shall be hardened domestic steel. Fixture arm shall have an internal extruded bolt channel guide and an integral handhold with a cover for the field wiring connections. .5 Fixture Optical Assembly: 1 universal fixture housing shall be capable of containing the following general optical systems without modification and each optical system shall be field interchangeable and rotatable in 90 degree increments without the use of tools: .1 Type I - Optics that produce a longer narrower light pattern that concentrates Tight distribution equally on both sides of luminaire. .2 Type III - Optics that produce an asymmetrical light pattem that directs 2/3 of the light in front of the luminaire. .3 Type V - Horizontal Lamp - Optics that produce a symmetrical square light pattern about the luminaire. ,4 Floodlight - Optics that will sharply confine any backlight behind the pole. The patterns shall be in the forward direction. .5 Type V, Vertical Lamp - Optics that produce a symmetrical square light pattern about the luminaries with a maximum of 7 percent of the total output lumens above the 75 degree cutoff line. .6 Optics are based on square light distribution patterns with the other optical patterns used to off actively cover odd - shaped areas. Optical assemblies that produce a round light distribution pattern are not acceptable. All optics with the exception of Type V vertical lamp shall have no more than 3 percent of total output lumens above the 75 degree cutoff line. .7 Toys AR@ Us shall be the sole judge regarding acceptability of optical system performance. 2010 SSBS Renovation .6 Ballast and Ballast Housing: Premium type ballast that will provide power for only 1 metal halide lamp; capable of providing reliable Tamp starting at temperatures as low as - 20 degrees Fahrenheit and shall have a power factor in excess of 90 percent regulating type minus 10 percent lamp power regulation with +/- 10 percent variation from 480 volt, single phase, input voltage. Ballast assembly shall be easily accessible and removable with quick disconnects to the reflector. .7 Lamps: 400 watt, 40,000 lumen, 20,000 hour, clear super metal arc manufactured by Sylvania: .1 Horizontal Mounted Lamp: Sylvania No. MS 400 /HOR. .2 Vertical (Base -up) Mounted Lamp: Sylvania No. MS 400 BU. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 SIZING .1 Size wiring feeders to parking lot lights in accordance with the following table which is based on 480 volt, 400 watt metal halide lamps, maximum circuit amperage and a 5 percent maximum voltage drop to farthest fixture. There shall be no more than (15) 400 -watt metal halide lamps per 20 -amp circuit. There shall be no more than (10) 400 -watt metal halide lamps on the 10 -amp circuit with roadside sign. .2 Wire Size Schedule: Use the following wire sizes for corresponding distances form panel: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 600 feet: No. 8 1000 feet No. 6 1600 feet No. 4 2400 feet No. 2 For circuit distances of more than 2400 feet, size conductors for a 5 percent maximum voltage drop to farthest fixture. .3 Drawings indicate (2) 480 volt, single phase, 20 amp circuits for parking lot lights. If more circuits are required to comply with Site Lighting Plan and Specification requirements, Contractor shall furnish and install necessary additional breakers, contactors, photocells, etc., under this Section. .4 Underground circuits shall have equipment - grounding conductors sized in accordance with NEC (No. 10AWG minimum). .5 Parking lot lighting conduit shall be sized in accordance with NEC (3/4 inch minimum). 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install pole foundations in accordance with details shown on drawings. Install poles on concrete foundations in accordance with detail shown on drawings as part of electrical work. 3.3 TESTING .1 Perform and record voltmeter measurements as described in Division 16. In addition, provide labor, material, and energy to conduct a parking lot light test at least 30 days prior to Substantial Completion date. This test shall consist of continuous operation of fixtures and lamps for a time period of 100 hours. Contractor shall witness and certify Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 2 SITE LIGHTING SECTION 2Z -3 the continuous operation and time duration of the test. At the end of the testing period, immediately request warranty parts and replace defective components at least 3 ,days prior to Substantial Completion date. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CONCRETE SECTION 3A -1 .1 Refer to drawings for extent and locations of all concrete work. Verify conditions and requirements of the job. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, altemates, and substitutions. .4 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition. .1 ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. .2 ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. .3 ACI 212.3R - Chemical Admixtures in Concrete. .4 ACI 214 -77 - Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. .5 ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. .6 ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. .7 ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. .8 ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. .9 ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. .10 ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. .11 ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. .12 ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. .13 SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual. .14 ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. .15 ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement. .3 ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Reformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. .5 ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate. .6 ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. .7 ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. .8 ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. .9 ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. .10 ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. .11 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .12 ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. .13 ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. .14 ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. .15 ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. .16 ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .17 ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. .18 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. .19 ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 feet ft- Ibf /ft3). .20 ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. .21 ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. .22 ASTM E154 -88 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. .23 ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspections of Materials Used in Construction. .24 ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining FE Floor Flatness and FL Floor Flatness Numbers. .25 ASTM E1643 -98 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. .26 ASTM E1745 -97 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. .27 ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -2 .3 CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. .4 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Design Handbook. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Include all labor, materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of concrete work and all related work incidental to the completion thereof, as shown on the drawings, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. Concrete work includes: .1 Concrete, reinforcing and formwork for foundations, pilasters, slabs, sidewalks, stairs, curbs, gutters, all site work concrete, foundations for light standards and signs, foundation pads for equipment, etc. .2 Installation of anchor bolts for steel columns, posts, and other anchored work as may be required. .3 Grouting of column bases. .4 All anchor slots, sleeves, and other inserts as required. .5 Shop drawings. .6 Vapor retarder under all interior concrete slabs on grade. .7 Granular subbase beneath slabs on grade. .8 All dowels from concrete into masonry walls. .9 Concrete fill for metal pan stairs. .10 All other items required to make the work of this section complete including staking for layout of footings, building layout, excavation, backfilling, etc. .11 The contractor is responsible for ensuring that the sub grade preparation, vapor retarder installation, concrete mix design, concrete placement, finishing, curing and protection of the interior floor slab is such that the slab in areas to receive finish flooring meets the moisture vapor emission rates and PH limits as identified in Section 9E 3.1. Furthermore the Relative Humidity of the concrete should not exceed 75 %. Procedures for remediation of conditions that do not meet the above criteria will be the responsibility of the Contractor and need to be submitted to the BRU PM and Architectural Consultant for approval. Products proposed for remediation must be shown to be compatible with the flooring material and adhesives. Cost of remediation, if needed, will be responsibility of the Contractor. .12 The contractor shall conduct a pre -pour meeting for interior floor slabs to review with all necessary subcontractors and suppliers the requirements needed to install, cure and finish the slabs. The contractor shall require his vapor barrier supplier attend meeting to review vapor barrier installation procedures with representatives from owner's independent testing agency, concrete subcontractor, and general contractor. The contractor is required to document the meeting and copy the BRU PM and architectural consultant with minutes of meeting. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Installation of special concrete floor finishes for interior concrete floor slabs specified in Division 3 Section. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Installation of stair nosing and pipe handrails specified in Section 5E - Miscellaneous Metals. .3 Installation of resilient flooring specified in Section 9E - Resilient Flooring. .4 Installation of carpeting specified in Section 9F - Carpeting. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit steel shop drawings well in advance of placement. Show all details of construction, bending and placing, completely dimensioned. .2 Submit concrete mix designs for review by the Project Manager well in advance of concrete placement. Concrete mix design submittal shall include all strength data necessary to show compliance with the strength requirements of this specification for either the trial batch method or the field experience method and shall be certified by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .3 Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall this review relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for strength of concrete, general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 4. Submit product data on curing compound used for concrete. Indicate location for use per plans and specifications. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of concrete work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Concrete materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all concrete work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all concrete work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -3 .6 The Contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for 2 years after completion of the project Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall conduct preplacement inspections as necessary to determine that .1 Formwork has been constructed to the correct dimensions and tolerances. .2 Reinforcing steel has been placed in accordance with shop drawings bearing the Project Manager's shop drawing review stamp marked either furnish as submitted or furnish as corrected, and that all reinforcing steel is properly secured and supported as necessary to prevent displacement during concrete placing operations. .3 All bearing material has been inspected and accepted. .4 Vapor Barrier has been installed properly in accordance with Section 3.9.1.4. .5 Slab sub grade preparation was done so minimum thickness of slab is achieved and reinforcing, where specified, is at proper location both during concrete pour. .3 The testing agency shall conduct concrete placement inspections as necessary to determine that: .1 Concrete has been mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. .2 No water is added to the concrete except in accordance with ASTM C94, the accepted concrete mix design and the specified maximum slump. .3 Concrete is conveyed to the place of final deposit by methods which prevent separation or loss of material. .4 Concrete is properly consolidated. .5 Concrete is finished in accordance with the project specifications. .6 All hot weather or cold weather practices as recommended by ACI are implemented as necessary. .4 The testing agency shall conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures: .1 Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. .2 Mold and cure 3 specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Any deviations from the requirements of this standard shall be recorded in the test report. .3 Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days and one shall be tested at 7 days. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the 2 specimens tested at 28 days. If 1 specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in a test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be discarded. .4 Make at least 1 strength test (3 cylinders) for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day. .5 Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143. .6 Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. .7 Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, No. 57 or larger. .2 Fine aggregate: ASTM C33. .3 Portland cement ASTM C150, Type I or II. (Fly ash not permitted.) .4 Water. Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter. .5 Admixtures: .1 Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: ASTM C494, may be used at the Contractor's option. .2 Air - Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260, for all air- entrained concrete. .3 Pozzolanic Admixtures: ASTM C618, may be used upon review by the Architect/Engineer (Fly ash not permitted). .4 Maximum chloride ion due to admixtures shall not exceed 0.1 percent by weight. .5 The addition of calcium chloride is not permitted. .6 All admixtures shall be used in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS .1 Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. .2 Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. .3 Steel Wire: ASTM A82. .4 Metal Accessories: Include all spacers, ties, chairs and other devices required to properly support and fasten reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the requirements of the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -4 2.3 FORM MATERIALS .1 Removable forms shall be wood, metal, or other approved material. .2 Forms for unexposed concrete surfaces may be No. 2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thick- ness. .3 Earth cuts may be used for forms for footings if soil conditions permit and as stated in soils report. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS .1 Vapor Retarder .1 Vapor Retarder membrane must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate - ASTM E96, 0.012 Perms or lower. b. Water Vapor Retarder - ASTM E1745, Meets or exceeds Class A. c. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) - Minimum thickness of 15 mils.. d. Manufacturer. .1 Stego Wrap 15 -mil Vapor Barrier by STEGO INDUSTRIES LLC, San Juan Capistrano, CA, (877) 464 -7834 www.stegoindustries.com. .2. Approved Equal meeting all performance criteria listed in this section. e. Seam tape, mastic and pipe boots - provide materials recommended by retarder manufacturer and providing moisture vapor transmission rate equal. .2 Premolded Filler. Non - bituminous fiber type, Type III, Homasote "300" or approved equal, or all wood fiber board with the "Homex Plus" pull off strip for joints to be flash - patched. .3 Curing Compound: L & M Cure as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., except as modified by Subparagraph 3.10.3. .4 Form Ties: Black iron snap ties with a minimum 1 inch breakback. .5 "T" Shaped Plastic Control Joint T- shaped 1/16 inch plastic strip at least 1 inch deep, with minimum 3/4 inch wide pull top stiffener and having suitable anchor to prevent vertical movement. .6 Form Releasing Agent: Non - staining. .7 Grout shall be "Crystex" by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. .8 Granular Subbase (beneath slabs on grade): Fine graded granular material conforming to the following requirements (Unless noted otherwise; refer to Geotech n ical Information): .1 Maximum Size: 1 -1/4 inch. .2 Passing No. 200 Sieve: 15 percent maximum. .3 Plasticity Index: 6 maximum. .4 Liquid Limit: 25 maximum. 2010 SSBS Renovation PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS .1 The specified compressive strength of the concrete, f'c, for each portion of the structure shall be as designated on the drawings. Strength requirements shall be based on 28 day compressive strength. .2 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air - entrained. Air content shall be between 4 percent and 8 percent. .3 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4 inches unless a high range water- reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of a high range water- reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 inches. The slump of concrete containing a high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 inches. .4 The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be more than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, 1/3 of the depth of slabs, nor 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. .5 The coarse aggregate size shall be No. 57 or larger. .6 The minimum cement content in accordance with ASTM C150 of all concrete shall conform to the following table. Specified Compressive Strength (psi) Minimum Cement (pounds per cubic yard) Non -Air Entrained Concrete 3000 470 4000 564 Content Air - Entrained Concrete 517 611 .7 Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method. Where the trial batch method is used, make 3 test cylinders for each trial batch. Break 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust proportions to produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength, f'c. .2 Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall consist of a field strength test record representing materials and proportions to be used for this project. A field strength test record shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a period of time of not less than 45 days and made within the past 18 months. .3 Concrete mix designs shall be certified by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and retained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay for this service. 3.2 FORMWORK .1 Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -5 .2 The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. .3 Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent Toss of concrete. .4 All exposed concrete corners shall have a 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch chamfer, except as otherwise noted. .5 Form ties shall be broken off 1 inch or more back from concrete surfaces. No wire or strap ties will be permitted. Ties shall be of sizes and weights as required for pressures developed, and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Form ties for exterior walls and grade beams shall be leakproof "waterseal type." .6 Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non- staining releasing agent, applied before the reinforcing steel is placed. .7 Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling the concrete surfaces. .8 All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed in them. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT .1 Fabrication: .1 Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown. .1 Bends shall conform to bend dimensions defined as standard in accordance with details in the ACI Detailing Manual - SP -66, and /or CRSI Design Handbook, unless otherwise shown. .2 Bars shall be bent cold, and shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. .3 Bars shall be fabricated within the tolerances shown in the ACI Detailing Manual - SP -66 and /or CRSI Design Handbook. .2 Welding as an aid to fabrication and /or installation will not be permitted except as specifically shown on the drawings or as authorized by the Project Manager. .2 Placing .1 Position reinforcement to 1/4 inch ± in accordance with placement plans. .2 Unless noted otherwise, reinforcing shall be placed so that the minimum concrete cover shown on the drawings is provided. .3 It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement. Tie bars at intersections with soft steel wire. .4 Lap splices of reinforcing shall be as called for on the drawings. .5 Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap all bars at all corners and abrupt changes in direction of walls. Provide steel dowels between footings and walls, pilasters, columns and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings and /or as conditions require. .6 Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcement. .7 Provide (2) No. 5 bars around all openings in slabs and concrete walls, and at all re- entrant corners in floor slabs. .8 Reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent. .9 Iron worker to remain on job during concrete placing to correct misplacement of reinforcement. .3 Cleaning and Protection: .1 Protect reinforcement from excessive rusting or mechanical injury. Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least 6 inches above ground. .2 After bars are tied in place take whatever precautions are necessary to protect bars from damage by construction equipment or workmen. Pay particular attention to bars projecting out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. 3.4 JOINTS .1 Construction Joints .1 Provide construction joints as required by the drawings, specifications, and job conditions. Provide 1 -1/2 inch deep key at joint. All reinforcement shall be continued across joints, unless noted otherwise. Remove all Iaitance from joints prior to placing adjoining concrete. .2 Provide construction joints in walls at a maximum spacing of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .3 Construction joints in slabs on grade are intended to function as formed control joints. See drawings for details. Locate construction joints in slabs on grade at locations shown on the drawings. For exterior slabs on grade the maximum spacing between construction joints shall be 20 feet. Construction joints in interior slabs on grade shall be flash patched with low viscosity mortar. .2 Control Joints .1 Locate control joints in interior slabs on grade as shown on the drawings. .2 Locate 1 inch deep scored control joints in sidewalks as shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing of scored joints shall be 8 feet. .3 Isolation Joints .1 Locate isolation joints at all columns and where exterior slabs or sidewalks abut vertical surfaces and elsewhere, as shown on the plans or as job conditions require. .2 Locate isolation (expansion) joints in sidewalks at locations shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing between isolation joints in sidewalks shall be 32 feet. .3 Locate isolation (expansion) joints in curbs at a maximum spacing of 20 feet. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -6 .4 Premolded filler for isolation joints shall be 1/2 inch thick. .5 Isolation joints that will be covered with floor covering shall be flash patched with low viscosity cement mortar. 3.5 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE .1 Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. The ready -mixed concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, 1 for the Contractor and 1 given to the Owner's Representative, for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the delivery ticket shall include the quantities of all material batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket. .2 For job mixed concrete, mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for 1 -1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum. For batches larger than 1 cubic yard, mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. .3 The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job. .4 In cold weather, the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least 50 degrees F. .5 In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing, or flake ice or well - crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or cold joints are encountered. When air temperature is between 80 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 3.6 PLACING .1 Preparation for Placing Concrete .1 All bearing material shall be inspected by the independent testing agency prior to placement 9f concrete. The independent testing agency shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material. .2 Before concrete is placed, all debris and ice shall be removed from the spaces to be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus form releasing agent from the contact face of forms. Forms and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of ice or other coatings. .3 Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground. .4 Notify all trades concerned and the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of the scheduled time for concrete placement to permit installation of all required work by other trades. .5 Before placing concrete, all required embedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, inserts, curb angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosings and accessory devices for mechanical and electrical installations shall be properly located, accu- rately positioned, and built into the construction, and maintained securely in place. .6 Build into construction all items furnished by the Owner and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets, slabs, chases and recesses as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to maintain the intended slab thickness at embedded items. .7 Set anchor bolts furnished under the structural steel section of these specifications. .8 Place and properly support reinforcing steel. .2 Conveying .1 Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent separation or loss of material. .2 Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery without separation of material. .3 Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete. .3 Depositing .1 Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over 3 feet from truck, mixer, or buggies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the bars. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete be used. .2 When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section is completed. .3 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechanical vibrators during the placing operation and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners of the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only under experienced supervision. Vibrators shall not be secured to forms or reinforcement. Compaction shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete. Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations. .4 Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage and splashes. Hardened or partially hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately. .5 All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of the concrete, 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -7 and before beginning a new run of concrete all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the surfaces. .6 The superintendent or foreman in charge of concrete work shall mark on the drawings the time and date of the placing of the concrete in the different areas and members. Location of concrete batches from which concrete test cylinders are made shall also be recorded on these drawings. Such drawings shall be kept on file at the job until its completion and shall be subject to the inspection of the Owner's Representative at all times. 3.7 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS .1 Surface defects, including tie holes, shall be repaired immediately after form removal. .2 All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete. If chipping is necessary the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. No featheredges will be permitted. The area to be patched and an area at least 6 inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand passing a No. 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the consistency of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surface. .3 The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials and of approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. .4 After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hour before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for 7 days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed. .5 After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, all tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar. 3.8 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES .1 After removal of forms all concrete surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished with a rough form finish and all surfaces exposed to view shall be finished with a smooth form finish. .2 For a rough form finish, tie holes and defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the forms. .3 For a smooth form finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. 3.9 SLABS .1 Preparation of subgrade for slabs on grade. .1 The bearing material shall be inspected by the independent testing agency prior to placement of all slabs on grade. The independent testing agency shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material. .2 The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. .3 Place granular subbase to thickness shown on the drawings and compact to a minimum of 98 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture per ASTM D698. .4 Install vapor barrier over granular subbase in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643 -98. Unroll Vapor Barrier / Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. Lap vapor Barrier / Retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instruction. No penetration of the Vapor Barrier / Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier / Retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. .5 The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing it shall be raised and maintained above 50 degrees F, long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade. .2 Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds. .3 Placement .1 Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on the subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straightedged, and darbied or bull floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on the surface. .2 To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete. .3 Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved means. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -8 .4 Concrete Floor Finishes .1 General: All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line and free of defects or blemishes. Plane trueness tolerance shall comply with the provisions of Subparagraph 3.9.4.1. Finished concrete slabs that contain defects exceeding this tolerance shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. No driers, dry cement, nor cement -sand mixture shall be used, in connection with any floors scheduled to receive an applied floor finish or surfaces finished in order to absorb water, stiffen mix or for any other purpose. .1 Site Tolerances — Floor Flatness and Levelness: .1 Explanation of Tolerances: Local flatness is controlled by Flatness F- number (FF) which limits curvature of slab over distance of 2 feet. Local levelness is controlled by Levelness F- number (FL) which limits inclination of slab surface over distance of 10 feet. Overall conformance to design shall be controlled by grade tolerance which limits maximum deviation of slab surface from design grade. Overall value for flatness, levelness, and tolerance band shall be met and evaluated across each area designated to be tested. .2 Conduct measurements of required surface tolerances within 24 hours or prior to stripping of forms, whichever is sooner, and submit report to Architect and Construction Manager within 72 hours. .3 Evaluate conformance to flatness and levelness tolerances in accordance with ASTM E1155 and ACI 117. .4 Construction Manager reserves the right to further verify FF and FL values prior to the commencement of floor tile installation. .5 Surface Tolerances Required: Specified Overall Value (SOV) Flatness F- Number - FF(35) Levelness F- Number - FL(30) Tolerance Band ±0.375 inch Minimum Local Value (MLV1 - FF(25) - FL(22) .6 Surface Tolerances Along Joints: Slab level along joints shall be flush and shall vary no more than 1/8 inch total vertical variation along a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge. Measure at 21 days after placement. .7 Surface Tolerances Perpendicular to Joints: Slab level perpendicular to joints shall vary no more than 1/8 inch total vertical variation along a 10 foot -0 inch straightedge, with the center of the straightedge held at the joint. Measure at 21 days after placement. .8 Remediation: Floor surfaces not in compliance with the above, for whatever reason including but not necessarily limited to slab curling, shall be remediated by grinding. .2 Finish All interior floor slabs shall receive a troweled finish and shall be flattened and leveled using the laser screed method only. .2 All metal pan stairs, exterior stairs and sidewalks shall receive a light broom finish. .3 All exterior slabs except stairs and sidewalks shall receive a rough broom finish. 4 Floated Finish - After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc float shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, check floor flatness and levelness per Subparagraph 3.9.4.1. Slab shall be adjusted as necessary and refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture. .5 Troweled Finish - The surface shall first be float - finished as specified above. It shall next be power troweled, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after power floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be plane per the provisions of Subparagraph 3.9.4.1. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding. .6 Light Broom Finish - The surface shall first be trowel finished as specified above. Immediately after final troweling, it shall be given a light transverse texture by drawing a broom across the surface, unless noted otherwise. .7 Rough Broom Finish - Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish as specified above, it shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface, unless noted otherwise. 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION .1 Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. Minimum period for wet curing shall be 7 days. Minimum period for total curing shall be 45 days. .2 Except when a curing compound is used, interior slabs shall be wet cured by one of the following procedures applied immediately after completion of placement and finishing: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -9 .1 Ponding or continuous sprinkling. .2 Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet. .3 Application of sand kept continuously wet. .4 Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 degrees F or mist spray. .5 Application of waterproof sheet materials, conforming to ASTM C171. .3 For slabs (except when wet curing is used) and for other concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, apply curing compound immediately after completion of placement and finishing. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. Likewise, for areas scheduled to receive applied flooring, wet curing shall be used. Contractor's Option: Curing compound may be used provided that the product is guaranteed by its manufacturer to have no adverse effects upon the flooring systems to be installed Thereon, that the curing compound is applied in full compliance with the manufacturer's current published instructions, and that its use has been coordinated with and approved by the Finish Flooring Contractor. Curing compound product data shall be submitted under the provisions of Article 1.4, with copies being sent to the CPM and APM. The Curing compound shall not seal the surface of the slab to where the moisture vapor emission of the concrete exceeds the recommended level recommended by the finished floor manufacturer. .4 Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal apply curing compound in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. .5 Temperature, Wind, and Humidity .1 Cold Weather. When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 40 degrees F, the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for 7 days. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. .2 Hot Weather. When necessary, provision for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Rate of Temperature Change: Changes in temper- ature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 degrees F in any 1 hour or 50 degrees F in any 24 hour period. .6 Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction equipment, materials, or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self- supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to overstress the concrete. 3.11 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE .1 Test results for standard molded and standard cured test cylinders shall be evaluated separately for each specified concrete mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with the specifications. .2 For evaluation, each specified mix design shall be represented by at least 5 tests. .3 The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, fc, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength, fc, by more than 500 psi. Should cylinder tests fail to meet these requirements or if deficient construction is suspected by Owner's Representative, core tests may be required and the cost of such tests shall be paid by the Contractor. .4 Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be used to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. .5 Where core tests are required, cores at least 2 inches in diameter shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C42. The cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F, relative humidity Tess than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. .6 At least 3 representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Project Manager so as least to impair the strength of the structure. If, before testing, 1 or more of the cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from the structure, it shall be replaced. .7 Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of and if no single core is Tess than 75 percent of the specified strength, fc. .8 Core holes shall be filled with low slump concrete or mortar. 3.12 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE .1 Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification. .2 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3A -10 .3 Completed concrete work which fails to meet 1 or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected by the Owner's Representative. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining work complies with the requirements. .4 The cost of any additional tests or analysis, including additional architectural and engineering services, performed to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 3 CONCRETE PATCHING SECTION 3B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS' .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, alternates, and substitutions. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition. .1 ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Replacement. .2 ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Reformed and Plain Billet — Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .3 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment required for completing concrete work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Patching of existing concrete surfaces. .2 New concrete slabs, etc. .3 All other concrete work indicated on the drawings as required. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301, except as modified by the Supplemental Requirements below. 1.5 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Concrete shall have a 28 day compressive strength and density, in accordance with the following: .2 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4 inches unless a high range water- reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of all high range water- reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 inches. The slump of concrete containing a high range water- reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 inches. .3 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained. Air content shall be between 4 percent and 8 percent. .4 The minimum portland cement content in accordance with ASTM C150 shall be 470 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. Fly ash is not permitted. .5 Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615, GR60, unless noted otherwise. .6 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. .7 Concrete Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3: EXECUTION NOT USED. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 STRENGTH DENSITY psi PCF EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS 4000 145 ALL OTHER CONCRETE (U.N.O.) 3000 145 .2 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4 inches unless a high range water- reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of all high range water- reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 inches. The slump of concrete containing a high range water- reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 inches. .3 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained. Air content shall be between 4 percent and 8 percent. .4 The minimum portland cement content in accordance with ASTM C150 shall be 470 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. Fly ash is not permitted. .5 Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615, GR60, unless noted otherwise. .6 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. .7 Concrete Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3: EXECUTION NOT USED. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, altemates, and substitutions. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition. .1 ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements and Commentary for Masonry Structures. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .2 ASTM A82 - Standard Specifications for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .3 ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .4 ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. .5 ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .6 ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .7 ASTM A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. .8 ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold - Rolled Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy and High- Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability. .9 ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. .10 ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. .11 ASTM C270 - Standard Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry. .12 ASTM C476 - Standard Specifications for Grout for Masonry. .13 ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone. .14 ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .15 ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 2010 SSBS Renovation .16 ASTM C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Mortars (using 2 -inch cube specimens). .17 ASTM C1107 - Standard Cement Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (non- shrink). .3 Cast Stone Institute (www.caststone.org) .1 All applicable standards and specifications. .4 National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) .1 TEK 7 -1A: Fire resistance rating of concrete masonry assemblies. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing masonry work, and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). .2 Masonry walls have been designed to span vertically as simple spans from floor to roof and are dependent upon the completed roof structure, metal roof deck, and completion of all masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces, the contractor is solely responsible for providing all necessary bracing as required for construction loads, for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until the entire structure is complete. The shoring shall not rely on any moment resistance capacity of the footings. .3 This section specifies a non - shrink, high precision, extended flow, cement -based grouting material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .3 Concrete Block Strength Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification, signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, that all concrete block to be used for this project complies with the requirements of ASTM C90, Type 1 and has a minimum net area compressive strength of 1900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. .4 Submit samples approximately 4- inches x 4- inches x fl- inches of concrete block for integrally colored and architectural or customized units. Provide samples of matching custom color mortar. After Owner /Project Manager review and acceptance of block and mortar samples, the contractor shall erect a sample panel (3 -feet x 3 -feet) showing block, joints and workmanship. Do not proceed with the manufacture of the custom concrete block units until Owner approval of sample panel is received. .1 Note: Unless specifically requested, no samples are required for standard gray, smooth face concrete block. .5 Where stone sills are required, provide sample sized approximately 6- inches long. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -2 .6 Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of masonry work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Masonry materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all masonry work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification, in a form acceptable to local authority and Owner's Representative, signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all masonry work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The Contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of all masonry work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work and for 2- years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall verify compliance with design drawings and specifications and keep a record. Tests and inspections may include, but are not necessarily limited to: .1 Quality and testing of masonry units and materials for mortar and grout .2 Prism tests for each size and type of unit, one test in advance of construction and one test for each 5,000 - square feet of wall area during construction. Prisms shall be ungrouted. Prism strength shall be 1500 -psi minimum at 28 days, unless noted otherwise. .3 Proportioning, mixing, and consistency of mortar and grout .4 Laying, mortaring, and grouting of masonry units and masonry structural elements. .5 Condition, grade, size, spacing, and placing of reinforcement. .6 Any significant or unusual construction loads on completed masonry structural elements. .7 General progress of work. .3 When the ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F or rises above 100 degrees F, a complete record shall be kept of weather conditions and of preconditioning and protection given to masonry materials, and protection and curing of completed work. 1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Masonry units shall be sound and free of chips and major cracks which would impair the strength or permanence of the construction. .2 Masonry units shall be kept dry during delivery and while stored at the site. Protect units with waterproof coverings to minimize moisture absorption. .3 Store masonry units on level platforms permitting air to circulate under stack. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS .1 Size: Manufacturer's standard sized units with nominal face dimensions of 16- inches long by 8- inches high (15-5/8 - inches by 7 -5/8- inches actual), unless otherwise shown. Thickness to be as detailed. .2 Obtain masonry units from 1 manufacturer, of uniform texture, size and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. Units shall be delivered to the job site with insulation inserts installed, if applicable. .3 Provide special shapes where shown and where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. .4 Custom Units: .1 Refer to drawings for color and location of integrally colored units (i.e., white, brown, gray, beige, etc.). .2 Refer to drawings for type and location of architectural or customized units (i.e., smooth, split -face, fluted, scored, ribbed, slump, etc.) .3 Where indicated, provide units called out by manufacturer and catalog number or approved equal. .5 Grade and Strength .1 All masonry units shall be normal weight block conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1 unless lightweight alternate is requested by TRU APM. .2 Net area compressive strength of concrete masonry units shall be not less than 1,900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140, unless masonry prisms are made. Prism strength shall be 1500 -psi minimum at 28 days, unless noted otherwise. .6 Wherever a fire- resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit masonry construction (4 -hour, 3 -hour, 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -3 and similar designations) comply with the requirements for materials and installation established by the National Concrete Masonry Association TEK 7 -1A and other governing authorities for the construction shown. .7 Integrally colored units shall have integral water repellant (refer to drawings for locations). 2.2 MATCH EXISTING .1 Where indicated that masonry is to "match existing," visit the site and verify type, color, texture, etc., of existing units to be matched. Provide matching units as approved by the Owner's Representative. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS .1 Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S. .2 For job site pigmented mortar use mineral pigments, and with exception of carbon black limit to 10 percent of cement content, and carbon black to 1 -1/2 percent of cement content. Where masonry cement is used, limit color pigments to 1/2 of preceding percentages. Color pigments shall be comparable in quality to material manufactured by Davis Colors, Los Angeles, California. .3 Premixed colored masonry mortar shall match integrally colored block. .4 Admixture: Liquid water repellent admixture is manufactured by Grace Construction Products, "Dry Blok" mortar admixture. Added direct to mortar mix per manufacturer's requirements and all applicable ASTM standards. .5 Mortar shall have integral water repellant when used with masonry which has integral water repellant. 2.4 GROUT .1 Grout shall conform to ASTM C476. .2 Non - shrink Grout: Grout shall be prepackaged, nonmetallic, nongaseous expansive grout containing a balanced blend of washed and graded aggregates, portland cement, plasticizing agents and a proprietary shrinkage compensating system. .1 Non- shrink grout shall be used as a setting bed for lintels and miscellaneous beams. 2.5 REINFORCING BARS .1 Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. 2.6 JOINT REINFORCING .1 Continuous wire reinforcing (joint reinforcing) shall be ladder type fabricated units with a single pair of 9 gauge side rods and 9 gauge continuous cross rods fabricated from cold drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, and galvanized to conform to ASTM A641, Class 1. .2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for joint reinforcing include the following: Dur -O -Wall Company Heckmann Building Products, Inc. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.7 ANCHORS, TIES, AND METAL ACCESSORIES .1 Anchors, ties, and metal accessories shall conform to the following requirements where applicable: .1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, 16 -gauge minimum, galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. .2 Structural Steel: ASTM A36 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. .3 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. .4 Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304. .2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for anchors include the following: Dur -O -Wall Company Heckmann Building Products, Inc. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.8 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, FINISHES, AND RELATED ITEMS .1 Masonry Cleaner. "Vana Trol" as manufactured by PROSOC, Inc. .2 Moisture proofing: "Prime A Pell 200," as manufactured by Chemprobe Coating Systems, L.P., Garland, Texas 800/760- 6776. .1 Moisture proofing with low VOC content. Use "Prime A Pell Plus" clear coating by Chemprobe Coating Systems, L.P. .3 Masonry Cell Foamed Insulation: .1 General: Product to be multi - component system which when combined with compressed air forms a hardened plastic foam fully filling the cells of the masonry units. Injection into wall to be through mortar joints under quality supervision. Installer to be licensed and certified by the manufacturer and shall comply with manufacturer's guarantee requirements and all applicable codes and standards. .2 Properties: Product to have R -value at 32 degrees F of approximately 5.0 -per inch, be noncombustible with a flame Class 1 rating, no thermal drift, acoustical properties in the 45 STC range for 8 -inch wall assembly, biodegradable, non ozone depleting and suitable for retrofit as well as new construction. .3 Materials: The following manufacturers are to be used as specified product. .1 Core -Fill 500 Foam Insulation Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. P.O. Drawer 4186 Hickory, NC 28603 Phone: (828) 322- 6512 or (800) 627 -1687 Fax: (828) 322 -7688 Email: www.core- fiII500.com .2 Polymaster Foamed -in -Place Insulation Polymaster, Inc. 10431 Lexington Drive Knoxville, TN 37932 Phone: (423) 966 -3005 or 1- 800 - 580 -FOAM (3626) Fax: (423) 675 -3300 Email: www.polymaster.com 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -4 .4 Premolded Joint Filler. Expanded or molded polystyrene foam thickness and width to suit Joint in which used minus depth necessary for caulking work. .5 Premolded Control Joint Gaskets: .1 Gasket shall be of natural or synthetic rubber, solid section ASTM D2240, not less than 70 durometer, regular or wide flange as shown or required. .2 Gaskets shall be cross shaped in section similar to regular flange type designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral masonry stability, as manufactured by Dur -O -Wall Company. .6 Concealed Masonry Flashing and Adhesive (thru -wall or spandrel beam flashing): Flexible vinyl sheet formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof, black color, 20 -mils thick unless otherwise indicated. Use specific types and adhesives recommended by manufacturer for parapets, spandrel beams, door and window flashing and foundation flashing. 2.9 STONE SILLS .1 Cast stone sills consisting of white portland cement, aggregates, reinforcing, etc., with a smooth texture finish. Stone sills to be consistent in texture and color and free of chips and cracks. Joints in sills to be determined by best industry standards for maximum allowable lengths. .2 Provide all anchors, fasteners, dowels, etc., for a complete and finished installation as shown on drawings. .3 Sills to be as shown on drawings with a 3/8 -inch mortar setting bed. Mortar to be white in color. All mortar mixes and applications to be per ASTM C1364 for cast stone application and installation. .4 Fabricator. Member of the Cast Stone Institute. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Make layout in accordance with construction drawings. .2 Remove Iaitance, loose aggregate, and anything that may prevent mortar from bonding to foundation. .3 Do not proceed with masonry construction, unless permitted in writing by the CPM when the following foundation tolerances are not met .1 Horizontal Alignment (Variation from plan dimension) .2 Vertical Alignment (Variation from level) +1 -in. in 10 -ft. 1/2-in. max. variation +1/4-in. in 10 -ft. V2-in. max. variation .4 Mortar (cold weather) - When temperature is less than 40 degrees F, comply with requirements of the Masonry Industry Council, "MIC" - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. .5 Mortar (hot weather) - Use acceptable hot weather precautions in placing and curing of the mortar when air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F and when there is a drying wind at temperatures above 90 degrees F. 3.2 PLACING MASONRY UNITS .1 Construct masonry with experienced personnel, using manufactured masonry units and materials necessary to hold units in desired position. There shall be an experienced foreman on the job at all times. .2 Thickness: Build walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single -wythe walls to actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. Use concrete units that are sound, dry, clean and free from ice and frost when placed. .3 Cut masonry units with motor driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. 4 Dampening of concrete units before or during construction shall not be permitted unless made necessary by unusual conditions and approved by the Construction Project Manager. .5 Adjust each unit to final position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic. Remove any unit disturbed after mortar has stiffened, and relay with fresh mortar. .6 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to provide a continuous unobstructed opening not less than 3 inches x 4 inches. .7 Pattern Bond: Lay all block in the bond pattern shown or if not shown or specified in a running bond pattern with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. Do not use units with less than 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. .8 Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement- type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less- than -half- size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. .9 Lay -up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. .10 Where indicated, inner wythe of front wall to receive graphics and exterior wall to receive paint, ceramic tile or exterior insulation and finish system shall be carefully and accurately laid to a flush, true and plumb plane with tooled joints. .11 Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course, do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. .12 Built -in Work .1 As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. .2 Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with grout. .3 Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK .4 Nonbearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height to underside of structure above, unless otherwise shown. .13 Temporarily brace walls to provide stability during construction, until structure is complete. .14 Temporarily shore masonry to provide support during construction, until structure is complete. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT .1 Preparation: .1 Place all reinforcement for masonry in accordance with project documents. .2 Use metal reinforcement at time of placement, which is free of mud, oil, or other coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. .3 Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both may be used provided the minimum dimensions, including height of defor- mations, and weight of wire brushed specimens are not less than required by applicable ASTM standards. .4 Do not use metal reinforcement with kinks or unrequired bends. Do not straighten nor repair bars in a manner that will damage the bar or adjacent construction. .2 Fabrication: .1 Fabricate bars without damaging the materials. .2 Bending of bars. .1 Perform bending on unheated bars, unless otherwise acceptable. .2 Bars larger than No. 5 shall not be field bent unless acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .3 The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for stirrups, shall not be less than the values listed below except that for Grade 40 bars in sizes No. 3 to No. 11 inclusive, with turns not exceeding 180 degrees, the minimum diameter shall be 5 bar diameters. MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND (Grade 40 Bars not included) Bar Size Minimum Diameter #3 through #8 6 bar diameters #9, #10, and #11 8 bar diameters .4 Inside diameter of bend for stirrups shall not be less than 4 bar diameters. .3 Standard hooks - Use one of following: .1 A 180 degree turn plus extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than 2- 1 /2 -in. at free end of bar. .2 A 90 degree turn plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters at free end of bar. .3 For stirrup anchorage only, either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters but not less than 2 -1/2- inches at free end of bar. SECTION 4A -5 .4 Welding - Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted. .5 Joint reinforcement: .1 Reinforcement of 2 or more deformed longitudinal wires weld connected with cross wires, forming a ladder design. .2 Make out -to -out spacing of longitudinal wires 2- inches less than the nominal width of the wall or wythe. .3 Space welded contacts or cross wires with each longitudinal wire not more than 16- inches on center. .4 Provide joint reinforcement in flat sections 10- feet to 20 -feet long, except that factory formed corner reinforcements and other special shapes may be shorter. .6 Anchors and ties - Fabricate anchors and ties in 1 of the following ways: .1 Wire mesh ties shall be No. 16 -gauge minimum 1/2 -inch mesh steel wire, 12 -inch minimum length and 1 -1/2- inches Tess than the nominal width of wall. .2 Rigid steel anchors at intersecting walls shall be 1 -1/2 x 1/4 x 24 inch minimum with ends turned up 2 -inch minimum and shall conform to ASTM A36. .3 Dovetail anchors shall be sheet steel 0.06 -inch minimum thickness, 1 -inch wide, and turned up 1/4 -inch at outer end. .4 Corrugated or crimped metal ties, shall be sheet 0.03 -inch minimum thickness, 7/8 -inch wide, 6- inches long. .5 Wire ties shall be joint reinforcement. .7 Placing- reinforcing bars: .1 Embed bars in grout and provide a minimum masonry cover not less than the following: .1 Minimum 2- inches where exposed to earth or weather. .2 Minimum 1 -1/2- inches where not exposed to earth or weather. .2 Make splices in bars as shown on project drawings unless otherwise acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .3 Provide clear distance between horizontal bars in layer not less than the diameter of the bars, nor 1 ", except that they may be bundled in pairs. .4 Provide clear distance between vertical bars not less than 1 -1/2 times the bar diameter, nor 1 -1/2 -inch, except that they may be bundled in pairs. .5 Lay horizontal bars as work progresses, as noted on plans. .6 Hold vertical bars in hollow unit masonry in place at 200 bar diameters or 10 -feet maximum on 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -6 center whichever is lesser, unless noted otherwise. .8 Placing Joint Reinforcement: .1 Place masonry joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face -shell mortar beds and are embedded in mortar or grout for their entire length with minimum cover of 5/8 -inch when exposed to weather or earth and 1/2 -inch at other locations. .2 Place factory fabricated sections at corners and wall intersections, unless otherwise acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .3 Unless noted otherwise, joint reinforcement shall not be continuous through a control joint or an expansion joint. .4 Lap the ends of joint reinforcement 6- inches for deformed wire and 12- inches for plain wire when spliced. .5 Space Continuous Horizontal Reinforcing as Follows: .1 For multiwythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but not more than 16- inches o.c. vertically. .2 For single -wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16- inches o.c. vertically, unless otherwise shown. .6 Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1 -foot - 0- inches wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8 inches apart, both immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2 -feet - 0- inches beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. .9 Placing Anchors, Ties, and Metal Accessories .1 Install required anchors, ties, and metal accessories as the masonry construction progresses. .2 Set bolts and inserts vertically in the top of the walls, pilasters, beams or columns 3 -inch minimum from any face in masonry 7- inches or more in thickness, and at the center line in thinner masonry sections. .3 Adjust shelf angles as required to keep the masonry level and at required elevation. Provide anchorage as detailed in the project documents. .4 Hold all metal accessories to masonry by firmly embedding anchorage into grout or mortar, 3- inches minimum. 3.4 MORTAR .1 Mixing Mortar - Mix all cementitious materials and aggregate in mechanical mixers for a minimum period of 3 to 5 minutes, after all materials are placed in the mixer, with the amount of water required to produce the desired workability. Allow hand mixing only when acceptable. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Make workability or consistency of mortar on the board such that it can be worked with the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on scaffold at all times. .3 Do not permit mortar to stand more than 1 -hour without remixing. .4 Discard mortar, which has begun to set or is not used within 2 -1/2 -hours after initial mixing. Retemper mortar, which has stiffened due to evaporation to restore its workability. .5 Mix colored mortar to produce uniform color throughout. Mix trial batches, dry, and establish the color by sample panels. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS .1 Place hollow units with full mortar bedment in all courses of piers, columns, pilaster, in starting courses on footings and solid foundation walls, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with grout or concrete. In other cases provide cross web bedding when required. .2 Place hollow units with head joints tightly mortar bedded for a minimum depth from each face equal to the masonry unit face shell thickness. .3 Make horizontal and vertical face joints 3/8- inches thick unless otherwise required. Shove vertical mortar joints tight. .4 Tool mortar joints in exposed exterior surfaces when thumbprint hard with a concave jointer unless otherwise required. Point joints tight in unparged masonry below grade. .5 Remove mortar protrusions extending more than 1/2 -inch into cells or cavities to be grouted. .6 Fill horizontal joints between top of masonry partitions and underside of slabs or beams with mortar unless otherwise acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .7 Provide joints for sealing on the exterior face at control joints and at other locations where sealed joints are indicated. Rake joints and tool smooth and uniform to depth of 3/4 -inch, unless otherwise required or accepted. .8 In temperatures exceeding 100 degrees F, do not lay out mortar beds ahead of placing of units. Use a very light fog spray, not sufficient to penetrate the masonry, on vertical surface of masonry to aid in mortar curing during first 24- hours after placing units. .9 Do not insert through wall flashing or other elements which stop bond in masonry joints between mortar and masonry units, unless otherwise acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .10 Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. .11 Clean mortar spatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. 3.6 ADJOINING CONSTRUCTION .1 Anchor or bond masonry and walls and partitions at points where they meet or intersect by one of the following methods: Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 4 UNIT MASONRY WO RK SECTION 4A -7 .1 Lay 50 percent of units at the intersection in masonry bond with alternate units having a bearing of not less than 3- inches on the unit below. .2 Anchor the intersection by metal ties, joint reinforcement, or anchors as acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .3 Anchor interior non -load- bearing walls at intersection, at vertical intervals of not more than 2 -feet on centers, with metal ties embedded at least 4- inches into the masonry, or as acceptable to Construction Project Manager. .4 Where courses of meeting or intersecting walls are carried up separately, use acceptable method of bonding or keeping separate at the intersection. .2 Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following or as shown on the drawings. .1 Provide an open space not less than 1/2 -inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep own space free of mortar or other rigid materials. .2 Anchor masonry to structural steel members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise shown. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16- inches o.c. vertically and 32- inches o.c. horizontally. .3 Anchor masonry furring to backing with anchors or ties by embedment at least 1 -1/2- inches into facing and backing. Space ties not farther apart than 24- inches vertically, nor 36- inches horizontally. 3.7 CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS .1 Provide control joints and expansion joints as required, and construct by using special control joint units, open end stretcher units, metal sash jamb units and control joint filler, or abutted standard units, and preformed gaskets, compressible material, building paper and caulking or sealants as indicated on drawings or as required. .2 Make control joints and expansion joints weather tight at exterior walls. .3 See Section 7G "Joint Sealants" for various joint sealant requirements. .4 Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 40 -feet - 0-inches o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30 -feet - 0- inches o.c. if not reinforced. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work as directed by Construction Project Manager. 3.8 BOND BEAMS .1 Construct bond beams of one or more courses of load bearing units filled with concrete or grout and reinforced. Use continuous reinforcement unless otherwise indicated. .2 Provide custom unit bond beams to match adjacent block color and texture, if required, where shown on the drawings. 3.9 GROUT FOR MASONRY .1 General: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Set reinforcing steel and anchors in required position and secure against displacement before grouting is started. .2 Mix all cementitious materials and aggregates for a minimum period of 5 minutes. After all materials are placed in the mixer with the amount of water required to produce the desired consistency. Place in cores and /or collar joints while fluid and before initial set has taken place. Puddle or vibrate grout into place. Place grout in such a way as to prevent segregation of materials. Pour grout fluid enough to flow into all crevices of grout spaces leaving no voids. .3 Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. .4 For grout pours exceeding 4 feet in height, provide cleanouts not less than 3 "x3" at the bottom of all vertical cores to be grouted and at vertical intervals not exceeding 4 feet apart. All cores to be grouted shall be inspected to be free of debris and excess mortar or other obstructions, and bar positioners placed to hold reinforcement in place prior to the cleanouts being closed prior to the grout pour. .5 Use metal lath, mortar, or special units to confine grout to area required. Do not use materials, which may inhibit bond or are combustible. .6 Use acceptable cold weather precautions in placing and curing of grout when temperature is less than 40 degrees F. .2 Minimum Grout Space: In hollow unit masonry construction, vertical cores to be grouted shall have minimum clear dimensions of 3 inches x 4 inches. .3 Construction Protection: .1 Do not permit water or foreign material to fall in grout space while grout is being placed and curing. .4 Cleanup: Remove misplaced grout immediately and clean affected areas. 3.10 LINTELS .1 Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. .2 Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1 -foot - 0- inches are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide formed -in -place masonry lintels. Temporarily support formed- in -place lintels. .3 Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 reinforcing bar for each 4- inches of wall thickness and of a size number not less than the number of feet of opening width. .4 For hollow masonry unit walls, use specially formed U- shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout. .5 Provide minimum bearing at each jamb of 4- inches for openings less than 6 -feet - 0- inches wide, and 8- inches for wider openings. .1 Clean surfaces of dirt, dust and debris. .2 Maintain substrate in a saturated condition for 24- hours prior to grouting. Surface shall be "saturated surface dry" at time of grout installation. .3 Construct forms to be liquid tight. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -8 .4 Place grout mixture rapidly and continuously to prevent air entrapment. 3.11 FLASHING OF CONCRETE MASONRY WORK .1 Wall Flashing: .1 Surfaces to receive flashing shall be smooth, dry, and free from projections. .2 Install flashings in walls where and as shown on drawings. Apply the material in one layer and spot bond to masonry with a heavy cold applied asphaltic mastic. Laps shall be not less than 6- inches and sealed with a full coating of bonding material. Where material turns up it shall be fully coated and bonded. Where anchors, ties, or other materials penetrate flashings, the holes shall be carefully waterproofed with the bonding material. .2 Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work shown to be built into masonry work. 3.12 REPAIR POINTING AND CLEANING .1 Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. .2 Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints at corner, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. Cut at defective joints and repoint. .3 Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each days work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Clean wall surfaces with prepared masonry cleaner in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check to confirm manufacturer's recommendations for use on integrally colored concrete block. .4 Remove mortar splatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. .5 After completion of all work, this contractor shall remove all scaffolding and surplus masonry supplies from construction site. 3.13 LIQUID WATER REPELLENT .1 Installer. A firm with not less than 3 -years of successful experience in application of water repellents of types required on substrates similar to those of this project. .2 Job Conditions: .1 Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with the written recommendation of manufacturer), when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F, or when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months, or when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F are predicted for a period of 24 hours or earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet from rainfall or other moisture sources or when substrate is frozen, or at surface temperature of less than 40 degrees F. .2 Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which water repellent is to be applied, and advise 2010 SSBS Renovation Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. .3 Preparations for Installation: .1 Clean substrates of substances, which might interfere with penetration /adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellent manufacturer's instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. .2 Coordination with Sealants: Where feasible, delay application for water repellents until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. .3 Mask off areas, which receive paint, special coating, ceramic tile, or exterior insulation and finish system to ensure that no liquid water repellent is applied on these areas. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. .4 Installation: 3.14 .1 .1 Apply moisture proofing, in a uniform, 1 coat saturation type spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. .2 Apply moisture proofing with low VOC content for locations where regulations limit the VOC content of coatings. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION Step back unfinished work for joining new work. Before laying new work, remove loose mortar and clean exposed joint. .2 Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings and other damage during construction. .3 Remove misplaced mortar and grout immediately and clean affected areas. .4 .5 Protect face materials from staining. Keep masonry units dry. Keep the top of masonry construction covered with a waterproof covering when work is not in progress. .6 Temporarily brace masonry against horizontal loads until cured and permanently braced. 3.15 ACCEPTANCE OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION .1 Completed masonry work, which meets all applicable requirements, shall be accepted without qualifications. .2 Completed masonry work, which fails to meet one or more requirements, must be brought into compliance in an approved manner or may be rejected or accepted by the Construction Project Manager. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DIVISION 4 UNIT MASONRY WORK SECTION 4A -9 .3 The masonry work shall be clean and show a quality of workmanship and finish that conforms to the approved sample when viewed at a distance of 15 feet in average daylight, or as otherwise acceptable to the Construction Project Manager. .4 Joints shall be tooled and tight, showing no separation between mortar and units. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 5A -1 TOYS "R" US HAS ENTERED INTO A PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT WITH CANAM STEEL THAT ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL (INCLUDING JOISTS, JOIST GIRDERS, DECK, TEK SCREWS, BEAMS COLUMNS, ROOF OPENINGS, ROOF HATCH OPENINGS, FIELD MATERIAL, FIELD BOLTS, ERECTION DRAWINGS AND SHOP DRAWINGS) WILL BE PROVIDED AS PART OF CANAM STEEL'S CONTRACT. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL COORDINATE THE EXTENT OF HIS WORK WITH THE TOYS "R" US PROJECT MANAGER. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), latest edition. .1 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303). .2 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC 360). .3 AISC Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. .4 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC 341) and Supplement No. 1. .2 American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition. .1 AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. .3 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. .2 ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .3 ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Forms and Shapes. .4 ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Blocks and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. .5 ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .6 ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. .7 ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. .8 ASTM 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi yield strength. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Supply all labor, materials and appliances as necessary to perform all operations in connection with the fabrication and delivery of structural steel complete and in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. Structural steel work includes: .1 Design of structural steel connections. .2 All structural steel including columns, beams, girders, column base and cap plates, joist and beam bearing plates, angles and channels. .3 Framing for all openings in metal deck. .4 Connection plates, angles, bolts and electrodes for welding work. .5 Framing and supports for mechanical equipment. .6 Shop painting. .7 Shop drawings. .8 Furnishing of anchor rods and templates. Installation of anchor rods shall be by the Concrete Contractor. .9 Connections for steel joist girders and steel joists to structural steel. .10 Deck edge angles, connection angles, and anchors for connecting steel framework to masonry and light gage construction. .11 All other items required to make this section complete. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, alternates, and substitutions. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As Required by Job Conditions) .1 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. .2 Steel Joists - Section 5C. .3 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D. .4 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. .5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. .6 Painting - Section 9H. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to the architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Construction Project Manager (CPM) for review prior to fabrication. .2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. .3 Prepare in accordance with applicable standards and specifications listed in this section. .4 All structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 5A -2 .5 Submit shop drawings prepared under supervision and bearing the seal of a registered Professional Engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld. Furnish erection drawings referencing erection marks to shop detail- drawing numbers. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor rods and other anchorages to be installed by others. Type of fasteners shall be clearly shown for all members. .6 Fabricator's erection drawings and shop details shall clearly show the design loads of the connections designed by the fabricator. .7 The fabricator's Engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all connections. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .4 Connection Design Certification: Submit connection design certification stating that all structural steel connections have been designed in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and AISC specifications. Connection design certification shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .5 Mill Orders: Furnish 1 copy of any mill orders made for this project to the Project Manager, independent testing agency and the Owner at the time order is sent to manufacturer. .6 Mill Test Reports: Submit mill test reports to the Project Manager, independent testing agency, and Owner for all steel used in this project .7 Welder Certifications: Submit welder certifications to the Project Manager, independent testing agency, and the Owner showing compliance with AWS D1.1 for all welders to be used on this project Welders must have been certified within the last 6- months. .8 Connection Design Calculations: Design calculations for all connections not specifically detailed on the design drawings, prepared under the direct supervision of a registered professional engineer, shall be submitted with the shop drawings. Calculations shall clearly show load and design criteria and shall be completed in accordance with the appropriate AISC criteria. Calculations will be reviewed by the SER for compliance with applicable project criteria. All calculations shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer registered in the state where the project is located. .9 Review of submittals is for review of general conformance with the design concept, including verification of the design loads. In no case shall this review relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for design, adequacy and safety of all connections, correctness of fit, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Owner may employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of structural steel fabrication. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the fabricator is located and shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Structural steel materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Architect/Engineer, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location of the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all structural steel fabrication the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all structural steel work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The Contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of all structural steel operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for 2 -years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that: .1 All structural steel has been fabricated in accordance with the contract documents. .2 All welding procedures are prequalified. .3 Welding is performed only by welders who have been certified within the last 6 months in accordance with AWS D1.1. .4 Weld quality is acceptable based on visual inspection of all welds. .5 Bolts have been installed in accordance with AISC specifications. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Structural Shapes Other Than Wide Flange and Plates: ASTM A36. .2 Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46KSI. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 5A -3 .3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (2001), Grade B, Fy = 35 KSI. .4 Bolts: ASTM A325 (2001). .5 Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. .6 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 (2001) typical, unless noted. .7 Structural Wide - Flange Shapes: ASTM A992 typical, unless noted. .8 Paint (Shop Coat): Fabricator's standard gray metal primer paint. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN .1 Unless otherwise shown or called for on the drawings, all shop connections may be either bolted or welded and all field connections shall be bolted. The fabricator is responsible for the design of all connections. Connections shown on the structural drawings are schematic and are only intended to show the relationship of members connected. Connection types indicated on the drawings shall be incorporated into the fabricator's connection design. .2 Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed to support half of the allowable uniform load on the beam, defined in the AISC beam tables, or the reaction shown on the drawings, whichever is greater. For connections not covered above, notify Engineer of Record of need for additional information. .3 Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed as "simple framing" connections (unrestrained, free ended) with the ends of beams and girders connected for shear only, and free to rotate with some inelastic, but self - limiting, deformation of connection parts, under gravity load. .4 Unless otherwise noted, bolted connections shall be designed as bearing type connections using the values for bearing type connections with threads included in the shear plane. A minimum of 2 bolts per connection must be used. .5 The fabricator is responsible for verifying the tension capacity of axially loaded members after a section is reduced for boltholes. Member size may be increased or connection plates added as required. 3.2 FABRICATION .1 Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. .2 Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence, which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. .3 Structural steel fabricator must coordinate details, provide connections and punch holes for other trades as shown on structural, architectural, electrical, and mechanical drawings. .4 Shop splicing of material will not be permitted unless each individual splice is shown on the shop drawings and is subsequently approved by the Engineer of Record. .5 Painting 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 All surfaces of steel to be painted shall be cleaned and primed according to Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC -SP -3 and as hereinafter modified. .2 Paint all structural steel items with one shop coat applied at a rate to produce a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 -mil. .3 Provide touch -up paint to match the shop primer and deliver with steel for field use. .6 Inspection: All fabrication work shall be subject to inspection by Owner's Representative and /or an independent testing laboratory. All reasonable facilities shall be made available for the inspectors at all times. Contractor shall bear costs of testing work performed by his field and shop forces necessary to insure performance of contract .7 Substitutions .1 In cases where material shown or specified is not readily available, proposed substitutions must be submitted for review by the Engineer of Record. .2 All substituted material must be of equivalent section to that specified and any additional cost due to increased weight is to be borne by this Contractor. .3 Substitutions must not interfere with Architectural, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, etc. requirements. .8 Steel shall be delivered as required in accordance with a schedule approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.3 DELIVERY .1 Furnish to Contractor all required embedded plates and other incidental items of structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry. Furnish templates and location plans for installing these items. .2 Misfits, due to shop or drafting errors, will be corrected or replaced in field at the fabricator's expense. .3 Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include erection damage, cleaning, and painting of field connections or welds, bolts, nuts, and areas adjacent to welds not primed. 3.4 ERECTION .1 The steel structure is a non -self- supporting steel frame and is dependent upon diaphragm action of the metal roof deck and attachment to the masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces. Provide all temporary supports required for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until these elements are complete and are capable of providing this support. .2 Furnish to contractor all required anchor bolts and other incidental items of structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry. Furnish templates and location plans for installing these items. .3 Thoroughly examine and check the placement of anchor bolts and any supports on which the structural steel work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects, which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of structural steel erection shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. .4 Set and shim all base plates to the elevations shown on the contract drawings. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 5A -4 .5 All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled to carry out the design as shown. Erect the steel in order of sequence and schedule as previously arranged with the Owner's Representative. .6 Use care in handling and erection to insure that steel shall not be twisted, bent or otherwise damaged, and should any difficulty be encountered, it shall immediately be reported to the Owner's Representative. No cutting of structural shapes will be done in the field without the consent of the Owner's Representative. .7 Furnish all erection equipment, power, planking, bracing, guys, bolts, shims, etc., necessary in executing this part of the work. .8 Welders shall be certified by an independent testing and inspection service. Tests for uncertified welders shall be at the expense of this contractor. .9 Misfits, due to shop or drafting errors, will be corrected or replaced in field at the fabricator's expense. .10 All steel shall be erected square, plumb and true to lines and levels. Any measures required to correct out of plumb steel columns, etc., will be at this contractor's expense. .11 Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include erection damage, cleaning and painting of field connections or welds, bolts, nuts, and areas adjacent to welds not primed. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 STEEL JOIST GIRDERS SECTION 5B -1 APART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Steel joist Institute (SJI), latest edition. .1 Standard Specifications and Load Tables. .2 Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Items in these sections are supplied by Owner, installed by Contractor and are listed for performance criteria for both the steel joist girder manufacturer and the Contractor. .2 The work required under this section consists of all steel joist girders, accessories and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and as specified. .3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, alternates, and substitutions. 1.4 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 1.5 .1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structural Steel - Section SA. Steel Joists - Section 5C. Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D. Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. SUBMITTALS Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to the architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Babies "R" Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. .2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. .3 Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, and location of all joist girders. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of joist girders. .4 Show design loads and location of loads on each joist girder. .5 All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .3 Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that all steel joist girders used on this project have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SJI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .4 Design Calculations: Design calculations for all joist girders used on this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. The Project Manager will not review design calculations. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .5 Steel Joist Institute Certification: Submit Certification from the Steel Joist Institute that the manufacturer's design of joist girders have been checked by the Steel Joist Institute and found to conform to its standard specifications and load tables. .6 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the steel joist girder manufacturer of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of steel joist girder work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Steel joist girder materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the steel joist girder manufacturer, Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all steel joist girder work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all steel joist girder work has been constructed in 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 STEEL JOIST GIRDERS SECTION 5B -2 accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the steel joist girder manufacturer or the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The Contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of all steel joist girder work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for 2 -years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that .1 Steel joist girders have been erected in accordance with the contract documents. .2 Damaged joist girders have not been installed in the work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Steel for Joist Girders: Comply with SJI specifications. .2 Shop paint: Shall conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council Specification 15 -68T, Type 1 (gray). PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN .1 Steel joist girders shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's Engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all steel joist girders. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the standard specifications for joist girders. .2 Unless otherwise noted, steel joist girders shall be designed as simply supported primary members with all loads equal in magnitude and evenly spaced along joist girder top chord. .3 Additional design loads from roof top equipment or other concentrated loads shown on the drawings shall be considered as collateral loads. These loads shall be considered in the design of the joist girders. Refer to the architectural and mechanical drawings for locations and weights of equipment. Where such loads do not occur at the panel points of the joist girder, auxiliary framing shall be added to the joist girder or the top chord shall be designed for the effects of the load. .4 Joist girders adjacent to walls shall be designed to support the total design loads without exceeding a deflection of L/360. All other joist girders shall be designed to support the design live load without exceeding a deflection of L/360. .5 When net uplift forces due to wind are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joist girders and connections of the joist girders to the supporting structure for the net uplift. 3.2 FABRICATION .1 Steel joist girders shall be fabricated in accordance with the standard specifications for joist girders. .2 Provide strutted ends of the bottom chord of sufficient strength and rigidity to restrain the lateral movement of the bottom chord. .3 Before application of shop coat, clean steel free of all foreign substances. Give all items 1 shop coat applied at a minimum rate of 1.5 -mil dry film thickness. .4 Camber all joist girders in accordance with the standard specifications for joist girders. 3.3 DELIVERY .1 Furnish to Contractor all required anchor bolts and other incidental items of structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry. Furnish templates and location plans for installing these items. 3.4 ERECTION .1 Steel joist girders shall be erected in accordance with the SJL .2 Set and shim all base plates to the elevations shown on the contract drawings. .3 Thoroughly examine the structural steel and other supports on which the steel joist girder work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects, which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of work in connection with steel joist girders shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. .4 During the construction period, the Contractor shall provide means for the adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist girder is not exceeded. .5 No other loads shall be placed on the joist girder until the steel joists bearing on the girder are in place and attached thereto. .6 Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include bare, abraded, welded and rusted areas. .7 Repair or replace all damaged joist girders. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether a joist girder can be repaired or must be replaced. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 STEEL JOISTS SECTION 5C -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Steel Joist Institute (SJI), latest edition. .1 Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series. .2 Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. .3 Standard Load Table - Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. 1.3 .1 .1 ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. SCOPE OF WORK Items in this section are supplied by Owner, installed by Contractor and are listed for performance criteria for both the Steel Joist Manufacturer and the Contractor. .2 The work required under this section consists of all standard open web joists, accessories and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and as specified. .3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, alternates, and substitutions. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As Required by Job Conditions) .1 Structural Steel - Section 5A. .2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. .3 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D. .4 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. .5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to the architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys AR@ Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. .2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. .3 Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, location, and spacing of all joists. Show bridging type, mark, method of attachment to the joists and anchorage at the ends. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of joists. .4 Show design loads on each joist. .5 All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .3 Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that all steel joists used on this project have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SJI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .4 Steel Joist Institute Certification: Submit certification from the Steel Joist Institute that the Steel Joist Institute has checked the manufacturer's design of K Series Steel Joists and found to conform to its standard specifications and load tables. .5 Design Calculations: Design calculations for all joists used on this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. The Project Manager will not review design calculations. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the registered Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .6 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design Toads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the steel joist manufacturer of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of steel joist work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. .2 Steel joist materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the steel joist manufacturer, the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all steel joist work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 STEEL JOISTS SECTION 5C -2 sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all steel joist work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the steel joist manufacturer or the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The Contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of all steel joist work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for 2 -years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that: .1 Steel joists have been erected in accordance with the contract documents. .2 Damaged joists have not been installed in the work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Steel: Comply with SJI specifications. .2 Bridging: Comply with SJI specifications. .3 Shop Paint: Conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications (SSPC) 15 -68T, Type 1 (gray). PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN .1 Steel joists shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's Engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all steel joists. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's Engineer with the Engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the standard specifications for open web steel joists, K- Series. .2 Unless otherwise noted, steel joists shall be designed as simply supported, uniformly loaded trusses with the top chord braced against lateral buckling. The uniform design load shall be the total safe uniformly distributed load as shown in the SJI standard load table. .3 When net uplift forces due to wind are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joists, bridging and connections of the joists to the supporting structure for the net uplift. A single line of bottom chord bridging must be provided near the first bottom chord panel points whenever uplift due to wind forces is shown on the design drawings. .4 When non - uniform or concentrated loads are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joists in accordance with Paragraph 4.1 of the standard specification for open web steel joists, K- Series. 3.2 FABRICATION .1 Steel joists shall be fabricated in accordance with the standard specifications for open web steel joists, K- Series. .2 Provide extended ends, special depth ends, etc., where indicated on the drawings and as job conditions require. .3 Before application of shop coat, clean steel free of all foreign substances. Give all steel items 1 shop coat applied at a minimum rate of 1.5 -mil dry film thickness. .4 Camber all steel joists for roofs in accordance with the standard specifications for open web steel joists, K- Series. 3.3 DELNERY .1 Furnish all deck and accessories delivered to the job site in bundles clearly marked for ease of storage and layout. .2 Unloading and storage of materials shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 3.4 ERECTION .1 Steel joists shall be erected in accordance with the standard specifications for open web steel joists, K- Series. .2 Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include erection damage, cleaning, and painting of field connections or welds, bolts, nuts, and areas adjacent to welds not primed. .3 Thoroughly examine the structural steel and other supports on which the steel joist work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects, which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of work in connection with open web steel joists shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. .4 During the construction period, the contractor shall provide means for the adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist is not exceeded. .5 All bridging and bridging anchors shall be placed and joist ends fixed prior to the application of any loads. .6 Repair or replace all damaged joists. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether ajoist can be repaired or must be replaced. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5* PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS METAL ROOF DECK *SECTION 5D -1 .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards as well as SDI latest edition. .1 SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck. .2 SDI Diaphragm Design Manual 3rd Edition. .3 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Items in this section are supplied by owner, installed by contractor and are listed for performance criteria for both the metal roof deck manufacturer and the contractor, .2 Furnish and install all perimeter filler strips, closures and accessories as required, to complete the metal deck work and make it ready to receive roofing. .3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As required by Job Conditions) .1 Structural Steel - Section 5A. .2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. .3 Steel Joists - Section 5C. .4 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. .5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. .6 Finish Printing - Section 9H. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .3 Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys R Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. .2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. .3 Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, and location of all metal roof deck. Show method of attachment to the supporting structure. Show all openings for hatches, stacks, etc. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of metal roof deck. .4 Show design loads for all metal roof deck. .5 All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .4 Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that all metal roof deck used on this project and its attachment to the supporting structure has been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SDI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .5 Design Calculations: Design calculations for all metal roof deck used on this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. The Project Manager will not review design calculations. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. .6 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General .1 The Contractor (verify with TRU CPM if site testing is to be required) will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspections of metal roof deck work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5* METAL ROOF DECK *SECTION 5D -2 .2 Metal roof deck materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. .3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. .4 At the completion of all metal roof deck work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all metal roof deck work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. .5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. .6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all metal roof deck operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. .7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. .2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that .1 Metal roof deck work has been erected in accordance with the contract documents. .2 All welding procedures are pre - qualified. .3 Welding is performed by welders who have been certified within the last six months. .4 Weld quality is acceptable based on visual inspection of all welds. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Steel: Comply with SDI Specifications. .2 Accessories: Manufacturer's Standard .3 Shop Paint: Manufacturer's standard shop paint (gray). 2010 SSBS Renovation PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN .1 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the structure shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all metal roof deck. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the standards referenced in paragraph 1.2. .2 Metal roof deck shall be of configuration, depth and minimum gage as shown on the drawings and shall be designed in accordance with the SDI Specifications. .3 Metal roof deck shall be capable of supporting the uniformly distributed superimposed loads as called for on the drawings without the deflection exceeding 1/240 of the span length and without exceeding the allowable stresses specified in the SDI Specifications. .4 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the supporting structure shall be designed in accordance with the SDI Diaphragm Design Manual for the diaphragm shear shown on the drawings. .5 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the supporting structure shall be designed for a gross uplift of 30- pounds per square foot, or the gross uplift shown on the drawings, whichever is larger. 3.2 DELIVERY .1 Furnish all deck and accessories delivered to the job site in bundles clearly marked for ease of storage and layout. .2 Unloading and storage of materials shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Metal roof deck shall be erected and fastened in accordance with the SDI Specifications and the manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts. Metal roof deck shall be continuous over at least three spans. Cutting openings through the deck, which are less than 16- square feet in area and all skew cutting, shall be performed in the field. .2 Metal roof deck shall receive one primer coat of manufacturer's standard gray paint applied at the minimum rate of 1.0 -mil dry film thickness. .3 Top and bottom faces and edges of deck materials where cuts have been made shall have prime coating touched -up with a heavy coat of same material as used in shop. .4 Do not hang or support any loads from metal roof deck. .5 All deck damaged, dented or chipped during shipping or erection to render it unsightly shall be replaced at no Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 5* METAL ROOF DECK *SECTION 5D -3 additional cost to the Owner. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether metal roof deck must be replaced. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -1 .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 12 REFERENCES .1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), latest edition. .1 AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (1989). .2 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members (1986). .2 American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition. .1 AWS (D1.1) Structural Welding Code - Steel. .2 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. .3 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .2 ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. .3 ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. .4 ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .5 ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .6 ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. .7 ASTM A325 - Standard Specifications for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. .8 ASTM AS00 - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. .9 ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. .10 ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Include labor, materials, and equipment to furnish all miscellaneous metal work shown or required by the drawings and herein specified. .2 Miscellaneous metal work includes all items of miscellaneous metal not covered in other sections. All items shall be complete with minor sundry and accessory parts, anchors, fittings, etc., customarily furnished for the general type and kind of items shown or required. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following items of work. (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). .1 Inserts, bolts, screws, nuts, etc. .2 Ladders /cages. .3 Railings. .4 Bollards. .5 Frames for wall, roof, pits, skylights, roof hatch, etc. .6 Lintels. .7 Water heater mounting shelf. .8 Steel angle corner guards (if required). .9 Gondola fixture framing including channels, hanger rods, wall plates, angles, floor angles, etc. .10 Metal nosings for concrete stairs. .11 Metal stairs. .12 Gratings. .13 Wall pack covers. .14 Channel frames at overhead doors, compactor door, impact doors, etc. .15 Angles at loading dock edge. .16 Other miscellaneous metal items indicated, specified, or required. 1.4 RELATED WORK .1 Structural Steel - Section 5A. .2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. .3 Steel Joists - Section 5C. .4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D. .5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings to the architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys ?R? Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. .2 Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the contract drawings and shall show sizes of metal items, method of assembly, hardware anchorage, and connection to other work for each item of miscellaneous metal. .3 The location of all items must be given either by note or by an erection drawing. .4 Shop drawings shall also indicate by manufacturer and part number all fastening to be used. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -2 .5 When necessary, measurements given on the contract drawings must be verified at the building on surrounding work to avoid any discrepancies. .6 Detail metal work for ample size, strength, and stiffness and as directed. Detail items subject to live loads to support such loads as required by applicable codes and governing agencies, unless otherwise noted. .7 Detail metal work to receive hardware and show proper clearances or bevels. .3 Metal Stair Certification: Submit to the Project Manager for review a written certification signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located stating that all metal pan stairs for this project have been designed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable local, state, and federal code requirements. .4 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concepts. In no case shall this review relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance, or guarantees required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Structural Shapes Other Than Wide Flange, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. .2 Structural Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992. .3 Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 KSI. .4 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type 5, Grade B, Fy = 35 KSI. .5 Cast Iron: Gray iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, unless otherwise noted. .6 High strength bolts: ASTM A325. .7 Bolts: ASTM A307. .8 Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. .9 Paint .1 Shop Primer. Lead and chromate free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with FSTT -P -664. .2 Paint (Shop Coat): Fabricator's standard grey metal primer paint compatible with finish coat specified in drawing. .3 Galvanizing repair paint: High- zinc -dust content paint, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight and complying with SSPC -Paint 20. Verify usability with jurisdictional authority. .4 Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphaltic mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12 containing no hazardous materials. 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Schedule fabrication and delivery of miscellaneous metals and furnish to trades concerned all items to be built into other work. .2 Verify job dimensions before beginning fabrication. .3 Drill or punch and countersink holes for bolts and screws. Shearing, drilling, or punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces_ .4 At the proper time furnish necessary templates, patterns and items of miscellaneous metal, such as sleeves, inserts, and similar items to be built into adjoining work. .5 Unless otherwise shown, all corners shall be square and all members shall be true to length and straight. Fabricate metal work with sharp lines and angles with smooth true surfaces and clean edges. Form exposed joints to exclude water. .6 All parts exposed to view shall be thoroughly finished, presenting a neat and workmanlike appearance with surfaces ground and dressed, free from flake, rust, pitting, weld marks and other noticeable fabrication marks. There shall be no twists, bends or open joints in finished members, nor any projecting edges or corners at connec- tions. Sharp exposed edges shall be eased. .7 All parts shall be properly reinforced, braced and made thoroughly rigid and substantial. .8 Conceal fastenings where possible. Where screws or bolts are used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. .9 Fabricate nonferrous members with fastenings of same material. .10 All built up sections shall be shop fabricated and realigned after welding to true, straight section. .11 Welds shall be shop welded in so far as is practicable. Where problems of shipment, handling and installation require fabrication in sections, provide for field fitting and welding. .12 Modification of details for ease of fabrication may be made only upon written approval of the Project Manager. .13 Any member requiring a weather seal shall have continuous welds. .14 Rough Hardware, Inserts, Bolts, Screws and Nuts, etc.: .1 Unless otherwise specified, provide all bolts, screws, nuts, etc., shown or required to secure this work in place. .2 Unless otherwise specified, provide steel inserts where required in concrete to receive bolts or other fastenings. .3 Use expansion bolts when necessary for attachment to masonry. .4 Unless otherwise specified, provide all angles, plates, bolts, sleeves, and other items to be embedded in concrete as shown or required. Bolts shall not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond exposed nuts. .5 All fastenings shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. .15 Vertical Ladders /Cages .1 Ladders shall be all welded construction. Fabricate ladder with hot rolled steel rails and round steel rungs extending through the rails with connections welded. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -3 Anchor ladder at bottoms and tops and at intermediate points not over 4 -feet apart, with brackets of same size as side rails, unless otherwise detailed. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise indicated. .2 Cages: If indicated, provide steel cages around ladders, fabricated of steel bars and shapes, conforming to the details on the drawing. .16 Handrails /Guardrails: .1 Handrails shall be formed of 1 -1/2- inches I.D. standard weight steel pipe or as indicated on the drawings with joints and intersections coped, welded and ground smooth. Refer to the drawings for special details. .2 Posts shall not be over 5 -feet - 0- inches o.c. and shall have flanged brackets of malleable iron for securing ends to stair stringers and to concrete where required. .3 Wall railings shall be provided with ends returned to walls. Provide flanged brackets of malleable iron for support of ends of railings to walls, and intermediate supports not over 5 -feet - 0- inches o.c. .4 Interconnect railings and handrail members by butt welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. .1 At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. .2 At bends interconnect pipe by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as applicable, of radiuses indicated. .3 Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe, at fabricator's option. .5 Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. .6 Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 -inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. .17 Brackets Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. .1 For railing posts set in concrete provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6- inches long and with an inside diameter not Tess than inches greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. .2 Galvanized exterior steel members, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous components. Provide black steel pipe for interior work. .18 Pipe Bollards (Exterior): .1 Provide and install pipe guard bollards where shown on drawings. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe buried in concrete below grade. Fill pipe with concrete and mold cap round and smooth. Embed pipe in concrete 18- inches round (6 -inch cover on pipe) and extend below grade as shown in details. Paint pipe OSHA yellow. .19 Pipe Bollards (Interior): .1 Provide and install concrete - filled pipe bollards where shown. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe of the size shown set in pipe sleeves sized to accommodate bollard by plus or minus one inch. Sleeve shall be 12- inches deep with capped end embedded in concrete floor slab. Set bollard full depth into sleeve and provide wedges to center and plumb. Insert foam backer rod to 1 -1/2- inches below finish floor between pipe and sleeve. Fill with Por Rok grout to finish floor. .20 Loose Lintels: .1 Shall be of sizes shown on the lintel schedule, or as required for the particular location. .2 This shall include openings for ducts, louvers, grilles, convectors, etc. All lintels shall have 8- inches of bearing at each end, unless otherwise noted. .3 Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls. .21 Corner Guards: .1 Furnish steel angle corner guards to the masonry section for installation. Furnish guards with anchors for embedment into block coursing as shown. .22 Metal Stairs: .1 Fabricate and install metal stairs where indicated on the drawings, conforming to size and profile detailed. .2 Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated. .1 Stringers, Treads and Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a live load of 100 - pounds per square foot or a concentrated load of 300 - pounds at any point. .2 Handrails and Top rails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 - pounds applied at any point in any direction or a uniform load of 50- pounds per foot applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions when tested per ASTM E935. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. .3 Submit written certification signed and sealed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the structure is located, indicating compliance with all requirements. .23 Steel Frames .1 Provide steel frames for openings, knockout panels, frames, pits and other openings in floors, walls, and roofs as indicated. .2 Construct frames to profile, sizes, and lengths as shown on the drawings. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -4 .3 Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, or required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using butt joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. .4 Weld securely to structural steel where indicated. .24 Gratings: .1 Provide banded steel bar type gratings and frames over sump pit and at other locations indicated. Construct gratings of steel bars of size shown. All joints shall be mechanically interlocked, welded, or riveted as governed by the design indicated. Provide steel supporting members as indicated or required. Form gratings into sections of sizes indicated, or necessary for proper access and handling. Fasten gratings in place with steel clips or other suitable fastenings of a type that will permit removal. Gratings and fastenings on the exterior of the building and as noted shall be hot dipped zinc coated after fabrication. .25 Miscellaneous Steel Trim: .1 Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. .26 Edge Angles: .1 Provide edge angles at overhead door openings, and elsewhere as shown, fabricated of structural steel shapes consisting of 3- inches x 3- inches x 1/4 -inch and 5- inches x 3- inches x 3/8 -inch back to back. Plug weld outer angle to inner with minimum 3/4 -inch diameter welds, 4 -inch on centers of continuous weld across the top for entire width. Provide 1/8 -inch thick by 2- inches wide steel strap anchors 4- inches long at maximum spacing of 2 -feet - 0- inches and 6- inches from each end. .27 Steel Door Frames (for overhead doors and special doors): .1 Fabricate steel doorframes of steel shapes or bent plate as shown, fully welded, uniform square and true. Plug weld built up members, continuously weld exposed joints, and grind exposed welds smooth. .2 Provide adjustable steel strap anchors for securing door frames of overhead doors into adjoining masonry, using 1/8 -inch x 2 -inch straps of the length required for a minimum 8 -inch embedment, unless otherwise shown. Weld anchors to frame jambs no more than 12- inches from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than 30- inches apart. .28 Steel Plate Light Bracket: .1 At truck dock inside wall provide steel plate bracket as per details on the drawings. Expansion bolt to wall. Drill and tap to take bolts for bracket of dock light. .29 Wall Pack Covers: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 At exterior wall where indicated. Fabricate of steel bent plate, gauge, and size indicated with boltholes and anchors as required. Units shall be shop primed for field finish. .30 Stair nosings for concrete stairs. .1 Provide cast iron units with integral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicone carbide, or a combination of both. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or condition. .2 Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. .3 Manufacturer. Provide 1 of the following: .1 Wooster Products, Inc., The Curb Bar 150. .2 American Abrasive Metals Co., Type 131 -A. .3 Balco, Type T -305. .4 White Foundry Co., Type 100. .5 Apply black asphaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. 2.3 FINISHES .1 Galvanizing: .1 All items to be galvanized shall be cleaned and heat prepared and given 1 good heavy coating of galvanizing by immersing same full into the vat, allowing same to coat well all joints and surfaces before removing. .2 Galvanizing applied on product fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips shall comply with ASTM A123. .3 Galvanizing on assembled steel products shall comply with ASTM A123. .4 Galvanizing on iron and steel hardware shall comply with ASTM A153. .5 Galvanized surfaces for which a shop coat of paint is specified shall be chemically treated to provide a bond for the paint. . .6 Except for bolts, nuts, etc., all galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. .7 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL -P -21035 (Ships). .2 Shop Painting: .1 Unless otherwise specified, all steel, cast or wrought iron, except galvanized parts and parts embedded in concrete shall be prepared and painted as follows before leaving the shop. .1 All items of miscellaneous iron and steel, except galvanized items, shall be given 1 shop coat of gray metal primer, or an approved equal, applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -5 .2 Steel in contact with earth, concrete, or masonry shall be given a heavy coat of black asphaltic paint over the prime coat. .2 All paint shall be uniformly applied to produce a smooth surface free from runs, laps, streaks, spatter, brush marks, discontinuances, etc., and surfaces shall be evenly covered to the minimum thickness specified. Paint shall be well worked into all joints and open places. Contact and inaccessible surfaces shall be given 1. coat before assembling. .3 No paint shall be applied when the materials are wet, or when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, or temperature of materials is below the dew point of the atmosphere. .4 All paint shall be delivered to the shop in original, sealed containers, marked with the manufacturer's name, brand identification, and paint number. .5 After erection, spot paint, in a neat and workmanlike manner, all connections, field welds, bolts, and abrasions with the same prime paint used originally. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 General .2 Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devised and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabricators to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. .3 Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items, which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. .4 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units, which have been hot - dipped galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. .5 Field Welding: comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. .6 Steel Pipe Railings and handrails: .1 Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: .1 Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non - shrink, non - metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. OR: at Contractor's option. .2 Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5" deep and 3/4" greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with non - shrink, non - metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. .3 Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout and leave 1/8" build -up sloped away from post. For installation exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. .4 Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored tin wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. .5 Secure handrails to wall with wall bracket and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1 -1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: .6 Use type of racket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage. .7 For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. .8 For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. .9 For stud partitions use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of backing members. .7 Abrasive Nosings: Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Cast anchors into concrete. .8 Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch -up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 of these specifications. .9 For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 2 coats of galvanized repair paint. 3.3 DELIVERY .1 Furnish all miscellaneous accessories delivered to the job site in unopened boxes clearly marked for ease of storage and layout. .2 Unloading and storage of materials shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -6 END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: COLD FORMED STRUCTURAL METALS SECTION 5F -1 .1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), latest edition. .1 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members. .2 American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition. .1 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. .3 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Include all labor, materials, and equipment to furnish and install all cold rolled structural metal sections as shown on the drawings and herein specified. All framing shall be complete with fasteners, clips, plates, and accessory parts, customarily furnished for this type work. .2 The work of this section includes, but is not limited to: (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). .1 Structural light gage framing where indicated. .2 Framing for interior load bearing partitions, where indicated. 1.4 RELATED WORK .1 Structural Steel - Section 5A. .2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. .3 Steel Joist - Section 5C. .4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D. .5 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to the architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys R Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. .2 Verify job conditions before beginning fabrication. .3 The drawings shall show sizes, method of assembly and anchorages. .4 Manufacturer's Data and Certification: .1 Submit manufacturer's data for all cold rolled structural metals used in this project .2 Submit manufacturer's certification that the physical and structural properties of all cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections, and accessories meet or exceed the physical and structural properties listed by The Steel Network, Inc.. .3 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In no case shall this review relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 All cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections, and accessories shall be of the type, size and gauge shown on the plans. The physical and structural properties listed by The Steel Network, Inc., shall be considered the minimum permitted for all framing members, connections and accessories. .2 All cold rolled structural metal framing members shall be formed from corrosion resistant steel, according to ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi for 12, 14, and 16 gage studs, and 33 ksi for 18 and 20 gage studs. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION: .1 Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square with components attached in a manner as to prevent racking. .2 All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place until properly fastened. 3.2 ERECTION: .1 Prior to commencement of work under this section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that all Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 5 COLD FORMED STRUCTURAL METALS SECTION 5F -2 such work is complete to a point where this installation may properly commence. .2 Use means necessary to protect the work under this section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. .3 Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner, which will not cause distortion of the members. .4 Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed. .5 Splices in studs shall not be permitted. .6 Any material damaged during fabrication, shipment or erection shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 CARPENTRY SECTION 6A -1 PART 1: GENERAL .3 Items furnished by others or included under different sections and installed by this Contractor include: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .2 ASTM D5516 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire - Retardant Treatment Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures. .3 ASTM D5664 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire - Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire Retardant Treated Lumber. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services necessary to complete the carpentry and related work in addition to layout of this Work and installation of listed items of other sections of the specifications. Examine the drawings to determine the extent of the work and review the following criteria. .2 General Requirements .1 Furnish and install all rough woodwork, centering for masonry, rough bucks, grounds, screeds, nailing strips, etc. .2 Furnish and install all required rough hardware, such as nails, bolts, washers, anchors, etc., except as otherwise specified. .3 Distribute hardware at the building and provide and arrange temporary shelving for the storage of all hardware. .4 Lay out work described and assigned to this section of the specifications in accordance with the drawings. Carefully check dimensions. .5 Erect temporary protection for all completed or partially completed work where required to protect materials, surfaces, finishes, and equipment this includes temporary doors until hollow metal doors are delivered. .6 Examine the conditions including existing dimensions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .7 Coordinate work and cooperate with all other trades furnishing built in items to avoid delays in any work. .1 Hollow metal doors and frames (Section 8A). .2 Finish hardware (Section 8I). .3 Toilet partitions (Section 10A). .4 Toilet room accessories (Section 10B) (as noted by Owner). .5 Wall protection (Section 10D). .6 Dock bumpers and dock seals. .7 Baler (by Owner). .8 Special Doors (Section 8G). .9 Safe (by Owner). .10 Laminate for Wainscots Panels (Section 6B). .11 Wood Register Tandem, Refund and Return Goods Desk (RGD) by Owner. .12 Fixture inside and outside corners. .13 3 -D Icons and Platforms (by Owner). .14 Baby Registry/Special Order Desk and Electronics and Entertainment Counter (by Owner). .15 Perimeter Sign Hanging Track (by Owner). .16 Solid Surfacing material lavatory. .4 Items of work included but are not limited to the following list. Examine the drawings and this specification section for the extent of work. .1 Wood grounds, blocking, and other carpentry items as shown, for supporting and fastening millwork, carpentry, toilet partitions, urinal screens, grab bars, and the work of the various other sections. .2 All rough hardware including bolts, nails, screws, spikes, hangers, etc., required in connection with the installation of all materials under this section. .3 Framing including wall studs, plates, joists, etc. .4 All plywood, rough wood blocking, blocking for roof curbs, copings, and other roof wood members. .5 Front office and rear office construction. .6 Finish wood trim and cabinetwork including coat rack in break room and cabinets and countertop at front offices, break room, and office. .7 Plywood for equipment backboards as shown on drawings. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 CARPENTRY SECTION 6A -2 .8 All miscellaneous work shown on drawings but not furnished or installed by other trades. .9 Shelves and stanchions in janitor's closet. .10 Temporary construction sign (see drawings). 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Show location of blocking and supports that are to.be built into wall substrates. .1 Submit the following shop drawings: .1 Front Office details. .2 Lavatory counter tops. .3 Break Room counter and cabinets. .2 Submit the following samples: .1 Plastic laminate, 3" x 5" for each type, color, pattern and surface finish. .2 Solid surfacing material, 3" x 5" of type, color, pattern and surface finish. 1.5 TEMPORARY PROTECTION .1 Construct temporary doors, stairs, ladders, runways, barricades, and railings required in and about the building. .2 The building shall be closed with temporary doors and windows as the work progresses, and during periods of inclement weather. All unglazed windows shall be closed with 4 -mil polyethylene film in rough frames or old sash, plywood, or other suitable means. Temporary doors shall be storm tight with locks; do not fasten to finished frame of permanent door. .3 Protect well and in the proper manner with non - staining sheathing paper, all materials in construction likely to be damaged by other trades or affected by the weather. The use of nails, wire, or metal likely to rust or cause discoloration, will not be permitted. All protection must be placed immediately after materials or work is set in place, and when directed by the various trades or Construction Project Manager. .4 Guardrails shall be constructed around all shafts, wells, large duct openings, etc., occurring in the floor and roof constructions. Rails shall be of height specified by code and of substantial construction, and shall remain in place until the enclosing walls or partitions are erected and roof openings closed, at which time the guard shall be removed. .5 Comply with current OSHA regulations and standards. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL .1 Standard: For each use, comply with the Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS20, American Softwood Lumber Standard by the Department of Commerce. Nominal sizes are shown or specified; provide actual sizes complying with the minimum size requirements of DOC PS 20 for the moisture content specified for each use. .2 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown or specified. .3 Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with dry size requirements of DOC PS 20, unless otherwise specified. 2.2 FRAMING LUMBER .1 General: Where wood framing from 2- inches to 5- inches (but not including 5- inches) in nominal thickness, and 2- inches or more in nominal width is shown or scheduled; provide lumber complying with grading rules which conform to the requirements of the Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS20. .2 For light framing (2- inches to 4- inches thick and 2- inches to 4- inches wide), provide construction grade. 2.3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING .1 Structural Framing (6- inches and wider and from 2- inches to 4- inches thick), provide No. 2 grade lumber of any species of specified grade meeting or exceeding the following values: .1 "Fb" (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending). 1250 - ounds per square inch. .2 "E" (minimum modulus of elasticity) 1,700,000 - pounds per square inch. .2 General: Where lumber less than 2- inches in nominal thickness and 2- inches or more in nominal width is shown or specified, provide boards complying with dry size requirements of DOC PS 20. 2.4 BOARDS .1 Exposed boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: .1 Moisture content: 15 percent maximum. .2 For transparent finish (or natural finish), where shown or scheduled, provide the following: Any species hardwood. .3 For paint finish, where shown or ' scheduled, provide the following: No. 2 boards, birch or poplar. .2 Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following: .1 Moisture Content 15 percent maximum. .2 Species and grade: Southern Pine SPIB) No. 2 boards or WWPA (any species) construction boards. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY SECTION 6A -3 2.5 PLYWOOD .1 Standard: For each use, comply with the requirements of Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 1, Construction and Industrial Plywood, by U.S. Department of Commerce. .2 Plywood: Provide plywood as specified for the type of exposure and finish shown or scheduled, as follows: .1 For smooth plywood exposed on the interior and to receive a paint finish, provide interior type, Grade A on exposed face, Grade D on concealed face. .2 For floor underlayment, provide underlayment Grade C -D plugged. Provide sanded finish where resilient finish flooring is indicated. .3 For equipment backboards for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire retardant treated standard grade plywood with exterior glue. .3 Exterior plywood: All exterior plywood sheathing at walls, parapets, etc., as shown on drawings is to be exterior grade (Exposure 1). (Make fire treated process requirements and construction grade designations per local codes). , 2.6 PARTICLE BOARD .1 Provide particleboard complying with the requirements of the Composite Panel Association, "ANSI A208.1, standard for particleboard." Refer to control tower details for extent of particleboard application. 2.7 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENING MATERIALS .1 For each use, select proper type, size, material, and finish complying with the applicable federal specification. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS .1 Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate shall be of the thickness indicated on the drawings, and shall be of the "high pressure" type. Laminate shall be general - purpose grade with an "M" finish, in color as indicated on the drawings or as selected by the Architect. .2 Melamine Shelves and Hanging Rods (if used): Shelving shall be 1 -inch thick clear pine, 12- inches deep unless otherwise shown, and shall be supported on 1 -inch x 3 -inch wood cleats on both ends and across back. Hanging rods shall be provided where indicated. They shall be nickel - plated steel tubing similar and equal to Stanley No. V 7052 with flanges at ends securely fastened in place. Where poles are over 4 -feet long, provide center supporting brackets similar to Stanley No. 7048. Provide white finish at bracket supports. .3 Wood shelves for shall be 3/4 -inch thick interior grade plywood with 3/4 -inch solid wood edge strip, 12- inches or 18- inches deep as indicated on drawings supported by factory finish white stanchions 6 -feet - 0- inches long, 24- inches o.c. .4 Sheet metal galvanized steel 22- gauge. 2010 SSBS Renovation .5 Glass Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Dens -Glass Gold sheathing by Georgia Pacific Gypsum Corporation. 2.9 FIRE - RETARDANT TREATMENT .1 Where used in contact with or in composition of rated walls or as shown or scheduled, or otherwise required by code or local authority for framing, blocking, decking and concealed construction, comply with AWPA Specification C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood for pressure impregnation with fire retardant chemicals to achieve a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723, ASTM E84 or NFPA Test 355. Treatment formulations shall be based on ASTM D5516 and ASTM D5664. .2 Where treated items are indicated to receive a transparent or paint finish use a fire retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect bond or finish. .3 Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same fire retardant chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.10 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT .1 The following items of rough framing or finish woodwork shall be treated with "Woodlife" by Wolmar or approved equal wood preservative process: .1 Framing lumber in contact with concrete slab or grade. .2 Framing lumber in conjunction with roofing. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 WOOD FRAMING .1 Set wood framing accurately to required lines and levels. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown. Cut, join and tightly fit framing around other work. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed. .2 Anchor and nail as shown, or if not shown, comply with Nailing Schedule, 1994 UBC Table 23 -I -Q. .3 Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. .4 Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. .5 Partition framing: Space studs as indicated and double at openings. Unless otherwise indicated, make headers over openings of two -piece stud material set on edge or solid lumber of equivalent size. Bolt end studs to abutting concrete and masonry walls. Provide bearing partitions with double top plates with joints lapped 2 -feet Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY SECTION 6A -4 .6 Joists and rafters unless otherwise indicated shall bear fl- inches onto masonry and 2- inches on wood or steel. Frame openings with headers and trimmer. Carry joists, trimmers, and headers on joist hangers when framing into carrying member at the relative same level. Fire cut joist bearing into masonry. Accurately bevel cut ends of wood bridging to afford firm contact with members and nail each end with 2 nails. Keep lower end free until sub floor is in place. Metal bridging may be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. .7 Stair framing shall be spiked together. Cut rough carriages accurately to receive finish treads and risers. Provide trimmers, blocking, and other framing necessary for support of treads, risers, and railings. .8 Anchor sill plates to concrete floors with expansion bolts, 1 near each end and at 4 -foot intermediate spacing. Anchor other wood members into concrete, masonry and steel with appropriate fasteners and unless otherwise indicated, space fasteners at 4 -foot centers with a minimum of 2 fasteners per piece. Anchor bolts shall be a minimum 3/8 -inch round. Stagger end joints of wood members overlaying one another 2 -feet and lap members at corners. .9 Trim shall be installed with lengths as long as practicable and closely fitted joints. Blind nail to the extent practicable, set and stop face nailing with non - staining putty to match finish. Use screws for fastening to metal, set and stop as done for nails. Stagger and conceal joints. Cap molded work at returns and interior angles and miter at exterior corners. Shoulder flat work to reduce warping. .10 For exterior canopy, fascia/soffit and other construction attached to and projecting from the building, provide fire retardant treated blocking, framing lumber, and plywood as indicated or as required by all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances, and by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire treated lumber and plywood shall conform to Article 2.10 as specified in this section (if applicable). 3.2 ATTACHMENT AND ANCHORAGE .1 Use common wire nails, except as otherwise shown or specified. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre -drill as required. See Subparagraph 3.1.8. 3.3 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS .1 Provide wherever shown and where required for seeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Set true to line and level, plumb, with intersections true as required angle. Coordinate location with other work involved. .2 Attach to substrates securely with anchor bolts and other attachment devices as shown and as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry, anchor to form -work before concrete placement. 3.4 WOOD FURRING .1 Install plumb and level with closure strips at all edges and openings. Shim with wood blocking or incombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. .2 Furring to receive gypsum drywall: Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 -inch x 2 -inch furring at 16- inches o.c. vertically. 3.5 PLYWOOD .1 Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA). .2 Provide plywood underlayment where shown. Install underlayment just prior to laying of finish flooring. Stagger end joints between panels in relation to each other and all joints in relation to substrate jointing. Allow 1/32 -inch space between panels ends and edges for expansion and contraction unless otherwise detailed. Nail or staple in accordance with APA recommendations unless otherwise detailed. Prior to installation of finish flooring, fill damaged areas wider than 1/16 -inch, set nails 1/16 -inch or staples and screws 1/32 -inch but do not fill, lightly sand rough areas. 3.6 DOCK BUMPERS AND DOCK SEALS .1 Install dock bumpers as per the details on the drawings. Set anchor bolts into concrete as per pattern shown or drill -in 5/8" diameter "Hilti -Kwik- bolts," minimum 5- inches long. Weld angle at top of dock bumper to the edge angle at dock. .2 Install dock seals in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. Weld angle clips to steel jambs and head and fit clips into pockets within dock seals. 3.7 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN .1 Furnish and install a freestanding temporary sign back board constructed of exterior grade plywood supported on 2 x 4 wood framings and 4 x 4 wood posts set in concrete in the ground in a location shown on the site drawings and /or as directed by Owner's Representative. Contractor to mount "Decal" as per drawings. See drawings for sign detail. 3.8 GYPSUM SHEATHING .1 Install gypsum sheathing to metal framing with specified fasteners in strict accordance with sheathing manufacturer's published recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. .2 Install in as large sizes as are practical for application indicated to minimize joints and provide a smooth, flat surface to receive the finish indicated. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 CARPENTRY SECTION 6A -5 3.9 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) BONDED TO PLYWOOD .1 Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. .1 Comply with surface seal. 1/2" plywood substrate Double sided with FRP Class C interior finish Embossed 0.09" thick Color. 85 white END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: .1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, Shop Drawings, and Samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, altemates, and substitutions. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 -in. (0.84 -mm) to 0.112 -in. (2.84 -mm) in Thickness. .2 ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. .3 ASTM D5751 - Standard Specification for Adhesives Used for Laminate Joints in Nonstructural Lumber Products. .2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), latest edition. .1 ASME 818.6.1- Wood Screws (Inch Series). .3 Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), latest edition. .4 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services necessary for completing architectural woodwork and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .2 Types of architectural woodwork include the following: .1 Lavatory counter tops. .2 Office and Count Room counter tops. .3 Break Room counter and cabinets. .4 Office and Count Room shelving. .5 Shelving in Janitor Closet, Processing Room etc., as noted. .6 Wainscots. 2010 SSBS Renovation SECTION 6B -1 AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. .2 Installer Qualifications; Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm which can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Show location of blocking and supports that are to be built into wall substrates. Submit the following shop drawings: .1 Lavatory counter tops. .2 Coat rack shelf in Break Room, shelves in Janitor Closet, and Processing Room. .3 Office and Count Room counter tops and shelving. .2 Submit the following samples: .1 Plastic laminate, 3- inches x 5- inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. .2 Solid surfacing material of type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. .2 Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations, which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Conditioning: Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation and storage areas. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. .2 Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high pressure decorative laminates as indicated on finish schedule. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 6B -2 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Wood Moisture Content Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. .2 Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive other items and work. .3 Ease edges to a 1/16 -inch radius, for corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than f- inch in nominal thickness, 1/8 -inch radius for edges of rails and similar members over 1 -inch in nominal thickness. .4 Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. .5 Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with precut openings, where possible, to receive plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs, and where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with a water- resistant coating. .6 Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. .1 Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM .1 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Sections 300. .1 Grade: Custom. .2 Route or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS .1 Work Includes: .1 Lavatory counter tops. .2 Office and Count Room counter tops. .3 Office and Count Room shelving. .4 Break Room and Processing Room counter tops and shelving. .2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400. .3 Type of Top: High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): .1 Grade: Custom. .2 Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High - pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Colors, Patterns and finish schedule. .3 Edge Treatment: Same horizontal surfaces. Finishes: As indicated on as laminate cladding on .4 Type of Top: Solid Surfacing Material: .1 One -piece monolithic panel, 1/2 -inch thick with 1/2- inch backsplashes and end splashes and support bracket as shown on drawings. 2.5 UTILITY SHELVING .1 Work Includes: .1 Shelving in Janitor Closet, Processing Room, and coat rack shelf in Break Room. .2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600. .3 Shelving with Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements. .1 Grade: Custom. .2 Shelving Material: Lumber and closed grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. .4 Plastic Laminate Shelving: Comply with AWI Section 400. 2.6 WAINSCOTS .1 Refer to Floor Finish Plan and Schedules or drawings for locations, mounting layout, color, and material list. .2 Plywood: Finish grade, without warp, with dimensional stability. Lengths as designated on drawings. .3 Laminate cladding for vertical surface: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 2.7 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS .1 Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for wood screws and ASTM C954 for cold - formed metal framing screw requirements. .1 For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. .2 Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use, comply with ASTM F1667. .3 Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 2.8 ADHESIVES .1 Comply with ASTM D5751 and as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. .2 Comply with GS -36. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 6B -3 2.9 FACTORY FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .1 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. .1 Factory Finishing: The extent to which the final finish is applied to architectural woodwork at factory is Contractor's option, except factory apply at least prime /base coat to greatest extent possible prior to delivery. .2 General: The priming and prefinishing of architectural woodwork required to be performed at factory is work of this section. Refer to Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork, and for material and application requirements of prime coats for woodwork not specified to receive final finish as work of this section. .3 Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing of concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. .4 Transparent Finish for Woods: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, effect, and sheen. .1 Grade: Custom. .2 Finish: AWI Finish System TR -1 Standard Lacquer. .3 Staining: None required. .4 Sheen: Satin. .5 Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below: .1 Grade: Custom. .2 Finish: AWI Finish System OP -4 conversion varnish. .3 Sheen: Gloss. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. .2 Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates, well in advance of time substrates are to be built. .3 Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet -0 inches for plumb and level (including tops), and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. .2 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. .3 Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping, and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. .4 Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full - length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with referenced Quality Standards for joinery. .5 Tops: Anchor securely to support systems as indicated. .6 Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. .7 Wainscots: Install as designated on drawings. Provide flush joint at intersection of drywall and wainscot panel, except at rated partitions, if required. At rated partitions, offset wainscot and attach wood top trim member. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION .1 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. .2 Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. .3 Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork. .4 Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. .5 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to fabricator and installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 7 BUILDING PERIMETER INSULATION SECTION 7A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystryrene Thermal Insulation. .2 Guideline to be ASHRAE Energy Standard 90.1. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, tools, equipment, services, and labor required to completely install the building insulation indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 All insulation shall be stored so that it is protected from weather and shall be kept dry before, during and after application. 1.4 RELATED WORK .1 Acoustic batt insulation, Section 9B. .2 Batt insulation, Section 78. .3 Insulation of mechanical equipment and ducts, Division 15. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit product data for all materials specified or required in this section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Rigid perimeter insulation, polystyrene insulation board conforming to ASTM C578, Type IV and with thickness as required to achieve an R = 5.0 value (minimum). PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Installation of all insulation shall be in accord with current printed manufacturer's instructions. .2 Perimeter insulation to be installed under the floor slab (horizontally and vertically) to extent as shown on drawings. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 7 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 7B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, tools, equipment, services, and labor required to completely install the building insulation indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 All insulation shall be stored so that it is protected from weather and shall be kept dry before, during and after application. 1.3 RELATED WORK .1 Insulation of mechanical equipment and ducts, Division 15. .2 Building perimeter insulation, Section 7A. .3 Acoustic batt insulation, Section 9B. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit product data for all materials specified or required in this section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Batt Insulation: Fine fiber, flexible, kraft- faced, resilient glass fiber blanket with flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84, Class /UL Fire Classification. Furnish in width required for fit between metal studs, thickness required to achieve R -value indicated and longest lengths as practical to minimize end joints. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Installation of all insulation shall be in accord with current printed manufacturer's instructions. .2 Insulation shall be cut to fit neatly around projections, pipes, and vents. Provide clearance per manufacturer around heat conducting pipes. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -1 NOTE: TOYS 'R' US AND BABIES 'R' US HAVE DESIGNATED A FIRST NAME BASIS FOR THE ROOFING SPECIFICATION WITH JOHNS - MANVILLE ROOFING SYSTEMS. FOR INFORMATION, CALL Office: 732 - 905 -6994 CeII: 732 - 310 -6544 Email:Charlie.williams @jm.com CHARLIE WILLIAMS, MANAGER PREFERRED ACCOUNTS. NOTE: VERIFY ROOF SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. VERIFY USE OF DESIGNATED ALTERNATE ROOFING SYSTEM WITH TOYS "R" US PROJECT MANAGER (PM). PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for, completing designated roofing system, flashing and associated sheet metal work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) Non - specified items must be approved in writing by the architect of record. .2 The extent of roofing, flashing and sheet metal work is shown on the drawings and includes factory fabricated metal roof edges, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts. .3 Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation and stressing of structural members or decking from concentrated loads. .4 Roofer. Examine surfaces on or against which roofing is to be applied, check levels of roof for dips or hollows. Notify Owner's Representative in writing of any defects, which, in the opinion of Roofer, would be detrimental to installation of his work. Do not proceed with any work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the contractor. Roofer will consider laying of materials as acceptance of deck. .5 Proceed with roofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed, under full -time supervision. .6 Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Masonry thru -wall flashings not associated with roofing specified in Section 4A Unit Masonry Work. .2 Preservative treated nailers and blocking specified in Section 6A, Carpentry. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 The Johns - Manville Technical Service Representative will attend Pre -Job Construction Conference, and must be notified one (1) week in advance. .2 The JM Technical Service Representative will perform one (1) in progress roof inspection. .3 The roofing and associated work shall be accomplished by a single firm, which has and is authorized to install the approved system for at least three years on projects comparable to the work of this contract; and, upon written request of the Owner, shall furnish the name and location of such roof installations. .4 Pre - Roofing Conference: Before the roofing work is scheduled to commence, after submittals have been reviewed by the Owner, and before any materials are ordered, a conference shall be called at the jobsite for the purpose of reviewing the drawings and specifications. The intent is to resolve questions before the work is started. The conference shall be attended by the roofing contractor, and his foreman, as well as the Owner's Representative. .5 UL Listing: Roofing system shall meet requirements for U -L Class "A" fire rating. .6 FM Listing: Roofing system shall meet or exceed F -M I- 90 requirements, depending on local code. .7 Final Inspection: .1 Upon completion of the installation, the Manufacturer's technical field inspector shall conduct a warranty inspection. The Manufacturer shall certify that all work has been completed in strict accordance with the contract specifications and Manufacturer's requirements. .2 A punchlist shall be developed based upon this inspection. A copy of the punchlist will be sent to all concerned parties. Upon completion of the punchlist items, the contractor shall notify the Owner. A verification inspection will be conducted. .3 Upon completion of the work, a written acceptance of the work will be delivered to the contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Manufacturer's Data, Roofing: For information only, submit 2 copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major roofing product or system required. The material shall not be ordered until the submittals have been approved. One (1) copy shall be kept at the jobsite at all times for use during construction. .2 Samples for verification for the following products: .1 Manufacturer's standard sample size of ply sheet & flashing backer sheet. .2 Manufacturer's standard sample size of cover board. .3 Manufacturer's standard sample size of roof insulation. .4 Manufacturer's standard sample size of vapor retarder. DIVISION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC, SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -2 .5 Manufacturer's standard sample size of substrate board. .6 3 lb (1.5 kg) of aggregate surfacing material. .7 Manufacturer's standard sample size of walkway pad or cap sheet walkway. .8 Six fasteners or each type, length and finish used for complete roofing installation. .3 Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof configuration and sheet layout, details at perimeter, and special conditions as it applies to the specific roof system, roof penetrations, roof curbs, metal edges, etc. .1 Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials (if any). .4 Samples and data sheets of all materials not approved shall be submitted for approval prior to start of installation. 1.6 ROOFING SYSTEM GUARANTEE .1 Submit, in duplicate, twenty year No Dollar Limit guarantee on roofing and associated work specified in this Section, agreeing to repair or replace work, which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as roofing due to failures of materials or workmanship. Coverage of the guaranty shall include roof membrane, roof insulation, fascia, coping, fastener (as applicable), base flashing (minimum height 8 ", maximum height as recommended by manufacturer) and workmanship for the full time specified. .1 Guarantee shall be issued and backed as follows: .1 Manufacturer's 20 -year NDL systems warranty. -Plus - .2 Contractor's 2 -year labor. -Or .2 As part of the bid documents, the contractor shall submit written evidence from the roofing manufacturer, to the Owner, Project Manager, and contractor, that he is eligible to provide the guaranty called for. A copy of the guaranty proposed by the contractor shall also be submitted with the bid. Failure to provide either of the documents shall result in disqualification of that bid. .3 Documentation of Johns - Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation. Confirmation that the subject project has been registered with Johns - Manville for a Request for a guarantee. .4 Documentation of Johns - Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation. Confirmation that the subject project has been registered with Johns - Manville for a Request for a guarantee. Contact the local Johns - Manville Representative to register the project or sign up to register projects on line at http: / /wwwjm.com /signmeup. If you have signed up to use the online registration service and have a password to use the Guarantee Management System at the JM Connexus site, go directly to http://ebjm.com/ to register the Guarantee Application. .5 Contractor to submit to the Owners Representative copies of all Manufacturer's field inspection reports, including interim and final inspection reports, as well as the 20 -year guarantees as provided by Manufacturer and Contractor. .6 In the event an emergency condition exists which requires immediate repair to avoid damage to the Building or its contents, then Building Owner may make essential temporary repairs. 1.7 SHEET METAL GUARANTEE .1 Provide guarantee for all sheet metal work for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of same, as evidenced by final payment, and binding contractor to repair, or replace, at his own expense, all work that may show defective material or workmanship within said period. This guarantee shall include leaking, failure of materials to stay in place, undue expansion, lifting, deformation, loosening and splitting of seams. .2 All sheet metal work must meet SMACNA guidelines for a weather -tight installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. .2 Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. .1 Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. .3 Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. .4 Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE BUILT -UP ROOFING MANUFACTURER .1 Built -up roof system manufacturers, which are acceptable for use on this project, are: .1 Johns - Manville Roofing System Division. .2 For Manager Preferred Accounts call: .1 Charlie Williams (732) 905 -6994 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES .1 Glass -Fiber Base -Ply Sheet ASTM D 2178, asphalt - impregnated, glass -fiber felt. 2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE CAPSHEET .1 Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt - impregnated and - coated, glad -fiber cap sheet, with with coarse mineral - granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface. 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS .1 Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, asphalt- impregnated, glass -fiber felt. .2 SBS- modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. DIVISION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -3 .3 Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, asphalt - impregnated and - coated, glass -fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. .4 Flashing Sheet: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt- impregnated and - coated composite sheet; smooth surfaced and reinforced with a composite polyester and glass -fiber core. 2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS .1 Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312. .2 Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. .3 Cold - Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's asphalt - based, two- component, asbestos -free, cold - applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with membrane applications. .4 Cold - Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's specially formulated one -part, elastomeric cold application adhesive. .5 Cold- Applied Flashing Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's asphalt - based, two- component, asbestos -free, trowel - grade, cold - applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with flashing applications. 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS .1 General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built -up roofing. .2 Mastic Sealant: As required by Johns Manville. .3 Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and provided by the roofing system manufacturer. .4 Expansion Joints: Provide factory fabricated weatherproof, exterior covers for expansion joint openings consisting of flexible rubber membrane, supported by a closed cell foam to form flexible bellows, with two metal flanges, adhesively and mechanically combined to the bellows by a patented bifurcation process. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single- source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. .5 Coping System: Manufacturer's factory fabricated coping consisting of a base piece and a snap -on cap. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single - source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. .6 Fascia System: Manufacturer's factory fabricated fascia consisting of a base piece and a snap -on cover. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single•source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. .7 Roofing Granules: Ceramic- coated roofing granules matching specified cap sheet, provided by roofing system manufacturer. .8 Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 2.7 WALKWAYS .1 Walkway Pads: Mineral - granule - surfaced, reinforced modified asphalt composition, slip- resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic provided by roofing system manufacturer, with a pad size of 32 inch x 32 inch. Product: [Johns Manville DynaTred] [Johns Manville DynaTred Plus] 2.8 COVER BOARD .1 Perlite Board: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders and waterproofing agents with top surface seal- coated. Product : [3/4" Fesco Board l [1" Fesco Board] [1 /2" Retro -Fit Board] 2.9 ROOF INSULATION .1 General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated: .2 Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Product: ENRGY 3 .1 Provide insulation package with R Value greater than 21. .2 Instil no boards thicker than 1.5 ". If insulation package required is thicker than 1.5 ", install in multiple layers. 2.10 INSULATION ACCESSORIES .1 General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. .2 Provide factory preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Retain below if insulation package requires mechanical fastening. .3 Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and provided by roofing system manufacturer. .4 Cold Fluid - Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's No VOC, two- component cold fluid - applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. .5 Urethane Adhesive: Manufacturer's two component urethane adhesive formulated to adhere insulation to substrate. .6 Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 2.11 VAPOR RETARDER .1 Glass -Fiber Felts: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt - impregnated, glass -fiber felt. .2 Torch Applied SBS Vapor Retarder. SBS- modified asphalt sheet smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 2.12 SUBSTRATE BOARD .1 Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, seal coated. DIVISION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -4 .2 Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water- resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. .3 Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.13 ROOFING MEMBRANE PILES .1 Johns - Manville 60 Mil, white, PVC with Elvaloy® KEE mechanically fastened roofing system is the first name manufacturer for roofing, systems. .2 For national and regional representatives call: .1 Charlie Williams Office: (732) 905 -6994 Cell: (732)- 310 -6544. .3 Acceptable alternate equivalent systems include .060 mil Sarnafil S327 white PVC system . .4 Alternate PVC roofing systems must meet or exceed all performance standards set by first name system. 2.14 ALUMINUM SHEET METAL Contractor to verify substrate level required for direct adhesion of PVC to ISO board. Provide intermittent material if required by manufacturer. .1 Aluminum sheet metal for flashings, copings, gutters, and downspouts shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, .032 - inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in specification Section 9H. 2.15 VENTS & LOUVERS .1 Provide ventilation as indicated on drawings such as in vestibule wall and soffits. Soffit vents and wall louvers shall include insect screens PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 REFERENCE .1 The most current application guide published by the manufacturer of the selected roofing system shall be considered part of this specification and shall be referred to for more specific application procedures regarding roofing insulation, membrane and base flashing. .2 Where this written specification differs from the manufacturer's application guide, the more stringent specification shall be used. .3 Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing by manufacturer to be equal or better than specified in every significant respect and acceptable to the Owner. .4 Compatibility Provide products, which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. .5 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: .6 .7 .8 .9 Verfy that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION .1 Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. .1 Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. .2 Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 VAPOR - RETARDER INSTALLATION .1 Install 2 glass -fiber felt plies lapping each sheet 19 inches (483 mm) over preceding sheet. Embed each sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. Glaze - coat completed surface with hot roofing asphalt. Apply hot roofing asphalt at a rate of 20 lb/100 sq. ft. (1 kg /sq. m), plus or minus 25 percent. .2 Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system. .3 Install modified bituminous vapor retarder sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: .1 Torch apply to substrate. .2 Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. .4 Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. .1 'Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. .2 Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot. .5 Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system. DMSION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) .6 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION .1 Coordinate installing roof system components so insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. .2 Comply with roofing system manufacturers written instructions for installing roof insulation and cover board. .3 Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45- degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees per manufacturer's instruction. .4 Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. .5 Install boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with like material. .1 Cut and fit boards within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. .6 Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 1.5 inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. .7 Trim surface of boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. .8 Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. .9 Mechanically Fastened Insulation and Cover Board: Secure uppermost layer to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type to deck type. Loose lay all other layers below with staggered joints. .1 Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. .2 Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. .10 Mechanically Fastened with Subsequent Layers Adhered Insulation and Cover Board: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type to deck type. .1 Fasten first layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. .2 Fasten first layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. .3 Install subsequent layers in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. *SECTION 7D -5 .4 Install subsequent layers in a cold fluid - applied adhesive. .11 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.5 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL .1 Install roofing system specification 3GIG according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of Johns Manville "Bituminous Roofing Binder ", and requirements in this Section. .2 Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. .3 Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24, contact the membrane manufacturer for installation instructions regarding installation direction and backnailing. .4 Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. .5 Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is imminent. .1 Provide tie -offs at end of each days work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. .2 Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. .3 Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. .6 Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating. Do not heat roofing asphalt within 25 deg F (14 deg C) of flash point. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours. .7 Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. .8 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION .1 Install two ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing DMSION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -6 membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. .1 Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching. .2 Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood -coat roof surface with 60 lb/100 sq. ft. (3 kg /sq. m) of hot roofing asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: .1 Aggregate Weight: [400 lb/100 sq. ft. (20 kg /sq. m)] [300 lb/100 sq. ft. (15 kg /sq. m)]. .2 If aggregate surfacing is delayed, promptly apply glaze coat of hot roofing asphalt at a rate of 10 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.5 kg /sq. m). 3.7 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION .1 Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: .1 Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. .2 Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in [a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt] [approved adhesive]. .3 Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. .4 Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in approved adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. .5 Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at EVT. Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer. .6 Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in approved adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. .7 Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in approved asphalt roofing cement; apply cement at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. .8 Flashing Sheet Application: Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate. .2 Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane. .3 Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing at a rate given by roofing system manufacturer. .1 Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass -fiber fabric set in MBR Flashing cement. .4 Roof Drains: Set [30 -by -30 -inch (760 -by- 760 -mm)] <Insert size> 4 lb lead flashing sheet in a bed of MBR Flashing Cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane cap -sheet stripping , and extend a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof -drain clamping ring. .5 Roof Drains: Flash drain using PermaFlash system. Clamp roofing membrane, flashing, and stripping into roof -drain clamping ring. .1 Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. .6 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION .1 Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt. .2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SHEATHING (CORRUGATED SIDING USED ONLY IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS) .1 All sheathing to be Exterior Grade Plywood sheathing in thicknesses and applications as shown on drawings. Install per all manufacturers requirements in conjunction with steel studs, corrugated decking and E.I.F.S. finish material fasteners, nails, etc. per current industry standard. .2 At rear of parapets, at front Vestibule, in applications and locations only if shown on drawings, provide 7/8 ", 22- gauge galvanized corrugated metal siding with paint grip finish. All connections, joints, fasteners to be installed, caulked and sealed per current industry standards. 3.10 SHEET METAL FLASHING, COPINGS, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS .1 Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free from all defects that might affect the application. .2 All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of the sheet metal installation, though not specifically shown or specified, shall be provided. All such items, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or specified, shall be of the same kind of material as the item to which applied. Nails, screws, and bolts shall be of the types best suited for the purpose intended, and shall be of a composition that is compatible with the metal to which it will contact. .3 Do not weld aluminum, instead provide mechanical waterproof connections. .4 Flash and counter flash with specified aluminum at juncture of all roofs with vertical surfaces and other places • DMSION 7* ROOFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) as required by drawings. Exposed edges of all flashings shall be doubled back 1/2" to provide stiffness. Cap flashing shall turn down over base flashings not less than 4 ". Ventilators and other items of equipment, which have integral members to cover flashing, need not have cap flashing. .5 Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply with the most current SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of the work. .6 Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15' -0" running length. All thermal expansion joints are to be mechanical joints. Provide 6" wide cover plate over '/a" wide joint. Cover plate shall be embedded in mastic, attached to nailer with waterproof connection and loose locked to the drip edge. .7 Flashing and Trim: Expansion joints, 10' -0" maximum spacing, and 2 "- 0" from corners and intersections. .8 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edges, to form a hem. Provide continuous clips under coping edges. .9 Pitch Pans: Where supports, pipes or other objects extend through roof, provide bottomless pitch pans as indicated on the drawings. Form pans from 24 -gauge galvanized sheet metal allowing 4 -inch nailing flange and 3 -inch standing leg with top edge folded back 1/2 inch, all joints soldered. Provide collars where required. Install pitch pans only where flanged sleeve and weather cap flashing cannot be installed. Set pitch pan flange in a solid bed of black plastic roofing cement. Fill bottom of pan to a depth of 1 -inch with cement mortar mix. Fill pan to top with dead -level bitumen. .10 Install flanged tube - weather cap flashing at all penetrations of electrical conduit and other service lines. .11 Fabricate and install .02 -inch aluminum rectangular downspouts and gutters in sizes indicated with required special connectors. Anchor to wall with straps spaced and attached as indicated on the drawings. Telescope downspouts end a minimum of 11/2". Provide watertight connections and slip type expansion joints where gutters join downspouts. .12 Fabricate and install .032 -inch aluminum gravel stop in size and configuration indicated. .1 The fabrication of the gravel stop shall conform to Plate 38, Figure A and joint system shall conform to Plate 42, Figure A of the 1987 Edition of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by SMACNA. .2 Where indicated, provide drain -thru aluminum gravel stop equal to Hickman Co..050" gauge perforated. Factory finished, white color unless otherwise indicated or specified. .3 Fasten roof flange to wood nailer 3" o.c. staggered. Coordinate with installation of gutter. 3.11 FABRICATED PRODUCTS .1 Fabricated Metal Flashing: Fabricate metal flashing, trim, copings, gutters and downspouts and similar items to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with standard industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ". *SECTION 7D -7 3. 12 ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS (IF APPLICABLE) .1 Plumbing contractor to provide flashing and leakage prevention construction at all roof drains and overflow drains as shown on drawings. See drawings for location of horizontal leaders, downspouts, sub - surface connections, etc. Verify with plumbing and mechanical drawings and see plumbing documents. See Section 15P. 3.13 ROOFING APPLICATION QUALITY CONTROL .1 The Contractor shall request the roofing manufacturer to provide a competent representative to inspect and direct the handling, methods, and application of the roofing materials. While it shall not be required that the manufacturer's representative remain constantly at the building during installation, he shall be requested to inspect all phases of the work in the application of the roofing as it progresses. This representative should at all times be easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may properly attend to questioned items. The manufacturer's representative is requested to certify, in writing, that the workmanship and installation were properly and correctly performed and that the manufacturer's warranty is valid. .2 If this inspection and certification process is not provided by the Contractor then the roof test cuts as specified below under paragraph 3.8.2.1 322.1 and 3.8.2.2 322.2 below shall be performed by the Contractor. .1 Contractor is to be responsible for obtaining roof test cuts and analysis as provided by a certified independent testing laboratory for all roof systems as specified by ASTM Document ANSI /ASTM D3617 -77 Standard Recommended Practice for Sampling and Analysis of New Built -Up Roof Membranes. All sampling procedures and documentation shall be in accordance with this ASTM Document. Copies of the results are to be submitted to Owner and the Owner's Representative for review and approval. .2 The cost of the required test and all subsequent roof repairs are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall, therefore, be included as part of the base bid proposal and identified as such. - END OF SECTION - DMSION 7* ROOFING. FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL (BUILT -UP) *SECTION 7D -8 Plate 42, Figure A of the 1987 Edition of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by SMACNA. .2 Where indicated, provide drain -thru aluminum gravel stop equal to Hickman Co..050" gauge perforated. Factory finished, white color unless otherwise indicated or specified. .3 Fasten roof flange to wood nailer 3" o.c. staggered. Coordinate with installation of gutter. 3.11 FABRICATED PRODUCTS .1 Fabricated Metal Flashing: Fabricate metal flashing, trim, copings, gutters and downspouts and similar items to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with standard industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ". 3. 12 ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS (IF APPLICABLE) .1 Plumbing contractor to provide flashing and leakage prevention construction at all roof drains and overflow drains as shown on drawings. See drawings for location of horizontal leaders, downspouts, sub - surface connections, etc. Verify with plumbing and mechanical drawings and see plumbing documents. See Section 15P. 3.13 ROOFING APPLICATION QUALITY CONTROL .1 The Contractor shall request the roofing manufacturer to provide a competent representative to inspect and direct the handling, methods, and application of the roofing materials. While it shall not be required that the manufacturer's representative remain constantly at the building during installation, he shall be requested to inspect all phases of the work in the application of the roofing as it progresses. This representative should at all times be easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may properly attend to questioned items. The manufacturer's representative is requested to certify, in writing, that the workmanship and installation were properly and correctly performed and that the manufacturer's warranty is valid. .2 If this inspection and certification process is not provided by the Contractor then the roof test cuts as specified below under paragraph 3.8.2.1 322.1 and 3.8.2.2 322.2 below shall be performed by the Contractor. .1 Contractor is to be responsible for obtaining roof test cuts and analysis as provided by a certified independent testing laboratory for all roof systems as specified by ASTM Document ANSI /ASTM D3617 -77 Standard Recommended Practice for Sampling and Analysis of New Built -Up Roof Membranes. All sampling procedures and documentation shall be in accordance with this ASTM Document. Copies of the results are to be submitted to Owner and the Owner's Representative for review and approval. .2 The cost of the required test and all subsequent roof repairs are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall, therefore, be included as part of the base bid proposal and identified as such. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS WATERPROOFING SECTION 7E -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. .1 Comply with GS -36. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section lA of these specifications. .4 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provision of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .5 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, altemates, and substitutions. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .2 ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. .3 ASTM C898 - Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Separate Wearing Course. .4 ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension. .5 ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .6 ASTM D2589 - Standard Test Method for McNett Wet Classification of Duel Asbestos Fiber. .7 ASTM D2643 - Standard Specification for Prefabricated Asphalt Reservoirs, Pond, Canal, and Ditch Liner (Exposed Type). .8 ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. .2 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The Contractor shall provide all materials, operations, methods listed or mentioned on the drawings and specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary, and required for the completion of membrane waterproofing. 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Waterproofing work shall include exterior surfaces at all concrete or concrete block walls where the finish floor line is below grade, unless noted otherwise. .2 Before commencing work, examine surfaces upon which waterproofing work is dependent for perfect workmanship, make necessary adjustments to such surface as is required. .3 Exercise care in application of materials in order to protect work, which will remain exposed. Where exposed surfaces become coated or smeared, clean them thoroughly. .4 The installation shall provide complete protection from the penetration of water. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Manufacturer. Shall be an established manufacturer of waterproofing materials for the application required and as approved by Project Manager. .2 For each type of work obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. .3 Applicator. Shall be an established Contractor approved by waterproofing materials manufacturer. Verification of waterproofing capability, facilities, personnel, financial responsibility, and list of completed projects comparable to the scope of this project shall be required. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Manufacturer's Data: Submit product data sheets, application, instructions and details, clearly marked, to identify project requirements and manufacturers standard guarantee in accordance with the requirements of the Division 1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Deliver products in manufacturer's sealed containers, with seals and labels intact. .2 Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of the direct rays of the sun. Maintain a temperature range of 40 degrees F minimum, 90 degrees F maximum. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .1 Apply liquid membrane when the temperature is 40 degrees F or above and only after adequate precautions have been taken to assure dry and frost free concrete surfaces. .2 Do not apply during inclement weather. 1.8 PROTECTION .1 Protect adjacent work from damage from work included in this section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Elastomeric Waterproofing Compound: Shall be 1 part cold applied modified polyurethane conforming to ASTM C836, spray applied and nonsag. .2 System shall include the following as applicable: Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 .1 Expansion Joint. Sealant: Two part elastomeric polysulfide, or three -part epoxidized terpolymer. WATERPROOFING SECTION 7E -2 .1 Comply with GS -36. .2 Joint Filler. Closed cell polyethylene foam backer rod. .3 Reducer. For cleaning tools and equipment, standard of the waterproofing material manufacturer. .4 Leveling Patcher. An acrylic latex base- bonding compound used directly or as an admixture. .5 Joint Filler Strip: Nonimpregnated joint filler strip. .6 Protection Board: Premolded asphalt impregnated waterproofing protection course conforming to ASTM D2643 and ASTM D2589, thickness recommended by manufacturer for required application. .7 Wax: Liquid household buffing wax containing carnuba, if required. .8 Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type 1. .3 System shall have the following minimum performance characteristics: PROPERTY MEMBRANE (CURED) Shore A Hardness (±5) 40 ASTM D2240 Tensile Strength, psi (±25) 150 ASTM D412 Elongation, Percent, Avg. 600 ASTM D412 100% Modulus, psi (±10) 80 ASTM D412 Recovery, Percent, Min. 90 Swelling in Water, Nil 3 Days, Room Temp. Service Temperature -40 Range °F Service Temperature to Range Moisture Vapor 0.15 ASTM E96 Transmission, Perm. inches Crack Test, No loss ASTM C836 1/16 inch, Cycled of bond 10 times /24 hours or cracking @ 15 °F exhibited PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACE .1 Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 14 days and shall be dry. .2 Concrete Surfaces: .1 Horizontal surfaces shall be steel trowel finished to a smooth, level surface. .2 Vertical surfaces shall be smooth, sound and free of honeycombs. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Concrete shall be free of curing and parting compounds, wax or other foreign chemicals or materials. .3 Surfaces of all substrates to receive waterproofing shall be clean, dry and free of frost, dew, loose dirt and foreign matter. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Static Joints or Cracks Less Than 1/8 -inch Wide: Seal with waterproofing membrane. Material shall fill and overlay the edges of the joint to a minimum width of 3- inches on both sides and shall have minimum surface thickness of 55 (±5) mils. .2 Expansion and Working Joints: Cracks and joints larger than 1/8 -inch with maximum joint movement of ±20 percent. .1 Install backer rod joint filler, 1/8 -inch larger than joint width at the depth recommended for sealant. .2 Apply specified sealant according to manufacturer's directions. .3 After sealant has cured, wax area over sealant to prevent membrane from adhering to sealant, if recommended by the membrane manufacturer. .4 Stripe the joint seal and backer rod with 55 (±5) mils of membrane extending minimum of 3- inches on base slab on either side of the joint. .3 Penetrations, covers, drains, intersections of horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be prepared as detailed in the project drawings. .4 Immediately prior to, and during application of membrane, remove all dust and dirt by use of high - pressure air, by brushing with a soft broom, or vacuum cleaning. 3.3 APPLICATION .1 Apply membrane waterproofing to comply with ASTM C898 and manufacturer's written instructions. .1 For Horizontal Surfaces: .1 Apply membrane at a rate of 5- gallons of material to 125- square feet of surface to produce membrane 55 (±5) mils thick, minimum. .2 Control application rate by means of pre- measured surface areas. .2 For Vertical Surfaces (Non -Sag): .1 Apply prime coat over concrete block consisting of a 50/50 combination of liquid membrane and reducer as recommended by membrane manufacturer. No primer required on cast -in -place concrete surfaces unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Apply membrane at a rate of 5- gallons of material to 125 - square feet to surface to produce membrane 55 (±5) mils thick, minimum. .3 Carefully control application to avoid runs and sags of fresh material. .2 Apply membrane to pre- stripped areas on both horizontal and vertical surfaces at cracks, joints, intersections, Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 WATERPROOFING SECTION 7E -3 penetrations, drains, flashing flanges, etc., to provide a minimum total thickness of 110 -mils over these areas. .3 Mask any membrane edge to be exposed to view to provide a straight clean edge. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Before the material attains final set, verify the applied thickness by use of mil- thickness gauge as the work progresses. Take a reading every 500 - square feet of surface area. Where readings indicate a thickness less than specified, immediately apply additional membrane to produce required thickness. .2 Visually inspect all other areas which cannot be water tested for voids, damage, or rupture. Repair as required. 3.5 BACKFILLING .1 Do no backfilling before waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the Construction Project Manager. .2 Do not place protection boards until after inspection. 3.6 MEMBRANE PROTECTION .1 Within 24 -hours after completion of a successful water test or visual inspection and /or repairs, cover membrane with protection board. All horizontal and vertical membrane shall be protected. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 7 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ROOF PATCHING SECTION 7F -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. Reference Division 1 for allowance amount to be included in bid proposal. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and scaffolding required for completing roof patching, and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 The extent of roofing work is shown on the drawings and includes patching of existing roofing. .3 Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 All materials, including felts, composition flashing, bitumen, roof insulation, vapor retarder (if any) aggregate surfacing or other coating, etc., is to be compatible with the existing roofing system to complete the patching of the existing roof. .2 Aluminum sheet metal for flashing, copings, etc., shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, and .032 -inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in Specification Section 9H. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Examine condition of existing roof system and the conditions under which the roof patching work is to be performed. Notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.2 PATCHING .1 Install all required materials in proper manner to insure a watertight and weatherproof installation. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. .2 ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .2 Federal Specifications (FS), latest edition. .1 FS AA -272A - Caulking Compounds. .3 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and scaffolding required for completing caulking and joint sealant work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). .2 The required applications of sealants and caulking include, but are not necessarily limited to those locations herein listed. .3 Flashing and counterflashing adjoining wall areas. .4 Exterior wall joints, masonry control joints, exterior and interior. .5 Joints between wall and adjacent windows, doors, grilles, and miscellaneous frames on exterior and interior. .6 Joints at penetrations of walls, decks, and floors by piping and other services and equipment. .7 Drywall control joints and other joints where drywall abuts other materials. .8 Sanitary sealant shall be used for joints between toilet fixtures, accessories, water coolers, janitor's sink, etc., and adjacent surfaces, and other areas as indicated on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Manufacturer's Data; Sealants, and Caulking: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and installation instructions for each type of sealant required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications shown. Show by transmittal that 1 copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the installer. 1.5 WARRANTY .1 Submit 2 copies of written warranty agreeing to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints, or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, SECTION 7G -1 abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data, as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by the installer and Contractor. .2 Warranty period is 2- years. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 The installer must examine the joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and the conditions under which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL .1 Provide custom colors, wherever indicated, to match Construction Project Manager's samples or to match the adjoining surfaces in a manner to be determined by the Construction Project Manager. Provide manufacturer's standard colors, as selected by Construction Project Manager, wherever custom colors are not indicated. .2 Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its compatibility to adhere with the joint surfaces, joint materials (manufacturer's recommended variation of the specified materials) which are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification. .3 Provide size and shape of preformed sealant tapes as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturer, either in his published data or upon consultation with his technical representative. .4 Exterior One - Component Silicone Sealants for Exterior Joints: Provide 1 of the following: .1 Dow Coming - 795. .2 Pecora - 895. .3 General Electric - Silpruf, NB SCS9000. .5 At E.I.F.S. surface adjacent masonry, sealant to match masonry. .6 Interior Caulking: Provide 1 of the following (paintable): .1 Acrylic latex water emulsion compound conforming to ASTM C834. .2 Butyl sealant conforming to A -A -272A. .3 Sanitary Sealant: One -part clear, mildew resistant silicone caulk (non - paintable) conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, NS, Class 25, Class A, and ASTM C920. .4 Comply with GS -36. .7 Miscellaneous Materials: .1 Joint Cleaner. Provide the type of joint cleaning compound recommended by the sealant or caulking compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 7G -2 END OF SECTION .2 Joint Primer /Sealer. Provide the type of joint primer/ sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. .3 Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self adhesive tape wherever applicable. .4 Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable nonabsorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for sealant placement, break bond or sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. .5 Comply with GS -36. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION .1 Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or 'caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances, which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. .2 Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer /sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. .3 Install sealant backer rod where shown allowing proper depth for sealant bead. .4 Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. .5 Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Finish joint surface shall be smooth. .6 Install sealants to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the manufacturer's general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead. .7 Clean excess material off adjacent surfaces. Remove cartons and other debris related to this work from the project site at the direction of the project superintendent. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 7 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes: .1 Field applied exterior insulation and finish system. .1 EIFS, Class PB System. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB SECTION 7J -1 .2 Adhesively attach to concrete block, masonry or concrete glass mat sheathing plywood and other approved sheathing substrates. .3 Mechanically attached for all other applications. .2 Related Sections: .1 Section 7G - Joint Sealants. .2 Section 6A - Carpentry: Exterior grade plywood sheathing. .3 Division 7D - Flashing and Associated Sheet Metal Roofing: Sheet Metal Flashing. .4 Section 9H - Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C148 - Standard Test Methods for Polariscopic Examination of Glass Containers. .2 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .3 ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C1397 - Standard Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish System. .5 ASTM D5035 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method). .6 ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product data showing standard installation details and material information. .2 Any additional installation details required for project not included in manufacturer's standard installation details. .3 Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of prefabricated panels including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations, and attachments to other units of work. .4 Finish and color sample: 2- square foot panels for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. Prepare using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. Include in sample typical joint with proposed sealant and any other special finish detailing required. .5 Certificates and test reports complying with requirements as specified in Article 4 - Quality Assurance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Installer Qualifications: Certified list showing minimum of 3 completed systems similar in material and extent in the last 5- years. Include training certification by manufacturer of system for installer. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Certification that firm is experienced in specialized manufacturing of systems similar to those indicated for this project and is a current member of EIMA (EIFS Industry Members Association). .3 Fire Test Reports: Show compliance to ASTM E84 for flame spread and smoke developed for rigid polystyrene insulation. .4 Preinstallation Conference: General Contractor to conduct conference at project site with EIFS installer, Owner, and manufacturer's representative to discuss installation, including scheduling. .5 EIFS systems have proven susceptible to water infiltration anywhere water can penetrate the system. Comply with requirements of ASTM C1397. .6 Contractor to verify and implement all manufacturer's requirements for a warranted installation as well as any codes governing products and process implementation. .7 Contractor shall include: Exclusive use of certified and trained installers, on -site inspections or observations of product application, protection of unfinished construction, redundant moisture barriers at edges of substrate and of application surface, drainage systems, a tightly caulked envelope that has defined schedule of annual maintenance and of monitoring of all flashing and joints. Practices or techniques, which, if not properly followed, could result in failure of the EIFS system, will be considered entirely the responsibility of the supplier and the Contractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Deliver in original packaging, store in weather protected area and handle to avoid damaging materials in a manner recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 degrees F and failing unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 -hours after installation. Verify with system manufacturer prior to commencement of installation for specific product. 1.8 WARRANTY .1 Furnish installer's written warranty covering the materials and installation, including water tightness for a period of 5- years from date of substantial completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products, which may 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB SECTION 7J -2 be incorporated, include, but are not limited to, the following: .1 Dryvit Systems, Inc. .1 Dryvit outsulation (class PB) at concrete and /or masonry. .2 Dryvit Outslation plus (moisture drainage system) at stud construction. .2 Senergy, Inc. .1 Senergy senerflex classic PB at concrete and /or masonry. .2 Senergy channeled adhesive design (moisture drainage system) at stud construction. .3 Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Provide adhesive, framing, plywood sheathing, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials, sealants and accessories that are approved for use in systems by manufacturer and compatible. .2 Finishes: See drawings for locations and finish types. .3 Colors: See drawings for color requirements. .4 Provide system compliant metal or aluminum framing compatible with system materials and substrates. Minimum G60 galvanized metal or equivalent aluminum. .5 Sheathing: Provide system compliant sheathing panels as specified. .6 Water Proofing /Air Barrier. System manufacturer's standard fluid applied air moisture barrier for exterior wall sheathing. Provide sheathing joint treatment and rough opening protection. .7 Refer to Section 9H "Painting" for paint if indicated on drawings. .8 Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for system use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the following requirements: .1 Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C150, Type 1 and polymer based adhesive specified for base coat. .9 Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board, complying with ASTM C578 for Type I minimum, approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness and other dimensional tolerances. .1 Aged insulation approved by system manufacturer. .2 Provide insulation in boards not more than 24- inches x 48- inches. .3 Board thickness: Refer to drawings. .10 Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali resistant open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, complying with ASTM D578 and ASTM D5035. .1 Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.5- ounces per square yard minimum, shall be used on all locations including the top layer over all heavy duty mesh areas. .2 Heavy Duty Reinforcing Fabric: 20- ounces per square yard minimum. Refer to drawings for location. .11 Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. .1 Job mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C150, Type 1, white or natural color, and system manufacturer's standard polymer emulsion adhesive designed for use indicated. .12 Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. .13 Water. Clean and potable. .14 Mechanical fastener assemblies, system manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant fastener assemblies. (for use only on questionable substrates such as painted surfaces, pre - sealed brick, etc. Consult with EIFS manufacturer for recommendations on a job per job basis on renovation work.) .15 Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements. (for use with moisture drainage systems at stud construction.) .16 Provide EIFS reveals, reveal control joints and control joints as shown on drawings and as listed as standard manufacturer accessories. .17 Provide all weeps, vents, venting accessories, etc., as required and recommended by EIFS manufacturer for a complete and proper installation. .18 Sheathing: .1 Glass mat gypsum sheathing material acceptable to EIFS. Gypsum sheathing is not allowed. .2 Exterior grade plywood. .3 Other inert sheathing material acceptable to EIFS manufacturer. 2.3 SEALANTS .1 Provide sealants compatible with system's manufacturer and compliant with requirements of Section 7G - Joint Sealants. .2 Provide Owner with maintenance and inspection schedule for sealants and flashings, etc. 2.4 MIXING .1 Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine substrates, with installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB SECTION 71 -3 Do not proceed with installation of system until END OF SECTION unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work. .2 Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION - FIELD - APPLIED ADHESIVE & MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SYSTEMS .1 Install all system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including substrate preparation and cleaning. .2 Vertically trowel adhesive attached polystyrene insulation board to sheathing, masonry, or concrete only, maintaining system manufacturer's standards for smoothness of board - to -board plane. .3 Trowel on base coat evenly embedding system reinforcing mesh consistently, allowing time to cure properly. Mesh shall be completely embedded into coat so that no mesh color shows through dry base coat. Re -skim areas if necessary to fully cover the color of the mesh. .4 Embed heavy -duty mesh to a height of 8 feet above finish grade for all systems. .5 Embed standard duty mesh above heavy -duty mesh to the top of wall for all systems. .6 Install all accessory items, including joints and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instruction, and as indicated on drawings. .7 Apply finish coat to proper thickness for system, tooling appropriately for specified finish after base coat has cured. (some specialty finishes require the use of a primer prior to the finish coat application; consult with EIFS manufacturer for priming requirements.) 3.4 INSTALLATION - FACTORY PRE - FABRICATED PANEL SYSTEM .1 Install all system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Insure that substrate meets panel system manufacturer's installation requirements. .3 Mechanically attach sheathing to framing members and insulation to sheathing. .4 Apply adhesive, EPS foam board, base coat, reinforcing and finish coat as specified in field- applied systems. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS .1 Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, in compliance with requirements of Section 7G - Joint Sealants and with ASTM C148. 3.6 CLEANING .1 Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from surfaces not indicated to receive system coatings. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK HOLLOW METAL WORK SECTION 8A -1 .1 This section includes all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of hollow metal work, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .2 ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Delivery of Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Sheets, Coils, and Cut Lengths by the Hot -Dip Method. .3 ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon and High Strength Low Alloy Hot Rolled and Cold Rolled Requirements. .4 ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. .5 ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability. .6 ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability. .7 ASTM E2074 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, including Positive Pressure Testing of Side Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. .2 American National Standards Institute, ANSI /DHI A115 Steel Door Prep Standards. .3 Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - Handbook for, "Recommended locations for Builder's Hardware Custom Steel Doors and Frames." .4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. .5 Steel Door Institute (SDI) - Recommended Standard Steel Doors and Frame Details. .6 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - Building Materials Directory. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's data for fabrication and installation instructions. Transmit 1 copy of instructions to the Installer. .2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of hollow metal work. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, gauges of metal, finishes, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. .3 Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 1.5 FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES .1 Fire Rated Assemblies: Wherever a fire resistance classification (3 -hour, 1 -1/2 -hour, etc., or "A," "B," etc.) is shown or scheduled for hollow metal work, provide fire rated hollow metal doors and frames investigated and tested as 'a fire door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used. Identify each fire door and frame with UL labels, and indicate applicable fire rating of both door and frame. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. .2 Oversize Assemblies: Wherever hollow metal assemblies are larger than size limitations established by NFPA and UL, provide manufacturer's certification that assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to labeled construction. .3 Label Construction: Each required fire door and frame, including hardware, shall be an exact duplicate, except for size, of a type investigated and successfully fire tested in accordance with ASTM E2074 for the period of time and with the performance under test as required for the various ratings indicated. The assembly shall be identified by labels of the approving agency. The label on the door or frame shall indicate the applicable fire test rating for the construction furnished. Approved agencies shall include the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, the Factory Mutual Laboratories, and other authorities having local or regional jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. .2 Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Project Manager; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. .3 Store hollow metal units on raised platforms in vertical positions with blocking between units to allow air circulation. Keep stored material covered and protected from damage. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Job Conditions: Installer must examine the substrate and conditions under which hollow metal work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Provide hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work and shall be a current member of the Steel Door Institute unless otherwise acceptable to the Construction Project Manager. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 HOLLOW METAL WORK SECTION 8A -2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Hot Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel pickled and oiled, comply with ASTM A1011 and ASTM A568. .2 Cold Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008 and ASTM A568. .3 Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Provide for exterior doors and frames. .4 Minimum Gauges of Steel: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings doors shall be 18 -gauge and frames shall be 16 gauge. .5 Core material; for interior doors, honeycomb; exterior doors, polystyrene, U- Factor = 0.21. .6 Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gauge sheet steel. Galvanize after fabrication units to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class B. .7 Shop Painting: .1 Clean, treat, and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units, whether concealed or exposed in the finished work. .2 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint. .3 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive field applied paint. .4 For steel surfaces use rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. .8 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. .9 Anchors: Provide minimum of 3 anchors each jamb per manufacturers standards. 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. .2 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. .3 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/DHI A115. (Note: All locksets, latches and cylinders are to be supplied and installed by Best Access Systems). .4 Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface - applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface applied finish hardware may be done at project site. .5 Locate finish hardware in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware, "custom steel doors and frames," published by the Door Hardware Institute. .6 Door Louvers: .1 Provide weatherproof stationary louvers for exterior doors, where indicated, constructed of Z shaped blades formed of 20 -gauge galvanized steel sheets. Space blades not more than 1 -1/2- inches o.c. Provide removable insect screens on interior face of doors, of 14 x 18 wire mesh in rigid, formed metal frame. .2 Provide sight proof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V- shaped or Y shaped blades formed of 18 -gauge cold rolled steel. Space blades to provide a minimum of 30 percent free air opening. .3 For fire rated openings, provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at every joint. .7 Provide stock hollow metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with Steel Door Institute (SDI) guidelines for minimum materials and construction requirements. .8 Provide stock hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown. .9 Fabricate frames of fully welded construction. .10 Form exterior frames of steel sheets with a stretcher level degree of flatness. .11 Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single swing frames and 4 silencers on heads of double swing frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. .12 Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bars for across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. .13 Sound Deadening: Coat inside (concealed) faces of doorframes in hollow wall construction with fibered asphalt emulsion. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Except for frames located in concrete or masonry, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. .2 In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames is specified in the masonry section. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 HOLLOW METAL WORK SECTION 8A -3 .3 At concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. .4 Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 .5 In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws. .6 Door Installation: .1 Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in Steel Door Institute guidelines. .2 Place fire rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. .7 Adjust and Clean: .1 Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames, which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. .2 Prime Coat Touch Up - Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air drying primer. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 CURTAIN WALL (HIGH WIND AREAS) SECTION 8B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA), latest edition. .2 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. .2 ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. .3 ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .4 ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .3 Green Seal Standards .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The extent of aluminum work under this section is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for location, details, etc., for the work, which includes, but is not necessarily limited to: .1 Aluminum frames and framing. .2 Aluminum closures. .3 Aluminum clad structural or miscellaneous steel framing. .4 Preparation of aluminum framed openings for automatic entrance exit doors and coordinating their installation where required. .5 Caulking specified for work of this section. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Steel channel framing to receive aluminum tube closures: Section 5F. .2 Glass and Glazing: Section 8C. .3 Aluminum Storefront. Section 8D; Doors, Frames, and Windows. .4 Sliding Automatic Entrance Exit Doors: Section 8F. .5 Painting: Section 9H. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Plans, elevations, and details show spacing of members as well as profile and similar dimensional requirements of aluminum entrances and curtain wall work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Construction Project Manager's sole judgment such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances. .2 All painted aluminum closures and cladding associated with and required to match the curtain wall system shall be manufactured and supplied by the curtain wall manufacturer in order to assure color match and performance. .3 See Section 9H and the drawings for matching paint finish of steel columns adjacent to curtain wall finish. 1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared by the curtain wall manufacturer for fabrication and installation of the curtain wall, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, closures, cladding, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. .2 Submit shop drawings to installer of automatic entrance exit doors where work includes preparation of aluminum framed openings for doors. .3 Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish on 6 inch long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6 inch square sheets. .4 Curtain Wall System Design Certification: Submit certification by a registered engineer stating that the curtain wall system and its anchorage to the structure has been designed to support the required design wind load as specified in the appropriate building code without exceeding a deflection of 1/175 of the span. .1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .5 Submit documentation (if required by local authorities), which verifies that glazing system has been approved for use by local authorities having jurisdiction and complies with all applicable state or federal codes or regulations. 1.7 PERFORMANCE .1 Window framing furnished under this Section shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements. .1 Resistance to Water Infiltration: The framing system shall not leak when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure of 7.5 P.S.F. certified test results available. .2 Performance Under Uniform Loading: When tested in accordance with ASTM E330, the maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/175 of its span and when the load is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation or damage when tested under a load of 30 P.S.F. minimum. .1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the drawings to verify the wind load design for the building indicated on the drawings, and to provide framing that meets or exceeds requirements for the indicated wind load, and satisfies all applicable local codes and regulations. .3 Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 8 CURTAIN WALL (HIGH WIND AREAS) SECTION 8B -2 .4 Air filtration of not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of a fixed area per ASTM E 283. .2 Additional intra- system reinforcing with the curtain wall system. .1 It shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor and the Contractor to verify that if the canopy is removed or other openings through any curtain wall systems of the prototypes are made part of the individual store design, all framing systems will be checked, verified, and provided with any additional reinforcement members per all manufacturer's specifications and certification requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY .1 For all work of this section provide warranty that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are complete, and Contractor will correct all defects that may develop within 1 year from date of substantial completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL .1 Aluminum shall be free from streaking and die marks. Extrusions: Alloy 6063 -T5. Sheets: No. 32 Alumilite. .2 Framing System: .1 Vistawall: CW 250. .2 Kawneer 1600 System. .3 Doors: See Section 8D and 8K. See drawings for sizes and colors. .4 Color. Refer to drawings. .1 Clear Anodized Finish System: Comply with AAMA 607.1, Interior Side. .2 Fluorocarbon Coating System: Manufacturer's standard fluorocarbon system to match colors as shown on the drawings that complies with AAMA 605.2. A clear topcoat shall be applied if the coating manufacturer for the particular color specified recommends such a topcoat. The fluorocarbon color coat and the clear topcoat (if required) shall be 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight. .3 Colors and Gloss: Refer to drawings. Color Locations: Refer to drawings for locations. .5 Mild steel framing operations shall conform to ASTM A283 Grade "C ". All steel to receive 1 coat of zinc chromate primer after fabrication. Field welds and scratches shall receive 1 touch -up coat after installation. .6 Fasteners: Aluminum alloy 245 -T4, or bronze. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide Philips head countersunk head machine screws for exposed fasteners. .7 Coping at the head of the curtain wall shall be .125 -inch minimum thickness with finish applied by the curtain wall manufacturer to match the curtain wall. Vertical column covers within the curtain wall to match the exterior curtain wall shall be .125 -inch minimum thickness with the finish applied by the curtain wall manufacturer. All other column covers shall be a minimum .062- inches or thicker as required to create a flat appearance and provide reasonable protection against damage by pedestrian traffic including shipping carts. .8 Sealant: Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .1 Color. To be determined by Construction Project Manager. .2 Potential of 3 different colors for sealant throughout curtain wall system. .3 Comply with GS -36. .9 Aluminum Framing System: This contractor shall furnish all necessary material, labor, and equipment for the complete installation of the following: .1 Glass framing, vertical and horizontal; transition members connecting these components, adapters and mountings for trim moldings and facing materials. Provide aluminum tube members to be installed over steel channel framing as indicated. .2 Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters, and mountings shall be extruded of aluminum with alloy and temper consistent with the method of manufacture. These members shall be of 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum alloy in compliance with ASTM B221 alloy G.S. 10A- T5. .3 All screws, miscellaneous fastening devices, and internal components shall be of stainless steel, or plated or corrosion - resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. .4 Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines, and no projecting stops or face joints except where snap -on stops are indicated or required. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass and panels by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass. Adapt- ers and mountings for trim moldings and face materials shall be designed so as to permit the installation of these products in their regular manner, and shall not interfere with the normal assembly and weathering of the grid framing. .1 Joints, water stops, sealants as recommended by the manufacturer. Joints between framing members and adjoining metals made watertight by caulking with caulking compounds, or other approved sealant material. .10 Protection: Provide required protection to prevent damage to finished work. Provide protective barriers as required to prevent damage, after erection, resulting from work of other trades. Use strippable rubber paint on erected work and gummed paper on shop- fabricated work. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Field Measurement Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings, and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements might delay work. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 All items under this heading shall be set in their correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 CURTAIN WALL (HIGH WIND AREAS) SECTION 8B -3 plumb, and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work. .2 All joints between interior metal, masonry, and between interior glass framing and mullion members shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. All materials shall be screwed in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Where moldings are joined, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed joint. .3 All framing, accessories, etc., shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 ERECTION .1 All work shall be straight and true, free from warpage, and of highest standard of material and workmanship. .2 To the greatest extent possible, all work shall be performed in the shop. .3 Any departure from indicated details shall be submitted for approval to Construction Project Manager. .4 Joints, comers, copes, and miters shall be accurately cut, filed, and fitted and framed together at contact points. .5 Alf surfaces of joints and connections shall match the finish of adjacent metal and be approved by the Construction Project Manager. .6 Provide all clips, fastenings, and reinforcements required for installation of all work. .7 Removable members shall be carefully formed and fitted. .8 To the greatest extent possible, all fastenings shall be concealed. Those which are not shall match finish of adjoining metal. .9 All joints shall be watertight. .10 Provide approved type bituminous sheeting between aluminum and dissimilar metals or cement mortar. .11 All frames, transoms, and mullions, etc., shall be constructed, sized, dimensioned, and reinforced as required to provide rigid construction. .12 Joints shall be of the hairline type. .13 Reinforce with steel plate for all hardware and accessories, including surface applied items. .14 Provide all sealing and caulking between metal -to -metal contacts, between frames, mullions, etc., to provide airtight and weather tight joints. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .1 After erection, the Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of the framing from damage by grinding and polishing machines, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. .2 Remove and replace members that are marred or show evidence of deterioration of finish. .3 After installation, metal and glass surfaces of the walls shall be cleaned on both interior and exterior of all mortar, plaster, paint, and other contaminants. .4 Contractor shall be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent. Contractor shall be held responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials. .5 After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage until the Contractor accepts it. Thereafter, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain protection and provide final cleaning. .1 Cleaning of all frames to be complete a minimum of 1 week before store opening. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Water leakage: Manufacturer to check the completed assembly according to procedures in AAMA 502. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in test. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 GLASS AND GLAZI NG SECTION 8C -1 IF VIRACON GLAZING 1S USED. VIRACON GLAZING IS A LONG LEAD TIME ITEM. CONTRACTOR MUST ORDER WITHIN SUFFICIENT TIME FRAME TO OBTAIN SPECIFIED MATERIAL. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C669 - Standard Specification for Glazing Compound for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of Metal Sash. .2 ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. .3 ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass - Kind Heat Strengthened, Kind Fully Tempered Coated and Uncoated Glass. .2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 297.1 and 16 CFR 1201 (Code of Federal Regulations) safety glazing. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing glass and glazing work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 Items to be completed include but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). .1 Glazing of entrance and exit aluminum doors. .2 Glazing of storefront. .3 Glazing of interior /exterior door vision panels. .4 Glazing of interior borrowed lites. .5 Other glazing items indicated or specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Viracon. .2 Interpane. .3 Pittsburgh Plate Glass (PPG). .4 Pilkington. .5 Guardian. .6 AFGD. 2.2 GLASS .1 Float glass of thickness indicated on the drawings shall be clear glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., or equal. Provide 1/4 -inch thickness if not indicated on the drawings. 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Float glass shall conform to ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). .2 Tempered glass, 1/4 -inch thick clear as manufactured by PPG Architectural Glass or equal. .1 Tempered glass shall conform to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Quality), Class 1 (clear). .3 One -way Mirror Glass: 1/4 -inch thick "Mirropane E.P." transparent mirror by Libbey- Owens -Ford Go. or approved equal.. .4 Glass for Mirror Production (Silvering): .1 Mirror Glass: Provide float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 for silvering. .5 Mirror Frame: 18 -8, Type 304 stainless steel channel or angle frame with maximum face dimension of 1/2 -inch. .6 Glass Types (Interior): .1 1/4 -inch; clear, float at locations indicated on the drawings. .2 1/4 -inch, clear, tempered at locations indicated on the drawings. .7 Glass Types (Exterior): .1 Type VE6 -85, Viracon configuration - 1/4 -inch blue /green exterior glazing - 1/2 -inch air space - clear 1/4 inch Low E on Surface No. 2 (exterior glazing) - tempered assembly. .2 Type VLE6 -85 Viracon configuration - 5/16 inch blue /green exterior laminated glazing with 0.060 -inch interlayer - 7/16 inch air space - clear 1/4 inch Low E on Surface No. 2. .3 Required performance data shall meet or exceed the following: Visible Light Transmittance: 65% (min.) ASHRAE U -Value (winter): 0.31 (max.) Shading Coefficient 0.46 (max.) Relative Heat Gain: 97 (max.) 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS AND ACCESSORIES .1 Molded neoprene gaskets (at exterior glazing in aluminum frames) shall be of proper profile and hardness required for watertight construction comply with ASTM D2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. .2 Oil -based channel glazing compound (at interior glazing) and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. Products meeting this specification include "Tremglaze" as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Beachwood, Ohio, and "Glazing Compounds M242" as manufactured by the Pecora Chemical Corp., Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. .3 Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: .1 Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 -90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. .2 Spacers: Neoprene, 40 -50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 GLASS AND GLAZING SECTION 8C -2 .3 Compressible Filler Rod: Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength for 25% deflection. .4 Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. .2 Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. .3 Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirement are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives directs otherwise. .4 Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course to the heel -bead compound, it any. .2 Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 square inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/8- inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. .3 Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations. .4 Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass, which is tempered, laminated, heat strengthened, or coated. .5 Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. .6 Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.3 CLEANING .1 Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. .2 Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system. .3 At completion of work and just prior to final acceptance by Owner, clean both sides of all glass. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SECTION 8D -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A283 - Standard Specification for Low And Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. .2 ASTM 8221- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. .3 ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Difference across the Specimen. .4 ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .2 Green Seal Standards .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The extent of aluminum work under this section is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for location, details, etc., for the work, which includes, but is not necessarily limited to: .1 Aluminum frames and framing. .2 Aluminum closures. .3 Aluminum clad structural or miscellaneous steel framing. .4 Preparation of aluminum framed openings for automatic entrance /exit doors and coordinating their installation where required. .5 Caulking specified for work of this section. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Steel channel framing to receive aluminum tube closures: Section 5F - Cold Rolled Structural Metals. .2 Glass and Glazing: Section 8C. .3 Sliding Automatic Entrance Exit Doors: Section 8F. .4 Curtain Wall Systems, Section 8B. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Drawings: Plans, elevations and details show spacing of members as well as profile and similar dimensional requirements of aluminum entrances and storefront work. 2010 SSBS Renovation Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Construction Project Manager's sole judgment such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances. 1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. .2 Provide approved shop drawings to installer of automatic entrance /exit doors where work includes preparation of aluminum framed openings for doors. .3 Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish on 6 -inch long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6 -inch square sheets. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Kawneer Co. Inc. .2 EFCO Corporation. .3 Tubelite Inc. .4 Vistawall Architectural Products. .5 YKK -AP America, Inc." 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated: .1 Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). .2 Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). .3 Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. .4 Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS .1 Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded - aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforces as required to support imposed loads: .1 Construction: Interior vestibule frames and windows: Nonthermal. 2 inch x 4 -1/2 inch frame profile with 1/4 inch glazing. Acceptable manufacturers are: .1 Kawneer - Tri -Fab 450 Wall System. .2 EFCO - 401. .3 Tubelite - 4500 series. .4 Vistawall - FG2000. .5 YKK - YES 45 F - S. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SECTION 8D -2 .6 Finish: Clear anodized finish system per AAMA 611. .2 With 1 inch insulated glazing, center or forward set, acceptable manufacturer's are: .1 Kawneer - Tri -Fab VG 451T. .2 EFCO - System 403. .3 Tubelite - T14000 Series. .4 Vistawall - FG -3000 - Thermal. .5 YKK -AP - YES 45 F -T. .6 Finish: Clear anodized finish system per AAMA 611. .2 Mild steel framing operations shall conform to ASTM A283 Grade "C." All steel to receive 1 coat of zinc chromate primer after fabrication. Field welds and scratches shall receive 1 touch -up coat after installation. .3 Fasteners: Aluminum alloy 245 -T4, or bronze. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide Phillips head countersunk head machine screws for exposed fasteners. .4 Flashing: 20 -gauge aluminum, appropriate finish to match. .5 Sealant: Tremco "Mono," GE "Silpruf' or equal. Color to match Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .1 Comply with GS -36. .6 Workmanship: .1 All work shall be straight and true, free from warpage, and of highest standard of material and workmanship. As far as possible, all work shall be performed in the shop. Any departure from indicated details shall be submitted for approval to the Owner's Representative. Joints, corners, copes and miters shall be accurately cut, filed, and fitted and framed together at contact points. All surfaces of joints and connections shall match the finish of adjacent metal and be approved by the Owner's Representative. Provide all clips, fastenings and reinforcements required for installation of all work. Removable members shall be carefully formed and fitted. So far as possible, all fastenings shall be concealed. Those, which are not, shall match finish of adjoining metal. All joints shall be watertight. Provide approved type bituminous insulation between aluminum and dissimilar metals or cement mortar. .2 All frames, transoms, and mullions, etc., shall be constructed, sized, dimensioned, and reinforced as required to provide rigid construction. Joints shall be of the hairline type. Reinforce with steel plate for all hardware and accessories, including surface applied items. Include all sealing and caulking between metal to metal contacts, between frames, mullions, etc., to provide airtight and weathertight joints. .7 Aluminum Framing System: This Contractor shall furnish all necessary material, labor and equipment for the complete installation of the following: .1 Glass framing, vertical and horizontal; transition members connecting these components, adapters and mountings for trim moldings and facing materials. Provide aluminum tube members to be installed over steel channel framing as indicated. .2 Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters and mountings shall be extruded of aluminum with alloy and temper consistent with the method of manufacture. These members shall be of 6068 -T5- extruded aluminum alloy in compliance with ASTM B221 alloy G.S. 10A -T5. .3 All screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components shall be of stainless steel, or plated or corrosion - resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. .4 Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines, and no projecting stops or face joints except where snap -on stops are indicated or required. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass and panels by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass. Adapters and mountings for trim moldings and face materials shall be designed so as to permit the installation of these products in their regular manner, and shall not interfere with the normal assembly and weathering of the grid framing. .1 Joints, water stops, sealants as recommended by the manufacturer. Joints between framing members and adjoining metals made watertight by caulking with caulking compounds, or other approved sealant material. .8 Protection: Provide required protection to prevent damage to finished work. Provide protective barriers as required to prevent damage, after erection, resulting from work of other trades. Use strippable rubber paint on erected work and gummed paper on shop- fabricated work. 2.4 DOORS .1 Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation: .1 Door Construction: 1 -3/4 inch (44.5 mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick, extruded- aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. .2 Door Design: Narrow stile; vertical 2 -1/8 inch; top rail 2- 1/4 inch and bottom rail 3 -7/8 inch. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SECTION 8D -3 .1 Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. .3 Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded - aluminum stops and performance gaskets: .1 Provide nonremobeable glazing stops on outside f door. 2.5 DOOR HARDWARE .1 General: Provide heavy -duty units in sizes and tepes recommended by entrance system and hardware manufacturer for entrances. .2 Hardware: .1 Standard Push -Pull Doors .1 Bottom center pivots for use with concealed closer with 90 degree opener. .2 Standard concealed, overhead closer. .3 Deadlock on active leaf; flushbolts in inactive leaf. .4 1/2 inch x 4 inch aluminum mill finish threshold. .5 Door holder on each leaf: see construction documents. .6 Weatherstripping on exterior doors: compressible bulb gasket. .7 Aluminum Rails: see construction documents. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Field Measurement Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings, and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. 3.2 ERECTION .1 All items under this heading shall be set in their correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work. .2 All joints between interior metal, masonry and between interior glass framing and mullion members shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. All materials shall be screwed in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Where moldings are joined, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed joint. .3 After erection, the Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of the framing from damage by grinding and polishing machines, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. .4 All framing, accessories, etc. shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2010 SSBS Renovation .5 Remove and replace members that are marred or show evidence of deterioration of finish. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .1 After installation, metal and glass surfaces of the walls shall be cleaned on both interior and exterior, of all mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. .2 This Contractor shall be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent This Subcontractor shall be held responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials. .3 After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted by the Contractor. Thereafter, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain protection and provide final cleaning. .1 Cleaning of all frames to be complete a minimum of 1 week before store opening. 3.4 WARRANTY .1 For all work of this section provide warranty that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first class in every respect, and that Contractor will make good at his own expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within 1 -year from date of acceptance of the building. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Water Leakage: Manufacturer to check the completed assembly according to procedures in Field Hose Test of AAMA 501. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in test. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 SPECIAL DOORS SECTION 8E -1 OWNER HAS ESTABLISHED A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH ELIASON CORPORATION FOR PURCHASING SPECIAL DOORS FOR TOYS "R" US. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL DOORS AND FRAMES THROUGH THIS PROGRAM. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CALL JOE DUSENBERY, EUASON CORPORATION, P.O. BOX 2128, KALAMAZOO, MI 49003 -2128. PHONE: (800) 828 -3655, FAX: (800) 828 -3577. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for complete installation of the special doors indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 Special doors include: .1 Impact doors (verify color with TRU /BRU PM). .2 Pre - finished black frames. .3 All fasteners, accessories, etc. .3 Contractor is responsible for ordering and coordination of delivery, shipping, storage, installation and protection of special doors and frames. .4 These doors are to be an Owner supplied item. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of impact doors including elevators, detail sections, anchorages, reinforcement, and glazing. .2 Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide copy of written installation instructions by manufacturer. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 IMPACT DOORS .1 Impact Doors: Model P11PLUS double - acting service doors as manufactured by Eliason Corporation, Kalamazoo, ML Doors shall be provided complete with all hardware and accessories and frame. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install where indicated in accordance with details, approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. .2 Installation includes setting and installing frames as part of impact door installation. .3 Adjust and clean all doors and frames and leave in first class operating condition. 3.2 WARRANTY .1 For all work in this section provide warranty that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first class in every respect, and that the Contractor will make good at his expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within 1 year from date of acceptance of the project. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION *8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE EXIT DOORS *SECTION 8F -1 THE OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH BESAM ENTRANCE SOLUTIONS, INC. FOR PURCHASING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS. THIS INCLUDES PURCHASE OF DOOR AND DOOR GLAZING. INSTALLATION OF DOORS BY A LOCAL BESAM INSTALLER IS PROVIDED BY OWNER. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CONTACT BESAM ENTRANCE SOLUTIONS, NATIONAL ACCOUNTS. TOLL FREE (800) 792 -2638, PHONE (609) 443- 5800, FAX (609) 443 -3550, EMAIL: nationalaccounts @besam- usa.com PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK (By Contractor) .1 Work included: .1 Preparation of opening and power for installation of owner supplied electrically operated automatic entrance /exit doors and frames. Doors, frames, automatic sliding door operators, motion detector, hold -open safety beam, header box enclosures and accessories for the sliding doors indicated to receive such equipment and all automatic entrance /exit glazing to be provided by local Horton distributor as part of owner - supplied national account. Joint sealants between doorframes and adjacent surfaces furnished and installed by GC. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (By Contractor) .1 Aluminum frames and windows: Section 8B (including preparation of opening for door units plumb and square, and all required transoms, if indicated, above door header boxes). .2 Glazing: Section 8C. .3 Masterkeyed Cylinders: Section 8I. .4 Electrical Connections: Division 16. .5 The Contractor shall prepare all openings required for the installation of work of this Section. 2010 SSBS Renovation 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and standard details for automatic entrance /exit doors, including fabrication, finishing, hardware, operators, accessories and other components of the work. Include roughing -in diagrams, wiring diagrams, parts lists, and maintenance instructions, as well as certified test data. .2 Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and installers of related work, promptly as needed for coordination of automatic entrance installation. Expedite immediately to avoid any delay. .3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of automatic entrance /exit doors and associated components of the work. Indicate anchors, joint system, expansion provision, hardware, and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Comply with most current edition of standards for materials, installation, etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER/AUTOMATIC UNITS .1 Manufacturer. Besam Unislide 2 automatic sliding doors. Size, quantity and location as indicated on the drawings. .1 Automatic doors shall be factory glazed. .2 Compliance with ANSI A156.10. .3 Egress Configuration: Complete outswinging breakaway feature for all sliding doors and sidelites. .4 Provide additional horizontal muntins where indicated on drawings. .5 Sizes as indicated on drawings. 2.2 ALUMINUM FINISHES .1 Finish: .1 Fluorocarbon Three -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three -coat thermocured system complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color coat and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not Tess than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight. .2 Color as indicated on drawings. .3 Interior Door Finish: Aluminum shall have a standard finish of AA- M12- C22 -A31 (204R1, clear). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Contractor is responsible for ordering, shipping, receiving and storage of door units. .2 Contractor is responsible for coordinating with Besam for subcontracting installation through local Besam distributor. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION *8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE EXIT DOORS *SECTION 8F -2 3.2 GUARANTEE .1 For all work in this section, provide manufacturers standard two -year warranty and provide written guarantee that all completed installations are in total compliance to manufacturers requirements and that contractor will make good, at his expense, any and all defects regarding all unit installations. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8 FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 8I -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 All hardware items shall be furnished by the Contractor including Arm -A -Dor Exit Devices and Norton Door Closers as noted on the Door Schedule. All hardware items shall be installed by the Contractor. .2 All hardware shall comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) requirements, or per local accessibility code requirements. .3 Lock Installation: .1 All locks shall have Best cylinders and a Best construction core keyed alike. .2 Automatic entrance doors and Detex alarms will be furnished with Best cylinders preinstalled. Contractor must key with a Best construction core. .3 Provide padlock for truck dock doors, Section 81. .4 All hardware shall be neatly packed and labeled with identification as to where it is to be applied. .5 All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts, and fastenings, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. .6 All hardware that fastens to metal doors and frames shall be made to template and attached with machine screws. .7 The Hardware Contractor shall fumish and ship templates to other contractors as directed. All hardware shall be shipped to the job site. .8 Provide a competent representative who shall inspect and direct the method of setting, applying and adjusting all hardware. It is not required that the Representative shall remain constantly at the building, but shall properly inspect all the work in the application of hardware, as it progresses. This representative shall be at all times easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may promptly attend to items in connection with the hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit hardware schedule organized by "Hardware Sets" to indicate specifically the products to be furnished for each item required on each door. .1 Include catalog cutsheets of each item. .2 Hardware schedule to use same door and frame reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY .1 All hardware items shall be warranted by their manufacturer as stated in their catalogs. Vendor shall assume all responsibility. .2 Warranties shall be in writing by the manufacturer and shall be delivered to the Owner. The warranty shall begin from the date of acceptance of the building. .3 Hardware vendor shall make a final check of all installed hardware items together with the Owner's Representative and Contractor, prior to final acceptance of the building. .4 Defective hardware within the warranted period must be replaced at Contractor's expense, including labor for removal and reinstallation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .1 Items supplied by Contractor. Refer to drawings for Door Schedule. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Refer to Section 6A for installation responsibility. .2 For exterior out swinging doors, closers shall be mounted inside on push side of door. Interior doors shall have closers mounted on the pull. side of the doors unless otherwise indicated. Verify mounting location of closer with the Construction Project Manager before closer installation. .3 After installation, contractor is to adjust closer to comply with ADAAG local accessibility code requirements, including: .1 The sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take a least three (3) seconds to move a point three inches (3 ") from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. .2 The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be five pounds /foot (5 lb/f). END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 8* TRUCK DOCK DOORS *SECTION 8J -1 TOYS "R" US ESTABLISHED A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION FOR ROLUNG STEEL DOORS. THE CONTRACTOR WILL PURCHASE ROLUNG STEEL DOORS THROUGH THIS PROGRAM. FOR COORDINATION INFORMATION, PLEASE CONTACT ANGELA BURGESS P.O. BOX 809046, DALLAS, TEXAS 75380 -9046, Tel. (800) 972 -1730, Ext. 661. NOTE: FOR THE OVERHEAD DOORS, THE COST INCLUDES DOOR INSTALLATION BY LOCAL OVERHEAD DOOR INSTALLER. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot -Dip Process. .2 ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Work included: Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing manual operated, rolling steel or sectional overhead insulated doors and related supporting steel indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Padlocks: Section 81. .2 Door seals and dock bumpers: Sections 11A and 11B. .3 The Contractor shall prepare all openings required for the installation of work of this section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER/DOORS .1 Manufacturer. Overhead Door Corp. Model UFN -2, Series 625. Size, quantity and location as indicated on the Drawings. .2 Units designed for maximum deflection of 1/120 of opening width under wind load of 20 psf, ASTM E330. .3 Curtain: Flat slat design with 22 -gauge exterior steel slats and 24 -gauge interior steel slats. Insulation to be CFC -free foamed -in -place polyurethane insulation. Comply with ASTM A653. .4 Endlocks: Provide manufacturer's standard to maintain slat alignment. .5 Finish: Provide galvanized slats and hood in compliance with ASTM A653. Provide factory prime painted surface prepared for finish painting in field, where finish painting is indicated on drawings. .6 Weatherseals: Provide complete assembly including bottom, guide, lintel, and hood seals. .7 Bottom Bar. Provide 2 galvanized steel angles, back -to- back, to reinforce curtain in guides. Finish same as slats. .8 Guides, Brackets, Counterbalance Mechanism, and Hood: Provide manufacturer's standard. .9 Manual Operation: Chain hoist. .10 Locking: Interior bottom bar slide boltlock arranged to accommodate a padlock. .11 Wall- Mounting Condition: Interior face mounted. .12 Vision Lite: 3" x 5/8" with double acrylic plexiglas covers as indicated on drawings. .13 Door Sizes: As indicated on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Contractor to coordinate with door manufacturer for subcontracting all installation through local door distributor. 3.2 GUARANTEE .1 For all work in this section, provide written guarantee that all completed installations are in total compliance to manufacturer's requirements and that contractor shall make good, at this expense, any and all defects regarding all units installation. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 9B -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. .2 ASTM C79 - Standard Specification for Treated Core and Non - Treated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board. .3 ASTM C475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. .4 ASTM C630 - Standard Specification for Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. .5 ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Non - Structural Steel Framing Members. .6 ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. .7 ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .8 ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self - Piercing Topping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. .9 ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Budding Partitions and Elements. .2 Code of Federal Regulations, (CFR) Title 40 - Protection of Environment. .1 Part 59 - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products. .3 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 This section includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of gypsum drywall work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .2 .3 1.4 .1 Cold Rolled Structural Metals: Section 5F. Carpentry, Wood Studs, Blocking, Sheathing: Section 6A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire - Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire- resistance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authorities and codes. Provide materials, accessories and application procedures, which have been listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Tolerances for Drywall Work: Do not exceed a variation of 3/16 -inch in 8 -feet from plumb, level and flat (all directions); and do nqt exceed 1/16 -inch offset of planes at joints between panels, shim panels as necessary to comply with tolerances. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 In cold weather, the building shall be heated during the application of the gypsum wallboard and joint treatment to maintain a uniform temperature in the range of not less than 55 degrees F. for a minimum period of 48 -hours prior to, during, and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment, materials or bonding adhesives. Ventilation shall be provided to eliminate excessive moisture. .2 Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. in building prior to drywall application for a period of 48 hours. The temperature shall be maintained for the entire wallboard and joint treatment application. Ventilation should be provided to eliminate excessive moisture, and control drying time of joint compound. Avoid drafts to prevent too rapid drying of joint compounds. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Steel Drywall Framing: Studs and runners, screw -type complying with ASTM C645. Provide studs of the size indicated with runners of compatible size. Fabricate from electro- galvanized steel with zinc coating. .2 Gauge of Metal for Studs: .1 25- Gauge: Use for all conditions unless otherwise indicated or specified herein. .2 20- Gauge: Use for all partitions over 10 -feet - fl- inches high and for other locations indicated or specified herein. .3 18- Gauge: Use for conditions indicated and for other locations indicated or specified herein. .4 All metal framing members designated "S1" on the drawings are specified in Section SF. .3 Rigid Furring Channels: Screw type hat - shaped furring channels complying with ASTM C645, fabricate from 25- gauge electro- galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard zinc protective coating. Sizes as indicated on drawings. .4 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be 3/4 -inch standard galvanized cold rolled lathing channels. .5 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be 1 -1/2- inches (0.475 - pounds per foot) standard galvanized channel runners for suspended ceiling work. .6 Ceiling Hangers for runners shall be No. 8 -gauge steel galvanized annealed wire. .7 Ceiling Tie Wire shall be 18 -gauge galvanized annealed wire. 8 Manufacturer. Same as gypsum wallboard manufacturer, or approved equal. .9 Gypsum Drywall Board: .1 Exposed Drywall Surfaces: Provide gypsum wallboard (48- inches wide) complying with ASTM C36 with paper face surface suitable to receive decorated finish Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 IDMSION 9 GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 9B -2 and with long edges tapered to receive manufacturer's standard joint treatment, unless otherwise shown. .2 Moisture - Resistant Applications: Where shown on drawings, provide moisture- resistant gypsum backing board and /or face board with core and paper facings treated to resist moisture to comply with ASTM C630. .3 Fire -Rated Applications: Provide either regular to Type "X" gypsum wallboard, as required to meet the rating for the construction shown. .4 Exterior Sheathing Applications: Provided exterior gypsum sheathing with water - resistant core compliant to ASTM C79. .5 Manufacturers: Provide gypsum wallboard produced by one of the following or approved equal. .1 Georgia Pacific Corporation. .2 National Gypsum Company. .3 U.S. Gypsum Company. .10 Drywall Accessory Materials: .1 Fasteners: Provide 1 -inch and 1 -1/2 -inch, Type S drywall screws. Comply with ASTM C1002. .2 Drywall Control Joints: For long continuous runs of drywall systems, provide 1 piece joint assembly of non - corrosive metal with continuous unperforated expansion strip for insertion into joint and perforated flanges for attachment to face of wallboard. Material shall be U.S.G. Control Joint No. 093 or approved equal. Space joints at 30 -feet - 0- inches maximum. .3 Metal Trim Accessories: Provide trim accessories of the sizes required for the drywall applications shown and specified, fabricated from galvanized steel. At external corners, provide metal corner bead with smooth rigid nose and perforated and knurled metal flanges. U.S.G. Dur -A -Bead or approved equal. .4 For protection of exposed wallboard edge openings and where drywall abuts or intersects dissimilar construction, provide metal casing bead trim. Beaded nose with exposed flange knurled for joint treatment. Where kerfed jambs are shown, provide trim with special leg designed for insertion into jamb slot. U.S.G. 200A Metal J -Trim or approved equal. .5 Joint Tapes: Perforated fiber type complying with ASTM C475, U.S.G. Sheetrock brand or approved equal. .6 Joint Compound: Adhesive with or without fillers complying with ASTM C475. Provide in dry powder form or pre -mixed ready for application. .7 Two Compound Treatment Provide compatible joint compounds; one compound for bedding and the other compound for finishing joints. Sheetrock brand compound system or approved equal. .8 Water resistant joint compound where required at joints, cut edges, etc. of water resistant backing board, subject to compliance with requirements. .9 Acoustical Sealant .1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with GS -36, products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to, the following: .1 Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: .1 Pecora Corp.; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. .2 United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. .2 Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Comply with ASTM C834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. .11 Miscellaneous Materials: .1 Wall standard reinforcing strips: 18 -gauge by 6- inches wide horizontal sheet metal reinforcing 3 rows horizontal and continuous across metal studs, behind all gypsum drywall shown to have wall standards. .2 Drywall Blanket Insulation: Where shown and where needed to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) and where needed for fire- rating indicated, provide semi - rigid, spun mineral fiber blankets without membrane covering, complying with ASTM C665, Type 1, of 3 -inch thickness, 2.5 p.c.f. density tested by the drywall manufacturer for the required ratings. Where shown and where needed for Thermal Insulation to achieve minimum R -value of 11. .3 Access Panels shall be "Milcor," Style M standard access doors and located where shown on Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings. .4 Drywall Sealant: At sound rated applications, provide non - drying, non - shrinking, non - migrating sealant recommended by the drywall manufacturer. Provide sealant, which is paintable wherever exposed to view. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF STEEL DRYWALL FRAMING .1 Manufacturer's instructions: Unless otherwise shown or specified, install metal framing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. .2 Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Provide Continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 2 -feet o.c. spacing for nail or power- driven fasteners. Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner. Use continuous gasket sealers at floor, ceilings, columns and walls of dissimilar materials. .2 Height of Partitions: Terminate top of partitions as shown on drawings. .3 For gypsum drywall applications, space studs not to exceed 16- inches o.c. for partitions to 20 -feet high, space studs not to exceed 12- inches o.c. for partitions over 20 -feet high. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 9B -3 .4 Provide additional studs to support inside corners at partition intersections and corners, and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions, both side of control joints and adjacent to all openings. .5 Use full - length studs between runner tracks. .6 Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and intersections, and adjacent to openings using 3/8 -inch self- tapping screws on both flanges of studs. .7 Provide rough framing at openings using full - length studs at jambs, horizontal header, and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw attachment to jamb studs. Install cut to length intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections at same spacing as full - length studs. .8 Where vertical control joints are shown at jamb lines, provide additional vertical studs located on opening side of jambs and not less than 1/2 -inch from jamb studs. Do not fasten studs to tracks or jamb studs. .9 Where solid core wood doors, or double doors, or doors weighing less than 50- pounds, provide 2, 20 -gauge studs at each jamb and one additional stud not more than 6- inches from jamb studs. At doors weighing more than 50- pounds, substitute 18 -gauge studs. .10 Provide 20 -gauge stud horizontal reinforcement for attachment of plumbing fixtures or handrails or grab bars for toilet rooms. .11 Drywall Ceiling Framing: .1 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be not over 12- inches o.c. Install with metal furring clips. .2 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be spaced at right angles to the 3/4 -inch channels, shall not be over 4- feet o.c. .3 Ceiling hangers for runners shall be spaced not over 4 -feet o.c. in both directions. Hangers shall be securely anchored to floor construction above. Provide additional hanger support for ceiling mounted fixtures. .4 Ceiling tie wire shall be not less than four strands at each bearing point. .12 Metal Furring Framing: .1 General: Provide metal furring where shown, as specified, and as required to provide support for drywall. Where size and spacing of furring members is not shown for support, do not exceed the minimum requirements of the Gypsum Construction Handbook by U.S.G., latest edition. .2 Where control or expansion joints are shown, provide separate supports on each side of joint. Do not bridge joints. .13 Wall /Standard Support System: .1 Install 3 rows of horizontal sheet metal reinforcing strips, behind all gypsum wall board where metal wall standard locations are shown on the drawings. .2 Locate sheet metal strip reinforcing at centerlines as indicated on drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL BOARD .1 Standards: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C840. .1 Provide drywall of the thickness shown. .2 Form control joints in drywall construction as specified. Allow 1/2 -inch continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall boards to allow for insertion of control joint trim accessory. .2 Single Layer Applications: .1 Partition/Walls: Apply gypsum board vertically using floor -to- ceiling length boards with vertical joints located over supports, and offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partition /walls. Use type S drywall screws at 12- inches o.c. .2 Ceilings: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to supports with end joints located over supports. Use maximum practical length boards to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints in alternate courses of boards and locate as far away from center of ceiling as possible. Use Type S drywall screws at 12- inches o.c. .3 Wood Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with annular ring nails or screws at the Contractor's option. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed nail spacings of 8 inches o.c. for walls and 7- inches o.c. for ceilings, or screw spacings of 12- inches o.c. (wall and ceilings). .4 Metal Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12- inches o.c. spacing. Screws shall be power- driven and screw heads shall provide slight depression below the surface of the board. .5 Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install moisture resistant gypsum backing board. Apply with uncut long edge at bottom of work, and space 1/4 -inch above fixture lips. Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water - resistant adhesive or, where recommended by backing board manufacturer, with water - resistant joint compound. .3 Double Layer Application: .1 Fasten both layers to supports with screws in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; but for base layer, do not exceed 8- inches o.c. spacing at edges and 12- inches o.c. spacing at intermediate supports, and for face layer do not exceed 16- inches o.c. spacing along supports. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions and offset not less than 12- inches between layers. .4 Sound Rated Applications: Comply with requirements indicated by manufacturer to achieve required ratings, as proven by his certified laboratory test results. For sound -rated construction, comply with the following: .1 Partitions: Provide continuous beads of sealant at juncture of both faces of runners or plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever drywall abuts dissimilar materials. Install sealant prior to installation of drywall boards. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 9B -4 .2 Control Joints: Provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of drywall panels at control joints. Seal prior to installation of surface - applied control joint accessories and locate at proper depth in joint to allow for insertion of expansion strip. .3 Openings and Cutouts: Seal open spaces between drywall and electric boxes, fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or openings in electric boxes and similar devices built into the drywall work. .4 Partition Insulation: Install drywall blanket insulation for sound attenuation. Completely fill space between studs to full height of partition /wall. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work, which penetrates partition /wall. Attach to back face of drywall with adhesive application. .5 Thermal Insulation: Friction Fit Thermal Insulation between studs unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .6 Drywall Finishing: .1 Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, corners and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim accessory flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound as specified in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Form true, level or plumb lines, without joints, fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories or defects visible after application of field- applied decoration. .2 Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior corners and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. .3 Where open spaces of more than 1/16 -inch width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), pre -fill joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. .4 Reinforce external corners of drywall work with corner beads. .5 Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Use fasteners, which will be fully concealed by joint compound fill, applied over flanges. .6 Edge Trim: Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single unjointed lengths. .7 Insert control joints strips into open joint and staple flanges to drywall in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .8 Application of Joint Compounds: After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. Allow drying time between applications of joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the relative humidity and temperature levels at the time of application. In no case, allow less than 24 -hours drying time between applications of joint compound. Apply not less than 2 separate coats of joint compound over joints, fastener heads and metal flanges. (2 coats are in addition to set and skim coat mentioned above.) Sand between coats as necessary. Final coat and subsequent sanding shall leave gypsum wallboard ready for decorator finish. .9 Joint compound treatment is not required above suspended ceilings where partition /walls are shown or specified to extend to structural deck or ceiling above suspended ceiling, unless partition is visible through ceiling grille. .7 Completion and Protection of Finished Work: Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures for the protection of completed drywall work from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. At the completion of this contractor's work, all unused materials, tools, scaffolds, and equipment shall be removed from the structure. All work installed by others, which is dirty due to the drywall installation shall be cleaned and restored to its original condition. All drywall construction shall be warranted against. defective materials and workmanship for a period of 1 -year as called for in the General Provisions. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE SECTION 9C -1 .1 The general provision of Division 1 applies to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior). .2 ASTM D1546 - Standard Practice for Testing the Performance of Clear Floor Sealers. .2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) - Tile Installation Standard. .1 ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile With Dry- Set Portland Cement Mortar on Latex - Portland Cement Mortar. .2 ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. .3 ANSI A118.4 - Latex - Portland Cement Mortar. .4 ANSI A118.6 - Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. .5 ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. .3 Tile Council of America (TCA) Installation Guidelines - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. .4 Green Seal Standards .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing ceramic tile work and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .1 Unglazed floor tile and base, glazed wall tile, and floor sealer shall be provided and installed under the work of this section. 1.4 .1 .2 Vinyl transition strips where ceramic tile abuts carpet specified in Section 9F. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials. .2 Referenced Standards: Comply with most current edition of standards referenced with materials, installation products, and installation methods specified herein. .3 Tile Council Of America, Inc.: Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, most current edition, except as expressly modified herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit one full size sample for each type of tile and for each color and texture required. 2010 SSBS Renovation 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING .1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 The installer shall examine the conditions under which ceramic tile is to be installed and advise the Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Do no proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work implies acceptance of surfaces to be tiled. .2 The installer shall include flash patching and leveling of the concrete substrate as necessary to properly install flooring materials of this section. The installer shall examine the condition of the substrate during construction to assure such work is performed to its satisfaction. Where existing slabs are cracked, repair crack with epoxy patching mortar. Variations in floor level shall not exceed 1/8 -inch in 10 -feet. .3 Surfaces to be tiled shall be clean and free from foreign matter, including curing compounds, membranes, oil, grease, wax and dust. Accomplish using mechanical sanding, scraping or chipping. Clean with acid, flushed and neutralized. Smooth, steel troweled surfaces must be roughened to insure a satisfactory bond. .4 Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide build -up. .5 Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days after completion, unless higher temperatures required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. Maintain adequate lighting and ventilation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .1 ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of tile indicated. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. .2 ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with installation products and materials indicated. .3 Colors, Textures and Patterns: Provide only tile colors, types and patterns as scheduled and shown on drawings (see materials list). .4 Mounting: Provide factory- mounted tile wherever possible; provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer. 2.2 TILE .1 Floor Tile: Provide floor tile of Size /Color /Pattern: As shown on drawings and schedules. .2 Wall Tile: Provide wall tile of Size /Color /Pattern: As shown on drawings and schedules. .3 Trim Units: Provide tile trim units by the same manufacturer as adjoining flat floor tile and to comply with following requirements: Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 CERAMIC AND P ORCELAIN TILE SECTION 9C -2 .1 Size: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining floor tiles (6" high corner and cove base tile). .2 Shapes: As required to match adjacent floor or wall tile. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS .1 Thin -Set Portland Cement Mortar: Where thin -set Portland cement mortar applications are indicated, use the following unless otherwise required. .1 Latex - Portland cement mortar. ANSI A118.4. Use specific product as recommended by tile manufacturer. 2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS .1 Latex - Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary pre - blended compound of Portland cement selected and graded aggregates, color pigments and chemical additives gouged with latex additive to comply with manufacturer's directions. Comply with ANSI A118.6 (see materials list). .1 Use latex additive in grout, which is compatible with latex additive in latex- Portland cement mortar. .2 Wall Tile Grout: Fungus and Mildew - Resistant grout by Laticrete or equal. .3 Water. Clean, potable, free from deleterious substances. .4 Floor Tile Grout: Sanded joint filler by Laticrete or equal. .5 Color. As indicated on drawings. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS .1 Marble saddles shall be white Vermont marble, even color and rubbed finish of profile, length, and width to match doorjamb. See details on drawings. Set snugly between doorjambs. Set saddles in thin bed of Portland cement mixture and grout. .1 Thickness: 1/2 -inch. .2 Comply with ASTM C503. .2 Tile Cleaner. Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred Street, Alexandria, VA 22134, or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90029. .3 Floor Sealer: Provide a 10 percent concentration of polymerized silicone resins in hydrocarbon solvents, complying with ASTM D1546. .1 Comply with GS -36. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION .1 Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Do not proceed with tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in referenced tile installation standard. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Floor must be thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to application. Remove and scrape off all spots, projections and deleterious materials. Flash patch and level out floor as may be necessary for proper installation and as per TCA recommendations. .2 Comply with applicable parts of ANSI 108 Series of Tile Installation Standards. .3 Comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. .4 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Use recommended trim units at all intersections and conditions. .5 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. .6 Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, walls and trim are same size, along at least two of the longest opposing in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. .7 Grout Tile to comply with referenced installation standards, using grout materials indicated. Mix and install proprietary components to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 3.3 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS .1 Porcelain Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for thin -set method, TCA installation methods related to types of sub -floor construction, and grout types. .1 Thin -set Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.5. .2 Concrete Sub - Floors, Interior. TCA F113. .3 Grout: Latex - Portland cement ANSI A108.10. .2 Porcelain Floor Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements of ceramic tile manufacturer, and setting mortar and grout manufacturers directions and specifications. .1 Joints shall have consistent width, adhering strictly to the layout indicated on the drawings. 3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHOD (INTERIOR): .1 Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for thin -set methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types. .1 Thin -Set Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.5. .2 Wood or Metal Studs, Interior. TCA W243. .3 Grout: Latex - Portland cement ANSI A108.10. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9 CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE SECTION 9C -3 3.5 CONTROL JOINTS .1 Prime joint surfaces with specified primer. Surfaces must be clean, dry, and free of foreign matter. .2 Apply specified backer rod allowing for proper depth of sealant bead. .3 Thoroughly blend sealant components in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. .4 After mixing, apply sealant to clean, dry joint surfaces using knife, trowel, or caulking gun. Tool immediately after application of sealant. .5 Clean misplaced sealant immediately using methyl ethyl ketone, toluene, or xylol. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .1 Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use specified cleaning solution as per manufacturers instructions. .2 Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. .3 Remove and replace all cracked, chipped or misaligned tile units. .4 Sealer Coat: Upon cleaning of tile floors, apply heavy coat of silicone floor sealer to floor and base areas as indicated below. Ventilate and allow to dry. Apply sealer coat to tile and grout joints in Men's and Women's toilets. .5 Protection: Protect installed tile work during construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS SECTION 9D -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM C367 - Standard Test Methods for Strength Properties of Prefabricated Architectural Acoustical Tile or Lay -In Ceiling Panels. .2 ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings. .3 ASTM C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. .4 ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .5 ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Spacious During Sound Absorption Tests. .6 ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing acoustical tile ceilings, suspension systems and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .2 The extent of the work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Types of ceilings specified in this section include acoustical panel ceilings and plastic egg crate ceiling panels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 The acoustical tile, suspension systems and related items shall meet or exceed the following standards: .1 Comply with ASTM C367, C635, and E84. .2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Index - Where acoustical ceilings are components of fire rated assemblies, provide complete ceiling systems complying with UL design numbers corresponding with construction assemblies indicated and identified ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. .3 CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook - Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association. .2 Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. .3 Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system components and partition system. 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and each suspension system. .2 Samples: Set of 6 -inch by 4 -inch samples for each lay -in unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. .3 Set of 12 -inch long samples of each exposed runner and molding. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Deliver materials to the project site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's name and specific product identification. .2 Store materials in a dry place with continuous support to avoid warping units and protect against damage, direct sunlight, or surface contamination from other areas. .3 Handle materials carefully to avoid damaging or discoloring. Replace materials, which have been damaged or discolored. .4 Allow ceiling units to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content prior to installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS .1 Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products only of the manufacturer's indicated. .2 Acoustic Ceiling Tile - ACT 1: 24- inches x 48- inches x 5/8- inch tile, "Fine Fissured" Design No. 608 with plastic coating as manufactured by Armstrong Ceilings. No substitutions will be allowed unless critical delivery schedules cannot be met. Refer to Room Finish Schedule for location. .1 Color. Refer to drawings. .2 LR: 0.82 .3 NRC: 0.55 .4 CAC: 40 .3 Acoustic Ceiling Tile - ACT 2: 24- inches x 48- inches x 5/8- inch tile, "Fine Fissured" Design No. 1729 -WH with plastic coating as manufactured by Armstrong Ceilings. No substitutions will be allowed unless critical delivery schedules cannot be met. Refer to Room Finish Schedule for location. .1 Color. Refer to drawings. .2 LR: 0.85 .3 NRC: 0.55 .4 CAC: 35 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING .1 Metal Suspension Systems: Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish specified which comply with applicable ASTM C635 requirements. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS SECTION 9D -2 .2 Manufacturer Provide ceiling suspension systems by same manufacturer as acoustical ceiling panel manufacturer, .3 Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system complying with ASTM C635. Classify cross tees as main tees. .4 Main tee shall have 15/16 -inch exposed flange with a rolled cap and 1 -1/2- inches deep web with double web design. Wall moldings shall be angle shape. .5 Finish of exposed surfaces: Matte white. .6 Attachment Devices: Tested for a carrying capacity of not less than 5 times the design load involved. .7 Hangers: As recommended by manufacturer to comply with the specified structural classification (ASTM C635). Wire hangers, if recommended, to be not less than 12 -gauge (0.016 -inch diameter), galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire. .8 Primary and Secondary Supporting Members: As further specified and required suspension systems. .9 Assembly Devices and Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. .10 Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. .11 Provide hold down clips for fire rated ceilings and elsewhere as required by codes or indicated on drawings. .12 Ceiling Insulation Batts: 3 -1/2 -inch fiberglass 2 -foot by 4 -foot panel batts (if required). PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION .1 Installer must examine the conditions under which the suspended ceiling work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with suspended ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. .2 Installer shall consult other trades and Contractors involved prior to start of ceiling work, to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation until interferences have been resolved to the satisfaction of the installer. .3 Coordinate layout with other work, which penetrates or is supported by ceiling suspension system. .4 Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less- than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. .5 Refer to reflected ceiling plan of main sales area. Layout ceiling precisely as shown. Consult with Project Manager or Owner's representative prior to start of work to assure that ceiling grid layout will conform to ceiling plan and Owner's intentions. 2010 SSBS Renovation 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Fire Rated Assemblies: .1 Install ceiling suspension systems, which are components of fire rated, floor - ceiling or roof - ceiling assemblies, complete, in accordance with the requirements of applicable UL "Fire Resistance Index" design numbers. .2 Non -Fire Rated Assemblies: .1 Install suspension systems which are part of non -fire rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; and ASTM C636; and further specified. .2 Secure to structural and intermediate framing members by attaching to metal clips designed for the type of member involved, or where possible, by looping and wire -tying directly to members. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. .3 Space hangers to fall not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 4 feet o.c., between ends of primary suspension members, and as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling. Provide at least 2 hangers at diagonally opposite corners of light fixtures as required to prevent deflection of suspension system members in excess of ASTM C635 requirements. Do not attach hangers to ducts, pipes or other similar work, which occurs above ceilings; provide additional suspended ceiling members at such locations. .4 Install continuous metal moldings for support of runners and units where suspended ceilings meet walls, partitions and other vertical elements in order to conceal edges of acoustical units. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through holes in web at intervals of not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3- inches from ends, leveling ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 -inch in 12 -feet. Miter cut inside and outside comers. .3 Exposed Grid Systems: .1 Main Runners: Support directly from hangers; space as required to support ceiling units and other work resting in, or on, ceilings and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. Provide unjointed main runners of manufacturer's maximum standard length wherever possible; join abutting sections with manufacturer's standard splice connection; do not pop rivet flanges of abutting runners. .2 Cross Runners: Support by interlocking ends of cross runners with main runners (or cross runners classified as main runners) to form 90- degree angle between intersecting runners. Space as required to support each panel unit used in the work .3 Moldings: Install with exposed leg in same plane as bottom flange of exposed runners, unless otherwise shown or specified. .4 Acoustical Panels: .1 Install acoustical panels only after the building is enclosed and moisture is at a low level compatible with manufacturer's requirements. Workmen shall not fingerprint panels with dirty hands or gloves. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS SECTION 9D -3 .2 Install batt insulation above ceiling panels where indicated on drawings. Do not install on light fixture. 3.3 REPLACEMENTS .1 Contractor to provide one carton of each type of ceiling tile to be used for replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. Tile shall be packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN .1 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch -up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work, which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 9E -1 OWNER WILL PROVIDE PRE - ORDERED VINYL COMPOSITION TILE AND SHEET VINYL FLOORING. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, CALL JEANINE DUKE AT ASSOCIATED /ACC INTERNATIONAL LTD (973) 376 -1111 EXT. 216. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. L2 REFERENCES .1 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the resilient flooring work, including installation of Owner furnished vinyl composition floor tile, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) .2 Manufacturers of resilient flooring and selection of resilient flooring materials including seamless flooring, resilient base, stair coverings, and metal and resilient edge strips, etc., are indicated on the drawings. .1 Related items including adhesives are specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: .1 Manufacturer. Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. .2 Referenced Standards: Comply with most current edition of standards referenced with materials, installation products, and installation methods specified herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: .1 Samples: Provide full -size tile units, and 2 -1/2- inches long sections of resilient flooring accessories. .2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: of for .1 Maintain temperature of 70 to 85 degrees F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 -hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48- hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 -hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. For minimum curing time, see Section 3A - Concrete. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Furnished by Owner. .1 Vinyl Composition Tile: As indicated on drawings. Size to be 12- inch by 12- inch by 1/8- inch (unless otherwise noted on drawings). Comply with ASTM F1066, Class 2, through pattern. Fire test compliance to be ASTM E548, Class 1; ASTM E662, 450 or less. Static load limit to be 75 psi in compliance with ASTM F970. .2 Vinyl Strip Tile: As indicated on drawings. Planks are 4 inches by 36 inches by 2.5 mm thick with 0.02 inch of clear vinyl wear layer. Fire test compliance to ASTM E -648, Class 1; ASTM E -662, smoke density 450 or less. .2 Furnished by General Contractor. .1 Wall Base: 4 -inch high by .080 -inch gauge. Provide top -set cove or straight base by manufacturer and of color as indicated on the drawings. .3 Furnished by Owner. .1 Floor icons, as indicated on drawings. .4 Furnished by Owner. .1 Adhesives For Resilient Flooring: As recommended by manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. Water resistant, stabilized type. .1 Comply with GS -36. .2 Vinyl Transition Strips: As indicated on drawings. Comply with ADA. .5 Furnished by General Contractor. .1 Adhesives for Transition Strips: As recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be covered. .1 Comply with GS -36. .2 Concrete Slab Primer. Non - staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION .1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Testing and approval of the flooring substrate is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 9E -2 .2 Testing: All concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive resilient flooring shall be tested as follows, using all project specific materials including, but not necessarily limited to, resilient flooring and adhesives: .1 Calcium Chloride Moisture Test: Conduct test per ASTM F1869 and RMA (Rubber Manufacturing Association) standards. Tests shall be taken no more than 7 days prior to resilient flooring installation. Minimum number of tests shall be 3 for first 1,000 - square feet and 1 additional test for each additional 1,000- square feet thereafter. Emission of moisture vapor from concrete floor slab shall not exceed 3- pounds per 1,000- square feet per 24- hours. .2 Bond Test: Conduct test per Armstrong Bond Test standards. Test panels shall be a minimum of 3 -feet by 3 -feet spaced uniformly throughout the area at approximately 50 -feet. Test panels must remain securely bonded to substrate 72 -hours after placement. Tests shall be taken no more than 7 days prior to resilient flooring installation. .3 Alkalinity Test: Conduct test per Armstrong Alkalinity Test standards. Minimum number of tests shall be 3 for first 1,000- square feet and 1 additional test for each additional 1,000- square feet thereafter. Allowable alkalinity level shall be 5 to 9 on the pH scale. Tests shall be taken no more than 7 days prior to resilient flooring installation. .3 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective Contractor and Contractor to any claim of incompatibility. All test results shall be submitted to Architect, APM, and CPM for review /approval prior to installation. CPM reserves the right to conduct additional independent testing at Owner's expense. Cost for remediation of any deficiencies resulting there from shall be borne by this Contractor. .4 The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall ensure that all areas receiving vinyl composition flooring will be cleaned and totally free of all outside sources of contamination. In addition, he shall assure that ail such floor slabs are in compliance with the above -cited tests. Any required remediation shall be done in compliance with ASTM F710, procedures of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute, and the resilient flooring manufacturer. All such areas shall be roped off and as appropriate and necessary, the areas are to be protected with visqueen barriers to prevent contamination from adjacent on -going construction, on going sitework or any other potential sources of contamination. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. .3 Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturers. .4 Sand all construction and control joints and fill with Ardex SD -P Instantpatch in full compliance with manufacturer's current published installation instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer, or 70 degrees F to 85 degrees F from 48- hours prior to installation to 48 -hours after installation, and from 55 degrees F to 95 degrees F thereafter, whichever is more restrictive. .2 Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edging. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. .3 In areas where resilient tile floor meets a higher material, install latex type underlayment with a slope not more than 1/8- inch per foot. Feather underlayment neatly on a straight line where the slope meets the level floor. See Article 8.3. .4 Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. .5 Tile Floors: .1 Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust center marks so the border tile widths are no less than 6- inch wide. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. .2 Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged is so numbered. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile is not acceptable. All tile to be by same manufacturer from same run for entire store. .3 Roll tile with 75 - 100 -pound sectional floor roller to assure adhesion. .4 Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 9E -3 .5 Where indicated, scribe tiles at aluminum railing insert locations in order to provide flush installation of escutcheon plates. .6 Water Jet Cutting: Install icons utilizing water jet cutting of tile, or other methods recommended by manufacturer, to assure tight, uniform, virtually seamless appearance of icon installation. .6 Vinyl Strip Tile Floors: .1 This flooring product shall be installed using adhesive recommended by the flooring manufacturer, using a 1/16" x 1/16" x 1/16" u- notched trowel. .2 When adhesive has full adhesive strength, lay the flooring products which not leaving any air bubbles roll with a 100 pound 3- section roller. .3 Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to all vertical surfaces. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for knife cutting method. .5 Connect seams using chemical or heat welding method as recommended by flooring manufacturer. .7 Accessories: .1 Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed interior and exterior corners or fabricate from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. .2 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at all edges of flooring, unless otherwise shown, which would otherwise be exposed. .3 On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with adhesive filler material. .8 Final Installation and Inspection: .1 The final installation of the resilient floor must be free from any and all slab imperfections reading through the tiles due to slab contamination, cracking, etc. Any dimpling, warping, cracking or other flooring defects will not be accepted. .2 The Contractor will be totally responsible for the repair and /or replacement of any materials deemed defective by the Owner's field representative as well as all costs to correct such conditions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .1 Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage by covering. .2 Allow no foot traffic or other use for at least 24 -hours after installation. .3 Provide adequate protection for flooring in areas where traffic occurs and maintain this protection until all work in building is completed. .4 VCT Floors shall be cleaned and waxed in compliance with manufacturer's requirements immediately prior to final inspection of work by the Owner. .1 Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. .2 Strip flooring and apply wax and buff with type of wax, number of coats and buffing procedures in compliance with floor manufacturers instructions and requirements. .5 U.S. Maintenance, Inc. is the Owner's prime Cleaning Contractor. They will perform initial construction clean up as well as service an on going maintenance program for each store. .1 Contact Elizabeth Shipman, 1880 Markley Street, Norristown, PA 19401, (610) 278 -0999 ext. 2808. 3.5 REPLACEMENTS .1 Contractor to provide 2 full cartons of each type, size and color of floor tile to Owner for future use. .2 Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of vinyl strip tile installed. 3.6 WARRANTY .1 All warranties are to remain in effect and will not be voided if vapor retarder is used below slab. 3.7 MAINTENANCE EXHIBITS (ASSOCIATED /ACC INTERNATIONAL LTD. .1 See following manufacturer's specifications exhibits. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 CARPETING SECTION 9F -1 OWNER WILL PROVIDE PRE - ORDERED CARPET TILE AND MATTING. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, CALL THERESA LAWRENCE AT THE MATWORKS CO., LLC (410) 849- 2848. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Carpet Specifier's Handbook by the Carpet and Rug Institute, latest edition. .2 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor and equipment required for completing the carpet tile work in the areas designated, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .2 The extent of the work is shown on the drawings and specified herein and is defined to include carpet tile and accessories. .3 Carpet tile shall be installed by glue -down method. .4 Install Owner provided aluminum transition strips where carpet tile abuts resilient tile, under the work of this section, as indicated on drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: .1 Installer shall be a firm with not less than 5 -years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. .2 The carpet tile installer shall comply with installation requirements and recommendations of the manufacturer. 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Store inside, protected from weather, moisture, and soiling. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 The Matworks Co., LLC. Contact: Theresa B. Lawrence, (410) 849 -2848. 2.2 COMPONENTS .1 18" x 18" Carpet Tile. 2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. .1 Comply with GS -36. .2 Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturer of carpet, and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. .3 Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. .4 Aluminum Transition Strips: As indicated on drawings. Provide ADA compliant. 2010 SSBS Renovation PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Substrate: Contractor to prepare all surfaces as required for complete installation as designated below. For concrete substrate, see Section 3A - Concrete. .2 3 weeks prior to the carpet installation date, Carpet Vendor /Contractor must examine the slab for moisture, leakage, dusting, and other conditions. All tests deemed necessary for slab acceptability including moisture tests must be provided by and performed by Carpet Vendor/ Contractor at this time. All test results will be submitted to CPM for review approval prior to installation. CPM reserves the right to conduct additional independent testing at Owner's expanse. .3 Carpet Vendor /Contractor to meet with Contractor and review all test results prior to acceptance of slab conditions. If unsatisfactory conditions exceed limits and tolerances as dictated in Section 3A Concrete, then the Contractor will take all steps deemed necessary to rectify slab deficiencies. The CPM will monitor and arbitrate as required. .4 If slab conditions are in compliance, then Carpet Vendor/ Contractor will perform all minor repairs, imperfections, leveling, normal deficiencies, filling joints, etc., prior to carpet installation. .5 Carpet Vendor /Contractor to determine most appropriate adhesive for carpet based on all inspections, test results, and slab corrective measures. .6 Contractor to sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .1 General: .1 Extend carpet under open- bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. .2 Provide cut -outs where required. .2 Glue -Down Carpet Tile Installation: .1 Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement. .2 Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet tile edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .1 Remove debris, except for maintenance materials noted herein. .2 Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face - beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet tile where spots cannot be removed. .3 Advise contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. .4 Maintenance Materials: Deliver unused carpet tile to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged and identified. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 VINYL WALL COVERING PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Green Seal Standards. .1 GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for completing vinyl wall covering work and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Installer. A firm specializing in wall covering work and with not less than 5 -years of experience in installing similar wall coverings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and as herein specified. .2 Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. (4 degrees C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. (16 degrees C.) at areas of installation for at least 72 -hours before and 48 -hours after application of materials. .2 Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER .1 Wolf- Gordon .1 Contact: Larry Smagawat, (800) 347 -0550, Ext. 849. .2 VWC1 .1 Size: 50 inches wide. .2 Texture: Smooth .3 VWC2 .1 Size: 8 foot by 55 foot .2 Texture: Stipple .2 Refer to drawings for product information and locations. 2.2 ADHESIVE .1 Provide adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of vinyl wall covering. .2 Comply with GS -36. SECTION 9G -1 .1 Acclimatize wall - covering materials by removing from packaging in area of installation not less than 24 -hours before application. .2 All surfaces to receive vinyl wall covering shall be structurally sound, smooth, clean and dry. Moisture content of walls shall not exceed 5 percent. The installer shall examine the conditions under which vinyl wall covering is to be installed and advise the Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work implies acceptance of surfaces to receive vinyl wall covering. .3 Prepare substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate. .1 New drywall shall receive 1 coat of a white - pigmented alkyd or latex primer. .2 Previously painted surfaces shall be sanded and washed with trisodium phosphate and then rinsed with clean water. .3 For other surfaces, contact the wall - covering representative. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Brush or roll adhesive on material using approximately 1- gallon for every 10- to- 12- linear yards. Reverse every other strip. Hang on wall using butt procedures. Use broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Remove excess adhesive adjacent surfaces immediately using manufacturer's recommended procedures. .2 Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9 PAINTING SECTION 9H -1 THE OWNER HAS DESIGNATED SHERWIN- WILLIAMS PAINTS AS THE FIRST NAME PRODUCT FOR PAINTING. FOR INFORMATION CONTACT THE SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES (1- 800 - 321 - 8194). NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PRODUCTS ARE LISTED AS ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. USE OF THESE PRODUCTS IS ACCEPTABLE PENDING TOYS "R" US PROJECT MANAGER (PM) APPROVAL PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM D13 - Standard Specification for Spirits of Turpentine. .2 ASTM D234 - Standard Specification for Raw Linseed Oil. .3 ASTM D260 - Standard Specification for Boiled Linseed Oil. .2 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) - Method 24 - Determination of Volatile Matter Content, Water Content, Density, Volume Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface Coatings. .3 Green Seal Standards. .1 GC -3 - Anti - Corrosive Paints. .2 GS-11 - Paints and Coatings. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing surface preparation, painting, finishing and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .2 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. .3 Paint exposed surfaces of unfinished primed surfaces throughout the interior whether or not colors are designated in "schedules ", except where natural finish or material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Project Manager will select these from colors available for materials systems specified. 2010 SSBS Renovation .4 Mask off skylights, nameplates, equipment identifications and similar items. Cover sprinkler heads with plastic bags and protect moving parts during painting. Remove all protective coverings at the completion of painting activity. .5 The Contractor is responsible for the application of the paint or finishing material. If any surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, the Contractor will immediately notify the General Contractor and Construction Project Manager in writing; or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory final finishes. .6 The Contractor shall examine all documents that form this contract, and the alternates that affect the work under this Section. Examine the specifications under other divisions and thoroughly familiarize him with all provisions regarding their painting. .7 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer. When surface temperature is below 50 degrees F. do not apply paints, varnishes, and special coatings, unless otherwise specified. Stop exterior work sufficiently early to permit film to set up before condensation, frost and moisture, caused by night temperature drops, occur. Do not begin exterior painting until frost or condensation evaporates and surface is moisture free. Do not varnish when temperature is below 70 degrees F. Comply with manufacturer's written requirements. Painting may continue in inclement weather only if surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits set by manufacturer. .8 Exterior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) .1 Hollow metal doors /frames. .2 Miscellaneous metals /structural steel. .3 Mechanical equipment screen roof supports. .4 Aluminum, not prefinished. .5 Galvanized metal. .6 Masonry. .7 Stucco, concrete. .8 Exterior insulation and finish system. .9 Exposed gas lines above roof. .10 Other surfaces indicated to be painted /finished. .9 Interior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: .1 Hollow metal doors /frames. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9 .2 Miscellaneous Metals /Structural Steel. .3 Masonry .4 Wood, including millwork (painted). .5 Wood, including millwork (stained). .6 Graphics (various surfaces). PAINTING SECTION 9H -2 .7 Sealing of concrete floors not receiving floor coverings and including pre- striping where required. .8 Touching up of scuffs, abrasions, marred areas and other imperfections of pre - finished metal, wood or other surfaces which are required to be painted /finished. .9 Spray paint the exposed underside of roof deck and /or Pre -Sales Mezzanine and all structural and miscellaneous steel, steel joists and metal deck(s), conduit, 1- boxes, etc. and all of the items and related equipment shown or scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted or scheduled to be unfinished. Touch -up surfaces damaged by other trades to the satisfaction of the Construction Project Manager. .10 Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non - specular black paint. .10 Work specified under other Sections: .1 Prime coat painting and undercoats of paint, factory finish painting specified in other Sections of the specifications. .2 Field touch -up of miscellaneous metals. .3 Field touch up of structural steel. .4 Conduits and Unistrut. .11 Items not to be painted: Unless otherwise noted, pre - finished, prefabricated, or shop fabricated components or equipment, concealed surfaces, finish anodized aluminum, overhead doors, impact door frames, roof hatches, operating parts, labels, identification plates, performance ratings, etc. .12 Comply with GC -3 and GS -11. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 The contractor shall store all apparatus and materials used on the job in a single place designated by the Contractor, or Construction Project Manager. Such storage shall be kept clean and Contractor shall be liable for damage to surrounding areas. All soiled or used rags, waste, and trash must be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Deliver all materials to job site in original, new, and unopened packages with containers bearing all manufacturer's data, instructions, specification numbers, etc. Materials not displaying proper manufacturer's warranty will not be accepted. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY .1 The contractor shall study the contract, drawings, and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section as to insure its completeness. .2 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL, surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Construction Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor to any claim of incompatibility. .3 The contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Painting and finishing products for use in the work shall be the standard best or top brands produced for each particular kind of material by the following manufacturer(s) with no substitutions unless otherwise noted: .1 General Interior and Exterior Paint. .1 Sherwin Williams - Reference standard. .2 Benjamin Moore - Reference standard. .2 Concrete Floor Sealer: .1 STA -CRETE SS1600 clear epoxy floor sealer. Contact Kemico National Distributor, P.O. Box 1109, Leonard, TX 75452, (903) 587 -3708, (903) 587 -9038 (fax), (e -mail) www.kemico.com (no substitutions accepted). .3 Parapet Wall Coating: .1 Tnemec Company, Inc., Series 180 Tnemec -Crete (flat, smooth). .2 Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. .3 Colors shall be pure non - fading pigments, finely ground in linseed oil, as required. Colors used on plaster, masonry, and concrete shall be lime proof. The Construction Project Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9 PAINTING SECTION 9H -3 Manager shall approve color schedule prior to application of products. .4 Shellac shall be pure, white or orange gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol, using 5- pounds of gum to each gallon. Orange shellac: Used for painting over knots, sap, and resinous woods. .5 Spackling compound shall be finely ground, grit free; when dry, shall set without shrinkage to smooth, hard, white surface, and sand easily to take any finish. .6 Patching plaster shall be white non - shrinking, containing no lime and uniform in set and quality. .7 Wood filler shall be paste type, match any stain color required. Do not mix filler with stain. .8 Raw linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D234. .9 Boiled linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D260. .10 Turpentine shall be gum spirits of turpentine conforming to ASTM D13. .11 Putty, Class B, white lead whiting putty. .12 All finishes to be Class "C" flame spread, or minimum. .13 Painting subcontractor shall provide at project site 1 gallon of each color. (All colors to be in fresh, unopened cans.) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES .1 Prior to installation of work, the contractor shall examine surfaces, which are to receive painting and finishing coats, and report conditions of surfaces, which are not properly prepared to receive work of this section. Start of work shall imply that work can be performed as specified herein. .2 Spaces shall be broom clean and surfaces dust -free before painting is started. Before painting or finishing, plaster, greases and other extraneous matter, which would affect the finished work, shall be removed. .3 Areas and /or spaces where painting and /or finishing work is being performed shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. during application and drying. .4 Repair or spackle surfaces as necessary for proper application of paint. .5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust, sandpapered smooth and otherwise properly prepared. .6 Concrete, Stucco, Masonry: .1 Thoroughly clean concrete, stucco, E.I.F.S., masonry and other absorptive surfaces to be painted of grit, efflorescence, grease, dirt and release agents, which will adversely affect the adhesion or appearance of the paint finish. .2 Masonry construction shall be cured for 30 days, and concrete construction cured for 60 days before painting. Check alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted. If surfaces require corrective measures, Contractor to correct condition of painted surface. .7 Interior Concrete Floors scheduled to receive sealer. .1 New Concrete Floors: Floors shall be cured minimum of 28 days and shall be etched or sandblasted to remove laitance as recommended by sealer manufacturer. If curing compounds have been used on floors, remove these compounds before applying sealer. .2 Old Concrete Floors (Remodeling): Remove old coatings such as grease, oil, dirt, paint, mastic, etc. By grinding and cutting, sandblasting ( "Cut - Blast "), mechanical scarification or by chemical stripping. Clean concrete with Trisodium Phosphate solution and degrease if required as recommended by sealer manufacturer. Acid etch, rinse, neutralize and flush clean, removing all water and neutralizing solution. Allow to dry before applying sealer. .8 Gypsum Drywall: .1 Scratches, cracks, holes, indentations, gouges, and similar defects in surface shall be properly cut out and filled with spackling compound, joint compound or other patching material as may be required and brought to a smooth flush surface. Patched portions shall be given a coat of primer - sealer in addition to all other specified coats. .2 Safe moisture level for painting shall be determined by the use of a moisture meter. Patched areas, "hot" or suction spots shall be spot primed as per manufacturer's label directions. .9 Wood: .1 Woodwork to be painted or finished shall be sandpapered to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, or splinters, and then brushed to remove dust, grease or dirt and shall be washed off with naphtha or other suitable cleaner. Knots and sappy streaks or spots shall be given 2 thin coats of shellac, lightly sandpapered when dry. .2 All cracks, nail holes, and surface defects in woodwork shall be filled with putty or plastic wood after the priming coat, filler, or shellac has been applied. Putty or plastic wood filler shall be brought up flush with the surface and lightly sandpapered smooth. .3 Open grained woodwork to be finished shall be first filled thoroughly with paste filler. Filler shall be of such consistency as to be applied with a short bristle brush. Filler shall be well rubbed into the grain and 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PAINTING SECTION 9H -4 when set, the rubbing shall continue across the grain until a hard, non - absorbent surface is obtained. .4 Top and bottom edges of wood doors to be primed the same as face of doors, after fitting. .10 Metals: .1 Metal surfaces shall be washed with mineral spirits to remove dirt or grease before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire brushed or sandpapered clean before painting. Shop coat of paint that becomes marred shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer specified. .2 Galvanized metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wiped down so that surfaces are free of dirt, grease or foreign matter, as recommended by approved paint manufacturer. .3 Shop or prime coated metal surfaces shall be cleaned of similar foreign matter as above, and shall have all bare spots or rust spots removed by wire brushing or sanding and be touched up or re- primed as required. .4 Dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints, and other irregularities in metal work to be painted shall be filled with an approved metal filler suitable for the purpose which, after setting, shall be sanded to a smooth, hard surface. .11 Mechanical and Electrical Items: .1 Pipe and duct coverings shall be given a heavy coat of glue size before other paint applications, except when sized under the work of other sections. There shall be added to the glue size, and to each coat of paint applied thereafter, a sufficient amount of a fungicidal agent to render the fabric mildew - proof. The fungicidal agent shall be a type, which will not adversely affect the color, texture, or durability of the paint. .2 Exposed panel boxes, electric cabinets, piping, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work and equipment in finished spaces, shall be given 1 prime coat and then shall be finished to match walls and ceilings on which or near which they are located. .3 Gas lines above roof shall be painted. Color as indicated or scheduled. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP .1 Painting materials shall be applied by skilled mechanics well versed in the work. Each painting operation shall be performed in accordance with the best practices, which are consistent with the surfaces being finished, and the types of materials being applied. Painting materials shall be free of skins, lumps, or any foreign matter and the solids shall be kept well stirred while being applied. .2 Painting materials shall be evenly and smoothly spread or flowed on and shall be free of runs, drips, sags, crawling, brush marks and dogging of angles. No successive coats of painting materials shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry and hard. Wood and metal surfaces with varnish or enamel finish shall be sanded between coats to produce even, smooth surfaces. .3 Each painting material shall be stirred, blended, tinted, thinned and /or applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Each coat of paint shall be a different tint from that of the preceding coat. Each final coat of the painting shall be the exact shade and texture as represented by the sample previously selected and approved by the Construction Project Manager. Where 2- coat work is specified, the first coat shall be tinted toward the final color. .4 Unless otherwise specified, materials for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the products of the same manufacturer who furnished the first prime - sealer coat or undercoat for that particular surface, except when metal primers are used as specified under other Sections of the specifications. .5 An ambient temperature of not less than 50 degrees F. shall be obtained in all spaces or locations where work required under this section is in progress, unless otherwise directed by the Construction Project Manager. .6 Exterior painting shall not be done during any period of high humidity, which would prevent satisfactory results from any painting operation. .7 Coat shall be thoroughly dry before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of 24 -hours between coats on any surface, unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. .8 Stains shall be applied freely with a soft hairbrush and the excess wiped off. The operation shall be repeated to prevent blotching and to produce uniformity throughout. .9 Each coat of varnish, except the last shall be rubbed with steel wool, after drying. The last coat shall be rubbed with pumice stone and oil to produce a smooth, satin finish. .10 The number of coats herein specified shall be in addition to any priming or other coats specified under the various Sections. Painted surfaces shall receive at least 1 priming coat and 2 finishing coats, unless otherwise specified. .11 Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, etc., shall be removed before painting and replaced upon completion of work. .12 In the painting of movable or operating parts, no paint shall be applied to sliding contacts and the like, where the bare material is necessary for proper operation. Paint applied to such surfaces shall be removed. .13 Access doors, plates, panel boxes, conduits and the like shall be painted in with the adjoining surfaces on which they occur, using the same kind of paint, number of coats, color and finish. In spaces where adjoining surfaces do not 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PAINTING SECTION 9H -5 receive paint the work shall be painted the same as similar work in painted spaces and of color as selected. .14 Mechanical work shall not be painted while materials contain heat. They shall remain unheated until after the final coat has thoroughly dried. .15 No interior painting shall be done until the building is thoroughly dried out and all conditions are suitable to produce satisfactory results, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. .16 Provide and use a sufficient number of drop cloths and exercise care to protect finished surfaces of floors and other work, and immediately remove spatter, stains and droppings from such surfaces. Particular care shall be taken when painting above wainscots and other finished surfaces, furnishings, equipment and the like. .17 Wood trim shall be back primed before installation. .18 Remove doors to paint tops and bottoms. .19 Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and strained before using. Addition of thinners such as linseed oil, turpentine and the like shall be added to ready -mixed materials only in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. If no printed instructions appear on the container, the contractor shall obtain this information in writing from the manufacturer. A copy of these printed instructions shall also be transmitted to the Construction Project Manager. .20 Materials used to prepare surfaces and apply clear epoxy sealer on concrete floors where scheduled, shall be mixed, water- thinned and applied in strict accordance with sealer manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .1 Work under this Section shall not check, crack, peel, discolor or have other defects due to improper materials or workmanship, due to improper preparation of the surfaces, or due to the painting, vamishing, or surfaces which were not in proper condition to receive paint, varnish or other painter's materials, and such unsatisfactory work shall be refinished at no additional cost to the Owner. .2 The contractor shall, when so directed, retouch where necessary, restore where damaged or defective, and clean off paint spots from floors, walls, finished hardware, glass and other surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, and shall leave painted surfaces clean and in a satisfactory condition. .3 Upon completion of work, surplus materials, empty packages and containers and debris shall be removed from the site by legal means and properly disposed of. .4 Acceptance at final inspection will be governed by body finishes exhibited and the contractor shall apply additional costs as required to produce proper finish and coverage in accordance with the approved samples. At acceptance, the paint and varnish finished work shall be in a neat, sound and undamaged condition. .5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned at completion and before acceptance of work. .6 This contractor shall protect his work and the work of other trades against damage or injury by his employees or by the materials, tools and equipment used in connection with the painting. Work that is damaged, as the result of the painting operations shall be repaired at the Contractors expense. .7 When Owner's personnel take over store for fixturing, the Contractor will move all paint materials and equipment to a location outside of store. No storage of paint or painting equipment will be allowed in the store. .8 Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. .9 At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up, and restore all damaged or deface painted surfaces. 3.4 PAINTING SCHEDULE (Benjamin Moore - BM) .1 Exterior Surfaces: .1 Ferrous Metal: All structural steel, miscellaneous iron, hollow metal doors and frames, roof structures, exposed roof piping: .1 1 coat B.M Super Spec HP Universal Metal Primer (P07). .2 2 coats B.M. Super Spec HP DTM Alkyd Semi Gloss (P24) .2 Galvanized Metal: .1 1 coat B.M. Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer (PO4) .2 2 coats B.M. Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss (P29) .3 Aluminum - All aluminum copings, gutters, downspouts and scuppers (if required) to be factory finish to match adjacent finish. All remaining aluminum surfaces: .1 1 coat B.M. Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer (PO4) .2 2 coats B.M. Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi gloss (P29) .4 Concrete - All cast -in -place or pre -cast concrete or stucco surfaces: .1 1 coat B.M. Acrylic Masonry Sealer (066) .2 2 coats B.M. Super Spec Flat Latex House & Trim (171) 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 .5 Masonry - Concrete Block: PAINTING SECTION 9H -6 .1 For areas where additional colorant is less than or equal to a maximum of 2- ounces per gallon. .1 Elastomeric Paint: .1 1 coat B.M. Acrylic Masonry Sealer (066.) .2 1 or 2 coats B.M. Moorlastic Acrylic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating - Low Lustre (055) to follow Technical Data Sheet (TDS) recommendation for film build, with APM approval, otherwise see Section 9I "Special Coatings ". .2 Fortified Acrylic: .1 For use where additional colorant is in excess of 2 ounces per gallon. .1 1 coat B.M. Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285). .2 2 coats B.M. Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint (171). .6 Masonry - Exposed Parapet above roof flashing: Series 55 Tneme -Crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. Apply a 2 -coat film of minimum 14.5 wet mils thickness each in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the substrate to be covered. .7 Exterior Insulation and Finish System /Stucco: .1 1 coat, B.M. Universal Metal Primer (P07). .2 2 coats, B.M. Super Spec HP Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane (P74). .3 Colors: As indicated on drawings. .8 Existing Ceramic or Porcelain Tile: .1 1 coat B.M. Super Spec HP 100% Solids Epoxy Penetrating Bonding Sealer, Clear (P35). .2 Interior Surfaces: .1 All drywall surfaces, except where graphics are called for or where ceramic tile or vinyl wall covering is applied to: .1 1 -coat B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer (253). .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss Enamel (276). .2 All acrylic epoxy painted surfaces: .1 1 coat B.M. All purpose 100% Acrylic Primer (023). .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Acrylic Epoxy Coating Semi -Gloss (256). .3 All concrete block surfaces scheduled to be painted except where epoxy paint or graphics are called for. .1 1 coat B.M. All Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer (023) .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss Enamel (276). .4 Graphics - on exposed block: .1 1 coat B.M. All Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer (023) .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss Enamel (276). .5 Graphics - on drywall: .1 1 -coat B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer (253). .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss (276). .6 Graphics - on wood: .1 1 coat B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Primer Sealer (245). .2 2 coats B. M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss (276). .7 Wood or Hardboard (painted) - all exposed woodwork to be painted, except where noted to be stained: 1 1 coat B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Primer Sealer (245). .2 2 coats B. M. Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Semi -Gloss Enamel (276). .8 Wood - all exposed, unpainted wood, noted to have clear finish: .1 2 coats B.M. Benwood Polyurethane (428) .9 Ferrous Metal - all doors, frames, handrails and other ferrous metal, except where noted: .1 1 coat B.M. Super Spec Universal Metal Primer (P07) .2 2 coats B.M. DTM Alkyd Semi Gloss (P24) .10 Other Ferrous Metal (sprayed) - all structural steel, including bar joists, beams, and decking. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PAINTING .1 2 coats B.M. Sweep Up Latex Flat (153) or Semi - Gloss (156) .11 Miscellaneous Metal - all piping, machinery and other ferrous metal not covered in other sections: .1 1 coat B.M. Super Spec Universal Metal Primer (P07) .2 1 coat B.M. DTM Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (P29) .12 Concrete Floor with striping: .1 2 coats B. M. Super Spec UP Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel, OSHA Yellow (striping only) (P22) .2 See specification section 9H - 2.1.2.1 for sealer. .13 All concrete block surfaces scheduled for epoxy paint: .1 1 coat B.M. Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Block Filler (P31) .2 2 coats B.M. Moorcraft Super Spec Acrylic Epoxy Coating Semi -Gloss (256) .14 Prime Coats - Apply prime coat to material, which is required to be painted or finished but has not been prime coated by others. .15 Underside of metal roof decking is to be primed by deck supplier. General Contractor to apply dry fall painting per schedule. .16 Exposed rooftop unit ductwork and grilles. .1 B.M. DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss Enamel (P29). 3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE (Sherwin- Williams - SW) .1 Exterior Surfaces: .1 Ferrous Metal: All structural steel, miscellaneous iron, hollow metal doors and frames, roof structures, exposed roof piping: .1 1 coat SW Kem Bond HS Universal Primer .2 2 coats SW Industrial Enamel HS, B54Z -400 .2 Galvanized Metal: .1 1 coat SW Galvite HS. .2 2 coats SW Industrial Enamel HS B54Z -400 .3 Aluminum - All aluminum copings, gutters, downspouts & scuppers (if required) to be factory finish to match adjacent finish. All remaining • aluminum surfaces: .1 1 coat SW DTM Primer / Flnish. SECTION 9H -7 .2 2 coats SW DTM Acrylic Coatings, B66 .4 Concrete - All cast -in -place or pre -cast concrete or stucco surfaces: .1 1 coat SW Loxon Conditioner or Primer. .2 2 coats SW A -100 Acrylic Latex Flat or Satin .5 Masonry - Concrete block: .1 Normal weight concrete block: See Section 9I "Special Coatings" for Elastomeric coating S -W Con -Flex XL HB Smooth or textured Elastomeric Coatings, A5 (block filler required) .2 See Alternates, Division 1, for Lightweight Block Finishes. .3 See Alternates, Division 1. .6 Masonry - Exposed Parapet above roof flashing: Series 55 Tneme -Crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. or S- W Loxon XP Exterior Waterproofing System, A24 -400 Apply a two -coat film of minimum 14.5 wet mils thickness each in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the substrate to be covered. .7 Exterior Insulation and Finish System: .1 Ask S -W to clarify recommendations .2 Ask S -W to clarify recommendations Colors as designated on drawings. .2 Interior Surfaces: (Sherwin- Williams - SW) .1 All drywall surfaces, except where graphics are called for or where ceramic tile or vinyl wall covering is applied to: .1 1 coat SW ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer. .2 2 coats SW ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg -Shel .2 All concrete block surfaces scheduled to be painted except where epoxy paint or graphics are called for .1 1 coat SW Loxon Block Surfacer. 2 2 coats SW ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg -Shel .3 Graphics - on exposed block: .1 1 coat SW Loxon Block Surfacer. .2 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne S /G. .4 Graphics - on drywall: .1 1 coat PrepRite 200 Primer. .2 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne S/G 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 PAINTING SECTION 9H -8 .5 Graphics - an wood: .1 1 coat SW Preprite Pro Block Latex Primer .2 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne S /G. .6 Wood or Hardboard (painted) - all exposed woodwork to be painted, except where noted to be stained: .1 1 coat SW Preprite Pro Block Latex Primer .2 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic S/G .7 Wood - all exposed, unpainted wood, noted to have clear finish; .1 1 Minwax 250 Voc Strains. .2 1 coat SW WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish. .3 2 coats WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish. .8 Ferrous Metal - all doors, frames, handrails and other ferrous metal, except where noted: .1 1 coat SW Pro -Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer .2 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne Satin or Semi -Gloss Enamel .9 Other Ferrous Metal (sprayed) - all structural steel, including bar joists, beams, and decking, except as listed in 7.2.15: (Refer to schedule on drawings) .1 2 coats SW Waterborne Acrylic (Eggshell only) Dryfall, B42W2 (primer required) .10 Miscellaneous Metal - all piping, machinery and other ferrous metal not covered in other sections: .1 1 coat SW Pro -Cryl Univeral Acrylic Primer .2 1 coat SW Pro Industrial 0 Vol Acrylic .11 Concrete Floors with striping: .1 2 coats SW Armorseal 33 Primer, OSHA yellos. .2 See specification section 9H — 2.1.2.1 for sealer. .12 All concrete block surfaces scheduled for epoxy paint: .1 1 coat SW Loxon Block Surfacer. .2 2 coats SW Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy. .13 Prime Coats - Apply prime coat to material, which is required to be painted or finished but has not been prime coated by others. 2010 SSBS Renovation .14 Underside of metal roof decking is to be primed by deck supplier. GC to apply dry fall painting per schedule. .15 Exposed rooftop unit ductwork and grilles. .1 SW Pro Industrial 0 Voc Acrylic. END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 9I -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 1.2 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes: .1 Cementitious Blockfiller coat of exterior CMU (painted). .2 Decorative acrylic finish coat of exterior CMU (painted). .2 Related Sections: .1 Division 1- Alternates .2 Section 4A - Unit Masonry Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Applicator Qualifications: Must be approved by manufacturer in writing and have manufacturer's authorization to offer specified warranty. .2 Field Sample: .1 Apply masonry weatherproofing system to field sample required by Section 4A. .2 Reflect proposed color, texture and workmanship. .3 Obtain acceptance of completed panel from Project Manager before beginning work. .4 Retain accepted panel during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not alter, destroy or move panel until work is completed. .3 Coatings shall be impenetrable to Wind Driven Rain up to 120 mph for 8 hours. Products or systems shall comply with Federal Specifications TOT- P0035, para 3.4 10 for cement based coatings or TOT- C -555B, para 4.45 for polymer based coatings. .4 All products will adhere to properly prepared, approved substrates and will resist the effect of weathering and shall have passed ASTM G 155 specification at 5,000 hours Accelerated Weathering in Atlas (Xenon Arc) Weathermeter. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Environmental Requirements: .1 Do not apply on frozen or frost-filled surfaces. .2 Do not apply if temperature is below 40 degrees F. or expected to fall below 40 degrees within 24- hours. .3 Protect material from freezing. .4 Protect from precipitation for 24 -hours after application. .5 The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during application: .1 Wind - caused rapid drying of surface. .2 Excessive surface temperature. .3 Excessive air temperature. .4 Direct Sun. .5 Low humidity. 1.5 WARRANTY .1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for coating system products, including affirmation of coating system inspection by manufacturer required by warranty provision. Approval by manufacturer for warranty is required prior to system application. Submit manufacturer's "Intent To Warranty Form" prior to start of coating system application. Submit "Application Job Records Form" required by manufacturer after completed installation. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. .1 Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project Owner. .2 Warranty Period: 5 -years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. .3 Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine acceptability of warranty documents. .4 Function: Manufacturer's warranty for labor and material warranting bond, weather and waterproof above grade function. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9* 1.6 PRE - APPLICATION MEETING SPEC IAL COATINGS *SECTION 9I -2 .1 Contractor shall arrange meeting no less than seven days prior to staring work. .2 Attendance shall be mandatory for. .1 Contractor. .2 Coating Subcontractor. .3 Owner's Representative. .4 Coating Manufacturer Representative /Distributor .3 Agenda: .1 Substrate condition. .2 Sequence and method of application of coating system. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 All elastomeric wall - coating materials shall comply with current Federal and State VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) requirements. .2 Do not proceed with application of materials when temperature, humidity, and other environmental conditions necessary for the successful application of individual products are not within allowable limits. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER/PRODUCT .1 This specification written for products of Thoro System Products, Inc. .1 Cementitious Blockfiller. Cementitious, Acrylic- Modified Waterproofing Blockfiller Super Quickseal -White with Thorosheen, by Thoro System Products, Inc. .2 Decorative Acrylic Coating: Thorocoat - Smooth by Thoro Systems Products, Inc. White to match Pratt & Lambert Snoflake, gray to match P &L Carolina Gull or as indicated or as selected on drawings. .2 TEC -Top Electrometric Coating system by Rainguard Products Company will be acceptable when all other requirements of this specification, including warranty, are met. 2.2 MIXING .1 Mix in strict accord with printed instructions of manufacturer. Mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for mixing all products. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be used. Mechanical mixers and containers shall be cleaned after mixing each batch; kept free of Super Quickseal from previous mixes. .2 One 50 -lb. container Super Quickseal shall be mixed with 12 to 16 quarts of clean, potable water until a creamy batter consistency is achieved, with uniform color. Hot temperatures and low humidity will require maximum amount of clean, potable water to achieve the creamy consistency. .3 Let material set for five to fifteen minutes to soak, then temper back by adding one (1) gallon of Thorosheen -Tint Base. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION .1 Allow 28 days after completion of masonry work for curing. .2 Surfaces to receive Cementitious Blockfiller hall be free of defects such as concrete droppings, laitance, dirt, dust, grease, form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint and any other foreign material. .1 Beginning of application means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 SCAFFOLDING .1 Provide scaffolding and use as necessary to ensure all exposed surfaces of smooth -face and split -face block and all mortar joints are completely covered with primer and finish coats to insure the waterproofing integrity of the wall and so as to provide the specified warranty. 3.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY .1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 3.4 APPLICATION .1 Cementitious Blockfiller Dampen wall prior to and during application. Change of color of masonry unit should be noted. Do not soak wall excessively or allow water to accumulate on the surface. .2 Apply brush or plaster type sprayer coat to Cementitious Blockfiller to the surface of flat and split -faced masonry units at the approximate rate of 150 - square feet per gallon. .1 Spray apply at 35 -40 PSI air pressure at spray nozzle, using a 3/16" or 1/4" spray orifice. .3 Using a wet clean soft nylon bristled brush or broom, 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 9* SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 9I -3 work the fill coat in a horizontal direction to fill pores. Lay off fill coat in a vertical direction.. Do not allow brush or broom to become loaded with material. .1 Backroll surface with 3/4" nap roller using downward finish strokes to remove any brush strokes. Do not let material set or harden before backrolling. .4 Finish from breakpoint to breakpoint. Do not stop in middle of wall. .5 If hot, dry and windy conditions exist, let fill coat set for 24- hours, cure by fog spraying on second day if conditions are hot dry or windy. .2 Decorative Acrylic Coating .1 Stir coating thoroughly with mechanical mixer to assure complete, uniform dispersion throughout. .2 In extremely hot dry weather, slight damping of the surface with clean, potable water is acceptable prior to applying coating. .1 Back roll brushed or spray material; cross roll roller - applied material. .2 Finish material so that brush and roller strokes are in one direction. 3.5 INSPECTION & SCHEDULE .1 Contractor shall maintain schedule of .application of Cementitious Blockfiller and finish coat in field office for Owner inspection. See application job record (sample) at the end of this section. Copy of application job record to be submitted as part of as -built set. .2 Finish coat must be pinhole free. -END OF SECTION- 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9* PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: SPECIAL COATINGS APPLICATION JOB RECORD DAILY LOG *SECTION 9I -4 APPLICATOR FIRM: RECORDED BY: DATE TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY WEATHER* 8:00 AM 3:00 PM SQUARE FOOT COMPLETED LOCATION ON BUILDING ** * - S (SUNNY), PC (PARTLY CLOUDY), C (CLOUDY), F (FOG), R (RAIN), T (THUNDERSTORM), SL (SLEET OR ICE), SN (SNOW). ** - FIRST FLOOR FRONT, EAST PENTHOUSE, ETC. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS SECTION 9J -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. .2 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .3 Section Includes: Prefinished, prefabricated, through - fastened, concealed fastener soffit system and accessories. .4 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .5 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A, unless stipulated otherwise. .6 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and scaffolding required for completing linear metal ceilings, suspension systems, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. .2 The extent of the work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for color and finish requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. .1 ASTM A 653: Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated by the Hot Dip Process. .2 ASTM A 792: Steel Sheet, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process. .3 ASTM B 209: Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. .2 Sheet Metal and Air Condition Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1993 Edition. .3 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Manual. .4 Aluminum Association. .1 Aluminum Design Manual. .5 Metal Construction Association (MCA). .1 Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Performance Requirements: Provide factory formed, prefinished, through- fastened, concealed fastener, soffit system, that has been pretested and certified by manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions. .1 The metal roofing /siding system including required trim members shall meet the specified requirements for wind loads. .2 The panel will have 3/16" deep ribs, 43/4" o.c. Adjacent panels shall lock into place, hiding the screws. .3 The soffit panels are available in solid (non - perforated) or vented (perforated) form. Fabral recommends not perforating steel Posi -Lock panels. .4 Structural Requirements: Engineer panels for structural properties in accordance with latest edition of American Iron and Steel Institute's Cold Formed Steel Design Manual using "effective width" concept and Aluminum Association's Aluminum Design Manual. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in manufacturing exposed fastener roofing and siding panels in a permanent stationary indoor facility. .2 Panel installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of exposed fastener roofing and siding and show evidence of successful completion of at least three (3) projects of similar size, scope, and complexity. 1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Samples: .1 Submit sample 12" long x full width panel, showing proposed metal gauge, seam profile and specified finish. .2 Submit manufacturers standard colors for Architect's selection. .2 Shop Drawings: shop drawings showing soffit with layout of panels, screws, underlayment and sections of each flashing /trim condition shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall contain material type, Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS SECTION 9J -2 metal thickness and finish. Drawings shall distinguish between factory and field fabrication. .3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard profile sheet, product data brochure and finish warranty. .4 Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials and finishes meet specification requirements. 1.7 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Panels and flashings shall be protected and properly packaged to protect against transportation damage in transit to the jobsite. .2 Upon delivery, exercise care in unloading, stacking, moving, storing, and erecting panels and flashings to prevent twisting, bending, scratching, or denting. .3 Store panels and flashings in a safe dry environment under a waterproof covering, to prevent water damage and allow adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Panels and flashings with strippable film shall not be stored in direct sunlight. .4 Upon installation immediately remove strippable film from panels and flashings. Protect panels and flashings from foot traffic and from all other trades. 1.8 SCHEDULING .1 Mechanical Work: Duct work above ceiling shall be complete, and permanent heating and cooling systems operating to climate conditions prior to installation of linear metal ceiling components. .2 Electrical Work: Installation of conduit above ceiling shall be complete before installation of linear metal ceiling components. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Field dimensions shall be taken prior to fabrication to verify jobsite conditions. .2 This panel should be installed as a soffit only. .3 Maximum panel length is 40' (contact the factory for longer panels). 1.10 WARRANTIES PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER .1 Posi -Lock concealed fastener soffit panel system as manufactured by Fabral, 3449 Hempland Road, Lancaster, PA 17601; ph.: 717 - 397 -2741; fax: 717 - 397 -1040. .2 The Posi -Lock panel shall have a coverage of 14 ". Rib height shall be 3/16 ". .3 Panels shall be directly fastened to the substrate. .4 The fasteners shall be hidden when adjacent panels are installed. .5 The panel shall have a overlapping sidelap feature that hides the fasteners. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES .1 Roof panel materials .2 Texture: panels shall be smooth. .3 Finish: Refer to manufacturer's standard color card to determine appropriate finish and color. All panels shall receive a factory- applied Kynar® 500 / Hylar® 5000 *coating conforming to the following: .1 Metal preparation: all metal shall have the surfaces carefully prepared for painting on a continuous process coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with an acid rinse, and thorough drying. .2 Prime coating: a base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with the top -coat, shall be applied to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.20 ± 0.05 mils. This prime coat shall be oven cured prior to application of finish coat. .3 Exterior coating: a Kynar® 500 /Hylar® 5000 coating shall be applied over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.80 ± 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 1.00 ± 0.10. This finish coating shall be oven - cured. .4 Interior coating: a washcoat shall be applied on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.30 ± 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 0.50 ± 0.10 mils. The washcoat shall be oven - cured. .5 Color the color of the exterior finish shall be as shown on drawings. .6 Physical properties: the coating shall conform to the manufacturer's standard performance criteria as listed by certified test reports for fade, chalk, abrasion, humidity, adhesion, pollution resistance, and others as required and standard within the industry. .4 Lighting: .1 Standard NEMA type fixture as required for application indicated. Refer to Electrical drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Flashing and Trim 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS SECTION 9J -3 .1 All flashing and trim shall be of the same material, gauge, finish, and color as the soffit panels and fabricated in accordance with standard SMACNA procedure and details. .2 Fasteners .1 All screws shall be aluminum, plated steel, or stainless steel. They shall have a combination steel and EPDM washer. .2 Screws for panel to structurals shall be of sufficient length to penetrate the supporting member by 1 ". .3 Screws for flashings and sidelaps shall be #14 HHA x 3/4" sheet metal stitch screws. All accessories, flashings, and sidelaps shall be fastened 12" o.c. .3 Caulking shall be a polyurethane where it is exposed and there is no thermal movement. All caulking or sealing shall be done in a neat manner with excess caulking or sealant removed from exposed surfaces. .4 Caulking shall be non - skinning, non - hardening gun grade butyl sealant or butyl sealant tape where it is concealed and where thermal movement must be accommodated. All caulking or sealing shall be done in a neat manner with excess caulking or sealant removed from exposed surfaces. .5 Vapor Retarder. .1 Retarder with a permeance of 0.05 or less as determined by ASTM E 98. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS .1 Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections paragraph for related materials. 2.5 FABRICATION .1 Panels are not lappable. .2 Panels shall be roll formed on a stationary industrial type rolling mill to gradually shape the sheet metal. Portable rollformers, rented or owned by the installer, are not acceptable. .3 Fabricate flashings from the same material as the roof system. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .1 Test Reports: Manufacturer will provide test certification for minimum requirements as tested in accordance with applicable industry standards and /or to meet performance standards specified by various agencies. .2 Changes from System: The manufacturer must certify system performance following any substitution of materials ' or change in assembly design. .3 Wind Load Resistance Tests: Exterior metal coiling system shall withstand wind blasts of up to 120 miles per hour (mph) with no deformation of excessive permanent set. .4 Fabrication Tolerance .1 Panel shearing length: ± 3/4" maximum. .2 Follow tolerances in MCA's Pre - formed Metal Wall Guidelines. .5 Verification of Performance. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product cartons for installation. 3.2 EXAMINATION .1 Inspect substrate to verify deck layout complies with shop drawing layout and is smooth, even, sound, and free of depressions. .2 Report variations and potential problems in writing to the architect. .3 Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. .4 Work to be Concealed: Verify work above support system in complete, tested, and installed in manner which will not affect layout and installation of linear metal ceiling system. 3.3 PREPARATION .1 Field Dimensions: Installer must verify actual field dimension prior to installation. .2 Coordination: Coordinate and schedule installation of soffit system with work of other trades affected by this installation, with particular attention given to mechanical and electrical work required to be installed and operating before ceiling work can begin. 3.4 INSTALLATION .1 Conform to the standard set forth in the SMACNA architectural sheet metal manuals and the approved shop drawings detailed for the project. .2 Install panels plumb, level, and straight with the ribs parallel, conforming to the design as indicated. .3 Install panel system so it is watertight, without waves, warps, buckles or distortions, and allow for thermal movement considerations. .4 Abrasive devices shall not be used to cut on or near roof or wall panel system. .5 Apply sealant tape or caulking as necessary at flashing and panel joints to prevent water penetration. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS SECTION 9J -4 .6 Remove any strippable film immediately upon exposure to direct sunlight. .7 Vapor retarder. The joints, perimeter, and all openings shall be sealed per the manufacturers instructions to provide a continuous vapor retarder. 3.5 CLEANING .1 Dispose of excess materials and debris from jobsite. .2 Remove filings, grease, stains, marks, or excess sealants from roof panel system to prevent staining. .3 Protect work from damage from other trades until final acceptance. * Kynar® 500 is a registered trademark of Elf Atochem North America, Inc. Hylar® 5000 is a registered trademark of Ausimont USA, Inc. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 10* PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS TOILET PARTITIONS (NEW CONSTRUCTION) *SECTION 10A -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 This section includes stainless steel units as follows: .1 Toilet compartments; Ceiling hung. .2 Urinal Screen: Wall hung. .2 Furnish all materials, inserts, anchors, etc. required for a complete toilet partition installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. .3 Refer to Section 10B for toilet room accessories. .4 Comply with local Codes or handicap provisions of local agencies, if no local codes are applicable comply with the requirements of ANSI A117.1 for handicap use of toilet rooms. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings: .1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot b made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL UNITS .1 Door, Panel, Pilaster Construction: Seamless metal facing sheets utilizing 60 inch wide sheets of stainless steel, pressure laminated to 'core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped- and - formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. .1 Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound - deadening honeycomb of resin - impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) for doors and panels and 1- 1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters. .2 Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. .3 Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. .2 Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless -steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard with manufacturer. .3 Pilaster (Shoes): Stainless -steel sheet, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. .4 Brackets (Fittings): Stirrup type; ear or U- brackets, chrome - plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (Zamac). .5 Finish: Type 304 Stainless steel, #4 finish with pattern. Protect exposed surfaces from damage during shipment and installation with a strippable PVC film. .1 Pattern: 5.WL as manufactured by Rigidized Metals Corporation, 658 Ohio Street, Buffalo, New York 14203. .2 Pattern: 5 -SM as manufactured by Rimex Metals Inc., 2850 Woodbridge Avenue, Edison, New Jersey 08837. 2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy -duty operating hardware and accessories. .1 Material: Chrome plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (Zamac). .2 Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self - closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. .3 Latch and Keeper. Manufacturer's standard recessed or surface - mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. .4 Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. .5 Door Bumper. Manufacturer's standard rubber - tipped bumper at out - swinging doors. .6 Door pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out - swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. .2 Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome - plated steel or 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 10* TOILET PARTITIONS (NEW CONSTRUCTION) *SECTION 10A -2 brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft- resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust - resistant, protective - coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION .1 Ceiling -Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops fo pilasters to conceal anchorage. .2 Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch- (610 - mm-) wide in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch (914 -mm) wide out - swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch (813 -mm) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. .1 Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: '/z inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). .2 Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel: a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. .2 Installation responsibility specified in Section 6A. .1 Ceiling -Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure above and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position. Overhead support structure and drilling of holes for attachment are by others. 3.2 ADJUSTING .1 Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out- swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 10* TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES *SECTION 10B -1 PART 1: GENERAL - END OF SECTION - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to complete the toilet room accessories installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including inserts, backing plates, anchoring devices, etc. for support of accessories. .2 Mounting bolts and screws shall be concealed wherever possible. Exposed mounting bolts shall have theft proof type heads and shall match the material of the accessories. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Toilet Room accessories will be provided by the Contractor (unless noted otherwise that they are provided by the Owner): NOTE: Schedule on drawings is based on prototype store requirements. Refer to drawings for quantities & variations due to code requirements, etc. Contractor is responsible for coordination of correct number of accessories. Verify provision responsibility for each item. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Check all accessories received at job site to determine correct type and quantity. Report missing or damaged merchandise to the superintendent promptly. Installer to examine all areas and conditions under which toilet accessories are installed and coordinate with Contractor those corrections are made prior to proper installation. .2 Install all Owner furnished and contractor furnished accessories at standard heights and proper locations per manufacturer's requirements. Protect adjacent surfaces during installation of accessories and correct any damaged areas to the satisfaction of the superintendent. .3 Remove paper, boxes and other items at the end of each day's work. .4 Check to assure that all accessories are securely fastened before leaving project. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 10* WALL STANDARDS *SECTION 10C -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all wall standards, brackets, accessories, and tools required for completing wall standard fixturing in entire store. .2 Installation of work is included in the Carpentry Section - Section 6A. .3 Requirements of materials are as follows: .1 Heavy Duty Slotted standards are to be installed, where indicated on the drawings. .4 Wall standards are to be painted to match adjacent wall finish. See Section 9H and Room Finish Schedule. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Heavy Duty Slotted wall standards, brackets and miscellaneous hardware shall be a standard product of Garcy Hardware Co., Crown Corporation, or approved equal. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 10 WALL & STOREFRONT PROTECTION SECTION 10D -1 TOYS "R" US HAS ESTABLISHED PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATIONS WITH MCCUE CORPORATION. CONTRACTOR TO PURCHASE ALL MATERIALS TURN THIS PROGRAM. NOTE: THE CONTRACTOR ALSO FURNISHES ALL OTHER PROTECTION WALL MATERIALS. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, and tools required for installation of wall protection work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 1.3 SUBMITTAL .1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of wall and storefront protection and associated components of the work. Indicate layout, hardware, finishes, and other components as necessary for complete installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER .1 McCue Corp. — Salem, MA. 800/800 -8503. Contact Jim Sullivan. 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Refer to drawing plans and elevations for material locations and Interior Finish and Materials List for material information and colors. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Contractor to prepare all surfaces as required by manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Field installation of building surfaces will be accomplished either by overlay wrapping with solvent binder or thermo forming with heat joint, field or shop fabricated. .2 Contractor to verify with local manufacturer's representative choice of methods based on maximized application for specific application condition. .1 Flush rivets or mechanical fasteners will not be allowed. .3 Only authorized materials and methods of installation will be allowed per manufacturer's requirements. 3.3 CART RAILS .1 Install lengths, layout, and materials as indicated on drawings. .2 Field verify all existing conditions and report any conflicts to Owner prior to installation. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 10 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 10E -1 CONTRACTOR IS TO PURCHASE A PROTOTYPE QUANTITY OF 18 #IPABC FIRE EXTINGUISHER UNITS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRUCHASE ADDITIONAL UNITS AS REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY. TOYS "R" US EXTINGUISHER UNITS ARE PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR PER LOCAL AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS AS PER ORIGINAL CONTRACT. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 Drawings and general provisions of Division 1 apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, and tools required for installation of portable fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Portable fire extinguishers shall be of the dry chemical type for Class A, B, and C fires, labeled and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Extinguishers shall be 5- pound capacity, and shall be provided with wall mounting hardware and signs as may be required by local authority. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Mount in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. .2 Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of all portable fire extinguishers as required by local Fire Marshall or other authority. As a minimum, Contractor shall provide and install 15 portable fire extinguishers. Maximum travel distance to fire extinguisher is 75 -feet. Construction Project Manager shall determine the location of portable fire extinguishers in the absence of specific requirements from local authority. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 11 DOCK SEALS SECTION 11A -1 PART 1: GENERAL .3 Provide written manufacturer's warranty to Construction Project Manager upon completion and acceptance of 1.1 GENERAL installation. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, scaffolding, equipment, etc., for complete installation of all dock seals as shown on drawings and specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Manufacturer. Fairborn USA, Inc., Sandusky, Ohio, 800/262- 1188, Contact: Barbara Miller. .2 Door Seal: Series 1000. .1 Coordinate size, width, height, bumper edge projection, and drive grade. .3 Contractor to verify with Construction Project Manager and manufacturer prior to ordering. .4 Contractor to furnish and install metal hoods over all dock doors, No. MH2400, 11 -feet by 24- inches. 2.2 Source Quality Control: .1 Contractor to verify delivery of all parts, fasteners, and accessories with assembly instructions as required by manufacturer. .2 At existing conditions, verify opening sill profile to provide proper size for dock sea. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Contractor to prepare wall surface for seals at dock doors. This includes all blocking, framing, and dips as required by manufacturer. .2 Assembly and installation to be per manufacturer's requirements and instructions. 3.2 WARRANTY .1 Contractor to assume responsibility for complete installation as designated on drawings and in specifications. .2 Any damage, defects, faulty installation or performance of the material will be the sole expense of the Contractor for repair or replacement. 2010 SSBS Renovation END OF SECTION Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 11 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS DOCK LEVELER AND BUMPERS SECTION 11B -1 .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc., for complete installation of dock bumpers as shown on drawings and specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Rite Hite /Genquip EOD — Model 6620 edge of dock leveler /bumpers. For local representative, contact Chris Angello, Arbon Equipment Corporation — Northeast, 238 Fernwood Ave., Edison, NJ 08837, ph. (732) 225 -5220, fax (732) 225 -8781. .1 Size: 66" wide x 20,000 = Capacity. .2 Where edge of dock leveler is installed at existing conditions with curb angle or no angles, provide transition plate with bend. Verify configuration with existing conditions. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Dock leveler and bumpers to be installed per all manufacturer's requirements and instructions. .2 Attach edge of dock leveler to 8 inch embedded channel per manufacturer's requirements. .3 At existing conditions, notch concrete floor to accept one edge of transition plate and attach per manufacturer's requirement. 3.2 WARRANTY .1 Contractor to warranty all labor, materials, and installation per requirements of Division 1 and manufacturer's information. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 13* EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE *SECTION 13A -1 TOYS "R" US HAS ENTERED INTO AN OWNER - SUPPLIED, GENERAL CONTRACTOR INSTALLED NATIONAL SIGNAGE PROGRAM WITH JONES SIGN. VERIFY WITH PROJECT PM FOR COORDINATION WITH SIGN COMPANY FOR INSTALLATION. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .3 Submittal data, shop drawings and samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. .4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates and Substitutions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services necessary to coordinate the work described in this specification section in accordance with drawings, schedules, this specification, including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Install and make operational all owner - supplied signs as indicated on the drawings, providing any power, fasteners and accessories. .2 All other items required to make the work of this Section complete. .2 Pursue and pick -up permit if designated by BRU PM. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and samples for sign work including indicating tube diameter, bend radii, support locations, electrical power requirements and connection locations, gas type, tube coatings and operating color. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Electrical power to junction boxes, junction boxes and circuits from junction boxes specified in elsewhere in Division 16, Electrical. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: .1 National Electrical Code (NEC) latest edition. .2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL). .3 All other governmental or local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 REGULATIONS, FEES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND CODE COMPLIANCE .1 All electrical work, equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall conform to the requirements of the Power Company, the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, the National Fire Protection Association, Life Safety 101, 13 & 90A latest revisions, and any other governmental or local authorities having jurisdiction. Certificates of approval shall be obtained in duplicate from any department or agency issuing same, and shall be turned over to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the work including the Electrical Underwriter's Inspection Bureau. The Contractor shall pay for all inspections, permits and license fees in connection with the work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Illuminated wall letter signs. .2 Any and all other signs as indicated on drawings including pylon signs, monument signs, etc. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS .1 Take field measurements prior to fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when taking field measurements might delay work. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Coordinate owner - supplied signage in accordance with these contract documents. .2 Coordinate sign and signage in accordance with standard industry practice working with Owner's sign contractor. .3 Contractor shall coordinate quantity and location of junction boxes, power feeds and home -run circuits with sign supplier. If additional circuits are required, they shall be connected to the spare breakers in the same panelboard as those neon power circuits shown on drawings. If additional 'circuits are required, they shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner. .4 Provide all blocking, intemal supports, framing, etc. as dictated by store construction and sign manufacturer's mounting requirements. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 13* EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE *SECTION 13A -2 .5 Touch up: Restore any and all surfaces which are damaged or marked by the installation of any materials required or specified in this Section, to their original finished conditions as acceptable to the Owner's Representative. -END OF SECTION- 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15A -1 .1 All mechanical work shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of this section and all sections of Division 1. .2 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, substitutions, and alternates. .3 All piping work for mechanical and plumbing systems shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15B. .4 All air distribution systems and accessories shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15E. .5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .6 Submittal Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section lA of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .7 See Section 11 for list of Owner supplied items. 1.2 PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION .1 All mechanical equipment and materials stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft. .2 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the contract documents and the manufacturers' instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturers' instructions or such written instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the Contractor at no increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. .3 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be installed to permit removal of coils, heat exchangers, fan shafts, fan wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves, drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. The installations shall be arranged such that the removal can be accomplished without damage to the part removed and without damage to or disassembly of any other equipment, piping, device, or system. 2010 SSBS Renovation .4 All anchor bolts, inserts, supports, and the Contractor responsible for installing the respective equipment or system unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified shall provide installation hardware. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the location of all anchoring hardware, inserts, supports, and related accessories. .5 All open ends of pipes and equipment connections shall be capped or plugged (until final connections are made) to keep out dirt and other foreign materials. Caps and plugs shall be designed for the intended purpose. Plugs of rags, waste, insulation, or similar materials shall not be used for plugging. .6 Equipment and materials of the same general type shall, in as much as practical, be of the same manufacturer throughout the work for uniform appearance, operation, maintenance, and repair. .7 If the size of any piping, valves, devices, ductwork, or related accessories is not clearly evident on the drawings, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. .8 All V -belt, chain, coupling, gear, and similar rotating drives shall be equipped with a protective guard provided by the Contractor installing the equipment. Other than factory furnished guards, all guards shall be constructed of small pattern, flat expanded metal over a steel angle frame or rigid sheet metal guard securely bolted to the floor and /or equipment. Provide a tachometer hole at the motor shaft and driven equipment shaft for guards protecting field adjustable drives and all belt driven equipment All motor couplings, such as with base mounted pumps, shall be provided with sheet metal coupling guards. All guards, other than factory finished guards, shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer and a final heavy coat of enamel to match the adjacent equipment. .9 All mechanical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shall be installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All piping connections to pumps and other equipment shall be installed without strain, distortion, or excessive forces in the piping or on the equipment. 1.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL WORK .1 General: .1 The following specifications are the general requirements for thermal insulation for all mechanical systems. The specific insulation requirements for systems and equipment shall be as specified in the respective sections of Division 15. .2 Refer to Section 15B for the basic requirements governing the application of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. .3 Each Contractor shall be responsible for the insulation on all work installed under his contract. If certain equipment is furnished by the Owner or others, but Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15A -2 installed by the Contractor, the cost of the required insulation shall be included in the Contractor proposal unless otherwise noted on the drawing or specified herein. .4 Thermal insulation work shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly engaged in this type work. An insulation subcontractor may do insulation work. The respective Contractor shall submit the name of each insulation Subcontractor to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to authorization of the work. .2 Materials and Installation: .1 All thermal and acoustical insulation materials shall be the products of Owens- Corning, Certain -teed Products CSG Group, or Johns - Manville, except as otherwise specified. .2 All insulation materials used shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding flame spread of 25, smoke developed of 50, and fuel contributed of 50. .3 Any treatment of facing or jackets applied to meet the above fire and smoke hazard ratings shall be permanent. The use of water - soluble treatments is prohibited. .4 Insulation accessories, such as coatings, adhesives, mastics, tapes, and cloths shall have the same component fire and smoke hazard ratings as specified above. .5 All insulating materials or their containers shall be labeled to indicate that the fire and smoke hazard ratings do not exceed the above requirements. .6 All insulation shall be applied and installed in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's instructions using the materials, accessories, and methods required to meet the fire and smoke hazard ratings. .7 Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces after inspections, testing, and any other operations requiring exposed conditions are completed. .8 All cold surfaces shall be insulated using vapor barrier with permeability rating suitable for the intended service. Vapor barrier shall be continuous and unbroken with all joints properly sealed. .9 All existing insulation on existing piping, equipment, or systems that is damaged due to relocation of equipment, new piping or sheet metal connections, or other operations under the contract, shall be patched or replaced to match the existing insulation and finishes. New insulation work, which is subsequently damaged due to negligence, shall be repaired or 2010 SSBS Renovation replaced at the cost of the Contractor causing the damage. .10 Pipe and externally applied duct insulation shall be continuous through wall and floor openings except at penetrations through fire rated construction and where penetrations are required to be fire stopped. Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers as required to avoid interference with the fire damper operation. Sleeves for insulated piping and externally insulated ductwork penetrating walls and floors shall be sized to accommodate the specified insulation thickness except where insulation must be interrupted as specified above. 1.4 LAYOUT AND PLANNING .1 Contractor shall be responsible to layout, plan, and locate all systems, equipment, ductwork, and piping based on accurate field measurements and shop drawings or certified prints as required to properly install, maintain, repair, and operate all systems and equipment. Contractor shall not scale the drawings to locate equipment, ductwork, or piping. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and routing. Contractor shall plan the work to minimize offsets, to avoid interference, and to provide for the neat and proper erection of the systems. All piping and ductwork shall be installed as high above floor and /or mezzanine as possible to avoid interference with the Owner installed fixturing and racking. 1.5 ' TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND STARTUP .1 Contractor shall test, adjust, startup, and place into proper operation all equipment and systems installed under his contract. Prior to the startup of any equipment or system, the responsible Contractor shall make certain that all equipment is clean, free of foreign matter, all bearings properly lubricated, and all precautions in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. .2 Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, temporary piping, devices, gauges, instrumentation, and equipment required to perform testing, adjusting, calibration, startup, acceptance tests, and operation of the equipment and systems, including work related to startup services provided by the equipment manufacturers. .3 Set points given in the specifications and /or on the drawings for operation, control, and safety devices are for initial trial. Contractor shall establish final set points as required to achieve optimum operation under installed conditions. .4 Provide taps in piping work as required to install temporary gauges and /or devices for calibrating and adjusting regulating devices, controls, pumps, etc., whether shown on the drawings or not. .5 Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Tests for the heating systems shall be conducted during winter season and that for the cooling systems shall be conducted during the summer season. However, for air - cooled refrigeration equipment, cooling systems shall be charged and put into Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15A -3 service at the time of completion regardless of the season. If the cooling systems are put into operation during winter or spring season, Contractor shall recheck the systems during the following summer season. If the heating systems are put into operation during warm or mild weather, Contractor shall recheck the systems during the following winter season. .6 Other Systems: Test shall be performed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's standard testing procedures or as specifically called for under the individual equipment or system specifications. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15B -1 .1 All work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 15A - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 This section is intended to establish the basic requirements for piping work common to all mechanical and plumbing systems. This section shall govern all piping work except as otherwise modified in other sections and /or as required to comply with governing codes and /or regulations of utilities. .3 Fire Protection Systems: Refer to Section 15G. The installation of all fire protection systems and piping shall comply with the requirements of governing codes. The provisions of the National Fire Codes (latest edition) published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) shall govern as minimum requirements in the absence of requirements from governing codes. 1.2 PIPING MATERIALS .1 The piping materials for each type of mechanical system are specified in the respective sections of these specifications. The specified materials shall be used to establish the base bid by each Contractor, unless otherwise specified and /or allowed by addendum. .2 Substitute Piping Materials: .1 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any piping materials and /or systems potentially suitable for the services involved in lieu of the specified materials. .2 Contractor's proposal for substitute materials shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute piping material accepted by the Owner's Representative shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit data on the substitute in sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to evaluate joining and installation methods, expansion and contraction, corrosion resistance, flow performance, and other pertinent features. Contractor shall be responsible to assure that the substitute materials can be installed properly with the restraints imposed by the geometry and construction features of this project. .3 Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates to finish and conceal pipe penetrations through walls in all locations where exposed to view. 1.3 VALVES .1 General: .1 All valve catalog numbers specified herein refer to Jenkins valves, except as otherwise noted. .2 Equivalent valves as manufactured by Stockham, Fairbanks, Kennedy, Hammond, Watts, Apollo, Milwaukee, or Nibco are acceptable for base bid. .3 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any valves of other manufacturers and /or designs potentially suitable for the applications and services involved in lieu of the specified valves. Contractor's proposal for substitute valves shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute valves shall be approved by the Engineer prior to award of the contract by the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall, when requested, submit complete and detailed data on the substitute valves to the Engineer. The data shall include an identification of the proposed service and application of each valve. .4 Hose end valves (H.E.V.) shall be provided as gate valves with hose thread adapter having 3/4 inch hose thread, except as otherwise noted or specified. .5 Valves for special applications or systems, which are not specified in this section, shall be specified in the appropriate section of Division 15. .2 Ball Valves: .1 Domestic hot and cold water. .2 Up to 2- Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends, 125 psi steam. .3 Over 2- Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, 125 psi steam. .3 Gate Valves: .1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water. .1 2 -1/2- inches and larger: Figure 651 -A, 125 - pounds, IBBM (iron body, bronze mounted), solid wedge, OS &Y, flanged. .2 2- inches and smaller. Figure 47 -U, 125 - pounds, bronze, rising stem, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, screwed. .4 Globe Valves: .1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water. .1 2 -1/2- inches and larger. Figure 613, 125 - pounds, IBBM, OS &Y, bolted bonnet, regrind -renew beveled bronze disc and seat ring, flanged. .2 2- inches and smaller. Figure 106 -A, 150 - pounds, bronze, composition disc, disc holder, screw over bonnet, screwed. .5 Check Valves: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 .1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water. BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15B -2 .1 2 -1/2- inches and larger. Figure 624, 125 - pounds, IBBM, swing check, bolted cap, regrind renew bronze seat and disc, flanged. .2 2- inches and smaller. Figure 92 -A, 125 - pounds, bronze, swing check, regrinding bronze disc, screwed. .6 Gas Systems: .1 2 -1/2- inches and larger: ACF (WKM) Figure R -1431, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, lubricated plug, flanged, with operating wrench. .2 2- inches through 1 -inch: ACF (WKM) Figure R -1430, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed, with operating wrench. .3 3/4 -inch and 1/2 -inch: ACF (WKM) Figure D -125, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed, with operating wrench. .4 Lubricant used shall be suitable for intended service. At the completion of the work, each valve shall have an operating wrench secured to the valve or pipe by wire or heavy twine. At the option of the Owner's Representative, all operating wrenches shall be turned over in a steel or 3/4 -inch plywood toolbox with hinged lid and hasp. .5 Companion flanges for flanged valves shall be provided with flat face or with raised face removed. .7 Shut Off and Isolation Valves, Open End Valves: .1 Required shut off and isolation valves are shown on the drawings and /or specified in the appropriate section of Division 15 of these specifications. .2 In general, a shut off valve will be required at the mains and at each piece of equipment so that the system and equipment may be isolated for service or repairs. Valves shall be line size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. .3 Each Contractor is requested to notify the Contractor prior to any piping installation, if in the opinion of the Contractor, any additional shut off valves might be desired. If approved by Owner's Representative, a change order will be issued. .8 Drain Valves: .1 The installation of all liquid piping shall be such that the contents may be easily drained at the end or at the beginning of each run. Provide 1/2 -inch drain valves with 3/4 -inch hose end connections for all drainage, unless larger size is shown on the drawings or required by code or regulation. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 When a sudden change of piping elevation is unavoidable due to construction obstructions, a drain valve must be installed at the low point for draining. 1.4 JOINING OF PIPING SYSTEMS .1 Threaded Joints: .1 All steel or wrought iron pipes with threaded joints shall have full cut, taper threads and the interior of the pipe shall be reamed out clean and to full size of pipe. .2 Factory threaded pipe shall be furnished with thread protector during shipment and until pipe is installed. .3 Threaded pipe joints shall be made with an approved pipe thread compound, applied to male threads only. .2 Sweat Joints: .1 All copper piping shall have sweat joints, except at screwed valves and devices where sweat -to- threaded adapters shall be provided. .2 Solders for Sweat Joints: For domestic hot and cold water and DWV services, joints shall be made with lead free soldering; for refrigeration service, joints shall be made with silver solder, 35 percent or 45 percent alloy. .3 Welded Joints: .1 Welded joints shall be made by the shielded metal arc process. Welders shall be currently qualified by tests in accordance with the Standards for Qualification of the American Welding Society or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For portions of the work falling within the jurisdiction of ASME Code, welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME standards. The level and type of welder qualification shall be consistent with the pressures, temperatures, hazards of the respective systems, and as required by governing Codes. .2 As minimum requirements, welding work shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS and /or ASME specifications to assure proper procedures for joint preparation, joint alignment, electrode selection, and welding techniques. .4 Use of Fittings and Unions: .1 All changes in direction and size of pipe shall be made with fittings. No mitering, saddling, or welding or smaller pipe into larger will be permitted. Run outs in steel or wrought iron piping (except galvanized), 1 -1/2 the size of the main or smaller may be made by use of "Weld -O- Lets," run outs larger than 1 -1/2 the main size shall be made with tees. .2 Unions shall be provided at the connections to all equipment unless the connections are made with flanged fittings or mechanical couplings. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15B -3 .5 Connection Between Dissimilar Metals: .1 No direct connection between dissimilar metals is permitted. .2 For screwed connections use insulating "dielectric" unions. .3 For flanged connections (including bronze or copper to cast iron or steel; cast iron to steel; or stainless steel to cast iron or steel) the raised face shall be removed or flat face flange provided. A full face, nonmetallic, gasket suitable for the service shall separate flange faces. Flange bolts shall be isolated from the dissimilar material by means of insulating sleeves or bushings and washers. .6 Gaskets: Gaskets for flanged connections shall be of suitable materials and thickness for the service involved. For natural gas and water systems, "CC Rubber" by Crane, or equal shall be used. For fuel oil systems, cork fiber shall be used. .7 Joints for Sewer Piping Systems: Refer to Section 15C - Plumbing Systems. .8 Mechanical Couplings: .1 At the Contractor's option, mechanical couplings and fittings may be used for applications as specified herein. The Owners Representative shall consider mechanical couplings for other systems provided the Contractor submits a proposed substitution prior to contract award. .2 Couplings and fittings shall be Victaulic, Gustin- Bacon, or approved equal. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 and /or Style 75. Gaskets shall be Grade "E" EPDM and bolts shall be oval neck track type with hexagonal nuts. Galvanized couplings with cadmium plated bolts and nuts shall be used with galvanized pipe. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, standard seamless welding fittings may be used in conjunction with the grooved fittings. .3 Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with manufacturer's recommended lubricant to facilitate installation. Pipe shall be grooved in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Manufacturer's field instructions shall be provided. .9 Joints for other piping systems, if applicable, shall be as specified in the appropriate section of Division 15. 1.5 ROUTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS .1 All piping shall be run parallel to and perpendicular to walls, floors, and ceilings with due allowance for pitch. .2 All piping above ground shall be run exposed in presales and unfinished areas. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 All piping above ground shall be run concealed in finished areas, including offices and office areas, finished toilet rooms, and similar finished areas. An area shall be considered "finished" whenever a ceiling is required to conceal structural framing. Concealed piping shall be installed within ceiling plenums or spaces, within wall construction, enclosed in furred columns, etc. Piping to be concealed in unfinished areas shall be so noted on the drawings. No water piping shall be concealed in exterior walls. .4 In general, all horizontal piping shall be run as high above finished floors as possible, with proper allowance for pitch. Elevations and routings of piping shown on the drawings are reasonably accurate and are intended as a guide, not as a restriction, for proper piping installation. Contractors shall verify elevations and routings to minimize offsets and to assure proper coordination prior to installation of piping work. 1.6 SLOPE FOR PIPING SYSTEMS .1 All piping shall be sloped to permit draining of the respective piping system. The following minimum slopes shall apply except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. The direction (of slope) given below is the direction of piping fall with respect to the primary fluid conveyed. SYSTEM OR SIZE Domestic Water Sewers, Ind. & San. Sewers, Ind. & San. Sewers, Ind. & San. Sewers, Storm Natural & branches COMPONENT SLOPE All interior piping '4" and smaller 6" and larger Vents Interior Gas Mains RATE 1" in 40ft. 1" in 4ft 1" in 8ft. 1" in 4ft 1" in 8ft. 1" in 50ft. DIRECTION Against flow With flow With flow From stacks With flow With flow .2 When governing codes or utility regulations require slopes greater than those specified above or prohibit slopes as great as those specified above, the code or regulation shall apply. .3 The direction and magnitude of the slope may be varied from the above specifications for special or unavoidable conditions when approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. 1.7 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS .1 All piping and related devices and equipment shall be securely supported to avoid sagging, vibration, and excessive strain or forces on the piping or related devices and equipment. Proper allowances shall be made for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS .2 Piping shall be supported from structural framing, concrete floor slabs or walls, or masonry walls as the strength of the supporting construction safely permits. .3 No piping shall be supported from roof decks, metal side wall, precast concrete side walls, lateral bracing for structural members, or web members of bar joists without prior written approval from the Engineer. .4 Each Contractor shall provide all beams, channels, angles, unistrut, and similar members, including brackets, braces, stanchions, saddles, clips, etc., as required to support piping from building framing, platforms, or floor. Column type supports and stanchions anchored to floor or concrete pad (exterior) shall be permitted only where shown on the drawings, specified herein, or approved by the Engineer. All steel supporting elements for piping shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer, white or light gray in color except as otherwise specified. .5 Piping supported from field placed concrete floors or walls shall be attached by means of appropriate inserts installed at the time concrete is poured. Each Contractor shall provide all inserts for his portion of the work and shall be responsible for the location of same. .6 No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be permitted without prior written approval from the Engineer. .7 Hangers and supports shall be trapeze, split or solid ring, clamp or clevis type on adjustable hanger rods. Hanger rods shall be attached to beam clamps or other suitable brackets or supports. Welding of hanger rods to steel framing will not be permitted. .8 Pipe hooks, strap iron, or chains will not be permitted for supporting piping. .9 Hangers and supports in direct contact with copper tubing shall be copper plated and suitably isolated from tube to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. All hangers, rods, and supporting devices shall be primed with light gray rust inhibiting primer, cadmium plated, galvanized, or equivalent noncorrosive finishes or materials. .10 Piping shall be supported and /or anchored at each change in pipe direction, at branch connections to mains and run outs to equipment, at valves 3- inches and larger, and at heavy devices. .11 Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamps placed at each floor or ceiling and at each coupling and fitting. Clamps shall not be exposed where exposed piping passes through finished areas. Clamps shall be securely supported by brackets or similar structural members, which are in turn supported from suitable building construction. .12 The maximum center -to- center spacing of pipe hangers and supports, in feet, shall comply with the following schedule for hard drawn copper tubing, for steel pipe, Schedule 40 and for Schedule 40 PVC. 2010 SSBS Renovation SECTION 15B -4 COPPER PIPE SIZE PVC 1/2" 4 3/4" 4 1" 4 -1/2 1 -1/4" 5 1 -1/2" 5 2" 5 2 -1/2" 6 3" 6 COPPER STEEL PIPE SIZE PVC STEEL 5 3 -1/2" 8 6 4" 6 -1/2 8 7 5" 8 8 6" 7 -1/2 8 8 8" 8 8 8 10" 8 8 8 12" 8 8 8 .13 Hanger and support spacing for other types of piping shall comply with the following, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. .1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 8 -feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than 1 hanger or support for each length of pipe. When 5- foot sections of pipe are used or when piping is not supported at joints, hanger and support spacing shall not exceed 5 -feet. .2 Cast Iron: 8 -feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than 1 hanger or support for each length of pipe. .3 Plastic or Fiberglass Piping: The maximum spacing of supports and hangers for specified plastic or fiberglass piping shall be as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications. .4 Substitute Piping Materials or Systems: Contractors offering substitute piping shall submit proposed hanger spacing, preferably the manufacturer's printed recommendations, to the Engineer for approval. .14 When any piping, 6- inches and larger, runs parallel to steel joists (or beams), such piping shall be supported with hangers attached to supports spanning 2 joist (or beams). When piping runs perpendicular to steel joists (or beams), piping shall be supported by each joist (or beam). All hangers (or support strats) shall be located at joist panel points. .15 Refer to separate paragraph covering thermal insulation for additional requirements for hanging and supporting insulated piping. 1.8 UNDERGROUND PIPING .1 Underground piping shall not be laid in contact with rocks, boulders, cinder fill, frozen earth, or any other materials or objects which could cause physical damage to the piping or unusual corrosion action. .2 All underground cast iron, vitrified clay, and concrete piping shall be laid with the bottom quadrant (90 degrees) of the piping fully and uniformly supported on a shaped trench bottom, including bell or hub ends, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. .3 Vitrified clay pipe shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C -12 as minimum requirements. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15B -5 .4 Vitrified clay pipe under exterior paved areas shall be installed with the following bedding conditions, unless more stringent conditions are noted on the drawings or required by site conditions. .1 Total cover over top of pipe 18- inches or less. Lay pipe with bottom half (180 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4- inches thick below pipe barrel. .2 Total cover over top of pipe 30- inches to 19- inches. Lay pipe with bottom quadrant (90 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4" thick below pipe barrel. .5 Underground piping subject to thrusts or "pull apart" forces due to pressure testing, shock loads, or other potential movements shall be anchored with clamps and rods and /or with concrete thrust blocks as required to resist such forces or potential movements. Clamps, rods, or similar metal anchors shall be painted or coated to prevent corrosive action. 1.9 THERMAL INSULATION - APPLICATIONS TO PIPING .1 Refer to Section 15A for basic requirements for thermal insulation work and materials. Refer to each section of Division 15 for the types and thickness of insulation and other requirements for insulation of specific systems and equipment. .2 The following specifications are for the methods of applications of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. Special and /or additional requirements (if any) for particular systems shall be as specified in the respective section of Division 15. .3 Fittings and Valves: Insulate with equal insulating value and vapor barrier as the respective pipe insulation with built up covering, with premolded (such as Insul -Sure as manufactured by Insul - Coustic, Corp.) or with 1 piece premolded PVC insulated fittings such as manufactured by Zeston. Fittings insulated with built up and mitered segments shall have cement, mastic, and wrap applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance. .1 Exposed portions of valves shall be insulated as much as practical, except the hand wheel and exposed portions of the stem. .2 Apply cements, mastics, and straps in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance. .4 Pipe Saddles: .1 No insulation shall rest directly on pipe supports. Provide heavy gauge galvanized steel or aluminum protector saddles on the bottom half of the piping at each support of sufficient length and stiffness to prevent noticeable deformation of insulation. .2 "Hot" Piping (hot water, etc.): 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 Piping may be supported by pipe hangers directly, with insulation fitted around the hangers and finished in a similar manner as fittings, or insulation may pass through hangers. .3 "Cold" Piping (cold water, downspouts, etc.): .1 All insulation of "cold" piping shall pass uninterrupted through pipe hangers. .2 Insulation saddles on which pipe is supported shall be of sufficient density to safely support the weight of piping and contents without noticeable deformation. Bottom portion of the pipe cover shall be provided with galvanized steel or aluminum protectors. .3 Prefabricated pipe saddles shall be "Insul- Shield," as manufactured by Insul - Coustic Corp., or similar shop fabricated saddles. Sample of shop - fabricated saddles shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. .5 Accessories: .1 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on low temperature piping systems shall be insulated with 3/8- inches thick flexible foam plastic material or insulation and vapor barrier equivalent to adjacent piping. .2 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on high temperature piping systems shall be insulated equivalent to adjacent piping. .3 Insulation for removable components shall be easily removable without disturbing the main piping insulation. 1.10 CLEANING AND PRESSURE TESTING .1 General: .1 Refer to Section 15C for additional requirements relating to plumbing systems. .2 Definition: Cleaning as used herein shall be taken to mean the removal of all materials foreign to the respective piping system, which is or could be contaminating, obstructing, or unsightly. .2 Cleaning: .1 The interior of all piping work shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials as the work is installed. .2 After installation, the interior of all piping shall be cleaned and flushed in accordance with the specifications governing the respective systems. .3 The exterior of all above grade piping shall be cleaned of mud, dirt, grease, and other foreign materials by brushing and /or washing with suitable solvents or Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15B -6 detergents as required to leave the piping clean in general appearance and suitable to receive thermal insulation. The other Contractor painting, when required, shall perform further cleaning and preparation of piping to receive. .3 Pressure Testing: .1 All piping shall be pressure tested in accordance with the following specifications and as required by other sections of Division 15. .2 Testing work shall be successfully completed prior to application of any thermal insulation or pipe covering, prior to backfilling any buried piping, and prior to enclosure of any concealed piping. .3 Testing shall be in the presence of the Engineer and /or the Owner's Representative and all authorities having approval jurisdiction over the installed work. Each Contractor shall perform and conduct the testing at times mutually agreed upon with the Owner's Representative. .4 Isolate or remove any and all devices and equipment from the piping prior to the pressure testing if the devices or equipment are not designed to withstand the test pressures. If the maximum pressure rating is not marked on the device or equipment or is otherwise not known to the Contractor, the Engineer shall be notified prior to testing for directions. .5 Testing shall be repeated or continued until all piping is proven leak free. All defects shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Defective welds in welded piping shall be ground off and the piping shall be re- welded. Defective pipe or fittings shall be replaced, not patched or repaired. .6 Gaseous Fuel Piping: Shall be pneumatically tested with compressed air at a minimum of 25 psig and in no case less than 50 percent above the operating pressure of the system. Pressure in the section of piping under test shall hold constant for a period of 24 hours after applying correction factors for temperature changes. Where required by code or utility company, a certificate of compliance shall be obtained from the utility company or code enforcing authority. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PLUM BING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -1 .1 All work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 1SA — Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements 2. Section 15B — Basic Requirements for Piping Systems. .2 All work under this section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the contract documents. 1.2 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE .1 Wastewater disposal for this project shall be accomplished by connection to the underground public sewer system as indicated on the drawings. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire sewer service installation, including the payment of all 1 time fees or charges related to tapping the public sewer main and /or for the sewer service. .3 The Contractor shall, during bidding, contact the sewer utility to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. All fees and charges shall be included in the Contractor's proposal. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the sewer service for the project on a timely and proper basis. .4 The Contractor shall verify the invert elevation at the point of discharge to the public sewer system and all other related details prior to proceeding with the sewer system. .5 The entire sewer service installation shall comply with the regulations of the sewer utility and with governing building codes. In the absence of governing codes, provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall govem as minimum requirements. 1.3 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE .1 Potable water supply for this project shall be obtained by connection to the underground public water main as indicated on the drawings. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire water service installation, including the payment of all 1 time fees or charges related to tapping the public water main and /or metering. The Contractor shall, during bidding, contact the water utility to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. All fees and charges shall be included in the Contractor's proposal. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the water service for the project on a timely and proper basis. .3 The Contractor shall provide all piping, valves, and accessories as required for the installation of the water meter(s). If required by the water utility, the Contractor shall furnish and /or install the water meter(s). .4 The entire water service installation shall comply with the regulations of the water utility and with governing building codes. In the absence of goveming regulations or codes, provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall govern as minimum requirements. .5 Water service piping shall be laid at a depth as necessary to prevent freezing per NFPA Pamphlet 24 and /or water utility standards. .6 Separation between underground potable water piping and all underground storm piping, sanitary and industrial sewer piping, and other potentially contaminating sources shall be as required by governing codes and regulations. As minimum requirements, maintain a separation of 10 -feet of undisturbed earth between underground potable water and sewer piping. Where water piping must cross over sewer piping, maintain a dear separation of not less than 18- inches between pipes. Sewer piping shall not be laid above water piping unless approved in writing by the Engineer. .7 The Contractor shall be responsible to plan and coordinate the water service piping to interface with and comply with the fire protection requirements of this project. Water piping installed without regard to these requirements shall be reworked and /or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 PIPING MATERIALS (Except as otherwise required by governing Codes): .1 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems; .1 Service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, ASTM A74, coated inside and out with tar pitch varnish, shall be used in the following applications, and where noted on the drawings. .1 Underground, within building lines and to not less than 5 -feet beyond. .2 Underground vent piping, 2 -inch minimum size. .3 Interior above ground soil, waste, vent & storm piping 2 inches and larger. .2 Standard strength vitrified clay pipe and fittings, ASTM C13, shall be used for underground, exterior of building lines, below unpaved areas. .3 Extra strength vitrified clay pipe and fittings, ASTM C200, shall be used for underground, exterior of building lines, below paved areas. Where indicated on the drawings, cast iron soil piping shall be used. .4 Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A120, with screwed, galvanized cast iron drainage pattern fittings shall be used for all interior above ground soil and waste piping, 1 -1/2- inches and smaller. Vent piping 2- inches and larger above ground shall be cast iron soil pipe or galvanized steel pipe. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -2 .5 At the PBC's option, underground sewer piping exterior of building lines may be gasketed joint PVC, ASTM D -3034, equivalent to Carlon PS 46. .6 Where permitted by local building code, interior DWV piping (above and below grade) may be Schedule 40 PVC pipe with drainage pattern fittings joined by solvent cementing or thermal bonding. Installation, joining, bedding, and hanger spacing (100 degrees F ambient basis) shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for each respective piping system. PVC products are not permitted within a return air plenum. .7 DWV copper pipe and fittings may be used for above grade piping. .2 Water Systems (Domestic Hot/Cold and Fire Service): .1 For combined domestic and fire service, underground main water piping 6 inches and larger shall be push on joint, cement lined gray cast iron pipe and fittings, ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110) and ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111), having ANSI A21.6 thickness designation of 22, equivalent cement lined ductile iron pipe and fittings, or 1 -M Manufacturing "Blue Brute" Class 200. .2 Underground domestic water service 3- inches and larger shall conform to the above specifications for combined fire and domestic service. .3 Underground main water service piping 2 -1/2- inches and smaller shall be Type K copper tubing with solder -type wrought copper fittings (cast bronze when necessary) or Schedule 40 PVC with solvent cemented joints, where permitted by local codes. .4 Interior above ground piping shall comply with the following: .1 Pipe: Type L copper tubing, hard temper, ASTM 888. .2 Fittings: Solder type wrought copper (cast bronze where necessary). .3 Unions: Wrought copper solder joint, copper -to- copper. .5 Cold water piping may be Schedule 40 PVC with .3 Joints for Cast Iron Soil Piping: .1 Joint shall be properly packed with jute, oakum, or hemp and filled with molten lead not less than linch deep. Lead shall be virgin pig lead conforming to the standards of the Lead Industries Association. Reclaimed lead shall not be used. Surfaces of hub and spigot shall be cleaned prior to Joint markup. .2 At the PBC's option, where permitted by local codes, compression type neoprene gasketed joints, such as Tyler's "Ty- Seal" or equivalent, may be used. Joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper gasket lubricant, such as Tyler's "Lubri/Fast" and the proper tooling to drive the spigot into the gasketed hub. This method must comply with governing codes. .3 At the PBC's option, the pipe, fittings, and joints may be of the "No -Hub" design conforming to Standards 301 -72 of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute in the following applications and where permitted by governing codes. Joints shall consist of neoprene gaskets, corrugated stainless steel shield and worm gear draw bands. Draw bands shall be tightened alternately with the proper torquing tools. Installations shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations and Pamphlet 100 of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. The "No -Hub" system shall be acceptable for above ground piping only. .4 Joints for Vitrified Clay Piping: .1 For straight piping runs, joints shall be properly packed with jute or oakum and filled with cement mortar. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make up. .2 At the PBC's option, compression joints conforming to ASTM C425 may be used on straight runs and where permitted by governing codes. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make up. Lubricants and joint assembly shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper tooling. .3 Curvilinear runs of VCP shall be installed with plain end pipe joined with compression sleeve couplings conforming to ASTM C- 594 -70. Type B, latest revision such as manufactured by Dickey or equivalent. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make up, and joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper lubricant and tooling. At the PBC's option, this method of joining may be used for all clay piping work. This method must comply with goveming codes. 1.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES .1 Vacuum Relief Valves: Watts No. 36A for water service on water heaters installed above fixture outlets. .2 Water Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts with integral strainer and built -in bypass check valve feature. Type, size, and no flow set point pressure as indicated on the drawings (if required). .3 Shock Arrestors: 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -3 .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the quiet operation of the water system. .2 Provide shock arrestors to absorb hydrostatic shock and vibration in the piping. Shock arrestors shall be sized and located as per manufacturer's recommendations. .3 Manufacturer. J.R. Smith 5000 Series; Josam No. 1485, Zurn, Wade Shockstops, W -5 to W -100 and WP Series, Amtrol Diatrol as equals. .4 Where shock arrestors are not used, provide air chambers as follows: All fixtures at each hot and cold water supply, provide 18 -inch air chamber 1 pipe size larger than the supply connection to the respective fixture, minimum 1 -inch. .4 Vacuum Breakers: .1 Provide approved vacuum breakers as indicated, specified or required. Vacuum breakers shall be provided for plumbing fixtures as specified under plumbing fixtures. .2 When indicated on the drawings, provide vacuum breakers as follows: Angle pressure type, Sloan V- 300 -A, V- 188 -A, V -350A up to 3/4 -inch, or approved equal. 1 inch and over Watts No. 288A, or approved equal. .5 The Contractor shall fumish and install a thermal expansion tank in the water supply piping to the water heater when a backflow prevention device, pressure reducing valve assembly or check valve is installed on the incoming water service. .1 Thermal expansion tank shall be model ST, "Therm -x- trol" as manufactured by Amtrol, Inc., West Warick, RI 02893. .2 Thermal expansion tank size and installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. 1.6 DRAINS .1 Provide floor drains and special purpose drains in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. .2 Drains shall be the product of Josam, Wade, Blake, Jay R. Smith, or Zurn. .3 All drain outlets shall be the same size as the size of the connecting piping unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Drains used with hub and spigot cast iron pipe shall have caulked outlet unless otherwise required by governing codes. .4 Drains may be installed by means of a Neoprene gasketed joint furnished and guaranteed leak proof by the drain manufacturer, such as the Josam 'Jiffee- Joint," where permitted by governing codes. .5 All floor drains shall be installed flush with finished floor. .6 All floor drains shall be installed with deep seal P- traps. Provide trap seal primers where required by governing codes. Floor drains shall be properly located to serve the respective equipment and areas. Prior to rough in, coordinate and verify drain locations with the Owner's Representative, Contractor, and other Contractors as required. 1.7 CLEAN OUTS .1 Sanitary Sewers: .1 Provide clean outs as required to comply with governing codes. The following specifications shall apply as minimum requirements. .2 Clean outs and accessories shall be the products of Josam, Wade, Blake, Jay R. Smith, or Zurn. .3 Where possible, clean outs shall not be located in the sales area. In general, clean outs shall be provided in locations indicated on the drawings and shall be spaced not more than 50 -feet apart for interior horizontal piping. Provide a clean out on all soil and waste stacks; locate each stack clean out at 18 inches to 36- inches above finished ground floor. .4 Clean outs shall be of the same size as the pipe served up to and including 4 inch lines and not less than 4 inches for larger lines. .5 Clean outs shall be extended to and flush with finished floor. Exterior clean outs shall be installed in an 18- inches x 18- inches x 6- inches thick concrete pad flush with final grade thickened at the center to encase the pipe joint. .6 Clean outs shall be installed with accessibility for rodding purposes. In the absence of governing codes, the provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall apply. .7 The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the proper types of clean outs, including accessories and access covers, for each cleanout application. Each cleanout installed shall be compatible with the surrounding construction and finishes. The following specifications shall govern for the given applications unless surrounding construction or finishes preclude their use. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA Application Josam Series Number Exposed Clean outs 58500 Floor Clean outs Concrete Floors 58180 or 58190 Vinyl Tiled Floors 58000 -12 or 58010 -12 Carpeted Floors 58000 -14 or 58010 -14 Terrazzo Floors 58040 -1 -13 or 58050 -2 -13 Ceramic or Quarry Tiled Floors 58020 -2 or 58030 -2 Wall Clean outs Concrete or Masonry 58710 -4 or 58790 -4 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -4 Drywall on Studs 58710 -4 or 58790 -4 Plaster on Studs 58700 -2 or 58750 -2 Ceramic Tile on Drywall 58740 -2 or 58770 -2 Exterior Clean outs Unpaved Areas 58180 or 58190 Paved Areas 58300 -5 -15 or 58310 -5 -15 .8 Clean outs with inside caulked outlets may be installed by means of a neoprene gasketed joint fumished and guaranteed by the cleanout manufacturer, such as Josam "Jiffee /Joint," where permitted by governing codes. 1.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM .1 Provided plumbing fixtures and trim in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. .2 Fixtures and trim shall be the products of American Standard, Kohler, Elijer, or Crane, except as otherwise noted on the drawings or in these specifications. .3 All flush valves shall be Sloan and shall be equipped with approved vacuum brakers. .4 Carriers for will hung fixtures shall be the products of Josam, Wade, Blake & Jay R. Smith, or Zurn. .5 Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, all fittings and trim shall be chrome plated brass and shall be of the same manufacturer as the fixtures, including P- traps, supplies, stops, and union connections. Strap wrenches shall be used where required to prevent damage to chrome plated pipe and fittings. .6 All fixtures shall be set firm and squarely aligned with walls and floors. All fixtures shall be properly connected to soil, waste, and vent piping and required water supplies in a rigid and substantial manner, without damage to any adjoining work or finish. Provide chrome - plated escutcheons at exposed wall penetrations for all piping work. .7 Stops or gate valves shall be installed in the hot and cold water supplies to each fixture or piece of equipment. Provide union connection on the fixture or equipment side of each stop or gate valve. .8 Provide shock arrestors or air chambers as specified herein on hot and cold water supplies to fixtures. .9 Lavatories, sinks, and all other fixtures where carrier is not applicable for wall mounting shall be installed with through bolts secured with square steel plates (minimum 4 -inch square by 10- gauge) for bearing and support on the opposite side of the wall. .10 Fixtures mounted to partition walls where bearing plates and bolts would be exposed in an adjacent from shall be installed with not less than 1/4 -inch toggle bolts or other fasteners acceptable to the Engineer. Lead shield anchor bolts will not be acceptable. .11 Water cooler provided by Plumbing Contractor at market cost through proprietary specification with Halsey Taylor, 222 Camden Court, Oak Brook, IL 60523, Telephone: 630/574 -8645, Contact: Ms. Pat Froom. 1.9 WATER HEATER .1 Provide hot water heater as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. .2 Water heater shall be equipped with Watts temperature pressure relief valve. The relief valve discharge for the unit shall be piped unobstructed and undiminished in size to the floor receptor. Relief valve discharge piping shall comply with governing codes. Piping shall be pitched downward in the direction of flow, shall be routed without upward offset, and shall not constitute a hazard for tripping or headroom. .3 Heater tank shall be insulated with glass fiber insulation covered with a steel sheet metal jacket having a baked enamel finish. Tank shall be equipped with manual drain valve with 3/4 -inch hose thread outlet. .4 Hot Water Heater. Energy efficient unit meeting state and local codes as manufactured by A.O. Smith located as indicated on the drawings. Water heater shall be U.L. listed. Equivalent units by other manufactured will be acceptable for base bid. Type, size, voltage, and KW as specified on the drawings. 1.10 THERMAL INSULATION .1 Refer to Section 15A for general requirements and workmanship, and to Section 15B for methods of application. .2 For insulation work, the Contactor may employ an insulation Subcontractor specializing and experienced in this work. Subcontractor shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. .3 Hot and Cold Water Piping: All exposed piping and all piping concealed above ceilings shall be insulated with 1 inch thick Fiberglas 25 ASJ /SSL insulation with all service jacket (ASJ). In all cases where accumulation of condensation might damage construction materials, piping shall be insulated. .1 Condensate pipe, contractor may use 1/2 -inch thick closed cell pipe insulation, Armstrong Armaflex; IMCOA "Imcolock," or approved equal. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All butt ends and joints shall be sealed moisture tight in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Refrigeration Suction & Hot Gas pipe, contractor may use 1 -inch thick closed cell pipe insulation, Armstrong Armaflex; IMCOA " Imcolock," or approved equal. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All butt ends and joints shall be sealed moisture tight in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -5 .4 Electric Water Coolers: Portion of condensate and waste drain pipes within the coolers and exposed shall be insulated with 3/8 -inch thick flexible closed cell foam plastic material. .5 Hot water heater shall be factory insulated. .6 Interior Above Grade Storm Piping (when indicated on drawings): Insulate all horizontal piping, including riser elbows, and all roof drain bodies as specified for water piping. .7 Refirgeration Suction & Hot Gas pipe, contractor may use 1 -inch thick closed cell pipe Armaflex; IMCOA "Imcolock," Installation shall be in strict insulation, Armstrong, or approved equal. accordance with the manfacturer's recommendations. All butt ends and joints shall be sealed moisture tight in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 1.11 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .1 Definition: Cleaning as used herein shall be taken to mean the removal of all materials foreign to the respective system, fixture, or equipment, which is or could be contaminating, obstructing, or unsightly. .2 The interior of all piping shall be cleaned as it is being installed. Special care shall be taken to keep potable water piping clean and free of contaminating materials, including rodents and vermin. .3 Prior to testing, completed sections of sewer piping shall be flushed to clean and assure the absence of obstructions. .4 Prior to testing and insulating, all water piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed by opening valves and faucets, etc., until the discharged water is clean and dear. The exterior of all above grade water piping shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, grease, plaster, concrete, caulking and other loose or adhered foreign materials. .5 The exterior of exposed sewer piping shall be cleaned as specified above for water piping. .6 All fixtures, water heaters, water coolers, and other fixtures and equipment installed under the PBC's contract shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be clean when turned over to the Owner. Gamed labels and gum residue shall be removed unless such label constitutes name plate or performance data or is the certification of a nationally recognized rating agency such as U.L., AGA, ASME, etc. .7 All floor drains, roof drains, P- traps, strainers, cleanouts, access panels, aerators, piping specialties, and special fixture and trim shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be clean when turned over to the Owner. .8 After all cleaning, testing, adjusting, and insulating work is completed, all domestic and potable hot and could water piping systems, including related tanks, heaters, pumps, and equipment, shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with governing codes prior placing into service for potable use. In the absence of governing codes, the disinfected shall be in accordance with AWWA Standards 2010 SSBS Renovation C- 601 -54 or C- 601 -68 for piping and AWWA Standard D -102 -64 for tanks, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 1.12 TESTING AND ADJUSTING .1 This Contractor shall notify the Administrative Authority having jurisdiction over plumbing work and the Owner's Representative 3 working days before the test will be made. If necessary, tests on portions of the work may be made and these portions of work may be concealed after being proven satisfactory. All tests shall be made in the presence of proper authorities. Repairs of defects that are discovered as a result of inspections or tests shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will not be accepted. Tests shall be repeated after defects have been eliminated. .2 Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: .1 All piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig until leak free. Pressure in each test section shall be maintained at the initial test pressure for not less than 12 hours. .2 All leaks shall be repaired and the pressure tests shall be repeated as specified above until proven leak free. .3 All devices or items of equipment not designed or recommended by the manufacture for the test pressures shall be removed or effectively isolated from the test pressure. .3 Sewer and Sanitary Piping: .1 ' Waste, Drain and Vent: Shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the governing plumbing code, but in no case less than the "water test" method specified in the National Standard Plumbing Code. In general, all piping shall be tested with not less than 10 -feet of water column except the uppermost 10 -feet of the system. Piping exposed to subfreezing temperatures may be tested by the BOCA "air test" method with the approval of the Code enforcing authorities. .2 Sewers: Shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of local sewer inspection authority. In general, the sewer under test shall be subject to a minimum pressure of 10 -feet water column, or a flow test to be witnessed by the sewer inspector. .4 Check all faucets, stops, and isolating valves for leaks and repair and /or adjust as required. .5 Check and adjust the temperature and operation of all hot water heaters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. .6 Check and adjust the bubbler stream on all water coolers and drinking fountains. Check and adjust the timing cycle of all flush valves as applicable. .7 Check, test, and adjust as required all equipment, fixtures, and devices installed under the PBC's contract in Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15C -6 accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Equipment requiring lubrication shall be checked and lubricated, if required, prior to start-up. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OWNER SHALL FURNISH SELECTED HVAC UNITS, ACCESSORIES AND CONTROLS, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE HVAC SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DELIVERY COORDINATION, RECEIVING, SETTING AND INSTALLING THE OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AS WELL AS THE 1 -YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY FROM THE DATE OF STORE OPENING. EVEN THOUGH THE EQUIPMENT IS OWNER FURNISHED, THIS DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF ANY RESPONSIBILITIES RELATING TO THIS EQUIPMENT, ITS INSTALLATION OR WARRANTY. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 All work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 15A - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. 2. Section 15B — Basic Requirements for Piping Systems. .2 All work under this section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. .3 Upon receiving all Owner furnished HVAC equipment requiring CFC or HCFC refrigerants for operation, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for compliance with all State and Federal regulations relating to clean air and /or venting of CFC and /or HCFC refrigerants until the equipment is turned over to Toys "R" Us for operation and maintenance. This responsibility shall include all work relating to charging and /or recharging any and all HVAC refrigerant systems furnished and /or installed, or any existing equipment reused, under the HAC's contract. 1.2 VENTILATION FANS AND ACCESSORIES .1 Provide ventilation fans. Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place the ventilation fans with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. .2 Each fan shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. .3 When fans are specified on the schedule to have a disconnect switch, the switch and wiring between the switch and fan motor shall be factory installed. .4 The curb cap of curb mounted fans shall be set in a bed of waterproof sealant on the roof curb and securely attached with not less than No. 10 screws on 9 -inch centers. Provide at least 2 screws on each side for small units. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify the size and location of each roof opening with the Contractor prior to the cutting and /or placement of openings. .5 The other Contractors shall provide power wiring and motor starters for all fans and all control wiring and devices for all manually controlled fans. SECTION 15D -1 .6 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Contractor shall provide control devices, wiring, and work for all fans, which are automatically controlled. All work shall comply with the NEC, latest edition. Control devices shall be Honeywell. .7 Refer to Section 15E for specifications governing prefabricated roof curbs. 1.3 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS .1 Provide gas fired unit heaters as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and in accordance with the following. .2 Units shall be as manufactured by Reznor or Modine. Size, type, features, accessories, and ratings shall be equivalent to scheduled units. .3 Except as noted on the drawings, units shall be installed as close to the roof deck as practical for maximum clearance to floor. Provide supporting steel members and hardware as required to secure the units. .4 Each unit shall be provided with a space thermostat, which shall control the fan and burner. The Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring. Units shall have aluminized steel heat exchanger, spark ignited pilot with electronic flame supervision and 100 percent safety shut off, automatic gas valve, pressure regulator, transformer, high limit and fan delay controls, gas cock, and pilot valve. Provide full size dirt leg (6 inch length), stop valve, and union connection for gas supply to each unit. .5 Except for ducted units, provide horizontal louvers on all units. Provide vertical louvers as scheduled on the drawings. .6 Units shall be AGA Certified, CGA approved, and approved for use in the state where the project is located. Manufacturer's standard warranty shall apply. Refer to separate Section 15F for gas vents. 1.4 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (When included on plans) .1 Provide Electric Unit Heaters. Coordinate delivery of, and install in place the heaters with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. .2 Units shall be as manufactured by Berko, Qmark, and Marley. Each electric heater shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. .3 Contractor shall install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by the manufacturer but not factory mounted. .4 Unit shall be mounted per manufacturer's instructions. General trades contractor shall provide framing for units to be mounted in architectural ceilings. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify the size and location of each ceiling installation prior to the placement of openings and framing. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT .5 The Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring and motor starters (as required) for all electric heaters and all control wiring and devices for all manually controlled units. .6 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Contractor shall provide control devices, wiring, and work for all heaters, which are automatically controlled. All work shall comply with the NEC, latest edition. Control devices shall be provided by manufacturer or be Honeywell. 1.5 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS (When included on plans) .1 Provide Electric Radiant Heaters. Coordinate delivery of, and install in place the radiant heaters with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. .2 Units shall be as manufactured by Berko, Qmark, and Marley. Each radiant heater shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. .3 Contractor shall install electric radiant heating equipment including devices furnished by the manufacturer but not factory mounted. .4 Unit shall be mounted per manufacturer's instructions. General trades contractor shall provide framing for units to be mounted in architectural ceilings. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify the size and location of each ceiling installation prior to the placement of openings and framing. .5 The Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring for all electric radiant heaters and all control wiring and devices for all manually controlled units. .6 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Electrical Contractor shall provide electronic control devices, wiring, and electrical work for all radiant heaters, including thermostats and electronic timers. All work shall comply with the NEC, latest edition. 1.6 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS (When included on plans) .1 Provide unitary air conditioners, comprising evaporator section and roof mounted condensing section. Coordinate delivery of, and install in place the air conditioners with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. .2 Units shall be as manufactured by EMI, Mitsubishi, Sanyo, Fujitsu, and AirDale. Each electric heater shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. .3 When evaporators or condensing units are specified on the schedule to have a disconnect switch, the switch and wiring between the switch and fan motor shall be factory installed. .4 The roof mounted condensing portion of the air conditioner shall be mounted on rails on the roof. Refer to Section 15E for specifications governing prefabricated roof curbs. 2010 SSBS Renovation SECTION 15D -2 .5 The Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring and motor starters (as required) for all evaporator fans and condensing units. .6 Each Air Conditioning Units shall include Packaged, self- contained, factory assembled, prewired unit, consisting of cabinet, compressor, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, heating coil, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. .7 Unit evaporator shall include a Drain Pan. Galvanized steel with corrosion - resistant coating. Drain shall be routed to nearest floor drain, or as shown on drawings. .8 The Evaporator Fan shall be V -Belt driven, with permanently lubricated bearings or Direct drive, fan, statically and dynamically balanced, resiliently mounted. .9 The Compressor shall be Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection. .10 The Evaporator Coil shall be direct expansion coiling coil of seamless copper or aluminum tubes expanded into aluminum fins. Refrigeration circuit with externally equalized thermal expansion valve, filter- drier, and charging valves. .11 The Condenser shall be Co- Axial, copper tube in copper tube or shell and tube with copper tubes in steel shell with water temperature actuated water regulating valve. .12 Where indicated on plans, provide Electric Heating Coil. .13 Provide units with Air Filters. They shall be easily removed, 1 inch thick permanent cleanable panel filters. .14 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Contractor shall provide low voltage controls, including adjustable room thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor, condenser, and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. Include system selector switch off- heat - auto -cool. .15 Equipment room (Data - Telephone) split system air conditioning unit shall be provided with low ambient accessories for operation down to zero degree F for all locations with ASHRAE 99% heating winter dry bulb temperature of 30 degrees or lower. For all other locations, unit shall have low ambient protection down to 32 degrees F. 1.7 ROOF TOP COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) .1 Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place roof top combination heating and cooling units with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. .2 The roof top units shall be Lennox (refer to plans). Units shall be furnished by the Owner. The national account representative for Lennox is Michael Johnston, contacted Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15D -3 by phone: 972/497 -6884. Each unit shall be a complete unitary package consisting of heating section (when specified), condensing section, cooling coil, blower, controls, wiring, piping, casing, and structural base. The entire unit shall be factory wired, piped, assembled, charged and tested in all modes of operation. Gas fired units shall be AGA certified for outdoor use. Four year extended protection plan for the motor /compressor is included in the agreement between Owner and manufacturer, but shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner as part of the Project closeout documentation. The Contractor shall also obtain and provide written certification for 5 -year warranty when offered as "standard" for units 15 -tons and smaller. .3 Each unit shall be designed to operate on a 480 -volt, 3- phase, 60 -Hz power supply with a single field power connection (unless otherwise noted). All necessary starters, contactors, control transformers, controls, and control safety devices shall be factory installed and wired. .4 Each unit shall be provided with and installed on a full perimeter prefabricated roof curb, as provided by Owner. Installation shall be by the Contractor. Roof curbs or units shall be shimmed or blocked using sheet stock steel as required to set the units level within the tolerances recommended by the manufacturer (1/16 -inch per linear foot or as otherwise indicated in installation, startup and service instructions). All flashing, counter flashing, and sealing shall be provided by the Contractor as required for a watertight installation and interface with the roofing construction. The Roofing Subcontractor shall install roof insulation and membrane on the exterior of each curb. Contractor shall coordinate as required. Curb design shall conform to the standards of the National Roofing Contractor's Association. When required by local codes and /or authorities, each rooftop unit shall be anchored to the roof curb as recommended by manufacturer for a watertight installation. Each roof curb shall be likewise anchored to the roof structure. .5 Each unit shall be provided with a factory equipped and installed economizer cycle (unless otherwise noted) actuated by a differential enthalpy controller arranged to cool with up to 100 percent outside air. Relief air damper sections shall be factory installed and arranged to operate barometrically in direct proportion to the outside air quantities. Contractor shall field install all components shipped loose from the manufacturer, per the manufacturer's instructions. Compressor short cycle protection shall be provided on all units. .6 Outside air dampers on each unit shall be balanced and set for the specified minimum position and shall be closed when unit is shut down. .7 Evaporator condensate drain for each unit shall be trapped (unless the unit is internally trapped) and drainpipe shall be extended to length as noted on the drawings. Piping shall be Type M copper er- cepp°D:-. .8 Each unit shall be factory assembled, charged, and tested. All starters, relays, and control transformers shall be included. 2010 SSBS Renovation .9 The other Contractors shall provide all power wiring in accordance with wiring diagrams, data, and instructions furnished by the Contractor. The other Contractors shall install, and wire all field installed control devices. See Paragraph 6 for the furnishing of control devices. .10 Each system shall be installed, checked out, and started up in strict and complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Refer to separate paragraphs for testing and balancing requirements. Contractor shall complete the equipment operation check and send completed forms for each RTU to the General Contractor and the Toys R Us Construction Project Manager. 1.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS .1 General: .1 Except as otherwise specified and /or noted on the drawings, all automatic control devices for all rooftop units shall be furnished, installed and wired by the other Contractors. Contractor shall ensure that all units are running prior to Automated Logic EMS startup. .2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary coordination to insure the proper location and function of all controls. .3 Refer to the electrical drawings for further clarification of the work provided by the other Contractors. All control related conduit required shall be furnished and installed by the other Contractors. .4 Smoke detectors shall be factory installed in the supply and /or return air ducts (as minimally required) on all roof top units with 2,000 CFM or greater. Smoke detectors shall be wired to shut down the evaporator blower upon activation. HAC shall wire smoke detectors to the fire alarm system (trouble signal). .2 All toilet area exhaust and transfer fans shall be interlocked and controlled through a contactor provided and wired by the other Contractors. Fans shall be capable of operating only during the occupied period. .3 Unit Heater Control: Space thermostat shall cycle unit and burner. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. .4 Refer to drawings for additional control requirements and specifications. 1.9 IDENTIFICATION .1 All temperature controls and each rooftop unit shall be provided with identification tags of black phenolic material with engraved white letters, supplied and installed by the Contractor. .2 Identify each control device with its number and service by means of a laminated black and white phenolic label with Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15D -4 letters engraved in black to white. Identifications shall correspond to the operating instructions as specified herein. .3 Provide an 8 -1/2 -inch x 11 -inch diagram showing the relative position of each rooftop unit with respect to the store's floor plan. Mount diagram within the control panel cabinet. .4 Tags for rooftop units shall have letters not less than 1 inch high and shall be attached to unit's sheet metal housing panel. Tags to read: RTU -1, RTU -2, etc., corresponding to mark on drawings. 1.10 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .1 The Contractor shall prepare and mount in a glass frame in the manager's office, or as otherwise directed, step by step operating instructions for each piece of equipment. The instructions shall be simple and shall enable the manager to properly start and stop the equipment and to operate the equipment in all seasons. The format and instruction sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before being framed and mounted. 1.11 TEST REQUIREMENTS .1 After the installation is complete the Contractor shall perform the following tests to insure the performance of the equipment .1 Refer to Section 15B for additional requirements. .2 Refrigerant Piping: All field installed refrigerant piping shall be tested with a halide torch. Any leaks shall be repaired and the system recharged. .3 Performance Testing: The Contractor shall operate all pieces of mechanical equipment to insure satisfactory results. Measurements of air delivery shall be made at all fans and air devices and the systems balanced so that the deviation between actual and specified quantities is no greater than 5 percent. Ampere measurements shall be made of all motors to insure that none of the motors are overloaded. All automatic controls shall be tested to insure proper sequencing of operations as specified hereinbefore. Any equipment, which is defective in either performance or operation, or excessively noisy, shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. This data shall be submitted 30 days prior to store opening. A punch list will be prepared by the Owners Representative and /or the Engineer and submitted to this Contractor for remedial work to be completed 2 weeks prior to the date of store opening. Contractor shall remove all filters and shall install new filters throughout the system, 1 day prior to store opening. .4 Performance tests shall include, but not be limited to the following: .1 Ampere reading of each motor including corresponding nameplate rating. 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 CFM output from each air device and each fan. .3 Suction and discharge pressure for each compressor. .4 Entering and leaving db /wb on each stage of cooling and (db) heating. .5 CFM or fresh air for each unit. (Contractor to mark position of damper when proper fresh air requirement is achieved and lock damper in this position.) .6 List of room temperature and outside temperature at time tests were taken. .2 Tests shall be conducted during both cooling and heating seasons, preferably during period of design conditions. These tests will be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. Contractor shall submit his proposed schedule to the Owner's Representative no less than 3 weeks in advance for coordination. .3 A properly identified testing and balancing report shall be submitted to the Engineer (in 3 copies) for each testing period as above. Report shall include all testing and balancing results and all related or influencing conditions. .4 Contractor shall complete the Lennox Equipment check (copy of checklist is included at the end of this section) and send completed forms for each RTU to the General Contractor and the Toys AR@ Us Construction Project Manager. 1.12 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS .1 The Contractor shall provide, as part of his contract, 1 -year maintenance and repair service for all equipment and systems provided under the HAC's contract from date of Owner's acceptance of the equipment. .2 The 1 -year service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner for labor and materials and shall include all Owner furnished equipment. See Section 1B for additional requirements relating to Owner furnished equipment. .3 Each service call shall include, but not be limited to, the replacement of defective equipment and components, repair of leaks, oiling and lubricating motors and moving parts, cleaning and /or replacing filters, adjusting and /or replacing belts and drives, replacement of refrigerant which is lost for any reason, and all other routine maintenance work recommended by the respective equipment manufacturers. .4 This Contractor may provide for the above through use of his own service (except as herein indicated) department or such subsidiary as may be adequately staffed, equipped and competent to perform the required service functions when needed. If this Contractor does not maintain such a department or subsidiary, he shall be required to obtain the services of a reputable agency or firm regularly engaged in provision of start, test, check and service for equipment of types specified. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DIVISION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15D -5 .5 The company, agency, or firm that is selected by the Mechanical Contractor, subsidiary or independent, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, and shall be able to meet any minimum criteria that the Owner deems necessary in providing proper and adequate service of equipment involved. .6 The name of servicing agency shall be submitted along with the equipment submittals. .7 The provisions of the above paragraphs shall not be interpreted as diminishing in any way the equipment warranties and /or Contractor's 1 -year warranty on the project; however, the beginning date for the service requirements specified above shall begin on the same date as the warranty covering that same portion of this project. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT Order No. LENNOX IND Equipment Operation Check Store Name & No. Address Installer EOC Performed by Unit Model No. Control System Mfg: Name RTU No. Report Date Catalog No. City State Phone Serial No. Model Serial No. SECTION 15D -6 NOTE: Page numbers reference the IMC manual 503,268M -3/96 included with each L series unit. The following pages show appropriate tests and functions. Where * ** is shown, circle the appropriate choice. Doesn =t Apply Operating records - cooling Amp readings Ll Compressor #1 Compressor #2 Compressor #3 Compressor #4 Blower Voltages Power Voltages OK Attention Needed L2 T1 Before Applying Power Unit dearly marked with RTU # Electrical disconnect installed * ** Factory Field Condensate drain installed 120 -V convenience outlet Gas fuel type Gas manifold unions tight Belt tension and alignment Filters clean & in place Burglar bars in place Smoke detectors * ** Supply Return Jumper installed TB -1, 8 & 9 (Pages 7 & 13) A55 switched SW1, SW2, set SW3 #2 ON (Pgs 4 &6) A59 \61 switches set (Page 6 Fig 7 & 8) * ** Natural LP With Power On Check LED heartbeat on: (page 4 table 2) A55 A59/61 A56 A58 / A 60 * ** Thermostat simulation L3 Proper rotation of motors confirmed * ** Temperatures: Ambient Return Operating records - heat Gas line pressure in. wc. Economizer check Doesn =t Apply Yes T18 * ** Record software version (Pg 6) Record crank case heater amps 1 2 3 4 (Page 25) c1.1 (full cool) Measure & record pressures - next section h1.1 (full heat) Measure & record strip amps - next section Pressure, psig Discharge Suction 24v transformers No Supply Cool Supply heat (Pg. 26) Manifold pressure in. wc. Does the temp. limit function work ? * ** Yes OK Attention Needed Dampers motor from 0 to 100% Power exhaust operational A56 switches set Enthalpy sensor(s) installed * ** Indoor Enthalpy setting * ** A B C Minimum damper position setting 2010 SSBS Renovation Return D Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA No 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT EMS LED indicator * ** On Off Flashing Notes Energy Management System monitor contacted to verify Ano fault@ operation status Final repairs are * ** Done Being Done by Date EOC personnel signature indicating the assigned work is complete Name Date 2010 SSBS Renovation - END OF SECTION - Date SECTION 15D -7 Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES .1 All work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 15B - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 All work under this section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the contract documents. 1.2 SHEET METAL WORK .1 General: .1 Sheet metal work shall be performed by the HAC's own sheet metal shop, or at the HAC's option, may be subcontracted to a qualified Sheet Metal Subcontractor, hereinafter referred to as the SMS. If SMS is to be used, the Contractor shall submit the name of the proposed SMS to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the awarding of the HAC's contract. .2 Reference Manuals: Quality of workmanship, metal gauges, fabrication, construction and installation of sheet metal work shall comply with the latest editions of DUCT MANUAL AND SHEET • METAL CONSTRUCTION FOR VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (herein referred to as SMACNA). All work and materials shall comply with NFPA Pamphlet 90A, latest edition. .2 Materials, Fabrication, and Installation: .1 Ducts for heating, cooling, and exhaust systems shall be galvanized steel of commercial lock forming quality having a minimum galvanized coating of 1 -1/4- ounces per square foot of sheet metal (total coating for both sides), unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. .2 Sheet metal work as shown on the drawings is, in general, schematic and based on the specified manufacturer's equipment and material dimensions. Contractor shall make accurate measurements in the field prior to ductwork fabrication and shall provide all necessary offsets and transition pieces required to accommodate the actual structural and equipment variations and as required to clear piping and recessed lighting fixtures. All ductwork in finished areas (with hung ceilings and ceilings covering roof structure and framing) shall be concealed. .3 Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, duct sizes shown are OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS (sheet metal sizes) of the ducts. Round ducts shall not be substituted for rectangular ducts SECTION 15E -1 shown on the drawings, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. .4 All rectangular ductwork shall be cross - broken or beaded, in accordance with SMACNA standards. .5 All ducts and ductwork shall be supported by hangers of the types and at the spacings as recommended by SMACNA. Contractor shall provide additional steel angles, channels, unistrut, etc. as required to span between bar joists or structural members in order to hang ducts at proper intervals and at necessary points. Hangers shall be provided at all elbows and at branch takeoffs on the main ducts. .6 No ducts shall be supported from the roof deck. No cutting or drilling of structural members is permitted unless written permission is obtained from the Engineer. No ducts shall be supported from or rigidly attached to any interior partitions, except those of masonry or concrete construction. .7 Where ducts pass through walls, floors or partitions, the space around ducts shall be sealed with mineral wool, or other noncombustible material as required by NFPA. Ducts shall be provided with sheet metal angle frames close fitted to the openings. .8 No duct is to be placed directly under any electric light outlet, and in those cases where lighting outlet must occupy the same location as the duct, provide sufficient bracing, etc., to allow the other Contractor to hang his lighting fixtures below the duct. The Owner's representative shall determine if the light fixture is to be moved or hung from the duct; secure his written approval before installation. .9 Where it becomes necessary, because of job conditions to run pipes, conduits, ceiling hangers, etc., through the ductwork, the Contractor shall do all sheet metal cutting necessary and shall patch all openings using suitable collars or sleeves with flanges to make an air tight patch. Furnish a streamline section around the element, which is passing through the ductwork. .10 Access doors shall be hinged and constructed of 18- gauge metal rigidly reinforced, furnished with necessary hardware and framing, including felted edges. When closed, they must be airtight. Access doors shall be located for easy removal or cleaning and for maintenance of filters, heating coils, dampers, and all other equipment requiring access. Access doors shall be not less than 256 - square inches and square, (similar to SMACNA Figure 2 -14). For plenums and casing, access doors to be similar to SMACNA Figure 3 -17 and Table 3 -1. .3 Turning Vanes and Radius Elbows: .1 All changes in direction of supply, return, and exhaust ductwork made with square elbows shall have turning vanes. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows whether shown on the drawings or not. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 I DMSION 15 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES .2 Tuming vanes shall be single wall type as manufactured by Aero /Dyne Company or Tuttle & Bailey, or may be shop fabricated in accordance with SMACNA. The number and spacing of vanes shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations or, if shop fabricated, in accordance with SMACNA. In ducts with internal liner, the vanes shall be installed over the liner, the liner shall not be interrupted for vane installation. .3 At the Contractor's option, elbows may be "Standard Radius" type in accordance with SMACNA with the throat radius equal to the width of the duct in the plane of the radius. When space does not permit the use of "Standard Radius" elbows, a short radius elbow with turning vane complying with SMACNA may be used. .4 Flexible Connections: .1 Provide sound and vibration isolating flexible connections as specified below on all motorized equipment to which duct connections are made unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2 Connections on interior work shall be made with ventglas neoprene coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. Connections made on work exposed to weather and /or sunlight shall be made with Vention Hypalon coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. .3 An allowance of at least 1 -inch slack shall be made at each connection. The fabric shall be attached at equipment with metal collar frames and to ductwork by folding in with the sheet metal or with bands or frames as required to make leak proof joints. 1.3 VOLUME CONTROLS .1 Provide splitter dampers, volume control dampers, and air extractors at all branch take offs and other locations as shown on the drawings and as otherwise required for the proper balancing of the air distribution systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper balancing and volume control of all air distribution systems. .2 Volume dampers, splitter dampers, and /or air extractor where splitters are not indicated shall be installed at all branch take offs of supply ducts. All dampers shall be substantially constructed of 16 -gauge metal, proportioning type, and so installed as to prevent rattling. All dampers to be quadrant type with locknut. 1.4 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES .1 Provide air distribution devices complete with accessories in accordance with the schedule on the drawings and the following. .2 The Contractor shall verify ceiling construction to assure the suitability of each device, frame, and hardware for the respective application. Provide all mounting hardware required whether specified on the drawing schedule or not. SECTION 15E -2 .3 Air devices shall be as manufactured by Barber - Colman, Metal -Aire, Tuttle and Bailey, Titus, Krueger, Carnes or Anemostat - Waterloo. 1.5 DUCT LINER .1 Low velocity rectangular duct systems (supply and return) shall be internally lined with 1 inch acoustical liner for systems where indicated and /or noted on the drawings. Exhaust ducts shall not be lined unless specifically noted on the drawings. .2 Duct liner shall be made of glass fiber material bonded with an inactive resin and having a density of not less than 2 pounds per cubic foot. The surface in contact with the air stream shall be coated with neoprene or other suitable coating to prevent erosion and to meet the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A. The material shall have the following ratings and characteristics. .1 Thermal conductivity (k- factor) of 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean. .2 Flame Spread: 25; Smoke Developed: 50. .3 Maximum air velocity of 4000 FPM in accordance with UL Standard 181. .4 Maximum temperature of 250 degrees F. :5 Noise reduction coefficient of 0.08. (Average of sound absorption coefficients at 250, 500, 1000, artid 2000 cps.) .3 All duct lining shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA Standards. Mechanical fasteners and adhesives shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. .4 Duct liner shall be as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group or Owens - Corning. 1.6 DUCT WRAP .1 Round ducts shall receive 1 -1/2- inches of Owens- Corning vapor barrier faced duct wrap FRK -25, series ED -150, with a thermal conductivity of 0.24 at 75 degrees F mean temperature, or equivalent by 1 -M or Certainteed. Insulation shall be adhered to metal at 8 inches o.c. with Foster's 85 -15 bonding adhesive. Longitudinal and circumferential joints shall be secured with 9/16 -inch flare door staples at 6- inches o.c. and taped with 3 -inch wide (minimum) foil reinforced Kraft tape. All penetrations of facing shall also be taped. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation. 1.7 FLEXIBLE INSULATED DUCTS .1 Provide flexible ducts as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group, Flexible Tubing Division of Automation Industries, Johns - Manville, or Wiremold as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15E -3 .2 Flexible ducts shall consist of an inner of helical wound spring steel coated with vinyl and covered with a vinyl coated fiberglass mesh permanently fused to form a continuous inner sleeve. The inner line shall be covered with fiberglass insulation jacketed with a reinforced, metalized plastic vapor barrier casing. .3 Flexible ducts shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 181, Class 1 and shall have the following ratings and characteristics. .1 Maximum thermal conductance (C) of 0.23 BTUH per square foot degree F at 75 degrees F. .2 Temperature range of 0 to 250 degrees F. .3 Maximum vapor transmission rating of jacket of 0.03 perm. .4 Maximum internal pressures of 2 -inch w.c. positive and 1 -1/2 -inch w.c. negative. .5 Maximum velocity of 2400 FPM. .4 Duct sizes noted on the drawings refer to the inside duct diameter. Flexible ducts shall be installed to provide sweeping configurations without undue restrictions, but not creating unnecessary sags or curves. Flat banding material not less than 1 -1/2- inches wide shall be used to suspend flexible ducting. Wires attached to grommets shall suspend ducting furnished with factory- installed grommets. .5 Where ceiling plenum space is not sufficient to permit top connection to ceiling diffuser with proper bend radius for flexible duct, Contractor shall fabricate and /or provide an adapter box for diffuser to permit side connection of flexible duct. 1.8 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS .1 Roof curbs for rooftop units (RTU's) and exhaust fans shall be manufacturer's standard, uninsulated curbs furnished by the Owner. All other roof curbs shall comply with the following paragraphs. .2 Provide factory prefabricated roof curbs and equipment supports as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. .3 When available, roof curbs, and equipment supports shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the respective equipment or item to be supported to assure a close and proper fit. All other curbs and supports shall be as manufactured by Vent Products Co., Inc., Louvers and Dampers, Inc., Penn Ventilator, The Pate Company, or Thybar Corporation, in accordance with the following: .4 Materials and Construction: .1 Curbs and supports shall be constructed of not less than 18 -gauge galvanized steel or 14 -gauge (.064 - inch) aluminum. Material of curb shall match the equipment or item to be supported when required to prevent direct contact of dissimilar metals. .2 Curbs and supports shall be reinforced and /or constructed of heavier gauge materials as required to properly support the applied loads, including wind, snow, and dynamic with safety factor of 2 or greater. .3 All joints and seams shall be continuously welded to assure leak proof and weather tight construction. .4 All curbs shall be insulated with rigid fiberglass board, 3 pounds per cubic foot minimum density. The thickness of insulation board shall be equal to the required nominal curb thickness: 1 -1/2- inches, minimum. .5 All curbs and supports installed on insulated roofs shall have an integral cant strip, 3 -inch minimum. The cant shall be raised by an amount equal to the thickness of the roof insulation. The top of all curbs shall be not less than 11- inches above finished roof. The top of all equipment supports shall be not less than 9- inches above finished roof. The top of all curbs and supports shall be installed level with factory built in pitch for roofs with a slope of 3/8 -inch per foot or more. .6 Top of all curbs and supports shall have a wood nailer of nominal 2 -inch lumber, except where self- flashing curbs are approved. Provide cap flashing for all applications where the wood nailer would be exposed. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL FU EL SYSTEMS SECTION 15F -1 .1 All work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 15A - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 Section 15B - Basic Requirements for Piping Systems. .2 All work under this section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the contract documents. 1.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and payment of all 1 time fees or charges related to providing gas service to the building. The Contractor shall contact the gas company during bidding to determine fees, charges, and requirements. The fees and charges shall be identified separately in the Contractor's proposal. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the gas service requirements with the gas company to establish the gas service to the building equipment on a timely and proper basis. .2 Provide a complete system of natural gas piping as indicated on the drawings and as required to properly connect all gas -fired equipment. All work shall comply with governing state and local codes and regulations of the gas utility company. The building gas piping system is designed and sized on the basis of natural gas at 1000 BTU per C.F. nominal heating value, 0.6 specific gravity, and delivery pressure at the outlet side of the meter as noted on the drawings. Should local conditions and /or codes vary from the design basis, Contractor shall notify the Engineer and qualify his bid accordingly. .3 Pipe shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40, for interior and above grade. Underground piping shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40 with X -Tru -Coat plastic wrap with all joints and damaged areas coated with X -Tru -Coat primer and tape. Underground steel pipe shall receive cathodic protection (magnesium anodes) as recommended and supplied by a vendor specializing in this work. Polyethylene piping approved by local codes and the gas utility Company may be used for underground gas main service. .4 Fittings shall be 150 -pound malleable iron, screwed, or schedule 40 black steel, welding. .5 Unions in sizes 2- inches and smaller shall be 150 -pound malleable iron, bronze or brass seat, ground joint, screwed. Unions 2 -1/2- inches and larger shall be 150 - pounds flanged. .6 Each gas fired item of equipment shall be equipped with an isolation valve, dirt leg, and union connection to the units gas train. .7 A main shut off (house) valve shall be provided at the main gas riser. For interior risers, the house valve shall be located inside the building. .8 Refer to Section 15B for valve specifications. .9 Provide gas pressure regulators approved by gas utility company and local codes when indicated on the drawings and /or when the delivered gas pressure exceeds the allowable inlet pressure of the installed equipment. Pressure regulators shall be installed on the exterior of the building and shall be equipped with internal relief. Regulators shall be installed to prevent relief port from being blocked by water, ice, or dirt. 1.3 FLUE VENTS .1 Naturally vented Unit Heaters and similar gas fired units shall be vented with properly sized Type B, double wall gas vent complete with roof cone, sleeve cap, storm collar, UL listed storm proof cap, and accessories as required for proper function and compliance with NFPA Standards and governing codes or regulations. Gas vents shall be Metalbestos, Hart & Cooley, or Metal Fab. Flue vent installation shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations. .2 Separated Combustion Gas Fired Unit Heaters vent pipe (inlet and exhaust) shall be installed per local codes, the National Fuel Gas Code Z223.1 and manufacturer's instructions. Concentric vent kits shall be used to minimize roof or wall penetrations. 1.4 EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATOR (WHEN INCLUDED ON THE PROJECT) .1 Extend gas piping to the emergency engine generator and provide all mechanical and piping work as required to place the fuel system for the unit into proper operation. .2 All work shall conform to the manufacturer's written recommendations and installation manual. .3 The pipe size indicated on the drawings shall be extended full size to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall provide a local full size shut off valve and dirt leg and union or flanged connection to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall install all specialty valves and devices shipped loose with the generator. The primary PRV shall be omitted when consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations. .4 Gas piping between the building and the engine generator shall be routed above ground as indicated on the drawings and shall be corrosion protected as specified herein above. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15* FIRE SPRINKLERS *SECTION 15G -1 PART 1: GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY • • .1 Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .1 The Fire Protection Contractor (FPC) shall provide all required labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for a complete and operational fire protection system for the building and site as hereinafter described and as shown on the drawings. .2 The FPC's work shall begin at the 8 in. blind flange left by the developer and shall include but not be limited to the following: .1 Fees and permits. .2. Wet pipe sprinkler systems for the Toys "R" Us and Babies "R" Us retail store. .3 Coordination of work and schedules with other trades. .3 Site Work - Provide the Following. .1 Underground piping: 8 in. fire service main from blind flange to spigot inside the building. .2 Thrust blocking as required. .3 Backfill and compaction. .4 Interior Work - Provide the Following: .1 Backflow preventer. .2 Fire department connection. .3 Electrically supervised indicating control valves. .4 Check valves. .5 Pressure gauges. .6 Flow switches. .7 Overhead pipe, fittings, hangers and sprinklers. .8 Inspector's test connections, main drains and auxiliary drains. .5 It is intended that the drawings and specification shall describe and provide for a working installation complete in every detail, and all items necessary for such complete installation shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES .1 All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and referenced design standards. .1 Current Adopted Building Code .2 Current Adopted Fire Prevention Code .3 NFPA 13, Sprinkler Systems .4 NFPA 24, Private Fire Service Mains 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Sprinkler system design criteria shall be strictly per this specification. .2 Automatic sprinkler system to provide fire protection for the areas indicated on the drawings. .3 PRE -SALES & SALES AREAS: Design criteria shall be as follows: • Density - 0.60 gpm /sq ft • Operating Area - 2,000 sq ft • Head Spacing - 100 sq ft (max) • Temperature Rating - 286 °F • Hose Stream Allowance - 500 gpm .4 OFFICE, BREAKROOM AND VESTIBULE AREAS: Design criteria shall be as follows: • Density - 0.15 gpm /sq ft • Operating Area - 1,500 sq ft • Head Spacing - 130 sq ft (max) • Temperature Rating - 165 °F • Hose Stream Allowance - 250 gpm .5 SPRINKLER SPACING SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 1. Acoustical Tile - Locate sprinklers in accordance with the drawings. Not more than a 3 in. radius tolerance about the point identified by dimension will be accepted. The design does not anticipate the use of "return bends" to locate sprinklers within the tolerance described above. Where rows of sprinklers are provided within the same ceiling plane, any part of the tolerance used for one sprinkler shall be the same for all others in that same row. .2 Hard Ceilings - Locate sprinklers in accordance with the drawings. Sprinklers shall be in line with 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15* FIRE SPRINKLERS *SECTION 15G -2 light fixtures and other sprinklers where indicated on the drawings. Coordinate closely with the electrical contractor. .3 Unfinished Areas - Locate sprinklers as shown on the drawings. .6 Water flow test data available for this project shall be listed on the drawing. .7 Provide fire department connection as indicated on drawing. .8 The FPC is to provide all necessary offsets, raises or drops in main or branch line piping and auxiliary drains required by building conditions whether or not shown on the drawings. .9 The FPC shall examine the job conditions and verify all measurements, distances, elevations, clearances, pipe sizes, etc. .10 It is understood unless specifically indicated otherwise, that the pipe sizes as shown on the bid documents will be used. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Equipment and components not specifically specified shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire protection systems installation. .2 FPC shall be a licensed and /or registered FPC and /or P.E. by the City or State as required. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 All work shall meet the requirements of the Owner, authority having jurisdiction, Architect and the Engineer of Record. .2 The FPC shall not pursue any approvals or interpretations of the design documents except through the office of Engineer of Record. .3 Sprinkler piping shall not be concealed where it is inaccessible unless inspected by a representative of the authority having jurisdiction. .4 Any work performed prior to the satisfactory review by Engineer of Record and approval by the authority having jurisdiction will be solely at the FPC's risk. .5 The system shall not be accepted until final testing and receipt of the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate has been obtained. 1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 The engineering drawings have been prepared using AUTOCAD. The drawings are 100% CADD. The hydraulic calculations have been prepared using HASS. These documents will be made available to the successful automatic sprinkler contractor in either the form of diskette or hard copy. Utilization of these documents for the development of shop drawings and submittals does not relieve the sprinkler contracto any of his responsibilities required herein. .2 Submit to Engineer of Record the following: .1 Five (5) sets of shop drawings. Submittal must be comprehensive of entire project, complete in all detail. .2 Five (5) sets of the manufacturer's literature on all system equipment. .3 Five (5) sets of hydraulic calculations. Calculations shall include peaking information. Engineer of Record will review this submittal for consistency with the Contract Documents. .3 After the satisfactory review by Engineer of Record, the FPC shall provide submittals to the authority having jurisdiction for approval. .4 The FPC shall be responsible for responding, in writing, to any comments from the authority having jurisdiction within ten (10) working days after the receipt of their comments. Copies of the response shall be sent to the Owner and Engineer of Record. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Upon completion com letion of construction, the FPC shall submit two sets of reproducibles and four sets of prints of the "as built" drawings to the Owner. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Upon completion of construction, the FPC shall submit two sets of equipment warranties and two sets of operation and maintenance instructions to the Owner. 1.10 WARRANTEE .1 The FPC shall repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Workmanship or equipment found to be defective during that period shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING .1 Underground Piping: Per local requirements and NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Pipe shall have a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi. .2 Overhead Pipe: Per local requirements and NFPA 13+ All pipe shall have a Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR equal to or greater than 1.00. Refer to the current UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory - Steel Sprinkler 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 15* FIRE SPRINKLERS *SECTION 15G -3 Pipe for acceptable manufacturers, sizes, and joining methods. .3 All risers, feed and cross mains shall have hydraulic characteristics equal to or greater than schedule 10 pipe. 2.2 JOINING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS .1 All pipe shall be joined in accordance with NFPA 13 (and 24). .2 Fittings shall be 175 psi screwed or flanged black cast iron or approved equivalent, such as mechanical, grooved, plain end, or welded connections. Where grooved fittings and couplings are used together they shall be of the same manufacturer. .3 Bushings shall not be used. 2.3 HANGERS AND SLEEVES .1 Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors, foundations and masonry walls. (Clearances around piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.) .2 Provide primed escutcheon plates at all walls. .3 All hangers to be of approved materials and spaced in accordance with NFPA 13 and the piping manufacturer's specifications. .4 6 -inch and larger pipes running parallel to bar joists shall be hung from trapeze hangers supported nearly equally by two joists. .5 Only one pipe shall be supported from a single trapeze hanger unless otherwise approved in writing by the Structural Engineer of Record. .6 6 -inch and larger pipes running perpendicular to bar joists shall have the weight distributed evenly by placing a hanger at each joist. .7 Hangers with more than 150 pounds of load should be attached to the joist at a panel point. .8 Coordinate all hanger types and locations with the Structural Engineer of Record. .9 Provide earthquake bracing as required by NFPA 13. .1 Flexible couplings, minimum clearances, lateral and longitudinal bracing, four -way bracing and retaining straps. .2 Branch line piping 2 in. in diameter and smaller shall be provided with restraint or lateral bracing at maximum 30 ft intervals if any of the following conditions exist: .1 Upright sprinklers that are installed between 1 in. and 6 in. vertically below any floor /roof deck, rigid ceiling, structural members, braces, pipes, ducts, cables, etc. .2 Upright or pendent sprinklers, within areas having exposed structure, that are installed less than or equal to the length of the adjacent hanger rod when measured horizontally from any structural members, braces, pipes, ducts, cables, wall studs, etc. .3 Pendent, recessed or concealed sprinklers that are installed in gypsum board, metal, concealed spline, or any other rigid ceiling system. Lay -in tile ceilings do not apply. Restraint or lateral bracing shall be provided on branch lines serving the affected area. .3 Where required, branch line restraint or lateral bracing shall be provided within 24 in. of a hanger. This hanger shall be of a type that resists upward movement of the branch line. .4 Branch line restraint or lateral bracing shall be provided at the end sprinkler on any branch line within 24 in. of the last hanger. This hanger shall be of a type that resists upward movement of the branch line. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTION .1 Ames or approved equivalent double check, double detector check or reduced pressure backflow preventer with two supervised O.S. & Y. valves and pressure gauges. Unless noted otherwise on drawings. 2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION .1 Potter - Roemer Figure No. 5023 or approved equivalent 4 in. by 2 -1/2 in. 2 -way flush wall mount type; polished brass plated finish; thread size to conform to local requirements; threaded caps and chains of same finish; identification plate lettered "Automatic Sprinkler" of same finish. Lowest fitting to fire department connection shall be provided with an automatic ball drip. 2.6 VALVES .1 Interior Valves .1 Gate valve: rising stem, O.S. & Y. 175 psi rated working pressure. .2 Check valve: horizontal swing or wafer, 175 psi rated working pressure. .3 Globe valve: bronze threaded; renewable composition disc; 175 psi rated working pressure 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15* FIRE SPRINKLERS *SECTION 15G -4 2.7 WATERFLOW SWITCH .1 Vane Type: Vane type waterflow detector mounted in accordance with its listing and the manufacturer's instructions; designed to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm; detector switch mechanism shall incorporate an instantly recycling mechanical retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 seconds; two single pole, double throw switches shall be provided suitable for operation on 24 -volt D.C. or 110 -volt A.C.; dust tight construction; tamperproof detector switch enclosure. .2 The detector shall be furnished and installed by the FPC and wired complete by others. 2.8 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES .1 Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve; adjust to operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one -fifth of the distance from its normal position; suitable for operation on 110 - volt A.C. or 24 -volt D.C. .2 The supervisory switch shall be furnished and installed by the FPC and wired complete by others. 2.9 ALARM BELLS .1 Furnish and install electric alarm bells as indicated on drawings. .2 Wired complete by others. 2.10 SPRINKLERS .1 Types: .1 Chrome pendent with 2 -piece escutcheon - These shall be equal to the Tyco Model Center Strut Automatic Sprinkler with polished chrome 2 -piece escutcheon. .2 Chrome Recessed - These shall be equal to the Tyco Recessed Sprinkler with polished chrome escutcheon. .3 Brass Upright - These shall be equal to the Tyco Model Center Strut Automatic Sprinkler. .4 Horizontal Sidewall - These shall be equal to the Tyco Model Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler. .2 Other acceptable sprinkler manufacturers are as follows: Reliable and Viking. .3 Only sprinklers manufactured after January 1, 2006 will be accepted for use. .4 Only sprinklers manufactured utilizing a Belleville Seal will be accepted for use. .5 Provide at the riser not less than one (1) spare sprinkler cabinet stocked with the appropriate sprinkler wrenches and extra sprinklers. The number types anc� temperatures of extra sprinklers shall be in proportion to those installed on the system. 2.11 SIGNS .1 Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, inspector's test connections and control valves. .2 The FPC shall provide a permanently attached placard indicating hydraulic design criteria. This shall be permanently attached to the riser. 2.12 TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS .1 Provide combination inspector's test/main drain valve with pressure relief equal to the A.G.F. Manufacturing Co. Model 1011, 2 in. size with test orifice as indicated on drawings. .2 Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs, or globe valves and plugs were capacity of trapped pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to main riser. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES .1 The FPC shall coordinate closely with all other trades to • expedite construction and avoid interference. 3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL .1 All trenches must be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe through its entire length. .2 Bracing shall be provided as necessary to maintain excavation. .3 As soon as underground work has been completely installed and tested, all excavation shall be backfilled with gravel to 1' -0" of finished grade and with clean earth (free from bricks, rocks, cinders, or any foreign matter to grade). .4 Minimum depth of top of pipe shall be in accordance with NFPA 24 and local requirements. .5 Backfill below concrete or asphaltic slabs shall be gravel to paving base. (ALSO REFER TO GENERAL CONDITIONS - COMPACTION). 3.3 RESTORATION OF SITE .1 Where sidewalks, curbs, and lawns are excavated by th FPC, these shall be replaced equivalent to the origin and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Owner and local authorities. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15* FIRE SPRINKLERS *SECTION 15G -5 • 3.4 PAINTING AND PATCHING • • .1 Painting of sprinkler piping is not included in this contract All sprinkler piping shall be thoroughly cleaned, removing all direct, oil, etc. and made ready to receive paint in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. .2 Holes in walls or floors cut during the performance of this work shall be patched if the holes cannot be covered by standard escutcheon plates so as to completely conceal the cuts where they would otherwise be exposed to view. .3 Fire stop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies. 3.5 SYSTEM TESTS .1 Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. .2 Flush underground in accordance with NFPA 13 to ensure all foreign matter has been purged from underground pipe. .3 Test shall be witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction and Owner's authorized agent. .4 Preliminary testing procedures shall be conducted as mentioned above to assure proper operation when the final testing is performed. .5 The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate as shown in NFPA 13 must be completed and submitted to the Engineer of Record before final acceptance may be given. -END OF SECTION- 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -1 .1 Packaged rooftop units shall be designed for outdoor rooftop installation, and shall include weatherproof cabinet, unit support frame, refrigeration system, heating system, filters, and all operating and safety controls. .2 Packaged rooftop unit shall be tested at the factory and shipped as a single packaged unit completely piped and wired. .3 Cooling and heating capacities shall be rated in accordance with A.R.I. standards. .4 Units shall be guaranteed from defects in manufacture and operation for a period of 1 year beginning on date of start- up as accepted by Toys 'R' Us. .5 An equipment schedule for required capacities will be issued with each purchase order. Equipment bidder shall complete schedule. .6 The bid proposal shall include 5 equipment brochures or shop drawings identifying and describing the equipment in detail. All pertinent data for evaluation shall be included such as unit weights, curb mounting dimensions, roof opening requirements, dimensions, wiring diagram, etc. .7 The specification as written herein is a list of the items that Toys 'R' Us desires on each packaged rooftop unit. It is understood that all of these items may not be available by all equipment manufacturers. Equipment bidder will include in his bid proposal a description of all exceptions taken to the specifications. If specific exceptions are not described, Toys 'R' Us will assume that bidder intends to meet the specifications. Any discrepancy found in the field will be rectified to Owner's satisfaction at bidder's expense. 1.2 APPROVALS .1 Unit construction shall be certified to the following standards by an approved listing agency (UL, CSA, ETL): .1 UL 1995 and CAN /CSA -C22.2 No. 236 -M95 - Heating and Cooling Equipment (US and Canada). .2 ANSI Z21.47a -1999 and CSA- 2.3a -M99 - Gas -Fired Central Furnaces (US and Canada). .3 CAN /CGA 2.17 -M91 - Gas -Fired Appliances For Use at High Altitudes (Canada only). .4 CAN /CSA C22.2 No. 0 -M91 - General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code Part II (Canada only). .5 CSA C22.2 No. 3 -M91 - Electrical Features of Fuel Burning Equipment (Canada only). .2 Unit construction shall be in compliance with the following standards: 2010 SSBS Renovation .1 ASHRAE 15 -1994 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. .2 ASHRAE 62.1 -1999 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. .3 US Clean Air Act/Montreal Protocol. .3 Unit performance shall be certified to the following standards: .1 ARI 210/240 -94 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment (capacities from 0 to 65 kbtuh). .2 ARI 340/360 -2000 - Commercial & Industrial Air Conditioning Equipment (capacities from 65 kbtuh to 250 kbtuh). .3 ASHRAE 90.1 -1999 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except for Low -Rise Residential Buildings (high efficiency only). .4 NAECA - US National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 1988. .5 EPACT - US Energy Policy Act of 1992. 1.3 CABINETS .1 Cabinets shall be a minimum of G90, heavy gauge galvanized steel. .2 All cabinet components shall have 2 -layer enamel paint finish, metal spray tested per ASTM B117, to ensure weather protection to panels. Unit pricing shall be based on standard manufacturer color. Manufacturer shall include additional cost to provide special paint color, as may be required by Toys 'R' Us. .3 Interior surfaces in contact with the air stream shall be insulated with non - hydroscopic heavy density fiberglass insulation. Insulation in heating section shall have foil face. Entire cabinet base shall be insulated with non - hydroscopic fiberglass insulation. Any insulation in contact with airflow shall conform to standards as outlined in NFPA90A, and flame resistant per UL -723 .4 Access doors or panels shall be provided to all areas requiring regular servicing or occasional maintenance. Access panels or doors shall be provided with gaskets and shall be 100 percent weatherproof. Access panels or doors shall be secured with quick - release fasteners; use of sheet metal screws is objectionable to Owner. .5 Access doors or panels shall be provided for, but not limited to, access into compressor compartment, control area, filter section, mixing damper section, evaporator, heating section, supply fan, and relief dampers. .6 Roof assembly shall be constructed in such a manner as to allow for rapid drainage. All seams shall be water and weatherproof. .7 Openings shall be provided for both bottom and side utility connections. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -2 .8 The base of the cabinet shall be preformed steel rail frame designed to mate with the roof curbs as specified in Section 4.9.3. Base shall form a weatherproof seal with curb. .9 Base of unit shall be equipped with adequate lifting lugs for unloading from delivery vehicle and lifting onto roof of building. Lifting instructions shall be shipped with units. 1.4 IDENTIFICATION .1 A permanently attached nameplate of corrosion resistant metal shall identify each unit. Plate shall bear the following information: .1 Manufacturer's name. .2 Serial and model numbers. .3 Rated capacities. .4 Temperature, pressure, or other limitations. .5 Unit designation (RTU -1, etc.). .6 Motor Hp, voltage, amps, etc. .7 Unit designation (RTU No. 1, etc.) shall be stenciled on each unit in 6 -inch high letters. Color of numbers shall contrast with background color. Number shall match schedule provided with purchase order. 1.5 AIR FILTERS .1 Units shall be furnished with standard, disposable 2 -inch pleated, MERV 7 filters. Filter efficiencies shall be based on ASHRAE standard 52.2. 1.6 FAN SECTION .1 Evaporator blower shall be of the forward curved, double inlet, Class 1 centrifugal type. Blower shall be dynamically and statically balanced. .2 Evaporator blower shall be belt driven. Blower assembly shall be fully adjustable by means of both a variable pitch motor pulley and a movable motor base. Rated RPM shall occur at midpoint of variable pitch pulley. .3 Blower motor shall be open drip - proof, copper wound, and permanently lubricated type. Motor shall be energy efficient type. Motor and blower shall be mounted on isolators to reduce noise and vibrations. .4 Manufacturer shall provide alternate cost for high efficiency motors. 1.7 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM .1 General 2010 SSBS Renovation .2 Refrigeration system shall be an integral direct expansion system complete with factory charge of R -410A refrigerant. .3 Refrigeration system shall include evaporator and condenser coils, all necessary copper tubing, refrigerant metering device(s), refrigerant line filters and dryers, sight glass, compressor shut -off valves, and liquid line shut -off valve. Provide access for recovery equipment. 2. Evaporator Section .1 The coil shall be constructed with enhanced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to durable, internally grooved, copper tubes. Each compressor circuit shall be divided across the face of the coil to ensure optimal latent performance. A four layer, epoxy - modified, phenolic dip coating shall be available as an option for enhanced corrosion protection. .2 Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested at a minimum of 500 PSIG. .3 Drain pan shall be fabricated of heavy gauge corrosion resistant material. It shall be internally sealed and insulated. It shall be provided with drain connections. Drain pan design shall be such as to allow drain pan to drain dry. .3 Compressors .1 Units shall be provided with full or semi - hermetic type compressors. All units larger than 6 tons shall have multiple compressors. Compressors shall be resiliently mounted with rubber grommets. .2 Compressors shall be equipped with intemal overload protectors, crankcase heater, oil failure protection, high and low pressure cutouts, and low temperature lock out. .3 Multiple compressor units shall be capable of independent operation to provide partial standby. .4 Capacity control shall be provided through staging of the compressors where possible; each stage interfaced with an independent circuit. .5 Service gauge ports shall be provided on the suction and discharge side of each compressor. .4 Condensing Section .1 Condenser coils shall be constructed with enhanced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to durable copper tubes. Slab construction and a maximum fin per inch count of 20 shall be used for cleanability on units above 7.5 tons. Formed coils shall allow separation and not exceed 20 fins per inch for cleanability on units 7.5 tons and below. A four layer, epoxy - modified phenolic dip coating shall be available as an option for enhanced corrosion protection. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DIVISION 15 PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -3 .2 Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested at a minimum of 500 PSIG. .3 Condensertfans shall be propeller type directly driven by a fractional horsepower motor. Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced. .4 Condenser fan motors shall be fractional horsepower type. They shall be weatherproof and approved for outdoor use and permanently lubricated with built -in thermal overload protection. Motor shall be energy - efficient type. .5 Condenser fan shall be provided with wire guard that meets all OSHA safety requirements. Provide internal guards at service access points, including at condenser fans. 1.8 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES AND CONTROLS .1 The refrigeration system shall have suction and discharge line service gauge ports, high - pressure switch, low- pressure switch, liquid line filter- dryers, sight glass, and full refrigerant charge. .2 Refrigeration controls shall include condenser fan, evaporator fan, and compressor contactors. .3 Condensing section shall have low- ambient controller to operate down to 0 degrees F, as standard on all units. To maximize energy savings, controls shall allow compressor to operate during economizer operation mode. .4 Cooling Controls shall have the ability to do the following: .1 Up to four stages of cooling. .2 Adjustable stage up time delay. .3 Adjustable minimum compressor on time. .4 Adjustable minimum compressor off delay time. .5 Adjustable maximum pressure switch trip frequency during a thermostat cycle and lock out the compressor circuit if this limit is achieved. .6 Report an error with each pressure switch trip occurrence and identify the compressor circuit. .7 Adjustable maximum allowable evaporator freezestat trip frequency during a thermostat cycle and lock out the compressor circuit if this limit is achieved. .8 Report an error with each freezestat trip occurrence and identify the freezestat. .9 Report an error if a compressor circuit lock out occurs and identify the compressor circuit. .10 Low - pressure trip read delay dependent on compressor off time and ambient temperature. 2010 SSBS Renovation .11 Lock out cooling operation if outdoor temperature exceeds the adjustable low temperature limit. .5 The following features shall be standard: .1 Independent refrigerant circuits (per stage). .2 Thermostatic expansion valves. .3 Crankcase heaters. .4 High - pressure switch. .5 Loss -of- charge switch. .6 Liquid line filter dryers. .7 Freezestat protection /each coil. 1.9 HEATING SECTION .1 General .1 Heating section shall be gas fired, completely assembled, wired and piped within the unit. Unit shall be capable of providing 2 stages of heat. .2 Heater shall be installed upstream of cooling coil. If heater is installed downstream of cooling coil, it shall be designed for such installation. .3 Heater section shall be certified by the American Gas Association specifically for outdoor application. .4 Unit shall have the ability to be converted for use with LPG /propane. Complete service access shall be provided for controls, burners, and heat exchanger. The ability to slide the heat exchanger out for service access shall be provided. .5 Heat exchanger shall be a tubular design constructed of aluminized steel for applications with mixed air temperatures of 45 degrees F or above. For applications with mixed air temperatures below 45 degrees F, stainless steel construction shall be provided as a factory installed option. Manufacturer shall provide alternate price for stainless steel heat exchanger. .2 Burner .1 The burner shall be inshot type fabricated from aluminized steel. .2 The combustion air shall be forced by a draft fan or blower. Motor shall not be in hot air stream. .3 Controls and safety devices shall be provided: .1 Burner shall be equipped with electric spark ignition. .2 An electronic flame- sensing device. .3 Flame rollout switches. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -4 .4 100 percent safety shut -off control. .5 Redundant automatic dual gas valve with manual shut -off. .6 High heat limit switches and induced draft failure switch. .7 Heating capacity shall be reached in 2 stages with 50 percent heating input first stage and 100 percent heating input on second stage. .8 Prior to ignition, a pre -purge period shall occur, all timers and devices necessary to accomplish this shall be provided. A post -purge period shall also be established. .9 The heating and cooling cycles shall be wired in such a manner as to prevent the operation of both cycles at the same time. 4 Heating Controls shall have the following ability: .1 Adjustable supply blower delay time. .2 Adjustable delay time between low and high fire of a 2 -stage gas valve system. .3 Adjustable heat off time. .4 Ability to turn off the heat and keep the supply air blower running if an overheat limit occurs. .5 Adjustable maximum overheat limit trip frequency during a thermostat cycle and indicate reaching this limit with a service relay output. .6 Ability to report an error with each occurrence of an overheat limit trip and identify the limit that tripped. .7 Ability to shut off gas heat if a flame rollout occurs and report an error identifying the rollout switch. .8 Ability to turn off the heat if the induced airflow is too low and report an error identifying the pressure switch. .9 Adjustable maximum induced air flow pressure switch trip frequency during a thermostat cycle and indicate reaching this limit with a service relay output. .10 Report an error if the gas valve is not energized 2 minutes after a heating demand and identify the gas valve. .11 Adjustable maximum gas valve failure frequency and indicate reaching this limit with a service relay output .12 Ability to shut off the gas valve if a flame is not sensed. 2010 SSBS Renovation 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS .1 Each RTU shall be provided with a unit supplied solid -state microprocessor, network capable. The following functionality shall be built into the controller. .1 Up to 2 stages of heating, and 4 stages of cooling (based on unit capacity). .2 Blower on /off delay. .3 Self- diagnostic capability. .4 Code storage through power failure. .5 Digit electronic readout. .6 Failure code storage (reference for technician). .7 BAC Net Compatible. .8 Low ambient control. .9 Compressor timed off delays. .10 Demand Control Ventilation capable. .11 Smoke detector capable with 3 smoke detector settings (shutdown, purge, blower on /exhaust off). .12 Economizer with full modulating control based on comparison of inside and outside enthalpy, or indoor/ outdoor sensible temperatures. .13 Warm up mode. .14 Return air limit control. .15 Loss of phase protection input. .16 Fresh air tempering control. .17 Return air sensor readout. .18 Supply air sensor readout. .19 Outdoor air sensor readout .20 Low - pressure control. .2 The HVAC control system used for all TRU projects is Automated Logic provided by Comfort Systems USA. The control system provided by Automated Logic will be Web CTRL. The Web CTRL host software is a 100% native BAC Net energy control system that will trend and alarm all physical lighting and HVAC points. The responsibility of the RTU manufacturer shall be to provide the BAC Net interface between until supplied microprocessor and Automated Logic Web CTRL system. .3 With loss of connection to the front -end controller (BCU), the RTU's microprocessor shall be capable of a preset stand -alone operation. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -5 .4 BAC Net network cards (ETM) shall be factory installed and factory tested prior to shipping. .5 All physical points on automated logic system shall be trended and alarmed to host server via the internet. .6 Each RTU shall be fitted with a BAC Net rooftop controller which will be linked to the BCU via a twisted pair daisy chained to each independently addressable controller. 1.11 ELECTRICAL .1 The units shall be 480 -V, 30, 60 -Hz, except as otherwise specified. .2 The unit shall be completely factory wired and thoroughly checked during factory run check. .3 All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code, latest edition. .4 All wiring shall be color- coded. Control wiring shall be numbered and jumpers and terminal block shall be identified throughout the unit. .5 Access doors or panels to electrical control and fan sections shall be equipped with an interlock switch, main fuses, motor overloads, and control transformers. .6 Electrical components shall include but not be limited to: Dead -front panel, disconnect switch, main fuses, motor overloads, and control transformers. .7 If any voltage other than incoming is required, unit manufacturer shall provide transformers as required. Fuses, properly sized, shall be provided on the secondary side. .8 Electrical wiring shall include main fuses or main circuit breaker properly sized to protect unit. Wording on equipment nameplate shall be such that it reflects type of protection used in order to minimize code interpretation conflicts by local authorities. 1.12 UNIT POWER, PIPING, AND DUCT CONNECTIONS. .1 Work required by installing contractor shall be limited to a single electric power line, low- voltage control wiring, natural gas piping connection, and duct connections. .2 Gas connections shall be routed through side of unit. .3 Ductwork shall be routed within curb perimeter and connections shall be made at bottom of unit or at curb. .4 Electrical power shall enter through base of unit. .5 Unit shall be able to receive custom plenum drum diffuser /retum grille system, provided by Lennox Inc. 1.13 ACCESSORIES .1 Economizer: Each unit shall be equipped with a factory installed energy saving cycle (economizer) that allows for the use of outdoor air for cooling purposes whenever outdoor air quality is better than return air. (Dual point enthalpy control and sensible temperature control options). Economizer cycle shall include return and outdoor air dampers, outdoor air filters, hood, and all necessary controls. Economizer cycle shall be integrated type capable of simultaneous compressor and economizer operation for maximum benefit of outdoor air. Economizer controls and sensors shall be solid- state. Mechanical controllers shall not be allowed. .1 Economizer controls shall consist of enthalpy controller, mixed air thermostat, outdoor, and return air damper motors. .2 Outdoor air shall be used whenever its quality is better than return air. .3 Proper discharge air temperature shall be maintained by a mixed air sensor, which will modulate outdoor and return air dampers. .4 Damper motor shall be electric with spring return. Outdoor air damper shall be normally closed, and return air damper shall be normally open. .2 Dampers: Dampers shall consist of outdoor /return air mixing dampers and relief damper. Dampers shall be of the low -leak type. Maximum permitable leakage shall not exceed 3 percent of rated CFM at rated static pressure. Barometric relief damper shall be sized to allow up to 100 percent outdoor airflow. Damper blades shall be of such gauge and width as to minimize torsion. Damper frame shall be of heavy -gauge galvanized steel with adequate reinforcements. Bearing shall be self - lubricating bronze -nylon type. .3 Electrical Disconnect: Bidder shall provide optional cost of a factory installed disconnect switch. Disconnect shall be weatherproof and approved for outdoor duty. Cost of optional disconnect switch shall be entered on bid form in appropriate location. .4 Curb: Unit manufacturer shall provide a roof curb for each rooftop unit. .1 Roof curb shall be designed to provide support, and ensure a complete weathertight installation. .2 Curb design shall comply with all the requirements of the National Roofing Contractors' Association. .3 Curb shall be fabricated from a minimum of 16 -gauge galvanized sheet metal. Curb shall be of the "full perimeter design" for unit support around the perimeter. Cantilever curb will not be acceptable. .4 Curb shall be of such a height as to provide a minimum of 12- inches of clearance above finished roof. Roof insulation will be 3- inches thick. .5 Factory installed nailer strip shall be provided. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 15 PACKAGED ROOF - MOUNTED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 15H -6 .5 Unit shall be provided with a non - powered 115 -volt convenience outlet. Outlet shall be field wired by Electrical Contractor. 1.15 START -UP SERVICES .1 Unit check and start -up services will be the responsibility of the installing Mechanical Contractor. .2 Unit manufacturer will provide a complete set of start-up procedures and instructions necessary for the installing Mechanical Contractor to validate factory guarantees and warranties. .3 Any forms that are required to be completed by start-up personnel and returned to the factory to validate warranty shall be submitted with shop drawings by successful bidder. .4 Owner /Operator Manuals .1 Manufacturer shall provide Owner with individual owner /operator's manuals for each rooftop unit; 2 manuals are required for each different model purchased by TRU. .5 The following items, together with any other pertinent data, shall be included: .1 Manufacturer's name and nearest representative. .2 Model and serial numbers of components of systems. .3 Operating instruction, start-up and shutdown procedures. .4 Maintenance lubrication and preventative maintenance instructions. .5 Parts list. .6 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment. .7 1 stamped copy of each shop drawing submitted. .8 Part number of all replaceable items. .9 Valve chart indicating valve location. .10 List of belts, sizes, types, and lengths. .11 Control diagram and operation sequence together with labeling of control wiring and instruments to match diagram. PART 2: PRODUCTS PART 3: EXECUTION END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16A -1 .1 This section covers materials, methods, and requirements common to all electrical work. .2 When it becomes necessary to test the emergency lighting system in a store, under no circumstances is the electricity in the building to be turned off, then on again while the registers and related electronic hardware are plugged in. If this equipment is not unplugged the resulting surge will have very damaging effects on the point -of -sale system. This holds true whether the store is using Data Terminal System or National Cash Register equipment. All the equipment must be shut down in an orderly fashion and put in an idle state prior to unplugging the electronic equipment related to the point -of -sale system. Once this is accomplished the electricity may be turned off and on as often as necessary. If there are any questions pertaining to shutting the system down, contact Owner's Representative before turning the power off. Any shutdown shall be scheduled and coordinated with Owner's Representative. .3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to base bid products, substitutions, and alternates. .4 The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each Subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. .5 Submittal Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples: .1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. .2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A," unless stipulated otherwise. .6 The Electrical Contractor (EC) shall, during bidding, contact the electric and telephone utilities to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. The fees and charges shall be identified separately in the EC's proposal and shall be paid by the EC. During construction, the EC shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the electric and telephone service for the project on a timely and proper basis. .7 Where applicable the EC shall provide seismic control on all devices per local codes, and diagrams shown on drawings. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of providing all equipment, materials and labor in accordance with any code having jurisdiction, and performing all work as required for the complete execution of the electrical work as shown on the drawings, herein 2010 SSBS Renovation specified, or both, and without restricting these items, shall include the following: .1 General requirements. .2 Conduit, fittings, wire, and cable. .3 Any primary and secondary service work as required by the utility company, or as shown on the drawings, including service transformer grounding network. .4 Installation of Owner furnished service entrance equipment and switchgear. Including CT enclosure unless noted otherwise. .5 Installation of all Owner furnished lighting fixtures and lamps, including provision for all hangers and supports. .6 Light and power systems including, EMS system, etc. .7 Mounting of starters and controls. .8 Grounding. .9 Telephone System: Work as required by the telephone company including service conduit requirements and grounding system. .10 Power and control wiring for HVAC and plumbing work unless noted otherwise. .11 Installation of the Owner furnished items listed in Section 1J. .12 Temporary light and power as required by construction contractors for general use and in compliance with NEC and OSHA requirements. .13 Excavation, Trenching and Backfill: Comply with applicable provisions of Division 2 - Excavating, Grading and Backfilling. .14 The wiring of mechanical equipment shown on the mechanical drawings or outlined in the mechanical equipment schedule and in the specifications shall include all power wiring, disconnect switches, etc., as required. Control wiring by EC unless noted otherwise. .15 Installation of power for fire alarm and security system components. .16 Paddle fans and fan guards provided by Electrical Contractor through Marley Electric, refer to website at "www.leadingedgeinc.com ". 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 The following items of work will be performed in accordance with the appropriate Sections of the specifications, or by the utility companies. .1 Finished painting. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 .2 Patching. .3 Concrete work and foundations. BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REOUIREMENTS SECTION 16A -2 .4 Furnishing and installing of all telephone equipment and wiring. .5 Furnishing of automatic temperature controls (except as noted on the drawings), and electric heaters. .6 Coordinate with utility company as to provision, setting and connection of transformer. 1.4 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .1 Materials: All conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized steel (cut and threaded before galvanizing), heavy wall aluminum, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT), Schedule 40 PVC (where permitted by codes) complying with the standards of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). All conduit shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Conduit fittings and conduits shall be zinc coated, threaded type for rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit, setscrew type for EMT up to 2 -inch size or match the conduit for plastic. Conduits shall be as manufactured by Southwire Co., Wheatland Tube Co., Allied Tube, Carlon, Triangle, or Robroy; fittings by Southwire Co., Carlon, Steel City, Thomas & Betts, Robroy, or Appleton, except as otherwise noted. .2 Applications: .1 Galvanized steel, aluminum rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit line shall be used for the following: .1 All exposed conduit housing 480 -volt feeders from finished floor to the top of the service panelboard. .2 All underground conduit and conduit embedded in concrete (galvanized steel only). .3 All conduit exposed to weather. .4 All conduit 2 -1/2 inches and larger. .2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used for other applications not stipulated above. .3 Plastic pipe (Schedule 40) conduit by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid conduit where under concrete slabs or where permitted by codes. .4 Plastic pipe heavy wall (Schedule 40) conduits by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid steel conduits in concrete encased duct banks. .5 Where nonmetallic conduit is used, install green insulated copper grounding conductor. .3 Installation: .1 Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to cabinets, pull or junction boxes and shall be secured to all boxes with locknuts and bushings in such manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. .2 Where EMT and rigid conduit enters or leaves outlet boxes, cabinets, safety switches, tap boxes, motor controllers, etc., other than those having threaded hubs, a standard locknut shall be used on the outside of the box, and a locknut and bushing used on the inside. Bushings 1 inch and larger shall be of an approved insulated type. .3 Under no circumstances shall conduits or fittings be supported from or anchored to the roof deck, or piping. Conduits shall not be used to support other conduits. .4 All conduit shall be fastened securely in place with approved straps and hangers in sufficient number to prevent movement of any part of the conduit. This includes conduit installed in forms before concrete is poured. Where exposed conduits are suspended, the hangers shall be Caddy (Erico), Gateway, or Grinnell, adjustable hangers with rod suspension, having a nut fitted in malleable iron or steel inserts. Inserts for hanger rods shall be installed in the slabs, and all hangers shall be installed at not more than 9 feet -0 inch centers. .5 All concealed conduits installed above suspended ceiling shall be run above bottom of joists, or otherwise coordinated with the other Contractors so as to allow room for running ducts and piping. .6 Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across a building expansion joint. Fittings shall be type "AX," "EX," or "TX" as made by O. Z. Electrical Company. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. .7 All conduit shall be run at right angles to and /or parallel to floors and walls. .8 Connection to Motorized Equipment: Connection to motorized equipment shall be made with flexible conduits having sufficient slack between rigid conduit and motor terminal in order to minimize vibration transmission. No rigid conduit shall be anchored to equipment, which is subject to vibration transmission. Fittings shall be of the metallic ferrule, compression type. Minimum length of flexible conduit shall be 18 inches. Flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda "Sealtite." .9 Open ends of conduits shall be capped with plastic cap or corked during roughing -in so as to prevent the accumulation of dust and moisture condensation in conduit. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS .10 When rigid metal conduit is joined, all conduit joints shall be made up tight and no running threads will be permitted. .11 All conduit shall have powdered soapstone blown through them before pulling of wires or wires shall be lubricated with pulling lubricant. .12 When metal conduit is installed in direct contact with the earth, use "hot- dipped" galvanized type and coat the conduit and the joints with conductive asphaltum. .13 Conduits in hazardous areas, as identified on the drawings, shall be installed with seal fittings between hazardous and non - hazardous areas in compliance with NEC Class 1 installation. The Underwriter's Laboratories for use in such areas shall, specifically list all fittings, etc. .14 All conduit in finished areas shall be concealed. .15 Conduit runs shall be installed to avoid proximity to hot water pipes. Conduit shall be kept a minimum of 3 inches from such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable. In such instances the conduit shall be kept at least 1 inch from the covering of the pipe. .16 Conduit connections to rod -hung fixtures shall be by means of flexible conduit from box firmly fastened to building structure. .17 Conduit in presales areas shall be mounted immediately below top chord of joists. .18 Pulling wire or tough nylon cord tied off at each end shall be installed in all empty telephone and computer system conduits. 1.5 WIRE AND CABLE .1 Types: .1 Unless otherwise noted or specified, all power wiring shall be NEC approved type for 600 -volt and shall be UL listed. .2 All wire No. 10 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper. All wire No. 12 and smaller may be solid copper. .3 Conductors shall have insulating rating complying with the following: Min. Temp Type or Letter Rating Application (NEC) of Conductor. Branch Circuits THHN OR THWN 140 (No. 14 through No. 10 AWG) Feeder Circuits THHN THWN 167 (No. 8 AWG and larger) Branch Circuits XHH OR XHHW 194 (within 3 inch of ballasts in fixtures) 2010 SSBS Renovation SECTION 16A -3 Unless a circuit breaker, switch, contactor, motor starter, etc., is marked otherwise, circuit conductors connected to the terminals must not operate more than a 60 degree C ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated 100 amps or less and must not operate at more that a 75 degree C ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated over 100 -amps. Conductor ampacities shall be based on 3 current carrying conductors in a raceway at 86 degrees F, ambient. Ampacity shall be de -rated per T310 -16 correction factors and T310- 15(b)(2)(a) as required per NEC. .2 Wire Sizes: .1 Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG except that home runs longer than 100 feet for 120/208 system and 200 feet for 277/480 -volt system in actual wire length from panel to load shall be minimum No. 10 AWG. .2 Size of wires larger than No. 12 AWG shall be as specified on plans or riser diagram, except as noted in Paragraph 1.5.2.1 above. .3 Color Coding: .1 All branch circuit wires shall be color coded as follows (except as otherwise designated by local codes or as otherwise required to match existing color coding in existing facilities): Lines 240/120 208/120 480Y/277 (Phase) (Volt) (Volt) (Volt) A Black Black Brown B Red Red Orange C Blue Yellow Neutral White White Gray Grounding Green Green Green Wire .2 If conductors are sized No. 6 or larger, feeder cables need not be color coded throughout the length, but may instead be identified by colored tapes at each junction box and at each end corresponding to the colors scheduled above. .3 Wiring for auxiliary systems and control wires shall be color coded by means of colored stripes or tracers. .4 If allowed on the drawings, direct burial cable shall be unreeled into trench (not dragged) after all course stones have been removed from base of trench and sand fill laid down. Cables should be snaked slightly to allow for movement and settlement. .5 The use of MC cables or Type AC cable where permitted by code shall be utilized in concealed spaces (excluding grouted cells of block walls) such as above suspended Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REOUIREMENTS ceilings, within drywall partitions, or in casework and millwork. .6 Manufacturers; All wires and cables shall be the products of American, Southwire Co, General Cable, Okonite, or General Electric Co. 1.6 OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES .1 All outlet and switch boxes shall be NEC approved type and shall be sized to provide ample space for wiring devices and conductors. Where the number of conductors and connections exceeds NEC limitations, large boxes or box extensions shall be used. All boxes shall be standard galvanized or sherardized sheet steel as manufactured by Steel City Electric Company or National Electrical Products Corporation. .2 All ceiling outlet boxes for exposed work, acoustical tile ceilings, and furred plaster ceilings shall be 4 inch octagonal, 2 -1/8 inches deep. Provide plaster rings and /or fixture studs as required. .3 All boxes for concrete work shall be especially designed for this construction and shall be 3- inches deep for concrete thickness of 4- inches or more. Minimum concrete cover shall be 3/4 -inch. .4 Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4 -inch square boxes or gang boxes, 1 -1/2- inches deep, and shall be provided with suitable extension rings and covers. Outlets shall be carefully aligned so that cover plates will be truly vertical and horizontal. .5 Exposed wall or column mounted outlet boxes for convenience receptacles and lighting switches shall be standard, single gang (minimum) utility conduit boxes. .6 All boxes shall be rigidly mounted and shall be equipped with suitable screw fastened covers. All raceways entering boxes shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Open knockouts or holes in boxes shall be plugged with suitable blanking devices. Boxes shall be cleared of all plaster, dirt, trash, etc. before the installation of any wiring devices and /or before the installation of cover plates. .7 All boxes for conduit system shall be installed flush with finished surface with allowable recess for adapters so that cover plates may be pulled tight against the finished surface. .8 Outlet boxes or switch boxes mounted on opposite faces of a wall shall be offset to minimize sound transmission from one area to another. .9 Outlet boxes or switch boxes in finished areas shall be mounted flush with wall surfaces. 1.7 TAP, JUNCTION, OR PULL BOXES .1 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code gauge, welded, and galvanized sheet steel. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements, and shall be furnished without knockouts; holes for raceways shall be drilled on the job. SECTION 16A -4 Where necessary for boxes to be supported away from ceilings or beams, structural steel members shall be provided for supports. .2 Where weatherproof sheet steel boxes are called for, the Contractor shall furnish and install code gauge, welded, and galvanized sheet steel boxes with gasketed cover and all flanges designed to resist the entrance of rainwater. Use FS or FD cast boxes as made by Crouse Hinds, Appleton or Killark. 1.8 WIREWAYS AND TROUGHS .1 Underwriters listed metal raceways shall be furnished and installed complete with necessary complement of fittings, connectors and accessory parts. Wireway shall be of the "lay -in" type without standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access as manufactured by Square D, Hoffman, Columbia or G.E. .2 Wireways shall be securely supported by approved methods at 5 -foot intervals. Number of conductors per wireway shall conform to the latest NEC requirements. 1.9 WIRING DEVICES .1 General: All wiring devices shall be specification grade, commercial series, 125V, back and side wired. .2 Manufacturers: Hubbell, Cooper, Leviton, and P &S. .3 Switches - Finished areas. .1 Toggle - 15A .2 Pilot Light- Red neon .4 Switches - Unfinished areas. .1 Toggle - 20A .5 Convenience outlets - Finished areas. .1 Duplex, NEMA grounded, 15A .6 Convenience outlets - Unfinished Areas. .1 Duplex, NEMA grounded, 20A .7 Special purpose outlets as scheduled on drawings. .8 Colors and cover plates as specified below. .1 Where devices are indicated to be mounted side -by- side, multigang cover plates shall be used. .2 Column mounted devices. .1 Ivory device with Ivory thermoset cover plate .3 Sales gondola devices. .1 White device with jumbo white thermoset cover plate 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 .4 Recessed wall devices. .1 Black device with stainless steel cover plate BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16A -5 .9 Plug mold as manufactured by Wiremold #2000 -GB series with receptacles on 6 -inch centers, color shall be white. .10 I.G. devices to be color orange. Install insulated green dedicated grounding conductor with each isolated ground circuit. Cover plate color to be per 1.9.8. 1.10 FUSES (When applicable) .1 When the feeders or equipment are to be protected with fusible devices, the fuses shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the EC. .1 601 Ampere and Above - Bussman Type KRPC, Hicap (600V). .2 0 to 600A - Type LPNRK (250V) or LPNRK, (600V) Low Peak Class RK -1. 1.11 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS AND COMBINATION SWITCH- STARTERS .1 Except as otherwise noted, all magnetic motor starters and combination starters shall be provided by the EC. The EC shall install all power wiring from the panel or disconnect switch, through the starter and including final connections at the motor. .2 Magnetic starters shall be manufactured by Square D, Cutler- Hammer, GE, Siemans, or Allen Bradley. .1 Type: Full- voltage, non - reversing, across - the -line type, unless noted otherwise. .2 Overload Relays: 3 -phase overload protection on all 3 -phase motors. .3 Voltage of Holding Coils: Unless factory pre -wired for internal controls and interlock, all motor starters furnished by Contractor shall have 120 volt or less holding coils with individual control transformer installed in each starter. .3 Enclosure of the proper type for indoor, outdoor, hazardous, dust tight, and watertight applications. .4 For accessory motor control devices see control diagrams on the drawings. .5 All starters shall be furnished with control station and pilot light. If not indicated as being remote from the starter, control station and pilot light shall be furnished with starter, mounted in starter cover. .6 Fused and non -fused disconnect switches for combination switch starters shall comply with specification, Paragraph 14.3 herein. .7 Auxiliary contacts and devices required for interlock and temperature control work shall be provided by the 2010 SSBS Renovation Contractor in accordance with the control diagrams shown on the drawings.. 1.12 STARTER AND CONTROLLER PROTECTION .1 Starters or controllers, whether furnished with the equipment or by Contractor, specifically requiring a certain type or size or over current protection device shall be so furnished with such protection by the EC. 1.13 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS .1 Push button stations for control of motors shall be heavy - duty industrial oil tight type in conduit type surface enclosure. Pilot lights shall be complete with suitable jewels and, where control voltage requires, shall be equipped with transformer. Push button stations shall be Square D, GE, Allen Bradley, Siemans, or Cutler- Hammer. .2 Push buttons shall be either momentary, maintained contact, or selector switch type, as required. EC shall verify with other Contractors the proper type desired prior to installation of these devices. .3 Unless noted otherwise or specified, all push button stations shall be provided by the EC. 1.14 FUSIBLE AND NON - FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Unless otherwise indicated, all manual operating and disconnect switches for motors and power equipment installed for this project shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the EC. .2 For single phase, 1 HP or smaller motor, use Square D Class 2510, GE- CR101, Cutler- Hammer, or Siemens, manual motor switch with pilot light where indicated. .3 For motor load larger than 1 HP, use Square D, Cutler Hammer, GE or Siemens horsepower rated switch. Switches shall be heavy duty, industrial type in NEMA type 1 general - purpose enclosure, except as otherwise noted or required. Cover shall be interlocked with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in "off" position. Switches exposed to weather shall be raintight NEMA 3R Type. .4 For single -phase power load other than motor load, use 15A, AC switch up to 1000 - watts, and safety switch thereafter, made by same manufacturer as in Subparagraph 14.3. .5 Refer to control diagrams on the drawings for accessory devices and additional data. 1.15 DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING .1 Location of Outlets: Unless otherwise specifically dimensioned on the drawings, the location for lighting fixtures and outlets shown on drawings are only schematic. Contractor shall exercise great care in locating the outlets during roughing in period. When the locations of outlets are shown in the detailed drawings on architectural elevations and details, these shall be followed. When in doubt, check with Owner's Representative for instructions prior to roughing in. Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16A -6 .2 Mounting: .1 Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of panel or enclosure no more than 94 inches above finished floor, shall be properly aligned, and shall be adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. .2 Flush mounted switch outlets shall be mounted 4' -0" above floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Flush mounted receptacle, telephone and intercommunication outlets shall be mounted 18 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All outlets, wiring devices and boxes in finished areas shall be flush mounted. .3 Exposed boxes for receptacles in presales areas shall be mounted 48- inches above the finished floor to the top. .4 Wall or column mounted push -button stations shall be mounted 48- inches above floor to the top. .5 Motor controllers shall be mounted with centerline of operating lever 6' -7" maximum above floor. .6 All devices or equipment (except thermal sensors) mounted on steel columns shall be mounted on the column web (between flanges) for protection. .7 Lighting and receptacle panelboards shall be mounted with center of panel 4' -6" above finished floor, except that top most circuit operating handle shall not be more than 6' -7" above floor. Adjust as required. .8 All wiring devices, electrical enclosures and panels in finished areas shall be flush mounted. .3 Access to and workspace around panels and equipment shall be in accordance with Article 110 of the latest edition of the NEC. 1.16 VIBRATION CONTROLS .1 It shall be the responsibility of the EC to install all conduits and boxes, avoiding direct contact with any piping or mechanical equipment which is the source of vibration or the cause of vibration transmission. Any installation by Contractor, which does not comply with this general principle, shall be corrected at EC's expense. .2 Transformers: .1 When connection is made with conduits and wires, a minimum of 18- inches of flexible conduit shall be used. .2 All floor mounted transformers shall be provided with rubber -in -shear mounts capable of providing approximately 0.25 -inch of static deflection when loaded. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Small column or wall mounted power transformers shall be bolted to steel channels through rubber grommets. .3 Conduit Connection to Equipment: .1 All conduit connections to air conditioning, plumbing or building, or any rotating or oscillating equipment requiring electric motors, shall be made with flexible conduits. All flexible conduits shall be liquidtite. .2 The length of flexible conduit required for each motor shall be based upon the requirements for a 360 - degree loop in the conduit between the electrical motor and electrical box. When flexible conduit cannot be used due to space limitations, a neoprene or rubber bushing between the conduit and the electric motor to break the metal -to -metal contact may be installed. A flexible ground strap shall be provided to complete the electrical ground where required. .4 Ballasts for fluorescent, metal halide, high - pressure sodium, or mercury vapor lighting fixtures: .1 Where used inside of building, ballasts shall carry a rating of "A" whenever commercially available. .2 Remotely mounted ballasts where required will be shown on drawings. .3 Ballasts shall be high power factor. .5 Holes and Openings: Openings around conduits, wireways, etc., where walls or floors are pierced shall be wrapped with fiberglass insulation and shall be grouted on both sides of the opening. Grouting shall be made flush with finished surfaces. .6 Isolator Description and Manufacturers: .1 Types of Isolators: .1 To be used for Isolation of Transformers: Molded neoprene units equipped with leveling bolts. Units shall be Mason Industries Type "ND," Amber Booth or Consolidated Kinetics Corporation sized for .35 -inch static deflection. .2 Type W: To be used for isolation of switchboards or control cabinets. .3 Loading of molded neoprene pads shall be limited to a static deflection of 0.03 to 0.06 -inch. The area of pad shall be selected to match the load with manufacturer's recommended unit loading. An auxiliary steel plate may be required to distribute the load uniformly over the pad area. 1.17 EQUIPMENT, RACEWAY AND WIRING IDENTIFICATION .1 All interior exposed raceways, wiring, and equipment shall be suitably identified by the EC. The Contractor shall provide access to and shall open boxes, etc., as required, at Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS time of final inspection to satisfy Owner's Representative that the proper identification procedures for conductors, etc., have been adhered to. .2 Boxes and enclosures for emergency circuits shall be marked with red labels saying "EMERGENCY" or in some other manner made clearly identifiable to electricians or maintenance personnel. .3 Conductors: .1 All conductors on circuits 600 -volts and below shall be color -coded as specified in Section 16A -5. Color coding shall be by means of colored insulating material, colored braid or jacket over the insulation, or by NEC approved means of suitable colored permanent, non - aging, insulating tape equal to Scotch No. 471 to "Texcel 98" applied to conductors at each outlet, cabinet, or junction point. .2 A description of the color- coding shall be permanently posted at each branch circuit panelboard using the method described in Paragraph 17.4.1 in Section 16A of these specifications. .4 Control and Power Distribution Equipment: .1 The EC shall furnish and install engraved laminated plastic nameplates. Lettering shall be approximately 1/16 -inch to 1/8 -inch thick and 1/2 -inch to 3/4 -inch tall. Plates shall be white surface and black core to produce black letters. Where equipment is not suitable for mounting the nameplate thereon, by bolting or riveting, the EC shall furnish a No. 14 gauge steel plate, painted black, to which the nameplate shall be bolted or riveted and which shall be suitably fastened to the equipment or mounted immediately adjacent thereto. .2 All push button stations, control switches, selector switches, motor controllers, air circuit breakers or safety switches, etc., shall be provided with nameplates as described in the previous paragraph. Such nameplates shall clearly identify by name the equipment controlled and shall state any special operating instructions, which may be indicated on the drawings. All nameplate designations shall be subject to the approval of Owner's Representative. .3 All factory built control panels, breaker panels, etc., shall be equipped with suitable nameplates as specified under these individual headings. Service entrance equipment shall have a nameplate on each branch feeder protection device. 1.18 TESTS .1 Prior to the startup of any system, EC shall carefully check all devices and manufacturer's instructions for the proper procedure of startup. .2 Check service entrance voltages and inform electric utility of any over voltage or under voltage conditions. Check SECTION 16A -7 ground conditions and grounding resistance. Check system for proper phasing. .3 Balance all single -phase loads at panelboards. The total connected load on each leg of the panel shall not vary more than 10 percent. If they vary more than 10 percent the branch circuit connections shall be redistributed at the panels by exchanging the circuit wires from the branch circuit protective devices until the above conditions are satisfied. .4 Replace all burned out lamps and ballasts with Owner furnished lamps and ballasts at the completion of work. .5 Check all auxiliary systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to operating systems. .6 Make all necessary field adjustments and set all protective relays and devices in accordance with instructions provided by the Owner. Fully coordinate all external connections to the equipment with the equipment manufacturer. .7 EC shall megger each motor winding before energizing the motor. The insulation resistance shall be recorded based on winding temperatures and voltage information furnished by Owner. EC shall submit recorded insulation resistance and notify Owner of all motors with low insulation resistance in order that these motors may be replaced. .8 EC shall perform such tests as are required by utility on service entrance cables. 1.19 OPERATING TESTS .1 In addition to any other tests herein specified, the systems, after completion, shall be tested in operation for at least 15 days and shown to be in satisfactory operating condition. .2 Should any of the equipment or apparatus, furnished by the EC, require the service of a factory representative for installation or placing in proper service and /or adjustment, the Contractor shall provide same without additional cost to the Owner. .3 The EC shall furnish to the Owner three (3) sets of instruction books and spare parts list, bound in brochure form, covering each item of equipment furnished under the contract. See Division 1B of these specifications. 1.20 CLEANING .1 During construction, for all work furnished and /or installed under his contract, EC shall clean and /or protect interiors of all equipment devices, raceways, etc., from dust, dirt, cuttings, or other foreign matter before closing of finished work. 1.21 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER .1 The EC shall arrange with the utility company to provide a temporary construction service for temporary light and 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REOUIREMENTS SECTION 16A -8 power. Location to be at the Contractor's field office remote from the building. .2 The EC shall furnish and install a temporary panel at the above location. Temporary light stringers with double pigtail sockets and temporary power stringers and outlets shall be installed by the EC as required by the Contractor for the various trades. .3 The EC shall lamp all sockets originally and shall maintain system during working of all trades. The EC shall furnish subsequent lamping and fuses. .4 The General Contractor shall pay for all energy consumed and any other charges by the utility company. .5 The EC shall remove all temporary equipment and wiring when it is no longer required and when directed to do so by the Owner. 1.22 PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION .1 All electrical equipment and materials stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft .2 All electrical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the contract documents and the manufacturer's instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's instructions or such written instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the EC at no increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. .3 If the size of any conduit, conductor, switch, breaker, enclosure or related accessories or the location of any fixture or device is not clearly evident on the drawings, the EC shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. .4 All electrical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shall be installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 1.6 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16B -1 .1 The work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions'of the following: .1 Section 16A - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 All work covered in this section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor (EC), except as otherwise indicated on the drawings. .3 Refer to civil drawing for site utilities, miscellaneous work, and coordination with the exterior work of other Contractors. 1.2 SYSTEM VOLTAGES .1 Incoming service and interior power distribution shall be 3- phase, 4 -wire, 277/480 - volts. .2 The majority of interior and exterior lighting shall be wired from 3- phase, 4 -wire, 277/480 lighting panels. .3 Major HVAC equipment shall be wired 3- phase, 3 -wire, and 480 - volts. .4 Convenience receptacles, light tracks and miscellaneous lighting and power shall be wired from 3- phase, 4 -wire, 120/208 panelboards fed through step down transformers. .5 All controls shall be wired at 120 - volts, or less. 1.3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE .1 Incoming service shall be fed from the utility company's transformer as shown on the drawings. .2 EC shall coordinate with the utility company and with information shown on the drawings as to provision of the following: .1 Primary service, conduit, conductors, trenching and backfilling. .2 Transformer pad. .3 Transformer. .4 Connections of primary and secondary conductors to transformer. .5 Secondary conduit. .6 Secondary conductors. .7 Meter, meter enclosure, current and potential transformers and associated enclosures and conduit. .3 All work shall comply with the rules and regulations of the utility company. EC shall be responsible for all coordination with the utility company, including procurement of data, dimensions, and equipment. .4 Concrete encasement for conduit, and other concrete work required for electrical installation shall be provided by the EC. 1.4 GROUNDING .1 System Grounding: Connect bare copper conductors (No. 2/0 minimum) from the neutral bus in the main distribution panel to the main water pipe, to nearest building column and to footing reinforcement Install a bare copper jumper around each water meter. Where conduit is used to protect grounding conductor, bond the conductor to the conduit at both ends of the conduit. Provide copper bonding jumper across each joint in the underground water main for a minimum of 25 feet of underground pipe. Contractor shall provide grounding to other suitable electrode to establish a path to ground not to exceed 6 -ohms resistance. Coordinate with other Contractors as required. .2 Transformers: Ground neutral of transformer secondary to nearest suitable grounding electrode as defined by the inspection authority and the NEC. Provide bonding jumper to connect the neutral of transformer secondary to metal case enclosure of the transformer. .3 Equipment (Static) Grounding: .1 The entire conduit network shall be electrically continuous throughout; use as the grounding system, except as otherwise specified, indicated on the drawings or required by codes. .2 Panel boxes, motor frames, and other electrically operated equipment shall be grounded per code requirements and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. .3 Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduit, connected to the equipment served and to the nearest outlet or junction box. Where permitted by code, flexible conduit not over 6 feet in length and termination fittings approved for grounding may be used in lieu of green conductor. .4 All convenience receptacles shall be of the grounding type; ground to conduit network or to the isolated ground conductor. .4 Grounding Conductors: Size per Article 250 of NEC and /or local Code. .5 Grounding of Lighting Fixtures: Incandescent lighting fixtures must be installed in accordance with the grounding requirements of the National Electric Code. .6 Ground telephone system as required by the telephone company. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16B -2 1.5 MAIN SWITCH, MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL (MDP) AND POWER PANEL (PP) .1 Receive, handle, unload, and install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where shown on the plans, Owner furnished main switch, service and distribution panelboard as shown on riser diagram. .2 Contractor shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels, between panel sections and between panel, main switch, and CT enclosure. .3 Owner shall provide and EC shall install CT enclosure in accordance with utility company requirements. .4 EC to verify that fuses are shipped with MDP, when fusible MDP is used. 1.6 LIGHTING TYPE PANELS .1 Receive, handle, store, install, and connect in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Owner fumished panels as shown on the Drawing Schedules. .2 EC shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels and between panels and contactors, etc. .3 Lock on devices shall be furnished on all nightlight circuits, timer circuits and any other circuits so indicated on drawings. .4 Contractor shall fill in the panel directory card with a typewritten description of each circuit and install the directory in the panel behind a clear plastic cover. Two (2) copies of each panel directory shall be furnished to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the work. .5 Each lighting and receptacle panelboard that is flush mounted shall be provided with (3) 1 -inch empty conduits carried to a point above suspended ceiling and capped for future use. 1.7 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER .1 Receive, handle, store, install, and connect per manufacturer's instructions, Owner furnished dry type transformers scheduled on drawings. .2 EC shall provide grounding for separately derived systems and equipment grounds. 1.8 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION .1 Electric Water Coolers: Hardwire or provide receptacle as required per manufacturer. .2 Electric Water Heaters: Wire units in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams and recommendations; provide equipment grounding. .3 When local authority requires a remote sprinkler shutoff, post indicator valve or other remote sprinkler- indicating device, EC shall provide empty conduit and boxes from the building to the remote devices for use by the Owner's alarm company. 1.9 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HVAC SYSTEMS .1 Provide electrical work as indicated on drawings for mechanical equipment such as rooftop units, unit heaters, exhaust fans, etc. .2 Electrical Contractor to provide ceiling fans as manufactured by Marley Electric. Refer to drawings for model information. .1 Web Site: www.leadingedgeinc.com .2 Provide speed controllers and reversing switches as indicated on drawings. .3 Provide fan guards on fans in Presales and Receiving areas. .3 Refer to drawings for temperature control work. .4 Coordinate this work with Division 15. 1.10 LIGHTING CONTACTORS .1 Receive, handle, store install, and connect Owner furnished lighting contactors as scheduled on drawings. 1.11 GENERATOR .1 Where a generator exists at site, EC shall be responsible for verifying proper operation. EC shall notify PM of generator status, required maintenance, and repairs needed. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 LIGHTING SYSTEMS 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Products: .1 Except as otherwise noted, all lighting fixtures shall be furnished by the Owner for installation by Electrical Contractor (EC). .2 The fixture schedule on the drawings includes type designation, lamp data, mounting, catalog number and special features required. The catalog numbers specified in the schedule are for identification of fixture design only and do not necessarily describe the special or optional features required. All special or optional features shall be provided as called for in the schedule, or required for the application. .3 Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be provided by Owner. .4 For uniformity in comparing bids, each Contractor's bid for EC provided fixtures (if any) shall be based on the fixtures specified on the fixture schedule. Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be considered for approval only at the time of bidding. Refer to the General Requirements article regarding brands and substitutions. .2 Fixture Installation: .1 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights indicated and as detailed on the drawings and shall be complete with all lamps, fittings, accessories, etc., for a complete finished installation. .2 Fixtures and /or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the complete weight of the fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening other than shown on the drawings or herein specified shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Neither fixtures nor conduit shall be supported from roof deck. EC shall provide supplemental rigid structural members as re- quired to span between roof framing members for support of lighting fixtures and /or outlet boxes. .3 Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box. Hickies or extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation. .4 Pendant fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during installation. .5 Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate light leakage between the frame and the finished surface. .6 Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall provide a suitable cover for the fixture outlet box or fixture opening. SECTION 16C -1 .7 Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be installed with nonferrous metal screws finished to match the fixtures. .8 Fixtures shall be supported at the ends of each fixture with supports not to exceed 8 foot spacing. .9 Surface mounted fixtures longer than 2 feet shall have 1 additional point of support besides the outlet box fixture stud when installed individually. .10 16 -foot units shall be shipped in (2) 8 -foot unit sections and shall be field assembled. .11 All units shall be furnished without "pigtail" leads from the fixture. .12 Internal wiring shall be capped off within the fixture ready for the EC connection from the junction box. .13 Fixtures designed for use in conjunction with the inverted T -bar ceiling suspension systems shall be of the lay in type supported entirely by the T -bars and retained by suitable hold -down clips. Where required by seismic or other codes, EC shall provide for each fixture a slack wire at each of 2 diagonal corners. When installing fixtures, the EC shall notify the Ceiling Contractor should it appear that additional T -bar support will be required to prevent sag or damage. .14 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to bring all lighting fixtures to operating condition (refer to ballast replacement information supplied by Owner). .15 Fixture location shall be coordinated with structural framing system. Owner's Representative shall be notified of any conflicts. EC shall, without additional cost to Owner, relocate any fixtures so in conflict. .3 Ballasts: All ballasts for fluorescent and high intensity discharge lamps shall be factory prewired and shall comply with the following minimum standards, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified in the fixture schedule. .1 High Power Factor. Minimum 90 percent. .2 UL labeled and CBM certified. .3 Class "P," with built in automatically resetting thermal protector. .4 Casing constructed with positive prevention of dripping compound. .5 Lowest manufacturer's sound level and case temperature rise rating. .6 Low energy type. .7 Manufacturer: Universal. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 LIGHTING SYSTEMS SECTION 16C -2 .4 Lamps: .1 Lamps for Owner furnished fixtures shall be furnished by Owner. EC shall furnish lamps for Contractor furnished fixtures. EC shall receive, unload, store, protect from damage, uncrate, and install all lamps. EC shall provide lamps for temporary construction service lighting. .2 Immediately following the award of contract, the EC shall provide a complete lamp list stating the quantities of each type of lamp required and submit 3 copies of the list to the Owner's Representative. .3 Install lamps at the time of fixture installation, at the appropriate time when the building is enclosed for finishing work, or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. .4 Replace all burnt out lamps when the building, or any portion thereof, is turned over to the Owner for occupancy. Lamps furnished by Owner for relamping. .5 Concrete bases for exterior lighting standards shall be provided in accordance with the technical provisions of Division 3A of these specifications. 1.2 LIGHT TRACK .1 All light track including fittings, shall be furnished by Owner for installation by EC, as detailed on the drawings. 1.3 LIGHTING CONTROLS .1 Exterior Lighting: Site lighting and exterior building lighting shall be wired through EMS system through prewired lighting contactors as diagramed on the drawings for "on" and "off" control. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIAL & AUXILIARY SYS TEMS SECTION 16E -1 .1 All work under this section of the specifications shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of: .1 Section 1B — General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical Work. .2 Section 16A — Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 All work covered in this section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor (EC), except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. 1.2 TELEPHONE SYSTEM .1 Provide empty conduit underground, sized and located as indicated on the drawings, from the telephone relay equipment in the office area to a point near the property line designated by the telephone company. Verify location and routing with the telephone company and the Owner's Representative prior to roughing in. Provide any pull boxes, junction boxes, etc., required by the telephone company. .2 Provide for telephone service to individual outlets. Where required by codes, provide 3/4 -inch empty conduit from each telephone location to telephone relay equipment as indicated on the drawings. Refer to separate paragraphs and the drawings for further requirements. Verify locations of individual outlets with Owner's Representative. .3 Provide for telephone service in finished areas, private offices, etc., by means of a flush mounted outlet box with 3/4 inch EMT extended to above ceiling or joist area. The telephone company will furnish and install all wiring. .4 Provide a duplex - grounded receptacle at the telephone relay equipment, and provide grounding as required by the telephone company. Provide 3/4 -inch plywood backboard for mounting telephone equipment. .5 Provide a No. 6 insulated grounding conductor in conduit back to service ground per requirements of telephone company. .6 The entire installation. shall comply with the telephone company's regulations and standards and all local codes. 1.3 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .1 Provide a complete system of conduits and wiring as shown on the drawings. Wiring shall be continuous between devices and equipment with NO splices. .2 Install all Owner furnished devices and equipment associated with the Energy Management System except as noted on the drawings. For a complete list of Owner fumished equipment see Drawing EMS1. .3 Make all 480v, 277v, 120v, and 24v terminations except as noted on the drawings. .4 Coordinate with telephone installer for installation of communications. .5 Coordinate with other Contractors for terminations within RTU's and other selected terminations as noted on the drawings. .6 Verify operation of contactors and associated relays using manual override switches within the energy management system. .7 All EMS related work shall be complete no later than the date of substantial completion. 1.4 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS .1 For fire alarm Specifications, refer to Section 16F — Security and Fire Alarm Systems. .2 For security system specifications, refer to section 16H — Communications. .3 Any and all other work or system installation required per construction documents shall comply with Section 1B and Section 15A. .4 All work must be completed no later than the date of substantial completion unless designated by Owner's PM. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -1 PART 1: GENERAL • 1.01 SUMMARY • • A. Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this section. B. The General Contractor (GC) is ultimately responsible for the fire alarm system as hereinafter described and as shown on the drawings. The Fire Alarm Contractor (FAC) is to be contracted through the GC. The Owner is NOT responsible for any part of the Fire Alarm System. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Fire Alarm Contractor (FAC) shall provide all required labor, warranty labor, materials, equipment, submittals and services necessary for a complete and operational fire alarm system as hereinafter described and as shown on the drawings. B. The FAC shall completely fill out the BRU Fire Alarm Panel Worksheet and submit as required to the Bosch Security Systems Certified Security Dealer (BCSD). The BCSD shall be contracted for the following tasks at a minimum: a. Installation of the Bosch FPD -7024 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) b. Programming the FACP c. Testing the entire system and verifying all signals with Vector Security In the specific instance when the FAC cannot locate a BCSD in the area, contact Wayne Bidwell with Bosch Security Systems by phone at (734) 255 -5500 or by email at wayne.bidwellPus.bosch.com for coordination. C. The FAC shall completely fill out the BRU Fire Alarm Panel Worksheet and submit as required to Vector Security for the sole purpose of establishing monitoring with the UL listed off-site monitoring station. D. The FAC's work shall begin at the source of 120 volt AC power for the fire alarm panels and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panels 2. Data Circuits 3. Dedicated Power Circuits 4. Initiation Circuits 5. Notification Circuits 6. Control Circuits 7. Monitoring Circuits 8. Detection Devices 9. Manual Pull Stations 10. Audible/Visual Devices 11. HVAC Shutdown 12. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) 13. Alpha- Numeric Annunciator / Command Center Keypad E. Provide a minimum of one (1) hour of training to staff personnel covering, but not limited to, the following: a. Overview of entire system (including device type, location, and function) b. c. d. Operation functions (including how to silence alarm conditions and resetting of the control panel) Maintenance issues (including wiring to RTU duct detectors and trouble conditions related to dirty filters) Service issues (including who to call for service) Training shall be confirmed with the Owner's Construction Project Manager (CPM). F. It is intended that the drawings and specification shall describe and provide for a working installation complete in every detail, and all items necessary for such complete installation shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and referenced design standards: 1. Current Adopted Building Code 2. Current Adopted Fire Prevention Code 3. Current Adopted Electrical Code 4. Current Adopted Mechanical Code 5. NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Systems B. If there is a conflict between the referenced NFPA standards, Federal, or State codes, and this specification, it is the FAC's responsibility to immediately bring the conflict to the Engineer of Record for resolution. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall operate as a low voltage fire alarm system and shall be a complete supervised fire alarm system as hereinafter specified. Initiation circuits shall meet the minimum requirements of Class B, Style B. Supervisory circuits shall meet the minimum requirements of Class B, Style B. Notification circuits shall meet the minimum requirements of Class B, Style Y. Signaling line circuits shall meet the minimum requirements of Class B, Style 4. Auxiliary circuits, where not installed as signaling line circuits, shall meet the minimum requirements of a Class B, Style W notification circuit. Circuits for relay coil operation shall be 24 volt maximum with a separate or integral field collapsing diode. B. The control panels and auxiliary power supplies shall receive their power from a 120 -volt AC dedicated branch circuit and labeled "Fire Alarm Control Circuit ". The 24 volt DC power for all system initiation, supervisory, notification and control circuits shall be provided by the fire alarm control panel power supply or listed auxiliary power supplies. C. Upon loss of building power, the entire system shall transfer to secondary power within ten (10) seconds, and without loss of signals. The system shall operate under secondary power in normal or trouble conditions as shown on the drawings. D. Upon loss of primary power to the control panels, or activation of the fire alarm system, all emergency exits which can prevent egress by manual means shall be unlocked. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -2 E. Fire Alarm System Operation shall be: 1. Abnormal circuit conditions or devices, as required for the Class and Style of the circuit, shall initiate a "trouble" condition at the control panel and command center keypad for that specific circuit or device. The "trouble" indication shall describe the nature of the condition on the affected circuit or device. The DACT shall transmit a general "trouble" condition to a remote supervising station. 2. Activation of any supervisory device as indicated on the drawings shall initiate a "supervisory" condition at the control panel and command center keypad for that specific device. The "supervisory' indication shall describe the nature of the condition and specific address and alphanumeric description of the device affected. The DACT shall transmit a general "supervisory' condition to a remote supervising station. 3. Activation of any alarm device as indicated on the drawings shall initiate an "alarm" condition at the control panel and command center keypad for that specific device. The "alarm" indication shall describe the nature of the condition and specific address and alphanumeric description of the device affected. The DACT shall transmit a general "alarm" condition to a remote supervising station. 4. Initiation of an "alarm" condition shall result in the following functions to be performed by the system: a. Initiate an alarm indication on the control panel by tone and illuminate the corresponding device specific alphanumeric LCD description. Manually activating the "Alarm Silence" shall silence the tone at the panel. The alarm alphanumeric display shall remain "On" at the control panel until the condition causing the alarm has been cleared and reset. An additional alarm reported to the panel subsequent to activating the "Alarm Silence" shall reactivate the control panel tone. b. Activate the audible and visual notification appliance /appliances throughout the building. c. Manually activating the "Alarm Silence" at the panel shall de- energize the interior audible and visual appliance /appliances. An additional alarm reported to the panel subsequent to activating the "Alarm Silence" shall re- energize the interior audible and visual appliance /appliances throughout the building. d. Transmit a general "alarm" signal to the remote supervising station. 5. Additional indications, notifications, enabling functions or control functions shall be as outlined in the Fire Alarm Matrix. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2010 SSBS Renovation A. All equipment and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for the actual intende use unless hereinafter specifically excluded from such listing. B. Installation and supervision of installation shall be in strict compliance with the requirements of the regulations, licenses, and permits for fire alarm system installers in this jurisdiction. C. The FAC must have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least five (5) years. D. The FAC shall be an authorized representative of the Fire Alarm Equipment Manufacturer (FAEM) and have technical factory training specifically for the system proposed. E. Installation shall be supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems. The qualified personnel shall be either factory trained and certified, NICET fire alarm level II certified, or licensed by a state or local authority. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All work shall meet the requirements of the Owner, Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), Architect and the Engineer of Record. B. All work shall meet the requirements of all applicable cod • and referenced design standards. C. No approvals or interpretations of the design documents shall be pursued except through the Engineer of Record. D. Any work performed prior to the satisfactory review of the shop drawings by the Engineer of Record and approval by the AHJ will be solely at the FAC's risk. E. The system shall not be accepted until final testing and receipt of the Inspection and Testing Form has been obtained. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. The engineering drawings have been prepared using AutoCAD. These documents will be made available to the successful fire alarm contractor in either the form of diskette or hard copy. It shall be acceptable for the contractor to use the Engineer of Record's AutoCAD drawings, in whole or in part (excluding title block information), in the preparation of the contractor's AutoCAD generated shop drawings. Utilization of the Engineer of Record's documents for the development of shop drawings and submittals does not relieve the FAC from any responsibilities required herein. B. Submittals will be disapproved unless required equipment literature, calculations, and complete shop drawings ar submitted together for review. C. Prior to release of equipment for shipment or installation, submit to the Engineer of Record the following: Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -3 1. Five (5) sets of shop drawings. Submittal must be comprehensive of the entire project, complete in all detail, and include, but not be limited to, the following: Provide all floor plans, notes, details, battery calculations, voltage drop calculations, sequence of operation matrix, charts, and programming as shown on the Engineer of Record's contract documents. b. Shop drawings shall be AutoCAD generated. c. The completed BRU Alarm Panel worksheet, including all proposed alphanumeric descriptions and their associated point address and circuit number. 2. Five (5) sets of the manufacturers' literature on all system equipment and system conductors. a. Manufacturers' literature shall include specification and description of recommended supporting methods, enclosures or boxes, and wiring connections. b. The exact components to be utilized on this specific project shall be indicated on each data sheet of the equipment literature. Indications of specific components shall be accomplished by highlighting or arrows. D. The Engineer of Record shall review for accuracy all submittals required to be received by the Engineer of Record prior to equipment release or installation. The Owner, or design firms retained by the Owner, shall not be responsible for any additional costs resulting from replacement of equipment or materials not reviewed prior to installation. E. After the satisfactory review by the Engineer of Record, the FAC shall provide submittals to the AHJ for approval. F. The FAC shall be responsible for responding, in writing, to any comments from the AHJ within ten (10) working days after the receipt of their comments. Copies of the response shall be sent to the Owner and the Engineer of Record. 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The FAC shall provide and maintain on site an up -to -date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the fire alarm system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Engineer of Record without written instructions from the Engineer of Record in each case. This set of drawings shall be issued only as a record set. These drawings shall be made available to the Owner, or the Owner's Representative, upon request. 2010 SSBS Renovation B. Only a certified manufacturer's representative trained in the specific programming software shall make changes to the fire alarm system software once the system is in service. C. Prior to final payment for the fire alarm system and the beginning of the warranty period, the FAC shall submit the following completed project record documents to the Owner. 1. Copies of all reports for tests and inspections as required by the AHJ and as specified. a. The Record of Completion is to be in the format as outlined in NFPA 72. b. The Inspection and Testing is to be in the format as outlined in NFPA 72. 2. All permits and licenses required to be in the possession of the Owner by the AHJ. 3. Accurate record (as- built) drawings of the complete installation to include, but not be limited to, the information required for the shop drawings. Record drawings of the floor plans shall be AutoCAD generated. 4. Original warranty documents including, but not limited to, those of the FAEM. Warranty documents shall reference and be binding to the warranty provisions specified in the warranty section of this specification. 5. Submit to the Engineer of Record a copy of the transmittal to the Owner for all final complete project record documents. D. Upon completion of construction, the FAC shall submit two (2) sets of reproducibles and four (4) sets of prints of the record (as built) drawings to the Owner. E. Upon completion of construction, the FAC shall submit two (2) sets of equipment warranties and two (2) sets of installation, operations and maintenance instructions to the Owner. This manual shall reflect the completed installation and include, but not be limited to the following information: 1. A detailed narrative description of the systems architecture, inputs, evacuation signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, sequence of operation, expansion capability, application considerations and limitations. 2. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended, or as would be provided under a maintenance contract, including a testing schedule and detailed maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. 3. Detailed troubleshooting instructions for each possible trouble condition. 4. An equipment list/schedule detailing all equipment and quantities installed. The manufacturer's product Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -4 model /identification number shall be shown next to each piece of equipment on the list. 5. Updated manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals /instructions for all equipment installed. 6. Updated list of recommended spare parts and accessories which the manufacturer recommends shall be stocked for maintenance of the system. 7. A detailed description of the operation of the systems, including operator responses. Copies of the approved sequence of operation shall be placed in, or adjacent to the control panel. F. A copy of all software documentation required by this section shall be maintained on -site by the FAC, in a binder, arranged in chronological order. This binder shall be turned over to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the project. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bosch Security Systems 2.02 CONTROL PANELS A. Provide Bosch Control Panel (Model FPD- 7024). The panel shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: 1. System processing that is year 2000 (Y2K) compliant and free of any operational impairments resulting in a change of date through the year 2030. 2. Non - volatile RAM memory that provides for no program loss if a primary and secondary power loss occurs. 3. Detection of removal, disconnection, or failure of any control panel module. 4. A real time clock circuit to execute custom time control programs and time /date stamp events. 5. System core processing capability of up to 263 addressable points including the necessary software, programming, motherboard /expansion card sockets. 6. Data loop circuits for up to 255 addressable points. No data loop circuit shall be assigned more than eighty (80) percent of its point capacity unless approved in writing by the Engineer of Record. 7. Capability of controlling the state of contacts located in remote addressable modules, and outputs on the panel including all necessary hardware and software. 8. Built -in digital communicator with phone line monitor (loop or ground start) with capability of providing dual phone line switcher monitoring both phone lines. 9. Control panel shall be capable of including an interface for up to four (4) supervised remote command centers.. 10. System processing capable of supporting initiation data circuits which can be "T- tapped" at any location on the main SLC loop. Any circuit length limitations or branch tap length requirements of the system actually supplied shall be coordinated so that the full capacity of the circuits shown on the drawings and referenced in the specifications shall be available to the system. Any additional modules, programming, or circuits required to achieve the specified system capacity shall be provided and installed at no cost to the Owner. 11. Function testing of any addressable interface device individually from the control panel. 12. System processing capable of supporting addressable monitoring modules. 13. Control panel shall be capable of supporting up to 100 user pass codes. 14. Control panel shall be capable of including an integral module for data output to a parallel based printer. This module shall be in addition to other data outputs (if any) required for other devices. The contractor shall assure proper operation of the output transmissions. The control panel(s) cabinet and circuit board slots shall be of sufficient size and capacity for future addition of these modules. 15. All power supplies, transformers, batteries, battery chargers and modules for output power to all system devices as required for a complete and operational system. This shall include all required output power circuits necessary for the operation of the system provided whether or not specifically called out in this specification or on the drawings. As each system manufacturer may have different methods of device control and power, the contractor must provide sufficient output power to the devices to perform the specified functions shown in the Fire Alarm Control -by- Event Matrix, and provide for the stated spare capacity. This spare power capacity shall include all devices indicated on the drawings plus ten (10) percent additional power. 16. A surface mounted, baked enameled cabinet with sufficient space for all the herein specified equipment and space for the future equipment modules herein specified. The cabinet shall have a hinged door keyed in common with all other keyed devices throughout the system. If multiple cabinets are required in one location, the cabinets shall be placed immediately adjacent to each other and match in finish and design. B. Fire Alarm Annunciator 1. Provide a fire alarm annunciator with a minimum sixteen (16) character LCD. The annunciator shall have a built -in disable key switch and be capable of silencing the audible appliances and resetting the control panel. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -5 The annunciator shall derive all operational power from and installed in accordance with UL 497B, the National the control panel. Electrical Code, and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Acceptable manufacturer is Bosch FMR -7036. C. Auxiliary Power Supplies 1. Provide each auxiliary power supply (APS) unit in an individual, single, self- contained, lockable cabinet. Input shall be 120 volt AC nominal with an output of regulated 24 volt DC. Unit shall be capable of actuation from either a host panel notification circuit, or programmed dry contacts. Unit shall provide "trouble" indication to host panel upon loss of AC power or abnormal conditions on individual output circuits. Unit shall have a minimum of four (4) supervised output notification circuits rated individually at a minimum of 2.0 amperes available per circuit, with a total output of 8 amps. The FAC shall be responsible for all redesign, circuiting, and additional equipment costs to provide the necessary output amperage. Each APS shall have a minimum of 10 percent spare capacity on each circuit. 2. The APS shall operate from a dedicated 120 volt AC or 24 volt DC source with a listed secondary power source conforming to the same alarm /standby time requirements as the FACP. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock PS- 24 -8MP. D. Continuous Power Supplies 1. Provide each continuous power supply (CPS) unit in an individual, single, self- contained, lockable cabinet. Input shall be 120 volt AC nominal with an output of regulated 24 volt DC. Unit shall be capable of actuation from either a host panel or programmed dry contacts. Unit shall provide "trouble" indication to host panel upon Toss of AC power or abnormal conditions on individual output circuits. Unit shall be configured to be in split alarm mode to provide continuous 24 volt DC power. The FAC shall be responsible for all redesign, circuiting, and additional equipment costs to provide the necessary output amperage. Each CPS shall have a minimum of 10 percent spare capacity on each circuit. 2. The CPS shall operate from a dedicated 120 volt AC or 24 volt DC source with a listed secondary power source conforming to the same alarm /standby time requirements as the FACP. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Firelite FCPS- 24FS6. 2.03 FIELD DEVICES (Where Indicated on Drawings) • A. Low Voltage Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Modules (TSM) 1. The transient voltage surge suppression modules shall consist of silicon avalanche suppressor diode (SASD) • technology. Modules shall be designed, manufactured 2. Performance specifications shall include a Response Time less than 5 nanoseconds. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is DITEK DTK -LVLP series, or equal. B. Monitor Modules 1. Provide addressable monitor modules where required to interface with contact alarm devices, or to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices (any normal open dry contact device) to an intelligent SLC loop. 2. Provide address - setting means and store an internal identification code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. Flash status /power LED under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. 3. Provide an automatic test feature to permit functional testing of the device from the main control panel. Indicate results of the test on the LCD display. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is Bosch D7044 and D7052. C. Control Modules 1. Provide addressable control /relay modules where required to interface with a dry contact (Form C) relay. Provide power for the relay actuation from the intelligent SLC loop. 2. Where indicated on drawings, provide control /relay modules with two output contact connections (i.e. double pole - double throw). 3. Provide address - setting means and store an internal identification code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. Flash status LED under normal conditions, indicating that the control modules if operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is Bosch D7053. D. Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 1. Provide addressable photoelectric type smoke detectors with dual alarm and power /status LED's. Flash status LED's under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -6 with the control panel. Both LED's may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected and verified. 2. Provide modular detector head with twist -lock base. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Bosch D7050 -B6 detector base and D7050 detector head. E. Addressable Manual Pull Stations 1. Provide single action type manual pull stations. On command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual station. 2. Provide address - setting means and store an internal identification code which the control panel can use to identify the type of device. 3. Construct of hi -impact red molded Lexan or die -cast metal with instructions for station operation in raised white letters. 4. Where possible, provide flush mounting of pull stations. Surface mounting of pull stations will be allowed if flush mounting is not possible (or as indicated on drawings). 5. Provide protective cover with integral sounder, as indicated by these specifications and the drawings. 6. Provide mounting on backboxes UL listed for use with the pull station. 7. Acceptable manufacturer is Bosch FMM- 7045 -D. F. Protective Covers for Manual Pull Stations 1. Provide protective cover with integral sounder at manual pull stations, as indicated on the drawings. 2. The cover shall be made of clear Lexan material, and shall have an integral sounder with a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 10 ft. 3. The sounder shall be powered by a 9 VDC battery. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is STI 1100, or equal. G. Visual Appliances - Wall Mounted 1. Provide visual alarm appliances operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube and associated lens /reflector system constructed of high - impact RED thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering shall be in a vertical configuration. 2. Provide for flush wall mounting. 3. Provide synchronization on all visual appliances. The synchronization modules shall be capable of 2010 SSBS Renovation synchronizing appliances with candela ratings ranging. from 15/75 cd to 110 cd. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock RSS- 24MCW. H. Audible Appliances - Wall Mounted 1. Provide solid state electronic audible alarm appliances operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall be constructed of high -impact RED thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering in a vertical configuration. 2. Provide for flush wall mounting. 3. Provide a synchronized temporal pattern audible tone producing a sound pressure level of 75 dBA reverberant per UL 464. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock AH -24 -R. I. Audible/Visual Appliances - Wall Mounted 1. Provide solid state electronic audible alarm appliances with integral visual alarm device operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube and associated lens /reflector system constructed of high - impact RED thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering in a vertical configuration. 2. Provide for flush wall mounting. • 3. Provide synchronization on all visual appliances. The synchronization modules shall be capable of synchronizing appliances with candela ratings ranging from 15/75 cd to 110 cd. 4. Provide a synchronized temporal pattern audible tone producing a sound pressure level of 75 dBA reverberant per UL 464. 5. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock AS- 24MCW. J. Visual Appliances - Ceiling Mounted 1. Provide visual alarm appliances operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube and associated lens /reflector system constructed of high - impact WHITE thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering in a horizontal configuration. 2. Provide for flush ceiling mounting. 3. Provide synchronization on all visual appliances. The synchronization modules shall be capable of synchronizing appliances with candela ratings ranging from 15/75 cd to 115 cd. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is RSS- 24MCC. K. Audible Appliances - Ceiling Mounted Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • • DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -7 1. Provide solid state electronic audible alarm appliances operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall be constructed of high- impact WHITE thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering in a horizontal configuration. 2. Provide for flush ceiling mounting. 3. Provide a synchronized temporal pattern audible tone producing a sound pressure level of 75 dBA reverberant per UL 464. 4. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock AH -24 -W. L. Audible/Visual Appliances - Ceiling Mounted 1. Provide solid state electronic audible alarm appliances with integral visual alarm device operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube and associated lens /reflector system constructed of high - impact WHITE thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering in a horizontal configuration. 2. Provide for flush ceiling mounting. 3. Provide synchronization on all visual appliances. The synchronization modules shall be capable of synchronizing appliances with candela ratings ranging from 15/75 cd to 115 cd. 4. Provide a synchronized temporal pattern audible tone producing a sound pressure level of 75 dBA reverberant per UL 464. 5. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock AS- 24MCC. M. Exterior Audible/Visual Appliances 1. Provide audible alarm appliances with integral visual alarm device operable at 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. The appliances shall utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube and associated lens /reflector system constructed of high -impact RED thermoplastic. The appliances shall indicate "FIRE" with the lettering shall be in a vertical configuration. 2. Provide mounting on a weatherproof backbox listed for use with the appliances. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock ASWP- 2475W. N. Exterior Alarm Bell Appliance 1. Provide alarm bell appliance operable at 115 volt AC or 24 volt DC and polarized supervision. 2. Provide mounting on a weatherproof backbox listed for use with the appliance. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Wheelock MB- G10 -24 -R or 43T -G10- 115 -R. O. Auxiliary Relays 1. Provide relays for all auxiliary control interface. Provide heavy duty type rated up to 10 amps at 24 volt DC. Provide with NEMA I dust cover assembly and DPDT contacts. 2. Relays shall be mounted within three (3) feet of the controlled circuit or device. 2.04 CONDUCTORS A. Initiation, notification and auxiliary device circuit conductors shall be type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR. Where conductors are installed in complete raceway systems, type THHN or TFFN may be used if approved by the manufacturer. Where the size or type of conductor hereinafter specified conflicts with the FAEM's requirements, the larger size or more specialized conductor type shall be used. B. Conductors for any non -power limited circuits shall be type NPLF, NPLFP, NPLFR or THHN in conduit. C. Conductors for wet locations shall be: 1. Types RHW, TW, THW, THHW, THWN, XHHW or other type listed for use in wet locations. 2. Type listed for direct burial. D. All electrical characteristics (conductor -to- conductor capacitance, DC resistance, etc.) of the fire alarm conductors shall meet the requirements of the selected FAEM for the required use. E. All fire alarm circuit wiring shall conform to the requirements of Article 760 of the National Electrical Code. 2.05 RACEWAY A. Where required, the following raceway types shall be permitted: 1. EMT conduit 2. RIGID conduit 3. Non - Metallic conduit for wet locations. 4. Surface mounted metallic race with a minimum size equivalent to '/a -inch nominal conduit. B. All raceway types shall be new (used raceway is unacceptable). Utilizing existing raceway is unacceptable without prior written permission of the Engineer of Record or the Owner's Representative. C. Boxes, supports, and other accessories for the raceway installation shall be listed for the application. 2.06 WARRANTY 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -8 A. The FAC shall repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of one year from the date of the Store Grand Opening. Workmanship or equipment found to be defective during that period shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. B. The warranty or any part of the warranty shall not be made void by any required operation or inspection of the system after acceptance during the warranty period. The Owner may, at the Owner's option, select qualified firms other than Warrantor to provide required tests and inspections. System testing and inspections will be conducted only by a duly licensed company under contract with the Owner to perform scheduled testing and inspections as required by the AHJ. The Warrantor may elect to have a representative present at the scheduled testing during the warranty period. C. Warranty shall be documented by the issuance of a written service agreement in the name of the Owner. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The FAC shall coordinate closely with all other trades to expedite construction, accurately interface with related systems and avoid interferences. 3.02 INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. The FAC shall furnish and install all required control wiring, raceway, and outlet boxes. B. The FAC shall furnish and install all required back - boxes, fire alarm equipment and fire alarm devices. 1. Back -boxes shall be of the exact type recommended by the FAEM as shown on the equipment and device submittals. 2. Boxes shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation recommendations. 3. Devices and equipment must be installed by personnel legally permitted and currently licensed to install the devices and equipment. The cost of installation, warranty of installation and equipment, coordination of the installation, and supervision of the installation are responsibilities of the FAC. C. All fire alarm junction boxes, pull boxes, cable splices and terminal cabinets shall be accessible, painted red and clearly marked "Fire Alarm ". The FAC shall comply with any local code or AHJ requirements for circuit identification. Any access panels required for the accessibility to the junction boxes or cable splices shall be the responsibility of the FAC. D. All conductors and conduits shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner at right angles to the building walls, floors and ceilings, and supported from the building structure at intervals compliant with NEC requirements. 2010 SSBS Renovation Exposed conductors shall be supported from building • structure at intervals of no more than five (5) feet. E. Exposed conductors and conduits shall be concealed from public view at all locations by routing on the inside of joists, above lay -in ceilings, over girders, within partitions or in any other manner acceptable to the Owner. Conductors and conduits installed above lay -in ceilings shall be supported from the building structure and shall not be permitted less than 9- inches above or behind removable panels or ceiling tiles. F. All wiring shall be installed in conduit as shown on the drawings. G. Circuits shall be installed exposed in finished areas only upon approval of the Owner's Representative. Provide surface - mounted metallic raceway for these circuits. H. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall test free from grounds or crosses between conductors. Power - limited conductors shall not be installed in conduits with electric light, power Class 1, non - power - limited fire alarm and medium power network- powered broadband communications circuits. J. Final connections between equipment and the wiring system shall be made under direct supervision of a representative of the FAEM. If other personnel are required by the AHJ to be present during final connections, this shall not relieve th FAC of the responsibility of providing a representative of the FAEM for direct supervision. K. Conduits shall enter the control panel enclosures only in the approved locations, as identified in the FAEM installation instructions. L. 3.03 A. Fire alarm cabling shall NOT be painted. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING The control panels shall be surface mounted with no operational parts which may require maintenance mounted greater than 72- inches above the finished floor. The control panel annunciator shall be mounted so that no switch, manually operated device, display or LED is greater than 60- inches above the finished floor. B. Duct detectors, assembly and sampling tubes shall be factory installed. Confirm that duct detectors are mounted in such a way as to obtain a representative sample of the airstream. C. Remote test stations, where required, shall be mounted in proximity of the associated device or unit, where visible in normally occupied areas, not higher than 72- inches above the finished floor and with the final locations acceptable to the AHJ. D. All HVAC equipment shutdown shall be initiated by relay integral to the duct smoke detector. Cabling and wiring connections to HVAC controls are factory provided. Final terminations to HVAC controls are by mechanical or controls Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DIVISION 16* FIRE ALARM *SECTION 16F -9 contractor. Provide any required intermediate relays for connections to HVAC controls. E. Smoke detectors shall be mounted on the underside of the ceiling or deck, and shall be located more than 3 ft from air supply diffusers. F. Smoke, heat, and duct detectors shall not be installed until after the construction clean -up of all trades is complete and final. Detectors that have been installed prior to final clean- up by all trades shall be cleaned or replaced in accordance with NFPA 72. G. Manual pull stations shall be securely mounted with the operable part of the manual pull station no greater than 48- inches above the finished floor and no less than 42- inches above the finished floor. Provide semi -flush mounted stations on standard electrical boxes. H. Wall mounted audible /visual and visual devices shall be flush mounted with their bottoms at 80- inches above the finished floor or 6- inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower. 1. Ceiling mounted audible /visual and visual devices shall be mounted as shown on the drawings with their visual lenses having an unobstructed line of site in all directions. Exact locations of devices shall be sufficiently distant from vertical surfaces and hanging items to permit maximum viewing from all directions. J. Weatherproof audible /visual notification devices shall be surface mounted at the fire department connection on the building exterior and with the final location as acceptable to the AHJ. K. Devices shall not be supported by ceiling tiles. Devices must be attached to back -box supported by the ceiling grid. 3.04 PAINTING AND PATCHING A. All fire alarm conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned, removing all dirt, oil, etc. and made ready to receive paint. B. Holes in walls or floors cut during the performance of this work shall be patched or covered with standard escutcheon plates so as to completely conceal the cuts where they would otherwise be exposed to view. C. Fire stop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies per the latest edition of the UL fire resistance directory. 3.05 SYSTEM TESTS A. All test and inspections specified in this section shall be reported in writing and submitted in accordance with this specification section. B. The system shall meet all the requirements of the listed applicable codes and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The system tests and test documents, including those required for and by the central station, shall meet the requirements of the AHJ. C. The smoke detectors shall be tested to ensure smoke entry into the sensing chamber as required by NFPA 72. D. All testing, inspection and retesting required for certification and required for all warranty work or replacements shall meet the requirements of the AHJ. This certification, inspection, or testing shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. E. The FAC shall provide the testing date in writing to the Owner a minimum of two weeks before the date. The Owner may, at the Owner's option, have a representative present for testing. F. A proposal to perform annual testing and /or inspection services shall be submitted to the Owner a minimum of three weeks before the date of initial acceptance testing. The proposal shall include all testing and /or inspection services required by the AH1 for the two year period beginning at final acceptance of the system. The Owner has the option to accept or reject the proposal. G. The fire alarm system will not be acceptable until final testing and receipt of the testing certificates have been obtained. END OF SECTION THIS IS A TEST, ERASE. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 1 The BCSD Neer` uli Working Days Notice to Program BRU Fire Alarm Panel Worksher Please complete and fax to Leesa Bums at National Guardian Security Services for the s. urpose of monitoring the system: Then please call her at 1-800- 720 -1102 ext. 123. Also, please fax this worksheet to the BCSD responsible for programming the Bosch FPD -7024 panel. your input, the BCSD will create and download the alarm system's programming. Kindly ensure the dip switched are set to BRU's/Bosch Security Sy [The BCSD Needs Five Full Working Days Notice to Program Based Provide a copy of the Fire Alarm Zone List adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Store Name and Address TRU /BRU - 64K Prototype Installer's Name and Employer Burglar Alarm Phone Number Installers Cell Number Fire Alarm Phone Number -1 Installers Landline Fire Alarm Phone Number -2 Installers FAX Store Number [Managers Direct Line -1] GC's Name and Employer Harm Cell Phone Back -up Model and Brand. GC's Cell Phone `.. Celt Phone Serial Number and ESN# GC's Landline Date Wor ksheet Sent to Vector GC's FAX Leese Burns BRU Liaison Contact National Guardian Security Services Tel: 1-800-720-1102 ext. 123 Fax: 888 -792 -1974 lbums @nationatguardiansecurity.com 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20105185 Renovation Toys Us/Babies 'R'Us- Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 m N N N N N N A m m V a a S a v a 0 a N 2 N N N t0 t0 lq0 n Leese Burns �BRU Liaison Contact @ National Guardian Security Services TeL 1- 800 -720 -11 Fax: 888- 792 Ibums @nationalguardiansecurity.com 0 2 3 4 6 129 0 2 3 4 5 130 PANEL SMOKE DETECTOR 0 2 3 4 6 131 PULL STATION - ADJACENT TO FACP 0 2 3 4 132 WATERFLOW - ZONE 1 0 2 3 5 6 133 WATERFLOW - ZONE 2 0 2 3 5 134 SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY 0 2 3 6 135 EXTERIOR PIV 0 1 2 3 136 0 2 4 5 6 137 RTU #1 RETURN 0 2 4 138 RTU #1 SHUTDOWN 0 2 4 6 139 RTU #2 RETURN 0 2 4 140 RTU #2 SHUTDOWN 0 2 6 141 RTU #3 RETURN 0 2 5 142 RTU #3 SHUTDOWN 0 2 6 143 RTU #4 RETURN 0 2 144 RTU #4 SHUTDOWN 0 3 4 6 145 RTU #5 RETURN 0 3 4 146 RTU #5 SHUTDOWN 0 3 4 147 RTU #6 RETURN 0 3 4 148 RTU #6 SHUTDOWN 0 3 5 6 149 RTU #7 RETURN 0 3 5 150 RTU #7 SHUTDOWN 0 3 6 151 RTU #8 RETURN 0 3 152 RTU #8 SHUTDOWN 0 4 6 153 RTU #13 RETURN 0 4 5 154 RTU #13 SHUTDOWN 0 4 155 RTU #14 RETURN 0 4 156 RTU #14 SHUTDOWN 0 157 0 5 158 CPS TROUBLE 0 6 159 0 160 APS TROUBLE 0 2 3 4 161 APS ACTIVATION 0 2 3 4 162 0 2 3 4 163 MUZAK SHUTDOWN 0 2 3 4 164 0 2 5 6 165 DUCT DETECTOR POWER CIRCUIT TROUBLE 0 2 3 166 0 2 3 6 167 0 2 3 168 0 2 4 5 6 169 0 2 4 5 170 0 2 4 6 171 0 2 4 172 0 2 173 0 2 5 174 0 2 6 175 0 2 176 0 3 4 177 0 3 4 5 178 1 0 3 4 6 179 0 3 4 180 0 3 6 181 0 3 5 182 0 3 6 183 0 184 0 4 5 6 185 0 4 186 0 4 6 187 0 4 188 0 6 189 0 190 6 191 192 4 193 0 4 5 194 195 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 ELECTRICAL DISTRUBUTION CENTER (EDC) SECTION 16G -1 THE OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH THE DESIGNATED EDC VENDOR WHO WILL PROVIDE CENTERS FOR TOYS "R" US AND BABIES "R" US. VERIFY WITH PROJECT CPM FOR SPECIFIC INFORMATION. PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 All work under this Section of the specifications shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of: SECTION 1B — GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16A— BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS. .2 All work covered in this Section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Distribution Center Vendor, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. 1.2 INSTALLATION OF EDC NOTE: THE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION CENTER IS TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. THIS IS AN OWNER - SUPPLIED ITEM AND ANY REFERENCE TO THIS SYSTEM BY THE CONSULTANT IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. VERIFY ALL QUESTIONS WITH MANUFACTURER. .1 Contractor to provide junction boxes, conduit and power connections to unit as indicated on Drawings. .2 Contractor is responsible for verification and compliance with all codes covering all aspects of the EDC installation. PART 2: MATERIALS (Information only. Verify all EDC construction with manufacturer) 2.1 MATERIALS .1 EDC shall be constructed of channel base frame material with galvanized steel studs. .1 Structural steel base frame: .1 Structural steel base shall consist of 6" minimum perimeter welded "C" channel. All channels shall be cleaned, primed, and painted to protect steel against rust. .2 Housekeeping pads shall consist of minimum 3" channel with steel plate on top under equipment that would normally set on the floor. .3 Provide removable channels or angles as required for shipping with bolted ,connections to allow easy removal by the Electrical Contractor after EDC is set in place. 2010 SSBS Renovation A The equipment that is to be installed as indicated on the drawings shall dictate frame size. Maximum overall dimensions shall be 6-6" wide by 14' -6" long. 2.2 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT .1 EDC manufacturer shall install Automated Logic energy management equipment provided by the owner. 1 EDC manufacturer shall provide 3/4" x 4' x 4' painted plywood for Automated Logic EMS equipment. .2 EDC manufacturer shall mount and wire EMS equipment as directed on drawing EMS1. .3 Provide circuits to EMS equipment from circuit breaker with breaker lock -on device as shown on the drawing. 2.3 RECEPTACLE, AND EMS CIRCUIT .1 Receptacle and EMS circuitry .1 A general - purpose receptacle shall be installed inside the EDC adjacent to the entry, and shall be connected to the circuit as shown on the EDC drawing and coordinated with panel schedules. .2 A junction box shall be provided on the EMS backboard for a field installed isolated ground circuit that shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. 2.4 CODE CLEARANCES FOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED INSIDE THE EDC. .1 Clearances between pieces of electrical equipment shall comply with Section 110 of the 2008 NEC. 2.5 GROUNDING .1 All equipment shall be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the latest applicable version of the NEC. .1 Install grounding bushings and grounding jumpers at main service panelboard where conduits are terminated in concentric or eccentric knockouts. .2 Grounding conductors shall be installed in all flexible steel conduit sized in accordance with Table 250 -122 of the latest applicable version of the NEC. .3 Transformer(s) neutral conductor shall be grounded to an external lug with a grounding electrode conductor sized in accordance with Table 250 -66 of the latest applicable version of the NEC. External lug shall be arranged so the project electrical contractor can extend the grounding electrode conductor to the building - grounding Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 electrode. ELECTRICAL DISTRUBUTION CENTER (EDC) SECTION 16G -2 .4 EDC structural frame must be bonded to service ground. 2.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT .1 Cutler Hammer PRL 4 panelboard with main lugs only sized as shown on the drawings (using 6 Disconnect Rule 230 -90(a) Ex. 3) and service entrance label. .1 Voltage, amperage, bus bracing, and ratings shall meet the requirements shown on the drawings. .2 Panelboard bus shall be aluminum. 2.7 DISTRIBUTION AND LIGHTING /APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS .1 Panelboards shall be Cutler Hammer PRL1A, PRL2A, and PRL3A with mains as shown on the drawings. .1 Voltage, amperage, bus bracing, and interrupting ratings shall meet the requirements shown on the drawings. .2 Panelboard bus shall be aluminum. .3 Breakers shall be bolt -on type thermal magnetic center trip type for alternating current with single handle common trip. Breakers shall be arranged as shown on panelboard schedules. .4 Cabinets shall be constructed from zinc- coated sheet steel with knockouts. Trims and doors shall have a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturer's standard color. Trims shall have fitted hinged doors with a combination lock and latch. Locks shall all be keyed alike, with minimum of two keys provided per panelboard. .5 A circuit directory shall be provided under a clear plastic cover on the inside of each panelboard door. The directory shall be capable of accepting typewritten text to identify circuit loads. 2.7 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER .1 Transformer(s) shall be Cutler Hammer general - purpose type for use at 600 volts and below with primary and secondary windings and be dry-type in a metal enclosure. .1 Transformer(s) shall be rated for full load operation at a maximum temperature rise of 150 degree C above a 40 degree C ambient. .2 Transformer(s) shall have (2) 2 -1/2% FCBN and FCAN taps on the primary side. 2010 SSBS Renovation .3 Transformer(s) installed inside the EDC shall be mounted a minimum of 6" from the wall to allow for air circulation. .4 Transformer(s) shall be bolted down to housekeeping pad. 2.8 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .1 All conduits shall be sized as shown on the drawings and be installed in accordance with Article 358 of the of the latest applicable version of NEC. .1 Conduit shall be steel EMT with steel set screw fittings with insulated throat or plastic bushings. .2 Flexible conduit shall be steel with malleable iron fittings and include a Code sized grounding conductor. All transformer connections shall utilize flexible conduit 2.9 WIREWAYS .1 Provide wireways where required, constructed of a minimum 16 -gauge steel. .1 Wireway shall be constructed in accordance with UL870 Standards. .2 Wireway shall be constructed without knockouts. .3 Covers shall be permanently attached so that complete removal is not required to install conductors. .4 All screws installed to the inside shall be p76tected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent damage to conductor insulation. .5 Wireway shall be securely fastened to mounting surface in accordance with Article 362 of the or the latest applicable version of NEC. 2.10 WIRE AND CABLE .1 Wire and cable shall be sized and installed as shown on the drawings. .1 Wire shall be 98 percent conductivity, stranded copper conductors, 600 bolt rated, THHN/THWN insulation, sized and terminated per the 75 degree C column of Table 310 -16 of the or the latest applicable version of NEC. .2 Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG except for control wire, which may be No. 14 AWG. .3 Wiring shall be color coded utilizing the following industry standards: .1 208/120/3PH/4W Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 ELECTRICAL DISTRUBUTION CENTER (EDC) SECTION 16G -3 .1 Phase A - Black .2 Phase B - Red .3 Phase C - Blue .4 Neutral - White .5 Grounding - Green .2 480/277/3PH/4W .1 Phase A - Brown .2 Phase B - Orange .3 Phase C - Yellow .4 Neutral - Gray .5 Grounding — Green .4 Color- coding shall be identified and permanently posted at each branch circuit panelboard. .5 Wire #6 AWG and larger shall be identified for phase, neutral, and grounding conductor utilizing colored vinyl tape in the manner specified for the grounded conductor in 200 -6(b) of the or the latest applicable version of NEC utilizing the color coding listed in 13.1.3; 13.1.3.1 and 13.1.3.2 above. PART 3: DELIVERY AND SETUP 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT .1 All electrical equipment in the EDC shall be labeled with laminated plastic nameplate, with a black surface, white core, and 1/4" high engraved letters. .1 Spell out complete name of equipment, such as Panel HA, in lieu of abbreviated references. .2 Inside panelboard doors, on the breaker trim plate, provide a nameplate listing the color coding referenced in 13.1.3; 13.1.3.1 and 13.1.3.2 above. 3.2 DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS .1 EDC shall be delivered to individual project site(s) on dates and times designated by owners purchasing agent. .1 EDC shall be delivered on a flat bed trailer with provisions for lifting from the base at points near each end that will not cause stress to the framing or the structure. .2 Delivery of the EDC shall be coordinated by the construction manager, electrical contractor, and manufacturer to insure that unloading equipment and personnel are available at the site on delivery day. .3 The EDC shall be inspected for possible shipping damage upon arrival at the site with any damage being noted. Arrangements shall be made with the manufacturer and shipper to repair any damage that may be noted. 3.3 LOOSE EQUIPMENT .1 Loose equipment as shown on the one -line diagram shall be shipped on a separate pallet with the EDC. .1 Equipment shall be strapped to the pallet and have a Sheet vinyl wrapping to make weather tight during shipping and early storage. PART 4: WARRANTEES 4.1 WARRANTEE INFORMATION .1 Warrantees to be issued on all Electrical Distribution Centers as per agreement between Owner and manufacturer. Duration, length, and coverage requirements are to be finalized and signed off on prior to contract finalization. Verify length and conditions of coverage for EDC with manufacturer. - END OF SECTION - 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 16H -1 .1 The work under this section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: .1 Section 16A - Basic Materials, Methods, and Requirements. .2 section 16B - Technical Requirements. .3 section 15D - HVAC Systems and Equipment. .2 The Electrical Contractor (EC) is ultimately responsible for the installation of all low voltage wiring as hereinafter described and as shown on the drawings. The EC shall be responsible for the installation of all required conduit runs and junctions. The IT cable contractor (ITC) shall be contracted by the EC to install all low voltage cabling. .3 The ITC is responsible to obtain any communication, low voltage, or electrical permit required by the local municipality. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of providing all equipment, materials and labor in accordance with any code and authority having jurisdiction, and performing all work as required for the complete execution of electrical work as shown on the drawings, herein specified, or both, and without restricting these items, shall include the following: .1 General requirements. .2 Conduit, fittings, junction boxes, and pull string in empty conduit required for low voltage cabling installation. .3 Labor for installation of all low voltage wiring including but not limited to: .1 Cat5e and Fiber network for POS equipment and IT. .2 Cable for 5 -7 zone speaker system. .3 Cat5e for Toss prevention camera system. .4 Cable for loss prevention door contacts, motion detectors, knox box, safe monitoring, and sirens. .5 Cable for RTU thermostats. .6 Cat5e for phone systems. .7 T -1 cables for DVR system and EMS. .2 The installation of low voltage components is outside the scope of this contract and will be contracted separately through TRU. .3 The EC and ITC shall coordinate all work and location of all equipment with Loss Prevention Manager, GC, and CPM. .4 For uniformity in comparing bids, each EC's bid shall include a separate line item for subcontract of TRU National account IT cable contractor (ITC), including vendor name. 1.3 CODE REFERENCES .1 EIA/TIA-568B.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements including all updates and Addenda. .2 EIA/TIA- 568B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components including all updates and Addenda. .3 EIA/TIA- 568B.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard including all updates and Addenda. .4 ANSI/EIA/TIA -568A pin assignments for eight - conductor 100 -ohm balanced twisted pair cabling. .5 Current electrical code of authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDORS .1 Cabling, CAT5e connectors, and cover plates - Supplied by TRU .1 Viking Electronics 640 Herman Road Jackson, NJ 08527 Brian Cera bcera @viking - inc.com 1- 800 - 233 -0403 Work (732) 996 -4950 Mobile .2 IT Cable contractor (ITC) .1 American Systems 13990 Parkeast Circle Chantilly, VA 20151 (union and non -union labor) Rick Jones, VP (703) 968 -5145 Work RichardJones@AmericanSystems.com Christopher Cardem, Project Manager (703) 968 -5119 Work Christopher .Carden @AmericanSystems.com .2 Spencer Technologies 44A Main St. Garnerville, NY 10923 (union and non -union labor) 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 DMSION 16 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 16H -2 John Arcure, Regional Sales Manager (508) 635 -2058 Work (508) 735 -8307 Mobile jarcure@spensertech.com Stephen Petruzzi (508) 963 -7140 Mobile spetruzzi@spencertech.com .3 Comnet Services L.L.0 P.O. Box 1237 Paterson, NJ 07544 -1237 Mike Bula Store Installation (973) 227 -4326 Work (973) 670 -4410 Mobile Mike.Bula @toysrus.com .4 LiveWire Electric & Data L.L.C. 13531 Capetown Ave. Pickerington, OH 43147 Mark Gramlich President (614) 989 -8520 Mobile Live W i re ElecData @aol.com 1.5 Installation Requirements .1 Maximum length of ALL cat5e installation to be no greater than 100 meters (328 ft) in length. .2 Each Cat5e cable will be properly labeled with location identification number using cable labels. .3 Cable will be required at DVR system. Typically in manager's office, verify site specific location. .4 Cable will be required for the EMS system, located in power wall. .5 Fire, Burglar and EMS line need to be extended , terminated, and cross - connected as soon as the Demarc is installed and /or directed by the GC or TRU CPM. .6 All runs shall be properly supported. No cables will be allowed to rest or touch the ceiling the or grid. .7 ITC shall verify and coordinate for site specific length of fiber optic cable required. .8 Cat5e certification must be submitted to TRU within two weeks of installation completion. .9 IT National Account Installation Contractor shall obtain all required communication, low voltage or electrical permit as required by authority having jurisdiction for completion of their work. .10 Adequate cable shall be installed for the following final service loop lengths. .1 30' coiled service loop for speaker cable at MDF. .2 3' coiled service loop at speaker, an sales floor. .3 10' coiled service loop, above ceiling, for office speakers. .4 10' coiled service loop for all cables at IDF cabinet. .5 10' coiled service loop, above ceiling, for Cat5e cable in offices. .6 5' coiled service loop for Cat5e cables terminating at top of power poles. .7 25' coiled service loop for Cat5e cables serving all cameras. .11 Proper support shall be provided for for all cables going into a wall and /or conduit. .12 Test and certify each data and voice line from patch panel to termination. .13 Speaker feeds shall be run separate from all Cat5e and fiber optic cables. .14 Circuits shall be installed exposed in finished areas only upon approval of the CPM. Provide surface - mounted metallic raceway for these locations and paint conduit to match. .15 All conductors and conduits shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner at right angles to the building walls, floors and ceilings, and supported from the building structure at intervals compliant with local code requirements. Exposed conductors shall be supported from building structure at intervals of no more than four (4) feet. .16 Exposed conductor and conduits shall be concealed from public view at all locations by routing on the inside of joists, above lay -in ceilings, over girders, with in partitions or in any other manner acceptable to the owner. Conductors and conduits installed above lay -in ceilings shall be supported from the building from the building structure and shall not be permitted less than 9- inches above or behind removable panels or ceiling tiles. 1.6 SCHEDULE .1 All Data, Voice and Speaker lines need to be installed at least three weeks prior of fixture date. Data and voice lines will need to be terminated at the MC and IC two weeks prior to fixturing. Office, Sales, Pre -sale areas need to be terminated and tested one week prior of the store receiving merchandise. 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 • • • DMSION 16 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 16H -3 1.7 Warranty .1 The EC shall repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of one year from the date of the store grand opening. Workmanship or equipment found to be defective during that period shall be replaced without cost to the owner. .2 Warranty shall be documented by the issuance of a written service agreement in the name of the owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS — NOT USED. PART 3: EXECUTION — NOT USED. END OF SECTION 2010 SSBS Renovation Toys "R" Us /Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, WA 03/09/2010 December 16, 2010 File No. 262010.005/01501 cIVI6ENGINEERING, r' STRU@TURAL-ENGINEERING PLANNINJG` ' 1SURVEYING % i,y t:• Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Subject: Building Permit Plan Review — First Submittal Toys R Us Bike Rack (D10-072) Dear Mr. Benedicto: RECEIVED 'DEC 17 2010 COMMUNory DEVELOPMENT I ENT We reviewed the proposed project for compliance with the structural provisions of the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) as amended and adopted by the state of Washington and the city of Tukwila. The permit applicant has responded successfully to our comments. We have no comments necessitating a response from the permit applicant. The calculations reference a conversation with Shawn at Lift Store that the fully loaded bike rack weighs 900 pounds and is 12 feet 0 inches long. The structural analysis is, in part, based on this conversation. As such, we recommend the placement of a load limit sign near the bike rack. Enclosed are two sets of pages from the structural calculations with revisions to the existing structure for your records. If you have any questions or need additional clarification, please contact us. Sincerely, Reid Middleton, Inc. Philip ' razil, P.E., S. Senior Engineer Enclosures cc: Brenda Holt, City of Tukwila (by e -mail) knb\26 \planrevw \tukwi la\ 10 \t015r 1.doc \prb 728 1341h Street SW Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 'hone 425 741-3800 425 /41 3900 4300 B Street Suite 302 Anctio'age, AK 99503 PFore: 90/ 552 3139 fax: Q07 G' '619 Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director December 3, 2010 Dave Swanson, P.E. Reid Middleton 728 - 134th Street SW, Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 RE: Structural Review Development Permit D1O -072 Revision #1 Toys R Us —17501 Southcenter Py Dear Mr. Swanson: Please review the enclosed document for structural compliance with the 2009 International Building Code. If you should have any questions, please feel free contact us in the Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, e fifer shall it Te ician encl File: D1O -072 W:\Permit Center\Structural Review\D1O -072 Structural Review (Rev 1).DOC 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 e Tukwila, Washington 98188 o Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 o Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 • City of Tukwila Department of Public Works September 16, 2010 CLPF — Tukwila LP C/O JSH Properties, Inc. 10655 NE 4th Street, #300 Bellevue, WA 98004 -5086 Attn: Bernie Melick ESI General Contractor Subject: Fire Line at Toys R Us and Babies R Us 17501 Southcenter Parkway, Tukwila Permit D10 -072 Dear Sir: Jim Haggerton, Mayor Bob Giberson, P.E., Director During the construction of your facilities, an abandoned live water service was found at the southwest corner of your building. The service line needs to be removed back to the water main with the corporation stop removed from the pipe and a repair band installed to cover the service hole remaining in the pipe. The City of Tukwila requires the work because the existing service is located off a private non - metered water line and if the service line were to leak, this line would be a liability to the City. Please all me at (206)431 -2441 if you have any questions. ely, Michael P. Cusick Senior Water and Sewer Engineer MC:Iw (W:PW Eng/Other/Mike Cusick/Letter CLPF 091610) 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 433 -0179 • Fax: 206 -431 -3665 • • • REIMBURSEMENT AUTHORIZATION AND APPROVAL TO CONDUCT INSPECTION ACTIVITIES DURING OFF HOURS Date: �2� \ Permit No. b t 0 - 0-7 z Requested by: bscz-IJt - 1"► �,c -�, / N �� P��eArc7IJ Firm/Company: 1.N(,_ Project Name: 10 kAS ! I t■ fv Sz Project Address /Location: \ Sou'HnLcwkev V41 Time of Off -Hours Construction Activity - From: 1Z•.cz:, am/OP To: 'l• am Requested Date of Inspection: ' J /Z-<21"-) Requested Time: \-2-‘,w - ti :r-z, am/ Contact Name: rg.) 1 Phone No. 2— kph— '7039 Special Conditions for Consideration: Fr� Aicv.q r�lrl ,IN ** Contractor will be charged a minimum of four (4) hours inspection time for any off -hours inspection work at $94.50 per hour. This is to be paid at time of request. ** The undersigned, as an authorized representative of the above firm, hereby agrees to reimburse the City for its overtime inspections on the above referenced project. A separate invoice will be issued for all inspection time in excess of four (4) hours. Signature: Print Name: �A *� - RECEIVED ©IV OF TUKWILA MUh 2 7.2010 PrA2114IT f4PArrr. r. Reviewed by: / L Gel t 'es" ,1 Icr / , Approved: //,. /� Disapproved: Remarks: W: \Permit Center \Templates \Forms\After Hour Inspection Request.doc paPp April 28, 2010 architeZ'fure engineering, P.C. '1M11--il • ._ r,3ici�', Nil Mr. Allen Johannessen City of Tukwila Department of Community Development, Building Division 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Re: Correction Letter #1 Development Permit Application Number D10 -072 Building Division Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us —17501 Southcenter Parkway Dear Mr. Johannessen The following is in response to your plan review comments regarding the proposed Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us located at 17501 Southcenter Parkway. Below, I have included your comments in bold followed by our response in italicized text. Drawings A101, A401, A402, A405, A406, A407, and E102 revised and dated April 27, 2010, are included herein; Drawing E102A issued for reference only and dated April 27, 2010. 1. Door for room #115 (Mothers Room), appears to swing the wrong way. Reverse door hinge side to hinge on the opposite side, still swinging in, to comply with ADA barrier free as well as improve room access. Door #18 has been moved to allow for 18" (minimum) clearance at the latch on the pull side of the door. Drawings A101, A402 and A405 have been revised to reflect this change (enclosed). 2. Sheet A406 details #12, #13 & #14 show wedge anchors into masonry block walls. Structural general notes (sheet 5001) section #6 item #6.2 for masonry applications epoxy grout is required for bolts installed in masonry. Expansion anchors are not allowed because of the potential of cracking concrete as a result of the expansion force of expansion anchors. Revise details and notes with reference to the type of epoxy bolting method, specifying type of epoxy to use. Special inspections are required and shall be noted on the plan. Details 12, 13 & 14/A406 have been revised to show required anchors and epoxy type. A note has also been added indicating that Special Inspection are required. 3. Suspended ceiling details are not provided. Please provide specification with details that meet ASCE standards for the new suspended ceiling. Details shall show how the ceiling is anchored to the structure above and specifics for ceiling bracing with details. Identify type of perimeter supporting enclosure angle. Typically the width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall be not less than 2.0 inches. (ASCE Standards 9.6.2.6.2.2.) RECEIVED TR# EC'TION � LO 07 APR 29 2010 PERMITCEfyTER • • paPp architecture engineering, P.C. Please refer to Detail 9/A407 (enclosed). We have also added some additional stud joists as shown on Drawings A401 and A402 (enclosed). 4. In addition to item 3) provide details specifically for suspended GWB ceilings, specifying method of attaching and bracing of the ceilings to the structure above. Please refer to the ceiling framing details on Drawing A402. We have also added some additional stud joists as shown on Drawings A401 and A402 (enclosed). 5. Identify path of egress illumination on the reflective ceiling plan to show common paths of egress with sufficient emergency illumination of 1 foot - candle at the walking surface leading to and including the exit discharge doorways. (IBC Section 1006) Please refer to new Drawing E102A (enclosed) for Emergency Lighting Photometrics. Additional emergency lights have been added, as shown on revised Drawing E102 (enclosed). 6. Wall types are provided on Sheet A101; however floor plan walls are not identified with key symbols referencing each type. Provide key reference for walls show on floor plan, keyed to the wall legend. Rated walls shall be provided with the UL listings indicated in the legend. Partition type callouts have been added to the plans. Refer to revised drawings A101, A401 and A402 (enclosed) Please contact us should you have any questions or require additional information. Sincerely, PAEP ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING, P.C. Ryan T. Noakes Project Manager RTN /tlk 55252805/005 Enclosures cc: Page Interworks, P.A. — Carl A. Page (via email) Toys "R" Us, Inc. — Devin Bissember, Rick Hansen, Jacob Stutzman (via email) PAEP Architecture Engineering, P.C. — Kevin Groenenboom, Doug Wurl (via email) X: \WGEN5 \55252805\2010 \rn04271 - bldg dept review.docx RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER Page 2 April 28, 2010 PaPP April 27, 2010 • • architecture engineering, P.C. 18' i ;v:ik tic NE v Ms. Jaimie Reavis City of Tukwila Department of Community Development, Planning Division 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 61h sr,. 01 :i;,: ai s .r -.i till' Re: Correction Letter #1 Development Permit Application Number D10 -072 Planning Division Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us —17501 Southcenter Parkway Dear Ms Reavis: The following is in response to your plan review comments regarding the proposed Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us located at 17501 Southcenter Parkway. Below, I have included your comments in bold followed by our response in italicized text. Drawings A201, A301, and A302, revised and dated April 27, 2010, are included herein. 1. Signage shall be reviewed through submittal of sign permits. Note that the current code allows a maximum of two signs per business, and only one sign per business for each wall face. Tukwila is currently working on an update on its sign code; the requirements in place at the time of sign application will apply to this project. Please contact Courtney Thomson at (206) 431 -2164 for more information. We will submit separately for a sign permit. 2. The existing building was approved through Public Hearing Design Review by the Tukwila Board of Architectural Review (BAR). According to TMC 18.60.030 (E): No changes shall be made to approved designs without further BAR or Director approval and consideration of the change in the context of the entire project." The facade changes currently proposed are not consistent with the design of the rest of the development on the property. In order for the proposed changes to be reviewed as a minor modification, the following changes to your proposal are recommended to achieve a design consistent with that originally approved by the BAR: a) The parapet walls shall be redesigned to be consistent in height and design with the other parapet walls of the development. You can choose to retain the current pitched parapet design. Or change the design to be similar to thRECEI V `� ED CORRECTION tilOO7 z APR 29 2010 PERMIT CENTER • • paPp parapet section at the north end of the Toys R Us /Babies R Us tenant space, on which the K &G sign is currently located. The wall associated with the parapets at the entry/exit area will need to incorporate the tile band used below the cornice on the other walls, as well as multiple colors. To be similar to the design of the other parapets and accompanying store entrance areas in the development. architecture engineering, P.C. Parapets have been revised to match existing. Refer to revised drawings A201, A301 and A302 as well as the revised rendering (enclosed). b) Your proposal is to retain the arches located on the wall at the north side of the tenant space and eliminate those along the main entrance. In order to be consistent with design elements of the existing building. The arches shall be included along the arcade at the entrance. The arches have been added to the Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us facade, similar to the Existing Linens N Things facade. Refer to revised drawings A201, A301 and A302 as well as the revised rendering (enclosed). c) The amount of window area shall not be reduced. This includes the area on either side of the entrance to the store, as well as the area at the north end of the Toys R Us tenant space where the storefront system is proposed to be removed. Windows should replace the existing doors in this area rather than blank wall area, similar to the building modification recently proposed by K &G Fashion Superstore under building permit D10 -080. Per our previous discussions, Toys "R" Us cannot feasibly add any additional glazing without affecting the operations of the store. We have however added E.I.F.S. accents as shown. Refer to revised drawing A201 as well as the revised rendering (enclosed). Please contact us should you have any questions or require additional information. Sincerely, PAEP ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING, P.C. Ryan T. Noakes Project Manager RTN /tlk 55252805/005 Enclosures cc: Toys "R" Us, Inc. — Devin Bissember, Rick Hansen, Jacob Stutzman (via email) PAEP Architecture, Engineering, P.C. — Doug Wurl (via email) X: \WGEN5 \55252805\2010 \rn04271 - Page 2 planning dept review.docx RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER April 27, 2010 April 20, 2010 • cart' of Tukwila • Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Ryan Noakes PAEP Architecture Engineering 1811 4 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, MI 49525 RE: Correction Letter #1 Development Permit Application Number D10 -072 Toys R Us/Babies R Us —17501 Southcenter Py Jack Pace, Director Dear Mr. Noakes, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building and Planning Departments. At this time the Fire and Public Works Departments have no comments. Building Department: Allen Johannessen at 206 433 -7163 if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Planning Department: Jaimie Reavis at 206 431 -3659 if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, `-?-ctair- Bill Rambo Permit Technician encl File No. D10 -072 W:\Pennit Center\ Correction Letters \ 20I0\D10 -072 Correction Letter #1.DOC 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Tukwila Building Division Allen Johannessen, Plan Examiner Building Division Review Memo Date: March 26, 2010 Project Name: Toys R US / Babies R US Permit #: D10 -072 Plan Review: Allen Johannessen, Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet stamped, not copied.) 1. Door for room #115 (Mothers Room), appears to swing the wrong way. Reverse door hinge side to hinge on the opposite side, still swinging in, to comply with ADA barrier free as well as improve room access. 2. Sheet A406 details #12, #13 & #14 show wedge anchors into masonry block walls. Structural general notes (sheet S001) section #6 item #6.2 for masonry applications epoxy grout is required for bolts installed in masonry. Expansion anchors are not allowed because of the potential of cracking concrete as a result of the expansion force of expansion anchors. Revise details and notes with reference to the type of epoxy bolting method, specifying type of epoxy to use. Special inspections are required and shall be noted on the plan. 3. Suspended ceiling details are not provided. Please provide specifications with details that meet ASCE standards for the new suspended ceiling. Details shall show how the ceiling is anchored to the structure above and specifics for ceiling bracing with details. Identify type of perimeter supporting enclosure angle. Typically the width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall be not less than 2.0 inches. (ASCE Standards 9.6.2.6.2.2.) 4. In addition to item 3) provide details specifically for suspended GWB ceilings, specifying method of attaching and bracing of the ceilings to the structure above. 5. Identify path of egress illumination on the reflective ceiling plan to show common paths of egress are provided with sufficient emergency illumination of 1 foot - candle at the walking surface leading to and including the exit discharge doorways. (IBC Section 1006) 6. Wall types are provide on Sheet A101, however floor plan walls are not identified with key symbols referencing each type. Provide key reference for walls shown on floor plan, keyed to the wall legend. Rated walls shall be provided with the UL listings indicated in the legend. Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206 -431- 3670. No further comments at this time. PLANNING DIVISION COMMENTS DATE: April 16, 2010 APPLICANT: Ryan Noakes — PAEP Architecture Engineering, P.C. RE: D10 -072 ADDRESS: 17501 Southcenter Parkway (parcel #262304 -9067) Please review the following comments listed below and submit your revisions accordingly. 1. Signage shall be reviewed through submittal of sign permits. Note that the current code allows a maximum of two signs per business, and only one sign per business for each wall face. Tukwila is currently working on an update on its sign code; the requirements in place at the time of sign application will apply to this project. Please contact Courtney Thomson at (206) 431 -2164 for more information. 2. The existing building was approved through Public Hearing Design Review by the Tukwila Board of Architectural Review (BAR). According to TMC 18.60.030 (E): "No changes shall be made to approved designs without further BAR or Director approval and consideration of the change in the context of the entire project." The facade changes currently proposed are not consistent with the design of the rest of the development on the property. In order for the proposed changes to be reviewed as a minor modification, the following changes to your proposal are recommended to achieve a design consistent with that originally approved by the BAR: a) The parapet walls shall be redesigned to be consistent in height and design with the other parapet walls of the development. You can choose to retain the current pitched parapet design, or change the design to be similar to the parapet section at the north end of the Toys R Us /Babies R Us tenant space, on which the K &G sign is currently located. The wall associated with the parapets at the entry /exit area will need to incorporate the tile band used below the cornice on the other walls, as well as multiple colors, to be similar to the design of the other parapets and accompanying store entrance areas in the development. b) Your proposal is to retain the arches located on the wall at the north side of the tenant space and eliminate those along the main entrance. In order to be consistent with design elements of the existing building, the arches shall be included along the arcade at the entrance. c) The amount of window area shall not be reduced. This includes the area on either side of the entrance to the store, as well as the area at the north end of the Toys R Us tenant space where the storefront system is proposed to be removed. Windows should replace the existing doors in this area rather than blank wall area, similar to the building modification recently proposed by K &G Fashion Superstore under building permit D10 -080. If you have any questions on the requested revision, Jaimie Reavis is the planner assigned to the file and can be reached at 206 -431 -3659. pwp March 22, 2010 • • architecture engineering, P.C. 1811 • 4 Mile Rd NE I Grand Rapids, MI 49525 1 616- 361 -2664 I www.progressiveae.corn Jaimie Reavis City of Tukwila Planning Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Re: Incomplete Letter #1 - Development Permit Application D10 -072 Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us —17501 Southcenter Parkway Dear Ms. Reavis: I am writing this letter to request minor modification approval for the exterior elevations of the proposed Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us located at 17501 Southcenter Parkway in the former Linens N Things (and soon to be relocated K &G Men's Superstore). Below, I have included a written description of the proposed modifications to the exterior of the existing building. • Eliminate aluminum automatic sliding doors and storefront system at K &G Men's Superstore entrance. • Eliminate aluminum automatic sliding doors and storefront system at former Linens N Things entrance and provide new Toys "R" Us / Babies "R" Us clear anodized aluminum automatic sliding doors and storefront system in location shown. • Remove existing Linens N Things entrance canopy and provide new EIFS canopy for installation of new Toys "R" Us and Babies "R" Us signage. • Remove existing columns at former Linens N Things entrance canopy and provide new. • Provide new exterior insulation finish system (EIFS) and integrally colored (match Sherwin Williams, #6074 "Spalding Grey ") four -inch (4 ") split -face CMU veneer under canopy to keep consistent materials /finish at existing construction versus new infill at front elevation. • Provide new EIFS cornice and paint to match existing (Benjamin Moore, "Off White "). • Paint existing canopies to match Sherwin Williams, #6098 "Pacer White ". • Paint new EIFS to match existing (Benjamin Moore, "Light Taupe "). • Existing canopy at K &G Men's Superstore to remain as -is. RECEIVED MAR 2 3 2010 PERMIT CENTER • Paint existing concrete panels at rear and left side of store to match existing (Benjamin Moore, "Light Taupe "). • • P c3 ip P architecture engineering, P.C. Should you have questions or need additional information, please contact me at 616.361.2664. Sincerely, PAEP ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING, P.C. Ryan T. Noakes Graduate Architect RTN /tlk 55252805/005 \ \wss\ sites \projects\ 55252805 \Correspondence \Tukwila Page 2 March 22, 2010 Responsel_032210.docx March 16, 2010 • Tu • Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Ryan Noakes 1811 4 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, MI 49525 RE: Incomplete Letter #1 Development Permit Application D10 -072 Toys R Us / Babies R Us —17501 Southcenter Py Dear Mr. Noakes, Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on March 11, 2010 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review process the attached /following items from the following department(s) need(s) to be addressed: Planning Department: Jaimie Reavis at 206 - 431 -3659 if you have any questions concerning the attached comments. Please address the attached memo in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician Enclosures File: D10 -072 WAPermit CenterUIncomplete Letters\2010\D10 -072 Incomplete Ltr # 1.DOC 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 PLANNING DIVISION COMMENTS DATE: March 16, 2010 APPLICANT: Ryan Noakes — PAEP Architecture Engineering, P.C. RE: D10-072 ADDRESS: 17501 Southcenter Parkway (parcel #262304 -9067) Please review the following comments listed below and submit your revisions accordingly. 1. This design of this building was approved through Public Hearing Design Review. For the exterior modifications proposed, a minor modification to the approved design review must be approved by the Community Development Director. Please submit a written description of the proposed changes to the building exterior, along with colored elevations, and samples of colors and materials. If you have any questions on the requested revision, Jaimie Reavis is the planner assigned to the file and can be reached at 206 - 431 -3659. ,PERMITCOORDCOPY • PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -072 DATE: 12/02/10 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter # X Revision # 1 after Permit Issued DEPART ENTS: uifding ivision Public Works Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division Permit Coordinator n DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Nr- Comments: Incomplete U DUE DATE: 12/07/10 Not Applicable Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Building Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 01/04/11 Approved Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • YY • PE PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -072 DATE: 04 -29 -10 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US /BABIES R US SITE ADDRESS: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: L -tb uilding ivision Public Works ❑ Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division lir Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete DUE DATE: 05-04 -10 Not Applicable Comments: Permit Center'Use Only . • • INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Notation: Approved with Conditions DUE DATE: 06 -01-10 Not Approved (attach comments) n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • PE '41 MI • PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -072 DATE: 03 -23 -10 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US / BABIES R US SITE ADDRESS: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY Original Plan Submittal X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued EPA THE TS: 14, %-00-40 uilding ivision �-�IO Public mill_ Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator Ito -t(0 I ❑�I DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete n DUE DATE: 03-25-10 Not Applicable Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 04 -22-10 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) fg5_t( Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire ❑ Ping' PW ❑ Staff Initials: 4-)Z---( 0 Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • • PE T PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -072 DATE: 03 -11 -10 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US / BABIES R US SITE ADDRESS: 17501 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE 300 X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works 1* 4lk)c3) * {O ■ ire Prevention 111 Inning ivision Structural n Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete DUE DATE: 03-16 -10 Not Applicable C Comments: Permit Center Use Only 11 • • ; .,• . .: ,, ; ;;M, • •:: . • INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: /'1 1U_t V LETTER OF COMPLETENESS ILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Pingk PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route nStructural Review Required n No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 04-13 -10 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) n Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 PROJECT NAME: SITE ADDRESS: PERMIT NO: �1 _ 1_ ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: O -o �t d REVISION LOG REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITI S 1 12-10 W 1�-�9 1 Summary of Revision: Gj MAA/..fn, �* 9j1 pc&k Received by: eketi,4eb .%. ) '4gLick REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us . REVISION:. SUBMITTAL. . • Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 12/02/10 Plan Check/Permit Number: D 10 -072 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # ® Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Project Address: Contact Person: Toys R Us 17501 Southcenter Py Bernie Melick Summary of Revision: Structural calculations for bike racks as requested by Carol Martin Phone Number: 0 Ceiret W9), .ecw `1 i WE3 640 7151 Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on V21 0(21 Po \applications \forms- applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: • City of Tukwila Steven M Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci. tukwila. wa. us • Steve Lancaster, Director REVISION. S1[JBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 011 277- (ZJ 1 Plan Check/Permit Number: D 10 -072 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Toys R Us/Babies R Us Project Address: 17501 Southcenter Py Contact Person: ii■IJ T IIAY E5 Phone Number: ((L HL3 - 3`13-4 Summary of Revision: lO ReLc C AT 100 OF MOTI4EL1S bOL1e. 'tb , Lt-uL0 AbA kL 55 5 ct.Pi AiJc.L1oA.S 0 EP '( PtT ALtyNMENT PLATES © FEu 6 b fr J C dA ILL Fief) StASk.,Jc d C.-E 1 ul ,J4 'O&-1 ► (.S (PtcAL.sncA- t. tcPo (ICJ S) ® ADD ?ITIwAL CM E/Jcy c.► µrs IPIoJtof Foot- CANIO.. A-T" PAM of; E( &ss PA-Ti ioi.1 r-IJS - ISEc F.Lt✓UATIt t-i5 Ta 9e- /i?oR -( CAt-i S IS i E.n1 i 1,3 LTN 1 STi Jq RECEIVED e11''O APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): 1011 A2411 A561` A30Z, /4`161 IV442. iALio Avlo � Alia7 O? 4 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision C 10 Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: ( Entered in Permits Plus on If-le-4-10 \ applications \forms - applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: • • City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206- 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: "II1 1 1 1--°1° Plan Check/Permit Number: D 10 -072 ® Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 ❑ Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Toys R Us / Babies R Us Project Address: 17501 Southcenter Py (( Contact Person: 1?YN T ►J6p►6S Phone Number: ( )t6) ��1' Summary of Revision: P¢.uvtiSE CoWRE6 ►3pF.JL1a(,1 A41) wR►TTEEN AECC.R- ifTiUN of S-1'1-E1?-toi2 MZ1FIGATtoraS Fog- PLAosi►gUy N►sioN APPP IAL-. of P4taor-- 11bIFl I«. MOWED WV OF TUKWILA MAR 23 2010 PgjilYIT COMP Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of rev io Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: 'Entered in Permits Plus on #.2—).- y t 0 \applications \forms- applications on Iine\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: kg King County Department of Natural Resources and Parks Wastewater Treatment Division ��o -o7z Non- Residential Sewer Use Certification • To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or change of use of existing connections. • This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing sewer connections within five years of disconnect. Please Print or Type 7 SO 1 s ountC •rt r 1C -Lvt. 9 Property ' � 'Street Address City State ZIP TbiS 12 k3s/ 3A tE-5 u$ /JS\k 1 1' Owner's Name Subdivision Name Lot # Subdiv. # Block # Building Name 'Pfr"Cke—r---4-4/1 (i1 applicable) (4i5) 455 -050 Owner's Phone Number (with Area Code) (dice ) 44-7-'3457 Property Contact Phone Number (with Area Code) Owner's Mailing Address I6 S S hr- 4 9r- 340 ��uCSW�r - 7Boo y. Property Tax ID # 2 l [r s o 4- o c Party to be Billed (if different from owner) '-13`t S (Z u S City or Sewer District 1 OF --t•k/k. Date of Connection Side-Sewer Permit # Please report any demolitions of pre - existing building on this property. Credit for a demolition may be given under some circumstances. Demolition of pre- existing building? ❑Yes No Was building on Sanitary Sewer? ZYes ❑ No Was Sewer connected before 2/1/90? it.Yes ❑ No Sewer disconnect date: Type of building demolished? Request to apply demolition credit to multiple buildings? ❑ Yes ❑ No A. Fixture Units Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units Kind of Fixture Fixture Units No. of Fixtures Total Fixture Units Public Private Public Private Bathtub and Shower 4 4 Shower, per head 2 2 Dishwasher 2 2 Drinking fountain (each head) 1 .5 Hose bibb (interior) 2.5 2.5 Clotheswasher or laundry tub 4 2 Sink, bar or lavatory 2 1 It 8 Sink, Clinic flushing 8 8 Sink, kitchen 3 2 Sink, other (service) 3 1.5 Sink, wash fountain, circle spray 4 3 Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF 5 2 Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF 6 2 I (...Q Urinal, waterless 0 0 Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF 6 3 ' t O Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF 8 4 Total Fixture Units 117) Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE) 20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE Total No. of Fixture Units 20 tt(el) RCE B. Other Wastewater Flow (in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A) Type of Facility /Process: Estimated Wastewater Discharge: Gallons /days Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE): 187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE Total Discharge (gal /day) _ 187 C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents: (add A & B) A B G2,o C) RCE RCE AINEIVED OW OPTUICWOA MAR ,1.I 2010' pEF(WIT CENT B Pursuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge. The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 206 - 684 -1740. certify that the information given is correct. I understand that the capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any deviation will require resubmission of corret ed data for determination of a revised capacity charge. Date 3/I II/ t 0 Signature of Owner /Representative Print Name of Owner /Representative • g'Nf"W 1,0, 4.Ie7 naa roe,, e0n71 urk;,m _ v;.... n:_. Contractors or Tradespeople Peer Friendly Page • General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name Engineered Structures Inc UBI No. 600574197 Phone 2083623040 Status Active Address 12400 W Overland Rd License No. ENGINSI152K2 Suite /Apt. License Type Construction Contractor City Boise Effective Date 5/22/1985 State Id Expiration Date 5/20/2010 Zip 83709 Suspend Date County Out Of State Specialty 1 General Business Type Corporation Specialty 2 Unused Parent Company Other Associated Licenses License Name Type Specialty 1 Specialty 2 Effective Date Expiration Date Status SIMPLCI060B6 Simplot Construction Inc Construction Contractor Air Conditioning Plumbing 1/26/1994 7/1/2001 Archived INDUSSI11ORR Industrial Systems Inc Construction Contractor Air Conditioning Plumbing 12/19/1989 12/18/1993 Archived ENGINSD150KW Engineered Structures Dev Corp Construction Contractor General Unused 5/16/1985 4/12/1986 Archived ENGINI'244NJ Engineered Structures Inc Construction Contractor General Unused 8/11/1976 8/11/1985 Archived SIMPLCI11ORL Simplot Construction Inc Construction Contractor General Unused 12/13/1989 7/19/2004 Out Of Business Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date C T Corporation System Agent 01/01/1980 Bond Amount Nelson, Neil Walter Member 05/10/2010 929353895 Hill, Thomas Dean Member 05/10/2010 Shockley, Rob Hamilton Member • 05/10/2010 USF &G CO Eckhardt, James L President 05/22/1985 03/01/2005 Eckhardt, Nellie R Vice President 05/22/1985 Bond Information Page 1 of 2 Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 8 WESTERN SURETY CO 929353895 03/01/2005 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 01/28/2005 7 USF &G CO ST7613 03/01/2003 Until Cancelled 03/01/2005 $12,000.0002/20 /2003 Assignment of Savings Information No records found for the previous 6 year period Insurance Information Insurance Company Name Policy Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Amount Received Date 22 AMERICAN HOME ASSURANCE CO 1617020 09/01/2007 09/01/2010 $1,000,000.00 08/14/2009 21 TRAVELERS PROPERTY CASUALTY DTEC0325D5776TIL06 05/13/2006 05/13/2008 $1,000,000.00 05/14/2007 https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Print.aspx 05/20/2010 Cn E co 111 <00 mcc rn W co z U de co �o Ec (n #L N O - w I, ❑ C C C DESCRIPTION 1 EQI l Tel.(909)869 -0989 ') �` >- m LAST REV. BY: TYP. TYPE: ' -? / MBM SCAL. N.T.S. DATE licti Ca«C 00. i ® 11 ® �% 0 0 D OZI J gi 0 0 2" TYP. 1 3/4" 1/8" 2 7/8" TYR 1 1/4" „ r I I 16 GA. - -I —J I 1 5/8" 7/8" ,r15/8",r 1 5/8" /8" 3.. 6 1 5/8" \ n _ O 14 GA j 6 0 1 O 1 6 - O \ I O j 1 5/8" 3" APPROX. 1 It ® ® ' 1/8" 1 1/4.. O 0 1 5/8„ I. 1 5 8 / ,, } 3/8" \ I 1 lu:�. 2 1/2" 4 3/32 - 0 14 GA. GA. Oo 0 la 15 GA. P. 1/8" • 1/T / 3/4!'13 a 5A 6" —'4 I 1 ' 6� 4 HORIZONTAL & DIAGONAL BRACING 4" 4„ 2 0 \ I �,J 0 5B 11 1 3 /4 „ MIN. EMBEDMENT I O O 11 3/4" sl 7 GA. �l 1/8" THK. I �IIIi. 7 GA. �� 1 2 —� 111::::� , �IIII\\\ I \I 33/16' 3 / USE ON TYPE BRU 3 11/16" (1) REQ'D PER BASE PLATE USE ON TYPE TRU BASE PLATE C6� CONNECTOR 6 CONNECTOR eA TYPICAL BRACING TO COLUMN CONNECTION 1 COLUMN (3) ANCHOR ,5A BEAM (3/4" LEDGE BEAM OPTIONAL) 5B BEAM ii TYPICAL BEAM TO COLUMN CONNECTION C -1095 BLUE TEMPERED SPRING STEEL C .095 BLUE TEMPERED SPRING STEEL �� 1 1/2" 1 Om p k°'' � • 0 II►o jo - © ©© �� %� 0 2 , + 0 (1A4»,AK ���� ��� l 1 / 1 7/16 EMBED. MIN. - � /��������r / //. �r� 0.177 "0 FOR CONCRETE ANCHOR TO TRACK EVERY 24" O.C. 3 1/2" 4 7/8" 6063 -T6 ALUMINUM 6063 -T6 ALUMINUM / 6063 -T6 ALUMINUM 6063 -T6 ALUMINUM ATTACH W/ #8 TEK SCREWS ATTACH W/ #8 TEK SCREWS 5-Al RUNNING TRACK 7BB ANTI-TIP TRACK , 8 SIDE RAILS �9 WHEEL CHANNEL 10 ANCHOR GENERAL CONFIGURATION 01 .1.S4060. 204 3/8" CORNERS ARE 3" x 3" x 1/8" W/ WHEEL 9 CHANNEL() A 1" LIP ABOVE � THE CARRIAGE \ SURFACE .�.\ `\.. A CORNERS ARE 3" x 3" x 1 /8" W/ A 1" LIP ABOVE THE CARRIAGE WHEEL CHANNEL 09 NOTES: •1. DESIGNED PER SECTION 1613 & 2208 OF THE 2006 IBC. Fa = 1.0 & Ss = 1.43 2. STORAGE CAPACITY: SEE ELEVATIONS 3. ASTM A570 FOR SHAPE Fy = 55,000 PSI GRADE 55 FOR STORAGE RACK. ASTM A572 FOR SHAPE Fy = 36,000 PSI GRADE 36 FOR MOVABLE CARRIAGE. 4. ALL BOLTS A307 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). 5. ANCHORS HILT! KWIK BOLT TZ, ICC # ESR -1917. 6. PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED DURING THE ANCHORAGE OF STORAGE RACKS 8 FEET OR GREATER IN HEIGHT IN STRUCTURES ASSIGNED TO SEISMIC DESIGN CATOGORY "D ", "E" OR "F". 7. CONCRETE 5" THICK x 2,500 PSI. 8. SOIL BEARING PRESSURE 1,000 PSF. 9. COLUMN PROTECTORS ARE REQUIRED AT EVERY PERIMETER COLUMN EXPOSED TO FORKLIFTS OR OTHER MOVING EQUIPMENT. REVIEWED FOR On� �OMP VE® hAr 12 2010 City ofTukwila BU�L�NG DIVISION _s Cfi ��i� 1�'�• 1�.� r ord (0 §.: «; �'�' ,fiotC`fA -' 7 Mat re d:) 1 ;;. -. "1 y . _ 7- bio -0 7 . -: -- -- RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 3.. SURFACE WHEEL CHANNEL 09 \ CORNERS ARE 3"x 3"x 1/8"W/ A 1" LIP ABOVE `\ B �S I \ ■ iiiiiiiii, - TRACK 7 SIDE RAIL 8 O 07 x 1/8" W/ THE SURFACE �� THE CARRIAGE SURFACE 2 \ ___ ���� 0 ! a / 3 ____ 1 , 1 1 1 1 1 --� 1 , 1 11 t' \ , 1 1 1 1� 1I ,�'� 1 ,�� �`. \\ `\`:` 1 RAILS O ■ — — , 1 1 ' ���I� - - -- %�� 1 I I — -- TRACK N, ,. \��'-\\\ C \\�.„ 3" x 3" SQ. 60 3/8 .. � C A 1" LIP ABOVE �• CARRIAGE 1 7/8" - - -1 1 7/8 -- i—\ i1 /SIDE SIDE RAILS 8 O ����I 'jII: 1�` . ••�` ` ♦ �� —JII Ip d ` �� III II. III ii� WHEEL 9 TRACK 7 SIDE RAILS 8 CHANNEL O O O ��� TRACK 7A TRACK 76 ANIT -TIP ARM i 11 MOVABLE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY VIEW A - A , ) VIEW B - B J VIEW C - C TYPE BRU TYPE BRU TYPE TRU TYPE TRU (MOBILE) (MOBILE) (STATIONARY) (STATIONARY) 204 3/8" 204 3/8" 5 96" 2,500# 60" 4 96" 2,500# 4' 60" 96" 1,000# 60" 96" 1,000# 60' T I 22', - \ 40 \ \ � 22 500# \ - 1,000# 500# 52 1 000# 52 52 S 40" 40.. 2,500# 2,500# 52 40" \ 1,000# 5 120" \ 120" S \ 120" 40" 120" 40" 120" \ 120" \ 120" \ 2,500# 1,000# 120" \ 54 2,500# 52" 52" 37" \ i 37" \ 1,000# 52" 54" 52" �, ■ �_ 1,000# \ ' .,, 8 \ 4" \ 4" FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 3" FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 3 i� FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW TYPICAL STORAGE RACK ELEVATIONS Cn E co 111 <00 mcc rn W co z U de co �o Ec (n #L N O - w I, ❑ C C C DESCRIPTION 1 91768 Tel.(909)869 -0989 Fax (909)869 -0981 DRAWN BY: M.V. >- m LAST REV. BY: REV. DATE: TYPE: ' -? / MBM SCAL. N.T.S. DATE licti Ca«C I EST. 1985 SEIZMIC ENGINEERING, INC. 161 Atlantic Street Pomona, California 91768 Tel.(909)869 -0989 Fax (909)869 -0981 DRAWN BY: M.V. DATE: 01/26/10 LAST REV. BY: REV. DATE: TYPE: ' -? / MBM SCAL. N.T.S. APRV'D BY: SAL E. FATEEN EXPIRES 04 -12 -2010 DESCRIPTION: STORAGE RACK & MOVABLE BASE DETAILS DRAWING NUMBER: 10- 0101 -A .156" THK. TYP. ASTM A366 TYP. 18 GA. 11 Ili h. 1 1 J LAST REV. BY: 4" 1 3/4' 14 GA. " \ I _ 1 ® 5/8 6" TYP. 2.. TYP 4' 0 7 GA. PIN *. VARI S ��r 3/16" 6 1/ ' 1 1/ 1 1/2' n 12 GA. . / 1 c s ` 2" VARI S I 11 GA. 1r8" 2 5 I % '16" ® Up, 20 GA. A� 515/16 0 USED t MIN. EMBEDMENT 1 ARM 0 3--)1/4 8 IIIII�III IMO III•�IIIII 1 P. 102" 1 4 9 1 .4j / 6 1 /2„ 48" i. l 1j 1 N M. TOP CENTER BOTTOM 7/8" + % RAIL - 20 GA. RAIL - 24 GA. RAIL - 22 GA. 0 i 6 3/8" 4, D FOR (2) REQ'D PER ANCHOR PLATE 12 2010 Tukwila 6' TYP. ® . \ 11 GA. �L;, _ - (2) ANCHORS 1/2" 0 HOLES -- REVIEWS 3/4" `� 1 1 /2 CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY City of BUILDI BASE CONNECTOR PLATE PER ANCHOR PLATE MULTI - FUNCTION UPRIGHT E2) BASE BRACKET 3) ANCHOR PLATE 5RY1OR 5� RAIL rrilli 11 O CONNECTORS & "H" SECTION � ARE SPOT WELDED TO SHELF N VARI S 48" N • M. ° ° �� �° �.. °�' %' 22 GA. °/ 11 GA. 2 1/4" TYP. 1 1/4" 7/1-;o. 9/32" 0 j l 1 .`. -/ �� `.. 23/ 2" .\ J .� 1/8" 21 �`\ `.\ • 1 5/8" 14 GA. /2" \ •''I ..- -' 1 / - :: (.yJ 1 3/4" .i `�`� 1 /`\. \\�\ �� ;Ti � ��' �i�i. 42+ .42" 14 GA. 14 GA. '' T 75" T I 875 3/8" 1 1 2 ✓� 875" LEVELING LEG 3/8 "0 BOLT ANCHOR LATE / 1 31" `� �`. I� GA. �.31" (� i CO ^ �11 :� / n �`. 1 ■ l \�`•� `. 3 . �`.\\\ 8" .- . /,....< y� �8 SHELF �► �`/ e 42" I NOTE: NUMBER OF HAT SECTIONS VARY DEPENDING ON DEPTH % VARI S QO 48" N M. ° ' %:o %• ° '' '2' o °° ,''.�� %��' ° i'ii ��'i6 iii .�� �� o .�� f 22 GA. / 1/4" 31/2" /� . � . .,,.� 1 �\� \\\\ 1/8" THK. + � 1/2" < `Y� \�` 1 1 .i �`. �•��' \�`. -'.'� —' 0 `. � 1p.41 5" , ,��, 31/2" 1.1 `� (TO GONDOLA UPRIGHT) WIRE WELD Y WIRE WELD BOTH BOTH ENDS > V TYP. Y 1/8" • 1 5/8" (TO MULTI FUNCTION UPRIGHT) ENDS > V TYP. �2� HOOK 13� BRACKET A GONDOLA UPRIGHT 7 BASE DECK (9 REAR BEAM / BEAM �11� SUPPORT BEAM S 11� SUPPORT BEAM ATTACH WITH (2) #10-24 x 1/2 "0 ��� BOLTS v (4' I 3/8 �� /8" 1 11/16" 5 P. 5/16 0 © , ` �� 0 ' O li ► /\ \ ` il PI ►► NOTES: 1. DESIGNED PER SECTION 1622 OF THE 2006 IBC, Fa= 1.0 &Ss =1.43 2. STORAGE CAPACITY: GONDOLA = 100# PER LEVEL. MULTI- FUNCTION = 100# PER SHELF 300# TOP LEVEL 3. ASTM A570 FOR SHAPE Fy = 36,000 PSI GRADE 36. 4. ALL BOLTS A307( UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). 5. ANCHORS HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ ICC # ESR -1917 OR APPROVED EQUAL. 6. CONCRETE 5" THICK x 2 5T1 PSI. 7. SOIL BEARING PRESSURE 1 000 PSF. bIck..0-7 1 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT 5/16" /8" 20 GRI END TRIM 1 � 1 3/8 „ 2 3/8 ► ” 1 ill" 1. it Il 16" 1 1/4" \ - 3/16 16" 3/8 lilll SINGLE ROW SHOWN SHELVES REMOVED 0 / 22 GA. BASE BRACKET TRIM ® 20 GA. FRONT KICK PANEL 00 ® ©O FOR CLARITY V-A TYP. BASE DECK TO UPRIGHT CONNECTION BASE DECK CONNECTOR SHELF SUPPORT r GENERAL CONFIGURATION (GONDOLA) GENERAL CONFIGURATION (MULTI- FUNCTION) GONDOLA PERIMETER WALLS "1 "1 48" t-16 t16 144" \ , /-22 /-22 MULTI - FUNCTION MULTI - FUNCTION "--11-22 "/ y y y 96" � 96" r22 48" 8" 1-34"—j.t 34" i —19"--t f 102" 0 102" X19" tiii:i 144" 144" 0 0 32" TYP. 102" :r 32" P. 19" TYP. 19" TYP. 102" ,-22" 7 "-' -22 "—, DIV DE EQUALLY \ ;, -: ;, ti /-22"—/' 34" * * * * * * * * * * * * FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW SINGLE SIDED SINGLE SIDED DOUBLE SIDED DOUBLE SIDED DOUBLE SIDED FOR SINGLE SIDED UNITS (GONDOLA): FOR SINGLE SIDED UNITS (MULTI- FUNCTION): FOR DOUBLE SIDED UNITS (MULTI- FUNCTION): * - DENOTES ANCHOR LOCATION ANCHOR AT EVERY BAY, FRONT AND BACK. IF UNITS ARE ATTACHED TO WALL, ANCHOR AT EVERY OTHER BAY, FRONT, INTERIOR AND BACK . IF UNITS ARE ANCHOR AT EVERY OTHER BAY, FRONT, INTERIOR AND BACK. (2) ANCHOR PER ANCHOR PLATE. ANCHOR THE FRONT ONLY. (2) ANCHORS PER ANCHOR PLATE. ATTACHED TO WALL ANCHOR THE FRONT ONLY. (2) ANCHORS PER ANCHOR PLATE. GONDOLA / MULTI - FUNCTION ELEVATIONS } CO cc co W � co Lil• t" co z -. U c �g OD o 0 r U) w 0 DESCRIPTION 1 91768 Tel.(909)869 -0989 Fax (909)869 -0981 DRAWN BY: M.V. m LAST REV. BY: REV. DATE: TYPE: MAD. SCALE: N.T.S. DATE cc aaCC IfilkilIC EST. 1985 SEIZMIC ENGINEERING, INC. 161 Atlantic Street Pomona, California 91768 Tel.(909)869 -0989 Fax (909)869 -0981 DRAWN BY: M.V. DATE: 01/21/10 LAST REV. BY: REV. DATE: TYPE: MAD. SCALE: N.T.S. APRV'D BY: SAL E. FATEEN EXPIRES 04 -12 -2010 DESCRIPTION: GONDOLA & MULTI - FUNCT. SHELVING DETAILS DRAWING NUMBER: 10- 0101 -B 14 15 16 17 18 END PANEL (SUPPUED BY CONTRACTOR) POST W/ RETRACTABLE BELT (TRAFFIC CONTROL) METAL BENCH DIRECTORY REGISTRY KIOSK Bogs Departments L.F. L.F. 408 380 384 +4 Candy 75 75 44. -31 Check Lanes 87 87 79 -8 Electronics /Entertainments FAO 630 600 608 -1 Feature Girls 222 286 40 -I 4 554 620 620 +0 Learning f Games Party 1,023 1,017 11120 +3 107 :107 110 -F3 Preschool Seasonal 384 384 384 +0 372 X76 306 +30 Sporting Goods 148 .1141 164 +23 Wheels /Jr Wheels 353 313 326 +12 Gift Shop +0 Baby Gear 587 587 685 -2 Bedding Wall 48 48 48 +0 Infant Bedding Toddler Beds 322 332 330 -2 63 68 +r Commodities 312 .312 305 -7 Infant Care/ HBA / Safety Apparel 380 380 380 4E8 408 408 +0 Furniture 386 336 336 NOTES 1. ALL PERIMETER SALES GONDOLAS ARE 12' -0" HIGH, UNLESS NOTED. LEGEND 3' 0" GONDOLA SECTION ® GUEST HELP CENTER LOCATIONS I PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS ® CALL BOX LOCATIONS FIXTURE SUPPUED BY OTHERS OR EXISTING FIXTURE AREAS TO BE CARPETED CRIB /APPAREL SQ. FT. CRIB APPAREL PROTOTYPE 2,299 1,910 THIS PLAN 2,270 1,967 PRE -SALES RACKING SIZE UN. FT. SIZE UN. FT. 1' -8" 152 5' -O" 240 3' -0" 0 GONDOLA 54 3' -4" 0 RTW 144 4' -O" 996 OTHER 0 2010 58K SSBS CHART SQUARE FOOTAGE COUNTS TRU SALES SQ. FT. BRU SALES SQ. FT. TOTAL SALES SQ. FT. PRE -SALES SQ. FT. AUX. 5Q. FT. (NON SALES/ PRE - SALES) BUILDING SQ. FT. (FOOTPRINT) MEZZANINE SQ. FT. TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. CEILING HEIGHTS AT FRONT = 722' -9" AT REAR , = ±18' -8" PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN 29,351 17,509 46,860 8,041 4,006 58,907 N/A 58,907 28,702 17,566 46,268 8.383 4,209 58,860 N/A 58,860 ON MEZZANINE = t UNDER MEZZANINE= t LINEAR AND CUBIC FIXTURE COUNTS REGISTER COUNTS LINEAR FOOTAGE CUBIC FOOTAGE PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN TRU SALES 4,131 BRU SALES TOTAL SALES APPAREL UNITS PRE - SALES SALES OVERSTOCK PRE -SALES FRONT END REGISTERS = 14 ELECTRONIC REGISTERS = 4 4,077 1,885 1,880 6,016 N/A 1,243 65,839 35,448 33,307 REGISTRY DESK = 1 5,957 N/A 1,586 66,763 36,182 40,330 REFUND REGISTERS = 3 TOTAL REGISTERS = 22 0 289' -6' 99' -6' 190' -0" 37 -11 1/Er 38' -2 7/8' 7 5/8" ELECTRONIC PRE -SALES 5' -11' 10' -0 5/8' L. 5'-81/e RECEIVING A-EA BREAK ROOM VEEN ■11■ 11 I I I I I I I I I I '°• "m .• .• + + + + + + + + + + +� off. =� I �� I �� I �� LID + limit 11-_I + + + + + + + + + +-1 It'll. 1 1 1 17 = I' i 111111111111 9' -5 5/8' (X 8'-6 1/2' 5/8' /wIMli�mi13 NO CI Ergin ION 11 kilsw law as ei 0 ,11M1 =I EMMAMNMI IF: :�1�:�NM ITEM m �:__E.C6J l =1M IF__K:WCkl•__ ri 12' -0" 12' -0 w ®IMEW.AiC�I�IIn kW MS MIN 141w1 kr.ta1111M MAI 'A 5. 7; ' �. ,a *MI IECYJMINMEM I. Mid ifril�ICOM kw NM Oil ing 042•111•11.1% 411 9' -4 1/8 11l s4i sui 6' -4 7/8' '' lea 13' -9 3/8' 5' -2 7/8" �, -1 V J V 113'-43/e 12' -0 1/2' .e 13' -3 7/8" 12' -O 1/r /I MANAGER'S COUNT OFFICE ROOM 129' -7 3/8" 36'-93/8- FROM INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL TO EDGE OF RACETRACK 4 12' -0' AISLE 12' -0' 64' -0" OVfRAI� H1DTH OF LIFT -SIDE CORE AISLE 1 1 12' -0' AISLE 35'-6" FROM EDGE OF RACETRACK TO INTERIOR FACE OF INTERIOR WALL 265' -0 3/8' OVERALL SALES 7 5/T/ 1 1/r ALIGNMENT PLATE 38' -O" 37-111/8- 280' -5 OVERALL WIDTH 0 0 0 FIXTURE PLAN SCALE: 1 /16 " =1' -0" 0 0 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISI(W' b ( 0 -072 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 1 Revisions ARCHITECTURAL KEYED NOTES x No. DESCRIPTION 1 GLAZING 01/11/10 ISSUED 2 WALL / PARTITION 3 FIRE WALL 4 FIRE SHUTTER DOOR 5 ROWNG OVERHEAD DOOR 6 (CONSULTANT AUTOMATIC SUDING DOOR TO VERIFY REQUIRED SIZE) 7 BI -FOLD DOOR (CONSULTANT TO VERIFY REQUIRED SIZE) 8 DUTCH DOOR (INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR) 9 MAN DOOR 10 DOUBLE SWING DOOR 11 IMPACT DOOR 12 ROOF LADDER / HATCH 13 ROOF LEADER / DRAIN 14 UNE OF MEZZANINE ABOVE 15 LIFT, CHUTE, CONVEYOR OR STAIRS 16 CART RAIL 17 SPRINKLER RISER 18 GAS RISER 19 DOMESTIC WATER RISER 20 BALER 21 COMPACTOR 22 GENERATOR 23 TRANSFORMER 24 ELECTRICAL PANELS 25 FLOOR SINK 26 WATER COOLER 0 WOOD PACKAGE KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION (SEE WOOD PACKAGE FOR DETAILS) 1 CPU COUNTER 2 MANAGER'S WORKSTATION 3 COMPUTER CART 4 MOBILE REGISTER CART 5 "R" ZONE SLIDING DOOR 6 DEMO TABLE 7 TV / VCR CABINET 8 STORAGE CABINET 9 RGD PROCESSING COUNTER 10 STORAGE BIN 11 BICYCLE ASSEMBLY COUNTER 12 REFUND / EXCHANGE COUNTERS 13 JUVENILE REGISTRY DESK AND END PANEL 14 BENCH 15 TABLE & CHAIRS Qx FIXTURE PLAN KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION 1 COAT RACK / HOOKS 2 REFRIGERATOR 3 LOCKERS 4 VENDING MACHINES 5 KIDDIE RIDE 6 ICE CREAM COOLER 7 SODA COOLER 8 PALLETS (BELOW RACK) 9 PALLETS (TYP.) 10 ROLLER CONVEYOR 11 OVERHEAD RACKING 12 6" BORDER 11LE (TYP.) 13 END PANEL (SUPPUED BY FIXTURE COMPANY) 14 15 16 17 18 END PANEL (SUPPUED BY CONTRACTOR) POST W/ RETRACTABLE BELT (TRAFFIC CONTROL) METAL BENCH DIRECTORY REGISTRY KIOSK Bogs Departments L.F. L.F. 408 380 384 +4 Candy 75 75 44. -31 Check Lanes 87 87 79 -8 Electronics /Entertainments FAO 630 600 608 -1 Feature Girls 222 286 40 -I 4 554 620 620 +0 Learning f Games Party 1,023 1,017 11120 +3 107 :107 110 -F3 Preschool Seasonal 384 384 384 +0 372 X76 306 +30 Sporting Goods 148 .1141 164 +23 Wheels /Jr Wheels 353 313 326 +12 Gift Shop +0 Baby Gear 587 587 685 -2 Bedding Wall 48 48 48 +0 Infant Bedding Toddler Beds 322 332 330 -2 63 68 +r Commodities 312 .312 305 -7 Infant Care/ HBA / Safety Apparel 380 380 380 4E8 408 408 +0 Furniture 386 336 336 NOTES 1. ALL PERIMETER SALES GONDOLAS ARE 12' -0" HIGH, UNLESS NOTED. LEGEND 3' 0" GONDOLA SECTION ® GUEST HELP CENTER LOCATIONS I PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS ® CALL BOX LOCATIONS FIXTURE SUPPUED BY OTHERS OR EXISTING FIXTURE AREAS TO BE CARPETED CRIB /APPAREL SQ. FT. CRIB APPAREL PROTOTYPE 2,299 1,910 THIS PLAN 2,270 1,967 PRE -SALES RACKING SIZE UN. FT. SIZE UN. FT. 1' -8" 152 5' -O" 240 3' -0" 0 GONDOLA 54 3' -4" 0 RTW 144 4' -O" 996 OTHER 0 2010 58K SSBS CHART SQUARE FOOTAGE COUNTS TRU SALES SQ. FT. BRU SALES SQ. FT. TOTAL SALES SQ. FT. PRE -SALES SQ. FT. AUX. 5Q. FT. (NON SALES/ PRE - SALES) BUILDING SQ. FT. (FOOTPRINT) MEZZANINE SQ. FT. TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. CEILING HEIGHTS AT FRONT = 722' -9" AT REAR , = ±18' -8" PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN 29,351 17,509 46,860 8,041 4,006 58,907 N/A 58,907 28,702 17,566 46,268 8.383 4,209 58,860 N/A 58,860 ON MEZZANINE = t UNDER MEZZANINE= t LINEAR AND CUBIC FIXTURE COUNTS REGISTER COUNTS LINEAR FOOTAGE CUBIC FOOTAGE PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN TRU SALES 4,131 BRU SALES TOTAL SALES APPAREL UNITS PRE - SALES SALES OVERSTOCK PRE -SALES FRONT END REGISTERS = 14 ELECTRONIC REGISTERS = 4 4,077 1,885 1,880 6,016 N/A 1,243 65,839 35,448 33,307 REGISTRY DESK = 1 5,957 N/A 1,586 66,763 36,182 40,330 REFUND REGISTERS = 3 TOTAL REGISTERS = 22 0 289' -6' 99' -6' 190' -0" 37 -11 1/Er 38' -2 7/8' 7 5/8" ELECTRONIC PRE -SALES 5' -11' 10' -0 5/8' L. 5'-81/e RECEIVING A-EA BREAK ROOM VEEN ■11■ 11 I I I I I I I I I I '°• "m .• .• + + + + + + + + + + +� off. =� I �� I �� I �� LID + limit 11-_I + + + + + + + + + +-1 It'll. 1 1 1 17 = I' i 111111111111 9' -5 5/8' (X 8'-6 1/2' 5/8' /wIMli�mi13 NO CI Ergin ION 11 kilsw law as ei 0 ,11M1 =I EMMAMNMI IF: :�1�:�NM ITEM m �:__E.C6J l =1M IF__K:WCkl•__ ri 12' -0" 12' -0 w ®IMEW.AiC�I�IIn kW MS MIN 141w1 kr.ta1111M MAI 'A 5. 7; ' �. ,a *MI IECYJMINMEM I. Mid ifril�ICOM kw NM Oil ing 042•111•11.1% 411 9' -4 1/8 11l s4i sui 6' -4 7/8' '' lea 13' -9 3/8' 5' -2 7/8" �, -1 V J V 113'-43/e 12' -0 1/2' .e 13' -3 7/8" 12' -O 1/r /I MANAGER'S COUNT OFFICE ROOM 129' -7 3/8" 36'-93/8- FROM INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL TO EDGE OF RACETRACK 4 12' -0' AISLE 12' -0' 64' -0" OVfRAI� H1DTH OF LIFT -SIDE CORE AISLE 1 1 12' -0' AISLE 35'-6" FROM EDGE OF RACETRACK TO INTERIOR FACE OF INTERIOR WALL 265' -0 3/8' OVERALL SALES 7 5/T/ 1 1/r ALIGNMENT PLATE 38' -O" 37-111/8- 280' -5 OVERALL WIDTH 0 0 0 FIXTURE PLAN SCALE: 1 /16 " =1' -0" 0 0 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISI(W' b ( 0 -072 RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 1 Revisions No Date Description ■ 01/11/10 ISSUED TO CONSULTANT FOR CD DEVELOPMENT -RM BID DATE: - -- ___ 8002F01 PROJECT NO • CAD NAME. BY: R.M. /T.Q. CHECKED BY: T.Q. DRAWN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: - -- �:� •it'y�F�'�.SIT�c r. S o ` p� .._. r ?1.,., A, '7{+ ` %.., r; vol.' �f XPrRE ' ' ' 1 ToYSgUS BABicsgUS® Store Support Center One Geoffrey Way Wayne, NJ 07470 (973) 617 -3500 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "FT" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "Si" US. Location TU K WI LA WASHINGTON Drawing Title 2010 58K SSBS FIXTURE PLAN Scale I Date 1/11/2010 Sheet No. R L 0 (c E ala It Q. Q _ a.� 1 1® - 0" 0000600. 060.60 0:40006t 00%.666. 0666060 in CD 11 <1 it 1 it ii ( 3 i 6,66630. 706 00046001 fa L J N.... 1 B 30' -0" t6000006 61001,56 \ B 1 ®1 .......... C —34' - 0" 107 C- 30' -0" =am mum maim aims smelts LIFE SAFETY PLAN SCALE = 1/16" = 1-0" LEGEND •F.E. EMERGENCY EXIT LIGHT FIXTURE Wi LED ILLUMINATION AND BATTERY BACK -UP. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. WALL MOUNTED 10LB. 4A6OBC FIRE EXTINGUISHER 2HR— TWO HOUR RATED WALL ASSEMBLY PER DESIGN NO. U905 3HR— THREE HOUR RATED WALL ASSEMBLY PER DESIGN NO. U914 EXIT DISTANCE PATH ID TRAVEL DISTANCE A 239' - 0" B 239' - 0" C 248' - 0" D 232' - 0" U J 1 Q I 9 D- 28' -0' P.M MACS 6000060. COMM 3 16.9j,6k NORTH 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City f Tukwila Ci o • BUILDING DIVISION _ MEANS OF EGRESS ILLUMINATION IBC 1006.1 Illumination required. The means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by . the means of egress is occupied. IBC 1006.2 Illumination level. The means of egress illumination level shall not be Tess than 1 foot-candle at the walking level. IBC 1006.3 Illumination emergency power. The power supply for means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premises' electrical supply. In the event of power supply failure, an emergency electrical system shall automatically illuminate the following areas: 1. Aisles and unenclosed stairways of rooms that require two or more means of egress. 2. Corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways.. 3. Exterior egress components... 4. Interior exit discharge elements... 5. Exterior Iandings...for exit discharge doorways... H�. t' K� RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER l'01007Z CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveaecom 9243 SC DO GLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON 03 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE LIFE SAFETY PLAN SCALE 1/16" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A002 AR/ SC D SUP 1 IR 1 175 S ■ TUK U J 3K 1[C A, 1 AC NTJ AS L3A KWAY � O N Pli NCI Rom L---.J COE REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION J fitIRCt"1ITECTURAL- A -0.I A -1.1 A -2.0 A- 2.1 COVER 81-IEET REFERENCE SITE PLAN DEMO PLAN FLOOR PLAN STIRUCTURAL 5 -1.0 PLANS AND DETAILS J 1 CLJ i\V-7\ DESCRIPTION OF WORK: CONSTRUCT NEW DEMISING WALL, REMOVE EXISTING MEZZANINE, ELEVATOR, STAIRS, AND ALL RELATED STRUCTURE, PRESERVE ELEVATOR AND ALL RELATED COMPONENTS FOR OWNER LOCATION: ZONING: OCCUPANCY: CONSTRUCTION: PROPOSED USE: SQUARE FOOTAGE: SUITE C2 BLDG SQ FT: PARKING: ASSESSORS PARCEL 11501 SOUTI4CENTER PARKWAY M TYPE v8 RETAIL SUITE 200 (FULLY SPRINKLED) UNLIMITED MAIN FLOOR: 20,151 S.F. MEZZANINE: 10,564 SF. SUITE E3 40,020 SUITE C1 23,402 SUITE C2 30,115 SUITED 43,050 TOTAL: 131,181 121 TOTAL STALLS - NO * 262304906100 CHANGE TO BUILDING OR SITE SY 1- =-1 A--- NS • t > . r51.1 'apt PARK PLACE SLOPPING CENTER NO MATERIALS OR PRODUCTS CONTAINING ASBESTOS ARE TO BE UTILIZED IN THIS PROJECT. NO PRODUCTS ARE TO BE UTILIZED IN THIS WORK THAT WILL REQUIRE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 51-1OULD THEY BE REMOVED. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2006 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WIN THESE PLANS 4 PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. IN THE EVENT OF CONFLICTS OR CHANGES BETWEEN DETAILS OR BETWEEN THE PLANS 4 SPECIFICATIONS, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. FINISH FLOOR REF. DATUM EQUALS (100' -0'). REFER TO TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY FOR ACTUAL SITE ELEVATION. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF CONCRETE, MASONRY, FACE OF FRAMING OR COLUMN CENTER LINES UN.O. ALL WOOD IN CONTACT WITH CONCRETE OR MASONRY SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD PRESSURE TREATED WOOD OF ANY SPECIES OR FOUNDATION GRADE CEDAR OR REDWOOD. ALL MARKED BY AN APPROVED TESTING AGENCY. ALL WOOD FORMS USED FOR CONCRETE, IN THE GROUND OR BETWEEN FOUNDATION SILLS 4 THE GROUND SHALL BE REMOVED. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL FIREBLOCKING IN ALL FRAME WALLS AT 10' -0' O.C. 4 WHERE FRAME WALLS PENETRATE CEILING. FIREBLOCK IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC. SEC. 10822. DRAFTSTOPPING IN FLOORS IS NOT REQUIRED IN BUILDINGS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH SPRINKLER SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 9033.1. (IBC 1113.3) DRAFTSTOPPING IN ATTICS IS NOT REQUIRED IN BUILDINGS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 9033.1. (IBC 111.43) PROVIDE A FLOOR OR LANDING NOT GREATER THAN 'id' BELOW THRESHOLD AT ALL DOORWAYS. PROVIDE BLDG. ADDRESS PER OWNERS BUILDING STANDARDS. EGRESS DOORS SHALL BE READILY OPENABLE FROM THE EGRESS SIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. IBC 1008.18.1 HARDWARE. POOR HANDLES, ULLS LATCHES, LOCKS AND OTHER OPERATING DEVICES ON DOORS REQUIRED TO SE ACCESSIBLE BY CHAPTER 11 SHALL NOT REQUIRED RIGHT GRASPING, TIGHT PINCHING OR TWISTING OF [NE WRIST TO OPERATE. 1008183 LOCKS AND LATCHES. LOCKS AND LATCHES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO PREVENT OPERATION OF DOORS WHERE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EXISTS: 2. IN BUILDINGS IN OCCUPANCY GROUPS M, THE MAIN EXTERIOR DOOR OR DOORS ARE PERMITTED TO BE EQUIPPED WITH KEY- OPERATED LOCKING DEVICES FROM THE EGRESS SIDE PROVIDED: 2.1 THE LOCKING DEVICE IS READILY DISTINGUISHABLE AS LOCKED, 22 A READILY VISIBLE DURABLE SIGN IS POSTED ON THE EGRESS SIDE OR ADJACENT TO THE DOOR STATING: THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED. THE SIGN SHALL BE IN LETTERS 1 INCH HIGH ON A CONTRASTING BACKGROUND. ALL ROOMS OR AREAS HAVING AN OCCUPANT LOAD OF 50 (I,500 SF OF RETAIL SPACE) OR MORE SHALL HAVE AT LEAST 2 EXITS TO THE EXTERIOR OR TO AN.EXIT CORRIDOR ( ONE -HOUR CONSTRUCTION). ( I.B.C. 1014.1 ) EXITS SHALL HAVE A MIN. SEPARATION OF ONE 'HALF THE MAX. OVERALL DIAGONAL OF THE BUILDING OR AREA SERVED, MEASURED IN A STRAIGHT LINE BETWEEN EXITS. ( 1$.C. SECTION 10142.1 ) EXCEPTION 2 - WHERE A BUILDING IS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 9033.1 OR W33.12, THE SEPARATION DISTANCE OF THE EXIT DOORS OR EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN ONE - THIRD OF THE LENGTH OF THE MAXIMUM OVERALL DIAGONAL DIMENSION OF THE AREA SERVED. EXPOSED INSULATION MATERIALS INCLUDING FACINGS AND VAPOR BARRIERS, SHALL HA VE A FLAME E SPREAD RATING NOT TO EXCEED 25, AND A SMOKE DENSITY NOT TO EXCEED 450, OR SHALL BE IN SUBSTANTIAL CONTACT WITH THE WALL OR CEILING SURFACE FINISH. (IB.C. SECTION 803) ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEAT IS NOT ALLOWED UNLESS THE WASHINGTON STATE NON - RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE FORM IS REVISED. LIMIT AIR LEAKAGE PER W.S.E.C. SECT. 1314. WHEN THE FLOOR AREA OF 'GROUP B OR GROUP M' OCCUPANCIES EXCEED 1500 SF., TWO BARRIER FREE RESTROOMS WILL BE REQUIRED. 29023.1 EXC. 2 WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS WHEN THE OCCUPANT LOAD EXCEEDS 50 THE DOORS MUST SWING IN THE DIRECTION OF EXIT TRAVEL. IBC 1008.12 1 OFFICE < 101 142 g1_ 0 °r- 950 SQFT. BUILDING SECTION SECTION IDENTIFICATION LOCATED ON SHEET_ WALL SECTION SECTION IDENTIFICATION LOCATED ON SHEET_ DETAIL DETAIL IDENTIFICATION LOCATED ON SHEET INTERIOR ELEVATION ELEVATION IDENTIFICATION LOCATED ON SHEET ROOM SYMBOL ROOM NAME ROOM NUMBER ROOM MATERIAL CODES let No FLOOR/SASE 2nd No WALLS/WAINSCOT 3rd No CEILING CEILING HEIGHT SQUARE FOOTAGE GRID MARKERS LETTERS IN ONE DIRECTION NUMBERS IN THE OTHER DOOR SYMBOL DOOR NUMBER WALL SYMBOL WALL IDENTIFICATION WINDOW SYMBOL WINDOW IDENTIFICATION MATCI -I LINE SHADED PORTION IS THE SIDE CONSIDERED �11 1 NORTH ARROW ELEVATION MARKER FINISH GRADE ELEVATION TOP OF CURB TOP OF PAVEMENT CENTER LINE PROPERTY LINE CENTER LINE OF STREAM NEW CONTOUR / / EXISTING CONTOUR REVISION CLOUD IDENTIFYING NUMBER 1.10.060 L • AB. ACOUS. AFF. AGGR ALUM. ANOD. APPROX. ARCH. ASPH. SD. BLDG. BLK BLK'G. BM. SOT. S.U.R. CAB. C.B. GEM. CH. G.J. CLG. CLR C.O. COL. CONC. CON N. CONSTR. CONT. C.T. GTR CTSK DBL. DEPT. DET. DIA. DIM. DN. DR D.S. DWG. E. EA. E.IF.S. E.J. EL. ELEC. ELEV. ENCL. E.P. AND ANGLE AT CENTERL INE DIAMETER OR ROUND PERPENDICULAR POUND OR NUMBER ANCHOR BOLT ACOUSTICAL ABOVE FINISH FLR AGGREGATE ALUMINUM ANODIZED APPROXIMATE ARCHITECTURAL ASPHALT BOARD BUILDING BLOCK BLOCKING BEAM BOTTOM BUILT UP ROOF CABINET CATCH BASIN CEMENT CHANNEL CONTROL JOINT CEILING CLEAR CLEAN OUT COLUMN CONCRETE CONNECTION CONSTRUCT ION CONTINUOUS CERAMIC TILE CENTER COUNTER SUNK DOUBLE DEPARTMENT PETAL DIAMETER D IMENSION DOWN DOOR DOWNSPOUT DRAWING EAST EACH EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR ENCLOSURE ELECTRICAL PANEL EQ. EQUIP. EXIST. EXPO. EXT. F.O.I.C. F.D. F.E. F.H. FIN. FLASH. FLR FLUOR. FOUND. FRIG. FT. FTC. PURR. GA. GALV. GC GL.. GNP. GR GP. G.W.S. GYP. HDWR HDCP. HDWD. H.B. H.C. WM. HORIL HR HT. INST. INSUL. INT. LAM. L8. LOC. MAIL. MAX. MFR M.H. MECH. MIN. MISC. MTD. MTL. N. N.I.C. NO. N.T.S. EQUAL EQUIPMENT EXISTING EXPOSED EXTERIOR FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY CONT'R FLOOR DRAIN FIRE EXTING- UISHER FIRE HYDRANT FINISH FLASHING FLOOR FLUORESCENT FOUNDATION FRAMING FOOT OR FEET FOOTING FURRING GAUGE GALVANIZED GENERAL CONTRACTOR GLASS GROUND GRADE GROUP GYPSUM WALL BOARD GYPSUM HARDWARE HAND 'CAP HARDWOOD HOSE BIBB HOLLOW CORE HOLLOW METAL HORIZONTAL HOUR HEIGHT INSTALLATION INSULATION INTERIOR LAMINATED POUND LOCATION MATERIAL MAXIMUM MANUFACTURER MANHOLE MECHANICAL MINIMUM MISCELLANEOUS MOUNTED METAL NORTH NOT IN CONTRACT NUMBER NOT TO SCALE O.C. 0/ OPP. PL. PLYWD. P.P. PLAN R. R.D. REC. REF. RE INF. REM,. RM. S. S.G. SCHED. BHT. 5HT'G. SIM. SPEC. SQ. STD. STL. STOR STRUC. SSUSP. SVC. SYM. S/W T. T.G. TEL. THK T.O.P. T.P. T.W. TYP. U.B.C. UNF. U.ON. VERT. W. W/ WD. WOW. W/0 W.P. W.R. WSCT. WT. ON CENTER OVER OPPOSITE PLATE PLYWOOD POWER POLE PLASTIC LAMINATE RADIUS OR RISER ROOF DRAIN RECOMMENDED REFERENCE REINFORCED REQUIRED ROOM SOUTH SOLID CORE SCHEDULE 5HEET 5HEATH ING SIMILAR SPECIFICATIONS SQUARE STANDARD STEEL STORAGE STRUCTURAL SUSPENDED STAIN AND VARNISH SERVICE SYMMETRICAL SIDEWALK TREAD TOP OF CURB TELEPHONE TONGUE AND GROOVE THICK TOP OF PLATE TOP OF PAVEMENT TOP OF WALL TYPICAL UNIFORM SUILDING CODE UNFINISHED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VERTICAL WEST WITH WOOD WINDOW WITHOUT WATERPROOF WATER RESISTANT WAINSCOT WEIGHT CONSU J LANDLORD: CLPF - TUKWILA LP C/O J5I4 PROPERTIES 10655 NE 4TH ST. SUITE 300 BELLEVUE, WA 98004 PH. (206) 859 -4500 FAX (206) 859 -4501 E -MAIL JOHNCmJSHPROPERTIE5.COM CONTACT: JOHN CHELICO ARCHITECT / PLANNER: PARTNERS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN GROUP 16398 NE 85TH ST, SUITE 10I REDMOND, WA 98052 PH: (425) 636 -8006 FAX: (425) 289 -5801 E -MAIL: ERICGPADGI.COM CONTACT: ERIC KOCH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER CT ENGINEERING 180 NICKERSON STREET SUITE 302 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98109 PH: (206) 285 -4512 FAX: (206) 285 -0618 E -MAIL: CMORRISmCTENGINEERING.COM CONTACT: CHUCK MORRIS � _ l THAT PORTION OF THE SOUTHEAST QUARTER OF THE SOUTHEAST QUARTER OF SECTION 26, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST, WM. AND OF THE NORTHEAST QUARTER OF THE NORTHWEST QUARTER OF SECTION 35, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST, WM. IN KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON, DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: BEC-INING.AT THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SAID NORTHEAST QUARTER OF THE NORTHWEST QUARTER: THENCE NOiyTH 81'45'51' WEST 481.05 FEET TO THE WEST MARGIN OF SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY: THENCE SOUTH 11'59'33' EAST 4121 FEET: THENCE NORTH 81'45'51' WEST 210 FEET TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING: THENCE CONTINUING NORTH 81'45'51' WEST an FEET: THENCE SOUTH 42'30'21' WEST 53151 FEET TO A POINT ON A LINE 19.5 FEET SOUTHWESTERLY OF CENTERLINE OF 19 FOOT WIDE RAILROAD EASEMENT: THENCE NORTHERLY ALONG A LINE WHICH IS CONCENTRIC AND PARALLEL WITH SAID CENTERLINE ALONG A CURVE TO THE RIGHT OF THE CENTER OF WHICH BEARS NORTH 48'31'03' EAST HAVING A RADIUS OF 429.19 FEET AN ARC DISTANCE OF 433.55 FEET THROUGH A CENTRAL ANGLE OP 51'41'52': THENCE CONTINUING ALONG SAID PARALLEL LINE NORTH 16'18'55' EAST 50.03 FEET TO THE SOUTH LINE OF SAID SECTION 26: THENCE SOUTH 81'45151' EAST 20.01 FEET TO THE CENTERLINE OF AN EXISTING RAILROAD EASEMENT: THENCE NORTH 16'18'55' EAST 164.16 FEET: THENCE ALONG A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 661.14 FEET AN ARC DISTANCE OF 18413 FEET THROUGH A CENTRAL ANGLE OF I5'59140': THENCE NORTH 00'19'15' EAST 528.93 FEET: THENCE CONTINUING ALONG SAID CENTERLINE ON A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 41028 FEET AND ARC DISTANCE OF23928 FEET THROUGH A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 33'24154': THENCE SOUTH 88'51'25' EAST 34.64 FEET: THENCE SOUTH 01'08'35' WEST 198.66 FEET: THENCE NORTH 86'40103' EAST 214.13 FEET TO THE WEST MARGIN OF SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY: THENCE SOUTHERLY ALONG SAID WEST MARGIN ON CURVE TO THE LEFT OF THE CENTER OF WHICH BEARS NORTH 85'13'08' EAST HAVING A RADIUS OF 99131 FEET AN ARC DISTANCE OF 40 FEET THROUGH A CENTER ANGLE OP 2'18'42' THENCE SOUTH 85'12'11' WEST 182 FEET: THENCE SOUTH 11'59'33' EAST 261.61 FEET: THENCE SOUTH 88'25'36' EAST 115.11 FEET: THENCE NORTH 11'59'33' WEST 91.14 FEET: THENCE SOUTH 88'25'36' EAST 66.85 FEET TO THE WEST MARGIN OF SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY: THENCE SOUTH 11'59'33' EAST 531.16 FEET: THENCE NORTH 81'45'51' WEST 210 FEET: THENCE SOUTH 11'59'33' EAST 23454 FEET TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING: LESS PORTION WITHIN UNION PACIFIC RAILROAD EASEMENT: ALSO KNOWN AS PARCEL B OF CITY OF TUKUJILLA BOUNDARY LINE ADJUSTMENT NO. 8 -19 RECORDED UNDER KING COUNTY.. RECORDING NO. 1908230152 SITUATE IN KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 2150 North 107th St. Suite 501 Seattle, WA 98133 Phone: 206 -361 -1358 Fax: 206-361-1467 DESCRIPTION 1 - PERMIT SUBMITTAL ECT TO SUILDINC DEPARTMENT APPROVAL 1 0 z 0 1- 0 Q 1 0 1 v/ z 0 0 5. Nll 1L 0 I- w o a �0 a-) LAI cc to Ca o DRAWN: EEK CHECK: EEK JOB NO: 10 -014 it ill 0 F. I- 5 tu3 d) 0-Z Z 0 0 ly i6 Ucp .([ u_ 1- 2 w 0 U 2 Um I-0 O_1 SHEET: 4-0.1 OF: - SHEETS r 1t N Co .— v -- -- 210' -0' — _ — 15I -0' 21' -0' 421 -0' 42' -0' CD Z 0 F Q Q 4 Q z 1 co z 0 al if 0 I_ 421 -0' 421 -0' : ,, N 1 --r 0 \\\w •h\•�.\\ �\\w\ \w�.. :\:\ •(`‘ \ \ . \ ' \ •\w mmw\w\ww\w..w . \ SHEARWALL TO AIN INSTALL TEMPORARY WALL TO PROTECT EXISTING DOORS DURING CONSTRUCTION AND PREVENT STAFF FROM PASSING THROUGH INTO THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. PROVIDE 6' STUDS WITH 5/8' GWS BOTH SIDES AND 6' BATT INSULATION FOR SOUND REDUCTION. EXTEND MIN. 12' HIGHER THAN DOORS. I FILL IN ELEVATOR SHAFT WITH COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL. DOWELL NEW 4' CONCRETE SLAB INTO EXISTING SLAB WITH *4 BAR AT 24' O.G. EPDXY INTO EXISTING SLAB PER STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS. CONCRETE SLAB W/ WOVEN WIRE MESH OVER 4' CRUSHED AGGREGATE 1 EXISTING SPRINKLER RISER ROOM NO WORK N TI-115 AREA. EXISTING VESTIBULE TO REMAIN - PROTECT DURING ALL DEMOLITION WORK CONSTRUCT DEMISING WALL USING A MINIMUM 6' - 16 GA METAL STUDS g 16' O.G. AND .4 MINIMUM OF 5/8' FIRE RESISTANT G.W.B. AT EACH SIDE TO HE UNDERSIDE OF METAL DECK TO GIVE A MINIMUM OF 1 HOUR FIRE RATING AND TO MEET ALL STATE, FIEDERAL AND LOCAL CODES. TOP FRAMING TRACK SHALL CONSIST OF A SLIP JOINT TO ALOOW FOR BUILDING MOVEMENT. NO EXPOSED WALL BRACING OR FRAMING 514ALL BE PERMITTED. FULL HEIGHT ETAL SECURITY MESH BY AMIGO SECURITY MESH: MODEL ASM .15 -13F OR EQUAL SHALL BE INSTALLED IRECTLY TO THE FRAMING ON THE SOUTH SIDE UNDER THE GJWB. THE WALL SHALL BE FULLY INSULA D, TAPED, FLOATED AND SANDED SMOOTH READY FOR PAINT TO FULL WALL HEIGHT. ALL DRYWALLS ALL BE CUT IN. TAPED 4 FINISHED AROUND ALL ROOF FRAMING, DECK FLUTES AND ANY REQUIRED TOP EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE CLEANLY SEALED WITH A FLEXIBLE 100% SILICONE SEALANT THAT CAN BE PAINTED 50 THAT THERE ARE NO OPENINGS TO ADJACENT TENANT SPACE. FIRE TAPE AND CAULK ALL PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED. 11 ROOF STRUCTURE 2 1/2 ' METAL STUDS 5/8' FIRE RESISTANT G.WB. 5/8' FIRE RESISTANT G.W.B. SOUTH FUTURE TENANT 16' X CONT. X 16 GA. BREAK METAL SLIP CONNECTION SECURITY MESH ON SOUTH SIDE 6' 16 GA METAL STUD FRAMING 16' 0.C. (TYP.) PARALLEL TO JOISTS ul 11 II 1 i- NOTE: . DO NOT FASTEN PARTITION WALL FRAMING R . O FINISH TO SLIP CONNECTION. MAINTAIN ROOF FRM,G- 2 1/2 ' MIN. FOR DEFLECTION. ,i SEE STRUCT. RE USE SOLID CORE 3' 1' DOOR WITH LEVER HANDLE AND PAINTED HOLLOW METAL FRAME FROM MEZZANINE INTO SALES / SACK ROOMS. SELECT THE BEST DOOR AVAILABLE. i SECURITY MESH ON SOUTH SIDE SOUTH FUTURE TENANT 5/8' FIRE RESISTANT G.W.B. SECURITY MESH ON SOUTH SIDE 4' X6'X16GA. BREAK METAL SLIP CONNECTION NORTH NEW K4G TENANT PEFRPEND ICULAiz TO JOISTS PARTITION TO IBOTTOM OF STRUCTURE SCALE L41 X 6' X 16 GA. BREAK METAL SLIP CONNECTION SOUTH FUTURE TENANT BOTTOM OF DECK 5/8' FIRE RESISTANT G.W.B. NORTH NEW KtG TENANT NOTE: SEE WALL DESCRIPTION ON 1 /A -2.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION NOTE: THIS TENANT SPACE WILL REMAIN OPEN DURING ALL DEMOLITION WORK - COORDINATE ANY WORK IN K4G SPACE N ADVANCE WITH STORE MANAGEMENT FIRE TAPE ONLY THE SOUTH SIDE OF NEW WALL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1 bto RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 2150 North 107th St. Suite 501 Seattle, WA 98133 Phone: 206. 361.1358 Fax: 206-361-1467 DESCRIPTION E Ill it 0. ECT TO BUILDING DEPARTMENT APPROVAL • CD Z 0 F Q Q 4 Q z 1 co z 0 al if 0 I_ 1- o : ,, N Ircans V ill 7 w 5 00 I i DRAWN: MM CHECK: EEK JOB NO: 10 -014 tY 0 u) 0_ nct i-- � o_z 01,1110 z z 0 1: 1 4 0_ 1-6-1,7) -� IL -at e 0 E 1— 2 LI- SHEET: ,4 -2.1 OF: — SHEETS 1' 1 GENERAL NOTES A. PRIOR TO ANY DEMOLITION, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND REPORT TO ARCHITECT ANY AS -BUILT DISCREPANCIES WHICH MAY REQUIRE REDESIGN OR RE- ENGINEERING FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. B. DEMOLITION PLAN SHOWS APPROXIMATE LAYOUT OF EXISTING BUILDING & IS NOT INTENDED TO REPRESENT "AS- BUILT" CONDITIONS. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VISIT SITE & OTHERWISE BECOME FAMILIAR W/ ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS WHEN BIDDING THE WORK. C. PRIOR TO ANY DEMOLITION WORK, CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL WORK LOCATED IN THE TENANT SPACE WHICH AFFECTS THE ADJACENT TENANT SPACES. THE LANDLORD & ADJACENT TENANTS MUST BE NOTIFIED PRIOR TO SHUTDOWN OF ANY SHARED MECHANICAL, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. D. WALLS, PARTITIONS, DOORS, FRAMES & OTHER ITEMS TO BE REMOVED ARE SHOWN DASHED. SERVICES WITHIN WALLS & PARTITIONS SHALL ALSO BE REMOVED. E. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SHOWN TO REMAIN SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. DAMAGE TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SHOWN TO REMAIN SHALL BE RESTORED TO MATCH PRE - DAMAGED CONDITION. F. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY SHORING, BRACING & SUPPORT TO PREVENT MOVEMENT, SETTLEMENT, OR COLLAPSE OF STRUCTURE OR ELEMENT TO BE DEMOLISHED, & ADJACENT STRUCTURE OR ELEMENT SHOWN TO REMAIN. SHORING AND BRACING SHALL BE DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR'S PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE APPLICABLE JURISDICTION. G. PROVIDE TEMPORARY WEATHER PROTECTION & SECURITY DEVICES DURING INTERVAL BETWEEN DEMOLITION & REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ON EXTERIOR SURFACES & INSTALLATION OF NEW CONSTRUCTION TO INSURE THAT NO WATER LEAKAGE OR DAMAGE OCCURS TO STRUCTURE OR TO INTERIOR AREA OF EXISTING BUILDING. H. EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS, MASONRY WALLS & EXISTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING SYSTEMS SHOWN TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE CLEANLY SAWCUT FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. J. K. L. M. N. WHERE FINISHES ARE SHOWN TO BE REMOVED FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, REPAIR & PATCH REMAINING SUBSTRATE & PREPARE FOR NEW FINISH. REPAIR & PATCH ALL REMAINING SUBSTRATES THAT WERE ORIGINALLY CONCEALED BY EXISTING FINISHES, BUT WILL NOW BE EXPOSED IN THE NEW CONSTRUCTION. REMOVE ALL EXISTING OBSOLETE MISCELLANEOUS NON- LOADBEARING ITEMS IN THEIR ENTIRETY THROUGHOUT TENANT SPACE ABOVE & BELOW EXISTING CEILINGS, INCLUDING (BUT NOT LIMITED TO) DRYWALL PARTITIONS, DOORS, FRAMES, SOFFITS, STUDS, FURRING, INSULATION, CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, ETC., PARTICULARLY WHERE EXISTING ITEMS WILL INTERFERE W/ THE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW CONSTRUCTION, OR WHERE EXISTING ITEMS WILL BE EXPOSED IN THE NEW CONSTRUCTION, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ELSEWHERE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO REMAIN. REPAIR & PATCH ALL SURFACES TO REMAIN, W/ MATERIALS MATCHING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE W/ NEW CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO ALL OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION WORK. PATCH & RESTORE CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DISCIPLINE CONSTRUCTION ITEMS. VERIFY AND COORDINATE ALL THE OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR THIS WORK. REFER TO PLANS FOR CUTTING & PATCHING. PATCH TO MATCH ADJACENT CONDITIONS IN ALL DISTURBED AREAS. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE SELECT DEMOLITION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, CONTROLS AND /OR UTILITIES WITH THE OTHER DISCIPLINES REPRESENTED IN THIS SET OF DOCUMENTS. NO OVER - CUTTING WILL BE ALLOWED BEYOND THE NOTED HOLE SIZE FOR NEW OPENINGS IN EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR, MASONRY WALLS, PARTITIONS, OR ROOF, UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT OR TRU /BRU PM. CUTTING THROUGH EXISTING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IS NOT PERMITTED UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED. CONTACT THE ARCHITECT SHOULD DISCREPANCIES OCCUR. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING ALL PERMITS AND PAYING PERMIT FEES INCLUDING BUILDING PERMIT. TRU /BRU WILL REIMBURSE GC FOR MAIN BUILDING PERMIT. i — i 2 r 3 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 10 15 20 22 5 3 6 ) i•-1 19 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 8 ! e i.e City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION u-. DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE = 1 /1 6" = 1' -0" NORTH 1 2 3 4 7 8 10 15 20 22 j.) Code Note ALL LOOSE WIRING NOT IN CONDUIT THAT WILL BE EXPOSED IN EXPANDED SALES AREA SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AND REMOVED OR RELOCATED. IF REQUIRED TO REMAIN, WIRING SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND PAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING CEILING. (VERIFY W/ BRU CPM) REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUIT & JUNCTION BOXES. EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES TO BE REMOVED COMPLETE. SCRAPE AND /OR GRIND FLOORS AS REQUIRED TO REMOVE ADHESIVES OR REMAINING SUBSTRATES. PREPARE ALL FLOOR SURFACES TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. REMOVE & DISPOSE OF EXISTING CHECKOUTS /SERVICE COUNTER. PATCH FLOOR TO MATCH EXISTING. TOILET ROOMS TO BE REMOVED COMPLETE, INCLUDING: ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES, TOILET PARTITIONS, MIRRORS, SINKS, COUNTERTOPS, & CERAMIC TILE (FLOOR & WALLS). CAP OFF EXISTING PLUMBING LINES AS REQUIRED. SAWCUT & REMOVE EXISTING CONC. SLAB AS REQ'D. FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SANITARY LINES. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION. REMOVE ALL EXISTING MILLWORK, CASEWORK AND SHELVING INCLUDING ALL SUPPORT BRACKETS, ETC. REMOVE EXISTING COLUMN ENCLOSURES, (INCLUDING GYP. BD. SLAT WALL, FRAMING, ETC.) AND CLEAN & PREPARE EXISTING SALES FLOOR COLUMNS TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. REMOVE ALL CEILING SYSTEMS COMPLETE, INCLUDING LIGHT FIXTURES, PADS, SPEAKERS, DIFFUSERS, EMERGENCY LIGHTING, ETC. (LIGHT FIXTURES CAN REMAIN FOR TEMPORARY LIGHTING IF CONTRACTOR CHOOSES TO USE THESE FIXTURES.) REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND ALL UTILITIES. CAP OFF EXISTING PLUMBING LINES AS NECESSARY. 10 REFER TO FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS FOR REQ'D WORK. 11 EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR NEW HARDWARE. 12 SAWCUT CONCRETE WALL FOR NEW DOOR OPENINGS AS SHOWN. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 13 REMOVE EXISTING H.M. DOOR FRAME AND UTILITIES COMPLETE. REFER TO PLANS FOR INFILL. 14 REMOVE EXISTING PARTITIONS AND /OR DOORS, FRAMES AND UTILITIES, COMPLETE. TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 15 REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 16 REMOVE EXISTING ALUM. AND GLASS DOOR AND /OR STOREFRONT SYSTEM COMPLETE AND PREPARE OPENING FOR NEW SYSTEM. 17 REMOVE EXISTING VESTIBULE, INCLUDING DOORS, STOREFRONT SYSTEM, FLOORING, CEILING, ETC. 18 REMOVE STUD WALL ABOVE STOREFRONT. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 19 SAWCUT OPENING IN EXISITNG SHEAR WALL AS SHOWN. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 20 CLEAN AND PREPARE EXISTING PERIMETER WALLS FOR NEW FINISHES. 21 REMOVE EXISTING COUNTERTOP BASE CABINETS & SINK. SAW CUT & REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SANITARY LINES. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 22 REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 23 REMOVE EXISTING STUD DEMISING WALL. COORDINATE TIMING W/ TRU -PM. 24 REMOVE EXISTING EGRESS DOOR, STAIR, SLAB, WALLS, ETC. INFILL EXISTING OPENING AS INDICATED IN PLANS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 25 REMOVE EXISTING CANOPY COLUMNS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 26 REMOVE EXISTING TILT -UP CONC. WALL (@ CANOPY). REFER TO DEMO. ELEVATION & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 27 REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING CONC. SLAB AS SHOWN. REFER TO DETAIL 6/A302 & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 28 REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM (SHADED AREA) FOR ATTACHMENT OF NEW JOIST. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS. tno-O7 2- RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER GUNS I K. UUU & KEVISIUNS ' NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 REGISTERED f ECT WU R L STATE OF WASHINGTON dl - (° • Ca c\--, / ,,_ * c_,\ , /,\ , , _ ,.____:„ 1r, ___ rte, __ C r_ :) -� 1I!1• IR STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE 1/16" = 1' —Q" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. D1 01 /\Rj SYMBOLLEGEND GENERAL NOTES ES PARTITION TYPES FIXTURE ALIGN. PLATE 2. 6. 7. 8. 10. 11. BUILDING SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE & LOCAL CODES. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION & ORIENTATION OF ALL COLUMNS. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, PLYWOOD SHEATHING, FLOORING, ETC. SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT. (REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS) FOR OWNER SUPPLIED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS, REFER TO OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM LIST ON COVER SHEET. REFER TO FIXTURE PLAN "Fi" FOR LOCATION OF ALL RXTURE ICONS. REFER TO FINISH PLAN (A103) & FINISH SCHEDULES (A501) FOR ALL FINISHES. ALL MILLWORK TO BE COORDINATED W/ FIXTURE PLAN "Fi" & OWNER. PROVIDE TACTILE EXIT SIGNAGE AT LATCH SIDE OF EACH EXIT 000R (TYP.). SEE DETAIL 1O/A4O2. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CUTTING WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE AT END OF FIXTURE AS REQUIRED FOLLOWING FIXTURE INSTALLATION. TYPICAL. (REFER TO F1). GONDOLA WALL PLATE SHALL NOT EXTEND PAST EDGE OF GONDOLA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALIGNMENT PLATES AT ALL WALL MOUNTED STORE FIXTURE AT HEIGHTS AS INDICATED IN PLAN AND ON FIXTURE PLAN (Fi). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WOOD CLOSURES AT ALL EXPOSED FIXTURE RUNS SEE FLOOR PLAN & FIXTURE PLAN (F1). 600S162-3 STL STUDS @16"00.NV5/8" GYP. BD. NVP.AS NOTED BELOW EACH SIDE, TO EXTEND FULL HEIGHT OF STUD (U.O.N.). EXTEND STL. STUDS TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK PER "STUD WALL @ DECK" DETAILS (BRACE @48^ 0.0.). (IN AREAS W/ LAY-IN CEILINGS EXTEND GYP. BD. TO 6" ABOVE CEILING.) (U.O.N.) 1'40" VERIFY mVPLAN /� " 7 7/8" 1' 8OOS1G2-%3STL STUDS @18^Dl�VW5/8^ GYP. BD. AS NOTED DE, TO EXTEND FULL HEIGHT OF STUD &B8^ PLYWOOD SHEATHING, TO12'-O^&F.FON PRE- SALES G|DE. EXTEND PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK PER "STUD WALL @ DECK" DETAILS ACE @ 48" O.Cj. (IN AREAS VV/ LAY-IN CEILINGS EXTEND GYP. BD. TO8^ ABOVE CEILING.) (U.O.N.) 1 3G2S1G2-33GTL STUDS @18^O.C.TO UNDERSIDE DF ROOF DECK, VNB8^VV.P. GYP. BOARD ON BOTH SIDES, (TO 8^ ABOVE CEILING @ SUSPENDED CEILING S W N831/2''BATT INSULATION. BRACE STUDS TO ROOF DECK AS REQUIRED. STAGGER STUDS SO ONE (1) PARTITION'S STUDS DO NOT ALIGN WITH THE OPPOSITE PARTITON. PARTITION N VIEWS METAL ROOF DECK 18 GA. DEFLECTION TRACK NV21/2" MIN. FLANGE. (DO NOT ANCHOR STUD WALL TO TOP DEFLECTION TRACK- TYP.) RUNNER TRACK ANCHOR TO MTL. STUDS- TYP. SEE PARTIT!ON TYPES FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION 25OS182-33STL STUDS @1GrOl� HOR!Z. ATTACHED TO MASONRY WALL N85/D'' GYP. BOARD P. AS NOTED BELOW) AND 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION. EXTEND PARTITION TO 6" ABOVE FILL VOIDS W/ SAFING INSULATION & FIRE CAULK @ ALLF|RER/TEDVVALLS - TYR (VVH#RC/PV12O'14@ 2 HOUR RATED WALL) (VVH#R{%PVG0_O4@ 1 HOUR RATED WALL) STL STUDS g16''O.C. (SEE PARTITION TYPES FOR SIZE) 5/O'' GYP. BD. (DO NOT ANCHOR GYP. BD. TO TOP RUNNER TRACK - TYP DE TYPE ^X'' GYP. BD. @ ALL FIRE RATED WALLS. STUD WALL �� PERPENDICULAR TO ������ ��0 ��� ��/��� �� �����N���N������ �v� ����� PARTITION DETAILS 2 PARTITION TYPES & DETAILS A101 SCALE = 1/2"= 1'-0" 7 1/4" ^ SAME AS "C" ONLY (WP. AS NOTED BELOW EACH SIDE OF STUDS W/ /2" BATT INSULATION. (EXTEND PARTITION T WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN. ATTACH TO HORIZ. STUD JOISTS W/ (2)#12 SCREWS @4�O 0.0. (MAX 608S162-33STL STUDS @1G^O]0. NV50^GYP. . AS NOTED BELOW) ON EA. SIDE OF STUDS W/ 3-1/2^BAJT. INSULATION. (EXTEND PARTITION 6" ABOVE CEILING U.0.N.) BRACE AS REQUIRED. MTL. ROOF DECK 18 GA. DEFLECTION TRACK WI 2 1/2" MIN. FLANGE. (DO NOT ANCHOR STUD WALL TO TOP DEFLECTION TRACK'TYPj RUNNER TRACK ANCHOR TO MTL. STUDS- TYP. SEE PARTITION TYPE FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION 1G2S1G2-33STL STUDS @18^Ol� ATTACHED TO MASONRY WAL W/ 50^ GYP. BD. EXTEND PARTITION FROM TOP OF GONDOLA PLATE TO ROOF STEEL ABOVE. SEE DETS. 11 & 12/A406 FILL VOIDS W/ FIRE SAFING INSULATION & FIRE CAULK @ ALL FIRE RATED WALLS- TYP. (VVH#RC/PV12O'14@ 2 HOUR RATED WALL (VVH#R[JPVGO'O4@ 1 HOUR RATED WALL) STL STUDS @1G''O.C. (SEE PARTITION TYPES FOR SIZE) 5/8^ GYP. BD. (DO NOT ANCHOR GYP. BD. TO TOP RUNNER TRA0K' TYPjPROV|DETYPE''X''8YP.BD. @ ALL FIRE RATED WALLS. STUD WALL x�� PARALLEL ���� ��Q����r "�U "�U� ������ �� TO DECK NOTE: 1. REFER TD DRAWINGS AJO3./4K}3.A404 A405, A407, & A501 FOR ELEVATIONS, SCHEDULES OF FINISHES & DETAILS OF WAINSCOT PANELS. 2. PROVIDE WATER (WP) PROOF GYP. BD. IN RESTROOMS, JANT0R'S CLOSET, BEHIND WATER COOLERS, & BREAK ROOM. 3. GYP. BD. TO BE HELD 1/2" ABOVE CONC. SLAB. 3 EXTERIOR MASONRY WALL NOTE "C" � � � / � 7 � 7 � 4' - 8" +/- (SEE NOTE "B ") NOTE A: SPACE ENVELOPE FOR SPRINKLER RISER, DOMESTIC RISER, GAS RISER, GAS METER, AND FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION EITHER SEPARATELY OR IN COMBINED LOCATIONS, COMPLETE wI VALVING, PIPING AND ALL RELATED ACCESSORIES. (TYPICAL) NOTE C: PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SIDE BOLLARDS WHEN CLEARANCE TO THE WALL EXCEEDS 30" FROM CORNER BOLLARDS. CORNER BOLLARDS ARE NOT DELETED WHEN SIDE BOLLARDS ARE REQUIRED. NOTE B: CONTRACTOR SHALL 000RDINATE PLACEMENT OF BOLLARDS WITH; FIRE PROTECT!ON CONTRACTOR, PLUMBING CONTRACTOR, HEATING AND NC CONTRACTOR, TO INSURE AMPLE ACCESS TO RISER VALVING, ACCESSORIES, AND TRIM FOR OPERATION, REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, AND REPLACEMENT OF ALL COMPONENTS FOR EACH RISER ASSEMBLY. (TYPICAL AT EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR SIDE OF EXTERIOR WALL) QU LSPAC|NGOFBOLLARDS8HALLBE PROVIDED UNLESS REQUIREMENTS OF THE ABOVE MENT0NED CONTRACTORS CANNOT BE MET. MINIMUM NUMBER OF BOLLARDS AS REQUIRED, TWO (2). DETAIL OF P BOLLARD P A EM EN Al 01 SCALE = 1/2"=1'-0" CONCRETE TO BE ROUNDED FOR PROPER WATER RUN OFF 4^OR6^DIA. STEEL PIPE FILLED W/CONC. & EMBEDDED IN CONC. BASE PAINT: OSHA YELLOW BITUMINOUS JOINT AROUND PIPE TOP OFSLAB OR ASPHALT CONCRETE BASE EQ / EQ � 1''er � * � ' — NOTE: DRILL OR DIG ROUND HOLE. CONC. FORMS ARE NOT REQ'D NOTE: ALL EXTERIOR BOLLARDS 6" DIA. ALL INTERIOR BOLLARDS 4" DIA. NOTE: BOLLARDS REQUIRED AT BLDG. CORNERS, FIRE HYDRANTS, WATER METER, GAS METER, SPRINKLER RISER, TRANSFORMER, & ALL UTILITIES AT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS BOTH INTERIOR & EXTERIOR. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH ALL UTIUTIES AND OWNER. DETAIL g TYPICAL PK PE BOLLARD G AR SCALE = 3/8'= 1'-0" REFER TO DETAIL 4/A302 FOR INFILL (SIM.) JANITOR'S 114 MOTHER'S ROOM 115 117 WOMEN'S ROOM 116 -v 42' - 0" (V.I.F.) ELECTRONICS PRE-SALES 121 CLOSET 109 � ' TRAINING | '' _ ''OO-' | ^ 108 A406 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE (011�8"&FF (TYP.) & FLOOR SEE DETAIL 136A408 BIKE ASSEMBLY COUNTER . , NEW 8" THICH CONC. WALL ADJACENT TO EXIST. SHEAR WALL SEE STRUCT. DWGS. RECEIVING 120 4" DIA. BOLLARDS SEE RGD COUNTER DETAIL 8/A406 (SIM) ° SEE NOTE #8 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE @11'-8^A`FF(TYP.)& FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 13/A406 PROVUJE FULL HEIGHT 5/8" PLYWOOD TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK AND WIDTH OF IMPACT OOOREQ8JIEQD|BME0T WOOD FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 13/A406 ( C. .!•"'•�`� 42' - 6" (V.I.F.) REFER TO DETAIL 4/A302 FOR INFILL ' { /pROVDEVERTCAL2x@EXPQSED END OF FIXTURES (TYP.) I SEE DETAIL 18/A406 • TYP. @ Al SALES AREA COLUMNS `� ENTERTAINMENT COUNTER REFER TO DETAIL 4/A302 FOR INFILL (SIM.) MANAGER'S | PRE-SALES WORKSTATION 119 16'_8 3/4. r WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE @ 11�8" A.FF FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 13/A406 ' STEEL GO'NDOLA PLATE _ SEE DETAIL 14/A406 m { BABYREGISTRY& SPECIAL ORDER DESK _ ENTRY- VESTIBULE E WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE g 11�O^A.F.F(T`/Pj&FLOOR. I SEE DETAIL 13/A406 Fr1 02 SALES AREA 101 NOTE: FOR FLOOR FINISH PLAN- SEE DWG. A103 GC TO INSTALL REGISTERS, MODULAR ELEC SYSTEM, POWER AFTER INSTA(LATION, GC TO SEAL PERIMETER OF CASH WRAPS W/ CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT AFTER CONFiRMATION WITH THE TRU-PM OF TI-iE CASI-LWRAPS FINAL PLACEMENT. POLES, | ' WOOD ALIG 11'-8^A.FF. FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 13/A406 CUSTOMER SERVICE DESK 1 r RISER .MANAGER'S � �' ROOM OFFICE =_ ) PROVIDE VERTICAL 2x @ EXPOSED END OF FIXTURES ! SEE DETAIL 18/A406 A.F.F. WOOD ALIGNMENT (TYP.) & FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 13/A406 • - .: 1wr'u1/r ^- � l EXIT VESTIBULE EmPI | 1 KCOUNT . � RO-0-0 | � PROCEeSING ROOM 1 106 15' 0" . 112 3''»5/8" m mr'�(V.iF.) 38' - 0" (V.I.F.) 38' - d" 38' 0"(V.iF) 3r'8 (V.I.F.) 38' - 3 1/8" (V.I.F.) 38' 2 7/8" (V.iF.) 2Sim / t 2,91 SCALE = 1/1G"= 1 ZO 1''�� CD ' _ 1r'10o/4^ '-O" 15''o^ ( 3 ) / NORTH �7| 2 A302 EQUIPMENT ROOM DEMISING WALL BY OTHERS G.C. TO PROVIDE PLYWOOD ON TRU SIDE. REFER TO PARTITION TYPE 'B'. � |\ COMPACT BICYCLE LIFT SYSTEM BY LIFT & STORAGE SYSTEM, INC. MODEL: VERSA BAR MK3-12B. ATTACH TO BOTTOM OF JOISTS PER MFR. RECOMMENDATIONS. REFER TO ELEC. DWGS. FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. DEMISING WAL BY OTHERS G.C.T0 PROVIDE PLYWOOD ON TRU SIDE. FER TO PARTITION TYPE 'B'. V 1 / y FACADE PLAN 3''o5/8" 3' 3' 0" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 1 2 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION \\===== CORRECTION' ��������U������ ������K�U����� APR �� ��1O ^^^^~~��/u PERMIT CENTER biON.0-72, � CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES ES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03809/10 DRAWN BY: JjK PROJECT NO.: 55252805 CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE a rch itectu re engineering, P.C. !::i 18I14 Mile RdN[ - Grand Rapids, NU49S3S vS3 REGISTERED SCO �0=~— WURL 0F STATE ‹f:V 4-21 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWIN IS THE EXOLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS ^R^US. LOCATION ~�� UK �� U K U�����UU �� ���� "~~~"�°�"�~"~y ��°° DRAWING TITLE SCALE SHEET NO. As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 A101 ROOFING MATERIAL GENERAL NOTES EXISTING ROOF: TWO -PLY, BUILT -UP ROOF W/ GRANULE SURFACED, MODIFIED BITUMEN CAP SHEET. 1. ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS REQUIRE PRESSURE TREATED 2 x 6 WOOD BLOCKING AT INSULATION AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING FOR FLASHING ATTACHMENT IN ACCORDANCE W/ SELECTED ROOF TYPE. 2. VERIFY LOCATIONS OF ALL ROOF OPENINGS WITH MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 3. GAS PIPING TO BE PAINTED: YELLOW, UNLESS PROHIBITED BY SPECIFIC JOB CONDITIONS. IF THIS OCCURS, VERIFY PAINT COLOR W /OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO PAINTING 4. PROVIDE BUILT -UP INSULATION CRICKETS ON HIGH SIDE OF ALL ROOF OPENINGS (AS INDICATED ON ROOF PLAN). SLOPE OF CRICKET: 1/2" PER FOOT. 5. DO NOT ATTACH 4 x 4 WOOD SLEEPERS TO DECK FOR SUPPORT OF GAS PIPING. PROVIDE MEMBRANE- ROOFING PADS BELOW SLEEPERS. 4 Set Flanges in MBR Flashing Cement, MBR Utility Cement or Bestile Industrial Roof Cement Fasten 6" o.c. Approved Fasteners Approx. 8" o.c. Curb Form Expand - O -Flash asten 8" o.. ` r-- '_DynaF)ex or DynaFlex CR :l'lot Asphalt, MBR Flashing Cement ' or MBR Utility Cement Insulation Envelope (Optional) FesCant'Pltis DFE -7 Roof Membrane: Min. Specification DFE- `' General Note: All general instructions contained in the current J I Commercial/ Industrial Roofing Systems Manual shall be considered part of this specfi- C atiol. Curb mounted roof -to -roof expansion joint cover Expansion Joint Cover: Application of the be flashing is outlined in Specification DPE -1 (NLR): Install and splice Expand -O -Flash in accordance with the installation instructions . provided with the product Prefabricated intersections, as well as horizontal -to- vertical transitions, are available to complete the Expand -O -Flash installation. Refer to Section 2h. on "Specialty Roofing Products" in the current JM Commercial /Industrial Roofing Systems Manual. MANUFACTURER'S DETAIL A102 SCALE = 6" = 1' -0" ;A) E > ) NEW RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. BUILT -UP TAPERED RIGID INSULATION: CRICKET (TYP.) EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECH CWGS. 3 EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWG$. ROOF EXPANSION JOINT PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS SEE DETAIL 4/A102 VERIFY W/ MANUFACTURER EXISTING CLASS A BUILT - UP ROOFING SYSTEM ( 5 ) 6 1 EXISTING RTU. REF: R TO MECH. DWGS. BUILT -UP TAPERED RIGI ; INSULATION CRIC <ET (TYP.) EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. 4 NEW RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. BUILT -UP TAPERED RIGI INSULATION CRIC ET (TYP.) REPLACE PORTION OF EXISTING ROOF (SHADED AREA) AFTER ERECTION OF NEW JOIST. REFER TO STRUCT. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City ofTuleiila BUILDING DIVISION TYP. @ (3) NEW RTUS EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. EXISTING CLASS A BUILT - UP ROOFING SYSTEM ROOF EXPANSION JOINT PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS SEE DETAIL 4/A102 VERIFY W/ MANUFACTURER ROOF PLAN SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" CONT. GALV. MTL. COUNTERFLASHING RIGID INSULATION MEMBRANE FLASHING ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM 3 A102 NOTE: TOP OF CURB TO BE LEVEL NORTH MTL. TERM. BAR ANCHORED TO CURB W/ 1/4" PANHEAD SCREWS W/ GROMMET WASHERS @ 12 O.C. DETAIL @ RTU CURB SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" SEALANT BEAD PVC MEMBRANE BOOT SEALANT — ; 6.91 \ 6 1 PIPE PENETRATION REFER TO MECH. PLUMB. OR ELEC. DWGS S.S. DRAWBAND MEMBRANE FLASHING ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM � v 2 \_/ \_/ METAL SLEEVE WHERE REQUIRED DETAIL @ PIPE PENETRATION Al 02 / SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" EXISTING RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. NEW RTU. REFER TO MECH. DWGS. \ \� \ \\ 1 I \� BUILT -UP TAPERED \\�\ RIGID INSULATION \�\ CRICKET ITYP.) METAL SLEEVE WHERE REQUIRED MEMBRANE FLASHING ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM MTL. DECK K DOUBLE WALL TYPE B FLUE STACK THRU ROOF ELASTOMERIC SEALANT METAL UMBRELLA DRAW BAND UMBRELLA TO STACK REMOVABLE COUNTERFLASHING CONT. 2x10 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD NAILER INSTALL 2x6 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING @ PERIMETER RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER i 1 � DETAIL @ ROOF FLUE VENT SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com GLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON a. (v `�;� s� l� ,� STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TU KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ROOF PLAN & DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS 1 NO. DATE 02/26/10 TYPE DESCRIPTION AREA CPT1 CARPET TILE 640 SF MAGIC MAGICAL R FLOOR PATTERN 150 SF PT1 PORCELAIN TILE 500 SF PT2 PORCELAIN TILE 28 SF SCP1 SCRAPER MAT 38 SF VCT1 VINYL COMP. TILE 29,962 SF VCT2 VINYL COMP. TILE 4,603 SF VST1 VINYL STRIP TILE 13,071 SF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL STORE FIXTURES & END PANELS. HELD VERIFY THE FIXTURE GONDOLA LAYOUT W/ FIXTURE PLAN "F1" PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL SEISMIC ANCHORS, BRACING, STRAPS, ETC. WHERE REQUIRED BY LOCAL LAWS, CODES & ORDINANCES, INCLUDING AT ALL MERCHANDISE FIXTURES. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ALL BOXED CORNERS. (REFER TO FIXTURE PLAN "F1" FOR SCOPE & QUANTITY, AND DET. 3/A103 FOR MATERIALS & FINISHES.) 03/09/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS CHAIN-LINK..POWER WALL ENCLOSURE SEE DET. 17/A406 EXTEND VCTTHREE :: =FULL,:TILES.INTO THE s PRE -SALES AREA. (TYP EXTEND VCT THREE FULL TI ES INTO THE PRE -SA ES AREA. (TYP.) 24` "t�IGH FLOOR MOUNTED CART SNIPS SEE DETAIL 8/A406 ii 194'f Q" 7' NO. PROTOTYPE UPDATES DATE DESCRIPTION .EXTEND VCT THREE FULL TILES INTO THE .PRE- SALES;AREA...(TYP.). 24" HIGH FLOOR MOUNTED CART 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 'SEE DETAIL_ 8/A406 PROVIDE PLASTIC LAMINATE TOP & BLOCKING PROVIDE FLUSH SURFACE BETWEEN PANELS. DOWEL OR BISCUIT PANELS TOGETHER. 2 "x2" ALUM. TRIM ANGLE TO COVER CORNER JOINT. 2 "x2" ALUM. TRIM ANGLE TO COVER CORNER JOINT. WIEVIEN.5 WNW PAN mworimPi. ...mii vo ■■r�. ..i • IEN �r ■1 •l ■.� �■ EMI ammo omm '.. *E� ■■ PIES • NOTE: FIELD VERIFY WIDTH & DEPTH AFTER FIXTURES ARE INSTALLED. COORDINATE SHAPE WITH THE FIXTURE PLAN & OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. PLASTIC LAMINATE TO BE INSTALLED ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD. EXTEND VCT THREE FULL TILES INTO THE PRE- SALES:AREA.(TYP.) 24" HIGH FLOOR - _.,M.O,U N.TED..CART........ STOPS ._......... > .............._. 'SEE DETAIL: 8/A406 FINISH FLOOR PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLAM3) - PIONITE - #SW836 -N "WINTER WHITE" BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE BOXED ORNER - SEE DETAIL 3/A103 NOTE: QUILT DETAIL IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO VENDOR DIAGRAM /INSTRUCTIONS FOR ACTUAL LAYOUT. INSTALL (2) BOARDER STRIPS @ PERIMETER CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY MASONITE PROTECTION ALL VINYL STRIP FLOORING. MANAGER'S OFFICE architecture 11 engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids; Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com REGISTERED RCNITECT ENLARGED MAGIC DETAIL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City otTukkila BUILDING DIVISIOr RANDOM WATER JET CUT TILE PATTERN. SEE DET 5/A103 <CPT1> CARPET TILE ECS > EXPOSED CONCRETE W/ SEALER AT1 > ALUMINUM TRANSITION 'OME S- - -- Rao* THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF ALUM. EDGE TRIM WHEREVER CARPET MEETS VCT. VCT FLECK, (OR GRAIN), TO BE INSTALLED HORIZONTAL DIRECTION THROUGHOUT ENTIRE RACE TRACK & QUILT AREA TO ASSURE DIMENSIONAL UNIFORMITY OF ALL VCT. VCT FLECK, (OR GRAIN), TO BE INSTALLED VERTICAL DIRECCTION THROUGHOUT ENTIRE FIELD AREA TO ASSURE DIMENSIONAL UNIFORMITY OF ALL VCT. STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 FIELD TILE DOES NOT COME CUT. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD CUTTING FIELD TILE ABUTTING RACE TRACK. FIRST INSTALL RACE TRACK AND THEN THE FIELD TILE. ALIGN JOINTS. THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE FINISH PLAN & DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A103 AR r EXISTING TO REMAIN. CLEAN AND PREPARE FOR NEW FINISHES -r {E i I 1 3 i) - \ - REMOVE EXISTING CANOPY, SOFFIT(S), PARAPET(S), ETC. REFER TO STRUCT. DWGS. ii = — Il— —1 � ter- �� -I C- II II � —11- 11 II I II REMOVE EXISTING COLUMNS. REFER TO STRUCT. DWGS. i 1 � FRONT DEMOLITION ELEVATION SCALE = 1 /8" = SIM. 13' -6" T.O. PARAPET 26' -6" 9 -D (MATCH EXISTING) A302 T.O. PARAPET 32' - 0" (MATCH EXISTING) 1/ 11/ 11 III \I 1111,11/1—L- /T11/71_111,1 k 41D A© 301 1 -A REMOVE EXISTING ALUM. AUTOSLIDER, STOREFRONT SYSTEM & METAL STUD PARTITION ABOVE (COMPLETE) 25 -D uinii�iiiiiiiii�MEM• ••• ••i ∎wi ∎ ■iiiiiii °■iiiii�i iii °■i■■i•••■iuiii■■���1L11iiiiii i•••••••■•■■ 9 -D INN i 4 i 1 _7 Il I , I 11 II - -- I 1�--� LE4 1 1 REMOVE EXISTING COLUMNS. REFER TO STRUCT. DWGS. "J" BOXES FOR BUILDING SIGNS ARE TO BE POSITIONED AT BOTTOM PORTION OF LETTERS (NOT THE TOP). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION W/ OWNER'S MANUFACTURER <1 -A> <25 -D 9 -D I REMOVE EXISTING CONC. WALL PANEL. REFER TO STRUCT. DWGS. 5 CD 13 REMOVE EXISTING COLUMNS. REFER TO STRUCT. DWGS. • 1 -A ■ ■11111111•■ ■ ■ ■ •••1111■111•111i• ■■ ■11111I ■EMI■■ ■ •■ ■ •1111111■11111111■■■■MIM1■■■ •■ ■■■■ ■■■■∎=■ 1111•1111111111•11■ ■■ ••■ ••••■■ ■ ■ ■ ■■••1■■111111■■■ ■ •••111■■ ■■■■ EXISTING TO REMAIN. CLEAN AND PREPARE FOR NEW FINISHES 9 -D NOTE: NEW PARAPET HEIGHT SHALL NOT EXCEED HEIGHT OF EXISTING (TO BE DEMOLISHED) PARAPET. GC TO VERIFY HEIGHT OF EXISTING PARAPET AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT IF THERE IS CONFLICT. EQ gm loom E FRONT ELEVATION A201 / SCALE = 1/8" = 1' -0" •� 9 -1 D f 14 1 -A 1 -A ll c 10 fG� 9 -D 1 -A 2 -B 9 -D oQ 2 -B ® MD 14 9 -D > < 2 -B 1 -A 8 -G > <21 -A> < 3 -A > < 2 -A 3 LEFT ELEVATION A201 SCALE = 1/8" = 1' -0" 8 -G \ 2 -A (TYP.) 7 -A <18 -A> (TYP.) (4\\ PARTIAL REAR ELEVATION A201 / SCALE = 1/8" = 1-0" <2 -A> 8 -G 8 -G > < 2 -A NOTE: PROVIDE (6) HOOKS PER SIGN. VERIFY QUANITY & LOCATION OF CARABINER W/ CPM. PROVIDE STAND -OFF SLEEVE AS REQ'D EXISTING TILT -UP CONC. WALL- SEE ELEVATIONS 3/8" STAINLESS STL. EXP. BOLT ANCHOR W/ CARABINER 7 -A 5 DETAIL A201 / SCALE = 1" = 1' -0" 24' -0" A.F.F. 18' -0" A.F.F. 2 -A EXISTING TO REMAIN REMOVE EXISTING ALUM. — AUTOSLIDER & STOREFRONT SYSTEM (COMPLETE) 16 • 16 72. RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION LEGEND BUILDING MATERIAL CODE COLOR CODE CODE MATERIAL 1 NEW EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM (E.I.F.S), SANDPEBBLE FINISH, PAINTED. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE OF EIFS SYSTEM(S) TO BE USED. 2 EXISTING CONC. PANEL, PAINTED 3 NEW (3) COAT STUCCO SYSTEM (@ INFILL, TYP., U.O.N.), TO MATCH ADJACENT CONCRETE PANEL, PAINTED. SEE DETAIL 4/A302 4 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH, GLAZING 1" INSULATED, BLUE - GREEN, LOW -E FLOAT, GLASS DESIGNATED, "GL -5 ". 5 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH, GLAZING 1" INSULATING LAMINATED, BLUE - GREEN, LOW -E, LAMINATED GLASS DESIGNATED "GL -4 ". 6 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH, GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED SECURITY GLASS, "GL -3" (TEMPERED). 7 HOLLOW METAL DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED. 8 EXISTING EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM ( E.I.F.S.), PAINTED 9 NEW PRE - FINISHED METAL COPING / EDGE TRIM. 10 CONCRETE CART CURB 11 INTEGRALLY COLORED SPLIT -FACE CONC. BLOCK VENEER. COLOR TO MATCH SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6074 "SPALDING GREY". SUBMIT SAMPLE(S) TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW/ APPROVAL. 12 STL. STRUCTURE, WRAP WITH BREAK METAL TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT. 13 ILLUMINATED SIGN LETTERS. SEE DRAWING SI01. 14 CAST STONE. 15 EXISTING CONC. COLUMN, PAINTED 16 EXISTING FINISHES TO REMAIN 17 NEW CONC. COLUMN TO MATCH EXISTING, PAINT 18 EXISTING METAL COLLECTOR HEADS W/ LEADERS. 19 CONCRETE FILLED STL. PIPE BOLLARD, PAINTED. SEE A100 FOR QUANTITY. 20 EXISTING WALL PACK LIGHT FIXTURE. 21 COMPACTOR DOOR & STEEL FRAME, PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL COLOR. 22 OVERFLOW SCUPPERS (4 "x16" MIN OPENING). SEE DET. 9/A303. 23 KNOX BOX 3200 SERIES WITH TAMPER SWITCH OR APPROVED EQUAL - COORD. LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT W /LOCAL FIRE OFFICIAL. 24 CONCRETE FOUNDATION / RETAINING WALL, PAINTED, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS. 25 E.I.F.S. CORNIC -TO MATCH EXISTING, PAINTED. 26 EMERGENCY WALL-PACK. SEE ELC. DWGS. 27 ALUMINUM SWINGING CART DOOR, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" LAMINATED "GL -3 ". SEE DRAWING A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 28 16 "x16" METAL LOUVER VENTS (TYP. OF 3). TOP OF VENT @ 34' -0" A.F.F. 29 EXISTING METAL COPING. REPAIR AS REQ'D AND PREPARE FOR NEW FINISH. PAINT. 30 CONC. STAIRS (SEE STRUCT. DWGS.) AND ALUMINUM RAILINGS, PAINTED. SEE DET. 9/A100. 31 SECURITY CAMERAS. SEE ELEC. DWGS. 32 TEMPORARY BANNER LOCATIONS (6'x18'). TOP OF BANNER @ 24 -FEET. PROVIDE (6) ARABINERS PER BANNER. SEE DETAIL 5/A201 /�� 33 GLAZED CERAMIC TILE SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING Y' 34 DECORATIVE E.I.F.S. W/ REVEALS (SEE DETAIL 9/A304), FROM TOP OF STONE SILL TO CANOPY ABOVE A ,.._,',.-A_.-- ,_A CODE COLOR A MATCH EXISTING - BENJAMIN MOORE "LIGHT TAUPE" (VERIFY COLOR W/ TRU PM) B SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6098 "PACER WHITE" C SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6100 "PRACTICAL BEIGE" D MATCH EXISTING - BENJAMIN MOORE "OFF WHITE" (VERIFY COLOR W/ TRU PM) E SHERWIN WILLIAMS "OSHA YELLOW" F SHERWIN WILLIAMS #6074 "SPALDING GREY" ATCH EXISTING - BENJAMIN MOORE "TAUPE" (VERIFY COLOR U PM) H MATCH EXISTING - BENJAMIN MOORE HC -135 "LAFAYETTE GREEN" ii 1 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 04/27/10 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. :. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 SCE ���"r —•S WURL SIATE OF WASHINGTON REGISTERED ECT STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A201 AR1 T.O. PARAPET 32' -0" T.O. TILE BAND 28' - 0" (V.I.F.) GLAZED CERAMIC TILE SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING. INSTALL PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS 10" 2' -6" 9' -0" 6' -6" NOTES: 1. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, PLYWOOD SHEATHING INDICATED HEREIN, SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (TYP.). 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL METAL STUD SIZING, DIMENSIONS, & CONNECTION INFORMATION. 3. NOT USED. 4. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE OF E.I.F.S. SYSTEM(S) REQ'D. F MEMBRANE FLASHING. EXTEND UP PARAPET & OVER PARAPET BLOCKING 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING ROOF SYSTEM OVER RIGID INSULATION. PROVIDE MIN. THICKNESS PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS REFER TO SPECS. ALB.O. TILE BAND 25' - 4" (V.I.F.) NEW BUILT -UP ROOF & TIE -IN TO EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS. EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM T.O_S 25' - 2" 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING T.O.S. i.� 24' -95)k'\,,,, 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. E.I.F.S. C.J. SEE 9/A304 B.O. SOFFIT 13' -0" 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. NEW STEEL STRUCTURE SEE STRUCT. DWGS. R -19 KRAFT FACED BATT INSULATION 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 4" E.I.F.S. (MAX.) E.I.F.S. C.J. SEE 9/A304 E.I.F.S. C.J. SEE 9/A304 E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) 5/8" EXTERIOR GYP. SOFFIT BOARD W/ CONT. GALV. SCREEN VENT (MATCH EXISTING). PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING BENJAMIN MOORE "LIGHT OFF WHITE" 1 1/2" MTL. FURRING CHANNELS @ 24" O.C. (MAX.) 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING 3 A304 2 \WALL SECTION A301 / SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" i f,. ....•••••••.___memo _ ......................... 5/8" GYP. BD. WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 WOOD ALIGNMENT FLOOR PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 • 10" F.1 9' -0" ,F i 2' -6" T.O. PARAPET �32' -0" T.O. TILE BAND 28' - 0" (V.I.F.) GLAZED CERAMIC TILE SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING. INSTALL PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS 6' -6" MEMBRANE FLASHING. EXTEND UP PARAPET & OVER PARAPET BLOCKING 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING ROOF SYSTEM OVER RIGID INSULATION. PROVIDE MIN. THICKNESS PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS REFER TO SPECS. METAL STUD BOXED HEADER (SEE STRUCT. DWGS.) SUSPENDED MTL. — CEILING GRID W/ LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL PANELS CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE @ PERIMETER 3 DETAIL SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE 5/8" GYP. BOARD (BOTH SIDES) WD. BLK'G AND SHIM AS REQ'D. ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM A301 / SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION NEW BUILT -UP ROOF & TIE -IN TO EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS. B.O. TILE BAND 25' - 4" (V.I.F.) 6" STL. STUDS @ 24" O.C. T_.O.S... 25' -2" EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM 1/2" GLASS -MAT - GYP. SHEATHING NEW STEEL STRUCTURE SEE STRUCT. DWGS. REFER TO PARTITION TYPE FOR WALL TO DECK :DETAIL- ILLUMINATED SIGN. PROVIDE 1/2" EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD FOR SIGN ANCHORAGE. COORDINATE EXTENT & LOCATION W/ SIGN MFR. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. AB.O. SOFFIT 13' -0" 3/4" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD CATWALK 3 A301 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. RETURN E.I.F.S. (BEYOND) CAST STONE SILL (BEYOND) SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER (BEYOND) E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) 5/8" EXTERIOR GYP. SOFFIT BOARD W/ CONT. GALV. SCREEN VENT (MATCH EXISTING). PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING BENJAMIN MOORE "LIGHT OFF WHITE" WRAP FRAMING MEMBER W/ BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT SYSTEM 5/$ "•GYP: BD:_ - 'SUSPENDED MTL, CEILING . •'GRID W/ LAY ICI ACOUSTICAL" :. CEILINGPANELS(PRQVIDE, ' .. • • HOLD'DOWN CLIPS)- .' NEW HSS FRAMING SEE STRUCT. DWGS. CAST STONE SILL (BEYOND) SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER (BEYOND) " STL. COLUMN- : ' (BEYOND) NEW HSS FRAMING ' SEE STRUCT. PIA/GS:.'' - WRAP;FRAMING: - IMEMBER. W/ BREAK.'" 'METAL TO MATCH _ . :STOREFRONT SYSTEM J (0 1 WALL SECTION A301 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" Duo -o7 2 RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER N CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com \<113 REGISTERED ARCH! T SCOisDSIG WURL STATE Of WASHINGTON STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A301 R 1 12" CONC. BLOCK SEALANT ALL SIDES GALV. STL. (C8X11.5 FOR 8" CMU MC12X10.6 FOR 12 CMU) CHANNEL FRAME ALL (4) SIDES H.M. DOOR FRAME PAINT 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL W/ CONT. SEALANT COMPACTOR CONC. SLAB SEE STRUCT. DWGS. 5 SECTION co ZD FINISH FLOOR LINE\ z 2 A302 SCALE = 1 /2" = 1' -0" 7/8" STUCCO OVER METAL LATH & VAPOR BARRIER OVER 1/2" GLASS MAT GYP. SHEATHING 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. EXISTING STUD WALL & FRAMING TO REMAIN 5/8" GYP. BD. 4 SECTION A302 SCALE = 1/2" = NOTE: COMPLETE COMPACTOR ELECTRICAL HOOK -UP BY. ELEC.- SEE ELEC. DWGS. GALV. STL. (C8 x 11.5 FOR 8" CMU. MC12 x 10.6 FOR 12" CMU) CHANNEL FRAME (4) SIDES H.M. DOOR & FRAME- PAINT LOCATE HARDWARE WITHIN LOWER THIRD OF DOOR PANEL CONTROL FURNISHED BY "HOPPER" MANUF. ELEC. TO SUPPLY (2) -1" WALL SLEEVES W/ CONDUIT AS REQUIRED FOR ELECT. CONNECTION TO COMPACTOR 6 o� 5' -8. CONC. SLAB & STAIR SEE STRUCT. DWGS. ALUM. NOSING (TYP.) SEE SPEC. 6' -41/4" o • (SAWCUT EXIST. SLAB) DETAIL A302 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. NOTE: 11" MINIMUM TREADS 7" MAXIMUM RISERS EXISTING STUD WALL & FRAMING TO REMAIN 5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON 5/8" GYP. BD. (SIM. TO PARTITION TYPE 'B') 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING - - *maw - --- 3 SECTION A302) SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" ALUM. RAILING REFER TO DETAIL 15/A406 (SIM.) E.IF.S. (BEYOND 112' EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING MEMBRANE FLASHING. EXTEND UP PARAPET & OVER. PARAPET BLOCKING EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM 13' -0" E.I.F.S. REVEAL TO MATCH EXISTING G.C. TO VERIFY IN FIELD 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING E.I.F.S. (BEYOND) 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 3/4" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD CATWALK EXISTING 6" STL. STUDS @ 24" O.C. v E.I.F.S. (BEYOND) CAST STONE SILL (BEYOND) SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER (BEYOND) E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) ALUM. SOFFIT PANELS W/ EA. THIRD PANEL VENTED ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS @ 36" O.C. EXISTING CONRETE TILT -UP PANEL 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 2 WALL SECTION A302 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" REVIEWED L��GE CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION enema - Atik T.O. PARAPET 26' -6" E.I.F.S. REVEAL TO MATCH EXISTING .C. TO VERIFY IN FIELD 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 13' -0" 1' -6" NOTES: 1. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, PLYWOOD SHEATHING INDICATED HEREIN, SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (TYP.). 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL METAL STUD SIZING, DIMENSIONS, & CONNECTION INFORMATION. 3. NOT USED. 4. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE OF E.I.F.S. SYSTEM(S) REQ'D. 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING NEW BUILT -UP ROOF & TIE -IN TO EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS. NEW ROOF SYSTEM OVER RIGID INSULATION. INSULATION TO MEET R -VALUE AS INDICATED ON A001 I EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM L 24' - 9" NEW BEAM. SEE STRUCT. DWGS. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 3/4" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD CATWALK 3' 1 NEW 6" STL. STUDS @ 24" O.C. NEW CONCRETE COLUMN ENCLOSURE (BEYOND) TO ." MATCH EXISTING ' E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) ALUM. SOFFIT PANELS W/ EA. THIRD PANEL VENTED ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS @ 36" O.C. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 1 1 WALL SECTION EXISTING STUD AND GYP. BD. PARTITION WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 WOOD ALIGNMENT FLOOR PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 � to- 0 7 2 A302 SCALE = 1 /2" =1-0" RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. 0 DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 'sc OUGLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON r STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF • TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS SCALE 1 /2" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A302 r– I 29 I I ELEC. TO SUPPLY (2) -1" WALL SLEEVES W/ CONDUIT AS REQUIRED FOR ELECT. CONNECTION TO COMPACTOR 6 o� 5' -8. CONC. SLAB & STAIR SEE STRUCT. DWGS. ALUM. NOSING (TYP.) SEE SPEC. 6' -41/4" o • (SAWCUT EXIST. SLAB) DETAIL A302 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. NOTE: 11" MINIMUM TREADS 7" MAXIMUM RISERS EXISTING STUD WALL & FRAMING TO REMAIN 5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON 5/8" GYP. BD. (SIM. TO PARTITION TYPE 'B') 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING - - *maw - --- 3 SECTION A302) SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" ALUM. RAILING REFER TO DETAIL 15/A406 (SIM.) E.IF.S. (BEYOND 112' EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING MEMBRANE FLASHING. EXTEND UP PARAPET & OVER. PARAPET BLOCKING EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM 13' -0" E.I.F.S. REVEAL TO MATCH EXISTING G.C. TO VERIFY IN FIELD 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING E.I.F.S. (BEYOND) 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 3/4" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD CATWALK EXISTING 6" STL. STUDS @ 24" O.C. v E.I.F.S. (BEYOND) CAST STONE SILL (BEYOND) SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER (BEYOND) E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) ALUM. SOFFIT PANELS W/ EA. THIRD PANEL VENTED ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS @ 36" O.C. EXISTING CONRETE TILT -UP PANEL 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 2 WALL SECTION A302 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" REVIEWED L��GE CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION enema - Atik T.O. PARAPET 26' -6" E.I.F.S. REVEAL TO MATCH EXISTING .C. TO VERIFY IN FIELD 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 13' -0" 1' -6" NOTES: 1. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, PLYWOOD SHEATHING INDICATED HEREIN, SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (TYP.). 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL METAL STUD SIZING, DIMENSIONS, & CONNECTION INFORMATION. 3. NOT USED. 4. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE OF E.I.F.S. SYSTEM(S) REQ'D. 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING NEW BUILT -UP ROOF & TIE -IN TO EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF PER MFRS. RECOMMENDATIONS. NEW ROOF SYSTEM OVER RIGID INSULATION. INSULATION TO MEET R -VALUE AS INDICATED ON A001 I EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM L 24' - 9" NEW BEAM. SEE STRUCT. DWGS. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 3/4" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD CATWALK 3' 1 NEW 6" STL. STUDS @ 24" O.C. NEW CONCRETE COLUMN ENCLOSURE (BEYOND) TO ." MATCH EXISTING ' E.I.F.S. RETURN (BEYOND) ALUM. SOFFIT PANELS W/ EA. THIRD PANEL VENTED ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS @ 36" O.C. EXISTING CONCRETE TILT -UP PANEL 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. 1 1 WALL SECTION EXISTING STUD AND GYP. BD. PARTITION WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 WOOD ALIGNMENT FLOOR PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FACE OF COLUMN (COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ PLAN) SEE DETAIL 12/A406 � to- 0 7 2 A302 SCALE = 1 /2" =1-0" RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. 0 DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 'sc OUGLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON r STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF • TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS SCALE 1 /2" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A302 1/2" GLASS MAT FACED GYP. SHEATHING. E.I.F.S. REVEALS E.I.F.S. REVEALS 3/4" E.I.F.S. REVEAL JOINT. (R.J.) NOTE: ALL JOINTS, ACCESSORIES, TRIMS, ETC., PER E.I.F.S. MFR. REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY USE OF ALL WEEPS, VENTS, CONT. SEALANT DRIPS, ETC., PER MFG. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. E.I.F.S. CONTROL JOINT BEAD. 3/4" 3/4" E.I.F.S. CONTROL JOINT BEAD. 3/4" E.I.F.S. CONTROL JOINT (a� REVEAL (R.C.J.) 1/2" GLASS MAT FACED GYP. SHEATHING. 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. E.I.F.S. CONTROL JOINT. (C.J.) 9 EIFS JOINT DETAILS A304 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" BACKER ROD & CONT. SEALANT STEEL TUBE SEE STRUCTURAL DWG. B.O.S. 8' -6" BACKER ROD & CONT. SEALANT CONC. CART CURB SEE STRUCT. DWGS. 1/2" EXP. JOINT MATERIAL W/ CONT. SEALANT ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM BREAK METAL @ ALL EXPOSED SIDES OF TUBE TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. SHIM AS REQ'D ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM VINYL BASE AT CURB EXISTING CONC. SLAB FORMED CONCRETE CURB & FOUNDATION SEE STRUCT. DWGS. STOREFRONT DETAIL SCALE = 3/4" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING BACKER ROD W/ CONT. SEALANT T.O.M 2' -8" 7 NOT USED A304 SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 6 NOT USED A304 SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 6" STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. CAST STONE MASONRY UNIT, WATERTABLE 5" HIGH, EQUAL TO: ROCKCAST, MODEL #SL400 4" SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER W/ MASONRY REINFORCING @ 16 "O.C. (VERT.) MORTAR NET CONT. THRU -WALL VINYL FLASHING W/ 1/2" DIA. WEEPS @ 12" O.C. T.O. PARAPET 29' - 1 1/2" T.O. STUD 29' -1" CONT. SEALANT NEW CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND FOUNDATION (SEE STRUCT. DWGS.) 9. ; 4 1/2" EXP. JOINT MATERIAL W/ CONT. SEALANT • G 4 • • BASE DETAIL 4 SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" PRE - FINISHED METAL EDGE TRIM COUNTER - FLASHING PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS 2' -0" 1/4" / 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING E.I.F.S. AS REQ'D BACKER ROD W/ CONT. SEALANT 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING 11 MEMBRANE FLASHING EXTEND UP PARAPET AND OVER PARAPET BLKG T.O. STUD 29' - 0 1/2" 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLY'D SHEATHING 6" MTL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. TERMINATION BAR PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS T.O. PARAPET PRE - FINISHED METAL EDGE TRIM COUNTER - FLASHING PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS 2' -0" NEW BUILT -UP ROOF SYSTEM OVER RIGID INSULATION W/ CANT AT PARAPETS PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS 4 CORNICE DETAIL A304 SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING BACKER ROD W/ CONT. SEALANT T.O.M 3' -4" F 5 1/4" CAST STONE MASONRY UNIT, WATERTABLE 5" HIGH, EQUAL TO: ROCKCAST, MODEL #SL400 4" SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER W/ MASONRY REINFORCING @ 16 "O.C. (VERT.) MORTAR NET CUT FIRST BLOCK TO 7 ", GROUT SOLID CONT. THRU -WALL VINYL FLASHING W/ 1/2" DIA. WEEPS @ 12" O.C. 1/2" EXP. JOINT MATERIAL W/ CONT. SEALANT BASE DETAIL 0' SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" REFER TO PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE L4 "x4 "x1/4" W/ 1/2" DIA. BOLTS THROUGH SOLID BLK'G AT STUD WALL EXISTING CONC. SLAB AND TURNED DOWN EDGE 29' - 1 1/2" T.O. STUD 29' -1" CONT. SEALANT 3 5/8" MTL. STUDS © 16" O.C. 1 /4" / 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING E.I.F.S. AS REQ'D BACKER ROD W/ CONT. SEALANT 6" MTL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. MEMBRANE FLASHING EXTEND UP PARAPET AND OVER PARAPET BLKG T.O. STUD 29' - 0 1/2"1-1 1/2" EXT. GRADE PLY'D SHEATHING TERMINATION BAR PER MANUF. REQUIREMENTS PRE - FINISHED METAL CAP FLASHING (PROVIDE POSITIVE SLOPE TO ROOF), BEND UP UNDER TERMINATION BAR 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. OVER 1/2" GLASS -MAT GYP. SHEATHING 2 CORNICE DETAIL A304 j SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" E.I.F.S. ADHERED TO CONC. PANEL BACKER ROD W/ CONT. SEALANT T.O.M 3' -4" EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF SYSTEM AND CANT TO REMAIN 5 1/4" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISinpj CAST STONE MASONRY UNIT, WATERTABLE 5" HIGH, EQUAL TO: ROCKCAST, MODEL #SL400 4" SPLIT -FACE CMU VENEER W/ MASONRY REINFORCING @ 16 "0.0. (VERT.) MORTAR NET CUT FIRST BLOCK TO 7 ", GROUT SOLID CONT. THRU -WALL VINYL FLASHING W/ 1/2" DIA. WEEPS @ 12" O.C. 1/2" EXP. JOINT MATERIAL W/ CONT. SEALANT BASE DETAIL �' SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" EXISTING GYP. BD. AND STUD PARTITION L4 "x4 "x1/4" W/ 1/2" DIA. HILTI HIT HY20 ANCHORS @ 2' -0" O.C. PROVIDE A MITERED JOINT @ CORNERS EXISTING CONC. SLAB AND CONC PANEL RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER " c;UN 1 K. UUU & REVISIONS II NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture } engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 REGISTERED SC• DO MAIL STATE OF WASHINGTON &3 . lo. <0 or --� f--• --. lit CP 10 t -- -- ,� -� / 1Iii STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE EXTERIOR MISC. DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A304 ,A R j 0 Z\1 GC TO PROVIDE 10.-0" L x 10" 0 PVC SLEEVE FOR BALER TIES. SUPPORT WITH METAL STRAPS ANGHORED INTO WALL @ 24" 0.C., MAX. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION W/ STORE MGR. 30' - 0" ALUM. RAILING CHAIN LINK FENCE. SEE DETAIL 17/A406 RECEIVING .8., 0" CHAIN-LINK FENCE - -GATE-BY FENCE MFR., PROVIDE HINGES AND LOCKABLE GATE LATCH 4" BOLLARD (TYP.) _SEE DET. 4/A101 TRASH COMPACTOR 1\/ 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN BLDG. & SLAB PROVIDE TACTILE EXIT SIGN. SEE DETAIL 10/A402 120 101 OPEN 1 • „ . • • • • • • • 1 • • • . • .• • '. • • • • , • , •, . • • • • • • •• ,• • .. • „. • \ • ' • \\ , • \ \ . \ . .- \\ • ' • , \ \‘‘ 4 ) 7 1/4" •, • „ ' • 6" CONC. SLAB SEE STRUCT. DWGS. ENLARGED RECEIVING/PRE-SALES SCALE = 1/8" =1-0" 4' - 0" EQ 0 w EQ 4' - 0" EQ 0 0 Z\1 (/-EQ 6005362-68 STL. STUD JOISTS @ 48" 0.0. (TYP.) @ 14.-0" AFF. PROVIDE 600S362-33 BRIDGING @ 48" 0.0. ON TOP OF JOISTS. DOUBLE UP WALL STUDS WHERE JOISTS ARE SUPPORTED (10) @ 2' 0" - 20' 0" EQ 0.1 C.H. 8.-6" 1 0 w C.H. 10-6" 1 0 uj • . • . .‘ • 24x48" SUS MTL: CLQ.,6316.W/: ."- LAYIN eLp.-rjLs (ACT2) CLG, HT.. • , (C .N AS INDICATED •.; . GYP. BD. .CEILING" W ' . • ; ", • : .213ECESSD:LIGHT:FIXTURES. . ... D TAILS 9/A406 8, .10/A406 12' - 0 1/2" R.O. ■-• 24"x48" SUSP. MTL. CLG. GRID W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT2) W/ HOLD DOWN CLIPS CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) C.H. 8.-6" C.H. 1 3.-6" 2' - 0" 0 11 . • ' \ \ OFFICES - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE = 1/4" = 1-0" 1' - 8 1/2" 12' - 0" 14-71/4" ( 6 7 1/4" 1/4 12' - 0" AUTOSLIDER 1/4" PROVIDE TACTILE EXIT SIGN. SEE DETAIL 10/A402 STL. TUBE JAMB (SEE STRUCT. DWGS.) EAS TRANSFORMER CABINET, PAINT PNT7 SEE ELEC. DWGS. ENTRY VESTIBULE 102 NOTE: AT LOCATIONS WHERE ALUMINUM COMES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH STEEL, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. CART BUMPER SEE DET. 16/A406 LINE OF HEADER ABOVE DOORS/STOREFRONT. PROVIDE J-MOLDING & CAULK TO MATCH WALL STL. TUBE JAMB (SEE STRUCT. DWGS.) EAS TRANSFORMER CABINET, PAINT PNT7 SEE ELEC. DWGS. EXIT VESTIBULE 103 NOTE: ALL INSIDE CORNERS OF BUMPER GUARDS ARE TO BE MITER CUT. ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS ARE TO USE MCCUE CORNER PIECES W/ CORNER GUARDS BETWEEN. REFER TO A404 FOR INFORMATION 6" CONCRETE CART CURB 12' - 0" AUTOSLIDER 12' - 0 1/2" R.O. 5/8" 2-45/8" STOREFRONT 8' - 0" CART DOOR 8 - 4" R.O. 37 - 2 1/4" 2 1/8)7, 1/4" 2-41/2" 12' - 0" co 7 1/4" .............. ....... ........... 13' - 5" 7 (5)- 2" DIA. HOLE IN COUNTERTOP W/ PLASTIC GROMMET (2) FILE CABINETS (OSI) COUNTER W/ (2) DRAWERS (-7 1/4" 2' - 8 3/8" — LINE OF 11" ADJ. SHELVES 8' -4 4 7/8" 8' - 4 1/4" 7 1/4" 7 GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO SHEET A101 FOR PARTITION TYPES. 2. RECEIVING (& PRE-SALES) AREA PERIMETER WALLS SHALL BE PAINTED PNT4 "ATRIUM WHITE" FROM FINISH FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. 3. ALL CONTROLS SHALL BE MOUNTED 54" MAX. AFF TO CENTER. 21' - 7 1/2" 77/8" RISER ROOM 4' - 9 5/8" (5)- 2" DIA. HOL IN COUNTERTOP W/ PLASTIC GROMMET COUNTER W/ (2) DRAWERS COUNTER W/ RAWERS (12)- 2" DIA. HOLE IN COUNTERTOP W/ PLASTIC GROMMET PROCESSING ROOM FILE CABINET (OSI) FILE CABINET (051) PROVIDE TACTILE EXIT SIGN. SEE DETAIL 10/A402 12' - 0 1/2" 0" AUTOSLIDER 0 —7 37 - 2 1/4" ENLARGED VESTIBULE PLAN A401 SCALE = 3/8" =1-0" ( 5 ) F ) G.C. TO FURNISH & INSTALL FRAMED COPY OF THE CERT. OF OCCUPANCY. FRAME SHALL BE BLACK W/ ACRYLIC FACE OF SIZE TO ADEQUATELY DISPLAY CERTIFICATE ENLARGED OFFICE PLAN SCALE = 1/4" =1-0" NOTE: PROVIDE HOLD-DOWN CLIPS AT VESTIBULE CEILING ALL DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES PRIOR SHALL BE PRE-FINISHED, COLOR-WHITE M.H. VESTIBULE LIGHT FIXTURE (TYP.) MOUNT AT 20.-6" A.F.F. SEE ELEC. DWGS. GC TO MOVE & POSITION SAFE TO FINAL LOCATION. COORDINATE W/ PM I 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 1 2 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1 I- 1 1 II 61 \ iH 7 // c>= =II 9 ;4- @.) E3 1 C.H.=15' - 0" ,— IN 1 • ' MI /,/ (19) @ 2'-0" = 38' - 0" , E 24"x48" SUSPENDED METAL CEILING W/ LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES (ACT2) CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) Q w 2 LINE OF 11" ADJ. SHELVES \ \ \ \ \ PLYWOOD ON \ BOTH WALLS TO \ \ \ BE FULL WIDTH \. \ & 8.-0" A.F.F. EQUIPMENT ROOM VESTIBULE - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE = 1/8" = 1'-0" t(O-oi Ze... RECEIVED APR 29 2010. PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 03/29/10 ADDENDUM NO. 1 04/27/10 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE RI: architecture 11: engineering, P.C. • 18114 Mile. Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveaecom 9243 REGISTERED 001 Tad `115■01110111°- sc'- B • UGLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON <7. .•••••••• ' r STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED PLANS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A401 r CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. r GENERAL NOTES REF. CLG. PLAN NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING WHERE TOILET PARTITIONS, GRAB BARS, AND LAVATORIES ARE MOUNTED TO STUD AND GYP. BD. PARTITIONS. 2. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, AND MANY OTHER MISC. CONCEALED WOOD ELEMENTS SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT, (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) 3. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE (2) 16 GA. STL. STUDS (NESTED) IN WALL DIRECTLY BEHIND WATER COOLER & WATER HEATER SHELF BRACKET, ANCHOR STUDS TO FLOOR & STRUCTURE ABOVE. 4. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL SIGNS, DECALS, SYMBOLS, ETC. REQUIRED FOR DISABLED ACCESSIBILITY AS DESIGNED BY LOCAL CODES AND AUTHORITY. 5. CONTRACTOR TO INSULATE ALL EXPOSED PIPING BELOW . REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR FIXTURES & PIPING INFORMATION. 6. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF ANY /ALL OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS (O.S.I.) U.O.N. 7. PROVIDE SANITARY SEALANT AT FLOOR, WALL, AND MOP SINK PERIMETER JOINTS IN JANITOR'S CLOSET. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 8. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL TOILET PARTITIONS (TPTN1) REQUIRED FOR ALL TOILET COMPARTMENTS AS DIMENSIONED ON PLAN. REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH & MATERIAL LIST ON SHEET A501. 9. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL WATER RESISTANT GYP. BOARD AS NOTED ON A101. 10. CONTRACTOR TO REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ON SHEET A501 FOR ALL CEILING, WALL, FLOOR & DOOR FINISHES. 11. REFER TO SHEET A101 FOR PARTITION TYPES. 12. SAFE MUST BE SET IN PLACE PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE DOORS TO THE OFFICE AND COUNT ROOM. CONTRACTOR TO DISCUSS & COORDINATE SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES WITH THE OWNER. 1. COORDINATE CEILING PLAN & INSTALLATION W/ ALL ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL TRADES. (REFER TO MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION & ELECT. DRAWINGS FOR REQUIREMENTS.) 2. PROVIDE HOLD DOWN CEILING CLIPS @ LAY -IN CEILING PANELS FOR SECURITY. 3. REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECS. FOR FINISH CEILING TYPES & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 4. LIGHT FIXTURES @ OFFICE AREA ARE 2 X 4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT. (U.O.N.) 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL SEISMIC CEILING BRACING & RESTRAINTS, WHERE REQUIRED BY STATE OR LOCAL LAWS, CODES & ORDINANCES. TOILET FLOOR PLAN NOTES 1. SLOPE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB IN RESTROOMS 1/8" PER FT. MOTHER'S RM. PLAN NOTES 1. INSTALL ALL OUTLETS, GANG BOXES, STROBES, ELEC. EQUIP., ETC. AS CLOSE TOGETHER TO WALL OR DOOR JAMBS AS POSSIBLE TO ENSURE SUFFICIENT ROOM FOR WALL GRAPHICS AND SHELVES. COORDINATE W/ OWNER. LIST OF ACCESSORIES Aii■ __ ■Iii. ....■ ./.■ NO. DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. 1 COLOR MOUNTING HEIGHT COUNT 1 SOAP DISPENSER JOHNSON DIVERSEY 3044703 WHITE 42" TO 44" @ BOTTOM 7 2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B -4288 S.S. 2' -2" @CNTR. 6 3A GRAB BAR BOBRICK B- 5806x42 S.S. 33" TO 36" CNTR. 2 3B GRAB BAR BOBRICK B- 5806x36 S.S. 33" TO 36" CNTR. 2 3C VERTICAL GRAB BAR BOBRICK B- 5806x18 S.S. 39" TO 41" 2 4 FEM. NAPKIN DISPOSAL BOBRICK B -270 S.S. 19" @CNTR. 4 CEILING 8' -6'I 5 FEM. NAPKIN VENDOR COIN SETTING TO BE $0.25 BOBRICK B -2800 25 I 50" @TOP 1 6 ELECTRIC HAND DRYER EXCEL (XCELERATOR) XL -C 3' -6" @ BOTTOM, SEE DETAIL 4/A405. 4 7 SHELF BOBRICK B- 298x18 STAINLESS STEEL 2' -8" AFF 1 8 MIRROR SEE NOTE #2 - - 40" @ BTM. OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE 6 9 MOP BROOM HOLDER & UTILITY SHELF BOBRICK B- 224x36 S.S. 72" 1 10 BABY CHANGING TABLE KOALA KARE PRODUCTS KB200 -00 (HORIZONTAL) CREAM 32" @ BOTTOM 4 I I 11 CHILD PROTECTION SEAT KOALA KARE PRODUCTS KB102 -00 CREAM 20 1/2" @ BOTTOM 4 I 12 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - - - - 1 I 13 HAND SANITIZER DISPENSER CLEARVU - WHITE 40" TO CL. 1 14 COAT HOOKS BOBRICK B -212 - SEE NOTE #4 6 REMARKS: 1. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 3. ALL ACCESSORIES ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL PER ADA (LOCAL & STATE) REQUIREMENTS & MOUNTING CONTRACTOR EXCEPT FOR THE CHANGING TABLE, SAFE SITTER, SOAP HEIGHTS. DISPENSER, PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER, AND HAND SANITIZER DISPENSER. THE INTERIOR OF EACH TOILET COAT HOOK MOUNTED ON TH O 4. ONE (1) CO O TO BE MOU O 2. 24 "x36" FRAMELESS MIRROR W/ BEVELED EDGE. ( ) PARTITION DOOR (MEN'S & WOMEN'S ROOMS). MOUNT AT 48" IN ACCESSIBLE STALLS & 68" IN ALL OTHER STALLS. 600S162 -68 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 800S250 -97 STL. STUD /JOIST (REFER TO ENLARGED CEILING PLAN) CONNECT TO HORIZONTAL 800S250 -97 WITH STIFFCLIP AL600; (4) #12 SCREWS INTO ONE AND (2) #12 SCREWS INTO OTHER. 11 CONNECTION TO PARTITION PILASTER PER MANUF. REQMNTS. TOILET PARTITION SUPPORT A402 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" c• 5 -0 "AFF 5' -0 "AFF q. 5' -0 "AFF - 5' -0 "AFF 10 3" CV MOTHER 8 A402 600S162 -68 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. LIGHT FIXTURE SEE ELECTRICAL 9.. MOTHER'S COVE DETAIL SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -O" 00 --5/-81' GYP. BD. (WATER RESISTANT) AT WALLS (SEE PARTITION TYPE) 1/2" GYP. BOARD - PAINTED PNT4 - MATT FINISH ALL WALL SURFACES OF COVE 362S162 -33 STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 14ga. ANGLE FOR GYP. /ACT TRACK SUPPORT ACT SYSTEM, SUSPENDED FROM 6" MTL. STUDS B.O. ACT SYSTEM 8' -6" SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE STL. STUDS (SEE PARTITION TYPE) ATTACH STUD /JOIST W/ (4) #1/4 -1/2 SHT. METAL SCREWS (TYP.) 362S162 -33 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 600S162 -68 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 1 -4 1/2" GYP. BD. (WATER RESISTANT) AT CEILING /COVES CEILING MOUNTED TOILET PARTITIONS 7 RESTROOM CEILING SECTION A402 NOTE: SIGNS TO BE MOUNTED AT LATCH SIDE OF DOORS. SEE SHEET A405 6" (TYP.) MEN DETAIL A402 600S162 -68 STL. SCALE = 3" =11-0" RAISED GENDER SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED BARRIER FREE SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED GENDER TEXT (TYP.) RAISED BRAILLE GENDER TEXT(TYP.) STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 600T200 -43 STL. RUNNER TRACK. ATTACH TO MASONRY W/ HILTI HIT HY20 ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM W/ RODS, NUTS & WASHERS @ 48" O.C. LIGHT FIXTURE SEE ELECTRICAL 9 ■402 SCALE = 3/4" = 1/2" GYP. BOARD - PAINTED PNT4 - MATT FINISH ALL WALL SURFACES OF COVE 362S162 -33 STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. - - - B.O. GYP. CEILING 8' -6" SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE 0 RESTROOM COVE DETAIL SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 800S250 -97 STL. STUD /JOIST STARTING POINT OF (REFER TO DETAILS 5/A402 & STL. STUD JOISTS. 11/A402) FOR SUPPORT OF SEE DET. 5/A402 CLG. MTD. TOILET PARTITIONS. 600S162 -68 STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. (TYP.) 600S162 -68 GA STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 2' -4" 5/8" GYP. BD. (WATER RESISTANT) AT WALLS (SEE PARTITION TYPE) STL. STUDS (SEE PARTITION TYPE) ATTACH STUD /JOIST W/ (4) #1/4 -1/2 SHT. METAL SCREWS (TYP.) 362S162 -33 GA STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.0 -I. t 1 2' -4" - + 4 1/2" GYP. BD. (WATER RESISTANT) AT CEILING /SOFFITS (6 RESTROOM SOFFIT SECTION V10.2.) SCALE = 3/4" = 1' -0" CODEI�WED FOR COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISInN �r- L2x2x68 MIL. x 10" LONG @ EA. 600S162 -68. USE (6) #12 SCREWS. 600S162 -68 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 800S250 -97 STL. STUD /JOIST (REFER TO ENLARGED CEILING PLAN) L2x2x68 MIL. x 2" LONG W/ (4) #12 SCREWS TO 362S162 & (2) #12 SCREWS TO 800S250 362S162 -33 STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" O.C. CEILING CONNECTION TO PARTITION PILASTER BY OTHERS 5� TOILET PARTITION SUPPORT A402 / SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 24 "x48" SUSP. MTL. CLG. GRID W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT2) CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) 8' -6" 7' -6" 4 NOT USED A402 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 3 NOT USED A402 SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 4) @4' -0 "= 16' -0" 24 "x48" SUSP. MTL. CLG. GRID W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT2) CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) EQ EQ 4' -0" EQ 5-01/2" STARTING POINT OF STL. STUD JOISTS. SEE DET. 5/A402 ( ' 8005250 -97 STL. STUD /JOIST (REFER TO DETAILS 5/A402 & 11/A402) FOR SUPPORT OF CLG. MTD. TOILET PARTITIONS. 600S162 -68 STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. (TYP.) RESTROOM - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -O" 24 "x48" SUSP. MTL-CLG. GRID W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT2) CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) 600S362 -68 STL. STUD JOISTS @ 48" O.C. (TYP.) @ 14' -0" AFF. PROVIDE 600S362 -33 BRIDGING @ 48" O.C. ON TOP OF JOISTS. DOUBLE UP WALL STUDS WHERE JOISTS ARE SUPPORTED CLOSET ( 2.9;1 WAINSCOT W/ BUMPER GUARDS SEE DETAIL 3/A407 LOCKERS (N.I.C.) SHELVES & COAT RACK SEE DET. 2/A406 VENDING MACHINES (N.I.C.) LOCKERS (4) 18" WIDEi (1) 12" WIDE SHELVES SEE DETAIL 1/A406 ELEC. WATER COOLERS. SEE GENERAL NOTES & PLUMB. & ELEC. DWGS. THE ROO BREAK ROOM 118{ A405: TRAINING ROOM 108 BEADBOARD N/; WOOD TRIM & SHELF SEE DETAIL 5/A407 \• JANITOR'S CLOSET 1 I BREAK ROOM .SINK 1N/ BASE & UPPED: CABINET SEE DETAIL 5/A406 '.: AINSCOT W/ BUMPER GUARD SEE DETAIL 4/A407 MICROWAVE 11 (N.I.C.) 41 1" BULKHEAD ABOVE @ Tv MONITOR & MOUNT CENTERED ON WALL SEE DETAIL 3/A406 \ UVAINSCOT PANELS w/ BUMPER OUARDS. SEE DET. 4/A407 VIDEO .CABINET TV MONITOR & MOUNT SEE DETAIL 8/A406 1 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN A402 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" ( 2.9 Dk0.-- 01 2. {r \ RECEIVED APR 29 2010 PERMIT CENTER DATE 02/26/10 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■I ■II ■' ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS II PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. 0 DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 DRAWN BY: RTN PROJECT NO.: 55252805 CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. '! 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae;com 9243 S •.� GLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TU KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED PLANS & DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A402 41116. ■Alik_ __ AM. ...... 5' - 01/2 W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT1) ......■ ■1... Aii■ __ ■Iii. ....■ ./.■ /lb. AMI■ - ■4116.4MAIIIM...AINI■ _ III CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED ,d104111111111k I' , I 1 I IIu1O1III1111. ■1I 11■lI ul1iII 1ii1I 1111111111I 1114 11I 11 ■1 I1u1I 11111I 11u1 1I111111u1I1uI11111I111II111I11111 I1 111111 I I I I I IrI I 1 GY1P. I BD C.H.1 CEILING 8' -6'I °w I N I I Y I I I I I GYP. Hp. 1.411 7' -6 "W /R , • I I I I - I r-I - ( I D WNI1IGHT. GYP. I I I I I I I I I I I I B_ l T _ . _. cwE/ C=ILIN J,.I I'i_ I:.!'' I c 1 0 I 1 1 1 1 ,i + `!I, - 1 1 � _ ..� ;i - CI _- I o 1 C.H. 8' 6' r I I I I C.H. 8' -6' II I 11 C.H. 8' -6" _L 4 T - - Ijii1iI '! 7 II T 1 1 1 f 1 0 I Q IQ I I N I I I � �o I GYP. BD. C.H. 10' -0" : I I I I I I i € I I , GYP. BD. A4302 _ - _ - - I I I I I _ I 1 I I I COVE/CEILING 1 1 I I I I I I I I I GIP. Bd. S: F- F-I I (. ) - Ilk L�D�WNGHT G'[ C.H.I I1 8'-6 I C o - I I lik402 I 1I b - - of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I ■ ■_ I iI111111III111 �Il:1111111111111111! 1fI11I1111111111uu11111■ 11I1 ■ I1111111111■ I�I1IIII11111111111:111►111111 -..1- t. - - 5-01/2" STARTING POINT OF STL. STUD JOISTS. SEE DET. 5/A402 ( ' 8005250 -97 STL. STUD /JOIST (REFER TO DETAILS 5/A402 & 11/A402) FOR SUPPORT OF CLG. MTD. TOILET PARTITIONS. 600S162 -68 STL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. (TYP.) RESTROOM - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -O" 24 "x48" SUSP. MTL-CLG. GRID W/ LAYIN CLG. TILES (ACT2) CLG. HT. (C.H.) AS INDICATED (TYP.) 600S362 -68 STL. STUD JOISTS @ 48" O.C. (TYP.) @ 14' -0" AFF. PROVIDE 600S362 -33 BRIDGING @ 48" O.C. ON TOP OF JOISTS. DOUBLE UP WALL STUDS WHERE JOISTS ARE SUPPORTED CLOSET ( 2.9;1 WAINSCOT W/ BUMPER GUARDS SEE DETAIL 3/A407 LOCKERS (N.I.C.) SHELVES & COAT RACK SEE DET. 2/A406 VENDING MACHINES (N.I.C.) LOCKERS (4) 18" WIDEi (1) 12" WIDE SHELVES SEE DETAIL 1/A406 ELEC. WATER COOLERS. SEE GENERAL NOTES & PLUMB. & ELEC. DWGS. THE ROO BREAK ROOM 118{ A405: TRAINING ROOM 108 BEADBOARD N/; WOOD TRIM & SHELF SEE DETAIL 5/A407 \• JANITOR'S CLOSET 1 I BREAK ROOM .SINK 1N/ BASE & UPPED: CABINET SEE DETAIL 5/A406 '.: AINSCOT W/ BUMPER GUARD SEE DETAIL 4/A407 MICROWAVE 11 (N.I.C.) 41 1" BULKHEAD ABOVE @ Tv MONITOR & MOUNT CENTERED ON WALL SEE DETAIL 3/A406 \ UVAINSCOT PANELS w/ BUMPER OUARDS. SEE DET. 4/A407 VIDEO .CABINET TV MONITOR & MOUNT SEE DETAIL 8/A406 1 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN A402 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" ( 2.9 Dk0.-- 01 2. {r \ RECEIVED APR 29 2010 PERMIT CENTER DATE 02/26/10 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■I ■II ■' ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 03/09/10 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS II PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. 0 DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 DRAWN BY: RTN PROJECT NO.: 55252805 CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. '! 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae;com 9243 S •.� GLAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TU KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED PLANS & DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A402 r <33-F> < 29 -F <14-F> 33 -F it <33 -F 33 -F <33 -F> <29 -F> <14-F> II- � o � REAR WALL FROM SALES SCALE = 1 /8" = 1' -0" 14 -F> 1 11 111 111 1I 16 16 >< 15 14 -F> (c\ FRONT WALL FROM SALES SCALE = 1/8" = 1' -0" 33 -F 29 -F. < 33 -F> 29 -F 14 -F II— n — 14 -F <14-F> • RIGHT WALL FROM SALES SCALE = 1 /8" = 1' -0" 29 -F 33 -F A LEFT WALL FROM SALES A403 / SCALE = 1 /8" = 1' -0" <14-F> 33 -F 16 <33-F> 33 -F <14-E> 33 -F NOTE: 1. PROVIDE GYP. BD. CONTROL JOINTS (CJ) SPACED AT 30' -0" MAX. 14 -F> u 14 -F> *1 14 -F 15 Y 16 14 -F 33 -F 29 -F JI 14 -F> 30 1 33 -F 14 -F> 24 \ • 1 r 33 -F> <29-F> 14 -F> 15 > < 16 14 -F> <33-F> 14 -F> RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 1 REVIEWED FpR %PNQE NAY 12 2010 6 City of Tula BUILDING DIVISION CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS �+ 1 f LEGEND BUILDING MATERIAL COLOR CODE FOR INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST, SEE DWG. A501 CODE MATERIAL 1 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED SECURITY GLASS, "GL -3" (TEMPERED). 2 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1" INSULATED, BLUE - GREEN, LOW -E, FLOAT. GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL -5 ". 3 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING 1" INSULATING LAMINATED, BLUE - GREEN, LOW -E, LAMINATED GLASS DESIGNATED "GL -4" 4 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS, "GL -1" (TEMPERED). 5 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM. CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL -1" (TEMPERED) & "GL -2" (FLOAT). WHERE SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS. 6 WAINSCOT PANELS (WP1) 7 4" VINYL BASE. (VB1) 8 CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 9 H.M. DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED 10 CUSTOMER SERVICE RETURN COUNTER (O.S.I.) 11 STL. STRUCTURE, WRAP W/ BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT. 12 MTL. STUD LINTEL, WRAP WITH GYP. BD. TO MATCH ADJACENT. 13 WALL COVER GRAPHICS 14 GYP. BOARD PARTITION, PAINTED. 15 STL. STORE FIXTURES SHOWN AS DASHED 16 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE SEE DETS. 11- 14/A406 (REFER TO A101 FOR LOCATIONS) 17 GRAPHICS BY OTHERS 18 3" BUMPER GUARD. (BG1) 19 STEEL STRUCTURE, PAINTED. 20 EAS TRANSFORMER CABINET MOUNT TOP OF BOX @ 1' -10 ", TRIM VINYL BASE AS REQ'D (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) 21 IMPACT DOORS IN H.M. FRAME - FACTORY FINISHED BLACK. 22 NOT USED. 23 24" HIGH FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP SEE DET. 8/A406 24 2" CORNER GUARDS (CG1) 25 ALUMINUM SWINGING CART DOOR, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" LAMINATED, "GL -3 ". SEE SHEET A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 26 FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP. SEE DETAIL 8/A406 27 CONC. CART CURB 28 FULL HEIGHT CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 29 PERIMETER TRACK SYSTEM FOR OWNER SUPPLIED & INSTALLED SIGNAGE, ALL SUPPORTS (UNISTRUT, RODS, NUTS, ETC.) ARE SUPPLIED BY GC. SUPPORTS AND PERIMETER TRACK SHALL BE PAINTED AS NOTED. 30 JUNCTION BOXES (2" D. MAX.) WITH COVER PLATES FOR EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE. BOXES SHALL BE RECESSED WITH ALL WIRING /CABLING CONCEALED IN THE FURRED -OUT PARTITION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER'S MANUFACTURER. PAINT COVER PLATES TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL. 31 TACTILE "EXIT" SIGN AT 60" AFF TO CENTERLINE 32 ALUM. CART RAILING. SEE DETAIL 15/A406. 33 STEEL COLUMN, PAINTED ABOVE W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE BELOW. SEE DET. 8/A407. CODE COLOR A PNT1 - #2147 -60 "DARK LINEN" B PNT2 - #OC -65 "CHANTILLY LACE" C PNT3 - #OC -89 "BUTTER PECAN" D PNT4 - #I -79 "ATRIUM WHITE" E PNT5 - #1055 "ALGONQUIN TRAIL" F PNT6- #1038 "EVERLASTING" G PNT7 - #AC -25 "HARBOR GRAY" J WC1 K WC2 NO. NO. DATE 02/26/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 9243 SC DO LAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON o5. to- tc) STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE 1 /8" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A4O3R 0 . . . . . . .". = . . 7 > 1 >< 6> < 20 8 5 2 OPEN 13' - 1/8" / EQ EQ EQ • • 1 < 11 > < 5 > < 26 > TYP. VESTIBULE ELEVATION TYP. CART STORAGE ELEVATION SCALE = 1/4" = <14F> 40' - 4 1/4" < 14-F SCALE = 1/4" = 1-0" 13 - 3" 13' - 0" 14' - 1 1/4" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 0 (NI < 11 > 7. 7 OPEN 7 7. 7- 7 N. . . . .... . - . . . .. .. • • . ...".*.".'. . . . . . .• -." . • • . . . . .• . .". ".' .".." . . . . . . . .• . ..•.• .• .• •.• C \ 0 0 \ \ 0 VESTIBULE ELEVATION SCALE = 1/4" = < 11 < 18 > < 6> <14-F 1Z - 1/2" EQ EQ \ < 11 > / / / \ \ \ \ / / / / / / / / 0. \ 4" VINYL BASE. (VB1) 8 CORNER GUARDS (CG2) \ H.M. DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED 10 \ 11 STL. STRUCTURE, WRAP W/ BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT. 12 \ 13 WALL COVER GRAPHICS \ (2) EQ. SPACES 15 \ < 11 > < 18 > F VESTIBULE ELEVATION N.A4O4 SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" 14' - 1 1/4" < 5 > 13' - 0" EQ EQ EQ EQ 7 13' - 3" EQ EQ '.". -..'.... . • *. *. ". .• '." ' ... • . . . .. A404 OPEN / / / / \ \ \ \ \ \ / 4 / / / / / — / 4" VINYL BASE. (VB1) 8 CORNER GUARDS (CG2) < 18 > F VESTIBULE ELEVATION N.A4O4 SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" 14' - 1 1/4" < 5 > 13' - 0" EQ EQ EQ EQ 7 13' - 3" EQ EQ '.". -..'.... . • *. *. ". .• '." ' ... • . . . .. A404 OPEN / / / / / / / g \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ 4 / / / / < 11 > VESTIBULE ELEVATION FROM SALES SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" < 11 > VESTIBULE ELEVATION SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" 1131111E.111111 k 01 2, RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 PERMIT CENTER / REVIEWED-Foi-"r-' CODECOMPLIANCE APPROVED milt 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION LEGEND BUILDING COLOR CODE MATERIAL FOR INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST, SEE DWG. A501 CODE MATERIAL 1 i 2 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1" INSULATED, BLUE-GREEN, LOW-E, FLOAT. GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL-5". 3 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING 1" INSULATING LAMINATED, BLUE-GREEN, LOW-E, LAMINATED GLASS DESIGNATED "GL-4" 4 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS, "GL-1" (TEMPERED). 5 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM. CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL-1" (TEMPERED) & "GL-2" (FLOAT). WHERE SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS. \\ - — 7 4" VINYL BASE. (VB1) 8 CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 9 H.M. DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED 10 CUSTOMER SERVICE RETURN COUNTER (O.S.I.) 11 STL. STRUCTURE, WRAP W/ BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT. 12 MTL. STUD LINTEL, WRAP WITH GYP. BD. TO MATCH ADJACENT. 13 WALL COVER GRAPHICS 14 (2) EQ. SPACES 15 .... (2) EQ. SPACES a— (2) EQ. SPACES WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE SEE DETS. 11-14/A406 (REFER TO A101 FOR LOCATIONS) 17 GRAPHICS BY OTHERS 18 3" BUMPER GUARD. (BG1) 19 STEEL STRUCTURE, PAINTED. 20 EAS TRANSFORMER CABINET MOUNT TOP OF BOX @ 1-10", TRIM VINYL BASE AS REQ'D (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) 21 IMPACT DOORS IN H.M. FRAME - FACTORY FINISHED BLACK. 22 NOT USED. 23 24" HIGH FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP SEE DET. 8/A406 24 2" CORNER GUARDS (CG1) 25 ALUMINUM SWINGING CART DOOR, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" LAMINATED, "GL-3". SEE SHEET A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 26 FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP. SEE DETAIL 8/A406 27 CONC. CART CURB 28 FULL HEIGHT CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 29 PERIMETER TRACK SYSTEM FOR OWNER SUPPLIED & INSTALLED SIGNAGE, ALL SUPPORTS (UNISTRUT, RODS, NUTS, ETC.) ARE SUPPLIED BY GC. SUPPORTS AND PERIMETER TRACK SHALL BE PAINTED AS NOTED. / / / / \ \ \ g \ 31 TACTILE "EXIT" SIGN AT 60" AFF TO CENTERLINE 32 ALUM. CART RAILING. SEE DETAIL 15/A406. 33 STEEL COLUMN, PAINTED ABOVE W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE BELOW. SEE DET. 8/A407. / / / / / / \ \ \ \ \ \ 1• / / \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ / / / i / J I \ \ \ \ / / / / \ \ \ \ \/ R N/ VESTIBULE ELEVATION SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" 1131111E.111111 k 01 2, RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 PERMIT CENTER / REVIEWED-Foi-"r-' CODECOMPLIANCE APPROVED milt 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION LEGEND BUILDING COLOR CODE MATERIAL FOR INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST, SEE DWG. A501 CODE MATERIAL 1 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED SECURITY GLASS, "GL-3" (TEMPERED). 2 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1" INSULATED, BLUE-GREEN, LOW-E, FLOAT. GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL-5". 3 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING 1" INSULATING LAMINATED, BLUE-GREEN, LOW-E, LAMINATED GLASS DESIGNATED "GL-4" 4 AUTO. ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS, "GL-1" (TEMPERED). 5 ALUMINUM & GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM. CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS DESIGNATED: "GL-1" (TEMPERED) & "GL-2" (FLOAT). WHERE SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS. 6 WAINSCOT PANELS (WP1) 7 4" VINYL BASE. (VB1) 8 CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 9 H.M. DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED 10 CUSTOMER SERVICE RETURN COUNTER (O.S.I.) 11 STL. STRUCTURE, WRAP W/ BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT. 12 MTL. STUD LINTEL, WRAP WITH GYP. BD. TO MATCH ADJACENT. 13 WALL COVER GRAPHICS 14 GYP. BOARD PARTITION, PAINTED. 15 STL. STORE FIXTURES SHOWN AS DASHED 16 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE SEE DETS. 11-14/A406 (REFER TO A101 FOR LOCATIONS) 17 GRAPHICS BY OTHERS 18 3" BUMPER GUARD. (BG1) 19 STEEL STRUCTURE, PAINTED. 20 EAS TRANSFORMER CABINET MOUNT TOP OF BOX @ 1-10", TRIM VINYL BASE AS REQ'D (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) 21 IMPACT DOORS IN H.M. FRAME - FACTORY FINISHED BLACK. 22 NOT USED. 23 24" HIGH FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP SEE DET. 8/A406 24 2" CORNER GUARDS (CG1) 25 ALUMINUM SWINGING CART DOOR, CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. GLAZING: 1/4" LAMINATED, "GL-3". SEE SHEET A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 26 FLOOR MOUNTED CART STOP. SEE DETAIL 8/A406 27 CONC. CART CURB 28 FULL HEIGHT CORNER GUARDS (CG2) 29 PERIMETER TRACK SYSTEM FOR OWNER SUPPLIED & INSTALLED SIGNAGE, ALL SUPPORTS (UNISTRUT, RODS, NUTS, ETC.) ARE SUPPLIED BY GC. SUPPORTS AND PERIMETER TRACK SHALL BE PAINTED AS NOTED. 30 JUNCTION BOXES (2" D. MAX.) WITH COVER PLATES FOR EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE. BOXES SHALL BE RECESSED WITH ALL WIRING/CABLING CONCEALED IN THE FURRED-OUT PARTITION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER'S MANUFACTURER. PAINT COVER PLATES TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL. 31 TACTILE "EXIT" SIGN AT 60" AFF TO CENTERLINE 32 ALUM. CART RAILING. SEE DETAIL 15/A406. 33 STEEL COLUMN, PAINTED ABOVE W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE BELOW. SEE DET. 8/A407. CODE COLOR A PNT1 - #2147-60 "DARK LINEN" B PNT2 - #0C-65 "CHANTILLY LACE" C PNT3 - #0C-89 "BUTTER PECAN" D PNT4 - #I-79 "ATRIUM WHITE" E PNT5 - #1055 "ALGONQUIN TRAIL" F PNT6- #1038 "EVERLASTING" G PNT7 - #AC-25 "HARBOR GRAY" J WC1 K WC2 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE I: architecture engineering, P.C. 1811 4 Mile Rd NE and Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com SC DO LAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON fr2, &:_f• 0 r STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE 1/4" = 1'-0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A404 Aj CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS 3' -6" 1' -0" 39 " -41 BACKSPLASH TO BE 1/2" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLEBOARD W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLAM2) ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACE ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE OF LAMINATE FROM BOTTOM OF EDGE TO BACK OF COUNTERTOP 3/4" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLEBOARD W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLAM2) ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES PROVIDE 3/4" RADIUS AT OUTSIDE EDGES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 5/8" GYP. BD. (TYP.) NOTE: SEE ADJACENT DETAIL FOR COUNTERTOP /BACKSPLASH INFORMATION. 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 03/29/10 04/27/10 ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS 1/2" PLYWD. SPACER 14 "x22" STL. WALL STUDS REFER TO DWG. A401 FOR PARTITION TYPES \ 3/4" PLYWOOD BACKUP; BACKER SHEET ON ALL CONCEALED SURFACES (6) - #8 WD. SCREWS x 1" LONG 36" MAX. BETWEEN BRACKET & COUNTER 1/8" THICK STL. 21"x15" WORK STATION BRACKET (WHITE) T WHERE INDICATED IN ELEVATIONS BY: A &M HARDWARE, INC. 400 W. GRAMBY ST. MANHEIM, PA 17545 (888) 647 -0200 (7) - #12 WD. SCREWS x 21/2" ,— LONG BETWEEN BRACKET & 2x12'S 2x12 BLOCKING SEE DETAIL 3/A405 2 "x1 "x1' -0" LONG x 14 GA. ANGLES - SEE INTERIOR ELEV. FOR LOCATIONS COUNTER 11 "x14" PLYWD. SPACER. ATTACH TO 2x12 ALONG BOTH SIDES WITH 8d BOX NAILS @ 6" O.C. PROVIDE 1" RADIUS AT TOP & BOTTOM EDGES PENCIL DRAWER BY: TIFFANY INDUSTRIES I05 CS11 COLLECTION CENTER PENCIL DRAWER, 2 "H x 21"W x 16 "D, BLACK 2x12 BLOCKING (AVAILABLE AT OFFICE DEPOT) 5/8" GYP. BD. (TYP.) (8) - 8d BOX NAILS IN EA. END OF EA. 2x12 1/2" PLYWD. SEE DETAIL SPACER 3/A405 (6) - #8 WD. SCREWS x 1" LONG 8d BOX NAILS @ 6" O.C. EA. SIDE OF 1/2" PLYWD. BRACKET SEE DETAIL 3/A405 (3) - #12 WD. SCREWS x 2 1/2" LONG SPACED @ CTR. OF ANGLE AND 2" IN FROM BOTH ENDS 2x12 BLOCKING BETWEEN STEEL WALL STUDS. ATTACH EA. END OF 2x12 TO WEB OF STL. WALL STUD W/ (8) - 8d BOX NAILS ELECTRIC HAND DRYER; SEE LIST OF ACCESSORIES ON A402 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1/2" THICK SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL (SSM1); REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH AND MATERIALS LIST ON A5.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ATTACH (SSM1) TO CERAMIC TILE WITH 100% SILICONE ADHESIVE; SEE NOTE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDE EASED EDGES; ALL SIDES TYP. SEAL PERIMETER W/ CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT, TYP. TOP OF BASE VARIES NOTE: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SSM1, GC SHALL CLEAN CERAMIC TILE THOROUGHLY. PLACE PERIMETER BEAD OF SILICONE ADHESIVE AROUND ENTIRE EDGE OF SSM1 THEN PLACE 1/8" BEAD EVERY 8 -10" ON BACK OF SSM1. DETAIL 2 DETAIL SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 3 COUNTERTOP /DRAWER DETAIL A405 % SCALE = 1" = 1' -0" 3B COUNTERTOP SUPPORT DETAIL (3cCOUNTERTOP SUPPORT DETAIL SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" A405 / SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" DETAIL AT HAND DRYER A405 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" A405 SCALE = 1 /2" = 1' -0" 15 > < 34 X 36 > < 23 -F PROTOTYPE UPDATES (BEYOND) (BEYOND) NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 • 1' -91/2" PROCESSING ROOM COUNT ROOM COUNT ROOM /Z MANAGER'S OFFICE SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" A405 SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" Y MANAGER'S OFFICE A405 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" X \TRAINING ROOM TRAINING ROOM ■405 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" II STOP BUMPER GUARD ALLOW FOR FLUSH MOUNTING SURFACE FOR COAT RACK MOUNTING BRACKET REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE A406 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVIRIniv 26 > <_18> (BEYOND) (BEYOND) 26 <18> (BEYOND) (BEYOND) 18 i (BEYOND) P BREAK ROOM U \BREAK ROOM T BREAK ROOM S BREAK ROOM LEGEND n TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae:com SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" =1' -0" <24 -G> <23 -F> 23 -F> <24 -G >'( 21 FOR TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES LIST, SEE DWG. A402 FOR INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST, SEE DWG. A501 BUILDING MATERIAL CODE COLOR CODE MATERIAL bio- 07 2, CUSTOM CHAIR RAIL. SEE DET. 6/A407 PORCELAIN TILE COVE BASE (PT3) WATER HEATER & SHELF. (REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS) FULL HEIGHT FRP PANELS ON ALL SIDES OF JANITOR'S CLOSET. SEE DETAIL 7/A406 MOP SINK (REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS) 4" VINYL BASE (VB1) REFRIGERATOR. LOCKERS. VENDING MACHINES. 5 NOT USED Q MOTHER'S ROOM SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" P \MOTHER'S ROOM A405 j' SCALE = 1 /4" = 1' -0" 0 MOTHER'S ROOM A405 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1 /4" = 1' -0" 1x6 WD. BASE, PAINTED COUNTER W/ (2) PENCIL DRAWERS. 3/4" X 11" WIDE MELAMINE ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. PLUG. MOLD. (REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) ELEC. WATER COOLERS; PROVIDE CANE TOUCH APRON. @ HIGH WATER COOLER (REFER TO ELEC. & PLUMBING DRAWINGS) 3" BUMPER GUARD (BG2 @ BREAK / TRAINING) WAINSCOT PANELS (WP1) BARRIER FREE SIGN @ 60" A.F.F. TO CENTERLINE. SAFE, (31" D X 39" W X 62 1/2" H) VERIFY WEIGHT W/ MANUF. GYP. BD. PARTITION, PAINTED. H.M. DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED. 4" VINYL BASE (VB2 @ BREAK / TRAINING) WAINSCOT PANELS (WP2 @ BREAK/TRAINING). real (� >r GC TO PURCHASE AND INSTALL DVR SHELF MODEL #SS1914PB22, FROM BRIAN CERA (x103) OR LISA MOLDANDO (x101) @ VIKING ASSOC., 1- 800 - 233 -0403. WAINSCOT BEADBOARD (WP3) W/ SHELF ABOVE, PAINTED. SEE DETAIL 5/A407 SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" A405 J SCALE = 1 /4" = 1-0" SCALE = 1 /4" = 1-0" H JANITOR'S G JANITOR'S A405 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 3/4" PLYWOOD BETWEEN STUDS FOR SUPPORT OF MIS CABINET (SHADED) TV MONITOR & MOUNT. SEE DETAIL 3/A406 JANITORS: 12" WIDE ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; TRAINING: (4) ROWS 18 ", (1) 12" ADJUSTABLE SHELF, SEE DETAIL 1/A406. TOILET COMPARTMENT (TPTN1 - MEN'S & WOMEN'S) EMPIRE STYLE (CEILING MOUNTED) BY KNICKERBOCKER CORPORATION. ATTACH PER MFG RECOMMENDATIONS. SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 18" WIDE SHELVES & COAT RACK BY MAGNUSON GROUP: DS -5H, BLACK. SEE DETAIL 2/A406 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 KV #80, 36" HIGH WHITE STANDARDS @ 24" O.C. MAX AND KV #180, WHITE SHELF BRACKETS. MOUNT STANDARDS OVER DRYWALL THRU 16 GA. METAL STRAPPING @ 24" O.C. MAX. PRO -LINK AEROSOL FRAGRANCE DISPENSER MODEL NO. AOODA- SERENE FRAGRANCE TIME SET CONTROL INTERVAL =20 MIN. DAY /NIGHT SENSOR SETTING =DAY PHONE NO.: 1- 800 - 745 -4657. F WOMEN'S E WOMEN'S WOMEN'S � WOMEN'S WOMEN'S A WOMEN'S A40V SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" SCALE = 1 /4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETE THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. PROVIDE 4" X 16 GA. STRAPPING BETWEEN STUDS & DRYWALL @ TOP, BOTTOM & MIDPOINT OF SHELF STRANDARDS FOR ANCHORING. FILE CABINET (BY OWNER). LOCATION FULL HEIGHT CORNER GUARDS (CG2) TUKWILA, WA WORK STATION BRACKET. SEE DETAIL 3/A405. CORNER GUARDS (CG2, CG3 @ BREAK / TRAINING / CONFERENCE) DRAWING TITLE CODE COLOR A PNT1 - #2147 -60 "DARK LINEN" B PNT2 - #OC -65 "CHANTILLY LACE" Rpm CE�VE C PNT3 - #OC -89 "BUTTER PECAN" n d— D PNT4 - #I -79 "ATRIUM WHITE" APR 29 2010 E PNT5 - #1055 "ALGONQUIN TRAIL" F PNT6- #1038 "EVERLASTING" PERMIT CENTER G PNT7 - #AC -25 "HARBOR GRAY" J WC1 K WC2 INT. ELEVATIONS & DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A405 NEW OR EXSTING STUD WALL 2x4 WD. ALIGNMENT PLATE 2x4 (SELECT GRADE B & BETTER) - MATCH HT. OF FIXTURE - ATTACH TO FIXTURE UPRIGHT W/ 1" SELF - TAPPING METAL SCREWS FIXTURE UPRIGHT (BY OTHERS) NONE OF THE SHELF OPENING ARE TO BE BLOCKED BY CONNECTORS PAINT EDGE OF 2x4 (WHITE) TO MATCH FIXTURE UPRIGHTS CONT.SEALANT (WHITE) 18 DETAIL A406 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" CUT OFF EXCESS FABRIC & BEND POINTS DOWN. NO EXPOSED BARBS. TERMINAL POST CAP RAIL END BAND TENSION BAR TENSION BANDS @ 120.C. FENCE TIES @ 24" O.C. N EXISTING CONC. WALL 2x6 WD. ALIGNMENT PLATE 2x4 - MATCH HT. OF FIXTURE - ATTACH TO FIXTURE UPRIGHT W/ 1" SELF - TAPPING METAL SCREWS FIXTURE UPRIGHT (BY OTHERS) NONE OF THE SHELF OPENINGS ARE TO BE BLOCKED \ BY CONNECTORS PLAS. LAM. (PLAM3) WAINSCOT MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD CONT. SEALANT (WHITE) 19 DETAIL A406 / SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 17\ DETAIL @ CHAINLINK FENCE A40 / SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" CART BUMPER FURN. & INSTALLED BY G.C. PER MFRS. INSTRUCTIONS. MODEL CART STOP RE2 COLOR: #111 SILVER McCUE CORP. 35 CONGRESS ST. SALEM, MA 01970 PHONE: (978) 741 -8500 COVER FLANGE #509 CARPET TILE 6" L 16 DETAIL 1 = SCALE = 1 1 SCALE 1 /2" = 1' -0" "McCUE CORPORATION " CART STOP FLANGE ANCHOR MODEL: CSFA -10 -KIT (SEE PLAN) 6' -0" MAX FORMED BENDS SHALL BE FORMED FROM EXTRUDED 6063 -T4 ALUM. OF 1 1/2" SCHEDULE 40 PIPE SIZE (BRUSHED ANODIZED FINISH) TERMINAL POST CAP (BEYOND) 1 1/2" DIA. STL. PIPE TOP AND BOTTOM RAILS. 2" DIA. STL. PIPE W /6 "x6 "x3/8" STL. BASE PLATE WELDED TO BOTTOM- EQUALLY SPACED NOT TO EXCEED 8' -0" 0.C. CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC FENCE TIES @ 24" 0.C. "HILTI" HIT150 EPDXY INJECTION SYSTEM W /(4) 3/8" DIA. THREADED RODS (EMBED 3" MIN.) AND NUTS AND WASHERS. ALL RAILING COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY G.C. RAILING AVAILABLE FROM: SUPERIOR ALUMINUM PRODUCTS, INC. SERIES 500 PIPE RAILING 15 CART RAIL g VESTIBULE \ ALL POSTS & RAILS SHALL BE FORMED FROM EXTRUDED 6063 -T6 ALUM. OF 1 1/2" SCHEDULE 40 PIPE SIZE (BRUSHED ANODIZED FINISH) W/ ALUM. OR STAINLESS STL. FASTENERS EMBED POSTS 4" INTO CONCRETE W/ #509 COVER FLANGE & REINFORCEMENT ROD / COVER FLANGE #509 CARPET TILE KA40/) A406 SCALE = 3/4" = 1' -0" NOTE: GC RESPONSIBLE FOR WELDING GONDOLAS TO STL. ALIGNMENT PLATE 11' -8" A.F.F. STUD PARTITION 4 x 1/4 STL. PLATE ATTACHED TO STL. TE W/ DRYWALL SCREWS @ 12" 0.C. (COUNTERSUNK) 6 "W. 16 GA STL. PLATE ATTACHED TO STUDS. STUDS @ 16" O.C. (TYP) 11' -8" A.F.F. STEEL PLATE DETAIL I MASONRY SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 2X4 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE ANCHOR TO STUDS W/ 3" LONG DRYWALL SCREWS EACH STUD 600S162 -33 STL. STUDS @ 16" 0.C. (TYP) STUD PARTITION 13 DETAIL • • 11' -8" A.F.F. A406 SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" PARTITION TYPE 'E' AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLAN. HOLD GYP.BD. 2" BELOW TOP OF FIXTURE. REFER TO FIXTURE PLAN (F1) Y 11' -8" A.F.F. 2X6 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE CONT. BETWEEN COLUMNS. ATTACH TO ANGLES W/ 3/8" DIA. BOLTS W/ NUTS AND WASHERS. ALIGN FACE OF 2X6 W/ FACE OF 2X4 PLATE @ FLOOR AND FACE OF COLUMNS. 2X4 WOOD FLOOR PLATE ANCHORED TO SLAB W/ HILTI DX X- CF72S8 POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS @ 24" 0.C. (ALIGN W/ 2X6 WOOD PLATE ABOVE) DETAIL /1 ' EXIST. CONC. WALL 4" x 1/4" CONT. STL PLATE ATTACHED TO CONCRETE W/ 3/8" DIA. HILTI HAS ROD & HIT /HY 150 ADHESIVE @4' -0" 0.C. EMBED 3 1/2" INTO CONCRETE OR GROUT FILLED MASONRY (MIN. 4" EDGE DISTANCE REQ'D) NOTE: SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQ'D. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 1 H. MASONRY EXIST. CONC. WALL 2X4 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLA ANCHOR TO WALL W/ 3/8" DI HILTI HAS ROD & HIT /HY 150 ADHESIVE @4' -0" 0.C. EMBED 3 1/2" INTO CONCRETE OR GROUT FILLED MASONRY (MIN. 4" EDGE DISTANCE REQ'D) REDUCER MOULDING (VT1) EXTEND THREE FULL TILES INTO PRE -SALES AREA 4" DIA. BOLLARD. SEE DETAIL 4/A101 6' -81/2" 24" HIGH FLOOR MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL CART GUARD FROM MCCUE CORPORATION MODEL NO: GARD -24 -SS PHONE #: 1- 800 - 800 -8503 NOTE: SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQ'D. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 1 H. 4x4x1/4 "X4" LONG CLIP ANGLES w/ 1/2 "w. x 1 -1/2" LONG SLOT FOR ANCHOR @ 6' -0" 0.C. ANCHOR w/ 3/8" DIA. HILTI HAS ROD & HIT /HY 150 ADHESIVE @ 4' -0" 0.C. EMBED 3 1/2" INTO CONCRETE OR GROUT FILLED MASONRY (MIN. 4" EDGE DISTANCE REQ'D) EXIST. CONC. WALL NOTE: SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQ'D. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 1 H. A406 SCALE = 1" = 1' -0" 11 NOT USED A406 SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 10 DETAIL 600T200 -43 STL. RUNNER TRACK ATTACH TO MASONRY W /HILTI HIT HY20 ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM W/ RODS, NUTS & WASHERS @ 48" O.C. 600S162 -33 GA STL. STUD /JOISTS @ 16" 0.C. 1/2" GYP. BD. (WATER RES. IN TOILET ROOMS) STL. STUDS (SEE PARTITION TYPE) ATTACH STUD /JOIST W/ (4) #1/4 -1/2 SHT. METAL SCREWS (TYP) ING HFI(3HT SEE FINISH SCHED. A406 z cc w U SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 2' -0" CLEAR (MIN.) LIGHT FIXTURE. (VERIFY OPENING REQUIREMENTS). STL. STUD /JOIST HEADERS W /STL. RUNNER TRACKS TOP & BOTTOM (TYP) it L GHT FIXTURE PARALLEL TO CEILING FRAMING DETAIL 3 "x3 "x3" 18 GA STL. ANGLES ATTACHED TO STL. STUDS W /(2) #14- 1/2 SHEET MTL. SCREWS. i 2' -0" 5/8" GYP. BD. (WATER RESISTANT IN TOILET ROOMS) CLEAR (MIN.) STL. STUD /JOIST OPENING FRAMING. (VERIFY OPENING SIZE REQMTS. FOR LIGHT FIXTURE.) STEEL STUD JOISTS @ 16" 0.C. `A406 / SCALE = 1 /2" = 1' -0" 0 LIGHT FIXTURE PERPENDICULAR TO CEILING FRAMING z 2 CC w J U 8 1 NOTE: CART GUARDS TO BE INSTALLED AFTER FIXTURE INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE. LOCATE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO CORNER OF FIXTURE. IMPACT DOOR A406 N co N SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" FACE OF GYP. BD. PARTITION CONT. SEALANT 1/8" SPACE & SEALANT EDGE CAP FRP PANEL FRP PANEL EDGE CAP SINK EDGE DETAIL SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP 1I!lil1a!I1i IIl HOLD BACK PLYWOOD AT PERIMETER OF SINK OPENING AS REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING BRACKET MOUNTING BRACKET 1/4" RAD. AT SINK OPENING JOINT ADHESIVE TYP. AT PERM. OF SINK EDGE OF SINK FASTENER & THREADED PLUG 1' -0" 2' -3" UPPER CABINET A — 1/4" TOP & BOTTOM RADIUS 2' 1" 1/8" SPACE & SEALANT INSIDE CORNER MOULDING FRP PANEL INSIDE CORNER NOTES: COLOR INTEGRAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) PANELS APPLIED W /ADHESIVE OVER GYP. BD. PARTITION. MOLDINGS SHALL BE USED AT ALL JOINTS. FRP PANELS TO BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE W/ MFRS. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. CONTRACTOR TO 1/8" SPACE & SEALANT PROVIDE ALL MOLDINGS, ADHESIVES & SEALANTS AS REQ'D. CONT. SEALANT OWNER APPROVED EQUALS ARE ACCEPTABLE. SECTION B MOP SINK. SEE PLUMBING DWGS. BASE p MOP SINK 7 DETAIL A406 1 a w 0 x SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 'MARLITE' FRP PANELS COLOR: S -100G WHITE (SMOOTH SURFACE) MANUFACTURED BY: MARLITE 202 HARGER STREET DOVER, OH 44622 PHONE: (440) 343 -6621 10' - 5 1/4" 2 1/2" 1'- 111/4" SECTION A r 3' -0" 3' -0" / /I0 / \ \ \ \\ z \ / �- ray, iii 111 - IJ II- — — — — — — — -r7 11--I- . � _ oi II I u III IIIII I I II I III I 11 III I U I Hi 1 II 1 I I I II III Hi I 1 I I 1 I WOMENS ELEVATION C -C LAVATORIES: WILSONART SOLID SURFACE UNDERMOUNT LAVATORY BOWL: BV123, COLOR 1573 -SL "FROSTY WHITE ". ADHERE SINK TO UNDERSIDE OF COUNTERTOP USING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED JOINT ADHESIVE. 9' -51/4" 2' -0" 2 -0" / /I0 / \ \ \ \\ z \ / �- -1IJ - - II -\ » .1 el \ -1F ` -/ I.1 IIIII 1 F 11 IIIII II I I IIIII I I I U I III I U IIIII MENS ELEVATION B -B NOTE: VANITY COUNTER CONSTRUCTED OF: COUNTERTOP SURFACE -1/2" THICK SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL (SSM1) W/ SEAMLESS BACKSPLASH. ADHERE TO COUNTERTOP USING MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED JOINT ADHESIVE. FRONT APRON, PIPE ENCLOSURE - (PLAM1) (PROVIDE 1/8" RADIUS ON ALL EDGES.) 2x4 WOOD FRAME LAG BOLT TO WALL. SECTION A -A / REMOVABLE / PANEL "Z" CLIP CABINET FRAMING \ 1/2" HIGH DENSITY \ PARTICLE BOARD W/ \ PLASTIC LAMINATE N (PLAM1) ON ALL N. EXPOSED EDGES. 0 CONT. 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING BEHIND VANITY COUNTER. 2' -0" B(— VANITY COUNTER END SUPPORT W/ 1 1/2" W. VERT. STRIP SUPPORT ATTACH TO WALL W/ COUNTERSUNK SCREWS. (TYPICAL) CONT. 2x4 BLOCKING UNDER COUNTER. 6 ELEVATION / / A406 SCALE = 3/4" = 1' -0" AF )8" MIN. NOM. g / m / CABINET FRAMING 1 SECURING 1 LATCH BF z 2 VANITY COUNTER 1/4" RADIUS EDGE (o 1/2" HIGH DENSITY 1 PARTICLE BOARD W/ 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLAM1) ON ALL EXPOSED EDGES. MIN. 1/16" GAP TWIST & LOCK / REMOVABLE / PANEL NOTES: COUNTERTOP: 25" W. x 76" L. COUNTERTOP TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF (1) LAYER OF 3/4" PLYWD. W/ 1/2" THICK SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL (SSM1 ) W/ SEAMLESS BACKSPLASH (SSM1) ADHERE TO COUNTERTOP USING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED JOINT ADHESIVE. BLANK APRON AND END PANEL: TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF (1) LAYER OF 3/4" PLYWD. W/ (PLAM2) CASEWORK: BASE CABINET AND UPPER CABINET AS INDICATED HEREIN. CABINET DOORS, SIDE, TOP AND BOTTOM SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED 3/4" PLY'D W/ (PLAM2), ALL INTERIOR SURFACES AND SHELVES SHALL BE MELAMINE (WHITE). CABINETS SHALL BE COMPLETE, INCLUDING HARDWARE: PROVIDE 4" DOOR PULL (BRUSHED CHROME FINISH), CONCEALED HINGES, SHELVES AND SUPPORTS. SINK: REFER TO DRAWING P301 FOR INFORMATION. ADHERE SINK TO UNDERSIDE OF COUNTERTOP USING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED JOINT ADHESIVE AND MANUFACTURER PROVIDED CLIPS. SUBMIT ALL DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. REFER TO SINK EDGE DETAIL ABOVE. 6' -4" 2' -1" Bj 1' -6" 5 ELEVATION A406 PNT6 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" EDGE OF SOFFIT ABOVE 1/4" REVEAL FROM TOP OF WAINSCOT TO BOTTOM OF SOFFIT EXTENT OF WC2 GYPSUM BOARD (SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE) 4 PLAN DETAIL \ A406 SCALE = 6" = 1' -0" 3 DETAIL "c 'm 1/2" .3/4" ATTACH TO (2) STUDS W/ METAL STUD FASTENER KIT PER MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS. BLACK TILT WALL MOUNT MONITOR BRACKET. FURNISHED BY TRU & INSTALLED BY G.C. 26" HDTV LCD TV. FURNISHED BY TRU & INSTALLED BY G.C. GYP. BD. PARTITION. REFER TO PLANS FOR PARTITION TYPE. A406 SCALE = 1 1/2" = 8' - 6" (CEILING HEIGHT) SUSP. CEILING MTL. STUD PARTITION SOLID 2x4 WD. BLOCKING @ TOP & BOTTOM OF EA. SUPPORT BRACKET ANCHORED TO MTL. STUDS. 5' -0" L. STL. HANGER STYLE WALL RACK. BY MAGNUSON GROUP, DS -5H, BLACK WAINSCOT FINISH FLOOR LINE 2 SECTION A406 / SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 1' -0" 0 FINISH FLOOR SUSPENDED CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE (TYP) 2x4 WOOD BLOCKING @ SUPPORT BRACKETS ATTACHED TO STUDS. (TYP) 12" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELVES. r 2' - 0 1/2" BLANK APRON i 1'- 113/4" END RETURN REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SHELF BRACKETS - (TYP) COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE. (7) 6' -0 ", (2) 1' -0" LONG, SLOTTED STANCHIONS @ 24" O.C. (SEE ELEV. W /A405) ANCHOR TO PARTITION W/ FLATHEAD WOOD SCREWS. COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE 362S162 -54 STL. STUDS @ 16" 0.C. 8' -0" LONG SLOTTED STANCHIONS @ 24" O.C. ANCHOR TO PARTITION W/ FLATHEAD WOOD SCREWS. COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE JANITOR'S CLOSET 1 DETAIL TRAINING RORE.. OF ADJ. SHELVES @ JANITOR'S CLOSET & TRAINING ROOM A406 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 12" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELF LOCKERS (DASHED) 18" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELVES EIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER 1 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 1 DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 03/29/10 ADDENDUM NO. 1 (NOT REISSUED) 04/27/10 NO. 0 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveaecom STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A406 / /I0 / \ \ \ \\ z \ / �- -1IJ - - II . cc 0 / / v A— 2 -3" B— 4' -0" 1 " PANEL 5 ELEVATION A406 PNT6 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" EDGE OF SOFFIT ABOVE 1/4" REVEAL FROM TOP OF WAINSCOT TO BOTTOM OF SOFFIT EXTENT OF WC2 GYPSUM BOARD (SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE) 4 PLAN DETAIL \ A406 SCALE = 6" = 1' -0" 3 DETAIL "c 'm 1/2" .3/4" ATTACH TO (2) STUDS W/ METAL STUD FASTENER KIT PER MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS. BLACK TILT WALL MOUNT MONITOR BRACKET. FURNISHED BY TRU & INSTALLED BY G.C. 26" HDTV LCD TV. FURNISHED BY TRU & INSTALLED BY G.C. GYP. BD. PARTITION. REFER TO PLANS FOR PARTITION TYPE. A406 SCALE = 1 1/2" = 8' - 6" (CEILING HEIGHT) SUSP. CEILING MTL. STUD PARTITION SOLID 2x4 WD. BLOCKING @ TOP & BOTTOM OF EA. SUPPORT BRACKET ANCHORED TO MTL. STUDS. 5' -0" L. STL. HANGER STYLE WALL RACK. BY MAGNUSON GROUP, DS -5H, BLACK WAINSCOT FINISH FLOOR LINE 2 SECTION A406 / SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 1' -0" 0 FINISH FLOOR SUSPENDED CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE (TYP) 2x4 WOOD BLOCKING @ SUPPORT BRACKETS ATTACHED TO STUDS. (TYP) 12" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELVES. r 2' - 0 1/2" BLANK APRON i 1'- 113/4" END RETURN REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SHELF BRACKETS - (TYP) COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE. (7) 6' -0 ", (2) 1' -0" LONG, SLOTTED STANCHIONS @ 24" O.C. (SEE ELEV. W /A405) ANCHOR TO PARTITION W/ FLATHEAD WOOD SCREWS. COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE 362S162 -54 STL. STUDS @ 16" 0.C. 8' -0" LONG SLOTTED STANCHIONS @ 24" O.C. ANCHOR TO PARTITION W/ FLATHEAD WOOD SCREWS. COLOR: PREFIN. WHITE JANITOR'S CLOSET 1 DETAIL TRAINING RORE.. OF ADJ. SHELVES @ JANITOR'S CLOSET & TRAINING ROOM A406 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 12" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELF LOCKERS (DASHED) 18" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELVES EIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER 1 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 1 DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 03/29/10 ADDENDUM NO. 1 (NOT REISSUED) 04/27/10 NO. 0 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveaecom STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A406 3/4" MIN. AT UNATTACHED WALLS 2" MIN. WALL MOLDINGS SPREADER BAR OR OTHER SUITABLE SYSTEM REQUIRED TO KEEP PERIMITER COMPONENTS FROM SPREADING APART. CROSS RUNNER 2x4 LIGHT FIXTURE ATTACHED TO T -BARS IN (4) LOCATIONS W/ APPROVED ATTACHMENT CLIPS OR BOLTS MAIN RUNNER LIGHT FIXTURE. SUPPORT AT ALL (4) CORNERS W/ TIE WIRE ATTACHED TO TOP CHORD OF JOIST NOTE: THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SHALL BE FULFILLED (FOR ALL NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS) PER BUILDING CODE. A. SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM AND ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL CONFORM TO ASCE 7 -02, SECTION 13.5.6.2.2 B. (4) FOUR NO. 12 GAUGE WIRES SHALL BE SECURED TO THE MAIN RUNNER WITHIN 2" OF THE CROSS RUNNER INTERSECTION AND SPLAYED 90 DEGREES FROM EACH OTHER AT AN ANGLE NOT EXCEEDING 45 DEGREES FROM THE PLANE OF THE CEILING. THE VERTICAL STRUT, FASTENED TO THE MAIN RUNNER, SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ABOVE AND CEILING GRID BELOW. THESE STRUTS SHALL BE PLACED 12' O.C. IN BOTH DIRECTIONS WITH THE FIRST POINT WITHIN 6' FROM EACH WALL. ATTACHMENT OF THE RESTRAINT WIRES TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL BE ADEQUATE FOR LOAD IMPOSED. MAIN RUNNERS AND CROSS RUNNERS MAY BE ATTACHED AT (2) TWO ADJACENT WALLS WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN WALL AND RUNNERS MAINTAINED AT THE OTHER (2) TWO WALLS. C. D. DISCONTINUOUS ENDS OF THE CROSS RUNNERS AND MAIN RUNNERS SHALL BE VERTICALLY SUPPORTED WITHIN 8" OF SUCH DISCONTINUITIES. PIPE STRUT SCHEDULE (H) HEIGHT IN FEET PIPE STRUT SIZE UP TO 7' - 0" 1/2" 0 EMT CONDUIT UP TO 10' - 0" 3/4" 0 EMT CONDUIT UP TO 16' - 0" 1" 0 EMT CONDUIT 9 DETAIL A407 / SCALE = 1 /4" = 1' -0" STL. JOISTS (TYP.) 3/8" DIA. THRUBOLT W/ LOCK - NUT AND OVER SIZED WASHERS (EACH JOIST) 2 X 2 X 1/8 ANGLE AT EACH PIPE STRUT ANGLE #12 MIN. EYE BOLT W /NUT ON BOTH SIDES OF ANGLE 12 GA. VERT. WIRE INSIDE STRUT EMT STRUT @ 12' -0" O.C. RE: SCHEDULE FOR SIZE FOUR 12 GA. SPLAYED - SEISMIC SUPPORT WIRES AT 45 DEGREES MAX. (TYP ANCHOR BOTTOM CHORD OF JOISTS WITH #12 GA. LAG SCREW EYE BOLT. (TYP. @ EA. STRUT CROSS RUNNER ROOF /FLOOR FRAMING EMT SLEEVE ONE SIZE LARGER THAN STRUT. SLOT END OF SLEEVE TO FIT OVER MAIN RUNNER CONNECT W/ (2) TEK CREWS 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2" LOOP BOTH ENDS (TYP.) MAIN RUNNER 5/8" GYP. BD. (TYP.) PAINTED (PNT6) 162S125 -25 MTL. STUD FURRING STEEL TUBE COLUMN. SEE STRUCT DRAWINGS. SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE CORNER GUARDS / BUMPER GUARDS ETC. REFER TO DETAIL 2/A407 u CONDITION @ FURRED TUBE COLUMN 162S125 -25 MTL. STUDS (4 CORNERS) WIDE FLANGE COLUMN. SEE STRUCT DRAWINGS. FRONT OF STORE 5/8" MDF PROVIDE HEMMED/ CONCEALED EDGE 4' -0" HIGH STAINLESS STL. WRAP - 2 PIECE, ADHERED TO MDF CONDITION @ WIDE FLANGE COLUMN STEEL PIPE COLUMN. SEE STRUCT DRAWINGS. FRONT OF STORE PROVIDE HEMMED/ CONCEALED EDGE 4' -0" HIGH STAINLESS STL. WRAP, ADHERED TO STL. CONDITION @ ROUND COLUMN 4' -0" HIGH STAINLESS STL. WRAP - 2 PIECE, ADHERED TO STL. STEEL TUBE COLUMN. SEE STRUCT DRAWINGS. FRONT OF STORE PROVIDE HEMMED/ CONCEALED EDGE FORM STAINLESS AROUND RADIUS @ CORNERS CONDITION @ STEEL TUBE COLUMN 8 DETAIL A407 SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 7 NOT USED A407 / SCALE = 3/4" = 1' -0" 0 5/8" GYP. BD. PAINT (PNT6) CAULK TO MATCH COLUMN ABOVE EXTEND MDF TO 3' -11 1/4" NOTE: EXTEND ENCLOSURE UP TO UNDERSIDE OF JOISTS. 4' -0" HIGH STAINLESS STL. WRAP - 2 PIECE, ADHERED TO MDF NOTE: 20 GA. STAINLESS STL. TYPE NO. 304, W/ NO. 4 FINISH. STL. COLUMN (PNT6) PROVIDE HEMMED/ CONCEALED EDGE FORM STAINLESS AROUND RADIUS @ CORNERS. CAULK TOP TO MATCH COLUMN. 4' -0" HIGH STAINLESS STL. WRAP - 2 PIECE, ADHERED TO STL. A407 5 A407 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (TYP.) MTL. STUDS @ 16" O.C. (TYP.) TOP OF CHAIR RAIL 6'-4" AFF 1x WOOD CHAIR RAIL (COLOR PNT3) 1/8" RAD. @ ALL EXPOSED CORNERS 3 ROWS OF 1 "X1" MOSAIC TILE 3" X 6" TILE ON 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD 6" X 13" COVE BASE FINISH FLOOR H REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SECTION g RESTROOM RAIL SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 1 X4WD. SHELF GYP. BOARD CONT. SEALANT (CLEAR) (TYP.) 1 X 4WD. SHELF TOP OF SHELF / PLAN VIEW 5' -0" AFF CONT. WD. COVE AS INDICATED 1 X 6 WD. TRIM SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE / / /d. BEAD BOARD W/ SCORE LINES @ 3" O.C. FINISH FLOOR 3 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" / / NOTES: 1. ALL WD. TRIM, COVE, & SHELF SHALL RECEIVE A PAINTED FINISH TO MATCH THAT OF THE BEAD BOARD (F.V.) 2. SEE INTERIOR FINISH LIST ON SHEET A501 FOR BEAD BOARD PAINT COLOR 3. PROVIDE 1/4" RADIUS AT ANY EXPOSED EDGES. p to-v7 SECTION @ MOTHER'S SHELF SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (TYP.) METAL STUDS TOP OF BUMPER GUARD 3' -7" AFF @ TRAINING RM. & CONF. RM. 3' -4" AFF @ BREAK RM. INSTALL AS PER MFR'S SPEC. BUMPER GUARD (BG2) (CONT.) CONT. SEALANT (CLEAR) (TYP.) PLAS. LAM. WAINSCOT MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD NOTE: ATTACH WAINSCOT PANELS W/ FLATHEAD SCREWS @ TOP & BOTTOM. INSTALL SCREWS IN A STRAIGHT LINE. COUNTERSINK ALL SCREWS. 4" VINYL BASE (VB1) FINISH FLOOR NOTE: REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST ON SHEET A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 SECTION @ BUMPER A407 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (TYP.) METAL STUDS TOP OF BUMPER GUARD 4' -0" AFF INSTALL AS PER MFR'S SPEC. BUMPER GUARD (BG1) (CONT.) CONT. SEALANT (CLEAR) (TYP.) NOTE: ATTACH WAINSCOT PANELS W/ FLATHEAD SCREWS @ TOP & BOTTOM. INSTALL SCREWS IN A STRAIGHT LINE. COUNTERSINK ALL SCREWS. TOP OF BUMPER GUARD 2' -2" AFF PI AS_ LAM. WAINSCOT MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD NOTE: ATTACH WAINSCOT PANELS W/ FLATHEAD SCREWS @ TOP & BOTTOM. INSTALL SCREWS IN A STRAIGHT LINE. COUNTERSINK ALL SCREWS. 4" VINYL BASE (VB1) V FINISH FLOOR NOTE: REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST ON SHEET A501 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 SECTION @ BUMPER A407 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" CORNER GUARDS INSTALL VERT. BETWEEN 90 DEG BUMPER GUARDS AT ALL CORNERS. 90 DEG. BUMPER GUARD AT CORNERS VINYL BASE. 1 BUMPER GUARDS INSTALL PER MFR'S. RECOMMENDATIONS. / / NOTE: BUMPER GUARDS AT ALL INSIDE CORNERS ARE TO BE MITERED TO FIT TIGHT AND SMOOTH. ISOMETRIC DETAIL SCALE = 1 1/2" = 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (TYP.) (PAINTED) BUMPER GUARDS INSTALL PER MFR'S SPEC. PLAN DETAIL A407) SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" 90 DEG. BUMPER GUARD AT CORNERS NEW BUMPER GUARDS INSTALL PER MFR'S SPEC. RECEIVED APR 2 9 2010 PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 Q 03/29/10 04/27/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN REVIEW REVISIONS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand. Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com REGISTERED CT kMAS STATE ti otAsffnvoN ro STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. A407 DOOR SCHEDULE NO. LOCATION TYPE SIZE H MATERIAL JAMB HEAD SILL COMMENTS . HARDWARE GROUP 01 EXTERIOR TO ENTRY VESTIBULE 12' -01/2" 8' -6" 4 1/2" ALUM. 15 &20/A501 18/A501 10/A501 EGRESS WIDTH 129 1/4 ", SEE NOTES #3, 11 & 16 02 ENTRY VESTIBULE TO SALES AREA E 12' - 0 1/2" 8' -6" 4 1/2" ALUM. 16 &19/A501 17/A501 10/A501 EGRESS WIDTH 129 1/4 ", SEE NOTES #3 & 15 1 03 SALES AREA TO EXIT VESTIBULE E 12' - 0 1/2" 8' -6" 4 1/2" ALUM. 19/A501 17/A501 10/A501 EGRESS WIDTH 129 1/4 ", SEE NOTES #3, 12 & 15 1 04 EXIT VESTIBULE TO EXTERIOR E 12' - 0 1/2" 8' -6" 4 1/2" ALUM. 15 &20/A501 18/A501 10/A501 EGRESS WIDTH 129 1/4 ", SEE NOTES #3 & 16 1 05 EXTERIOR TO CART STORAGE G 8' -0" 8' -4" ALUM. 20/A501 18/A501 10/A501 (SIM.) SEE NOTE #3 9 06 HALL TO BREAK ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 3 07 SALES AREA TO RISER ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" 6/A501 2/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 4 08 SALES AREA TO PROCESSING ROOM C 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 6/A501 2/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 4 09 PROCESSING ROOM TO EQUIPMENT ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 4 10 BREAK ROOM TO TRAINING ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 SEE NOTES #2, 6, & 10 4 11 TRAINING ROOM TO CLOSET W /A405 4' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" WOOD 13/A501 (SIM.) 13/A501 SEE NOTE #14 6 12 TRAINING ROOM TO CLOSET W /A405 4' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" WOOD 13/A501 (SIM.) 13/A501 SEE NOTE #14 6 13 SALES AREA TO EXTERIOR D 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" EXISTING TO REMAIN --SEE NOTE #1 5 14 SALES AREA TO MANAGERS OFFICE C 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 6/A501 2/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 4 15 MANAGER'S OFFICE TO COUNT ROOM C 3' 6" 7' 0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 SEE NOTES #2 & 6 4 16 HALL TO MEN'S ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 12/A501 W/ 12 "x12" LOUVER, SEE NOTES #2, 6 & 9 2 17 HALL TO WOMEN'S ROOM B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 12/A501 W/ 12 "x12" LOUVER, SEE NOTES #2, 6 & 9 2 18 HALL TO MOTHER'S ROOM B 3' 0" 7' 0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 SEE NOTES #2, 6, & 13 2 19 HALL TO JANITORS CLOSET B 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 7/A501 3/A501 12/A501 W/ 1/2" UNDERCUT, SEE NOTES #2, 6 & 10 4 20 SALES AREA TO EXTERIOR D 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 5/A501 5.A501 11/A501 EGRESS DOOR WIDTH 33 ", SEE NOTES #1 & 5 21 SALES AREA TO PRE -SALES F 6' 0" 9' 0" 1 3/4" PLASTIC 9/A501 4/A501 14/A501 HD IMPACT DOORS, SEE NOTE #4 22 SALES AREA TO PRE -SALES F 6' -0" 9' -0" 1 3/4" PLASTIC 9/A501 4/A501 14/A501 HD IMPACT DOORS, SEE NOTE #4 23 PRE -SALES TO EXTERIOR 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 5/A501 (SIM.) 1 /A501 (SIM.) 11/A501 EGRESS DOOR WIDTH 33 ", SEE NOTES #1 & 5 24 PRE -SALES TO ELECTRONICS PRE -SALES 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 6/A501 2/A501 W/ 12 "x12" LOUVER, SEE NOTES #2 & 6 25 RECEIVING TO TRUCK DOCK A 8' 0" 9' -0" 2" EXISTING TO REMAIN 8 26 RECEIVING TO TRUCK DOCK A 8' -0" 9' -0" 2" EXISTING TO REMAIN 8 27 PRE -SALES TO EXTERIOR D 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM 5/A501 1/A501 11/A501 EGRESS DOOR WIDTH 33 ", SEE NOTES #1 & 5 5 28 PRE -SALES TO EXTERIOR EXIST 5' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" EXISTING TO REMAIN SEE NOTE #1 5 29 COMPACTOR TO RECEIVING 6/A303 4' -0" 2' -3" 1 3/4" HM 5/A302 5/A302 5/A301 SEE NOTE #1 30 SALES AREA TO PRE -SALES F 6' -0" 9' -0" 1 3/4" PLASTIC 9/A501 4/A501 14/A501 HD IMPACT DOORS, SEE NOTE #4 31 SALES AREA TO PRE -SALES 6' -0" 9' -0" 1 3/4" PLASTIC 9/A501 4/A501 14/A501 HD IMPACT DOORS, SEE NOTE #4 NOTE: 1. EXTERIOR H.M. DOORS & FRAME TO BE PAINTED AS 6. INDICATED ON EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. INTERIOR FACE - PAINTED PNT7 (HARBOR GRAY) 2. INTERIOR H.M. DOOR & FRAMES TO BE PAINTED PNT7 (HARBOR GRAY). 3. AUTO SLIDING DOORS AND CART DOOR TO HAVE CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM FINISH. 4. H.D. IMPACT DOORS, SUPPLIED BY OWNER & INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO SPEC. FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS. 5 DOOR CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED ON INTERIOR SIDE. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. DOOR CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED ON ROOM SIDE OF DOOR. TRUCK DOCK DOORS TO RETAIN FACTORY GALV. FINISH. DO NOT PAINT INTERIOR FACE. DO NOT PAINT EXTERIOR FACE U.O.N. ON EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. REFER TO SHEET A001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. INTERIOR FACE OF TOILET ROOM DOORS & FRAMES TO BE PAINTED PNT3 (BUTTER PECAN) PROVIDE DOOR HOLD OPEN FACTORY INSTALLED "ENTRANCE" LABELS TO BE INSTALLED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF DOOR. 12. FACTORY INSTALLED "DO NOT ENTER" LABELS TO BE INSTALLED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF DOOR. 13. INTERIOR FACE OF MOTHERS RM. DOOR & FRAME TO BE PAINTED PNT1 (DARK LINEN) 14. HOLLOW CORE SLIDING WOOD DOORS WITH HARDWOOD BIRCH VENEER FOR CLEAR URETHANE FINISH. 15. INTERIOR AUTO SLIDING DOORS TO HAVE 1/4" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS. 16. EXTERIOR AUTO SLIDING DOORS TO HAVE 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED SECURITY GLASS. HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUP 1 TO HAVE: HARDWARE BY MANUFACTURER (INCLUDING BREAKAWAY HARDWARE). ALL DOORS IN GROUP TO HAVE THE FOLLOWING SIGN AT ADJACENT LOCATION: "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING OCCUPANCY'. PROVIDE MANUAL EXIT HARDWARE ON INTERIOR FACE (IF REQUIRED) LETTERS TO BE 1" MINIMUM IN HEIGHT GROUP 2 TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE HAGER 1 PUSH PLATE HAGER 1 PULL 1 DR. CLOSER 1 DR. STOP 3 SILENCERS 1 KICKPLATE HAGER NORTON IVES IVES HAGER GROUP 3 TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE HAGER 1 LATCHSET BEST 1 DR. CLOSER 1 DR. STOP 3 SILENCERS 1 PUSH PLATE ( @DR 20) 1 KICKPLATE NORTON IVES IVES HAGER HAGER GROUP 4 TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE HAGER 1 LOCKSET BEST 1 DR. CLOSER 1 DR. STOP 3 SILENCERS 1 PUSH PLATE ( @DR'S 11,13 15, 17 & 27) 1 KICKPLATE 1 HOLD OPEN NORTON IVES IVES HAGER HAGER IVES 790 -900 30S, 18X34, 32D MOUNT HORIZ. BOTTOM @ 32" A.F.F. 9G, 8" CTC, 32D 7500BF -H -AL 407 B26D SR64 10X34 16GA. 32D 790 -900 93KON15D -626 (LEVER HAND) 7500BF -H -AL 407 B26D SR64 HORIZ. BOTTOM @ 36" A.F.F. (DRILL HOLE FOR LATCHSET) 10x34 16GA. 32D GROUP 5 TO HAVE: 1 1/2 PR. BUTTS STANLEY FBB191 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 26D 1 ARM- A- DOR -A101 -002 - -> Armador unit w/ alarm 1 ARM- A- DOR -A104 -001 - -> Low - profile kit 1 LOCK -MORT -GATE - -> Mortise cylinder LOCK - CORE -D26D - -> 7 -pin I/C core 1 PULL (@ INT. FACE) HAGER 9G, 8" CTC, 32D 1 SET WEATHERSTRIPPING N.G.P. 1 DOOR SWEEP N.G.P. 1 THRESHOLD N.G.P. 1 WIND CHAIN 1 VIEWER STANLEY CD4538 US3 (@ DR. 32) #135N FATT 102AV 425 GROUP 6 TO HAVE: 1 SLIDING TRACK STANLEY 40 -5665 ASSEMBLY 1 RECESSED DOOR STANLEY CD -40 -3512 US3 PULLS 1 PUSH LOCK BEST 2S75 2 SILENCERS IVES SR65 (SLIDING DOOR TRACK ASSEMBLY INCLUDES: DOUBLE ALUM. TRACK, TOP -MTD. HEAVY -DUTY FOUR -WHEEL HANGERS, FLOOR GUIDE, ETC.) 790 -900 95K7D15D -626 (LEVER HAND) 7500BF -H -AL 407 B26D SR64 30S, 18X34, 32D MOUNT HORIZ. BOTTOM @ 36 "A.F.F. (DRILL HOLE FOR LOCKSET) 10 x 34 16 GA. 32D FS555 -5 -SPBLK (@ DOOR 19) GROUP 7 TO HAVE: 1 PR. BUTTS 1 LOCKSET STANLEY BEST FBB179 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D 93K7YD15DS3 -626 (LEVER HAND) (KEYED @ INTERIOR) GROUP 8 TO HAVE: 1 PADLOCK (2" SHANK) BEST 41 B772 -606 (KEYED TO MATCH FRONT DOOR) GROUP 9 TO HAVE: HARDWARE BY MANUFACTURER. PROVIDE CLOSER AT INTERIOR SIDE WITH AUTOMATIC HOLD -OPEN AND THUMB TURN ON INTERIOR SIDE WITH "BEST" CYLINDER LOCK COMPATIBLE WITH STORE KEYING. GC TO INSTALL IVES'FS1153', PLUNGER TYPE DOOR HOLDER ON EACH DOOR. REMARKS: 1. CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY TWO "BEST" PADLOCKS 418770 TR. TO BE INSTALLED ON ROOF HATCH AND GAS LINE. 2. ALL LOCKS SHALL BE "BEST" WITH CONSTRUCTION CYLINDERS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR. 3. INSTALL "IVES" 407 B26D DOOR STOP ON WALL OF TOILET ROOMS WHERE TOILET PARTITION DOOR SWINGS TOWARD WALL. 4. ALL PUSH PLATES INSTALLED ON THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR. SEE DOOR ELEVATION B. 5. CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST DOOR CLOSERS TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 81. GALVANIZED FINISH 3" x 5/8" VISION PANEL X a 2 6" 6" i INSULATED ROLLING STL. OVERHEAD HOLLOW METAL W/ DOOR 8' -0" X 9' -0" (ROUGH OPENING) 1/4" TEMP. GLASS A PUSH PLATE (WHERE OCCURS) DOOR KNOB OR HANDLE (SEE HARDWARE SCHEDULE) KICK PLATE (WHERE OCCURS) "DETEX" PANIC DEVICE (WHERE OCCURS) HOLLOW METAL B DOOR TYPES SCALE = 1 /4" = 1' -0" INTERIOR DOOR WEATHER- STRIPPING AT ALL EXTERIOR H.M. DOORS 11 C MIRROR GLASS FACING SALES SIDE KICK PLATE (WHERE OCCURS) SEE PLAN FOR R.O. SEE SCHEDULE FOR UNIT WIDTH SEE SCHEDULE FOR ,rGRESS WIDTH AUTO. OPERATOR HEADER ALUM. FRAMING ALUM. SLIDING DOORS W/ CLEAR GLASS & BREAK -AWAY FEATURE (TYP) SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, NOTES 15 &16 STATIONARY DOOR W/ 1/4" CLEAR GLASS & BREAK AWAY FEATURE (TYP) SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, NOTES 15 &16. ALUM. MUNTIN EDGE GUARD EXTERIOR AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOORS SLIDERS TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED U.N.O. E HOLLOW METAL LINE OF MASONRY JAMB BEYOND DOOR SWEEP ALUM. THRESHOLD SET IN MASTIC THRESHOLD @ EXTERIOR H.M. DOORS A501 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" D IMPACT DOORS PORCELAIN TILE WHERE SHOWN IN SCHEDULE F 5 3/4" THRESHOLD / / / / / m 1 AI ANN ALUM. FRAMING ALUM. SWING DOORS W/ 1/4" LAMINATED. GLASS (TYP) ALUM. MUNTIN (TYP.) 4" ALUM. RAILS ON INTERIOR SIDE ALUM. SWINGING CART DOORS TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED U.N.O. G 1/2" MARBLE SADDLE VCT @MEN'S & WOMEN'S RESTROOM & JANITOR'S CLOSET SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" CONT. MTL. TRACK (2) 2X8 LINTEL W/ PLWD. BTWN. HARDWOOD BIRCH CASING, FASCIA & FRAME W/ CLEAR URETHANE FINISH. 13 ANCHORS (3) PER JAMB 16 GA H.M. FRAME GROUT OLID M CONC. PANEL SEALANT @ EXT. 1/4" 1 3/4" 5 \JAMB OF H.M. DOOR FRAME g EXTERIOR MASONRY WALL A501 / SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 600S162-33 @ 16" 0.0. (TYP.) 1 3/4" DOOR DIM. BOARD STUDS SEALANT @ EA. SIDE 16 GA H.M. DOOR FRAME PROVIDE (3) ANCHORS @ JAMB .M. DOOR FRAME 6 JAM B @ 6" MTL. STUD PARTITION A501 362S162-33 STUDS 5/8" GYP. BOARD OR WAINSCOT PANEL (PLAM2) 1 3/4" r 1 i_._. m SEALANT @ EA. SIDE 7 DOOR DIM. (2) 362S162-33 STUDS Tao FRAME PROVIDE THREE ANCHORS @ JAMB @ 3 5/8" MTL. STUD PARTITION A501 8 CONC. PANEL MTL. DRIP EDGE SEALANT @ PERIMETER EXTERIOR 1 7' H EAD SEALANT @ PERIMETER FRAME GROUT SOLID INTERIOR OF H.M. FRAME @ EXT. MASONRY WALL 5/8" GYP. BOARD (TYP.) 0.0. (2) 600S162-33 STUD HEADERS W/ 600T200-33 RUNNER TRACKS TOP & BOTTOM FRAME 5/8" GYP. BOARD (TYP.) 362S162-33 MIL. (TYP.) SEALANT @ EA. SIDE Ijcc o H EAD OF H.M. DOOR FRAME 362S162-33 MTL. STUD HEADER W/ 362T200-33 RUNNER TRACKS TOP & BOTTOM 5/8" GYP. BD. (EACH SIDE) —1-1011BNED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE 1 1/2" CORNER APPROVED GUARD (CG1) tAg I. 2 2010 NOT USED CONTINUOUS H EAD SEALANT @ EA. SIDE FRAME OF ELM. DOOR FRAME @ 3 5/8" STUD PARTITION SCALE = / 5/8" PLYWOOD (PRE-SALES SIDE) SEALANT @ EA. SIDE (TYP.) City oiTukwila FRAME. (INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS) PRE-MANUFACTURED IMPACT DOOR FRAME. SECURE FRAME FLOOR BASE TO CONC. SLAB W/ 1/2" EXP. BOLTS ON EA. SIDE (2 PER JAMB). CONTINUOUS SOLID WOOD BLOCKING. SECURE AND EXTEND TO TOP OF LINTEL PROVIDE (2) JACK STUDS TO SUPPORT LINTEL CONTINUOUS SEALANT @ EA. SIDE (TYP.) FULL HT. CORNER EXPOSED CORNERS 0 /-1*----- NOTE: CUT VCT TO ALLOW STL. FRAME FLOOR PLATE TO ATTACH DIRECTLY ON SLAB 4 SECURE FRAME TO JAMB W/ PROVIDED 3/8"DIA. LAG BOLTS & ATTACH PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. (COVER HOLES W/ MANUFACTURERS PLUGS) IMPACT DOOR W/ GRAVITY OPERATED HINGING SYSTEM. ATTACH PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 4" 0.0. HEADER (4) 2 X 6's BEAR ON 2 JACK STUDS @ JAMB H EADg IMPACT DOORS 7 5/8" PLYWOOD (PAINTED) (PRE- SALES SIDE) 6'-4" FRAME 9 JAMB @ IMPACT DOORS 6'-4 1/2" (HOLD) (SALES SIDE) SHIM METAL CASING BEAD. (TYP) A501} SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR VESTIBULE THRESHOLD BY DOOR MFR. SIDEWALK dr CONC. 1_ THRESHOLD,1/ CARPET—■ INTERIOR MUM CARPET 4 41 OM 1111,111M THRESHOLD), CARPET AUTO SLIDING DOOR THRESHOLD DETAIL .50-y SCALE 1 1/2" =1-0" HEAD @ TRAINING CLOSET DOOR SLIDING TRACK ASSEMBLY A501 SCALE = 3" = 1' -0" SALES VCT FINISH IN SALES AREA PRE-SALES IMPACT DOORS CONCRETE SLAB VCT TO BE THREE FULL TILES PAST DOOR THRESHOLD VINYL REDUCER STRIP (VT1) @ ALL SALES AND PRE-SALES OPENINGS (SEE SPECS.) @ IMPACT DOORS ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NO. ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING VINYL COMP. TILE (VCT1) VINYL COMP. TILE (VCT2) VINYL STRIP TILE (VST1) PORCELAIN TILE (FLOOR) (PT1) PORCELAIN TILE (FLOOR) (PT2) CARPET (CPT1) SCRAPER MAT (SCP1) EXPOSED CONCRETE W/ SEALER VINYL BASE 4" COVED (VB1) VINYL BASE 4" COVED (VB2) VINYL BASE STRAIGHT (VB1) PORCELAIN TILE (PT3) n. z z z co WOOD BASE GYP. BOARD GYP. BOARD GYP. BOARD GYP. BOARD GYP. BOARD ALUMINUM & GLASS CERAMIC TILE (WALL) (CT1) GLASS TILE (GT1) WAINSCOT PANELS (WP1) WAINSCOT PANLES (WP2) WAINSCOT PANEL (BEAD BOARD) (WP3) WALL COVERING (WC1) ALL COVERING (WC2) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (ACT1) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (ACT2) EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION CEILING (PNT4 EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION CEILING (PNT6 GYP. BOARD CEILING (PNT4) CEILING HEIGHT REMARKS 101 SALES AREA 102 ENTRY VESTIBULE 103 EXIT VESTIBULE 104 HALL 105 CONFERENCE ROOM 106 PROCESSING ROOM 107 EQUIPMENT ROOM 108 TRAINING ROOM 109 CLOSET 110 RISER ROOM VARIES SEE NOTES #4, 6, 8, & 10 111 MANAGER'S OFFICE 112 COUNT ROOM 113 HALL 114 JANITORS CLOSET 115 MOTHERS ROOM 116 WOMEN'S ROOM 117 118 MEN'S ROOM BREAK ROOM 119 120 PRE-SALES RECEIVING VARIES VARIES SEE NOTES #4, 6, 8, & 10 SEE NOTES #4, 6, 8, & 10 121 ELECTRONICS PRE-SALES VARIES SEE NOTES #4, 6, 8, & 10 NOTES: 1. REFER TO SHEET A103 AND A407 FOR INTERIOR FINISH DETAILS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WATER-RESISTANT GYP. BOARD AT VESTIBULE BREAK ROOM, JANITOR'S CLOSET, RESTROOMS AND BEHIND ELEC. WATER COOLER. SEE DETAIL 6/A407 FOR MEN'S & WOMEN'S ROOM ACCENTS. PAINT CEILING OF STRUCTURE/DECK- PNT6 (EVERLASTING), PNT4 (ATRIUM WHITE) IN PRE-SALES AND RECEIVING, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK, JOISTS, CONDUIT, HVAC, ETC. FINISH SHALL BE FLAT. PAINT COLUMNS - PNT6 (EVERLASTING) FROM 6'-0" AFF TO ROOF DECK ABOVE IN SALES AREA. PAINT MAIN SPRINKLER RISER - PNT9 (RED). PAINT ALL OTHER SPRINKLER LINES - PNT6 (EVERLASTING). 7. NOT USED. 8. ALL PERIMETER WALLS, EXPOSED CMU, COLUMNS, CEILING STRUCTURE & PLYWOOD IN PRE-SALES AND RECEIVING AREAS TO BE PRIMED & PAINTED PNT4 (ATRIUM WHITE). 9. NOT USED. 10. ALL PAINT FINISH TO BE SEMI GLOSS. (U.O.N.). 11. SEE ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS OF WAINSCOT PANELS. 12. ALL SURPLUS VCT (UP TO 5% OF FLOOR AREA) SHALL BE STORED UNDER THE BASE DECK OF GONDOLA FIXTURES, LOCATED AT THE DIRECTION OF BRU CONSTRUCTION REP. 13. PROVIDE FRP WAINSCOT ON ALL SIDES OF JANITOR'S CLOSET (48" HIGH). (SEE ELEVATIONS H & G/A405.) 14. ALL COLUMNS AGAINST PERIMETER WALL SHALL NOT RECEIVE COLUMN GUARDS AND BE PAINTED PNT6 (EVERLASTING). 15. CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE UP TO 10 (VERIFY QUANTITY) BOXES OF OWNER DAMAGED VCT PRIOR TO GRAND OPENING. 16. NOT USED 17. ALL MOUNTING BOARDS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH WALLS PRIOR TO DEVICE INSTALLATION. 18. PROVIDE ACRYLIC EPDXY PAINT AT GYP. BD. SURFACES (AS INDICATED). INTERIOR FINISH & MATERIALS LIST NOTE: ALL MATERIALS ARE CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON SHEET A001 ACT1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ARMSTRONG FINE FISSURED CERAMAGUARD #608, "WHITE" JANITOR'S CLOSET LESS THAN 25 LESS THAN 50 WHITE GRID ACT2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ARMSTRONG FINE FISSURED, #1729, "WHITE" VESTIBULES, BREAK ROOM, TRAINING ROOM, MOTHER'S ROOM, HALL, OFFICES LESS THAN 25 LESS THAN 50 WHITE GRID AT1 ALUMINUM TRANSITION THE MATWORKS URAMP MATTING TO VCT BG1 3" BUMPER GUARD MCCUE CORP. GREENGUARD 3, #111, "SILVER" WAINSCOT, SALES, VESTIBULES, HALL CONF. ROOM 115 1525 BG2 3" BUMPER GUARD MCCUE CORP. GREENGUARD 3, #604, "LIGHT CARAMEL" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS 115 1525 CG1 CORNER GUARD 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/8" STL. ANGLE IMPACT DOOR HEADERS CG2 CORNER GUARD MCCUE CORP. CARTGUARD V, #111, "SILVER" ALL CORNERS, COLUMNS, ETC. 115 1525 CG3 CORNER GUARD MCCUE CORP. CARTGUARD V, #604 "LIGHT CARAMEL" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS 115 1525 CPT1 CARPET TILE THE MATWORKS AMBASSADOR, "CHARCOAL" ENTRY & EXIT VESTIBULES VELCRO ATTACHED (TACFAST SYSTEM), INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. CT1 CERAMIC TILE DAL TILE RITTENHOUSE SQUARE, MATTE, #X735, "ALMOND", 3"x6"x5/16" (FIELD) MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL TILE FIELD N/A N/A RUNNING BOND ECS EXPOSED CONCRETE WITH SEALER RECEIVING, PRE-SALES SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 9H GRT1 GROUT LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL MEN'S, WOMEN'S, & JANITOR'S FLOOR GROUT N/A N/A GRT2 GROUT LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL GROUT N/A N/A GT1 GLASS TILE DAL TILE MARACAS GLASS BLENDS, #P668, FROSTED "WILD FLOWERS BLEND", 1"x1"x5/16" MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL ACCENT N/A N/A MESH MOUNTED TILES MAGIC VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG "MAGIC FLOOR" - REFER TO VENDOR DIAGRAM QUILT AREA LESS THAN 75 LESS THAN 450 PLAM1 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #JI4T2018N, "NEGOTIATING IN GENEVA" - CROSSGRAIN, HI-WEAR OVERLAY SALES AREA, VESTIBULES & HALL WAINSCOT 40 130 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM2 PLASTIC LAMINATE NEVAMAR #NJI4T21007E, "SANTA ROSA PLUM TREE" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOM WAINSCOT & CABINETS, OFFICE COUNTERS 60 105 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM3 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #SW836-N, "WINTER WHITE", HI-WEAR-OVERLAY BOXED CORNERS 50 45 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM4 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #PFA60-N, "NEGOTIATING IN GENEVA", HI-WEAR OVERLAY COLUMNS 50 45 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PNT1 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR PREVIEW #2147-60 "DARK LINEN" MOTHER'S ROOM WALLS ABOVE BEADBOARD PNT2 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE OFF-WHITE COLORS #0C 65 "CHANTILLY LACE" MOTHERS ROOM BEADBOARD 5 PNT3 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE OFF-WHITE COLORS #0C-89 "BUTTER PECAN" MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL ABOVE TILE & SOFFIT VERTICAL SURFACE PNT4 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE READY-MIXED INTERIOR "ATRIUM WHITE" MEN'S & WOMEN'S CEILING, JANITOR'S WALLS, & PRE-SALES AREAS & STRUCTURE PNT5 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE CLASSIC COLORS #1055 "ALGONQUIN TRAIL" ACCENT @ FRONT WALL PNT6 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE CLASSIC COLORS #1038 "EVERLASTING" SALES WALLS & STRUCTURE/DECK, SPRINKLER LINES, HVAC, CONDUIT, ETC. PNT7 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE AMERICA'S COLORS #AC-25 "HARBOR GRAY" INTERIOR DOORS & FRAMES PNT8 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE SW OSHA YELLOW BOLLARDS, CAGED LADDER, EXTR. GAS LINES PNT9 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS SW #2910 "PRIMARY RED" INTERIOR FACE OF RECEIVING DOOR & MAIN SPRINKLER LINE PT1 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA, #P501 "GRAVEL", 13"x13"x3/8" (FIELD) MEN'S, WOMEN'S & JANITORS CLOSET FLOOR TILE FIELD N/A N/A PT2 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA #P505 SAND", 6 1/2 x20"x3/8" (ACCENT) MEN'S & WOMEN'S ACCENT FLOOR TILE N/A N/A PT3 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA, #P501 "GRAVEL", 6"x13"x3/8" COVE BASE WITH MATCHING INSIDE/OUTSIDE CORNERS MEN'S, WOMEN'S & JANITOR'S WALL BASE N/A N/A SCRAPER MAT THE MATWORKS PRO-SCRAPER ENTRANCE SYSTEM W/ ALUM. TRANSITIONS ENTRY VESTIBULES ATTACH PER MANUFACTURERS GUIDELINES SSM1 SOLID SURFACE WILSONART EARTHSTONE, #9140-EA "NEVADA" W/ OGEE EDGE MEN'S & WOMEN'S VANITY COUNTER, BREAK RM. CABINETS LESS THAN 26 LESS THAN 25 TPTN1 STAINLESS STEEL MEN'S & WOMEN'S TOILET PARTITIONS SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 10A VB1 VINYL BASE (4") ARMSTRONG #71 "MID GRAY", 4" COVED FOR TILE, STRAIGHT FOR CARPET GYP. BOARD PARTITIONS, CMU WALLS, WAINSCOTS & COLUMNS 200 335 VB2 VINYL BASE (4") ARMSTRONG #08 "BUTTERCREAM", 4" COVED BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS ASTME 648 CLASS 1 LESS THAN 450 VCT1 VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON IMPERIAL TEXTURE, #51933 SALES AREA, HALL, BREAK & TRAINING ROOMS, CONFERENCE ROOM, ALL OFFICES & EQUIPMENT ROOM FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 ASTME 662 OR LESS 450 VCT2 VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON IMPERIAL TEXTURE, #51932 RACETRACK FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 ASTME 662 OR LESS 450 VST1 VINYL STRIP TILE AMTICO SPACIA, #S-W2504 "HONEY OAK", 4"x36" SALES AREA CORE PAD & MOTHER'S ROOM FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 LESS THAN 450 VT1 REDUCER MOULDING JOHNSONITE RRS-XX-D "BLACK" TRANSITIONS VCT TO CONCRETE ASTME 648 CLASS 1 WALL COVERING WOLF-GORDON WG 6428620 - CUSTOM VESTIBULE WALLCOVERING (SMOOTH) VESTIBULE WALLS ABOVE WAINSCOT CONTACT LARRY SHAGAWAT W/ WOLF-GORDON INC. PHONE: 800-347-0550 EXT. 849 WC2 WALL COVERING WOLF-GORDON G 6432266 - CUSTOM SERVICE MURAL (STIPPLE) CUSTOMER SERVICE AREA WALLS ABOVE WAINSCOT CONTACT LARRY SHAGAWAT W/ WOLF-GORDON INC. PHONE: 800-347-0550 EXT. 849 WAINSCOT PANELS USING PLAM1 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD SALES AREA, VESIBULES & HALL WAINSCOT SEE PLAM1 ABOVE SEE PLAM1 ABOVE WP2 WAINSCOT PANELS USING PLAM 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOM WAINSCOT SEE PLAM2 ABOVE SEE PLAM2 ABOVE WOOD GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY WP3 BEADBOARD NANTUCKET BEADBOARD COMPANY MOTHERS ROOM WAINSCOT ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTABLE ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT @ EA. SIDE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT_// ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT CONC. CART CURB 20 JAMB BREAK MTL. TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. A501 CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT SHIM AS REQ'D SEALANT g EA. SIDE ALUM. SLIDING DOOR NEW CMU VENEER W/ EIFS ABOVE JAMB AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT @ EA. SIDE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT SHIM AS REQ'D SEALANT @ EA. SIDE AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR 5/8" GYP. BD. 19 JAMB INTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. SLIDING DOORS EXISTING STRUCT. COLUMN EXISTING TILT-UP CONC PANEL p................... .r...................... TYP. EXTERIOR ALUM. DOORS AT E.I.F.S. 5/8" GYP. BD. GUARD (CG2) CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT NEW STL. COLUMN 16 to. `7 2.. JAMB SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT g EA. SIDE AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR INTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. SLIDING DOORS A501 CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT STL. STRUCTURE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT B.O.S. 8' - 6" ALUM. CART DOOR ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT BREAK MTL. TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. SHIM AS REQ'D ALUM. STOREFRONT MULLION 18 HEAD SLIDING DOORS EXTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. A501} SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SHIM AS REQ'D ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT STL. STRUCTURE B.O.S. 8' - 6" CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT 17 HEAD CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT BREAK MTL TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP W/ BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION SHIM AS REQ'D AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 INTERIOR A3PH.IJIPTER SLIDING DOORS A501 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture • engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com LAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE DOOR & FINISH SCHEDULES SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. L A501 0, FLAME SMOKE SPREAD DEVELOPMENT CODE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER NUMBER /COLOR LOCATION RATING RATING REMARKS NOTE: ALL MATERIALS ARE CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON SHEET A001 ACT1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ARMSTRONG FINE FISSURED CERAMAGUARD #608, "WHITE" JANITOR'S CLOSET LESS THAN 25 LESS THAN 50 WHITE GRID ACT2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ARMSTRONG FINE FISSURED, #1729, "WHITE" VESTIBULES, BREAK ROOM, TRAINING ROOM, MOTHER'S ROOM, HALL, OFFICES LESS THAN 25 LESS THAN 50 WHITE GRID AT1 ALUMINUM TRANSITION THE MATWORKS URAMP MATTING TO VCT BG1 3" BUMPER GUARD MCCUE CORP. GREENGUARD 3, #111, "SILVER" WAINSCOT, SALES, VESTIBULES, HALL CONF. ROOM 115 1525 BG2 3" BUMPER GUARD MCCUE CORP. GREENGUARD 3, #604, "LIGHT CARAMEL" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS 115 1525 CG1 CORNER GUARD 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/8" STL. ANGLE IMPACT DOOR HEADERS CG2 CORNER GUARD MCCUE CORP. CARTGUARD V, #111, "SILVER" ALL CORNERS, COLUMNS, ETC. 115 1525 CG3 CORNER GUARD MCCUE CORP. CARTGUARD V, #604 "LIGHT CARAMEL" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS 115 1525 CPT1 CARPET TILE THE MATWORKS AMBASSADOR, "CHARCOAL" ENTRY & EXIT VESTIBULES VELCRO ATTACHED (TACFAST SYSTEM), INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. CT1 CERAMIC TILE DAL TILE RITTENHOUSE SQUARE, MATTE, #X735, "ALMOND", 3"x6"x5/16" (FIELD) MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL TILE FIELD N/A N/A RUNNING BOND ECS EXPOSED CONCRETE WITH SEALER RECEIVING, PRE-SALES SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 9H GRT1 GROUT LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL MEN'S, WOMEN'S, & JANITOR'S FLOOR GROUT N/A N/A GRT2 GROUT LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL GROUT N/A N/A GT1 GLASS TILE DAL TILE MARACAS GLASS BLENDS, #P668, FROSTED "WILD FLOWERS BLEND", 1"x1"x5/16" MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL ACCENT N/A N/A MESH MOUNTED TILES MAGIC VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG "MAGIC FLOOR" - REFER TO VENDOR DIAGRAM QUILT AREA LESS THAN 75 LESS THAN 450 PLAM1 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #JI4T2018N, "NEGOTIATING IN GENEVA" - CROSSGRAIN, HI-WEAR OVERLAY SALES AREA, VESTIBULES & HALL WAINSCOT 40 130 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM2 PLASTIC LAMINATE NEVAMAR #NJI4T21007E, "SANTA ROSA PLUM TREE" BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOM WAINSCOT & CABINETS, OFFICE COUNTERS 60 105 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM3 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #SW836-N, "WINTER WHITE", HI-WEAR-OVERLAY BOXED CORNERS 50 45 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PLAM4 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE #PFA60-N, "NEGOTIATING IN GENEVA", HI-WEAR OVERLAY COLUMNS 50 45 CONTACT MARY LOU CARUSO W/ PANOLAM INDUSTRIES. PHONE: (917) 538-5397. PNT1 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR PREVIEW #2147-60 "DARK LINEN" MOTHER'S ROOM WALLS ABOVE BEADBOARD PNT2 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE OFF-WHITE COLORS #0C 65 "CHANTILLY LACE" MOTHERS ROOM BEADBOARD 5 PNT3 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE OFF-WHITE COLORS #0C-89 "BUTTER PECAN" MEN'S & WOMEN'S WALL ABOVE TILE & SOFFIT VERTICAL SURFACE PNT4 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE READY-MIXED INTERIOR "ATRIUM WHITE" MEN'S & WOMEN'S CEILING, JANITOR'S WALLS, & PRE-SALES AREAS & STRUCTURE PNT5 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE CLASSIC COLORS #1055 "ALGONQUIN TRAIL" ACCENT @ FRONT WALL PNT6 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE CLASSIC COLORS #1038 "EVERLASTING" SALES WALLS & STRUCTURE/DECK, SPRINKLER LINES, HVAC, CONDUIT, ETC. PNT7 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE AMERICA'S COLORS #AC-25 "HARBOR GRAY" INTERIOR DOORS & FRAMES PNT8 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE SW OSHA YELLOW BOLLARDS, CAGED LADDER, EXTR. GAS LINES PNT9 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS SW #2910 "PRIMARY RED" INTERIOR FACE OF RECEIVING DOOR & MAIN SPRINKLER LINE PT1 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA, #P501 "GRAVEL", 13"x13"x3/8" (FIELD) MEN'S, WOMEN'S & JANITORS CLOSET FLOOR TILE FIELD N/A N/A PT2 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA #P505 SAND", 6 1/2 x20"x3/8" (ACCENT) MEN'S & WOMEN'S ACCENT FLOOR TILE N/A N/A PT3 PORCELAIN TILE DAL TILE VERANDA, #P501 "GRAVEL", 6"x13"x3/8" COVE BASE WITH MATCHING INSIDE/OUTSIDE CORNERS MEN'S, WOMEN'S & JANITOR'S WALL BASE N/A N/A SCRAPER MAT THE MATWORKS PRO-SCRAPER ENTRANCE SYSTEM W/ ALUM. TRANSITIONS ENTRY VESTIBULES ATTACH PER MANUFACTURERS GUIDELINES SSM1 SOLID SURFACE WILSONART EARTHSTONE, #9140-EA "NEVADA" W/ OGEE EDGE MEN'S & WOMEN'S VANITY COUNTER, BREAK RM. CABINETS LESS THAN 26 LESS THAN 25 TPTN1 STAINLESS STEEL MEN'S & WOMEN'S TOILET PARTITIONS SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 10A VB1 VINYL BASE (4") ARMSTRONG #71 "MID GRAY", 4" COVED FOR TILE, STRAIGHT FOR CARPET GYP. BOARD PARTITIONS, CMU WALLS, WAINSCOTS & COLUMNS 200 335 VB2 VINYL BASE (4") ARMSTRONG #08 "BUTTERCREAM", 4" COVED BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOMS ASTME 648 CLASS 1 LESS THAN 450 VCT1 VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON IMPERIAL TEXTURE, #51933 SALES AREA, HALL, BREAK & TRAINING ROOMS, CONFERENCE ROOM, ALL OFFICES & EQUIPMENT ROOM FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 ASTME 662 OR LESS 450 VCT2 VINYL COMP. TILE ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXCELON IMPERIAL TEXTURE, #51932 RACETRACK FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 ASTME 662 OR LESS 450 VST1 VINYL STRIP TILE AMTICO SPACIA, #S-W2504 "HONEY OAK", 4"x36" SALES AREA CORE PAD & MOTHER'S ROOM FLOORING ASTME 648 CLASS 1 LESS THAN 450 VT1 REDUCER MOULDING JOHNSONITE RRS-XX-D "BLACK" TRANSITIONS VCT TO CONCRETE ASTME 648 CLASS 1 WALL COVERING WOLF-GORDON WG 6428620 - CUSTOM VESTIBULE WALLCOVERING (SMOOTH) VESTIBULE WALLS ABOVE WAINSCOT CONTACT LARRY SHAGAWAT W/ WOLF-GORDON INC. PHONE: 800-347-0550 EXT. 849 WC2 WALL COVERING WOLF-GORDON G 6432266 - CUSTOM SERVICE MURAL (STIPPLE) CUSTOMER SERVICE AREA WALLS ABOVE WAINSCOT CONTACT LARRY SHAGAWAT W/ WOLF-GORDON INC. PHONE: 800-347-0550 EXT. 849 WAINSCOT PANELS USING PLAM1 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD SALES AREA, VESIBULES & HALL WAINSCOT SEE PLAM1 ABOVE SEE PLAM1 ABOVE WP2 WAINSCOT PANELS USING PLAM 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIAL ON 5/8" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD BREAK, TRAINING & CONFERENCE ROOM WAINSCOT SEE PLAM2 ABOVE SEE PLAM2 ABOVE WOOD GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY WP3 BEADBOARD NANTUCKET BEADBOARD COMPANY MOTHERS ROOM WAINSCOT ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTABLE ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT @ EA. SIDE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT_// ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT CONC. CART CURB 20 JAMB BREAK MTL. TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. A501 CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT SHIM AS REQ'D SEALANT g EA. SIDE ALUM. SLIDING DOOR NEW CMU VENEER W/ EIFS ABOVE JAMB AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT @ EA. SIDE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT SHIM AS REQ'D SEALANT @ EA. SIDE AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR 5/8" GYP. BD. 19 JAMB INTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. SLIDING DOORS EXISTING STRUCT. COLUMN EXISTING TILT-UP CONC PANEL p................... .r...................... TYP. EXTERIOR ALUM. DOORS AT E.I.F.S. 5/8" GYP. BD. GUARD (CG2) CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT NEW STL. COLUMN 16 to. `7 2.. JAMB SHIM AS REQ'D, SEALANT g EA. SIDE AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR INTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. SLIDING DOORS A501 CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT STL. STRUCTURE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT B.O.S. 8' - 6" ALUM. CART DOOR ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT BREAK MTL. TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP WITH BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION. SHIM AS REQ'D ALUM. STOREFRONT MULLION 18 HEAD SLIDING DOORS EXTERIOR ALUM. AUTO. A501} SCALE = 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SHIM AS REQ'D ALUM. & GLASS STOREFRONT STL. STRUCTURE B.O.S. 8' - 6" CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT 17 HEAD CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT BREAK MTL TO MATCH ADJACENT STOREFRONT, COAT SURFACE OF STEEL W/ A BITUMINOUS COATING OR WRAP W/ BUILDING PAPER TO PREVENT GALVANIC REACTION SHIM AS REQ'D AUTO. ALUM. SLIDING DOOR RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 INTERIOR A3PH.IJIPTER SLIDING DOORS A501 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: RTN CHECKED BY: RTN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE architecture • engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com LAS WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE DOOR & FINISH SCHEDULES SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. L A501 0, p/( 1/4 1'- 0" U.O.N. P • BUS; ti reserved, - parking z 0 (o for expectant r moms Ys , US • SIGN TO BE OWNER SUPPLIED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED. (REFER TO SIGNAGE NOTES FOR REQUIREMENTS) 18" DIA. SIGN SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY OWNER WHITE BACKGROUN D BLACK LETTERS BLACK BORDER LETTERS TO BE 1" HIGH (MIN.) STORK PARKING SIGN CPU PARKING SIGN (8 SIGNS REQ'D) (1 SIGN REQ'D) 8 DETAIL OF PARKING SIGNS SI01 SCALE = 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" SIGNAGE NOTES: WALL MOUNTED SIGNS TO BE SECURED TO MASONRY WALL AT CENTER (TOP & BOTTOM TYP.) POLE MOUNTED SIGNS TO USE STANDARD SIGN CHANNEL EMBEDDED 12" MIN. INTO CONC. BASE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SIGNAGE AS REQUIRED TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODES. VERIFY AND COORDINATE TYPE, QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF SIGNS W/ BRU CPM & CIVIL CONSULTANT. GRADE 7 2" CAP 5/16" BOLTS. UNPAINTED GALVANIZED STEEL 2" SQUARE TUBE POST SECURITY CAMERA SIGN (3 SIGNS REQ'D) UNPAINTED GALVANIZED STEEL 2 -1/4" SQUARE BASE POST SUPPORT W/ 5/16" CARRIAGE BOLT INSTALLATION IN PAVED AREAS: POSTS ARE TO BE LOCATED AS SHOWN ON SIGNAGE PLAN & SET IN PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE. SIGN POST & BASE AS MANUFACTURED BY BUSH CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MUSKEGON, MI., (800- 866 - 2874). MODEL: PLSC (OR APPROVED EQUAL). MOUNT SIGN TO POST PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. DETAIL g SURFACE SIGN POST SI01 / SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" 8' -0" n is t soon k‘r 9" 1' - 2" 3' -6" 1' -2" 9" 4' x 8' x 3/4" EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD PAINT WHITE 1 "0 "EYE HOOK" FOR — TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN 4x4 TREATED WD. POST SET 3' -0" BELOW GRADE 7-- TRU /BRU CONSTRUCTION SIGN DECAL. PROVIDED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR, ON PLYWOOD SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR. INSTALL DECAL PER OWNER'S REPS. INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: DASHED LINE INDICATES EDGE OF DECAL. WRAP DECAL EDGES OVER PLYWOOD EDGES. DO NOT CUT EXCESS DECAL � 6 � TEMP. CONSTRUCTION SIGN 5 SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" EIFS 1/2" GLASS MAT GYP. SHEATHING 3/8" A -307 ALL THREAD W/ WASHER INSIDE SIGN BACKING, PROVIDE 2 "x2" ALUMINUM ANGLE STRINGER AT BACKSIDE OF STUDS ELECTRICAL PRIMARY TO J -BOX & FINAL HOOK -UP BY G.C. ELECTRICIAN. 6' PIGTAIL OUT FROM BACK 6" METAL STUDS PIPE SLEEVE THROUGH STUCCO (TYP.) 8" 1 1 1 DETAIL @ SIGN SUPPORT WHITE LETTER COIL (RETURN) 2" WHITE JEWELITE TRIM ELECTRICAL PLUG IN 150 WHITE LEXAN FACE (V -01, V -02, OR V -03 FIRST SURFACE ELECTRICAL LEAD TO EACH LETTER INSIDE LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT CONNECTED TO GROUNDED PASS THRU W/ COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS (AS PER NEC 351 -2 & 600 -21 U.L. LISTED) POWER SUPPLY WHITE SLOAN LED LIGHTING UNIT .080 PRE - FINISHED WHITE ALUM (BACKS) WEEP HOLES SI01 / SCALE = 3/4" = 1-0" PYLON SCOPE: GC SHALL INSTALL OWNER PROVIDED PANELS INTO EXISTING LANDLORD PROVIDED CABINET. COORDINATE W/ TRU- PM. NOTE: EXTERIOR "LETTER" SIGNS ARE OWNER SUPPLIED. GC SHALL SECURE PERMIT AND INSTALL. 2 NOT USED SI01 1 SCALE = 1/8" = 1' -0" 4 SITE SIGNAGE PLAN S101 SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" NEW TRU SIGNAGE - TR -7 (141.5 SF) -o ": CART CORRAL STORK PARKING SIGNS (8) SEE DETAILS 7 & 8 /S101 L HANDICAP SPACES & SIGNAGE BY LL / DEVELOPER L SECURITY CAMERA SIGNS MOUNTED TO LIGHT POLE. SEE DETAIL 8/S101 CART CORRAL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 1 PPRO2 20 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION • PARTIAL FRONT ELEVATION SI01 SCALE = 1 /8" = 1' -0" bto 0 7 'I_ RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERmu so NO)01$,‘. FOOD CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58k PROTOTYPE P architecture engineering, P.0 18114 Mile Rd .NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com SCs_ DOUGLAS $ WURL STATE OF WASHINGTON 03-(o lF STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE SIGN INSTALLATION SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. S101 AR PERIMETER TRACK SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION COUNT PERIMETER GRAPHICS 12'-0" TRACK 53 ARCHITECTURAL KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION GLAZING 2 WALL / PARTITION 3 ARE WALL 4 ARE SHUTTER DOOR 5 ROLLING OVERHEAD DOOR 6 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR (CONSULTANT TO VERIFY REQUIRED SIZE) 7 BI -FOLD DOOR (CONSULTANT TO VERIFY REQUIRED SIZE) 8 DUTCH DOOR (INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR) 9 MAN DOOR 10 DOUBLE SWING DOOR 11 IMPACT DOOR 12 ROOF LADDER / HATCH 13 ROOF LEADER / DRAIN 14 UNE OF MEZZANINE ABOVE 15 UFT, CHUTE, CONVEYOR OR STAIRS 16 CART RAIL 17 SPRINKLER RISER 18 GAS RISER 19 DOMESTIC WATER RISER 20 BALER 21 COMPACTOR 22 GENERATOR 23 TRANSFORMER 24 ELECTRICAL PANELS 25 FLOOR SINK 26 WATER COOLER WOOD PACKAGE KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION (SEE WOOD PACKAGE FOR DETAILS) 1 CPU COUNTER 2 MANAGER'S WORKSTATION 3 COMPUTER CART 4 MOBILE REGISTER CART 5 "R" ZONE SUDING DOOR 6 DEMO TABLE 7 TV / VCR CABINET 8 STORAGE CABINET 9 RGD PROCESSING COUNTER 10 STORAGE BIN 11 BICYCLE ASSEMBLY COUNTER 12 REFUND / EXCHANGE COUNTERS 13 JUVENILE REGISTRY DESK AND END PANEL 14 BENCH 15 TABLE & CHAIRS FIXTURE PLAN KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION COAT RACK / HOOKS 2 REFRIGERATOR 1 LOCKERS 4 VENDING MACHINES NOTES 5 KIDDIE RIDE 6 ICE CREAM COOLER 1. ALL PERIMETER SALES GONDOLAS ARE 12' -0" HIGH, UNLESS NOTED. 7 SODA COOLER LEGEND 8 PALLETS (BELOW RACK) 9 10 11 12 PALLETS (TYP.) ROLLER CONVEYOR OVERHEAD RACKING 6" BORDER TILE (TYP.) 13 END PANEL (SUPPLIED BY FIXTURE COMPANY) 14 15 16 17 18 END PANEL (SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR) POST W/ RETRACTABLE BELT (TRAFFIC CONTROL) METAL BENCH DIRECTORY REGISTRY KIOSK 3' -0" GONDOLA SECTION ® GUEST HELP CENTER LOCATIONS ® PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS c8 CALL BOX LOCATIONS FIXTURE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS OR EXISTING FIXTURE AREAS TO BE CARPETED CRIB /APPAREL SQ. FT. CRIB APPAREL PROTOTYPE 2,299 1,910 THIS PLAN 2,270 1,967 PRE -SALES RACKING SIZE UN. FT. SIZE UN. FT. 1' -8" 152 5' -0" 168 3, -0" 0 GONDOLA 54 3' -4" 0 RTW 128 4' -0" 932 OTHER 0 1 2010 58K SSBS CHART SQUARE FOOTAGE COUNTS CEILING HEIGHTS TRU SALES SQ. FT. BRU SALES SQ. FT. TOTAL SALES SQ. FT. PRE -SALES SQ. FT. AUX. SQ. FT. (NON SALES/ PRE - SALES) BUILDING SQ. FT. (FOOTPRINT) MEZZANINE SQ. FT. TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. AT FRONT = ±22' -9" AT REAR = PROTOTYPE 29,351 17,509 46,860 8,041 4,006 58,907 N/A 58,907 ON MEZZANINE = f THIS PLAN 28,702 17,566 46,268 8,383 4,209 58,860 N/A 58,860 UNDER MEZZANINE = f LINEAR AND CUBIC FIXTURE COUNTS REGISTER COUNTS LINEAR FOOTAGE CUBIC FOOTAGE FRONT END REGISTERS =14 TRU SALES BRU SALES TOTAL SALES APPAREL UNITS PRE -SALES SALES OVERSTOCK PRE -SALES ELECTRONIC REGISTERS = 4 REGISTRY DESK = 1 PROTOTYPE 4,131 1,885 6,016 N/A 1,243 65,839 35,448 33,307 REFUND REGISTERS = 3 THIS PLAN 4,084 1,880 5,964 N/A 1,434 67,026 36,905 36,358 TOTAL REGISTERS = 22 1 1 1 1 1 1 289' -6' 190' -O" 99' -6" 38' -0' 37' -11" 7 5/8" 7 5/8" ELECTRONIC PRE -SALES 8' -6 1/Y SECURITY CAGE 13._4" L_L'1J BREAK ROOM RECEIVING AREA ■■■■ ■■■■ 8' -6 1/Y 1/2' X 28' -2' $' -2 1/2' X ' -4" P.119.5' -6" P271.5'-4" 60' -2 N V ® V -2.22 i - w.....6' -O' ._., ...t -6' -0" - -_ ,_N_. 1.: 9' -0' HIGH 7 -0' HIGH 36 18 6'410 1/2" x 24' -2" 7 -o' HIGH 9' -0' HIGH o�c� 3`�Z1 18` qi • X 6•-2 16,< 7r6 1/2' x 24' -2' 18^ 3 %,2 18 24.. , . REVIEWED FOR CODE CO • ► APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVI,SIr 4ea -0' HIGH 18 3 -z; 3' -0' HIGH 9' -0• HIGH 6' -1Q 1/2" IR X 24- 2"':•, 5 -6- J 9• -0• HIGH 6' -21/2' 36 x 24' -2' 36 0 1 v 9' -4 1/8" 22 I 2' -Q 1/21 X 361- ' -2 1 /Y Y • 114' -3 5/8" 12' -0 1/2" 13' -3 7/8" 112' -0 1/2" 128' -8 1/2' 2' -a 1 3' -2 piqnngS115 I 1 5 -5 3/8" - OOM I • I I-I I -- x:`16=4 -", ° , , t QUI -IM * -V IT � � T � 17 � 1 .1 �, r 1 rmu....... ....... 36' -8 3/8" FROM INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL TO EDGE OF RACETRACK 12' -O" AISLE . 64' -0" OVERALL WIDTH OF LEFT -SIDE CORE AISLE 94' -0" OVERALL WIDTH OF RIGHT -SIDE COR 34' -7" FROM EDGE OF RACETRACK 0 INTERIOR FACE OF INTERIOR WALL 265' -0 3/8" OVERALL SALES i5- -1{-i-P PRE -SALES 7 5/8 ", 1 1/2" AUGNMENT PLATE 38' -0" 1 1/2" ALIGNMENT PLATE 7 7/8" 14' -3" 1 1 280' -5" OVERALL WIDTH FIXTURE PLAN SCALE: 1/16"=1'- 0" 1 bt 1 72- RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER Revisions No Date Description 01/11/10 ISSUED TO CONSULTANT FOR CD DEVELOPMENT -RM 1 02/19/10 REVISED TO REFLECT CONSULTANTS ARCHITECTURAL MODIFICATIONS. UPDATED SPORTS, WHEELS, SEASONAL, ELECTRONICS AND PRE -SALES PER MODIFICATIONS - HC BID DATE: - -- CAD NAME- 8002F01 PROJECT NO • - -- DRAWN BY: R.M. /T.Q. CHECKED BY: 1--Q- _ PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: - -- 02/16/10 ToYsgus BABics9us® Store Support Center One Geoffrey Way Wayne, NJ 07470 (973) 617 -3500 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "B" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "51" US. Location TUKWILA WASHINGTON Drawing Title 2010 58K SSBS FIXTURE PLAN Scale Date 1/11/2010 Sheet No. A_ v , GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES 1. DESIGN CRITERIA 1.1. BUILDING CODE 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W/ AMENDMENTS 1.2. GRAVITY WADS 1.2.1. ROOFS DEAD LOAD - TYPICAL ROOF 20 PSF U■E LOAD 20 PSF 1.22 FLOORS UVE LOAD - SLAB ON GRADE 100 PSF 1.3. SNOW LOAD& 1.3.1. GROUND SNOW LOAD 1.3.2. FLAT -ROOF SNOW LOAD 1.3.3. SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR 1.3.4. SNOW LOAD IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.3.5. THERMAL FACTOR - TYP. ROOF 1.3.6. THERMAL FACTOR - CANOPIES 1.3.7. DRIFTING AND /OR SUDING SNOW HAS BEEN INCLUDED. 1.4. MIND LOAD& 1.4.1. BASIC MIND SPEED 1.4.2. WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.4.3. BUILDING CATEGORY 1.4.4. WIND EXPOSURE 1.4.5. INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT 1.4.6. NET ROOF JOIST WIND UPLIFT SEISMIC DESIGN DATA: 1.5.1. SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY 1.5.2. SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFF1CIENTS SI= 0.141 Ss= 0.048 SDs= 0.941 SD1= 0.489 1.5.3. SITE CLASS 1.5.4. BASIC SEISMIC - FORCE - RESISTING SYSTEM - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.5.5. DESIGN BASE SHEAR 1.5.6. SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.5.7. SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT 1.5.8. RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR 1.5.9. ANALYSIS PROCEDURE 1.6. DESIGN STRENGTHS 1.6.1. CONCRETE STRENGTH CLASS 28 DAYS A 4000 PSI B 3000 PSI C 4000 PSI D 5000 PS 1.6.1.1. BAR REINFORCEMENT 1.6.1.2. WELDED HIRE FABRIC 1.6.2. STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.6.2.1. W- SHAPES: 1.6.2.2. HSS RECTANGULAR: 1.6.2.3. PIPE 1.6.2.4. PLATES, ANGLES, CHANNELS: 1.6.2.5. STEER. DECK: 1.6.2.6. ANCHOR RODS 1.6.2.7. THREADED RODS 1.6.2.8. HIGH STRENGTH BOLT: 1.6.2.9. HIGH STRENGTH NUT: 1.6.2.10. WASHER: 1.5. DENSITY 145 PCF 145 PCF 145 PCF 145 PCF Pg= 20 PSF Pf= 20 PSF Ce= 1.0 Is= 1.0 Ct= 1.0 Ct= 1.2 85 MPH Iw= 1.0 II C 0.18 5.0 PSF D D SHEAR WALLS 0.235W le= 1.0 Cs= 0.235 R= 4 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE LOCATION INTERIOR SLABS FOOTINGS, & FOUNDATION WALLS AIR- ENTRAINED EXT. SLABS & WALLS WALLS ASTM A615 GR. 60 (Fr 60 KSI) ASTM A185 (Fr 70 KSI) AS111 A992 (Fr 50 KSI) ASTM A500 GR. B (Fy= 46 KSI) ASTM A53 GR. B (Fr 35 KS) ASTM A36 (FY= 36 KSI) ASTM A653 (F) 33 KS) AS111 F1554 GR. 36 ASIA A36 (FY= 36 KSI) ASTM A325 TYPE 1 ASTM A563 GR. C HEAVY HEX AS111 F436 TYPE 1 2. FOUNDATIONS AND EARTHWORK 21. FOOTINGS ARE DESIGNED TO BEAR ON SOIL OR ENGINEERED FILL VNTH AN ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY OF 3000 PSF FOR SPREAD FOOTINGS AND 3000 PSF FOR WALL FOOTINGS. IF MATERIAL OF THIS CAPACITY IS NOT FOUND AT THE ELEVATIONS INDICATED, THE FOOTINGS SHALL BE LOWERED OR ENLARGED. NOTIFY AND CONSULT ENGINEER FOR ADJUSTMENTS. 2.2. ALL FiLL UNDER SLABS AND ADJACENT TO WALLS SHALL BE CLEAN GRANULAR SOL COMPACTED TO A MINIMUM OF 95% MODIFIED PROCTOR. 2.3. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES OF GRANULAR FILL BELOW ALL INTERIOR SLABS-ON-GRADE. 2.4. NO ENGINEERED FILL SHALL BE PLACED UNTIL EXCAVATION BOTTOMS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY A GE0TECHNICAL ENGINEER. 2.5. ALL FOOTING EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE INSPECTED, PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, BY A GEOTECHNICA. ENGINEER TO VERIFY SUITABLE BEARING MATERIAL OF CAPACITY AS SPECIFIED. 2.6. BOTTOM OF EXTERIOR BUILDING FOOTINGS ARE TO BE AT LEAST 12 INCHES BELOW FINAL OUTSIDE GRADE REGARDLESS OF ELEVATION SHOWN ON PLAN. 2.7. AU. CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS SHALL BE CENTERED UNDER WALLS AND ALL SPREAD FOOTINGS SHALL BE CENTERED UNDER COLUMNS OR PIERS UNLESS NOTED. 2.8. NO SLABS OR FOUNDATIONS SHALL BE PLACED INTO OR ADJACENT TO SUBGRADE CONTAINING WATER, ICE, FROST OR LOOSE MATERIAL 2.9. WATER SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED TO ACCUMULATE IN FOOTING EXCAVATIONS. 2.10.140 BACKFIWNG AND COMPACTING OF EARN SHALL BE PERMITTED AGAINST FOUNDATION WALLS UNTIL SUPPORTING SLABS HAVE BEEN POURED AND HAVE REACHED 75% OF THEIR DESIGN STRENGTH OR UNLESS ADEQUATE BRACING IS PROVIDED. 211. WHERE FOUNDATION WALLS ARE TO HAVE SOL PLACED ON BOTH SIDES, PLACE SOIL SIMULTANEOUSLY SO AS TO MAINTAIN A COMMON ELEVATION ON EACH SIDE OF THE WALL. 212.REFER TO PLUMBING, CIVIL, ELECTRICAL & ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REQUIRED UNDER SLAB UTIUMES. 3. CONCRETE 3.1. CONCRETE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE VAN THE FOLLOWNG: 3.1.1. AN 318 LATEST EDITION BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 3.1.2. CRS MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE, LATEST EDITION. 3.1.3. CRS PLACING REINFORCING BARS, LATEST EDITION. 3.2. CONCRETE AT THE TIME OF PLACEMENT SHALL HAVE A SLUMP OF 4' +/- 1' UNLESS A SUPER - PLASTICIZING AGENT IS USED. IF A SUPER - PLASTICIZING AGENT IS USED, THE SLUMP AT NE TIME OF PLACEMENT SHALL BE 10' +/- 1'. 3.3. CALCIUM CHLORIDE SHALL NOT BE USED. 3.4. CONCRETE EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE AIR ENTRAINED. AR CONTENT SHALL BE BETWEEN 4.5 AND 7.5 PERCENT. 3.5. THE COARSE AGGREGATE SIZE SHAU. BE j57 OR LARGER. 3.6. THE MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT (ASTM C150) OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING. (FLY ASH IS NOT PERMITTED IN SLABS ON GRADE.) 3.6.1. INTERIOR SLABS AND WALLS = 564 POUNDS PER CUBIC YARD 3.6.2. FOOTINGS AND FOUNDATION WALLS = 470 POUNDS PER CUBIC YARD 3.6.3. MR ENTRAINED EXTERIOR WALLS AND SLABS = 611 POUNDS PER CUBIC YARD 3.7. CONCRETE COVERAGE FOR REINFORCEMENT: 3.7.1. FOOTINGS 3' 3.7.2. SLAB ON GRADE CENTER OF SLAB 3.7.3. WALLS EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: 2" 3.7.4. COLUMN TIES 1 1/2" 3.8. LAP SPUCES SHALL CONFORM TO THE LAP SPLICE SCHEDULE 3.9. BAR LENGTHS SHOWN DO NOT INCLUDE HOOKS OR BENDS. 3.10.ALL OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS SHALL HAVE (2) 15 BARS PLACED ALL AROUND OPENING. EXTEND BARS 2' -0' BEYOND EACH FACE OF OPENING. PLACE 2 - j5 X 4' -0" LONG BARS DIAGONALLY AT EACH CORNER. 3.11. FOUNDATION WALLS SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH (2) 'i HORIZONTAL FOR EACH 2' -0" OF WALL HEIGHT WITH A MINIMUM OF (2) 15 TOP AND BOTTOM. 3.12ALL WELDED Y4RE FABRIC LAPS SHALL BE 8' AT ENDS AND SIDES. 3.13.ALL SLABS ON GRADE SHALL HAVE CONTROL OR CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AT 12' -0' MAXIMUM SPACING. 3.14.CHAMFER AU. EXPOSED CORNERS OF CONCRETE WITH 3/4' CHAMFER, U.N.O. 3.15.ALL BASE PLATES, ANCHOR BOLTS, ETC., BELOW GRADE SHALL BE COVERED WITIH A MINIMUM OF 3' OF CONCRETE. 3.16.THE REINFORCING STEEL CONTRACTOR SHALL FABRICATE ALL REINFORCEMENT AND FURNISH ALL ACCESSORIES, CHAIRS, SPACER BARS AND SUPPORTS NECESSARY TO SECURE THE REINFORCEMENT UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE PLANS AND /OR DETAILS. 3.17.1HE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ADDITIONAL WALL /SLAB OPENINGS NOT SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWNGS. REFER TO ARCHITECHURAL, MECHANICAL, PWMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 3.18.000RDINATE PWMBING SLEEVE LOCATIONS WITH FOUNDATION PWMBING PLAN. FOUNDATION CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL ALL REQUIRED FOUNDATIONS SLEEVES. 3.19.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR DRAINS. SLABS SHALL BE SLOPED TO FLOOR DRAINS. 3.20.REBAR SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 3.21.CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO POURING OF ANY CONCRETE CONCRETE SUPPLIER SHALL USE ONE OF HIS STANDARD MIX DESIGNS WITH A PROVEN TRACK RECORD AND STRENGTH HISTORY. SUBMITTAL SHALL INCLUDE COMPRESSIVE TEST RESULTS FROM PREVIOUS JOBS UTILIZING THE SAME MIX DESIGN. MEMBER DEPTH: (EXAMPLE 6' _� 600 x 1/100 INCHES) ALL MEMBER DEPTHS ARE TAKEN IN 1 /100 INCHES. 600 Q 162 STYLE: S = STUD OR JOIST SECTION T = TRACK SECTIONS FLANGE WIDTH: (EXAMPLE 1 5/8' = 1.625' = 162 x 1/100 INCHES) ALL FLANGE WIDTHS ARE TAKEN IN 1/100 INCHES. MATERIAL THICKNESS: (EXAMPLE 0.054" = 54 MILS. 1 MIL = 1/1000 INCH) COLD- FORMED STEEL IDENTIFICATION LEGEND 4. STEEL 4.1. STRUCTURAL STEEL 4.1.1. STEEL SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOVANG: 4.1.1.1. RISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES, LATEST EDITION. 4.1.1.2 RISC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS, LATEST EDITION 4.1.2. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE 3/4 INCH DIAMETER A325 -N UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWNGS. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE PRETENSIONED. 4.1.3. ALL BEAMS SHALL BE MARKED AND ERECTED WITH NATURAL CAMBER UPWARDS. 4.1.4. DO NOT PAINT STRUCTURAL SURFACES TO BE IN CONTACTIl1H POURED CONCRETE OR THOSE SURFACES TO RECEIVE WELDED STUDS. 4.1.5. WHERE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT DETAILED, THE FABRICATOR SHALL DESIGN AND SHOW ON THE FIRST SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS. CONNECTIONS SHALL SUPPORT A MINIMUM OF 60% OF THE TOTAL UNIFORM LOAD CAPACITY SHOWN IN THE TABLE OF UNIFORM LOAD CONSTANTS, PART 2 OF MSC ASD 9TH EDITION, FOR THE GIVEN BEAM, SPAN AND GRADE OF STEEL PROVIDED. VERTICAL REACTIONS (R) SHOWN ON PLANS SHALL BE USED FOR CONNECTION DESIGN WHERE THE LOAD SHOWN IS GREATER THAN THE CRITERIA GIVEN ABOVE VERTICAL REACTIONS (R) SHOWN ARE ASD VALUES (UN- FACTORED). CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH THE SHOP DRAWINGS. 4.1.6. 'THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SHALL BE CONSIDERED IN THE DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS BOLT SHEAR, BOLT BEARING, BLOC( SHEAR, SHEAR ON THE NET AREA OF THE CONNECTING MEMBERS AND LOCAL BENDING STRESSES. 4.1.7. GROUT FOR BASE PLATES SHALL BE NON- METAWC, NON- SHRINK GROUT WITH F'c=7000 PSI, U.N.O. 4.1.8. SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL STEEL SHAPES SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 4.2 STEEL DECK 4.2.1. STEEL DECK SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST EDITION OF THE FOLLOWING: 4.2.1.1. STEEL. DECK INSTITUTE DESIGN MANUAL FOR COMPOSITE DECKS, FORM DECKS, AND ROOF DECKS. 4.2.2 DECK SUPPLIER SHALL BE A MEMBER IN GOOD STANDING WITH SDI. 4.2.3. DECK SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 4.2.4. DECK SHAU. BE LAID UP IN MINIMUM (3) SPAN LENGTHS 111111 TWO INCH MINIMUM END LAPS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 4.2.5. METAL DECK SHALL BE CONNECTED TO SUPPORT STEEL AT NE EDGES OF ALL DIAPHRAGMS WITH FASTENERS SPACED FOR THE LESSER OF SIDE LAP SPACING OR 12' ON CENTER. REFER TO ROOF PLANS FOR ATTACHMENT TO INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 4.3. WELDING 4.3.1. WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING: 4.3.1.1. AWS D1.1- LATEST EDITION, STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STEEL 4.3.1.2 AVE D1.3- LATEST EDITION, STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - SHEET STEEL 4.3.2. AU. WELDING SHALL BE DONE USING E70XX ELECTRODES. 4.3.3. WELD FILLER METAL SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CHARPY V -NOTCH (CVN) TOUGHNESS OF 20 FT-LB AT -20 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT AND 40 FT-LB AT 70 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT. 4.3.4. WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AVE CERTIFIED WELDERS. 5. METAL STUDS 5.1. ALL SIZING BASED ON STEEL STUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (1080 ER- 4943P) PRODUCT TECHNICAL INFORMATION. 5.2. MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: 5.2.1. GALVANIZED MATERIAL 5.2.1.1. ALL S1UDS AND JOiSTS,TRACK, BRIDGING, END CLOSURES, AND ACCESSORIES GREATER THAN 43 MILS (0.0451') SHALL BE FORMED FROM STEEL THAT CORRESPONDS TO THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF AST1A A1003, STRUCTURAL GRADE 50, TYPE H WITH A MINIMUM HELD OF 50,000 PSI. 5.2.1.2. ALL STUDS, JOISTS, TRACK, BRIDGING, END CLOSURES, AND ACCESSORIES LESS OR EQUAL TO 43 MiLS (0.0451')SHALL BE FORMED FROM STEEL THAT CORRESPONDS TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A1003, STRUCTURAL GRADE 33, TYPE H Y 11H A MINIMUM YIELD OF 33,000 PSI. 5.2.1.3. ALL STUDS, JOISTS, TRACK, BRIDGING AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE FORMED FROM STEEL HAVING A GALVANIZED COATING MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A525. 5.2.2. PROPERTIES 5.2.2.1. THE PHYSICAL AND STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES USTED BY THE STEEL STUD MANUFACTURER ASSOCIATION AND MSI DESIGN MANUAL SHALL BE CONSIDERED THE MINIMUM PERMITTED FOR ALL FRAMING MEMBERS. 5.2.3. SUBSTITUTIONS 5.2.3.1. THE ARCHITECT AND /OR ENGINEER OF RECORD MUST APPROVE ANY SUBSTITUTIONS IN WRITING PRIOR TO DELIVERY. 5.3. INSTALLATION OF STUDS SHALL BE AS PER ASTM C1007 -00 'INSTALLATION OF LOAD BEARING (TRANSVERSE AND AXIAL) SEEL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES', ASTM C955 -00a 'SPECIFICATION FOR LOAD BEARING (TRANSVERSE AND AXIAL) STEEL S1UDS, RUNNERS (TRACK), AND BRACING OR BRIDGING FOR SCREW APPUCA11ON OF GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL PLASTER BASES', AND ASTM C754 -00 'SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS TO RECEIVE SCREW ATTACHED GYPSUM BOARD'. 5.4. ALL FRAMING COMPONENTS SHALL BE CUT SQUARELY FOR ATTACHMENT TO PERPENDICULAR MEMBERS, OR AS REQUIRED FOR AN ANGULAR RT AGAINST ABUTTING MEMBERS. MEMBERS SHALL BE HELD POSITIVELY IN PLACE UNTIL PROPERLY FASTENED. 5.5. AU. TRACK BUTT JOINTS, ABUTTING PIECES OF TRACK SHAU. BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO A COMMON STRUCTURAL ELEMENT, OR THEY SHALL BE BUTT -WELDED OR SPUCED TOGETHER. 5.6. ALL STUD BRIDGING SHALL BE ATTACHED IN A MANNER TO PREVENT STUD ROTATION. BRIDGING ROWS SHALL BE SPACED ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION. 5.7. TEMPORARY BRACING SHALL BE PROVIDED UNTIL ERECTION IS COMPLETED. 5.8. JOISTS SHALL BE LOCATED DIRECTLY OVER BEARING STUDS OR A LOAD DISTRIBUTION MEMBER SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TOP TRACK. 5.9. PROVIDE YAM STIFFENERS AT REACTION POINTS WHERE INDICATED BY PLANS. 5.10.401ST BRIDGING SHALL BE COMPRISED OF SOUD BRIDGING AND FLAT STRAPPING. USE SOUD BRIDGING IN FIRST AND LAST TWO ROWS OF JOISTS. ATTACH FLAT STRAPPING TO TOP AND BOTTOM FLANGES OF JOISTS FROM THIRD ROW EXTENDING FOR A MAXIMUM OF 10' -0 ". REPEAT SOLID BRIDGING FOR ONE JOIST SPACE AND THEN ANOTHER 10' -0" OF FIAT STRAPPING. REPEAT. OMIT TOP FLANGE BRIDGING WHERE METAL DECK IS PROPERLY ATTACHED TO THE TOP FLANGE OF JOISTS. 5.11. JOISTS SHALL BE BRIDGED AT MAXIMUM 8'-0' SPACING. 5.12.END BLOCKING SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE JOIST ENDS ARE NOT OTHERWISE RESTRAINED FROM ROTATION. 5.13.JC STS MUST HAVE A MINIMUM OF 10' UNPUNCHED STEEL AT BEARING POINTS. STUDS MUST HAVE A MINIMUM OF 10' OF UNPUNCHED STEEL AT EACH END. 5.14.STUD ENDS MUST BE SQUARELY SEATER AGAINST THE TRACK WEB. BOTH STUD FLANGES MUST BE ATTACHED TO TRACK MEMBERS AT TOP AND BOTTOM. 5.15.S1UD BRIDGING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY 1 -1/2' COLD ROLLED U- CHANNEL THE U- CHANNEL MUST BE ATTACHED TO EACH STUD BY WELDING OR ATTACHING YOUTH CUP ANGLES AND SCREWS. HORIZONTAL STRAPPING AND SOUD BRIDGING WITH TRACK MEMBERS CAN ALSO BE USED FOR BRIDGING. BRIDGING SHALL BE SPACED AT 4' -0' 0.C. MAX. 5.16.1HE FOLLOWING MINIMUM COLD FORMED STEEL ATTACHMENTS SHAT BE PROVIDED U.N.O» 6.16.1.1RAC( TO STRUCTURAL STEEL: (1)- 0.145' DIAMETER POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER 0 2' -8' 0.0. 5.16.2. TRACK TO METAL DECK: (1)- #10 TEK SCREW 01' -4' 0.C. 5.16.3. TRACK TO MASONRY OR CONCRETE: (1)- 0.145' DIAMETER POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER 0 2' -8' 0.0 5.16.4.STUD TO STRUCTURAL STEEL: (1) - L2x 2x 14 GA. WP ANGLE CONNECTION W/ (2) - #10 1B( SCREWS INTO METAL STUD AND (2) -0.145' DIAMETER POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS INTO STRUCTURAL STEEL. 5.17. ALL COLD FORMED MEMBERS SHALL COME FROM A SINGLE MANUFACTURER; ONLY MANUFACTURERS WHO ARE MEMBERS OF THE STEEL STUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SSMA) WILL BE ACCEPTED. THE INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 5.18. ALL STRUCTURAL FRAMING ACCESSORIES SHALL BE FORMED FROM STRUCTURAL QUAUTY STEEL %NTH MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 50 KS AND HAVE MINIMUM PROTECTIVE COATING EQUAL TO ASTM A1003 G-60 GALVANIZED COATING. BASIS OF DESIGN CONNECTION MANUFACTURER: THE STEEL NETWORK, INC. OR APPROVED EQUAL. 5.19. RIGID CONNECTIONS FOR ATTACHMENT OF METAL FRAMING TO META. FRAMING AND TO THE PRIMARY STRUCTURE SHALL BE FORMED FROM STRUCTURAL QUAUTY STEEL WITH MINIMUM HELD STRENGTH OF 50 KS AND HAVE MINIMUM PROTECTIVE COATING EQUAL TO ASTM A653. 5.20. BRIDGING CUPS SHAT PROVIDE ATTACHMENT TO STUD WEB AND WRAPPING AROUND THE BRIDGING CHANNEL BRIDGING ACCESSORIES SHAT BE FORMED FROM STRUCTURAL QUAUTY STEEL WITH MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 50 KS AND HAVE MINIMUM PROTECTIVE COATING EQUAL TO ASTM A653. 6. MISCELLANEOUS - 6.1. ALL EXPANSION BOLTS SHALL BE HIL11 KWON( BOLT 3 OR SMPSON STRONG -BOLT AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. MINIMUM EMBEDMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 3 1/2', 4 ", 4 3/4' FOR 1/2', 5/8", AND 3/4' DIAMETERS RESPECTIVELY. 6.2.. CHEMICAL (EPDXY) ANCHORS 6.2.1. CONCRETE AND GROUT FILLED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT APPUCATIONS SHALL BE HILTI HY -150 OR HIT -ICE ADHESIVE KITH HiLTI HAS -E ROOS OR SIMPSON SET ADHESIVE WTH A36 RODS FREE OF OIL MINIMUM EMBEDMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 3 1/2", 4 1/4', 5 ", AND 6 5/8" FOR 3/8', 1/2 ", 5/8', AND 3/4' DIAMETERS RESPECTIVELY. HILTI TZ RODS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED IN CONCRETE SLAB APPUCATIONS MTh THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM EMBEDMENTS: 2 7/8", 3 1/2', 4 ", AND 5 1/4" FOR 3/8', 1/2', 5/8', AND 3/4" DIAMETERS RESPECTIVELY. 6.22 APPUCATIONS OTHER THAN ABOVE SHALL BE HILT HY 20 ADHESIVE WITH SCREENED INSERTS AND HILTI A RODS. MINIMUM EMBEDMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 3 3/8'. 6.3. THESE DRAWINGS DO NOT INCLUDE NECESSARY COMPONENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION SAFETY. 6.4. THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN IS BASED ONLY ON THE STRUCTURE IN ITS COMPLETED STATE CONTRACTORS AND THEIR SUBS SHALL TAKE WHATEVER PRECAUTIONS ARE NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND ALL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL LOADINGS THAT MAY BE ENCOUNTERED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THE STRUCTURE 6.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. 6.6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE BASED ON THE EXISTING BUILDING DRAWINGS AND MUST BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK. 6.7. CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE USED AS ERECTION DRAWINGS. 6.8. REPORT ANY DRAWING DISCREPANCIES FOUND TO NE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF THE WORK FOR CLARIFICATION. Mgt. THICKNESS (IN MILS) CORRESPONDING GAUGE: 33 20 43 18 54 16 68 14 97 12 REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION IBC 2006 TABLE 1704.3 VERIFICATION MD INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFS ENCE 1. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF HiGH STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: 2. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDEDTO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPER MATERIAL _ X 3. PERFORM CLASSIFICATION AND TESTING OF CONTROLLED FILL MATERIALS. a. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS M CONFIRM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCI1ON DOCUMENTS. - X APPLICABLE ASTM MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS; ABC 360, SECTION A3.3 - b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. _ X - - 2. INSPECTION OF HIGH - STRENGTH BOLTING: 4. VERIFYING USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. - X ICI 31& CH. 4, 5.2 -5.4 a. BEARING -TYPE CONNECTIONS - X MSC 360, SECTION M25 1704.3.3 b. SLIP CRITICAL CONNECTION X X 3. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL; AC 318: 5.9, 5.10 1913.6, 1913.7, 1913.8 7. INSPECTION FOR MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. , . _ - a IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTU STANDARDS SPEEFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. - 1913.9 ASTM A 6 OR ASTM A 568 1708.4 b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED MILL TEST REPORTS. - - ASTM A 6 OR ASTM A 568 4. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILLER MATERIALS; X Aa 31& CH. 16 - 10. VERIFICATION OF IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR M REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. a. IDEMIFCATION MARKINGS TD CONFORM TO AVE SPECIFICATION IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. _ ACI 31& 6.2 ASC 360, SECTION A3.5 - b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COLIPUANCE REQUIRED. - - - - 5. INSPECTION OF WELDING: a. STRUCiURAL STEEL - - SOUTH CALLS 1) COMPLETE AND PARTIAL PENETRATiON GROOVE WELDS. X - - AVE D1.1 1704.3.1 2) MUL11PASS FILLET WELDS X - 3) SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS GREATER THAN 5/16' X - 4) SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 5/16' - X 5) FLOOR AND ROOF DECK WELDS - X AWS D1.3 - b. REINFORCING STEEL - - AWS D1.4 ACI 31& 3.5.2 - 1) VERIFICATION OF WELDABIUTY OF REINFORCING STEEL OTHER THAN ASTM A 706. - X 2) REINFORCING STEEL- RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECW. REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS AND SHEAR X - lititil'UtMilltit RENRACEMENT. X - 4) OTHER REINFORCING STEEL. - X 6. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME JOINT DETAILS FOR COMPUANCE WiTH APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: a. DUALS SUCH AS BRACING AND STIFFENING. b. MEMBER LOCATIONS. c. APPLICATION OF JOINT DETAILS AT EACH CONNECTION. - - - X - ' - 1704.3.2 REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF SOILS IBC 2006 TABLE 1704.7 VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION TASK CONTINUOUS DURING TASK USTED PERIODICALLY DURING TASK LISTED 1. VERIFY MATERIALS BELOW FOOTINGS ARE ADEQUATE TO ACHIVE THE DESIGN BEARING CAPACITY. _ X 2. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDEDTO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPER MATERIAL _ X 3. PERFORM CLASSIFICATION AND TESTING OF CONTROLLED FILL MATERIALS. - X 4. VERIFY USE OF PROPER MATERIALS, DENSITIES AND UFr THICKNESSES DURING PIJCaIENr MD COMPACTION OF CONTROLLED FiLL x - 5. PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONTROLLED FILL, OBSERVE SUBGRADE AND VERIFY THAT SITE HAS BEEN PREPARED PROPERLY. - X teg o• C v - 4 HEAVY HEX NUT - TACK WELD IN PLACE TO BOTTOM OF ROD. TYPICAL ANCHOR RODS 6001125 -68 CONT. W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO VERT. SIDS AND EXIST. HEADER 0 24' 0.C. (USE 1 - HILTI X-U FASTENER AT EXIST. CONC. WADS) 6005162 -68 0 2' -0' 0.C. 6001125-68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO STUDS AND HILTI X-U FASTENERS W/ 1 1/4' EMBEDMENT 0 24' 0.C. EXIST. FOUNDATION TYPICAL INFILL OF OPENINGS BEAM OR JOIST lax 3x 1/4' AS REQ'D. TO FRAME OPENINGS • CNI • PACK FIRMLY WITH NON- SHRINK GROUT UNDER BASE PLATE TACK WELD NUT TO BOTTOM OF ANCHOR ROD. OUTLINE OF INSIDE FACE OF RN CURB BEAM OR JOIST 1 1/2" t 3/4'0 ANCHOR RODS 0 TYPICAL BASE PLATE FOR HSS COLUMNS REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION IBC 2006 TABLE 1704.4 VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE DESCRIPTiON - X AC 31& 3.5, 7.1 -7.7 1913.4 1' INSPECTION OF REINFORCING gy TENDONS AND m'' INCLUDING 2. INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL WELDING IN ACCORDANCE %NTH TABLE 1704.3, ITEM 5b. - - AVIS D1.4 ACI 31& 3.5.2 - 3. INSPECT BOLTS TO BE INSTALLED IN CONCRETE PRIOR TO AND DURING PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE WHERE ALLOWABLE LOADS HAVE BEEN INCREASED. POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER - _ 1911.5 4. VERIFYING USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. - X ICI 31& CH. 4, 5.2 -5.4 1913 1913.3 5. AT THE TiME FRESH CONCRETE IS SAMPLED TO FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND NR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE X - - ASTM C 172 ASTM C 31 ACT 31& 5.6, 5.8 1913.10 6.-INSPECTION OF CONCRETE AND SHOTCRETE -PIXEMENT FOR PROPER APPUCATi0N TECHNDUES. ;'? X _ AC 318: 5.9, 5.10 1913.6, 1913.7, 1913.8 7. INSPECTION FOR MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. , . _ - X AC 31& 5.11 -5.13 .. 1913.9 8. INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE a APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES. b. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS IN THE SEISMIC- FORCE - RESISTING SYSTEM. X X - - ACI 31& 18.20 ACN 31& 18.18.4 - 9. ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS. - X Aa 31& CH. 16 - 10. VERIFICATION OF IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR M REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. - X ACI 31& 6.2 _ 11. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED. _ X ACI 31 & 6.1.1 B/S SEE COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR BASE PLATE SIZE & THICKNESS • L4x4x1/4 UNDER RN CURB (TYP.) PROVIDE MIST STRUT AS REQ'D. - SEE TIP. JOIST LOAD STRUT DETAIL 3/16' -EDGE OF JOISTS CROSS MEMBERS SHALL BE SPACED IN MULTIPLES OF DECK FLUTE WDTH 2' MIN. 3/16 3/16 L5x 5x 5/8'x 3 1/2" LONG CENTERED BMW. EXIST. FLUTES. EXIST. BEAM OR JOIST B -B TYPICAL RTU SUPPORT IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION BRIDGECUP BY THE STEEL NETWORK (OR APPROVED EQUIVALEN W/ (1) - #10 SCREW TO COLD ROLLED CHANNEL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 2010 City BUILDING DIVISION City of Tukwila DIVISION METAL STUD COLD ROLLED CHANNEL 0 4' -O' 0.C. TYPICAL BRIDGING DETAIL (TO BE USED ON ALL METAL STUD WALLS THAT DO NOT USE SOLID BLOCKING) TYPICAL BEAM END/COLUMN CONN. WHERE DIM. 'A" IS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 3' FIELD INSTALL L2x 2x 1/4' AS SHOWN. 1 1/2 1 1/2' LOAD - "A" \-STEEL JOIST SEE PLAN TYPICAL JOIST LOAD STRUT DETAIL ABBREVIATION DEFINITION TABLE ACRONYM DESCRIPTION ACRONYM DESCRiPTION ACRONYM DESCRIPTiON AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR EQ EQUAL OS OWNER SUPPLIED REM ALT ALTERNATE EQUIP EQUIPMENT PAF POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER ARCH ARCHITECTURAL EW EACH WAY PDF POWER DRIVEN FASTENER BFE BOTTOM OF FOOTING ELEVATION EXIST EXISTING PL PLATE BFF BELOW PUNISHED FLOOR DP EXPANSION PLYWO PLYWOOD BLDG BUILDING Ea EXTERIOR PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH BM - BEAM FDN FOUNDATION R RADIUS BOTT BOTTOM FRIG FRAYING RETNF REINFORCING BRG BEARING FS FAR SIDE _.- REQD REQUIRED B/S BOTTOM OF STEEL FTG FOOTING S SOUTH CALLS CN.O ULA1TONS GA GAUGE . SCHED SCHEDULE CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT GR GRADE .: SECT SECTION CL • CENTER UNE GYP . _• GYPSUM .. SIM . SIMILAR .- CUI CLEAR HF ° HEM -RR --- SP - . • - -.- SOUTHERN PONE - • CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT HORIZ HORIZONTAL .... SQ SQUARE COL COLUMN JBE ' . JOIST BEARING ELEVATION STD . STANDARD CONE CONCRETE Jr - JOINT STRICT STRUCTURAL CONN CONNECTION K KIPS TM TOP AND BOTTOM CONSTR CONSTRUCTION KSF KIPS PER SQUARE FOOT T/S TOP OF STEEL COAT CONTINUOUS WI LONG LEG HORIZONTAL TFE TOP OF FOOTING ELEVATION DBL DOUBLE LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL TOM TOP OF MASONRY DF DOUGLAS FIR -LARCH LT WT L) IHT WEIGHT TOS TOP OF STEEL DIA DIAMETER LVL LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER 1RTD TREATED DIAG DIAGONAL MAS MASONRY TYP TYPICAL DIM DIMENSION MAX MAXIMUM. UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIR DIRECTION MC MOMENT CONNECTION VERT VERTICAL DE DErNL MIN MINIMUM ■IF VERIFY IN FIELD DWG DRAWING MTL MATERIAL W WEST DIGS DRAWINGS N NORTH W/ WiTH DWLS DOWELS NS NEAR SIDE W/0 WITHOUT E EAST OC ON CENTER WP WAiERPROOF EA EACH OPNG OPENING Wr WEIGHT EL / ELEV ELEVATION OPP OPPOSITE WWM WELDED WIRE MESH CONCRETE REINFORCING LAP SPLICE SCHEDULE BAR NO. LAP LENGTH 3 22' 4 29' 5 36' 6 43' .. 7 63' 8 72' 9 81' 10 91' 11 101' (3) - #10-16 SCREWS 0 EACH BLOCK CONTINUOUS STRAP, ATTACH w/ (1) - #10 SCREW AT EACH INTERSECTION TOP AND BOTT. STRAP SPUCES SHALL OVERLAP SOLID BLOCKING. SPACE ROWS OF BRIDGING 0 8'-O' 0.C. MAX. TYPICAL JOIST BRIDGING CONNECTION SHOWN IN CONCEPT ONLY 2 BLOCKS 0 ENDS AND SINGLE BLOCKS SPACED 0 10•-0• 0.0. IN BETWEEN 2x 2 WP ANGLE 0 ALL SOLID BLOCK LOCATIONS (2) - 3/8' STIFFENER EA. SIDE (4) - 3/4'4 BOLTS SEE PLAN FOR CONN. DESIGN LOAD 1/2' CAP PLATE 1 1/2" TYP. SE PLAN I TYPICAL CANTILEVER BEAM /COLUMN CONN. 1.5 (B. F. A. VL) 36/4 PATTERN t 36' COVERAGE TYPICAL ROOF DECK FASTENER LAYOUT RECEIVED } MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER r CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% OWNER REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS AND PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 156 -185 BID DATE: XX/XX/XX PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JDF CHECKED BY: MRK PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58K PROTOTYPE &sai structural associates inc. (616) 457 -8100 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 fax (616) 457 -8107 Olk.1- Grand Rapids, MI 49503 www.gowithsai.com E 1 II 4,34502 "t ION el4C3 -4 I EXPIRES /AL/ l 0 .1 11111101,111 US BASINS US STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE GENERAL NOTES AND SCHEDULES SCALE 1/8" - 1'_0n I ISSUE DATE MARCH 09, 2010 SHEET NO. S 0 0 1 AR t J FOOTING SCHEDULE NARK NO. DESCRIPTION REINFORCEMENT F1 • • • 4' -0•x 4' -0'x 1'—O' • . (5) — 14 E.W. MIDDLE COLUMN SCHEDULE MARK NO. DESCRIPTION BASE PLATE COMMENTS C1 HSS6x6x1 /4 3/4'x 12'x 1'-O' 03/09/10 C2 HSS6x6x1 /4' 3/4'x 6 3/4'x 1' -3' SEE DErML 16/5200 FOR COLUMN BASE CONNECTON. C3 HSS6x6x3 /16' 1/2"x 6'x O' -6' SEE DETAIL. 19/S200 FOR COLUMN BASE CONNECTION AND 20/S200 FOR TDP OF COLUMN CONNECTION. CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. 1 DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26110 ISSUED FOR 90% OWNER REVIEW 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS AND PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 156 -185 BID DATE: XX/X (JX)( PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JDF CHECKED BY: MRK PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58K PROTOTYPE say . 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 fax (616) 457 -8107 '% , structural associates inc. (616) 457 -8100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 www.gowithsai.com SlON� '32.IO.iO 1 EXPIRES ¶ I L I C) ! STORE SUPPORT CENTER . ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE STRUCTURAL PLANS SCALE VARIES ISSUE DATE MARCH 09, 2010 SHEET NO. S1OOA 362S162 -54 0 2' -0' O.C. COPE FLANGES 0 VERT. STUD. 600T125 -68 CONT. ARCH. 1' -6' TOP OF STUDS 8.. - SEE ARCH. 600E25 -M COPE VEZi�j AT HORI 8 CONT.. FLANGE STUDS. 600S162 -68 0 2' -0' O.C. (4) - #12 SCREWS TOP OF EXIST. PANEL EL- 126' -6' EXIST. ROOF DECK 600S162-68 0 2' -0' O.C. BRIDGING 0 (-0' O.C. STIFFCUP L8600 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (4) - #12 SCREWS TO STUD AND (2) - HILT1 X -DNI PAF's IN OUTERMOST HOLES W/ 1 1/4" EMBED IN EXIST. CONC (TYP.). DECK BRG. 0 HIGH PTT EL - 125' -4' DUST. CONC. PANEL EXIST. 6' METAL STUD 0 24' O.C. 600T125 -68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO EACH STUD. 112 SCREWS 0 6' O.C. THRU PLATE AND EXIST. ROOF DECK PL 1/4'x 12 CONT. BETWEEN EXIST. JOISTS. HOLD 1/2 FROM EXIST. JOST FLANGES. 1 /4' SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0" EXIST. ROOF DECK BOTT. OF FRAMING EL = 114' -0' BOTT. OF PANEL EL =113 -Y SPACER PL 1/4'x fax 2012" O.C. HSS1 1/4x 1 1/4x 3/16 "x 14' -6' LONG CONC. WALL - SEE 11/S200 FOR VERT. AND HORIZ REINF. EXIST. CONC. SLAB 3 16 EXIST. JOISTS AND DECK NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY TOP OF WALL EL. = VARIES 8" g" 11' EXIST. WALL - X -RAY REQ'D. TO LOCATE EXIST. REINF. LOCATIONS #4 BENT BARS 0 9' O.C. ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE ENTIRE WALL W/ 4 1/2' EMBED INTO EXIST. CONC. WALL USING HILTI HY150 MAX ADHESIVE. SECTION SCALE: 3/4" •1' -0- BRIDGING 0 4' -0' O.C. 1/2 EXP. JT. MATt 14 DOWEL W/ 4 3/4" EMBED INTO EXIST. CONC. 0 2' -0' O.C. W/ HILT1 HY510 MAX ADHESIVE. e� 5 1/2' CONC. SLAB W/ 6x6- W2.9xW2.9 WWM INSULATION - SEE ARCH. 15 BENT BAR 0 12 O.C. (EMBED VERT. REINF. 7 3/8' USING HILT1 HY150 MAX ADHESIVE IF USING EXIST FOOTING) AS REID. L 12' d 4 3625162 -54 0 2' -0' 0.C. COPE FLANGES 0 VERT. STUD. 6001125 -68 CONT. ARCH. 1' -6' (SECT. 2) CT. 2A CT. 2 60071 8 CONT. COPE FLANGE AT HORI STUDS TOP OF STUDS EL = SEE ARCH. 6005162 -68 0 2' -O' O.C. (4) - 112 SCREWS TOP OF STUDS 600T125 -68 CONT. W/ (2) - HILTI X -U FASTENERS W/ 1 1/4' EMBEDMENT 1NTHIN 2' OF EACH JOIST. EL = 125' -4 0 SECT. 2 EL - 125' -4 5/8' 0 SECT. METAL DECK - SEE PLAN EXIST. METAL DECK 6005162 -68 0 2' -0" O.C. ('.) BRIDGING 0 4 -0 r O.C. STIFFCUP RT650 -54 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO VERT. STUD AND THRU TRACK AND INTO JOIST 0 2' -0" O.C. (TYP. 2 LOOS) 600T125 -68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO EACH STUD. SEE SECTION 3/S200 FOR INFO NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK 1/4' CAP PL BEAM NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 5/8' TOP OF STEEL. EL. - SEE PLAN STIFFCUP LB600 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (4) - 112 SCREWS TO JOIST AND (2) - HILTI DS FASTENERS TO BEAM IN OUTERMOST HOLES. 600T125 -68 CONT. W/ (3) - 112 SCREWS TO EACH VERT. STUD. fi EXIST. CONC. WALL 6' -0' JOIST BRIDGING BOTT. OF STUDS EL = 113 -2 SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " •1' -0" EXIST. DECK NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. HSS1 1/4x1 1/4'x 3/16' CONT. BEAM - SEE PLAN PL 1/4'x2x2 SPACERS PL 1/4 "x12 CONT. PL 3/8'x5'x5' 3/16' V HSS6x6 - SEE PLAN SECTION SCALE: 1 1 /2" =1' -0" KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK 15x 3' -6' DOWEL 0 121 0.C. W/ 5 5/8' EMBED USING HILT! HY150 MAX ADHESIVE. EXIST. WALL el % // / / / / //./ I =III 11 I =I 11 =1 11 III II = III =111= I � 1 =1 11 =1 � I III III III 1lll�ill���ll���lll 5 1/2' THICK CONC. SLAB ON GRADE W/ 6x6 412.9x W2.9 WWM CENTERED IN SLAB. EXIST. CONC. WALL 600T125 -68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO VERT. STUDS AND (1) - HILT1 X -U PAF 0 24” O.C. TOP AND BOTT. SHEATHING - SEE ARCH. DNS. 600S162 -68 0 2' -0' O.C. 14 HORIZ 0 161 O.C. #5 VERT. 012" O.C. / PAW � -1 I IIII —� • I I I-1 — 11=1 I I 11— ; 11'— -111 =1 0 (2) - #5 CONT • a • 4 • SECTION SCALE: 3/4" =1' -0" EXIST. FOOTING MAY BE REUSED IF IT EXISTS. BFE EL = MATCH EXIST. SEE 11/5200 FOR WALL REINF. I ' EXIST. FOOTING SECTION SCALE: 1/2"s• 3/4'0 HILTI KWIK BOLT W/ 4 3/4" EMBEDMENT. 1 1/2' GROUT " 12 1 =III -1 �,1 -f11 SECTION 4 1/21 INDEx 6' HIGH ACCESS HOLE W/ 1/2' RADIUS CORNERS. HOLE SHALL NOT BE ON EXPOSED SIDES OF WALL. EXIST. DECK COPE INSIDE FLANGE OF BEAM AS REQUIRED. EXIST. GIRDER 1 /21x 6'x6" BASE PLATE EXIST. CONC. SLAB SCALE: 3/4" =1' -0" EXIST. ROOF DECK EXIST. JOIST (3) - 3/4'0 PRETENSIONED A325 BOLTS COPE CONNECTION SIDE OF BOTT. FLANGE EXIST. BEAM SECTION SCALE: 1 " =1' -0" 2 3/4" TO c• BEAM 3 SIDES L1 1/2x 1 1/2x 1/41 18 5/8'0 THRU BOLT W/ WASHERS IN BOTT. OF 11/16'x2 VERT. SLOT IN ANGLE APPLY LOCATE 262 THREAD LOCKER OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT AND FINGER TIGHTEN. COLUMN - SEE PLAN METAL STUDS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0= EXIST. JOIST L6x4x5/16' (LLV) LOCATE ON VESTIBULE SIDE. 1/4. V EXIST. HSS6x6 18 R SEE SECTION 3 /S200 FOR INFO NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. STEEL BEAM - SEE PLAN (2)OL- 3/40 A325 BTS PL. 3/4x6'x8' SECTION SCALE 1 " =1' -0" M COLUMN - SEE PLAN 1/2'4 ERECTION BOLTS IN 5/8'0 HOLES (BOLTS SHALL BE REMOVED AFTER ERECTION) MIHSS6x6x3 /16' Is. (O', 4 1/2' PLATS .x INTERIOR BEAM AT VESTIBULE 18 SECTION SCALE: 1' =1' -0' 3625162 -54 0 2' -0' 0.C. COPE FLANGES 0 VERT. STUD. 6005162 -68 0 2' -0' O.C. (TYP.) BRIDGING 0 4' -0' O.C. 1' -6' (SECT. 3A) 10' (SECT. 3) T. 3A t 3 600T125 COPE VE AT HORI 8 CONT. FLANGE STUDS. TOP OF STUDS 41.tii EL = SEE ARCH. EL = 125' -4 5/8' 0 SECT. 3 Ole- EL- = 125 -4 0 SECT. 3A TOP OF STUDS L3x3x68 MIL CONT. 6001125 -68 CONT. W/ (2) - HILT1 X-U FASTENERS W/ t 1/4' EMBEDMENT WITHIN 2' OF EACH JOIST. 2 3/4 METAL DECK - SEE PLAN MINK AIM All1111. AIM AIM AIIIIIk WELD EXIST. DECK TO BEAM W/ 5/8'0 PUDDLE WELDS 0 6' O.C. EXIST. METAL DECK SWOP RT650 -54 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO VERT. STUD AND THRU TRACK AND INTO JOIST 0 2' 0' O.C. (TYP 2 LOOS) 6001125 -68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO EACH STUD. TOP OF STEEL EL = SEE PLAN STIFFCUP LB600 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (4) - #12 SCREWS TO JOIST AND (2) - HILT1 DS FASTENERS TO BEAM IN OUTERMOST HOLES. 600T125 -68 CONT. W/ (3) - #12 SCREWS TO EACH VERT. STUD. BOTT. OF STUDS EL =113 -2' 6' -0' 6001250 -54 CONT. JOIST BRIDGING 4 SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0" (3) - 3/4'0 HILT1 KINK BOLT TZ W/ 4 3/4' EMBED. X -RAY WALL TO DETERMINE REBAR LOCATIONS. 4 TOP OF STEEL EL. =113' -0" L4x4x1 /4'x 6' LONG 1/4'0 HILTI KINK-03N II+ TAPERED FLAT HEAD W/ 1 3/4' EMBEDMENT. SECTION SCALE: 1 " =1' -0" 68 MILx 18' CONT. PLATE ATTACH TO ROOF DECK W/ (3) - 112 SCREWS 0 24" O.C. VERTICUP 51600 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (2) #12 SCREWS IN BOTT. OF SLOT AND (2) - #12 SCREWS IN OUTERMOST HOLES TO 68 MIL PLATE 6001250 -54 CONT. 6005162 -68 0 24' O.C. BRIDGING 0 4' -0' O.C. 600T125 -68 CONT. W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO EACH VERT. STUD. HILT! DS PAF TO STEEL BEAMS OR X-U PAF TO CONC. 0 2' -0' 0.C. SECTION - SCALE 1 " =1' -0" 3/8'x2 1/2' STIFFENER PL (TYP.) 5/16' V 3 SIDES 600T125 -68 CONT. W/ HILT1 DS PAF's 0 2' -0' 0.c. 3 5/8' GRID 'F' TO HSS6x6 5/8' BOTT. EL - STIFFCUP JH600x162 -68 W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS TO JOIST AND (4) - HILT1 DS PAF's TO BEAM. VERTICUP SL600 BY THE STEEL NETWORK W/ (2) - #12 SCREWS IN BOTTOM OF SLOT AND (2) - HILT! DS PAF's TO BEAM IN OUTERMOST HOLES.. (3) - 112 SCREWS OF FRAMING 114' -O' BOTT. OF HSS = • c. BEAM HSS6x6 COLUMN - SEE PLAN 3/16' V PL 3/8'x4'x4' 3/16' V GALV. HSS6x6x1 /4'. CONNECT TO HSS POSTS W/ L4x4x1 /4'x 0' -6' LONG W/ 3/16' FILLET WELDS ON 3 SIDES Of EACH LEG OF ANGLE. SEE 2/S200 FOR CONNECTION TO EXIST. CONC. PANEL. BOTT. OF HSS EL = 108' -6' <3 SIDES TOP OF STEEL (= 113' -0' V.I.F.) PL 3/4'x6'x8' 5/16' V PL. 3 /8'x6'x11' NS & FS 3 5/81 HSS DOWELSx 4'-8' LONG 0 8' O.C. W/ 10' EMBED INTO EXIST. FOOTING USING HIL11 HY150 MAX ADHESIVE. REVIEWED FOR CODECOMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 12 20W iyof Tukwila Ci Tukwila DIVISION 3 SIDES (2) - 3/4'0 HILT! KINK BOLT TZ W/ 4 3/4" EMBEDMENT 1 1/2' GROUT SIDEWALK - SEE ARCH. DWGS. KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK EXIST. CONC. SLAB TOP OF SLAB EL = 100' -0" -1 1 1, � 11 #4 CONT. 0 12' O.C. EW. 1' NOSING #3 CONT. 0 NOSE 4 4 11" MIN. TOP OF SLAB EL. = 100' -0' EXIST. SLAB • •4. SEE ARCH. DNS. FOR INFO NOT SHOWN. EXIST. WALL KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK L3x3x68 MIL CONT. DECK - SEE PLAN STEEL. BEAM J - SEE PLAN PL 3/8'x4'x 12' 3/16' V (2) - 3/4'4 PRETENSIONED A325 BOLTS IN SHORT HORIZ SLOTS • EXIST. DECK PL 5/8'x12'x12' W/ (4) - 3/4'0 HILT1'KWK - BOLT TZ W/ 4 3/4" EMBED. X -RAY WALL FOR REBAR PLACEMENT. EXIST. CONC. WALL SECT ION SCALE. 111=E-0- (4) - 3/4'4 PRETENSIONED A325 BOLTS IN SHORT HORIZ SLOTS TOP OF STEEL PL 1 /2'x4 "X11 1/2' EL = 113' -O' (V.I.F.) STEEL BEAM - SEE PLAN •1 • 1/4' V SECTION SCALE: 1 " =1' -0" 1 1/2' TYP. #5x 6' -0' LONG 0 ALL CORNERS MEI PL 3/4'x 12'x1' -2" W/ (6) - 3/4'0 HILTI KINK BOLT 12 W/ 4 3/4" EMBED. X -RAY WALL FOR REBAR PLACEMENT. EXIST. CONC. WALL - 16 VERT. REINF. 0 8' O.C. AND #5 HORIZ. REINF. 0 12' 0.C. NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. HOOK ALL BARS AT ENDS CF WALLS AND AT OPENING. CENTER REINF. IN WALL 0 8' -O' 4, 11' -9 1/2" ELEVATION SCALE: 1/13-=1'-0- 1' -0" TOP OF SLAB EL = 100' -0' EXIST. FOOTING HSS6x6 - SEE PLAN 6005162 -68 01' -0' 0.C. MASONRY VENEER - SEE ARCH. DIGS. SIDEWALK - SEE ARCH. DWGS. 6001162 -68 W/ HILTI + -U PAF 0 12' O.C. AND (2) - 112 SCREWS TO EACH STUD. 1111 -11. -III -1 3' -O'x 3' -0' CONC. PIER W/ (8) -i VERT. REINF. W/ STD. HOOK EACH END AND (3) - #3 TIES. 4' CONC. SLAB REINF. W/ 6x6- WI.4xW1.4 WWM 1 /2' DP. JT. MA1.. mor rre(AA II SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0" SECTION SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0" SEE PLAN FOR FOOTING SIZE AND REINF. boo -co 012' O.C. KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK 4" CONC. SLAB W/ 6x6- WI.4xWI.4 WWM TOP OF SLAB EL = SEE ARCH. TOP OF PIER EL = RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER KRAFT PAPER BOND BREAK EXIST. CONC. SLAB TOP OF SLAB EL. =100' -0' 14 CONT. 0 12' O.C. EW. SECTION SCALE: 3/4" =1' -0" CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/09/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% OWNER REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS AND PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 156 -185 BID DATE: XX/XX/XX PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JDF CHECKED BY: MRK PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2010 58K PROTOTYPE it-- structural associates inc. 62 Commerce Ave. SW, Suite 100 Grand Rapids, MI 49503 Sal (616) 457 -8100 fax (616) 457 -8107 www.gowithsai.com STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE STRUCTURAL DETAILS SCALE VARIES ISSUE DATE MARCH 09, 2010 SHEET NO. S200 AR KEYED NOTES (APPLICABLE TO DRAWINGS M101 THRU M301) (2J (3] 5 6 7 8 10 [11 12 PROVIDE TYPE "M" OR "DWV" COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM UNIT TO ROOF ON LOW ROOF (DOWNHILL) SIDE OF UNIT. EXTERNAL 4" DEEP P -TRAP REQUIRED ONLY IF EQUIPMENT IS NOT SUPPLIED W /BUILT IN TRAP SYSTEM. REFER RTU CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING DETAIL AND ROOF PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL ON DRAWING M101. VERIFY WITH RTU MFR. CAP ALL UNUSED CONDENSATE DRAIN FITTINGS. ANCHOR THE DISCHARGE END OF CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO MIN. 4" X 4 "X 24" LONG PRESSURE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING WITH 1" GALV. STRAP ANCHOR AND TWO (2) #10 X 1 -1/2" SHEET METAL SCREWS. CENTER BLOCKING BELOW PIPING. DO NOT ATTACH WOOD BLOCKING TO ROOF. TYP. AT ALL RTU'S. SECURELY MOUNT CU -1 ON ROOF TO EQUIPMENT SUPPORT RAILS MANUFACTURED BY ROOF PRODUCTS INC. MOD. #RPES -1 FOR BUILT -UP ROOF OR RPES -3 FOR MEMBRANE ROOF, MECHANICALLY FASTEN TO ROOF STRUCTURE. FURNISH AND INSTALL REFRIGERATION PIPING AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MFR. AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. HAC SHALL PROVIDE NEW NATURAL GAS CONNECTION TO NEW RTU. ROUTE PIPE UP FROM BELOW ROOF DECK THRU APPROVED PIPE CURB, PROVIDE FULL SIZE DIRT LEG WITH GAS COCK AND UNION AT ALL GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT. TYPICAL AT ALL NEW RTU'S. MAINTAIN 3" MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR CLEANING OF DIRT LEG. NEW GAS PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW ROOF DECK EXCEPT WHERE NOTED. NEW PIPE SHALL BE HUNG WITHIN 12" OF ROOF DECK, SEISMIC CONDITIONS. ROUTE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH ALLOWANCE FOR SLOPE AS REQUIRED. WALL MOUNT AIR HANDLING UNITS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH INTEGRAL CONDENSATE PUMPS. THE PUMP DISCHARGE SHALL SLOPE BACK TO SERVICE SINK IN THE JANITOR'S CLOSET. THE DRAIN LINE SHALL SLOPE AT 1 /4 " /FT. TOWARD THE SINK. THE CONDENSATE LINE SHALL TERMINATE 2" ABOVE THE FLOOD PLAIN OF THE SINK (2" AIR GAP). FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO PROVIDE SWEEPING CONFIGURATIONS WITH NOT LESS THAN MFR'S. RECOMMENDED BEND RADIUS, WITHOUT UNDUE RESTRICTIONS, BUT NOT CREATING UNNECESSARY SAGS OR CURVES, FLAT BANDING MATERIAL NOT LESS THAN 1 -1/2" WIDE SHALL BE USED TO SUSPEND FLEXIBLE DUCTS. DUCTING FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED GROMMETS SHALL BE SUSPENDED BY WIRES ATTACHED TO GROMMETS. FLEX DUCT SHALL EXCEED 5' -0 ". PREFERRED FOR ONLY VERTICAL DROP TO DIFFUSER /GRILLE. PROVIDE DUCT DROPS FROM UNIT FULL SIZE OF UNIT CURB OPENINGS. TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON PLAN. TRANSITIONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA STANDARDS. VERIFY RTU CURB OPENING SIZES AND CONFIGURATION WITH RTU MFR. EXISTING GAS METER AND REGULATOR TO BE REUSED. EXISTING CONNECTED LOAD = 1200 MBH, DELIVERY PRESSURE = 2 PSIG (FIELD VERIFY). THIS METER SHALL BE USED TO SERVICE TO OTHER SIDE OF BUILDING. SECOND GAS METER EXISTING CONNECTED LOAD = 1630 MBH AT LOW PRESSURE (14 "W.C.). THIS METER'S NEW CONNECTED LOAD SHALL EQUAL = 1945 MBH. CONNCOORDINATE WITH GAS UTILITY CO. FOR METER RESET AND CONFIGURATION CHANGES AS REQUIRED. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE UTILITY FOR THE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT OF THE SECOND GAS METER. REFER TO DETAIL ON DRAWING M101 AND SPECIFICATION ON DWG. M301 FOR SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCT CONFIGURATION FOR SALES AND PRESALES RTUS (SERVING PLENUM DIFFUSERS). THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED PLENUM DIFFUSER AND PROVIDE REQUIRED SHEETMETAL TRANSITIONS FROM PLENUM DIFFUSER TO CONNECTIONS OF RTU. NOTE THAT TOP OF DIFFUSER SHALL BE BELOW ADJACET ROOF JOISTS AND THE SHEETMETAL TRANSITION SHALL BE ECCENTRIC (PLENUM DIFFUSER SHALL OFFSET TOWARD RETURN OPENING (PARTIALLY BLOCK VIEW OF RA OPENING FROM VIEW BELOW UNIT.) REMOVE EXISTING SUPPLY PLENUM AND SUPPLY GRILLES AND INSTALL NEW PLENUM DIFFUSER. PROVIDE NEW DUCT TRANSITIONS. EXISTING RETURN AIR DUCT /PLENUM SHALL REMAIN. REMOVE ALL EXISTING SUPPLY DUCTWORK EXCEPT FOR DUCT DROPS FROM EXISTING RTU. INSTALL NEW PLENUM DIFFUSER PER KEYNOTE #9.-. PROVIDE NEW DUCT TRANSITIONS TO NEW PLENUM DIFFUSER. EXISTING RETURN AIR DUCT /PLENUM SHALL REMAIN. EXISTING SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK FROM EXISTING RTU SHALL BE REMOVED EXCEPT FOR DUCT DROPS FROM UNITS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NEW SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK AS SHOWN ON PLAN. NOTE: CONTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THE FIXTURING PLAN, DRAWING RF1, FOR COORDINATION OF ALL PIPING, EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, VALVING, AND SERVICE RISERS WITH THE OWNER'S STORE FIXTURING. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE ROUTED AND /OR LOCATED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE STORE FIXTURES, SHELVING, AND RACKING INCLUDING THE FUNCTIONAL USE OF SAME. INSTALLATIONS MADE WITHOUT REGARD TO STORE FIXTURING SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, SPECIAL CONSIDERATION SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE ESTHETIC INTENT OF THE FRONT GRAPHICS WALL OF THE STORE AND TO THE STORAGE AND MATERIALS HANDLING ASPECTS OF THE PRE -SALES AND RECEIVING DOCK AREAS. GENERAL NOTES: 1. SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTWORK SHALL HAVE 1" THICK INTERNAL FIBERGLASS DUCT LINER EQUIVALENT TO CERTAINTEED (GCS) OR OWENS CORNING. DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWING ARE INSIDE CLEAR SIZES, ALLOWANCE FOR INTERNAL DUCT LINER HAS NOT BEEN MADE WHERE SPECIFIED. ROUND DUCT BRANCHES SHALL HAVE 1" BLANKET INSULATION. INTERNALLY LINED SPIRAL DUCT SHALL BE USED WHERE VISIBLE FROM SALES FLOOR. 2. RTU'S ARE CONTROLLED BY OWNER FURNISHED SENSORS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL RTU SENSORS, REFER ELECTRICAL DWGS. FOR LOCATIONS. 3. PROVIDE TURNING VANES AT ALL DUCT ELBOWS AND TEES. 4. REFER TO DIFFUSER CONNECTION DETAIL ON DWG. M201. 5. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF ALL RTU'S WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. RTU CURB LOCATIONS ARE DIMENSIONED ON THE STRUCTURAL FRAMING PLAN. THE HAC SHALL PROVIDE RTU SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE STEEL FABRICATOR FOR COORDINATION. 6. REFER TO DRAWING P101 FOR HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES. HVAC DDC CONTROL NOTES: 1. ALL RTU'S ARE OWNER FURNISHED WITH LENNOX BACNET INTERFACE BOARDS. 2. THE HVAC DDC CONTROLS ARE BY AUTOMATED LOGIC, PROVIDED BY OWNER, 3. ALL WIRING /INSTALLATION OF HVAC AND LIGHTING CONTROLS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4. FOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOCATIONS, EMS MAIN PANEL LOCATIONS, ETC., REFER TO DRAWINGS E101 AND EMS -1. 5. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND AIR BALANCER SHALL COORDINATE UNIT STARTUP AND OPERATION WITH E.C. AUTOMATED LOGIC NATIONAL ACCOUNT REPRESENTIVE. REFER TO DRAWING EMS -1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ADAPTER - (AS REQ'D.) OWNER FURNISHED RTU OWNER FURNISHED ROOF CURB ADAPTER 90 DEG ELL NOTE: EXTERNAL P -TRAP REQ'D. ONLY IF RTU IS NOT SUPPLIED WITH A BUILT -IN TRAP SYSTEM. VERIFY WITH RTU MFR. poi& ip TEE ROOF SURFACE —\ 4" MIN. TRAP SEAL A PLUG MIPT - FOR CLEANOUT (CO) AND WINTERIZATION DRAIN 5 RTU CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL M1 01 SCALE = NTS UNIT BASE NAILER STRIP CURB SHIM AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL UNIT RTU FRAMING, REFER TO ARCH. AND STRUCT PLANS NEW RTU TO BE ANCHORED TO ROOF CURB RIGID INSULATION & CANTS BY G.C.C. ROOF DECK SEISMIC CURB TO BE ANCHORED TO STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTE: NEW CURBS SHALL BE RATED FOR SEISMIC ZONE. NEW CURBS WILL BE PROVIDED BY OWNER, THRU LENNOX, INC. THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE THE CURB AND RTU PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS AND PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 6 NEW SEISMIC RTU CURB DETAIL M101 SCALE = NTS ROOF CURB (FURNISHED BY OWNER) CANT STRIP ROOF INSULATION TOP OF ROOF DECK FULL SIZE R.A. DUCT RETURN AIR GRILLE CONTR. TO RETAIN ELBOWED RA PLENUM DUCTWORK WHERE EXISTING. SHORT RUN APPLIES TO RTU -12 ONLY. DISTANCE SHALL NOT IMPEDE AIRFLOW 8 PROVIDE NEW 3 "G MAIN FOR PORTION OF STORE CURRENTLY SERVED BY EXISTING GAS METER TO BE REMOVED. ROUTE NEW LINE WITHIN 12" OF ROOF DECK EX. TO REMAIN 300 MBH — NEW 2 "G a • G 171-1.\. NEW 2 "G EXISTING GAS METER TO BE REUSED LOW PRESSURE GAS LINES TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE (TYPICAL) NEW 2 "G -(n OFFSET EXISTING 4 "G LINE INTO BUILDING TO LINEUP WITH NEW WETWALL CHASE BETWEEN TOILET ROOMS. (FIELD VERIFY EXISTING) CONNECT NEW /OFFSET 4" GAS LINE TO EXISTING UP AT ROOF DECK. ROUTE SA DUCT AT BOTTOM OF JOISTS (APPROX. 18' -0 "AFF) S -3 14x8 250 CFM 22 x18 i SUPPLY PLENUM MH -17' -0 "AFF 2 -WAY OPPOSITE ONLY SEq DETAIL SHEET 24X12 1000 CFM S -3 24X12 1000 CFM S -3 14x8 250 CFM NEW PRV STATION, REFER TO DETAIL THIS SHEET. OUTLET CAPACITY = 1645 MBH @ 14 "W.C. THIS CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE EXISTING NATURAL GAS UP TO CONNECTION OF NEW LINE SERVICE FROM THE OTHER EXISTING GAS METER TO REMAIN EXISTING GAS METER WILL BE DECOMMISSIONED. COORDINATE REMOVAL WITH GAS UTILITY E.X. TO.. REMAIN 30 -TON EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN NEW SUPPLY PLENUM MH -18' -0 "AFF SEE DETAIL THIS ;........SHEET NEW SUPPLY PLENUM MH -18' -0 "AFF SEE•OETAIL •THISSHEET :: ` 7" EX. TO REMAIN 25 -TON EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN NEW SUPPLY PLEt qvi MH -19 -0 "AFF SEE DETAIL - +THIS °SHEIT ADJUSTABLE DRUM LOUVER SUPPLY AIR GRILLE (4 SIDES) FULL SIZE S.A. DUCT (REUSE EXISTING WHERE APPLICABLE) PERFORATED STEEL \AIR DEFLECTOR r S.A. DUCT TRANSITION �- SUPPLY DIFFUSER BOX NOTES PLENUM DIFFUSER SHALL BE FURNISHED BY OWNER THROUGH LENNOX. SHEET METAL, INCLUDING TRANSITIONS TO PLENUM DIFFUSER SHALL BE BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. INSTALLATION OF ALL ITEMS SHALL BE BY THE M.C. INSTALLATION OF DUCTS, PLENUM DIFFUSER, & GRILLES IS TYPICAL FOR SALES FLOOR RTU'S. DESIGN INTENT FOR ALL EXISTING SALES FLOOR RTU'S IS TO REMOVE ALL SUPPLY DUCTWORK WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE DUCT DROPS FROM RTU. INSTALL NEW PLENUM DIFFUSER AS INDICATED. RETURN AIR PLENUM & GRILLES TO REMAIN. (FIELD VERIFY) REFER RTU PLENUM DIFFUSER SPECIFICATIONS ON SHEET M301 FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS AND CLARIFICATION. HAC SHALL PROVIDE AUXILIARY STEEL CHANNELS, ANGLES, AND /OR UNI -STRUT AS REQUIRED TO SECURELY SUPPORT THE S.A. DUCT, DIFFUSER BOX, AND GRILLES FROM THE ROOF STRUCTURE. PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR SUPPORT FRAMING. THE TOP OF THE SUPPLY DIFFUSER BOX/GRILLES SHALL BE MOUNTED BELOW ADJACENT STRUCTURAL STEEL JOISTS. TO PROVIDE CLEAR AIR THROW. 4 SALES /PRESALES PLENUM DIFFUSER DETAIL SCALE = NTS :EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN HVAC TEMP::S:ENSOR5.: CO2 SENSORS ARE SHOW ON .DWG. E104 AN PROVIDED BY OWNER, WIRED BY EC EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN ., NEW SUPPLY PLENUM MH -16' -6 "AFF SEE DETAJL THIS SHEET EX. TO REMAIN 25 -TON S -8 24x12 1000 CFM NEW SUPPLY PLENUM MH518= Q'AFF... SEE-DETAILTHIS SHEET EX. TO REMAIN 10 =TON: LOW PRESSURE GAS LINES TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED. ; OTHERWISE (TYPICAL) EXISTING RA PLENUM TO ..:: :REMAIN_::. S -7 24x12 1000 CFM S -3 24x12 1000 CFM .:.- S -3 24x12 1000 CFM:.::: ABANDONE IN PLACE. 2 -TON CAP GAS LIN ABOVE ROOF NEW SUPPLY 18 "x18" 22 "x18" EXISTING NATURAL GAS PIPING TO REMAIN (TYPICAL) NEW 22x18 RA DUCT, MOUNT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE 12" BELOW ROOF DECK (2) S -3 18x8 500 CFM EA. X18 "x18" 14 "x14" 14 "x14" • ' MH- 19'- O''AFF SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET. 18 "x18" EX. TO REMAIN 10 -TON EXISTING RA DUCT /PLENUM TO REMAIN (2) S -3 18x8 500 CFM EA. MOUNT SUPPLY DUCTWORK AT 18' -0 "AFF RTU • A4 EX: TO REMAIN 10 -TON EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN NEW 1 "G 14 "x14" -3 24x12 1000 CFM 12) EX. TO REMAIN 10 -TON EXISTING RA DUCT /PLENUM TO REMAIN (2) S -3 18x8 500 CFM EA. 10.01000000191 00000000000000000010 ROIOX000[4(020. NEW 3 -TON n 1 "G REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE pppRAVED MNr 12 201 City of Tukwila BUILDING nivicInm MAIN HVAC FLOOR PLAN SCALE = 1 /1 6" = 1' -0" EXISTING RA PLENUM TO REMAIN (TYPICAL) OWNER FUNISHED PLENUM DIFFUSER fI MC TO PROVIDE SA ECCENTRIC DUCT TRANSITION TO OWNER FURNISHED PLENUM DIFFUSER, REFER TO DETAIL THIS SHEET. 1 SALES FLOOR RTU SECTION SCALE = 1 /8" = 1' -0" PLAN NORTH GAS PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE, INSTALL VALVES WITH VENT DOWN AS REQUIRED BY MFG REDUCER (TYP.) UNION (TYP.) >-0-1 '1 fTURN VENT DOWN REGULATOR SHALL BE VENTED TO THE OUTSIDE, UP THRU ROOF. 1/4" F.P.T. AND PLUG TEST PORT N.C. GAS COCK n �2EGEIVED MAR 112010 �ERMITCENTER 2 GAS PRESSURE REDUCING STATION e�E�oe�� DIRECTION OF FLOW DIRECTION OF FLOW M1 01 SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" (CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/08/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand. Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. M1O1AA ENTRY VESTIBULE 102 F ENTRY HVAC SECTION SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" I 4 , Faro ENTRY VESTIBULE 102 10"o Roo 25' -0" <RTU> 8 NEW lk 6 FRONT RIGHT ISOMETRIC M201 / SCALE = C2 FRONT CENTER ISOMETRIC M201 / SCALE = R -7 R -7 24x24,12 "DIA. 24x24,12 "DIA. 1060 CFM 1060 CFM 5 20 "x16" 26 "x12" EXIT VESTIBULE 103 S -4 / 4- SLOT,10 "DIA. \4- SLOT,10 "DIA. 375 CFM 375 CFM m g1 _S 4 S -4 4 -S LOT,10 "DIA. 4 -S LOT,10 "DIA. 375 CFM \ 375 CFM ,m::..mmm (3\\ ENLARGED ENTRY HVAC PLAN M201 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 4- SLOT,10 "DIA. "375 CFM S -4 4- SLOT,10 "DIA. 375 CFM''. F J . 6 S -3 8x6 100 CFM EVAPORATOR UNIT (AHU), PROVIDED BY HVAC, WALL MOUNT WITH BRACKETS AS INDICATED ON PLANS SUCTION TRAP /— ROOF MOUNTED CONDENSING UNIT (CU) EQUIPMENT RAILS SPANNING JOISTS, BY HAC PATE CURB, BY M.C., FOR ROOF PENETRATION OF REFRIGERATION PIPING AND POWER CONDUITS, SEE SCHEDULE AND MFG INFORMATION FOR LINESET SIZE CONDENSATE DRAIN, EXTEND AND TERMINATE WITH AIR GAP IN LOCATION INDICATED ON PLANS THERMOSTAT /CONTROLLER FURNISHED WITH UNIT, INSTALLED BY HAC SPLIT SYSTEM AC UNIT SCHEMATIC \M201 / SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" ( 7 ) 10'X14" 10 "x14" 14 "x14" 11 "x29" 10 "x14" 10 "x14" 10 "x14" SALES AREA 101 MANAGER'S OFFICE.; 111 COUNT ROOM, 112 PROCESSING ROOM 106 X10 "x14" I PROCESSING ::ROOM 106 1 4"x1 4" 14 "x14" SPRINKLER RISER R -7 8 "DIA. 130 CFM SALES AREA 101 S -1 6" 100 CFM 8"o MANAGER'S... OFFICE 111 14 "x10" 8 "o COUNT.. ROOM 1 112 OFFICE AREA HVAC SECTION SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" 3 7 ) S -2 6" 130 CFM SALES AREA 101 14 "x10" 14 "x14" 14 "x10" 8 "x6" 8" M201 14 "x10" 14 "x10' R -7 8 "DIA. 200 CFM PROCESSING 8 "0 ROOM - 411— 106 S -1 8" 200 CFM MFG. REFRIG. LINESET, ROUTE DOWN FROM ROOF THRU APPROVED PIPE CURB ' r. 1=1. 14 "x10" 14 "x14" R -8 18x8 440 CFM <u.......:'.,,. S -3 18x8- 440 CFM RTU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM 107 8 ENLARGED OFFICE AREA HVAC PLAN (201 / SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" PRE -SALES 119 bU) "*"7 ;6) 1 CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand. Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae:com RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER 1 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED HVAC PLANS & SECTIONS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. M201 DA 1 BREAK ROOM AREA ISOMETRIC M202 SCALE = :................ MN'S ROOM 122 E' WOMEN'SI ROOM D, 123 Es SALES . AREA It \ BREAKROOM HVAC SECTION SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" N E -5 12x12' 410 CFM E -5 12x12 410 CFM 14 "x6" 3 AIR FLOW GENERAL NOTE: ALL BRANCH DUCTS TO SA, RA OR EA DUCTS SHALL HAVE BALANCING DAMPERS, UNLESS GRILLE HAS A REGISTER. 6" RECTANGULAR MAIN DUCT BALANCING DAMPER W /LOCKING QUADRANT TAKEOFF - RECTANGULAR MAIN ROUND BRANCH R =1.5W ELBOWS - RADIUSED RECTANGULAR W-' RECTANGULAR TO ROUND TRANSITION TAKE -OFF AIRFOIL SHAPED TURNING VANES SQUARE TURN RECTANGULAR 411%0111K R =1.5W 2' -0" MIN. IF SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS W BALANCING DAMPERS WHERE SHOWN ON PLANS TEES - RECTANGULAR 2 LOW PRESSURE DUCT FITTING M202 SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" MEN'S ROOM 122 14 "x6" �— EXHAUST FAN WITH BIRD SCREEN SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY HAC GRAVITY - BACKDRAFT DAMPER BY FAN MFG. INSULATION ROOF MEMBRANE il/— ROOF DECK ROOF ANGLE STEEL ANGLE FRAME SPANNING BETWEEN ROOF JOIST, BY OTHERS ATTACH DUCT TO FRAME BY HAC 5 EXHAUST FAN DETAIL M202 % SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" BALANCING DAMPER plum r, 45 DEGREE TAP - IN FITTING WITH DAMPER. FLEX, MAXIMUM LENGTH = 5' -0" CEILING MIIMM 6 TYPICAL DIFFUSER TYPICAL DIFFUSER 3 DIFFUSSER CONNECTION DETAIL M202 SCALE = 1" = 1' -0" 12 "x12" S -3 18x8 390 CFM i S -2 8 "DIA. 180 CFM —D3"- 12"x12" 8 "o R -7 10 "DIA.- 290 CFM <Ri1U> 1 NEW • 18 "x12' 14 "x12" WOMEN'S ROOM 123 F\ 1 NEW E 12 "x6" 10 "x6" JANITORS` CLOSET`$ 125 E -6 6x6 70 CFM 16 "x10" HALL 10"o R -7 12 "DIA. 500 CFM • PRE -SALES 119 R -8. ....__ 18x8 390 CFM 18 "x8'/ ' 18 "x12" 20"x12" ... E -6 8x8 210 CFM } 12 "x8" 16 "x10" 10 "x10" 14x14 UP TO EF -1 ON ROOF 8 "e mxJn»v wn S -2 8 "DIA. 180 CFM SALES AREA 101 4 8"o 14 "x10" 16 "x10' S-1 8 DIA. 130 CFM \ S -1 10 "DIA. 250 CFM BREAK ROOM 118 S -1 10 "DIA. 250 CFM R -7 10 "DIA. 220 CFM TRAINING ROOM 108 8"o S-1 8 "DIA. 220 CFM MOTHER'S ROOM 124 BREAK ROOM AREA PLAN M202 SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER UUNS I K. DOC & KLV ISIUNS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS i PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: BJP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE P F: architecture „ ' engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand. Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com 6. �P0LA.FFR &F WAS;y,�Lj h 1.. f.'r.' ;,1- % e Uiy, .;i Z1 K. +: "\ 37712 �` �'�F �GrsT�� '/ONA1- E,. a V� / /� l l / �/6 ' c .. * % �" a xx V illrap \ / is j� ``� /r S _ mil `\ /; _ .� i.1 t _...._l i- , , - , , /._ J 1 lw, \ i A D Ill — \ \ JL_-.J STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TU KWI LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED HVAC PLAN AND SECTIONS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. M 2 C 1 2 R. r ROOF TOP UNIT SCHEDULE MARK NUMBER STATUS MANUF. MODEL NO. NOMINAL TONS TOTAL COOLING SENSIBLE COOLING TOTAL CFM ENTERING DB/WB CONDITIONS AMBIENT HEAT INPUT (BTUH) HEAT OUTPUT (BTUH) BLOWER H.P. OR K.W. OUTSIDE AIR (CFM) MIN. /MAX. POWER SUPPLY (VOLTS- PHASE) MCA MOCP FILTERS EXTERNAL S.P. (" OF W.C.) APPROX. WEIGHT EER /IPLV /SEER ECONOMIZER BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS NEW SEISMIC ROOF CURB BOTTOM POWER ENTRY KIT CIRCUIT BREAKERS, FACTORY INSTALLED LENNOX SUPPLY AND RETURN DROP BOX PACKAGE SMOKE DETECTOR S RA FACTORY INSTALLED ** SERVICE OUTLET (GFCI TYPE, FACTORY MOUNTED, FIELD WIRED BY ELC.) COMMENTS RTU 1 EXISTING LENNOX YCD360A4LA1 A2DC1 30 TON 360.0 286.0 105000 80.0/67.0 95 350,000 283,000 10 960/2380 460 -3 85.0 110 2" 0.60 LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. - 3/8" MRG REFRIGERATION LINESET TO MATCHING CU. Yes Yes No EMI (ENVIOROMASTER) No Yes 750 7 inches W.C. FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU 2 EXISTING LENNOX YCD360A4LA1 A2DC1 30 TON 360.0 286.0 10500 80.0/67.0 95 350,000 283,000 10 960/2380 460 -3 85.0 110 2" 0.60 X Yes Yes No LAY -IN, REFER TO PLANS FOR # OF SLOTS No Yes TITUS / 50F ALUMINUM FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU 3 EXISTING TRANE YCD300B4LODC 25 -TON 300.0 252.0 9000 80.0/67.0 95 250,000 202,000 10 850/2100 460 -3 85.0 110 2" 0.60 ALUMINUM BWE Yes Yes No No Yes 8 SIDEWALU DUCT MOUNTED FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU 4 EXISTING TRANE YCD300B4LODC 25 -TON 300.0 252.0 9000 80.0/67.0 95 250,000 202,000 7.5 850/2100 460 -3 57.0 70 2" 0.60 Yes Yes No No Yes FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU 8 NEW LENNOX LGH060H4E 5 Ton 60.0 47.2 1900 80.0/67.0 95 105,000 85,500 1.0 H.P. 120 460 -3 19.0 20 2" 0.70 930 12.8/ -- -/17.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes LENNOX BACnet MODULE RTU 9 NEW LENNOX LGH036H4E 3 Ton 35.3 28.6 1100 80.0/67.0 95 65,000 52,000 0.5 HP 185 460 -3 23.0 30 2" 0.60 1044 12.7/ -- -/17.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes LENNOX BACnet MODULE RTU 10 NEW LENNOX LGH090H4E 7.5 Ton 90.0 77.0 3000 80.0/67.0 95 130,000 104,000 2.0 HP 180 460 -3 20.0 25 2" 0.50 1303 12.5/ - / - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LENNOX BACnet MODULE RTU 11 NEW LENNOX LGH048H4E 4 Ton 48.0 37.4 1600 80.0/67.0 95 65,000 52,000 .75 HP 220 460 -3 14.0 15 2" 0.65 600 12.8/ - 17.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes LENNOX BACnet MODULE RTU Al EXISTING LENNOX LGH090H4E 10 Ton 120.0 102.6 4000 80.0/67.0 95 270,000 216,000 3 430/1060 460 -3 29.0 35 2" 0.50 Yes No No FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU A2 EXISTING LENNOX LGH090H4E 10 Ton 120.0 102.6 4000 80.0/67.0 95 270,000 216,000 3 430/1060 460 -3 29.0 35 2" 0.50 Yes No No FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU A3 EXISTING LENNOX LGH090H4E 10 Ton 120.0 102.6 4000 80.0/67.0 95 270,000 216,000 3 430/1060 460 -3 29.0 35 2" 0.50 Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU A4 EXISTING LENNOX LGH090H4E 10 Ton 120.0 102.6 4000 80.0/67.0 95 270,000 216,000 3 430/1060 460 -3 29.0 35 2" 0.50 Yes No Yes FIELD INST BACnet MODULE RTU A5 EXISTING LENNOX LGH090H4E 7.5 Ton 90.0 68.4 3000 80.0/67.0 95 200,000 167,000 3 320/800 460 -3 20.0 29 2" 0.60 Yes No No LENNOX BACnet MODULE RTU A6 ABANDON LENNOX GCS16- 261 -50 -5P 2 Ton 24.0 16.7 600 - 95 50,000 36,000 0.33 - 208/1/60 17.7 25 2" 0.60 No No No FAN SCHEDULE MARK NUMBER MANUFACTURER MODEL CFM EXTERNAL S.P. (" OF W.C.) HORSEPOWER VOLT /PH /HZ ADJUSTABLE PULLY DISCONNECT DRIVE PACKAGE BACKDRAFT DAMPER ROOF CURB BIRDSCREEN EF 1 COOK 135C3B 1100 0.33 .25 HP 115/1/60 Yes STD - PREWIRED B Yes Yes Yes APPROVED ALTERNATES: GREENHECK, PENN, TWIN CITY SPLIT SYSTEM SCHEDULE MARK TAG DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. TOTAL COOLING CFM SEER VOLTS /PH /HZ WEIGHT ACESSORIES CU 1 CONDENSING UNIT EMI (ENVIOROMASTER) S1CA4D 24000 UNIT SIZE 13 208- 230/1/60 156 1/2" INSULATION ON SUCTION LINE AND LOW AMBIENT KIT, PROVIDE WITH ELECTRIC HEAT K.W. DISCONNECT SWITCH LINING NOTES COMMENTS ACTARIS B -31R 1 "x1" 400 TO 800 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. - 3/8" MRG REFRIGERATION LINESET TO MATCHING CU. AHU 1 AIR HANDLER EMI (ENVIOROMASTER) WHP18D 24000 750 7 inches W.C. 208 - 230/1/60 115 24V WALL T -STAT 5 P.S.I.G. 2 P.S.I.G. SILVER - 5 P.S.I.G. TO 2 P.S.I.G. - 3/8" NOTES: - REGULATORS ARE FULL CAPACITY INTERNAL RELIEF TYPE. - REGULATORS TO BE INSTALLED WITH RELIEF VENT IN POSITION TO PREVENT ENTRANCE OF WATER (PROVIDE SCREENED VENT ELBOW AS REQUIRED). VENT OPENING TO BE LOCATED 12" MIN. ABOVE ROOF LEVEL. -TAG REGULATOR WITH INLET AND OUTLET SETTINGS, AFFIX WARNING 'DO -NOT REMOVE'. TITUS / 300FS ALUMINUM BWE X X 2. CONDENSATE PUMP APPROVED ALTERNATES: AIRDALE, MITSUBISHI, SANYO, FITJITSUSANTO, FIJITSU FTU SCHEDULE MARK NUMBER MANUFACTURER MODEL TYPE UNIT SIZE INLET SIZE CFM HORSEPOWER VOLT /PH /HZ ELECTRIC HEAT K.W. DISCONNECT SWITCH LINING NOTES COMMENTS FTU 1 TITUS ATQS312210 SERIES 2 8 "0 310 1/4 277 -1 -60 2.5 KW Yes 1" CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AN ANALOG ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER /ACTUATOR MODEL #AT76 WITH NIGHT SHUTDOWN, THERMOSTAT AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH IN SUPPLY DUCT UPSTREAM OF FTU -1. REFER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ON THIS SHEET. MOTHERS RM. APPROVED ALTERNATES: PRICE, NAILOR FTU SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FAN OPERATION: WHENEVER AIR HANDLER IS ON, UNIT FAN RUNS CONTINUOUSLY. WHENEVER AIR HANDLER IS OFF, UNIT IS DISABLED. COOLING MODE: WITH SUPPLY TEMP. BELOW 72 °F, UNIT OPERATES IN COOLING WITH REHEAT MODE. WITH ROOM TEMPERATURE AT COOLING SETPOINT, UNIT DELIVERS MINIMUM COOLING CFM. AN INCREASE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE CAUSES AIRFLOW TO INCREASE, REACHING MAXIMUM COOLING CFM 2 °F ABOVE COOLING SETPOINT. ON A DECREASE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE, MIN. COOLING AIRFLOW IS MAINTAINED. AT 0.4°F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT, THE FIRST REHEAT STAGE IS ENERGIZED. THE OPTIONAL SECOND AND THIRD REHEAT STAGES ARE ENERGIZED AT 1.1 & 1.7°F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT, RESPECTIVELY. AN INCREASE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE DE- ENERGIZES THE REHEAT STAGES AT 1.5, 0.9 & 0.2°F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT. HEATING MODE: WITH SUPPLY TEMPERATURE ABOVE 78 °F, UNIT OPERATES IN HEATING WITH REHEAT MODE. WITH ROOM TEMP. AT HEATING SETPOINT, UNIT DELIVERS MIN. HEATING CFM. A DECREASE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE CAUSES AIRFLOW TO INCREASE, REACHING MAX. HEATING CFM 2°F ABOVE HEATING SETPOINT. AT 0.4 °F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT, THE FIRST REHEAT STAGE IS ENERGIZED. THE OPTIONAL SECOND AND THIRD REHEAT STAGES ARE ENERGIZED AT 1.1 & 1.7 °F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT, RESPECTIVELY. AN INCREASE IN ROOM TEMP. DE- ENERGIZES THE REHEAT STAGES AT 1.5, 0.9 & 0.2 °F BELOW HEATING SETPOINT. MECHANICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND A.F.F. AHU APPROX. BLDG. CFM COL. CU DIA.;O DN. DOM. DWG. EER EF ELC EMS EQUIP. EXH. FIN. FL. FURN. GCC HAC H.P. HVAC IN. IPLV KW MBH MFR. MIN. N.I.C. N.T.S. O.A.;O /A PBC PLBG. R.A. REQ'D. RTU S.A. SEER S.P. SENS. SHT. SVC. T -STAT TF TYP. UH W/ W/O W VAV W.C. 0 °F ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT APPROXIMATE BUILDING CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE COLUMN CONDENSING UNIT DIAMETER DOWN DOMESTIC DRAWING ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO EXHAUST FAN ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT EXHAUST FINISHED FLOOR FURNISHED GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR HEATING AND AIR COND. CONTRACTOR HORSE POWER HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR COND. INCH(ES) INTEGRATED PART LOAD VALUE KILOWATT(S) 1000 BTUH MANUFACTURER MINIMUM NOT IN CONTRACT NOT TO SCALE OUTSIDE AIR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PLUMBING RETURN AIR REQUIRED ROOF TOP UNIT SUPPLY AIR SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO STATIC PRESSURE SENSIBLE SHEET SERVICE THERMOSTAT TRANSFER FAN TYPICAL UNIT HEATER WITH WITHOUT WATT(S) VARIABLE AIR VOLUME WATER COLUMN PHASE DEGREES FAHRENHEIT 7 S1 -125 624 AR UNIT MARK GAS PIPING UNION DIRT LEG GAS COCK DAMPER SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE THERMOSTAT FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION RETURN, EXHAUST, OR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT DISCHARGE OR SUPPLY AIR DUCT SUPPLY AIR -AIR QUANTITY (CFM) DIFFUSER DIFFUSER SIZE (NECK/FRAME) DESIGNATION EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION KEYED NOTES ON DRAWING REVISIONS GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR SPECIFICATIONS MANUFACTURER MODEL CFH CAPACITY INLET PRESSURE SET POINT SPRING COLOR - RANGE - ORIFICE ACTARIS B -31 R 3/4 "x3/4" UP TO 150 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. - 1/8" ACTARIS B -31 R 3/4 "x1" 150 TO 400 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. -1/4" ACTARIS B -31R 1 "x1" 400 TO 800 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. - 3/8" ACTARIS B-31R 1 "x1 1/4" 800 TO 1100 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. LT.GREEN - 5.5 to 8.0 inches W.C. - 1/2" ACTARIS B-34R 1 1/4"x1 1/4" 1100 TO 1900 2 P.S.I.G. 7 inches W.C. GREEN - 5.5 to 8.5 inches W.C. -1/2" ACTARIS B -34N UP TO 1800 5 P.S.I.G. 2 P.S.I.G. SILVER - 5 P.S.I.G. TO 2 P.S.I.G. - 3/8" NOTES: - REGULATORS ARE FULL CAPACITY INTERNAL RELIEF TYPE. - REGULATORS TO BE INSTALLED WITH RELIEF VENT IN POSITION TO PREVENT ENTRANCE OF WATER (PROVIDE SCREENED VENT ELBOW AS REQUIRED). VENT OPENING TO BE LOCATED 12" MIN. ABOVE ROOF LEVEL. -TAG REGULATOR WITH INLET AND OUTLET SETTINGS, AFFIX WARNING 'DO -NOT REMOVE'. DIFFUSER & GRILLE SCHEDULE MARK APPLICATION MANUFACTURER / MODEL MAT'L. FINISH ACCESSORIES REMARKS VC PC 1 CEILING TITUS / TDC STEEL BWE X LAY -IN T -BAR, 24 "x24 ", ALL WITH 18 "x18" LOUVER FACE 2 CEILING TITUS /TDC ALUMINUM BWE X SURFACE MOUNTED W /DAMPER & PLASTER FRAME 3 SIDEWALU DUCT MOUNTED TITUS / 300FS ALUMINUM BWE X X WALL MOUNTED 4 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSER TITUS / TBDI -30 STEEL BWE X LAY -IN, REFER TO PLANS FOR # OF SLOTS 5 CEILING TITUS / 50F ALUMINUM BWE X SURFACE MOUNTED 6 CEILING TITUS / 50F ALUMINUM BWE SURFACE MOUNTED 7 CEILING TITUS / 50F ALUMINUM BWE LAY -IN T -BAR 8 SIDEWALU DUCT MOUNTED TITUS / 350FS STEEL BWE SURFACE MOUNTED 9 AREOBLADE SUPPLY REGISTER TITUS / 122RS STEEL BWE X X (NOT USED) DUCT MOUNT WITH DAMPERS DOUBLE DELFECTION ** - PROVIDE LOUVER WITH FINISH: BAKED OFF -WHITE ENAMEL (BWE) S= SUPPLY AIR OPPOSED BLADE DAMPERS. ACCESSORIES: VC- VOLUME CONTROL R = RETURN AIR PC- PATTERN CONTROL E = EXHAUST AIR T = TRANSFER AIR (SYSTEM TAG LISTED ON PLANS) APPROVED ALTERNATES: PRICE, NAILOR, TUTTLE & BAILEY ** OWNER SHALL PROVIDE FACTORY INSTALLED SMOKE DETECTORS IN THE RETURN AIR DUCTS IN NEW RTU'S OVER 2000 CFM (RTU -10), WIRED TO SHUT DOWN THE EVAPORATOR BLOWER UPON ACTIVATION. HAC SHALL WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (SUPERVISORY SIGNAL). REFER TO NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTE BELOW. NOTICE TO BIDDERS REF: SMOKE DETECTORS FOR ROOFTOP UNITS THE LENNOX ROOFTOP UNITS ARE NORMALLY FURNISHED WITH SMOKE DETECTORS FACTORY INSTALLED AND WIRED IN THE RETURN AIR PATH FOR UNITS 2000 CFM AND LARGER. DETECTORS SHALL COME FACTORY WIRED TO SHUT DOWN RTU. POWER FOR DETECTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. DURING BIDDING, THE HAC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO DETERMINE IF THE LOCAL CODES AND /OR THE LOCAL BUILDING /FIRE DEPARTMENT OFFICIALS REQUIRE THE SMOKE DETECTORS TO BE INSTALLED IN THE DUCTWORK IN LIEU OF BEING FACTORY INSTALLED WITHIN THE LENNOX UNITS. WHEN APPLICABLE, THE HAC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO INCLUDE IN HIS BASE BID WORK, THE COST TO REMOVE, RELOCATE, AND REWIRE THE SMOKE DETECTORS IN LOCATIONS AND ARRANGEMENTS ACCEPTABLE TO AND AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES AND OFFICIALS. IT IS PRESUMED THE HAC IS OR WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH THE LOCAL CODES AND PRACTICES. THEREFORE, THE CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO BE THUS INFORMED SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE JUSTIFICATION FOR AN ADDITIONAL PAYMENT FOR RELOCATING AND REWIRING SMOKE DETECTORS. THE SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH RTU INCLUDING THE SINGLE POINT CONNECTION OPTION. RTU SPECIAL NOTES ALL RTU'S EQUIPPED WITH ECONOMIZERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS. RTU -1, 2, 3, 4, A3 & A6 SHALL BE CONFIGURED FOR DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION. UNITS SHALL PROVIDE THE DAMPER CONTROL AND AUTOMATED LOGIC THE SPACE CO2 SENSORS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. THE BASE CO2 SETPOINT SHALL BE 500 PPM. THE OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TO MAXIMUM POSITION WITH RISE IN CO2 TO 1200 PPM. OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DRAWING EMS1 FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION. VENTILATION NOTE: THE BASE SALES FLOOR VENTILATION IS BASED ON ASHRAE 62 -2004. THE BASE VENTILATION SHALL BE PER AREA CRITERIA OF 0.12 CFM /SQFT. DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION (CO2) SHALL BE UTILIZED TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL VENTILATION FOR THE PEOPLE COMPONENT OF THE VENTILATION CODE, OR 7.5 CFM/PERSON. FOR THIS LOCATION, THE FULL VENTILATION IS BASED ON IMC -2006, OR 0.3 CFM /SQFT. REFER TO DRAWING EMS1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. EACH NEW AND EXISTING RTU SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A TEMPERATURE SENSOR. THE SENSORS SHALL BE SHIPPED LOOSE WITHIN THE UNIT TO BE MOUNTED BY THE E.C. PER DRAWING EMS1. THE LENNOX CATALOG NUMBER IS 94L60. HEATING & COOLING SET POINTS UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY BABIES "R" US, THE FOLLOWING SET POINTS SHALL APPLY TO ALL SYSTEMS: OCCUPIED COOL - 78° UNOCCUPIED COOL - 85° OCCUPIED HEAT - 68° UNOCCUPIED HEAT - 58° NOTE: THERMOSTATS FOR HEATING ONLY SHALL HAVE SET POINT RANGE OF 55 °F TO 75 °F FOR HEATING & COOLING SHALL HAVE SET POINT RANGE OF 55 °F TO 85°F (ADJ.) TO PROVIDE A RANGE OF 10 °F BETWEEN FULL HEATING AND FULL COOLING. ALL HEATING & COOLING THERMOSTATS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO TERMINATE ALL HEATING @ 68 °F & ALL COOLING @ 78°F. HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODE. RTU PLENUM DIFFUSER SPECIFICATIONS PROVIDE BY OWNER /INSTALLED BY HAC: 1. SUPPLY PLENUM DIFFUSER AS MANUFACTURED FOR BABIES 'R' US BY LENNOX INC APPROVED SUPPLIER: CONTACT INFORMATION LENNOX, INC. PHONE: FAX: EMAIL: (972) 497 -6884 (972) 497 -5112 MICHAEL.CORP.JOHNSTON @LENNOXINTL.COM 2. PLENUM DIFFUSERS WITH DRUM LOUVER SHALL BE OF SIZES AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER, BASED ON CURBS PLUS DLPD MODEL. RTU -1 & 2: DLPD - 5010 -30 RTU -3 & 4: DLPD - 4010 -25 RTU -3A & 6A: DLPD - 2406 -10 RTU -10: DLPD - 2406 - 10 (USE 10 -TON SIZE, BLANK OFF TWO SIDES) 3. ENTIRE PLENUM DIFFUSER SYSTEM SHALL BE PAINTED WHITE IN FIELD. SEISMIC ROOF CURB SPECIFICATIONS BRU SHALL PROVIDE AND HAC TO INSTALL: THY CURB TC -3 INSULATED CURB WITH SEISMIC CAPABILITY FOR SEISMIC SITE CLASS D, WITH THY -CURB SEISMIC RESTRAINT BRACKETS. D 0"*.7 P RPAR4T APoR� � /7.4 RRQ p�A D �RRd RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. NO. 0 DATE 02/26/10 03/08/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED. FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES DATE DESCRIPTION 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE MECH SCHEDULES AND DETAILS SCALE 12" =1-0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. M301 ARJ r PLUMBING SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND A.F.F. APPROX. BFP BLDG. C.L. CODP COL. COW P C.W. DIA.;0 DN. DOM. DWG. ELC ELECT. EWC FD FIN. FL. FR GCC GPH GPM HAC HB HP H.W. HWH LAV MIN. MFR. MOD. # N.I.C. N.T.S. OD OFL PBC PRESS. P.S.I.;PSI P.S.I.G.;PSIG RD REQ'D. RPZ RWL SAN. SHT. SVC. SYM. TEMP. TP TYP. UR V. RISER V.T.R.F. WC WH XT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR APPROXIMATE BACKFLOW PREVENTER BUILDING CENTERLINE CLEANOUT DECKPLATE COLUMN CLEANOUT WALLPLATE COLD WATER DIAMETER DOWN DOMESTIC DRAWING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FLOOR DRAIN FINISHED FLOOR FLOOR RECEPTOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR GALLONS PER HOUR GALLONS PER MINUTE HEATING AND AIR COND. CONTRACTOR HOSE BIBB HORSEPOWER HOT WATER HOT WATER HEATER LAVATORY MINIMUM MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER NOT IN CONTRACT NOT TO SCALE OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OVERFLOW RAINWATER LEADER PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PRESSURE POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAUGE ROOF DRAIN REQUIRED REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BFP RAINWATER LEADER SANITARY SHEET SERVICE SYMMETRICAL TEMPERATURE TRAP PRIMER TYPICAL URINAL VENT RISER VENT THRU ROOF FLASHED WATER CLOSET WALL HYDRANT THERMAL EXPANSION TANK DEGREES FAHRENHEIT RWL 0 AR GATE VALVE OR SHUT -OFF VALVE CHECK VALVE GLOBE VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING /REGULATING VALVE (PRV) FLOOR DRAIN WITH P -TRAP CLEANOUT DECKPLATE (CODP) CLEANOUT WALLPLATE (COW P) WALL HYDRANT /HOSE BIBB ROOF DRAIN WITH CLEANOUT UNION PIPE RISE PIPE DROP SPRINKLER RISER WATER METER POINT OF CONNECTION/ ELEVATION /INVERT COLD WATER PIPING HOT WATER PIPING RAINWATER LEADER (RWL) SOIUSEWERNVASTE PIPING VENT PIPING PLUMBING FIXTURE OR EQUIPMENT MARK (DESIGNATION FOR SPECIFICATION OR MARK FOR SCHEDULE ON DRAWING) NOTES ON DRAWING REVISIONS KEYED NOTES (APPLICABLE TO DRAWINGS P101 THRU P301) 0 4 6 (7I 8 9 10 ALL ABOVE GRADE PIPING SHALL BE RUN CONCEALED WITHIN THE CEILINGS AND WALLS WHERE HUNG CEILING IS APPLIED. FLUSH CONTROLS HARD WIRED SENSOR OPERATED. PC SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL FLUSH VALVE ELECTRICAL BOX MOUNTING KIT TO PROPERLY LOCATED SENSOR AND VALVE ACTUATOR. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ELECTRICAL BOXES AND WIRE LOW VOLTAGE POWER FROM PC FURNISHED TRANSFORMER TO EACH VALVE ELECTRICAL BOX. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. NO ALTERNATES ALLOWED TO LISTED VALVES. 3/4" VACUUM RELIEF VALVE. WATTS MODEL N -36. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE WITH NO TRAP IN RELIEF LINE. ROUTE RELIEF LINE FULL SIZE, WITHOUT UPWARD OFFSET, TIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN THE JANITORS CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1) AND TERMINATE AT 2" ABOVE FLOOD LEVEL OF FR -1. SLOPE HORIZONTAL VENT PIPING FROM STACK AT 1/4" PER FOOT, (MIN. AND TYPICAL). OFFSET VENT STACK AT ROOF TO AVOID ROOF FRAMING, (IF REQUIRED). ALL HOT, TEMPERED AND COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE INSULATED WITH 1 " THICKNESS OF OWENS CORNING HEAVY DENSITY INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET. K = 0.25 AT 100° F MEAN. ABOVE GRADE DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING IN SALES, PRE - SALES, AND RECEIVING AREAS SHALL BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH ALLOWANCE FOR SLOPE AS REQUIRED. 3/4" C.W. DOWN TO HOSE BIBB (HB -1). LOCATE HB -1 AT 12" BELOW BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK ADJACENT TO ROOF ACCESS LADDER, PROVIDE AUXILIARY FRAMING AS REQ'D. TO SECURELY MOUNT HB -1. MOUNT FREEZE -PROOF WALL HYDRANT (WH -1) AT 1.-6"± ABOVE FINISHED GRADE BUT NOT LOWER THAN 6" A.F.F. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. PROVIDE 20" X 20" X 9" DEEP GALVANIZED SHEET METAL PAN UNDER HWH -1 WITH 1 1/4" DRAIN PIPE ROUTED TIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN JANITOR'S CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1). TERMINATE DRAIN PIPING AT 2" ABOVE FLOOD LEVEL OF FR -1. PLUG TRANSFORMER FOR LAVATORIES AND HARD WIRED TRANSFORMER FOR FLUSH VALVES SHALL BE MOUNTED UNDER TOILET LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS (EC TO PROVIDE OUTLETS /J- BOX). PC TO FURNISH TRANSFORMERS, ONE PLUG TRANSFORMER FOR EACH TOILET ROOM LAVS, AND ONE SINGLE J -BOX MOUNTED TRANSFORMER FOR ALL FLUSH VALVES. EC TO WIRE FLUSH VALVE TRANSFORMER TO SENSOR AND ACTUATOR J- BOXES. ALL SENSOR WIRING SHALL BE CONCEALED, ROUTED ABOVE THE CEILING OR WITHIN WALLS. THE PC SHALL FIELD MEASURE TO DETERMINE LENGTH AND NUMBER OF EXTENSION CABLES. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICIAN. NOTE: STORAGE RACKS ON 4 -FT. MODULE UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES AND UTILITY RISERS, COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF RISERS WITH FIXTURE PLAN, DWG. RF1, TO MINIMIZE REQUIRED OMISSION OF RACKS AND TO HOLD RACKING MODULE WHERE RACKS MUST BE OMITTED FOR RISERS. (FOR EXAMPLE, RISER WITH TRIM, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES SHOULD NOT TAKE UP THE SPACE OF TWO RACKS IF REQUIRED SPACE IS 4 -FT. OR LESS, AND SO ON). CONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED IF UNDERGROUND SERVICE IS NOT LOCATED PROPERLY OR IF PROVIDED BY DEVELOPER OR UTILITY COMPANY. NOTE: CONTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THE FIXTURING PLAN, DRAWING RF1, FOR COORDINATION OF ALL PIPING, EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, VALVING, AND SERVICE RISERS WITH THE OWNER'S STORE FIXTURING. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE ROUTED AND /OR LOCATED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE STORE FIXTURES, SHELVING, AND RACKING, INCLUDING THE FUNCTIONAL USE OF SAME. INSTALLATIONS MADE WITHOUT REGARD TO STORE FIXTURING SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, SPECIAL CONSIDERATION SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE ESTHETIC INTENT OF THE FRONT GRAPHICS WALL OF THE STORE AND TO THE STORAGE AND MATERIALS HANDLING ASPECTS OF THE PRE -SALES AND RECEIVING DOCK AREAS. UTILITY NOTES: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY POINT OF CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE PRIOR TO COMMENCING INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST LOCATION AND DEPTH OF BUILDING SERVICES AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE (UNLESS OTHER PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN MADE). CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO PROPERLY COORDINATE SERVICES SHALL NOT BE JUSTIFICATION FOR ANY EXTRA CHARGES. BACK -FLOW CERTIFICATION IS REQUIRED BY LOCAL UTILITY FOR CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. PLUMBING GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE TO ATTEND PRE -BID WALK THROUGH TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF REQUIRED DEMOLITION AND REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS. EXISTING PLUMBING DRAWINGS WHERE NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE ENTIRE DEVELOPMENT, THEREFORE LIMITED EXISTING INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE. 2. ALL EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NOT BEING REUSED FOR THE NEW TENANT FITOUT SHALL BE REMOVED. REMOVE BACK TO MAINS AND CAP. 3. ALL SANITARY AND VENT PIPING NOT BEING USED BY THE NEW TENANT FITOUT SHALL BE REMOVED. VENT THRU ROOF'S SHALL BE CAPPED ABOVE AND BELOW ROOF. BURIED SANITARY PIPING MAY BE ABANDONED BELOW GRADE OF CAPPED BELOW GRADE AT BOTH ENDS. 4. COORDINATE SPECIFIC DEMOLITION WITH ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL TRADES. PROVIDE NOTIFICATION OF DISRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE PROCEEDING. 5. ALL EQUIPMENT /FIXTURES LISTED TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE BY RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR. Et A 9. NOTE: EXISTING TOILET ROOMS TO BE REPLACED WITH NEW AT SAME GENERAL LOCATION. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NEW FIXTURES, PIPING & VALVING REQUIRED FOR NEW TOILET ROOMS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT TO NEAREST BURIED 4" SANITARY AND 2" OR LARGER DOMESTIC COLD WATER. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING LOCATIONS AND SIZES RTU LOCATION OF REMOVED BREAK ROOM IS IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION (FIELD VERIFY) LOCATION OF REMOVED TOILET ROOMS IS APPROXIMATELY 10' TOWARD THE STORE FRONT FROM THE NEW TOILET ROOMS 10 IO on D • 3 t • 6, El EXISTING 6" BURIED SANITARY THAT SERVED MULTIPLE TENANTS. TRU SHALL REUSE EXISTING MAIN FIELD VERIFY EXISTING LOCATION :. .............. IEM.OVE.....,. 1-1/4"CW • 0 LOCATION OF EXISTING BREAK ROOM TO BE REMOVED LOCATION OF EXISTING TOILET ROOMS TO BE REMOVED AHU -1 (REFER TO M201 i 4 EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION RISER ROOM AND WATER METER ROOMS TRU SHALL USE LARGER OF TWO DOMESTIC WATER FEEDS, WHICH RUNS TO BACK CORNER OF THE STORE, NEAR NEW TOILET ROOMS. THE SECOND SERVICE SHALL BE CAPPED. EXISTING METER SHALL BE TURNED OVER TO UTILITY ROUTE TRAPPED DISCHARGE FROM AHU -1 TO CP -1, ROUTE DISCHARGE FROM CP -1 UP THRU ROOF. DISCHARGE THRU GOOSENECK 12" ABOVE ROOF PLUMBNG FLOOR PLAN & MECH. DEMO NOTES SCALE = 1 /1 6" = 1' -0" PLUMBING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION NOTES: 0 El El 4 ONE OF TWO EXISTING WATER SERVICES SHALL BE REMOVED. CAP LINE INSIDE NEW RISER ROOM AT FLOOR. COORDINATE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT OF EXISTING WATER METER AND BACKFLOW DEVISES WITH WATER UTILITY. METERS ARE LOCATED IN A VALVE PIT OUTSIDE THE BUILDING. THE WATER SERVICE FEEDING THE EXISTING TENANT TOILET ROOM AT THE BACK LEFT OF THE BUILDING (SOUTH -WEST) SHALL BE REUSED. REMOVE ALL DOMESTIC WATER PIPING FROM THE REMOVED SERVICE. THIS FEED AN EXISTING TOILET ROOM AT THE BACK RIGHT OF THE BUILDING (NORTH - WEST). REMOVE ALL TOILET FIXTURES FROM TOILET ROOM GROUP. THIS INCLUDES A MENS & WOMENS TOILET ROOMS AND JANITOR'S CLOSET. REMOVE ALL FIXTURES AND DEVISES (WATER HEATERS, VALVES, ETC...) ALL WATER PIPING TO BE REMOVED. ALL VENT PIPING EXCEPT AS NOTED SHALL BE REMOVED. ALL SANITARY BRANCH LINES SHALL BE REMOVED. CAP WASTE LINES BELOW GRADE, BOTH ENDS. EXISTING 6" BURIED SANITARY LINE TO REMAIN AND BE REUSED FOR NEW TOILET ROOM GROUP. REMOVE ALL FIXTURES AND PIPING ASSOCIATED TO EXISTING BREAK ROOM, AT THIS GENERAL LOCATION. THIS SHOULD BE LIMITED TO A SINGLE COUNTERTOP SINK. HVAC GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE TO ATTEND PRE -BID WALK THROUGH TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF REQUIRED DEMOLITION AND REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS. EXISTING HVAC DRAWINGS WHERE NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE ENTIRE DEVELOPMENT, THEREFORE LIMITED EXISTING INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE. 2. WHERE NOTED FOR REMOVAL, DUCTWORK SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THE LOCATION SPECIFIED. THE REMAINING DUCTWORK SHALL BE CAPPED AND SEALED AIR - TIGHT. 3. DESIGN INTENT IS FOR ALL EXISTING RTU, EXCEPT FOR RTU -A6, TO BE REUSED. 4. THE RIGHT SIDE RTU'S LABELED AS RTU -A? WERE ORIGINALLY CALLED ACU'S. REFERENCE TAGS IN THE FIELD MAY NOT MATCH THESE CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS. 5. COORDINATE SPECIFIC DEMOLITION WITH ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL TRADES. PROVIDE NOTIFICATION OF DISRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE PROCEEDING. 6. ALL EQUIPMENT LISTED TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE BY RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR. 7. EXISTING RTU HVAC CONTROLS WILL BE REPLACED WITH NEW OWNER FURNISHED AUTOMATED LOGIC UNIT CONTROLS. REFER TO DRAWING EMS1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. EXISTING THERMOSTATS TO BE REMOVED. PLAN NORTH NEW SECONDARY CONDENSATE, MOUNT ABOVE CEILING OF EQUIPMENT ROOM o G \ H • K \` HVAC KEYNOTE DEMOLITION NOTES: EXISTING RTU -A6 SHALL BE ABANDONED IN PLACE. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CAP THE EXISTING GAS LINE AFTER EXISTING GAS COCK. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL TRADES FOR REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK FROM UNIT, CAP 1' -0" BELOW ROOF DECK. • EXISTING RTU TO REMAIN. EXISTING GAS SERVICE TO REMAIN. ® REMOVE EXISTING SUPPLY PLENUM DIFFUSER. RETURN PLENUM TO REMAIN. SE ® REMOVE ALL EXISTING SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK FROM EXISTING UNIT. REFER TO NEW CONSTRI DRAWINGS FOR NEW DUCTWORK. E REMOVE ALL EXISTING SUPPLY DUCTWORK FROM EXISTING RTU. EXISTING RETURN DUCTWORK/PLENUI THAT THIS UNIT HAS EXTENSIVE LINEAR FEET OF DISTRIBUTION DUCTWORK. APpr 7, 0 I IZIICAL !NAND 4i3OT !RED ® REMOVE EXISTING CEILING EXHAUST FANS AND ASSOCIATE DUCTWORK UP TO VENT THROUGH ROOF. REMOVE VENT AND PATCH AND CAP ROOF. COORDINATE WITH ARCH TRADES. RECEIVED MAR 1. 12010 PERMIT CENTER (CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/08/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveae.com STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN & MECH DEMO SCALE 1/16" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. P101 0; 3" VENT UP TO 4"VTR. S4 FROM UR (TYP. OF 2) /C,ONNECT NEW 4"W 2TO EXISTING MAIN � (FIELD LOCATE) FROM 3"W, nm��� --..~ `' -�' 2"V,..FROM � ' ' '~ �-'y.FD� ^-'WC-2 ^°"."`". � � BURIED OUMV�UU°`�- 3"F0� " WALL CO DEEP SEAL TRAP (TYP.) \ 6 SANITARY PIPING SCHEMATIC P201 SCALE = NTS 3"W BELOW SLAB TO FD'S /9\ I_~ . It I-��� fl� ROOM HALL 113 • 3 PLUMBING SE TUON AT TOILET R M S P201 SCALE = 1/4"=1''[" 3/4^P&T DOWN TOFF-1.D|SH FLOOD PLAIN OF FIXTURE 300 400 3" Psn lims._-14'1111111riMirjringrA- i'lfrmikm" 1^ FROM WATER PAN, ROUTE �.,�_-�_ - WITH 2" AIR GAP ABOVE FLOOD PLAIN OF FIXTURE TYP.) 1'1/2"V ZZZ , 3"VQ. OFFSET 3�^ATROOF DECK FROM EDGE OF BUILDING TO 4'VTRF 1 NOTES: 40 WASTE LINE UP INTO CHASE TO FEED LAVS, UR.8 AND VVC'S CONNECT NEW 40 SANITARYTO EXISTING MAIN. FIELD VERIFY � ° REFER TD DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING DIAGRAM, THIS SHEET. \-/ ) * SLOPE ALL 6" AND LARGER SAN. SEWER PIPING BELOW FLOOR AT 1/4"/FT MINIMUM, AND ALL 4" AND SMALLER PIPE AT 107FTM\N|MUM. * PBC SHALL FILL FLOOR DRAIN P-TRAP WITH WATER UPON COMPLETION OF ALL WORK AND TESTING (TYP. ALL FLOOR DRAINS). * INSULATE ALL EXPOSED PIPING BELOW LAVS (L-1) AND SINKS (S-1). * PBC SHALL USE FIXTURE CARRIER WITH AUXILIARY 2" WASTE TAP FOR WATER CLOSET BACK TO BACK WITH URINAL. PROVIDE SEPARATE VENTS. * DESIGN BASED ON VENT PIPING TO BE ROUTED IN CHASE. ALL HORIZONTAL BRANCH VENTS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6" ABOVE FLOOD PLAIN OF HIGHEST FIXTURE. ENLARGED K U ET AREA SANITARY PLAN P201 PLAN NORTH 10 EX. 4" BURIED SANITARY MAIN (FIELD VERIFY) 'CHASE TO „LAVS 2"CW HEADER THE , LENGTH OF THE FOR FLUSH VALVES 3/4"CWTDWC'S '', • (TYPICAL) ,` EVVH4.MOUNT ON SHELF DRAIN PAN 3/4^H&CVV TO EWH 3/4^H&CVVTD FR-1 FAUCET (WITH VB) 2"CW UP IN JOIST SPACE, ROUTE NEAREST 2"CW OR LARGER (FROM REMOVED TOILET ROOMS IN SAME GENERAL AREA) ~~. DOWN FROM JOIST SPACE TO ABOVE HALL CEILING 1/2^CVVTOTRAP PRIMER S-1 EWC-1 ,.--5ET DISCHARGE. 2"CW DN. IN TOILET ROOM CHASE � ' •� �UR'1� TAP OFF WOW 1"C,, TO ~ ,��� , WALL FLUSH MOUNT SENSOR (TYP.) BELOW SLAB TRAP„----1 PRIMER LINE-0)M. OF 2) WC-VALVE ACTUATOR, WALL FLUSH MOUNT (TYP.) ROUTE TRAP CHASE OR PR|K�ERTUBING \N - - • NOTE: PROVIDE BALL VALVES AT ALL BRANCH LINES (OUTSIDE OF CHASE) NOTE: P.C. SHALL PROVDE WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS FOR ALL FEEDS TO WCS, UR'S, LAVS AND SINKS, CW, HW &TVV. pERPD|'2OO8'VVH2O1 DOMESTIC WA ER PIPING SCHEMATIC SCALE = NTS 3/4"H&CW TO SERVICE SINK FAUCET 122 TP CONNECT 1/2"CW OFF \ 1 LINE �����oom^co ru",".""�"'""^` ` . 3/4"TW DN IN CHASE . BREAK ROOM 118 BREAK ROOM SINK- . SHALL L COMPLY WITH FEDERAL ADA REGULATIONS AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS. * TOILET ROOM LAVATORIES ARE PROVIDED BY THE G.C. FAUCET AND PLUMBING IS PROVIDED BY P.C. * NEW FLUSH VALVES SHALL BE HARD WIRED AUTOMATIC SENSOR VALVES. ALL WIRING SHALL BE HIDDEN FROM VIEW. THE SINGLE TRANSFORKERSHALLBEK{UNTEDBELOVTHELAVCOUNTERTOP.CONTRACTORSHALLUSESLOANELECTR|CALBDX/FLUSHVAL VALVE E MOUNTING POSITIONING KITS TO VERIFY CORRECT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. ALL LOW VOLT WIRING FOR THE FLUSH VALVES SHALL BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WITH ELECTRICAL BOX POSITIONING KITS INSTALLED BY THE PC * ALL PIPING FOR TOILET LAVS SHALL BE HIDDEN BEHIND THE ARCH PROVIDED SHROUD. * ALL LAVATORIES SHALL HAVE HARD WIRED SENSOR FAUCETS. ALL LOW VOLT WIRING FOR LAVATORIES SHALL BE BY THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. A PLUG TRANSFORMER SHALL BE MOUNTED UNDER THE LAV COUNTERTOP FOR EACH TOILET ROOM. THE PC SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY EXTENSION CABLES SLOAN MODEL EAF-17-A, 25-A AND SPLITTER CABLES AS REQUIRED (HELD VERIFY). ALL WIRING SHALL BE CONCEALED BEHND LAV SHROUD OR WITHIN WALLS. OUTLET |O1Ob<, DEGREE 11 ��1:_ To •..,„„ •�```` 2"CW DN IN CHASE ` 3/4^H&CVTO El WOMEN'S ROOM~ 123 SENSOR FLUS VALVES & LAV FAUCET TRANSORMER, BELOW COUNTER = : 113 MOUNT TO UNDERSIDE OF COUNTER (HIDE FROM VIEW) � MOTHER'S '/ - -- 124 ° REFER TO WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC, THIS SHEET. * REFER TO DETAILS ON DRAWING P301 AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR VALVE REQUIREMENTS. * TRAP PRIMERS FOR FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE LOCATED IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. °REFERTOARCH|TEOTURALDR/V|NGSR]RPLUKB|NGF|XTUREKOUNT|N{RBQU|REKENTS.ALL8ARR|ERFREEF|XTURESGHA 2 TOILET AREA WATER PIPING PLAN 2" 9.w. SUPPLY. CONNECT TO NEAREST 2"CW OR LARGER. EXISTING TOILET ROOM WAS LOCATED AT THIS I ApRFIOXIMATE LOCATION. (FIELD VERIFY) Z.::: PLAN RECEIVE `~~~" ��~ Kx&� � � �� ��M�� ` wo� PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 0308/10 SSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES ES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION O 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: BJP CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE tit . ' �� �_ ���������ee�n��/ P.C. engineering, lQ114 Mile R6NE 7 Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING ISTHE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTYOF TOYS OR?? US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WTHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS ^R"US. LOCATION ~�� UU �� U K U�����UU �� ���� " ~~~" �� � "�~° °� ° °" " DR/AN|NGT�LE �~� K~� �~� PLUMBING ��\K~U�~~U � ���° ~" ",��°~�°�~ PLANS & SCHEMATICS SCALE 1/4"=1'-[l" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. P201 AR PROTOTYPE UPDATES 1/4" 0 STEEL CABLE. INSTALL �~ TO BE TAUT, WITHIN 1/3 OF ENDS. INSTALL LOWER CABLE 4" MIN. ABOVE CONTROLS. (SQUARE SHELF) WATER HEATER DIA. + 3" (MIN.) 3/4" PLYWOOD 1/4" 0 EYE BOLT TO WATER HEATER SUPPORT FRAMING. 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/8" ALL - WELDED STEEL ANGLE MOUNTING SHELF PRIMED AND PAINTED WHITE GLOSS ENAMEL. SECURELY ANCHOR TO WALL STUDS W /MIN. OF FOUR (4) 1/4" DIA. STEEL FASTENERS. (2) VERTICAL & (2) DIAGONAL ANGLES. (6WATER HEATER MOUNTING SHELF DETAIL P30y SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 1 CW, SEE PLAN —1 S k r6 THERMOMETER Oi 3 /4 "T n� W (105 °F) .. -'b 14 3/4" WATTS MMV ___Q LOCATE IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION BALL VALVE (TYP.) a EXPANSION TANK, AMTROL MODEL ST -5 .— 3/4" CW SUPPORTING SHELF, SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET RELIEF VALVE TO SERVICE SINK (INDIRECT) 3/4" HOT WATER (125°F) DIELECTRIC UNIONS (TYP.) HEAT TRAP CONNECTORS WATER HEATER 3/4" DRAIN DN TO SERVICE SINK (INDIRECT) WATER HEATER CONNECTION DETAIL SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" OVERSIZED HANGER PIPE INSULATION PIPE GALVANIZED STEEL INSULATION SHIELD INSERT (TYPICAL) COLD WATER HANGER DETAIL P301 / SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 7— HEAVY DUTY CLEANOUT 24 "x 24 "x 6" CONCRETE PAD EXCEPT IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT DIAMETER RISER 1/8 BEND "7— SOIL PIPE "Y" BRANCH PLUG IF END OF PIPE YARD CLEANOUT FINISHED FLOOR .��..� r V. Aiii A Il .A 7 STANDARD CLEANOUT DETAILS P301 / SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" FLOOR CLEANOUT COVER REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ADJUSTABLE HOUSING GASKETED CLEANOUT PLUG CI, PVC OR ABS CLEANOUT WASTE LINE LENGTH TO SUIT WASTE LINE 7A A 7A A MAY EXTEND AS WASTE OR VENT FOR WALL CONST. REF TO ARCH DWGS CLEANOUT PLUG COUNTERSUNK SCREW POLISHED S.S. OR CHROME ACCESS COVER C.I. CLEANOUT TEE WASTE LINE, LENGTH TO SUIT WALL CLEANOUT 1/8 BEND @ END OF LINE CLEANOUT WASTE LINE 3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER WATER CLOSET AND URINAL ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES SERIES NUMBER BOWL TYPE OUTLET FLUSH VALVE SEAT CARRIER ® AMERICAN STANDARD 2257.103 WALL MOUNT ELONGATED SIPHON JET BOTTOM SLOAN ROYAL OPTIMA 111 ES -S AM. STD 5901.100 OPEN FRONT WADE 300 SERIES ADJUSTABLE 1.6 GPM. ELECTRICALLY WIRED SENSOR FLUSHMETER. VALVE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH OVER -RIDE BUTTON, ONE EL -154 TRANSFORMER (FOR ALL FLUSH VALVES), AND EL -485 -A ELECTRICAL BOX POSITIONING KIT, INSTALL PER MFG. INSTRUCTIONS. v ® AMERICAN STANDARD 2257.103 WALL MOUNT ELONGATED SIPHON -JET BOTTOM SLOAN ROYAL OPTIMA 111 ES -S AM. STD. 5901.100 OPEN FRONT WADE 300 SERIES ADJUSTABLE SAME FIXTURE AND ACCESSORIES AS WC 1, BUT MOUNT PER ADA BARRIER FREE REQUIREMENTS. © Ala AMERICAN STANDARD 6541.132 WALL -HUNG WASH OUT BACK SLOAN ROYAL OPTIMA 186- 0.5 ES -S -OR WADE 400 SERIES LOW FLOW FIXTURE, 0.5 GPM. ADA FIXTURE, INSTALL PER MFG. INSTRUCTIONS. ELECTRICALLY WIRED SENSOR FLUSHMETER. PROVIDE VALVE WITH MANUAL OVER -RIDE BUTTON, VALVE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH EL -485 -A ELECTRICAL BOX POSITIONING KIT, VW UR AMERICAN STANDARD 6541.132 WALL -HUNG WASH OUT BACK SLOAN ROYAL OPTIMA 186- 0.5 ES -S -OR WADE 400 SERIES SAME FIXTURE AND ACCESSORIES AS UR -1, BUT MOUNT PER ADA BARRIER FREE REQUIREMENTS. © FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER LAV TORY /SINK TRAP ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BOWL TYPE FAUCET SUPPLY PIPE Q SOLID SURFACE PROVIDED BY G.C. BY OTHERS SLOAN, ADA FLEX WITH MODEL ANGLE STOP EAF 100 CHROME PLATED BRASS COUNTERTOP LAV BY OTHERS. SENSOR OPERATED FAUCET SHALL BE ADA COMPLIANT, WIRED BACK TO TRANSFORMER, MODEL EAF -11, PROVIDE WITH EXTENSION CABLES AND SPLITTER CABLES (EAF -23 -1 & EAF -25 -A) v © ELKAY ELUHD2115 UNDERMOUNT 21 "x15.75 "x5" CHICAGO FAUCET FLEX WITH 786- GN2 -FC ANGLE STOP CHROME PLATED BRASS UNDERMOUNT SINK, INSTALLED PER MFG INSTRUCTIONS.; SINGLE BLOW - ADA COMPLIANT. FAUCET WITH LEVER TYPE HANDLE AND 1.0 AERATOR. SINGLE BOWL ADA COMPLIANT, 18 GA., TYPE 302 VW FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER FLOOR RECEPTOR ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BOWL TYPE FAUCET TRAP Illik FIAT SB -3624 PRECAST TERRA77O AMER. STD. 8340.243 CAST IRON REMOVABLE CHROME PLATED BRASS STRAINER PLATE. v FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER FLOOR DRAIN /STRAINER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES MATERIAL TYPE SIZE FREE AREA MATERIAL FD JOSAM 30003 -6A CAST IRON 6A 3 "e /6 "o 11 SQ. IN. BUFF POLISHED BRONZE TWO PIECE BODY, DOUBLE DRAINAGE FLANGE, WEEP HOLES WITH DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND TRAP PRIMER. v FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES GAL. CAPACITY TYPE # ELEMENTS WATTS VOLTS /0 A.O. SMITH EJCS -20 19 ELECTRIC 1 5500 277/1 MOUNT ON SHELF PER DETAIL THIS SHEET WHERE SHOWN. SET TEMP. CONTROL AT 135 °F. PROVIDE WATTS MODEL #100XL TEMP. /PRESS. RELIEF VALVE. 0 FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER ELECT. WATER COOLER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES CAPACITY VOLTS HP FINISH LIM HALSEY TAYLOR HAC8 FSBL Q ADA SS 8 GPH 120 1/5 STANDARD NO ALTERNATES: BI LEVEL ELECTRIC WATER COOLER. INSTALL PER A.D.A. REFER BI -LEVEL ELEC. WATER COOLER ELEV. & ROUGH -IN DETAIL THIS SHEET. THE ENTIRE UNIT INCLUDING THE CASING /CABINET SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. VW FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER WALL HYDRANT ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES HYDRANT CASING BOX TYPE WEIGHT ® JOSAM 71050 -8 BRONZE BRONZE NIKALOY NON FREEZE 7 LBS. PROVIDE WITH WALL CLAMP, UNION ELBOW ASSEMBLY AND SELF - OPENING, VANDAL -PROOF SATIN FINISH FACE COVER. VW FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER HOSE BIBB ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BODY HANDWHEEL HOSE END CONNECTION WEIGHT WATTS SC8-4 CAST BRASS CAST IRON 3/4" I.P. REGULAR PATTERN 1/2 LBS. PROVIDE WITH TAMPER PROOF VACUUM BREAKER. HB v FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER TRAP PRIMER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES MODEL NO. NO. OF DRAINS TP PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS, INC. P1 -500 SEE PLANS MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ACCESS FOR PERIODIC INSPECTION v NOTES: 1. ALL NOTED FIXTURES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE TO INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 1990 ". FIXTURES AND THEIR INSTALLATION SHALL ALSO COMPLY WITH AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) PUBLICATION A117.1 - "PROVIDING ACCESSIBILITY AND USABILITY FOR PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED PEOPLE" AND /OR GOVERNING CODE. 2. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM, AND FITTINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS AND CODES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WATER AND ENERGY CONSERVATION CODES. THE SCHEDULED AND /OR SPECIFIED PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT REPRESENT THE MINIMUM CRITERIA AND SHALL BE THE BASIS FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S BASE BID. IF THE SCHEDULED OR SPECIFIED FIXTURES OR EQUIPMENT DO NOT COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES OR REGULATIONS IN ALL RESPECTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AN ALTERNATE BID FOR COMPLYING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM, OR FITTINGS. THE ABSENCE OF AN ALTERNATE BID SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO MEAN THAT THE CONTRACTOR'S BID INCLUDES ALL COSTS NECESSARY TO MEET ALL REGULATIONS AND CODES. CONDENSATE PUMP SCHEDULE TAG MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL SHUT -OFF HEAD SIZE MOTOR POWER REMARKS P 1 LITTLE GIANT VCMA -20 20' 1/2 GAL. 1/30 HP 120V/1/60 SECONDARY CONDENSATE PUMP, MOUNT ABOVE CLG, CHROME PLATED ESCUTCHEON AT WALL. TEE SUPPLY HEADER IN WALL 1/2" S.O.V. DISTRIBUTION UNIT REQ'D FOR MULTIPLE TRAP CONNECTIONS. 1/2" COPPER TUBING TRAP SUPPLIES, ROUTE BELOW FLOOR TO FLOOR DRAIN TRAPS SEE PLAN. TRAP PRIMER VALVE WITH INTEGRAL BACKFLOW PREVENTER AND VACUUM BREAKER PORT. PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS MODEL P1 -500. SECURE DISTRIBUTION UNIT TO BACKING SHEET BETWEEN STUDS. � 3 � TRAP PRIMER DETAIL SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" 7 -1/2" (TYP. & SYM.) 6 -3/8" (TYP. & SYM.) 18" (TYP.) 37 -1/8 "— 1 -1/2" IPS WASTE BY PBC. 7-1/4" 7" (TYP.) 11 -1/2" 2 -1/2" (TYP.) 3" (TYP.) i 18- 1/16" (TYP.) ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 3- WIRE RECESSED BOX. 6- 5/16" 4 -1/2" 2 -3/4" 3 -1/2" b10-o7� 3/8" WATER SUPPLY BY PBC. 1" (TYP. & SYM.) —1 " (TYP. & SYM.) a) FIN. FLOOR 0 w w U w 0 ao M w w 0 0 N d) co 0) N M WALL 18 -5/8" (TYP.) 16" (TYP.) 1 1/4" DRAIN & PIPING BY MFR. (TYP. OF 2). HANGER BRACKET (TYP.) 3/8" TUBING SERVICE STOP WATER SUPPLY BY PBC. 1-1/2" P -TRAP & TRAP ARM BY PBC. NOTES: 1. REFER TO ARCH. DWGS. FOR REQUIRED SUPPORT FRAMING. 2. ROUGH -IN DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE BY HALSEY TAYLOR WITHOUT NOTIFICATION. CONTRACTORS RELYING ON ROUGH -IN DIMENSIONS SHOWN WITHOUT VERIFICATION FROM MANUFACTURER'S DATA SHALL DO SO AT THEIR OWN RISK AND TO DO SO WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED JUST CAUSE FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION. WATER COOLER ROUGH -IN DETAIL SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" Si* 44947:447 IQZZ,NN° RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE 02/26/10 03/08/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS NO. 0 DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 DRAWN BY: BJP PROJECT NO.: 55252805 CHECKED BY: RAF PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE architecture engineering, P.C. 18114 Mile Rd NE Grand Rapids, Mi 49525 www.progressiveaecom TC STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TU KWI LA, WA DRAWING TITLE PLUMBING SCHED AND DETAILS SCALE 12" = 1' -0" ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. P301 DA NEW ECS AUTOMATI9 AIR RELEASE DEVICE_ ' 38' -0" 38' -0" / / 38' -0" 38' -0" -=-NEW AUXILIARY,DRN 1 VALVE-WITH-3/44108 END ADAPTER EXISTING AUXILIARY DRAIN NEW ECS AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE DEVICE 18 7 J 38' -3" E X I S T I N G 211 BRANCH LINE AROUND RTU AS SHOWN 0 00 B. D. = 21' -8" CC� AREA 1 HYDRAULICALLY MOST REMOTE 2,000 SQ. FT. 0.60/2,000 -I- -1 �I X '21 i� I I -Nr r r.:I I NI -d- Efl ,RE - 0151-E EXISTING " BRANCH LINE rt AROUND RTU AS 1 SHOIIVSL,L L D. = 23' -4" 12' -9" 17-9" 12' -9" 12' -9" 6' -3" 1. 6' -3" '. 12' -9" 12' -9" 10' -0" D. = 24' -1" ( 1" f r- EXISTINW8" SPTGOTTOBE 1 CAPPED BELOW SLAB A D ABANDONED IN PLACE Nt- NI 1ii1%I�ii111 SIMPER( -iIIlI /` I L � fly F• t� a� ■I � / I II•I11.9L.l..l ,;1. iii l �� 1 ��� li�l ___t__ -b- -1- - 1 I I I III T - I /` I 4 DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH EXISTING PIPING CROSSING NEW DEMISIIG WALL AND CAP AS SHOWN B.O.D = 21' -1 H B.O.D. = 22' -9 "I ARE4 2 HYDRAULICALLY MOST REMOTE 2,000 Q. FT. 0.60/2,000 B.O.D B.O.D N DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH EXISTIN PIPING CROSSING NEW DEMISING WALL AND CAP AS SHOWN EXISTING 5" STORZ CONNECTION. PROVIDE LOCKING KNOX CAP. 19'0" i i 38' -0" 2 i 38' -0" a36" 38' -0" AN FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN WISCALE: 1/16" =1' -0" FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" 4 0 0 EXISTING 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE LEAD -IN 10 " -- MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED MAXIMUM DISTANCE- EXISTING ABANDONED 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE MAIN 7 7 38' -3" _ ' EXISTING CURB BOX KEY VALVE (TYP.) 10" CEILING EXISTING 10" U.G. PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY CLOSURE l l 38' -3" i 2 ' 14' -3" FACE OF SPRINKLER FITTING MOUNTING PLATE r1/4" MINIMUM \- DISTANCE VERTICAL TOLERANCE FOR RECESSED SPRINKLERS NOT TO SCALE (STANDARD COVERAGE RECESSED) B.O.D`_ 25-4" BRANCH LINE ROOF /FLOOR DECK JOIST 4,131, A 4B 1" MIN. 12" MAX. TYPICAL JOIST CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT NOT TO SCALE (EXTENDED COVERAGE UPRIGHT) ROOF /FLOOR DECK JOIST GIRDER) A 4B MIN. 12" MAX. TYPICAL JOIST GIRDER CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT NOT TO SCALE (EXTENDED COVERAGE UPRIGHT) DESIGN CRITERIA SALES AND PRE SALES AREAS: DENSITY - 0.60 GPM /SQ FT OPERATING AREA - 2,000 SQ FT TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION /NOMINAL K- FACTOR/SPRINKLER TYPE - INT/ 25.2/EC HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE - 500 GPM OFFICE, BREAKROOM AND VESTIBULE AREAS: DENSITY - 0.15 GPM /SQ FT OPERATING AREA -1,500 SQ FT TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION /NOMINAL K- FACTOR/RESPONSE TYPE - ORD/ 5.6IQR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE - 250 GPM SPRINKLER SPACING SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS: 1. FINISHED CEILING AREAS - LOCATE SPRINKLERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS. NOT MORE THAN A 3 -INCH RADIUS TOLERANCE ABOUT THE POINT IDENTIFIED BY DIMENSION WILL BE ACCEPTED. THE DESIGN DOES NOT ANTICIPATE THE USE OF "RETURN BENDS" TO LOCATE SPRINKLERS WITHIN THE TOLERANCE DESCRIBED ABOVE. WHERE ROWS OF SPRINKLERS ARE PROVIDED WITHIN THE SAME CEILING PLANE, ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE USED FOR ONE SPRINKLER SHALL BE THE SAME FOR ALL OTHERS IN THAT SAME ROW. 2. UNFINISHED AREAS - LOCATE SPRINKLERS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. WATER MODEL INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE TUKWILA WATER DEPARTMENT EFFECTIVE NEAR THE SITE OF THIS PROJECT INDICATES THAT THE COORDINATES OF 140 PSI STATIC, 10 PSI RESIDUAL, WHILE FLOWING 5,200 GPM WOULD BEST DESCRIBE THE PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY TO THE SITE. THE EFFECTIVE POINT OF THIS WATER MODEL SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE AT THE EXISTING CONNECTION TO THE PUBLIC WATER MAIN AT AN APPROXIMATE ELEVATION EQUAL TO THE FINISHED FLOOR OF THE BUILDING. NO SUBSTITUTION OF THE WATER SUPPLY DATA OR ITS EFFECTIVE POINT WILL BE ALLOWED. THE ABOVE COORDINATES INCLUDE A 10 PSI SAFETY FACTOR AND SHALL BE MAINTAINED. EXISTING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION TO REMAIN. GENERAL NOTES 1. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND AUXILIARY DRAINS REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONDITIONS WHETHER OR NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND VERIFY ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, CLEARANCES, PIPE SIZES, ETC. 3. ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY. REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS, SIZES AND QUANTITIES OF OTHER TRADES' WORK. 4. THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE 100% CAD. THE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS WILL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER ELECTRONIC FORM OR HARD COPY. 5. SUPPLY ONLY ONE (1) SPRINKLER FROM A SINGLE BRANCH LINE OUTLET. PROVIDE NEW BRANCH LINES AS REQUIRED. 6. SPRINKLERS NEAR UNIT HEATERS SHALL HAVE TEMPERATURE RATINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13. 7. IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE PIPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE BID DOCUMENTS WILL BE USED. 8. ABOVEGROUND PIPE SHALL HAVE A CORROSION RESISTANCE RATIO (CRR) OF 1.0 OR GREATER. HANGER NOTES 1. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES AND LOCATIONS WITH THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3. HANGERS WITH MORE THAN 150 POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE JOIST AT A PANEL POINT. DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH EXISTING RISER IN EXISTING SOUTH SPRINKLER ROOM, EXCEPT EXISTING EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON RISER DETAIL TO BE REUSED. CAP CONNECTION TO EXISTING 8" CROSS MAIN AT ROOF DECK AND CAP 8" MAIN BELOW FLOOR SLAB. NEW 8" FEED MAIN TO TOY R US NEW PRESSURE GAUGE TIE NEW 2" DRAIN INTO EXISTING DRAIN LINE bt SYMBOL KEY 0 EXISTING PIPING NEW PIPING CHROME RECESSED TYCO EC-25 BRASS UPRIGHT (PROVIDE NEW 1" OUTLET ON EXISTING PIPING) TYCO EC-25 BRASS UPRIGHT TYCO EC-25 BRASS UPRIGHT (PROVIDE ON EXISTING 1" SPRIG) TYCO EC -25 BRASS UPRIGHT (PROVIDE ON 1" SPRIG) ORD /5.6 /QR INT /25.2/EC INT /25.2/EC.: INT /25.2/EC INT /25.21EC • - CENTER LINE OF SPRINKLER: ALIGN WITH LIGHTS AND /OR OTHER /4 A j' / EXISTING CENTER LINE ELEVATION OF PIPE BELOW METAL DECK SPRINKLERS: COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. RISE FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AND DROP FROM RIGHT TO LEFT CAPPED PIPE HYDRAULIC REFERENCE POINT TIE INTO EXISTING PIPING SEISMIC NOTES PROTECT ALL NEW AND EXISTING PIPING AGAINST DAMAGE DUE TO EARTHQUAKE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 2007 EDITION OF NFPA 13 REGARDLESS OF THE ENFORCED EDITION WHICH SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS, MINIMUM CLEARANCES, LATERAL AND LONGITUDINAL BRACING, FOUR -WAY BRACING AND RETAINING STRAPS. 2. VERTICAL AND LATERAL RESTRAINT SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ALL BRANCH LINES, INCLUDING END OF LINE, PER NFPA 13. EXCEPTION: BRANCH LINES SUPPORTED BY RODS LESS THAN 6 IN. LONG MEASURED BETWEEN THE TOP OF THE PIPE AND THE POINT OF ATTACHMENT TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE, AS DEFINED BY NFPA 13, REQUIRE VERTICAL RESTRAINT ONLY. 3. WIRE USED FOR RESTRAINT SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 24 IN. OF A HANGER. HANGER SHALL BE OF A TYPE THAT RESISTS UPWARD MOVEMENT OF THE BRANCH LINE. 4. SPRIGS 4 FT OR LONGER SHALL BE RESTRAINED AGAINST LATERAL MOVEMENT. NOTE PROVIDE SPRINKLER PROTECTION BELOW DUCTS IN EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS PER NFPA 13. SPRINKLER LOCATIONS (2' x 4' CEILING TILE) NOTE: 1' -0" 1' -0" SPRINKLER 3" RADIUS TOLERANCE SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN WITH A 3" TOLERANCE. HOWEVER, SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED, THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. DEMOLITION NOTES 1. DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING PENDENT SPRINKLERS AND DROPS TO SPRINKLERS IN EXISTING CEILING AREAS AND CAP AT BRANCH LINES. 2. DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS AND PLUG OUTLETS AT BRANCH LINES. 3. DISCONNECT AND DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING HOSE RACKS AND FEED LINES. CAP PIPING AT ROOF DECK. �{ _ � IBC EXISTING 2" PIPED TO STANDPIPE DRAIN EXISTING 2" DRAIN VALVE L, pi 2„ RELOCATED EXISTING 2" DRAIN RELOCATED EXISTING FLOW SWITCH 4 - 2 1/2" FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVES WITH CAPS AND CHAINS FOR TESTING OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER r-i -1 1 LJ EXISTI FLOW - I 2" , 1LA + 1 1 c2 t '0 Co LT / \ FL � ri EXISTING 8" FEED MAIN TO TOYS R US EXISTING 4" FEED MAIN TO EXISTING FRONT CANOPY DRY PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM NEW ECS RISER MOUNT CORROSION MONITORING STATION WITH CORROSION MONITORING PROBE (DCMP -2) (TYP.) EXISTING PRESSURE GAUGE EXISTING 4" DRY PIPE VALVE EXISTING 4" SUPERVISED INDICATING BUTTERFLY VALVE EXISTING 8" SUPERVISED WALL POST INDICATING VALVE RELOCATED 8" SUPERVISED WALL POST INDICATING VALVE NEW PIPE STAND NEW 6" FEED FROM EXISTING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (EXISTING 6" CHECK VALVE IN HORIZONTAL PLANE) EXISTING 8" U.G. ABANDONED FIRE SERVICE MAIN 1 oI EXISTING PIPE STAND 1 RELOCATE EXISTING 8" ELBOW WITH NEW 8" TEE DISCONNECT AND CAP EXISTING 6" FEED FROM FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION ELEVATION AT RISER MANIFOLD FP101 NOT TO SCALE FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" EXISTING 8" FEBCO MODEL 876 DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH 2 SUPERVISED OS & Y VALVES FINISHED FLOOR EXISTING 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE LEAD -IN MAINTAIN EXISTING INSPECTOR TEST VALVES AND DRAINS RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED CODE CONSULTAN I.VIN 1 K. MA.; & KtVI5IUN5 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR PERMITS 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 12/14/09 2010 46K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 090448.06.000 DRAWN BY: WMA CHECKED BY: DJB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: PROTO "E A DATE: 03/08/10 P � \uAS /��i q�T FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECOR c DAVID DAVID J. BURKHART, PE LICENSE NO. 0030980 �/� �� Gc -z. 4 f 1804EBORMAN CIRCLE OR. �0� R0030980 Tl- �0 ���� ST. LOUIS, MO 63146 -4136 S /ONAL�`�G PHONE: 314-991-2633 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY ( NO.1604 To �D s 129 D Leo STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA; WA DRAWING TITLE FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN, NOTES AND DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. P101 o q O VQ I/ok QQ �� ``, ' ) � Vp �4 mop J. 1,s /.� �Q /�� ��� �� VJ\ �s i.��� � .z 6. �vVJ� �V� ����� FIRE ALARM MATRIX s �p ��, �� =Q 4, co J�4 Cv p� Q� QQ O ''::;:;;:'' p k VQ \ : J O, , /. V ? oQ . q- �JQ4�� Jq) ,.gyp OJT (.) e5 vo� s k p g 4- k el co co - 4 V �o�Q Q Q �� �Qg kQG QV Q Q2 ���o Qv II NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR PERMITS 03/09/10 R BIDS ISSUED FOR FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS - WATERFLOW SWITCH • • • • • • - CONTROL VALVE TAMPER SWITCH • • • MANUAL PULL STATIONS • • • • • • NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 12/14/09 2010 46K REV. 0 SMOKE DETECTION DEVICES - ABOVEFACP • • • • • • LOSS OF PRIMARY POWER AT THE FACP OR APS BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 090448.07.000 DRAWN BY: JLS CHECKED BY: DJB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: PROTOTYPE ‚1Lw4 DATE: 03/08/10 ..- OY ,,__ - -1/,t, 1%. FIRE PROTECTION ' . f, /p--` C; ENGINEER OF RECORD " DAVID J. BURKHART, PE% LICENSE NO.0030980 .. •�'i r CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. 1 D �FC�S098R :0:: y ST.LOUIS MO 63146 4136 ASS /ONAL PHONE: 314-991-2633 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY N �� NO.1604 3 • • • ED S ,_es .'f) STORE SUPPORT ONE GEOFFREY WAYNE, NJ 07470 U2 uo, CENTER WAY THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW WA I LA, DRAWING TITLE FIRE ALARM PLAN NOTES AND DETAILS SCALE AS INDICATED ISSUE DATE DECEMBER 14, 2009 SHEET NO. A101 ABNORMAL CIRCUIT OR DEVICE • • • C2) 38' -0" 38' -0" 38' -0" FIRESTOP NOTES 1. ALL THROUGH - PENETRATIONS OF FIRE -RATED WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE - STOPPED. 2. FIRE -RATED GYPSUM BOARD WALLS CONSTRUCTED AS DESCRIBED IN THE INDIVIDUAL U300 OR U400 SERIES DESIGNS IN THE U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY (GENERALLY DOUBLE THICKNESS WALLBOARD) SHALL BE FIRE - STOPPED WITH U.L. SYSTEMS. 3. ALL REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT OR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE FLOORS OR WALLS, AND ALL U.L. CLASSIFIED CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS SHALL BE FIRE - STOPPED WITH U.L. SYSTEMS. FIREPROOFING NOTES 1. INSTALL ALL HANGERS, CLAMPS, CONDUIT, AND BACK BOXES FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF FIREPROOFING ON STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 2. INSTALL ALL HANGERS, CLAMPS, AND BACK BOXES FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ON THE EDGE OF ANY JOIST REQUIRING FIREPROOFING. BACK BOXES SHALL BE FASTENED TO THE FLANGE OF THE JOIST UTILIZING BEAM CLAMPS, AND SHALL NOT BE ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO THE JOIST. 3. ANY DAMAGE TO FIREPROOFING ON THE BUILDING STRUCTURE AS A RESULT OF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION SHALL BE REPAIRED BY A QUALIFIED FIREPROOFING CONTRACTOR. ALL DAMAGE AND REPAIR OF FIREPROOFING SHALL BE REPORTED TO AND COORDINATED THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL FIREPROOFING REPAIRS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 4. VERIFY THE LOCATIONS OF ALL FIREPROOFING, PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF ANY FIRE ALARM CONDUIT AND BACKBOXES. 37' -11" 38' -3" - F(AV06) L J CO _ B.O.D. = 21' -8" B.O.D. = 22'-4" B.O.D. = 23' -4" B.O.D. = 24' -1" B.O.D. = 25 -0" 136 F(AV04) AVO4 75 AVO4 75 AVO4 75 L J • • VC) r VO4) R M IMM`' M 04) VO . -_ Diu III '- MI Lau •EIN_ZIMPAII a. ' ����idiill MIN 1 5 AV AV06 115: tre CO CO F(AV06) C7 co A VO6 75 1F(AVOI AVO6 (AV04) CO CO c) E(DL) AVO2 - 2F(AV03 -04) CD CO AVO3 115 115 F(AV02) A‘ AV02 115 F(AV02) t2F(AV03 -04) CO CO ®AVO2 115 AV AVO3 KlY115 m N (AV02) CD CD CD co co 75 INSTALLATION NOTES . THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GC) IS ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AS DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND ON THESE DRAWINGS. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR IS TO BE CONTRACTED THROUGH THE GC. THE OWNER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY PART OF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. SEE WIRING LEGEND FOR CABLE TYPES AND SIZES. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA STANDARDS AND ALL LOCAL ADOPTED CODES. . CABLE ROUTING SHOWN ON DRAWINGS IS FOR INTENT. EXACT ROUTING SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES IN THE FIELD. FOLLOW SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWING NOTES FOR SPECIFIC AND ACCEPTABLE INSTALLATION METHODS. . ALL CABLE RUNS SHALL BE NEATLY BUNDLED, WRAPPED TIGHT AND PROPERLY SECURED. ANY CABLING NOT INSTALLED IN A NEAT AND PROFESSIONAL MANNER SHALL BE PULLED OUT AND RE -RUN BY INSTALLER AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. . CONTRACTOR RUNNING CABLING MUST MARK BOTH ENDS OF CABLING, PROVIDE A WIRE LEGEND FOR ALL LOCATIONS, AND PROVIDE A CONTINUITY TEST LOG FOR EACH CABLE. EXPOSED CABLING SHALL BE RUN PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO STRUCTURE. EXPOSED CABLING SHALL NOT BE RUN IN A "SPAN" FASHION BETWEEN BAR JOISTS OR BEAMS (I.E.: CABLING SHALL BE ROUTED ALONG PATH OF JOISTS AND BEAMS). ALL CABLING SHALL BE SECURED TO THE STRUCTURAL CEILING BETWEEN JOISTS OR BEAMS, AND AS INDICATED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 16F. ALL CABLING SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE AND NOT FROM GRID, TILES OR SUPPORT WIRES. EXPOSED CABLING SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY BUILDING STRUCTURE AT NO MORE THAN FIVE (5) FOOT INTERVALS. PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED CONDUIT, BACK BOXES, AND FITTINGS FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CABLING. 10. PROVIDE RED JUNCTION BOX COVERS FOR ALL SYSTEM BOXES. ALL JUNCTION BOXES AND CABLE SPLICES SHALL BE IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS. PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED ACCESS PANELS. 11. ALL CABLING IN ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL ROOMS, AND AREAS SUBJECT TO PHYSICAL DAMAGE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EMT CONDUIT. 12. FIRE ALARM CABLING SHALL NOT BE PAINTED. 13. ALL WIRING CONDUCTORS FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEVEN (7) FEET OR LESS ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR, CONCEALED IN CEILINGS OR PARTITIONS, SUBJECT TO PHYSICAL DAMAGE, NON -POWER LIMITED, OR WHERE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. 14. ALL FIRE ALARM CABLING RISERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EMT CONDUIT. 15. COORDINATE DRILLING OF ANY HOLES (I.E. COLUMN PENETRATIONS) WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ALL OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE TO DRILL A SINGLE 1/2" HOLE IN THE UPPER AND LOWER THIRD OF THE COLUMN. HOWEVER, THE MIDDLE THIRD OF ANY COLUMN SHALL NOT BE DRILLED. 16. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTRACT AND COORDINATE THE SERVICES OF A BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS CERTIFIED SECURITY DEALER (BCSD) FOR THE PURPOSE OF INSTALLING, PROGRAMMING AND TESTING OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL AS WELL AS TESTING OF THE COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. IN THE SPECIFIC INSTANCE WHEN THE FAC CANNOT LOCATE A BCSD IN THE AREA, CONTACT WAYNE BIDWELL WITH BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS BY PHONE AT (734) 255 -5500 FOR COORDINATION. 17. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE SERVICES OF A TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE FROM VECTOR SECURITY FOR THE SOLE PURPOSE OF ESTABLISHING MONITORING WITH THE UL LISTED OFF -SITE MONITORING STATION. CONTACT ERICKA MACLEOD, WITH VECTOR SECURITY, BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 8 AM AND 5 PM EST BY PHONE AT (703) 369 -1444 EXT. 51150 OR BY FAX AT (206) 339 -3594 FOR COORDINATION. 18. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL FAX THE FIRE ALARM PANEL WORKSHEET TO THE VECTOR SECURITY TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE A MINIMUM OF FIVE (5) BUSINESS DAYS BEFORE THE SYSTEM IS SCHEDULED TO GO ON -LINE. THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, INCLUSIVE OF TELEPHONE CONNECTIONS, SHALL BE INSTALLED AND WORKING PRIOR TO CONTACTING VECTOR SECURITY. CONTACT VECTOR SECURITY AGAIN ON THE MORNING OF, OR THE DAY BEFORE, THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS SCHEDULED TO GO ON -LINE. 19. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TRAINING OF AVAILABLE TRU -BRU STORE MANAGEMENT STAFF ON SYSTEM OPERATION. OAV03 115 Cs co M F(AV02) F(AV06) 137 E(DL) AVO1 to M 0 0'J 1 115 CD co E(DL) F(AVOt)- EIL)AVO1 0 115 (DL) FtAV01) fl CD 1n M c9 0, i El Ak) FIRE ALARM PLAN - SCALE: 1/16" =1' -0" QAV01 115 2 CD co M FA101 F(AVEX) nab AVO6 75 F(AV06) 2E(DL) AVO6 115 135 2F(AV03 -04i ® AVO2 75 CD CD M C3 (0 67A AVO3 115 CO CO N 2F(AV03 -04) 2E-(D )- F(AVC6) 1 CO W21 (AV02) 0 Co N -C7 co AV+ 75 WP 0 111 D E(D) D(AN) _co F(A EX) E(DL) 2E(AV05) H a AVO2 75 W21 2E(DL) 2F(AV05- 5) 3F(AV02 -34) 0 AVO5 115 AVO5 75 D(AN) v ° n e AV O5) a E(DL) AVEX W2 �\ CO CO N 133 D(AN) 4111111111111 D(AN) i MI 1 2E DL) E(DL) (DL) - •I 2F(AV05) 2F(AV05) \J�� F�AVEX) `\ ; =I •�rry F(AVEX) 0 2E(DL) 2F(AV05- 0 2E(DL) 1 2F(AV05-06 AVO5 75 r d B.O.D. = 21-10" B.O.D. = 22' -9" B.O.D. = 23' -8" B.O.D. = 24' -6" B.O.D. = 25' -4" 1C Cr4-- DL) AV05 -06) GENERAL NOTES 1. COORDINATE CONNECTION OF SPRINKLER WATERFLOW SWITCHES, TAMPER SWITCHES & BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVE TAMPER SWITCHES WITH THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE CABLING FROM FACP TO SPRINKLER SWITCHES, FINAL WIRING TERMINATIONS AT SWITCHES, AND SUPERVISION OF ALL WIRING CONNECTIONS. COORDINATE WITH SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY A THIRTY (30) SECOND RETARD ON FLOW SWITCHES. 2. DUCT DETECTORS ARE NOT REQUIRED ON THE ROOF TOP UNITS THAT ARE INCAPABLE OF SPREADING SMOKE BEYOND THE ENCLOSING WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS SERVED BY THE UNIT. 3. MOUNT SMOKE DETECTORS AT THE CEILING /DECK, AND NOT ON THE BOTTOMS OF BEAMS OR JOISTS. LOCATE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS A MINIMUM OF THREE (3) FEET FROM ANY MECHANICAL DIFFUSERS, AND AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 72. COORDINATE SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATIONS WITH LIGHTING, MECHANICAL, SPRINKLER, & BACKGROUND MUSIC EQUIPMENT. 4. SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL AFTER THE CONSTRUCTION CLEAN -UP OF ALL TRADES IS COMPLETE AND FINAL. 5. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF ALL DEVICES WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL FIXTURE PLANS, OWNER, AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 6. PROVIDE TWO (2) MEANS OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TO THE VECTOR SECURITY OFF -SITE MONITORING FACILITY FOR MONITORING OF GENERAL ALARM, SUPERVISORY, AND TROUBLE CONDITIONS. 7. PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED SEISMIC BRACING FOR ALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICES, CONDUIT, AND BACKBOXES. KEYED NOTES 0 COORDINATE CONNECTIONS TO DEDICATED 120 VAC POWER CIRCUITS TO THE FACP, EACH APS, AND CPS. IDENTIFY THE LOCATION OF THE CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AT THE ASSOCIATED FACP AND APS. LABEL THE DEDICATED CIRCUITS "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT(S) ". PROVIDE TWENTY -FOUR (24) HOUR BATTERY BACKUP IN THE FACP AND EACH APS. COORDINATE ALL CONNECTIONS WITH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. co COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING LOCATION OF FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING E01. 03 PROVIDE DEDICATED PHONE WIRING FROM FACP TO MAIN TERMINAL BOARD FOR PRIMARY AND SECONDARY OFF -SITE MONITORING. COORDINATE FINAL CONNECTIONS ON MAIN TERMINAL BOARD. 0 0 PROVIDE A REMOTE FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR (FAAN) AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND AS INDICATED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 16F. COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING LOCATION OF FAAN WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND AHJ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PROVIDE A SIGNAL TO SHUTDOWN THE STORE BACKGROUND MUSIC SOUND SYSTEM UPON ACTIVATION OF A FIRE ALARM CONDITION. PROVIDE CABLING FROM FACP TO BACKGROUND MUSIC SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLLER, AND SUPERVISION OF ALL WIRING CONNECTIONS. COORDINATE INTERFACE CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOUND SYSTEMS CONTRACTOR. ® MOUNT THE EXTERIOR WATERFLOW NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE ABOVE THE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION AT TEN (10) FEET ABOVE GRADE. COORDINATE THE EXACT MOUNTING LOCATION WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND AHJ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 0 MOUNT SMOKE DETECTOR ON THE BOTTOM OF THE CEILING /DECK (NOT ON THE BOTTOM OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS) AND LOCATED MORE THAN THREE (3) FEET FROM AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS, AS INDICATED IN NFPA 72. COORDINATE SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATIONS WITH LIGHTING, MECHANICAL, AND SPRINKLERS. 08 DUCT DETECTORS ARE NOT REQUIRED PER THE EXCEPTION IN SECTION 606.2 OF THE 2003 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC). THE RTUS ARE NOT CABLE OF SPREADING SMOKE BEYOND THE ENCLOSING WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILING. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE COVERS ON ALL COMMON AREA PULL STATIONS. PROVIDE COVERS WITH INTEGRAL HORN. (AN) (DL) 4F(AV01 -0 2F(AV05) F(AVEX) ENLARGED TELCO ROOM 1 FIRE ALARM PLAN 2 411)i - FA101 SCALE: 1/4" =1' -O" FA101 NEW 8" FEED MAIN TO TOY R US NEW PRESSURE GAUGE TIE NEW 2" DRAIN INTO EXISTING DRAIN LINE RELOCATED EXISTING 2" DRAIN RELOCATED EXISTING FLOW SWITCH 4 - 2 1/2" FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVES WITH CAPS AND CHAINS FOR TESTING OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER EXISTING 2" PIPED TO STANDPIPE DRAIN EXISTING 2" DRAIN VALVE FIRE ALARM SYMBOL KEY FACP FAAN IOM FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (BOSCH FPD -7024) FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR (BOSCH FMR -7036) AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (WHEELOCK PS- 24 -8MP) ADDRESSABLE INPUT MODULE (BOSCH D7044 OR D7052) ADDRESSABLE INPUT /OUTPUT MODULE (BOSCH D7053) MANUAL PULL STATION (BOSCH FMM- 7045 -D) WITH PROTECTIVE COVERS PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR (BOSCH D7050) FLOW SWITCH (BY OTHERS) TAMPER SWITCH (BY OTHERS) HIGH/LOW AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (BY OTHERS) XX WALL MOUNTED AUDIBLENISUAL APPLIANCE (XX INDICATES CANDELA RATING) (WHEELOCK AS- 24MCW -FR) (RED IN COLOR) EDXX WALL MOUNTED VISUAL APPLIANCE (XX INDICATES CANDELA RATING) II._ (WHEELOCK RSS- 24MCW -FR) (RED IN COLOR) AV XX CEILING MOUNTED AUDIBLENISUAL APPLIANCE ()0X INDICATES CANDELA RATING) (WHEELOCK AS- 24MCC -FW) (WHITE IN COLOR) OXX CEILING MOUNTED VISUAL APPLIANCE (XX INDICATES CANDELA RATING) (WHEELOCK RSS- 24MCC -FW) (WHITE IN COLOR) WP XX WEATHERPROOF EXTERIOR AUDIBLENISUAL APPLIANCE (XX INDICATES CANDELA RATING) (WHEELOCK ASWP- 2475W -FR) (RED IN COLOR) FIRE ALARM CONDUCTORS END OF LINE RESISTOR WIRING LEGEND CONDUCTOR TYPE: D= 18/4FPL E =18 /2FPL F =14 /2FPL G = AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER H = 18/2 FPL WET LOCATION CONDUCTOR TYPE INDICATES TYPE OF CIRCUIT (VISUAL, AUDIBLE, ZONE, ETC.) E(DL) REFER TO LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS CIRCUIT DESIGNATION: DL = DATA LOOP CIRCUIT ZN = INITIATION ZONE CIRCUIT AV = NOTIFICATION CIRCUIT AN = ANNUNCIATOR KEYPAD CIRCUIT PW = LOW VOLTAGE POWER RT = REMOTE TEST STATION POWER RC = RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SU = SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT D(AN) E(DL) (AVEX) aF ENLARGED FIRE SPRINKLER RISER ROOM FIRE ALARM PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0" EXISTING 8" FEED MAIN TO TOYS R US EXISTING 4" FEED MAIN TO EXISTING FRONT CANOPY DRY PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM / NEW ECS RISER MOUNT CORROSION MONITORING STATION WITH CORROSION MONITORING PROBE (DCMP -2) (TYP.) EXISTING PRESSURE GAUGE 144 EXISTING 4" DRY PIPE VALVE EXISTING 4" SUPERVISED INDICATING BUTTERFLY VALVE TIAI/' (," n TING V LVE E(DL) RELOCATED 8" SUPERVISED WALL POST INDICATING VALVE U Ls2 u� E(SU) II II NEW PIPE STAND NEW 6" FEED FROM EXISTING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (EXISTING 6" CHECK VALVE IN HORIZONTAL PLAN EXISTING 8" U.G. ABANDONED FIRE SERVICE MAIN } EXISTING PIPE STAND ET3 RELOCATE EXISTING 8" ELBOW WITH NEW 8" TEE DISCONNECT AND CAP EXISTING 6" FEED FROM FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION EXISTING 8" FEBCO MODEL 876 DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH 2 SUPERVISED OS & Y VALVES FINISHED FLOOR EXISTING 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE LEAD -IN FIRE ALARM ELEVATION 3 AT RISER MANIFOLD FA101 SCALE: 3/8" =1' -0" MAINTAIN EXISTING INSPECTOR TEST VALVES AND DRAINS CO v W c. T LLI 1 C.3 CO • H CC E CO C/3 °5a cn co l-- 1- ✓ y co SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED www.codeconsultants.com CODE CONSULTANTS, k.vIN0 1 r\. L.A.-A./ a F« V IJIVINJ II NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR PERMITS 03/09/10 R BIDS ISSUED FOR PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 12/14/09 2010 46K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 090448.07.000 DRAWN BY: JLS CHECKED BY: DJB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: PROTOTYPE ‚1Lw4 DATE: 03/08/10 ..- OY ,,__ - -1/,t, 1%. FIRE PROTECTION ' . f, /p--` C; ENGINEER OF RECORD " DAVID J. BURKHART, PE% LICENSE NO.0030980 .. •�'i r CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. 1 D �FC�S098R :0:: y ST.LOUIS MO 63146 4136 ASS /ONAL PHONE: 314-991-2633 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY N �� NO.1604 3 lir. D D ED S ,_es .'f) STORE SUPPORT ONE GEOFFREY WAYNE, NJ 07470 U2 uo, CENTER WAY THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW WA I LA, DRAWING TITLE FIRE ALARM PLAN NOTES AND DETAILS SCALE AS INDICATED ISSUE DATE DECEMBER 14, 2009 SHEET NO. A101 AUDIBLE CIRCUIT . WP o AC POWER 3 AC POWER 2 NC AC POWER 1 311; RIC 0J NAC 1+ NAC 1 -0 NAC 24 > NAC 2 -0 BAT- ` > BAT+ DD0000000Dod L4,1 0 0 ° O O 0 ° ° Oo D7039 MUX EXPANSION MODULE l0000l c :007. ❑ Power El Trouble 0 ❑ Alarm ❑ Silenced SYSTEM NORMAL BOSCH D7024 1 4 Clear 5 Prog 6 Cmnd Drill Disable Test History Silence Reset O O FPD -7024 ffAMOVA .A.A.A.A. AWAMOVA ..A.A.A.A D7034 CONNECTOR ONLY .A.A.A.A. OWIAROW .AWAY. OWFAMOW .A.A.A.A. R2 HR2 HT2 T2 R1 RH1 TH1 T1 NC2 COM2 NO2 NC1 COM1 NO1 SMK+ SMK- AUX+ AUX- 12a C +1 C +1 EARTH GROUND- 4- L+ 3- 2- L+ 1- C +1 C +1 RA BA GA YA RB BB GB YB v r4 SEE NOTE 1 1 SEE NOTE 3 BATTERY (SEE BATTERY CALCULATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS) BATTERY (SEE BATTERY CALCULATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS) SECONDARY PHONE CONNECTION AVEX AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (APS) (PS -24 -8MP) PRIMARY PHONE CONNECTION AUXILIARY RELAY AUXILIARY RELAY SEE NOTE 7 I IOM SWITCHED SMOKE POWER PO NTS 1- 4 POWER LIMITED 24v INITIATING LOOPS 0 I/O MODULE FOR THE 0 D7039 MUX EXPANSION .� MODULE 0 0 Qa Qa Qa NOTES: MUX Bus "A" IOM NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 NAC 4 +• +• +• + 120 VAC DEDICATED CIRCUIT 1 SYNC MODULE (INTEGRAL TO APS) HORN SEE NOTE 6 CONTROL • ZONE 1 • IN "• ZONE 2 • IN ZONE1 OUT ZONE 2 OUT • - MULTI -SYNC MULTI -SYNC • •+ SLAVE (IN) SLAVE (OUT) +• TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY SYNC MODULE (INTEGRAL TO APS) HORN SEE NOTE 6 CONTROL ZONEI • ZONE 1 IN • • ZONE 2 IN -• - MULTI -SYNC •+ SLAVE (IN) OUT ZONE 2 OUT MULTI -SYNC -•-- SLAVE (OUT) 4. TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY ^L. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (APS) (PS -24 -8MP) NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 NAC 4 RED GRN L SILENCE FPD -7036 RESET) +• + ••■ 120 VAC DEDICATED CIRCUIT SYNC MODULE (INTEGRAL TO APS) HORN SEE NOTE 6 ONTROL ZONE 1 OUT ZONE 1 • IN • ZONE 2 • IN ZONE 2 OUT -• MULTI -SYNC MULTI-SYNC SLAVE (IN) SLAVE (OUT) +.- TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY SYNC MODULE (INTEGRAL TO APS) =I HORN SEE NOTE 6 CONTROL ZONE 1 1. CONNECT PRIMARY SIDE OF TRANSFORMER TO DEDICATED 120 VAC, 60 HZ CIRCUIT USING WIRE NUTS. CONNECT EARTH GROUND TO THREADED GROUND STUD ON LEFT SIDE OF ENCLOSURE. 2. PROVIDE ZONE LISTING IN PANEL. 3. PROVIDE CUSTOM "P- TOUCH" LABELS ON SURFACE OF PANEL TO INCLUDE: ALARM SILENCE CODE, RESET CODE, TROUBLE SILENCE CODE, HVAC RESET CODE, ETC. 4. PROVIDE SYNCHRONIZATION ON ALL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS. 5. PROVIDE A MULTI -SYNC MODE SLAVE CONNECTION TO ALL SYNCHRONIZATION MODULES ON ALL APS'S. 6. SYNC MODULES ARE INTEGRAL TO APS. NON- INTEGRAL SYNC MODULES ARE ACCEPTABLE. 7. PROVIDE ADDRESSABLE INPUT /OUTPUT MODULE (IOM) FOR ACTIVATION OF AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (APS) AND FOR MONITORING OF TROUBLE CONDITIONS ON APS. 8. PROVIDE THE SERVICE PHONE NUMBER STICKER ON THE SURFACE OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. 9. PROVIDE THE ASSOCIATED PHONE NUMBER WRITTEN DIRECTLY ON THE RJ -31X BOXES. 10. PROVIDE A COPY OF THE FIRE ALARM ZONE LIST POSTED ADJACENT TO THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. 11. IF REQURIED BY THE AHJ, PROVIDE SUFFICIENT CIRCUITS AND MODULES TO CONTROL AUDIBLE APPLIANCES SEPARATELY FROM VISUAL APPLIANCES. PROVIDE "ON- UNTIL - SILENCE" PROGRAMMING FOR AUDIBLE APPLIANCES, AND "ON- UNTIL - RESET" FOR VISUAL APPLIANCES. NOTES: FIRE ALARM PANEL LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE 1 \ 1 \ 1 \_1 \ l 1J,1 \ I \ 1 1.1 1. ALL OPEN FIRE ALARM CABLING SHALL BE CONCEALED FROM PUBLIC VIEW. OPEN FIRE ALARM CABLING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SYMBOL LEGEND: C = LIGHT OUTPUT (CANDELA) AT ANGLE 6 FOR WHEELOCK STROBES (BASED ON CUT SHEETS) 6 = ANGLE OFF THE AXIS D = DISTANCE FROM SOURCE (FEET) L = LIGHT INTENSITY (MINIMUM 0.0375 LUMENS /SQUARE FOOT) (NFPA 72, 1999 APPENDIX SECTION A- 4- 4.4.1.1(1)) X = HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OFF THE AXIS (FEET) H = VERTICAL DISTANCE OF LIGHT SOURCE FROM FLOOR (FEET) EQUATIONS: 6 = tan '\ H X= DZ- HZ L = p2 >> .0375 % / / / % / % % / //% z / HORIZONTAL PLANE X FIRE ALARM CABLING DISTANCE CHART H (FEET) X (FEET) 15 CD 30 CD 75 CD 95 CD 115 CD 177 CD 8 13.9 17.2 29.9 29.9 29.9 45.4 9 12.9 19.3 33.6 33.6 33.6 51.0 10 14.3 17.3 37.3 37.3 37.3 37.3 11 13.1 19.1 30.2 41.1 41.1 41.1 12 12.0 20.8 25.7 44.8 44.8 44.8 13 13.0 18.6 27.9 35.7 35.7 48.5 14 11.7 20.0 30.0 38.5 38.5 52.2 15 10.5 17.9 32.2 32.2 41.2 41.2 16 11.2 19.1 27.7 34.3 34.3 44.0 17 9.8 17.0 29.4 36.5 36.5 46.7 18 8.4 18.0 31.2 38.6 38.6 49.5 19 8.9 15.9 27.1 32.9 40.7 52.2 20 7.3 16.8 28.6 34.6 34.6 42.9 21 7.6 17.6 30.0 36.4 36.4 45.0 22 5.9 15.4 31.4 38.1 38.1 47.2 23 2.0 16.1 27.4 32.8 39.8 49.3 24 N/A 13.9 28.6 34.3 34.3 51.5 25 N/A 14.4 29.8 35.7 35.7 43.3 26 N/A 12.1 26.0 37.1 37.1 45.0 27 N/A 12.6 27.0 38.6 38.6 46.8 28 N/A 10.2 28.0 33.4 40.0 40.0 29 N/A 10.6 24.3 34.6 34.6 41.4 30 N/A 10.9 25.2 30.0 35.8 42.8 CEILING MOUNTED STROBE DISTANCE CALCULATIONS NOT TO SCALE WHEELOCK TABLE FOR CANDELA OUTPUT ANGLE 15 CD 30 CD 75 CD 95 CD 115 CD 177 CD 0 20.5 43.3 102.6 146.0 166.7 230.8 5 20.5 43.3 102.6 146.0 161.7 230.8 10 20.1 43.0 102.0 145.0 155.8 217.0 15 20.2 42.7 102.0 145.0 152.3 215.6 20 18.8 40.0 97.1 134.1 140.5 198.1 25 16.9 35.0 85.5 121.3 129.5 185.4 30 15.3 32.7 80.0 111.6 117.4 165.8 35 14.8 31.1 74.0 106.3 109.4 157.4 40 14.1 29.0 70.6 100.7 101.5 152.8 45 12.8 25.9 62.3 90.7 95.3 144.3 50 11.3 23.3 57.1 81.2 86.3 131.1 55 11.9 23.8 57.7 84.5 95.4 141.1 60 11.3 22.3 52.2 78.1 86.1 117.3 65 10.1 20.9 48.9 69.1 82.5 127.0 70 9.7 19.8 44.7 64.7 78.1 127.2 75 12.3 25.0 57.8 81.7 81.3 124.0 80 10.6 21.9 51.3 69.4 75.1 101.0 85 5.4 12.1 28.7 37.2 47.2 69.5 90 7.6 16.6 39.8 49.7 40.5 61.4 • ZONE 1 IN = • ZONE 2 IN - MULTI -SYNC + SLAVE (IN) OUT ZONE 2 OUT MULTI -SYNC -•-- SLAVE (OUT) +•--� SEE NOT 5 TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY TYPICAL APPLIANCES ONLY 1 OR 2 HOUR RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLY NOTES: 3M FIRE BARRIER FD -150+ CAULK OR EQUAL CABLE OR CABLE BUNDLE LOAD vs DISTANCE CHART NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS DESCRIPTION APS /CIRCUIT LOCATION MAXIMUM DISTANCE TO LAST APPLIANCE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) 12 AWG (FEET) 14 AWG (FEET) FACP TELCO ROOM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY CURRENT PER DEVICE (mA) AVEX EXTERIOR CIRCUIT 0.168 5,923 3,732 FPD -7024 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 1 200 200 APS #1 TELCO ROOM D7039 AVO1 FRONT OFFICE AREA 1.665 685 430 AVO2 SALES FLOOR AREA 1.665 • 685 430 AVO3 SALES FLOOR AREA 1.665 685 430 AVO4 SALES FLOOR AREA 1.272 896 563 0.55 3.85 0.55 3.85 STANDBY mAH APS #2 TELCO ROOM SMOKE DETECTOR 1 0.50 AVO5 SALES FLOOR AREA 1.132 1,007 633 AVO6 SALES /PRE -SALES AREA 1.414 806 507 AVO7 PRE -SALES AREA 0 0 0 AVO8 SPARE 0 0 0 NOTES: APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NAC) DESIGNED FOR A MAXIMUM 2.0 AMPS, 4.4 VDC DROP, AND MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE OF 16.0 VDC. ALL VOLTAGE DROP AND POWER REQUIREMENTS. HAVE BEEN DESIGNED BASED UPON WHEELOCK CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE CRITERIA. IF ALTERNATE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES PROVIDE REVISED POWER AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS CIRCUITS. MAXIMUM DISTANCE WITHOUT INCREASING CONDUCTOR SIZE. 1. NOTIFICATION A MAXIMUM 2. FIELD VERIFY 3. NAC CIRCUITS CURRENT ARE INSTALLED, FOR ALL 4. DO NOT EXCEED CEILING 22' -0" (264 ") TO 19' -0" (228 ") CEILING MOUNTED (SEE NOTE 4) SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 5 10' -0" (120 ") 6' -8" (80") CEILING MOUNTED (SEE NOTE 2) 4, -9" (57 ") FACP FAAN IMO SEE NOTE 1 BATTERY CALCULATIONS (BOSCH FPD -7024) NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II STANDBY POWER IN ALARM ISSUED FOR PERMITS MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY CURRENT PER DEVICE (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) , CURRENT PER DEVICE (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) STANDBY BATTERIES (12 VOLT) CURRENT (mA) FPD -7024 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 1 200 200 380 380 D7039 MULTIPLEX EXPANSION MODULE 1 150 150 150 150 STANDBY CURRENT 438.50 FMR -7036 FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR 1 80 80 100 100 HOURS 24 FMM- 7045 -D MANUAL PULL STATION 7 0.55 3.85 0.55 3.85 STANDBY mAH 10,524 D7050 SMOKE DETECTOR 1 0.50 0.50 0.56 0.56 ALARM CURRENT 806.56 D7052 INPUT MODULE 5 0.55 2.75 0.55 2.75 HOURS 0.083 D7053 INPUT /OUTPUT MODULE 2 0.70 1.40 0.70 1.40 ALARM mAH 67 • TOTAL mAH 10,591 WHEELOCK APPLIANCE CIRCUIT AVEX 1 0 0 168 168 TOTAL AH 10.6 PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 CONTINGENCY 20% BATTERY TOTAL (AH) 12.7 TOTAL 438.50 806.56 BATTERY PROVIDED (AH) 18 NOTES: LISTED FOR REQUIRED BATTERY CAPACITY. BATTERY CABINETS LISTED FOR FIRE ALARM USE. 1. PROVIDE BATTERY CHARGER 2. PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED BATTERY CALCULATIONS - WHEELOCK APS (PS -24 -8MP) NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II STANDBY POWER IN ALARM ISSUED FOR PERMITS MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY CURRENT PER CIRCUIT (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) CURRENT PER CIRCUIT (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) STANDBY BATTERIES (12 VOLT) CURRENT (mA) PS -24 -8MP AUX. POWER SUPPLY (APS) #1 1 60 60 100 100 WHEELOCK APPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO1 1 0 0 1,665 1,665 STANDBY CURRENT 60 WHEELOCK APPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO2 1 0 0 1,665 1,665 HOURS 24 WHEELOCKAPPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO3 1 0 0 1,665 1,665 STANDBYmAH 1,440 WHEELOCKAPPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO4 1 0 0 1,272 1,272 ALARM CURRENT 6,367 HOURS 0.083 ALARM mAH 528 TOTAL mAH 1,968 TOTAL AH 2.0 PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 CONTINGENCY 20% BATTERY TOTAL (AH) 2.4 TOTAL 60 6,367 BATTERY PROVIDED (AH) 7 BATTERY CALCULATIONS - WHEELOCK APS (PS -24 -8MP) NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II STANDBY POWER IN ALARM ISSUED FOR PERMITS MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY CURRENT PER CIRCUIT (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) CURRENT PER CIRCUIT (mA) TOTAL CURRENT (mA) STANDBY BATTERIES (12 VOLT) CURRENT (mA) PS -24 -8MP AUX. POWER SUPPLY (APS) #2 1 60 60 100 100 WHEELOCKAPPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO5 1 0 0 1,132 1,132 STANDBY CURRENT 60 WHEELOCKAPPLIANCES CIRCUIT AVO6 1 0 0 1,414 1,414 HOURS 24 WHEELOCKAPPLIANCES SPARE 0 0 0 0 0 STANDBYmAH 1,440 WHEELOCK APPLIANCES SPARE 0 0 0 0 0 ALARM CURRENT 2,646 HOURS 0.083 ALARM mAH 220 TOTAL mAH 1,660 TOTAL AH 1.7 PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 CONTINGENCY 20% BATTERY TOTAL (AH) 2.0 TOTAL 60 2,646 BATTERY PROVIDED (AH) 7 MAXIMUM 4' -0" (48 ") MINIMUM 3' -6" (42 ") FINISHED FLOOR NOTES: 1. MEASURED TO THE OPERABLE PART OF THE PULL STATION. 2. LOCATE CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS FLUSH WITH THE CEILING, AS INDICATED IN NFPA 72. 3. MEASURED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE LENS. 4. LOCATE CEILING MOUNTED NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES ON THE BOTTOM OF THE BEAM OR JOIST. 5. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING E01. 6. MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE BACKBOX. 1. CABLES SHALL BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. 2. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN CABLE/CABLE BUNDLE AND PERIPHERY OF OPENING SHALL BE LESS THAN 1 INCH. 3. MAXIMUM OF A 1 INCH DIAMETER CABLE BUNDLE PER FIRESTOP SYSTEM. 4. CAULK MATERIAL - MINIMUM 5/8 INCH THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL APPLIED WITHIN ANNULUS, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF THE WALL. MINIMUM 1/2 INCH DIAMETER BEAD OF CAULK APPLIED AT THE CABLE/WALLBOARD INTERFACE AT POINT CONTACT LOCATION ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL. 5. CONSULT CURRENT U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR DETAILS. FIRE RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD CABLE PENETRATION U.L. W -L -3149 NOT TO SCALE TYPICAL DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 OR 2 HOUR RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1 JJIIII IIIILL 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25WB+ CAULK OR EQUAL 11111mir CONDUIT 1. CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED AT CENTER OF STUD CAVITY WIDTH AND SHALL BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. 2. CAULK FILL MATERIAL SHALL COMPLETELY FILL ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN CONDUIT AND WALL; AND SHALL HAVE A 1/4 INCH DIAMETER BEAD OF CAULK APPLIED TO PERIMETER OF CONDUIT AT ITS EGRESS OF THE WALL. FOR CONDUIT 1 INCH DIAMETER AND SMALLER, THE ANNULAR SPACE SHALL BE LESS THAN 1 -1/2 INCHES . 3. MAXIMUM OF (1) CONDUIT PER FIRESTOP SYSTEM. 4. CONSULT CURRENT U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR DETAILS. FIRE RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONDUIT PENETRATION U.L. W -L -1001 NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1. FOR CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS AND OCCUPANT NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES IN AREAS WITH SUSPENDED CEILINGS. JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 OR 2 HOUR RATED CONCRETE BLOCK WALL ASSEMBLY NOTES: 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25WB+ CAULK OR EQUAL PACKING MATERIAL CONDUIT 1. CONDUIT SHALL BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. 2. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN CONDUIT AND PERIPHERY OF OPENING SHALL BE LESS THAN 1 -3/8 INCHES. 3. MAXIMUM OF (1) CONDUIT PER FIRESTOP SYSTEM. 4. PACKING MATERIAL - MINIMUM 4 INCH THICKNESS OF MINIMUM 8 PCF MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION SHALL BE FIRMLY PACKED INTO OPENING AS A PERMANENT FORM. 5. PACKING MATERIAL SHALL BE RECESSED FROM BOTH SURFACES OF WALL AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE THE REQUIRED THICKNESS OF CAULK MATERIAL. 6. CAULK MATERIAL - MINIMUM 1/2 INCH THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL SHALL BE APPLIED WITHIN THE ANNULUS, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF THE WALL. 7. CONSULT CURRENT U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR DETAILS. FIRE RATED CONCRETE BLOCK WALL CONDUIT PENETRATION U.L. C -AJ -1045 NOT TO SCALE ti CODE CONSULTANTS, RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED VVI1%.7 1 FN. LJVV a RG V IOIVIVJ NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR PERMITS 03/09/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 12/14/09 2010 46K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/10 PROJECT NO.: 090448.07.000 DRAWN BY: JLS CHECKED BY: DJB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: PROTOTYPE All ■Ad DATE: 03/08/10 FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECOR I DAVID J. BURKHART, PE LICENSE NO. 0030980 3' o WA ' /4t 9.P∎ ��� -, Go �,�`_ 2 - ,a CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. � 0030980 O ��� 1804 BORMAN CIRCLE DR. 'cis C�ST�� G1� ST. LOUIS, MO 63146 -4136 SJONAL�. PHONE: 314-991-2633 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY N0.1604 f3 Y ToS ip D o o � j *vS ES 00 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. , LOCATION T U KW WA I LA, DRAWING TITLE FIRE ALARM NOTES AND DETAILS SCALE AS INDICATED ISSUE DATE DECEMBER 14, 2009 HEET NO. A20 1 GENERAL NOTES: 1_ BEFORE SUBMITTING THE BID PROPOSAL, EC SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE & FULLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE JOB CONDITIONS, VERIFY SERVICE CONNECTIONS, INCLUDING ALL NECESSARY PULLBOXES, SIZE & NUMBER OF CONDUITS AND CONDUCTORS, SWITCHGEAR, METERING, CABLE CHARGES, ETC. WHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT BUT REQUIRED BY SERVING UTILITY COMPANY, TO MAKE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING ELECTRICAL SERVICE WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. VERIFY SERVICES AND CHARGES WITH POWER AND TELEPHONE COMPANIES. 2. EC SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH THAT OF ALL OTHERS & SHALL INSTALL LIGHTING FIXTURES SYMMETRICALLY WITH AISLE AND /OR DIMENSIONS AND ACCOMMODATE FIXTURES WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS. PRIOR TO FINISH OF AFFECTED WORK, EC SHALL INSTRUCT THE OWNER AND /OR MANAGER ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 3. EC SHALL VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AND SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ITEMS REQUIRED BY MC FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 4. ALL EXHAUST FANS, TRANSFER FANS, ETC. ARE TO BE ABOVE OFFICE NEAR ROOF. 5. DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SHALL BE INSTALLED ON ALL MOTORS TO COMPLY WITH CODE. 6. ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE "HORSEPOWER RATED" FOR THE MOTOR CONNECTED. 7. ELECTRICAL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH LATEST "N.E.C." AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. IN CASE OF CONFLICT AMONG REQUIREMENTS, THE MORE RESTRICTIVE SHALL APPLY. 8. ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR USE OUTSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. 9. FUSES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY BUSSMAN CO., UNO. 10. GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER "N.E.C." AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 11. THE ONLY CONDUIT PERMITTED ON BUILDING COLUMNS IN THE SALES AREA WILL BE FED FROM ABOVE FOR THE SENSOR, UNO. 12. NO CONDUIT. DISCONNECTS, ETC., SHALL BE ROUTED ACROSS , OR MOUNTED ON, FRONT WALL. CONDUITS SHALL BE ROUTED IN SLAB OR WITHIN WALL OR CHASE. 13. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE #12, 1/2" C. AND ARRANGED PHASE TO NEUTRAL, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED OR AS REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DROP. (SEE SPECS.) 14. ALL CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE , DATA, SECURITY AND LOW VOLTAGE DEVICES SHALL BE RUN CONCEALED IN CMU WALLS OR DRYWALL PARTITIONS, UNO.- 15. EACH ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT SHALL CONSIST OF INDIVIDUAL UNGROUNDED, GROUNDED AND ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS. DO NOT SHARE NEUTRALS OR ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS BETWEEN CIRCUITS. 16. ANY CONDUITS REQUIRED TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON BACK SIDE OF COLUMN (FACING REAR OF STORE.) 17. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING CONDUIT FROM THE KNOX BOX LOCATION INTO THE BUILDING. 18. REFER TO SHEET E102 FOR ADDITIONAL PHOTOCELL ZONE CONTROL INFORMATION. 19. ALL POWER, DATA, AND LV MOUNTED ON SALES AREA COLUMNS SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES W/ WIRING RUN THROUGH COLUMNS. (TYPICAL FOR ALL) DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY ELECTRICAL LEGEND: FURNISHED PRIMARY CONDUIT PRIMARY CONDUCTORS TRANSFORMER PAD BOLLARDS - SECONDARY CONDUIT SECONDARY CONDUCTORS TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS (PRIMARY) TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS (SECONDARY) BUILDING EXTERIOR SERVICE DISCONNECT CT ENCLOSURE CT'S - METER SOCKET METER BY X X X X X X X X X X X X X X INSTALLED FLUORESCENT (UPPERCASE LETTER INDICATES FIXTURE TYPE, NUMBER INDICATES CIRCUIT, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCHING). (PC) PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS A2b 8' -0" LINEAR EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LIGHT (CTR) CUSTOMER CENTER W/ INTEGRAL PRICE CHECKER -- 1 D 4' -0" LINEAR EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LIGHT SINGLE POLE SWITCH - BLACK W/ SS COVER PLATE, MTD 48" A.F.F. SEE SPECIFICATIONS_ 1 8' -0" LINEAR FLUORESCENT LIGHT o WALL MOUNT OCCUPANCY SWITCH, 48" AFF., 30 MINUTE DELAYED "OFF ", #ODS10 -IDI (LEVITON), BY EC. I I 4' -0" LINEAR FLUORESCENT LIGHT I JUNCTION BOX MTD. IN JOIST AREA FOR CONNECTION TO RACKING. CONDUITS CONNECTED BETWEEN SUCH BOXES SHALL BE ROUTED IN JOIST AREA. J ININI 2X4 FLUORESCENT LIGHT ® JUNCTION BOX. GP DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - MTD 15" AFF TO CENTER. U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. P WALL MOUNTED LIGHTING GP QUAD RECEPTACLE - MTD 15" AFF TO CENTER, U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. 0 INCANDESCENT OR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE IG DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISO GND- ORANGE, MTD 15" AFF TO CENTER U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE IG ii QUAD RECEPTACLE, ISO GND -ORANGE, MTD 15" AFF TO CENTER U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. 1 ®( EXIT SIGN diGFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE GFI- BLACK, MTD 15" A.F.F. TO CENTER, U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. Q KEY NOTES GFI di WEATHER PROOF QUAD RECEPTACLE GFI, MTD 15" A.F.F. TO CENTER, U.N.O. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE, COLOR, AND PLATE. PANEL ill EXIT DISCHARGE LIGHTING ii DISCONNECT SWITCH (NON -FUSED EXCEPT AS NOTED) MOTORS TRANSFORMER f 120V FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH. BUSSMAN TYPE SSY OR EQUAL. T PUSH BUTTON- EDWARDS #852 MOUNTED AT 44" AFF AU (1) 3' -0" SECTION OF PLUGMOLD, WIREMOLD #2000GB SERIES WITH RECEPT. 6" OC, WHITE, BY EC. • Tv BUZZER- EDWARDS #340A -G5 YT (2) 3' -0" SECTIONS OF PLUGMOLD MOUNTED BACK TO BACK, WIREMOLD #2000GB SERIES WITH RECEPT. 6" OC, WHITE, BY EC. m CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSOR, SELF- CONTAINED, 277V, 30 MINUTE DELAYED "OFF", #ODSOS -17W (LEVITON). BY EC. NI PROTOTYPE UPDATES POWER POLE AR REVISION DELTA P GENERAL NOTES: 1_ BEFORE SUBMITTING THE BID PROPOSAL, EC SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE & FULLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE JOB CONDITIONS, VERIFY SERVICE CONNECTIONS, INCLUDING ALL NECESSARY PULLBOXES, SIZE & NUMBER OF CONDUITS AND CONDUCTORS, SWITCHGEAR, METERING, CABLE CHARGES, ETC. WHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT BUT REQUIRED BY SERVING UTILITY COMPANY, TO MAKE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING ELECTRICAL SERVICE WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. VERIFY SERVICES AND CHARGES WITH POWER AND TELEPHONE COMPANIES. 2. EC SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH THAT OF ALL OTHERS & SHALL INSTALL LIGHTING FIXTURES SYMMETRICALLY WITH AISLE AND /OR DIMENSIONS AND ACCOMMODATE FIXTURES WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS. PRIOR TO FINISH OF AFFECTED WORK, EC SHALL INSTRUCT THE OWNER AND /OR MANAGER ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 3. EC SHALL VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AND SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ITEMS REQUIRED BY MC FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 4. ALL EXHAUST FANS, TRANSFER FANS, ETC. ARE TO BE ABOVE OFFICE NEAR ROOF. 5. DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SHALL BE INSTALLED ON ALL MOTORS TO COMPLY WITH CODE. 6. ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE "HORSEPOWER RATED" FOR THE MOTOR CONNECTED. 7. ELECTRICAL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH LATEST "N.E.C." AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. IN CASE OF CONFLICT AMONG REQUIREMENTS, THE MORE RESTRICTIVE SHALL APPLY. 8. ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR USE OUTSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. 9. FUSES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY BUSSMAN CO., UNO. 10. GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER "N.E.C." AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 11. THE ONLY CONDUIT PERMITTED ON BUILDING COLUMNS IN THE SALES AREA WILL BE FED FROM ABOVE FOR THE SENSOR, UNO. 12. NO CONDUIT. DISCONNECTS, ETC., SHALL BE ROUTED ACROSS , OR MOUNTED ON, FRONT WALL. CONDUITS SHALL BE ROUTED IN SLAB OR WITHIN WALL OR CHASE. 13. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE #12, 1/2" C. AND ARRANGED PHASE TO NEUTRAL, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED OR AS REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DROP. (SEE SPECS.) 14. ALL CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE , DATA, SECURITY AND LOW VOLTAGE DEVICES SHALL BE RUN CONCEALED IN CMU WALLS OR DRYWALL PARTITIONS, UNO.- 15. EACH ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT SHALL CONSIST OF INDIVIDUAL UNGROUNDED, GROUNDED AND ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS. DO NOT SHARE NEUTRALS OR ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS BETWEEN CIRCUITS. 16. ANY CONDUITS REQUIRED TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON BACK SIDE OF COLUMN (FACING REAR OF STORE.) 17. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING CONDUIT FROM THE KNOX BOX LOCATION INTO THE BUILDING. 18. REFER TO SHEET E102 FOR ADDITIONAL PHOTOCELL ZONE CONTROL INFORMATION. 19. ALL POWER, DATA, AND LV MOUNTED ON SALES AREA COLUMNS SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES W/ WIRING RUN THROUGH COLUMNS. (TYPICAL FOR ALL) KEY NOTES: 1 ALL RTU'S ARE FACTORY FURNISHED WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS, WEATHERPROOF SERVICE RECEPTACLES AND SMOKE DETECTORS. RTU'S ARE FURNISHED WITH "BOTTOM POWER ENTRY' KIT FOR ELECTRICAL FEEDERS. SEPARATE PENETRATION OF ROOF AND ROOF DECK WILL NOT BE REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS WITH RTU INSTALLER. 2 IN DOOR HEADER FOR DOOR OPENER. PROVIDE 4 #12 FROM OPERATOR DOOR ACTUATOR FOR SYSTEM'S LOW VOLTAGE WIRING. CONNECT AS DIRECTED BY DOOR INSTALLER. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTIONS WITH DOOR SYSTEM MANUFACTURER, TYPICAL FOR ALL SLIDING DOORS. 3 EC SHALL PROVIDE ALL WIRING, JUNCTION BOXES AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL SIGNS. SIGNS ARE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. EC SHALL COORDINATE LOCATION OF ROUGH -IN WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. 4 NOT USED 5 EC SHALL KEEP MAIN CONDUIT RUNS AT LEAST 6' -0" FROM MAIN AISLEWAYS, "RACEWAY". MAIN CONDUIT RUNS ACROSS AISLEWAYS SHALL BE RUN PERPENDICULAR AND SHALL NOT RUN PARALLEL DOWN AISLEWAY. 6 PROVIDE NEMA L14 -2R CONNECTOR FOR EACH DECK MOUNTED BIKE LIFT. BIKE LIFT SWITCHES SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED AT 54" AFF TO PLYWOOD, WITH 1" RMC FROM DECK, SEE ARCH. DRAWINGS. 7 NOT USED 8 MOUNT ON EXTERIOR WALL, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EXTERIOR CAMERAS. 9 MOUNT IN JOIST AREA, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PUBLIC VIEW MONITOR. 10 MOUNT ABOVE CEILING, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PUBLIC VIEW MONITOR. 11 EC SHALL CONNECT EF -1 TO MOTOR STARTER. (SEE EMS -1) 12 EC SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCH AT 5' -0" AFF AND MOUNT J -BOX AT 8' -0" AFF ON WALL ABOVE DISC. SWITCH AND CONNECT TO BALER 13 EC SHALL ABANDON EXISTING RTU. REMOVE ALL EXISTING POWER AND CONDUIT. ABBREVIATIONS: AFF AHU BRU EC EF EMS EWC FACP GFI GP IG JB LV MC MDP NL NIC OC OSI PC RGC RMC RTU TRU UH UNO WP W/ ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT BABIES 'R' US ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXHAUST FAN ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GENERAL PURPOSE ISOLATED GROUND JUNCTION BOX LOW VOLTAGE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL NIGHT LIGHT NOT IN CONTRACT ON CENTER OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM PLUMBING CONTRACTOR RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT RIGID METAL CONDUIT ROOF TOP UNIT . TOYS'R' US UNIT HEATER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE - WEATHER PROOF WITH iA 103 BAILER MDP - 50, 52, 54 COMPACTOR ' MDP - 49, 51, 53 1e 0 • O • ELECTRONICS PRE -SAL S 121 / 16 t , N ..1 k -LB -13 '; 1 1 . I ;;- lj i� Ir1 nr 1} g U ` -1 ! MDP –31, 33, 35 1, Ez , • Y'°7 1-t HA - 40j, .�u r y :: e I j I !--119 n =- 'k'• „�.,as_,,_ a r= MDP 226, 28, 30 ; L.1_s_, r q r 1 I ;,,,;„ I LC -31 �. I.. ' I I • " I ( ! I I r- 1 iettil7r –..15 r ; 4 • I. l_ 1 J - u �--!- —= . 1 I- —�, 1 II !is -2'1 J. ur ILi LL LA- RECEIVING 84" 60" 120 it rj PJ — LA' 23 --r— 1 1 1 -,--,r ,// /Ili i 1. .I— ice;- / / lilil /// /. .-/--/--7-7. KY'. ' flUUMN I FACING ?/f I 1 \.1< // /: / /fi / i / ,/ // %/ / j / /a \i' ! LA -21 ! . " /� ..__ MDP - 13,15, 17 r '/i REAR WALL 1 I- V MDP - 38, 40, 42 } • d y f l SALES 101 •.1 Li II -TRE-SALES 11L • 1'17 7 '�';f- i 1- 1 7 s 1 - BIKE LIFT , ,/./ 7' 1 I 1 –u i j/ ./—/-7/4/4,1 j , r / / --, -- �---- r---- -f -- - -}- -- -1L // / , /`t 1 , 1 1 i � /% l • • Lt i— • !_ Li 7 MDP- 14,16,18 1I.!Uft. .. ' /LB - 5' ;OFI /WP tit I hull IL BIKE LIFT T1 6' -6" VVAL 6' -6" 1 11 1 1 BACK SIDq OF 5 REAR W ;ALL 1 I'1 11 "7 ill 1 H ,_ L _ I r! 1 I • "LD -2" & "C -2" "LD -1" & "C=1”-\ (( A MN FACING 1! J III t1 LL i ENTRY j 1 VESTIBULE 1 `162 LC 1 i 1 0 j +Lk i� 1 MDP - 20,22,241 mLL'+o-1 I it !,J ( -9 1 WP LGmeaD-p5-7:12913, Ei),CIBITui4,14.L BIKE LIFT • GFI WP BIKE LIFT LB - 1 1 T-- T 1 i ' BIKE LIFT 1 3 LA -1,3 7 5_ 75 LA - 5, 7 SPRINKLER RISER 110 MANAGER'S OFFICE 111 COUNT sN ROOM 112 Alak PROCESSING \I ROOM "LA" (SECTION 1) "LA" (SECTION 2) \A EMS CABINET 150KVA X -FMR "T -1" MOUNTED ABOVE POWER WALL MAIN SERVICE ENTRANCE "MDP" POWER WALL KEY PLAN = 1/8" = 1' -0" 1 (sl ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E101 SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" PLAN TRUE NORTH EQUIPMENT ROOM 106 107 RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED ' CONSTR. DOU & KEVISIONS DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY II NO. FURNISHED PRIMARY CONDUIT PRIMARY CONDUCTORS TRANSFORMER PAD BOLLARDS - SECONDARY CONDUIT SECONDARY CONDUCTORS TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS (PRIMARY) TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS (SECONDARY) BUILDING EXTERIOR SERVICE DISCONNECT CT ENCLOSURE CT'S - METER SOCKET METER BY X X X X X X X X X X X X X X INSTALLED - BY L LI ABBREVIATIONS C - CONTRACTOR L - LANDLORD U - UTILITY COMPANY ETR - EXISTING TO REMAIN NAME UTILITY COMPANY ADDRESS CITY, STATE ZIP PHONE FAX KEY NOTES: 1 ALL RTU'S ARE FACTORY FURNISHED WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS, WEATHERPROOF SERVICE RECEPTACLES AND SMOKE DETECTORS. RTU'S ARE FURNISHED WITH "BOTTOM POWER ENTRY' KIT FOR ELECTRICAL FEEDERS. SEPARATE PENETRATION OF ROOF AND ROOF DECK WILL NOT BE REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS WITH RTU INSTALLER. 2 IN DOOR HEADER FOR DOOR OPENER. PROVIDE 4 #12 FROM OPERATOR DOOR ACTUATOR FOR SYSTEM'S LOW VOLTAGE WIRING. CONNECT AS DIRECTED BY DOOR INSTALLER. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTIONS WITH DOOR SYSTEM MANUFACTURER, TYPICAL FOR ALL SLIDING DOORS. 3 EC SHALL PROVIDE ALL WIRING, JUNCTION BOXES AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL SIGNS. SIGNS ARE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. EC SHALL COORDINATE LOCATION OF ROUGH -IN WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. 4 NOT USED 5 EC SHALL KEEP MAIN CONDUIT RUNS AT LEAST 6' -0" FROM MAIN AISLEWAYS, "RACEWAY". MAIN CONDUIT RUNS ACROSS AISLEWAYS SHALL BE RUN PERPENDICULAR AND SHALL NOT RUN PARALLEL DOWN AISLEWAY. 6 PROVIDE NEMA L14 -2R CONNECTOR FOR EACH DECK MOUNTED BIKE LIFT. BIKE LIFT SWITCHES SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED AT 54" AFF TO PLYWOOD, WITH 1" RMC FROM DECK, SEE ARCH. DRAWINGS. 7 NOT USED 8 MOUNT ON EXTERIOR WALL, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EXTERIOR CAMERAS. 9 MOUNT IN JOIST AREA, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PUBLIC VIEW MONITOR. 10 MOUNT ABOVE CEILING, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PUBLIC VIEW MONITOR. 11 EC SHALL CONNECT EF -1 TO MOTOR STARTER. (SEE EMS -1) 12 EC SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCH AT 5' -0" AFF AND MOUNT J -BOX AT 8' -0" AFF ON WALL ABOVE DISC. SWITCH AND CONNECT TO BALER 13 EC SHALL ABANDON EXISTING RTU. REMOVE ALL EXISTING POWER AND CONDUIT. ABBREVIATIONS: AFF AHU BRU EC EF EMS EWC FACP GFI GP IG JB LV MC MDP NL NIC OC OSI PC RGC RMC RTU TRU UH UNO WP W/ ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT BABIES 'R' US ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXHAUST FAN ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GENERAL PURPOSE ISOLATED GROUND JUNCTION BOX LOW VOLTAGE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL NIGHT LIGHT NOT IN CONTRACT ON CENTER OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM PLUMBING CONTRACTOR RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT RIGID METAL CONDUIT ROOF TOP UNIT . TOYS'R' US UNIT HEATER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE - WEATHER PROOF WITH iA 103 BAILER MDP - 50, 52, 54 COMPACTOR ' MDP - 49, 51, 53 1e 0 • O • ELECTRONICS PRE -SAL S 121 / 16 t , N ..1 k -LB -13 '; 1 1 . I ;;- lj i� Ir1 nr 1} g U ` -1 ! MDP –31, 33, 35 1, Ez , • Y'°7 1-t HA - 40j, .�u r y :: e I j I !--119 n =- 'k'• „�.,as_,,_ a r= MDP 226, 28, 30 ; L.1_s_, r q r 1 I ;,,,;„ I LC -31 �. I.. ' I I • " I ( ! I I r- 1 iettil7r –..15 r ; 4 • I. l_ 1 J - u �--!- —= . 1 I- —�, 1 II !is -2'1 J. ur ILi LL LA- RECEIVING 84" 60" 120 it rj PJ — LA' 23 --r— 1 1 1 -,--,r ,// /Ili i 1. .I— ice;- / / lilil /// /. .-/--/--7-7. KY'. ' flUUMN I FACING ?/f I 1 \.1< // /: / /fi / i / ,/ // %/ / j / /a \i' ! LA -21 ! . " /� ..__ MDP - 13,15, 17 r '/i REAR WALL 1 I- V MDP - 38, 40, 42 } • d y f l SALES 101 •.1 Li II -TRE-SALES 11L • 1'17 7 '�';f- i 1- 1 7 s 1 - BIKE LIFT , ,/./ 7' 1 I 1 –u i j/ ./—/-7/4/4,1 j , r / / --, -- �---- r---- -f -- - -}- -- -1L // / , /`t 1 , 1 1 i � /% l • • Lt i— • !_ Li 7 MDP- 14,16,18 1I.!Uft. .. ' /LB - 5' ;OFI /WP tit I hull IL BIKE LIFT T1 6' -6" VVAL 6' -6" 1 11 1 1 BACK SIDq OF 5 REAR W ;ALL 1 I'1 11 "7 ill 1 H ,_ L _ I r! 1 I • "LD -2" & "C -2" "LD -1" & "C=1”-\ (( A MN FACING 1! J III t1 LL i ENTRY j 1 VESTIBULE 1 `162 LC 1 i 1 0 j +Lk i� 1 MDP - 20,22,241 mLL'+o-1 I it !,J ( -9 1 WP LGmeaD-p5-7:12913, Ei),CIBITui4,14.L BIKE LIFT • GFI WP BIKE LIFT LB - 1 1 T-- T 1 i ' BIKE LIFT 1 3 LA -1,3 7 5_ 75 LA - 5, 7 SPRINKLER RISER 110 MANAGER'S OFFICE 111 COUNT sN ROOM 112 Alak PROCESSING \I ROOM "LA" (SECTION 1) "LA" (SECTION 2) \A EMS CABINET 150KVA X -FMR "T -1" MOUNTED ABOVE POWER WALL MAIN SERVICE ENTRANCE "MDP" POWER WALL KEY PLAN = 1/8" = 1' -0" 1 (sl ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E101 SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" PLAN TRUE NORTH EQUIPMENT ROOM 106 107 RECEIVED MAR 1 1 2010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED ' CONSTR. DOU & KEVISIONS II NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS 1 I I ill ii PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION - 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 I� I, III ,II ' I 1 II I I BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE E ri A:: ENGINEERS & CON` LTANTS 923 MAIN STREET, N. WILKESBOR•, NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 33. •67 -4332 :9 fiA ,. • ./ 7 Q 3� ,V ellq110 / GS STORE ONE GEOFFREY WAYNE, SUPPORT NJ 07470 (t)2 CENTER WAY 02 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US_ THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I - LA, WA DRAWING TITLE ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. R, L GENERAL NOTES: 1. LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS ARE DETERMINED BY DRAWING "F1 ". CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN THE LATEST "F1" DRAWING & LAYOUT LIGHTING IN THE CENTER OF THE AISLE. 2. THE INTENT IS TO LOCATE THE SALES AREA LIGHT FIXTURES IN THE CENTER OF THE AISLE & SYMMETRICAL WITH LENGTH OF RACKING. 3. REFER TO SHEET LR1.0 FOR DIMENSIONS OF LIGHTING FIXTURES. 4. ALL FLUORESCENT & HID SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS & CODES. 5. CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN LIGHTING PANELS CONTROLLING FLUORESCENT FIXTURES NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF PANEL SHALL HAVE APPROVED MEANS FOR LOCKING IN THE OPEN POSITION. 6. LIGHTING FIXTURES FOR USE OUTSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. 7. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT THE ENDS OF EACH FIXTURE WITH SUPPORTS NOT TO EXCEED 4 FOOT SPACING. 8. ALL WIRING SHALL BE #12, 1/2" C. AND ARRANGED TO BE BALANCED PHASE TO NEUTRAL. UPGRADE SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DROP. 9. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS & BALLASTS WILL BE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY EC, U.N.O. 10. ALL PENDANT LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SALES AREA SHALL BE HUNG WITH AIR CRAFT CABLE AT HEIGHT SPECIFIED IN LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. ALL LIGHTING ON THIS SHEET SHALL BE CONNECTED TO PANEL "HA", U.N.O. 12. ALL SHADED EMERGENCY FIXTURES SHALL HAVE NON - SWITCHED CONDUCTORS FOR EMERGENCY BALLAST CHARGING AND LOSS OF POWER DETECTION. SEE TERMINAL STRIPS ON ONE -LINE DIAGRAM. 13. NON - SWITCHED POWER FOR EMERGENCY BALLASTS IN ALL OFFICE/CONFERENCE/RESTROOMS, ETC. (FIXTURES SHOWN ON ENLARGED PLAN) SHALL COME FROM SAME CIRCUIT BREAKER AS LOCAL ROOM. 14. POWER DROPS FOR ALL LINEAR FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE LOCATED AWAY FROM MAIN RACETRACK AS APPLICABLE. 11. SALES AREA CONTROL: 1. LINEAR FIXTURES: ALL WILL BE DIMMED AND REQUIRE 0 -10V CLASS 2 WIRING FOR CONTROL. SEE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONTROL VS. CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS FOR PERIMETER LIGHTING CIRCUITS AND CENTRAL SALES CONTROL CIRCUIT TO BE SWITCHED SEPARATE FROM OTHER LINEAR FLUORESCENT. WIRE PER DRAWINGS AND CONTACTOR DESCRIPTIONS. SEE EMS-1 FOR DESCRIPTION OF LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS 2. ALL (3) BALLASTS WILL BE WIRED INDEPENDENTLY. THE BALLAST WHICH HAS LAMPS CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY BALLAST SHALL BE CONNECTED TO PHASE 'B' CIRCUIT AND SHALL HAVE SEPARATE NON SWITCHED SOURCE PROVIDED FROM TERMINAL SWITCH, SHOWN ON ONE -LINE DIAGRAM. ALL NIGHT LIGHTS SHALL BE CONTROLLED DURING DAY BY CONTACTOR C -12. KEY NOTES: 1 EC SHALL FIELD VERIFY LENGTH OF ALL CUSTOM FIXTURES, NOTIFY AND COORDINATE WITH PM FOR SPECIFIC LENGTHS. 2 PENDANT MOUNT EXIT SIGNS AT 10' -0" AFF WITH RIGID CONDUIT FROM ROOF DECK (TYP.). SURFACE MOUNT OVER SLIDING DOORS. EXIT SIGNS SHALL BE CLEAR OF ALL FIXTURING. EC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF QUANITYAND LOCATION OF EXIT SIGNS (TYPE 'MV, 'M2', AND 'M3' FIXTURES) WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES. 3 ALL ROWS OF FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SALES AREA, SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, TO PERMIT 6' -0" OF SIDE TO SIDE ADJUSTMENT (APPROX. 8' -0" OF SLACK) EXTRA CONDUIT SHALL BE COILED AND SUPPORTED IN A CO D E A P PROV ED MAN NER AT U PPER JUNCTION BOX, PAINT CONDUIT TO MATCH ROOF DECK 4 ALL SHADED EMERGENCY FIXTURES SHALL HAVE NON - SWITCHED CONDUCTOR FOR EMERGENCY BALLAST CHARGING AND LOSS OF POWER DETECTION. 5 MOUNT FIXTURE ABOVE BOTTOM OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS IN PRE -SALES AREA AND MOUNT FIXTURE TO TOP OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS IN RECEIVING AREA. 6 MOUNT OVER DESK AT 8' -0" TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE. COORDINATE SWITCH LOCATION WITH COUNTER. 7 CHAIN HUNG AT 12' -0" AFF. 8 SURFACE MOUNT TO CEILING PROCESSING .ROOM .. 110;:. 112 106. 3 ENLARGED OFFICES 1.07 E102 SCALE = 1/8" = 1' -0" l�� A 3!■■, M2 311 FE 31 F __.I , PRE -SALES 119 ( 4 ELECTRONICS PRE -SALES 121 RECEIVING 120 6 - -23 -DE 1i: 23 23 D if 21 21 ID I. I ( 21 r! -i 7 21 1 ' 1D 21 II l '1 -'E E- 29 ® ! 1 - - - „-- - -f, 1 n F i/7 l 31 i 9 1 i _ I ORD/PLUG FIXTURE FE NL I 129 •®1 M1 29 F (7) CORD/PLUG Fl URE 29 29 1 F 31 FE- 29 D 23 DE 23 D 23 D 23 D 23 D 23 D D 123 D 23 D 23 D 23 D , 1 1 1 1 1 1 I• 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 sD D' 1--121 MLD ?;21 x LT 1 0 -2, 4, 6 i NL D1 5h- 1 r DE 5i - I D 5 h7-2t7-1 6C. 1- 1 1 1 1 DI LTE 2, 4, 6 1 1,777 ! 1 1 D - b- DE' __5 -D _i_ 5 l 1 1 1 1 -i =�y DI D1 - 1 -. I, -4_...1 51 1 5! I I DE-NL DE' 5' J 51 D! I D 1 I 5I j i 5� LT \ '� 02,4,6 • 4 DI 1 LTE 5i 2,,4,6 r r LT 0. `" 2 , 4 , 6 j I 1-17 1D`5tlDE 51 j D3DE 3D 3 I 1 ■ ��, I k -• D 3 DE r 1 1 3 D 3 DE --3 D 3 1 1 1 j1 r D DE3 D I 3= 1 1 / v D 3 DE 3 D f 1 I i \� LTE I 10 8, 12 LT 0- 8, 10, 12 LTE "LTE a 0 2, 4, 6mti T, 4, rt LT L_J ;LT , /,✓ 0 2..4,6 1 1 1 1 1 1 F..1__I _ __L1 L = 04 ;L_, 7 7 11 LTE' L •LTE '1 �' a CO NL 1- DL; D _ I 2 , 4, 6 === _______2 , 4, 6 • i� ,_ I di! ID ? r ! T ' LT :: i I , LT ! D } D 1-* Q! 1c 10 �` 71L 7 2, 4, X2,4,6 r1 1 1 - --1-- -T D 23 D 23 D 23 D LTE 2,44,,6 LT `" LTE\J 0 22 -, 4 , 6 2 , 0 2, 4, 6 7 LTE \ 0 NL� 2, 4, 6 LT 0 8,10,12 I i 1 3\ /i LTE 1 yJL7i Lr.< J 0 1 -;2 4 , 6 21, 4', 61 -n'°� F1; SALES `7() t'1 , -. A. fill _j 1 I' EA� � �� t¢ + �1! 1,,) 1 \ \_ 1 '4011 1 i LT ! 4/\. � ` LTE �% ? 0 - - J: 2,4,6 2,4,6 0 2,4,6 1 I I 1_ ) LTE 0 8, 10, 12 L IOT9 -;8, 10, 12. , =Pt- / RR 11,111 LTE 1111(!1" , 8, 10, 127 I it : ___�_.=;.�s_t= __.��_� = -�;j tJi CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS ARMORED CABLE (TYP.) MOUNT RECEPT. BEHIND FIRST FIXTURE IN RUN. WIRE SHELVING 1/2" CONDUIT TO DECK. JB 4 "X4" MOUNTED 12' -6" (TYP.) DIRECTLY BEHIND THE FIRST FIXTURE IN RUN. 02/26/10 03/08/10 DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS EXTEND CIRCUIT TO RECEPT. WITH ARMORED CABLE F. I MOUNT AT STEEL= Ali 6' -0" STARTER CORD (BY OTHERS) LD2 - 6�, LD1 - 13,15,17 6° FEMALE PIGTAIL (PROVIDED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS) 'VL' PROVIDED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS. (20) FIXTURES MAX. DAISY CHAINED. (TYP. LOCATION) VL VL VL VL VL "BEAM LIGHT" 1" ' ■ I ' 1ki!! 1---- VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL 7' f�i !1 ,,,i1 , VL if 1 ti' i IM 1 I' PI • ; 3 i P I _Ai .Tf- 11 F 7:r_LC - 36 � /1 l : VL ICI °.�iifY�l�pfl.• i@ �®l`I�II�Y��_t__ l�j.• iI �II�. � 11 --� r. _ '- -r N II N 1 _1I= 7 i II- N' 11- N l - 3+1i_ 7 1 F—_ H —I Y 4 1 1 J • tp- M:- . -i 1 j 1 1 j j ' I Ir I h ' I 1 1 I - ; I o 1 I VL I -I. p p - I p i E -� p 1 p' -- , ' p H- i N 7 i 1 1-J 1 J i- 1 J h 1-'1 J ; J I Il J I- J I. _'. —� L-11----1 r -1 1 1 ! -� H ; -1 "1 ""�i 1" -� - -- - �-_ I - �i - - - -� 1 -- - --1- k.4 - - --! I 1 VL il J1 E , i 1 r , L-1,---4r. { I I � � l i t i Ii i i I I t 1 I RECEPTACLES FOR VALANCE LIGHTING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED ON RACK OR GONDOLA UNTIL FIXTURES ARE IN THEIR FINAL LOCATION. SCALE = NTS POWER POLE - MOUNT TO JB, CENTER / TOP OF RACK FURTHEST FROM MAIN RACE TRACK JB 4"X4" MOUNTED ON CENTER OF RACK FURTHEST FROM MAIN RACE TRACK ARMORED CABLE (TYP.) VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL 1 I i I 1� 1 � - — 1 LD1 - 14,16,18 1 I 1' „6 I 1 I 1 26' - 7" I 1 /...-LD1 - 20, 22, 24 -- - ---1- -1_ r-11_1 VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL _ LD1 -111 H I +— VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL VL , LD1 - 7 I �1 1 r � VL VL VL VL VL VL I I i r —! y I 101 MOUNT RECEPT. BEHIND FIRST FIXTURE IN RUN, CENTERED ON INSIDE REAR RACK. TO FIXTURE ON ADJACENT SIDE OF GONDOLA 6' -0" STARTER CORD (BY OTHERS) VL VL VL VL VL VL VL LD1 -24 Jh1 LD1 - 20 .1 1 `E103- -I{ 1 L VL VL VL VL VL ■ i ! 1 ( , I 1 VL VL VL VL VL VL N VL VL VL VL VL VL 1 ;I - "1C /I ,LD1 -11 I • 1 1 LD1 -22 PROTOTYPE UPDATES --•4- LD1 - 8, 10,12 ALE: 36 ' i tD1 -8. is I II k L i_ t - i t' rt t LD1 -10 1 f-� T- LD1 -8 LD1 -10 v 1 N� WIRE SHELVING VL VL VL VL VL VL LD1 -12 DESCRIPTION 0 1 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 I LD1 -14 LD1 -16 LD1 - 18 LD1 -14 LD1 -16 I i la r� L1,1 1 �1 1 E EEER LD2 -3 1 i - -i - -� -# I - -- T I LD1 - 8 6" FEMALE PIGTAIL (PROVIDED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS) LD1 -14 'VL' PROVIDED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS. (20) FIXTURES MAX. DAISY- CHAINED. (TYP. LOCATIONS) "BEAM LIGHT" Li %- 1 1� , I- N U Fri ji 1-11 t 1 1 , 1 I I I I I ; 7', k ic'r! ) I (TY'•) (TYP� 1 I (T 7 H-1 , j r , ,_ *5A ? i il If. o �a .111.1 1 f� Cr) •_ P I I i J1 I' *7A ./ *3A I PI J P l t ( J '- . �' --- 1-- r __ 7 L. a .S! - ; '(TYP.) (TYP.) o �:_ . I J J �% ! 1 i ' 1 .L 1 I 1, ' I I 1 , I !�. • 1 1 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE LE J ENGINEERS & CONSU TANTS 923 MAIN STREET, N. WILKESBORO, 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 336 - -4332 RECEPTACLES FOR VALANCE LIGHTING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED ON RACK OR GONDOLA UNTIL FIXTURES ARE IN THEIR FINAL LOCATION. (3\\ POWER POLE VALANCE / IN -RACK LIGHTING SCALE = NTS STARLINE COMPONENT SCHEDULE: CODE QUAN. MANUF. CAT.# MTG. DESCRIPTION TYPE *1A 32 UNIVERSAL STARLINE B60 -20-4 19' - 0" 20' TRACK SECTION TRACK SECTIONS *1B 4 UNIVERSAL STARLINE 660 -15-4 19' - 0" 15' TRACK SECTION TRACK SECTIONS *1C 4 UNIVERSAL STARLINE B60 -10-4 19' - 0" 10' TRACK SECTION TRACK SECTIONS *2A 32 UNIVERSAL STARLINE HC -2 19' - 0" TRACK HOUSING COUPLER . TRACK CONNECTIONS *3A 32 UNIVERSAL STARLINE BC-4 19' - 0" TRACK BUSWAY CONNECTOR TRACK CONNECTIONS *4A 8 UNIVERSAL STARLINE EPF60 -4 19' - 0" TRACK END FEED UNIT TRACK CONNECTIONS *5A 8 UNIVERSAL STARLINE EC60 19' - 0" TRACK END CAP UNIT TRACK CONNECTIONS *6A 59 UNIVERSAL STARLINE CBM100C- L520D -4 19' - 0" BREAKER/RECEPTACLE POWER DROP TRACK CONNECTIONS *7A 116 UNIVERSAL STARLINE RHB -3 19' - 0" TRACK SYSTEM MOUNTING CONNECTORS MOUNTING ASSEMBLIES NORTH SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" 4X4 JUNCTION BOX FOR IG OUTLET (PRICE CHECKER) ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE: DESCRIPTION MODEL # MANUFACTURER REMARKS QUANTITY P1 25DTC -415 WIREMOLD 15' -5 ", WHITE, INSTALLED BY EC, (OSI) 64 P3 PREWIRED D &P AL, INSTALLED BY EC, CASH REGISTER PP (OSI) 14 POWER POLES FOR CASH REGISTER UGHTS ARE ALUMINUM AND PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE E201. SECURE POWER FEED END UNIT TO BUILDING STEEL VIA THREADED ROD KEY NOTES: 1 INSTALL 3/4" CONDUIT FOR POWER, SEE COLUMN MOUNTED PRICE CHECK DETAIL AND GONDOLA DETAIL (TYP.) 2 PROVIDE PUSH BUTTON IN VESTIBULE ADJACENT TO DOOR AT 42" AFF WITH BUZZER ON WALL AT 10' -0 "AFF INSIDE THE STORE. PUSH BUTTON SHALL BE MOUNTED FLUSH IN WALL. BUZZER INSIDE STORE SHALL BE POWERED FROM EDWARDS #592 TRANSFORMER AND CONNECTED TO CIRCUIT AS INDICATED. 3 ALL VALANCE LIGHTING SHALL BE INSTALLED AS INDICATED IN' VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM" DETAIL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL FIXTURES ARE PROVIDED WITH QUICK CONNECT, "PLUG & PLAY" POWER CORDS. 0 "A" PHASE "B" PHASE "C" PHASE NEUTRAL NOTES: 1. BUSWAY BY EC. 2. ALL BUSWAY COMPONENTS ARE TO BE PAINTED TIGER DRYLAC RAL9001. COORDINATE WITH VENDOR 3. CONTACT "FACTORY REPRESENTATIVE: CHRIS VIGLIAROLO @ (732) 259 -3377" FOR FURTHER • ,s2; INFORMATION FAX: (800) 260 -1506 � QP NG 2 #RHB -3 TRACK SECTION 3/8" - THREADED ROD HANGAR (TYPICAL) #B60 - * *-4 POWER TRACK SECTION (TYP.) _ #HC -2 TRACK SECTION CONNECTOR PLUGMOLD SCHEDULE: QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL LENGTH 97 WIREMOLD #2000 GB SERIES, WHITE 3' - 0" 2 WIREMOLD #2000 GB SERIES, WHITE 5' - 0" 1 WIREMOLD #2000 GB SERIES, WHITE 6' - 0" PROVIDED BY EC. #EPF60 -4 END POWER FEED UNIT 7 J v WITHIN 6' -0" KELLUMS TO GRIP SECURE SHOULD W HBE IP TO USED BUILDING STEEL. ®,0 #BC4 BUSWAY SECTION CONNECTOR #CBM100C- L520D-4 (2) 20A CIRCUIT BUSWAY BREAKER BOXES WITH (2) TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLES ON UNDERSIDE FACE POWER POLE SECURED AND ALIGNED AT SQUARE KNOCK -OUT ON TOP OF SPINE. EC SHALL FIELD CUT POWER POLES 8" ABOVE BOTTOM OF JOIST. POWER POLE ON GONDOLA FURTHEST FROM MAIN RACETRACK SECURE TOP WITH FLEXIBLE BRACKET AND SPAN BETWEEN JOISTS WITH UNISTRUTAS REQUIRED. NOTE: 1. JUNCTION BOXES SHALL NOT BE MOUNTED ON TOP OF GONDOLA. (TYP FOR ALL) 2. ALL CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE CONCEALED INSIDE "SPINE" OR UNDER BASE DECK OF GONDOLA. FINAL INSTALLATION SHALL NOT BE VISIBLE. STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 SECURE TOP TO BUILDING STEEL VIA U- BOLT OR OTHER APPROVED MEANS. WIREMOLD #25DTC415, WHITE,PROVIDED BY TRU, INSTALLED BY EC. UL TYPE SEOOW CABLE W/ WHITE JACKET (COLEMAN OR AWC) *- LENGTH OF TRACK SECTION ISOMETRIC EXPLODED VIEW �5\ STARLINE BUSWAY DETAILS PLUGMOLD BY EC. SEE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, E101, MOUNTED 3" ABOVE BASEDECK (BOTTOM OF PLUGMOLD). NEW PRICE CHECKER MTD. TO GONDOLA. FIXTURE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. RECEPTACLE SURFACE MOUNTED, 3" ABOVE BASEDECK (BOTTOM OF BOX), FOR RECESSED MOUNTING IN ENDCAP. 2x4 JB, 2" DEEP. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR COLORS. IG OUTLET FOR PRICE CHECKER - SHALL BE MOUNTED UNDER BASE DECK, FACING PRICE CHECKER. DRAWING TITLE DISPLAY POWER AND LIGHTING As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 4 \ GONDOLA DETAIL (TYP. COMPONENT LAYOUT) INCLUDING PRICE CHECKER RECEPT. SHEET NO. SCALE = NTS 3 E1 04 MOTION SENSOR- MOUNTED ON SIDE WALL. EXIT 3/4" CONDUIT TO DECK, PAINTED TO MATCH. JB FOR MOTION SENSOR AND DOOR CONTACT ARMOR CONDUIT AND CONTACT PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. EXTERIOR DOOR ELEVATION (TYP.) SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. EC SHALL PROVIDE ALL ROUGH -IN LOCATIONS. EC SHALL CONTRACT WITH TRU NATIONAL ACCOUNTS VENDOR TO INSTALL ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING FOR SECURITY, LOSS PREVENTION, SPEAKER, AND IT SYSTEMS. INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS AND FINAL CONNECTS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 2. ALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY TRU. 3. ALL CCTV, SECURITY, AND IT CABLING SHALL BE WHITE, PVC (NON- PLENUM RATED), AND RUN EXPOSTED (WITHOUT CONDUIT) IN A NEAT APPEARANCE. EC SHALL VERIFY THAT PVC CABLING IS APPROVED BY LOCAL CODE AND THAT CABLES ARE NOT REQUIRED TO BE 100% IN CONDUIT. 4. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH. 5. ALL SECURITY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CONNECTED TO EITHER MAIN BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM OR BURGLAR ALARM EXPANSION MODULE, COORDINATE TERMINATION POINTS WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 6. ALL SECURITY WIRING SHALL BE IN CONDUIT UP TO DECK. SECURITY WIRING SHALL BE KEPT AT LEAST 10' -0" FROM ROOF HATCH. 7. ALL CAMERAS SHALL BE TERMINATED AT THE DVR EQUIPMENT IN MANAGER'S OFFICE. 8. ACTUAL CAMERA LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 9. MOUNT ALL CAMERAS AS NOTED ON PLAN FROM BOTTOM OF DOME AND /OR 6" TO 10" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF NEARBY SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURES. 10. ALL SUSPENDED DOME CAMERAS MUST BE POSITIONED AS STATED ON PLAN AND SECURED TO BOTTOM CORD OF BAR JOISTS WHENEVER POSSIBLE. IF NO BAR JOIST IS AVAILABLE THEN CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL AN ANGLE IRON, WHICH MUST SPAN BETWEEN BAR JOISTS AND PAINTED TO MATCH ROOF DECK. 11. PROVIDE 25' OF NEATLY COILED WIRE AT THE BACK OF EACH CAMERA, INCLUDING FUTURE CAMERA LOCATIONS, TO FACILITATE CAMERA RELOCATIONS. 12. WHENEVER POSSIBLE RUN MOTION AND HORN /STROBE WIRES INSIDE COLUMN, OTHERWISE RUN CONDUIT ON BACK SIDES OF THE COLUMNS. 13. ALL IT LOW VOLTAGE CABLES SHALL BE APPROPRIATELY LABELED ON BOTH ENDS, COORDINATE DESIGNATIONS WITH IT MANAGER. 14. ALL LP LOW VOLTAGE CABLES SHALL BE LABELED: TV1, TV2, DC1, DC2, ETC. COORDINA TE WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 15. ALL CAT5e CABLES TERMINATED IN EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL HAVE FINAL INSTALLATION WITH 20' OF SERVICE LOOP ON LADDER RACK SYSTEM. 16. ALL CAT5e CABLES TERMINATED IN IDF PANEL SHALL HAVE FINAL INSTALLATION WITH 10' OF SERVICE LOOP IN THE PANEL. 17. ALL SPEAKER WIRE SHALL BE 18/2, WHITE. SPEAKER FEEDS SHALL BE RUN SEPARATE FROM ALL CAT5e AND FIBER CABLES. TERMINATIONS SHALL ALLOW FOR 3' COIL AT EACH SPEAKER AND 30' OF SERVICE LOOP IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS AND ZONES REQUIRED WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 18. INSTALLER OF ALL LV CABLE SHALL COORDINATE FINAL TERMINATION POINTS FOR LP AND IT EQUIPMENT. CABLES AT REAR OF STORE WILL TERMINATE AT BAX OR IDF, RESPECTIVELY, (TYP.) KEY NOTES: 1 PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNT JB AT 6" ABOVE DOOR FRAME TO CENTER OF BOX, FOR ALARM CONTACT AND MOTION SENSOR, PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT AND EXTEND CONDUIT TO DECK. LOCATED DIRECTLY ABOVE STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. 3 DOCK DOOR CONTACT- PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX, 6" AFF, WITH (1) 18/4 CABLE, 3/4" CONDUIT TO DECK. 4 ACCESS POINT- MOUNTED 15' -0 ", ON BACK SIDE OF COLUMN, PAINT TO MATCH, PROVIDE WITH (1) CAT5e AND 3/4" CONDUIT TO JOIST SPACE, INSULATED BUSHINGS ENDS. HING BOTH S AT TH . O S 5 EAS PANELS- PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FROM COMPUTER ROOM TO CLOSEST EAS PANEL. PROVIDE 25' OF SERVICE LOOP INSIDE EAS PANEL. FINAL CONNECTIONS BY EAS CONTRACTOR. 6 INTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO EAS SYSTEM. 7 INTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 8 EXTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM MTD 24' -8" AFF. VERIFY LOCATION WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 9 PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FOR ETHERNET CONNECTION TO EMS. 10 PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FOR ETHERNET CONNECTION FOR DVR SYSTEM, TO TELEPHONE BOARD IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. 11 POS LOCATIONS- RUN DATA THROUGH UNDER FLOOR DUCT SYSTEM. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH FURNITURE INSTALLERS AND TRU PM. 13 KNOX BOX- PROVIDE (1) 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM FOR TAMPER SWITCH AND 3/4" CONDUIT FROM KNOX BOX TO JOIST AREA. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. 14 EMPTY CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOX FOR INDYME SYSTEM DOORBELL, MOUNTED AT 44" AFF. 15 SAFE- MOUNTED AT 48" WITH 22/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 16 GLOBAL SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ST -1. CONNECT PER EMS -1 DRAWING. MOUNTED AT 78" AFF, UNO. 17 MOUNT MOTION SENSOR TO CEILING. 18 SEE E201 FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM LAYOUT. 19 SENSORS FOR RTU'S SHALL BE MOUNTED ON COLUMNS AT 7' -0" AFF, AND ON WALLS AS NOTED. SENSOR INSTALLATION AND CONTROL WIRING BY EC. REFER TO SENSOR MOUNTING DETAIL, E202. 20 SEE VESTIBULE ELEVATION FOR RUNNING OF LV CABLE. 1 I DATA LEGEND: R x CALL BOX ANTENNA / RCU TRANSCEIVER - PROVIDE (1) CAT5e TO EQUIPMENT ROOM. OINTERIOR SIREN - PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO CONTROL SIREN DEVICE �= s p `' CARBON- DIOXIDE SENSOR, CONNECT PER EMS -I DRAWINGS. MOUNTED AT 66" AFF, UNO. - INDOOR GLOBAL HUMIDITY SENSOR - RHS -1. CONNECT PER EMS -1 DRAWINGS. MOUNTED AT 78" AFF, UNO. ® SENSOR FOR ROOF TOP UNITS. MOUNT AT 6' -6" AFF, UNO. sP SPEAKER- PROVIDE 18/2 CABLE FROM EQUIPMENT ROOM TO SPEAKER LOCATIONS VERIFY WITH SPEAKER ZONES REQUIRED WITH TRU PM. ® VOLUME CONTROL- SPEAKER POTENTIOMETER. MOUNTED AT 42" AFF, UNO. ; (p INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION FRAME- MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR. PROVIDE (1) CAT3, (2) CAT5e, AND (1) PRETERMINATED FIBER OPTIC CABLE FROM IDF TO SERVER RACK. COORDINATE LENGTH OF FIBER REQUIRED. IDF - - --�r_ - - _ 7474 7474- _ _�_ - - - - -_- " BURGLAR ALARM EXPANSION PANEL- MOUNTED AT 10'-0" AFF. PROVIDE (2) 18/4 CABLE FOR DATA AND (1) 16/2 CABLE FOR POWER, TO BURGLAR ALARM PANEL. BAX till ® DOME CAMERA- FIXED MOUNT. - MOUNTED AT 13' -0" AFF, UNO. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. ® VM VIEW MONITOR/ CAMERA- MOUNTED AT 9' -0" AFF, UNO. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. COORDINATE LOCATION OF DECK MOUNTED RECEPTACLE FOR POWER. ® WP WEATHER -PROOF DOME CAMERA- MOUNTED AT 13' -0" AFF, UNO. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. ® CM CEILING MOUNTED DOME- CAMERA MOUNTED TO GRID. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE WITH 10' OF NEATLY COILED SPARE LENGTH ABOVE CEILING. COIL SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY STRUCTURE, NOT LAYING ON CEILING TILE. ® PD PRE -WIRED DOME/ NO CAMERA- MOUNTED AT 13' -0" AFF, UNO. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. :AND BY 1 I FUTURE DOME/ NO CAMERA- PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. STATIONARY CAMERA/ NO DOME- MOUNTED AT 13' -0" AFF, UNO. PROVIDE (1) CAT5e CABLE. LK 360° MOTION DETECTOR - MOUNTED AT 13' -0 ", UNO. PROVIDE 22/4 CABLE. l SHORT RANGE MOTION DETECTOR (60' RANGE) - MOUNTED TO DOOR CONTACT JUNCTION BOX, 6" ABOVE TOP OF DOOR FRAME, UNO. PROVIDE (2) 22/4 CABLES FOR DOOR CONTACT AND MOTION SENSOR, UNO. SEE DETAIL. 1 SHORT RANGE MOTION DETECTOR (35' RANGE) - MOUNTED AT 9' -0 ", UNO. PROVIDE (1) 22/4 CABLE. V TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX - MOUNTED 60" AFF, UNO. RECESSED IN WALLS FOR ALL LOCATIONS, EXCEPT PRESALES AREA. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH. PROVIDE WITH (1) CAT5e AND 3/4" CONDUIT TO JOIST SPACE, INSULATED BUSHINGS AT BOTH ENDS. 17 DATA / TELEPHONE BOX - MOUNTED 18" AFF, UNO. RECESSED IN WALLS FOR ALL LOCATIONS, EXCEPT PRESALES AREA. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH. PROVIDE WITH (3) CATSe AND 3/4" CONDUIT TO JOIST SPACE, INSULATED BUSHINGS AT BOTH ENDS, UNO. -� 1 I ! J • DATA BOX - MOUNTED 18" AFF, UNO. RECESSED IN WALLS FOR ALL LOCATIONS, EXCEPT PRESALES AREA. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH. PROVIDE WITH (2) CAT5e AND 3/4" CONDUIT TO JOIST SPACE, INSULATED BUSHINGS AT BOTH ENDS, UNO. 3 E1 04 MOTION SENSOR- MOUNTED ON SIDE WALL. EXIT 3/4" CONDUIT TO DECK, PAINTED TO MATCH. JB FOR MOTION SENSOR AND DOOR CONTACT ARMOR CONDUIT AND CONTACT PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. EXTERIOR DOOR ELEVATION (TYP.) SCALE = 1/4" = 1' -0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. EC SHALL PROVIDE ALL ROUGH -IN LOCATIONS. EC SHALL CONTRACT WITH TRU NATIONAL ACCOUNTS VENDOR TO INSTALL ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING FOR SECURITY, LOSS PREVENTION, SPEAKER, AND IT SYSTEMS. INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS AND FINAL CONNECTS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 2. ALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY TRU. 3. ALL CCTV, SECURITY, AND IT CABLING SHALL BE WHITE, PVC (NON- PLENUM RATED), AND RUN EXPOSTED (WITHOUT CONDUIT) IN A NEAT APPEARANCE. EC SHALL VERIFY THAT PVC CABLING IS APPROVED BY LOCAL CODE AND THAT CABLES ARE NOT REQUIRED TO BE 100% IN CONDUIT. 4. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH. 5. ALL SECURITY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CONNECTED TO EITHER MAIN BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM OR BURGLAR ALARM EXPANSION MODULE, COORDINATE TERMINATION POINTS WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 6. ALL SECURITY WIRING SHALL BE IN CONDUIT UP TO DECK. SECURITY WIRING SHALL BE KEPT AT LEAST 10' -0" FROM ROOF HATCH. 7. ALL CAMERAS SHALL BE TERMINATED AT THE DVR EQUIPMENT IN MANAGER'S OFFICE. 8. ACTUAL CAMERA LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 9. MOUNT ALL CAMERAS AS NOTED ON PLAN FROM BOTTOM OF DOME AND /OR 6" TO 10" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF NEARBY SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURES. 10. ALL SUSPENDED DOME CAMERAS MUST BE POSITIONED AS STATED ON PLAN AND SECURED TO BOTTOM CORD OF BAR JOISTS WHENEVER POSSIBLE. IF NO BAR JOIST IS AVAILABLE THEN CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL AN ANGLE IRON, WHICH MUST SPAN BETWEEN BAR JOISTS AND PAINTED TO MATCH ROOF DECK. 11. PROVIDE 25' OF NEATLY COILED WIRE AT THE BACK OF EACH CAMERA, INCLUDING FUTURE CAMERA LOCATIONS, TO FACILITATE CAMERA RELOCATIONS. 12. WHENEVER POSSIBLE RUN MOTION AND HORN /STROBE WIRES INSIDE COLUMN, OTHERWISE RUN CONDUIT ON BACK SIDES OF THE COLUMNS. 13. ALL IT LOW VOLTAGE CABLES SHALL BE APPROPRIATELY LABELED ON BOTH ENDS, COORDINATE DESIGNATIONS WITH IT MANAGER. 14. ALL LP LOW VOLTAGE CABLES SHALL BE LABELED: TV1, TV2, DC1, DC2, ETC. COORDINA TE WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 15. ALL CAT5e CABLES TERMINATED IN EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL HAVE FINAL INSTALLATION WITH 20' OF SERVICE LOOP ON LADDER RACK SYSTEM. 16. ALL CAT5e CABLES TERMINATED IN IDF PANEL SHALL HAVE FINAL INSTALLATION WITH 10' OF SERVICE LOOP IN THE PANEL. 17. ALL SPEAKER WIRE SHALL BE 18/2, WHITE. SPEAKER FEEDS SHALL BE RUN SEPARATE FROM ALL CAT5e AND FIBER CABLES. TERMINATIONS SHALL ALLOW FOR 3' COIL AT EACH SPEAKER AND 30' OF SERVICE LOOP IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS AND ZONES REQUIRED WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 18. INSTALLER OF ALL LV CABLE SHALL COORDINATE FINAL TERMINATION POINTS FOR LP AND IT EQUIPMENT. CABLES AT REAR OF STORE WILL TERMINATE AT BAX OR IDF, RESPECTIVELY, (TYP.) KEY NOTES: 1 PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNT JB AT 6" ABOVE DOOR FRAME TO CENTER OF BOX, FOR ALARM CONTACT AND MOTION SENSOR, PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT AND EXTEND CONDUIT TO DECK. LOCATED DIRECTLY ABOVE STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. 3 DOCK DOOR CONTACT- PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX, 6" AFF, WITH (1) 18/4 CABLE, 3/4" CONDUIT TO DECK. 4 ACCESS POINT- MOUNTED 15' -0 ", ON BACK SIDE OF COLUMN, PAINT TO MATCH, PROVIDE WITH (1) CAT5e AND 3/4" CONDUIT TO JOIST SPACE, INSULATED BUSHINGS ENDS. HING BOTH S AT TH . O S 5 EAS PANELS- PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FROM COMPUTER ROOM TO CLOSEST EAS PANEL. PROVIDE 25' OF SERVICE LOOP INSIDE EAS PANEL. FINAL CONNECTIONS BY EAS CONTRACTOR. 6 INTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO EAS SYSTEM. 7 INTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 8 EXTERIOR SIREN- PROVIDE 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM MTD 24' -8" AFF. VERIFY LOCATION WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. 9 PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FOR ETHERNET CONNECTION TO EMS. 10 PROVIDE (1) CAT5e FOR ETHERNET CONNECTION FOR DVR SYSTEM, TO TELEPHONE BOARD IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. 11 POS LOCATIONS- RUN DATA THROUGH UNDER FLOOR DUCT SYSTEM. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH FURNITURE INSTALLERS AND TRU PM. 13 KNOX BOX- PROVIDE (1) 18/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM FOR TAMPER SWITCH AND 3/4" CONDUIT FROM KNOX BOX TO JOIST AREA. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. 14 EMPTY CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOX FOR INDYME SYSTEM DOORBELL, MOUNTED AT 44" AFF. 15 SAFE- MOUNTED AT 48" WITH 22/4 CABLE TO BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 16 GLOBAL SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ST -1. CONNECT PER EMS -1 DRAWING. MOUNTED AT 78" AFF, UNO. 17 MOUNT MOTION SENSOR TO CEILING. 18 SEE E201 FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM LAYOUT. 19 SENSORS FOR RTU'S SHALL BE MOUNTED ON COLUMNS AT 7' -0" AFF, AND ON WALLS AS NOTED. SENSOR INSTALLATION AND CONTROL WIRING BY EC. REFER TO SENSOR MOUNTING DETAIL, E202. 20 SEE VESTIBULE ELEVATION FOR RUNNING OF LV CABLE. 1 I 1 I i R • i t I k LV CABLES TO BE r RUN THROUGH . TUBE STEEL �= s p `' E - LV CABLES IN RIGID CONDUIT. I 1 I I 1 I I 1 PAINT-TO-MATCH, SHALL NOT BE VISIBLE FROM EXTERIOR. MOTION SENSOR - - ; 1 I 1 ; (p 7474- - - - - r 7474-- - - - --�r_ - - _ 7474 7474- _ _�_ - - - - -_- " ETV- T till I r- ----11 111 1 I i I ! I I I i 1 / 1 I i I ARMOR CONDUIT AND CONTj4CT PROVIDED; INSTALLED OTHERS.." :AND BY 1 I I i r ail 111 I! 1 r I i I11 11 l l i, 1 1'v [pill i 1 % • 1 1 !: , - - - -1 I I 1 I ! I ! 1 ,. I � � I ' I r j 1 1 7474 - - -° t, =1 I I i IIi I I III 11 I1I I ;1� III i I 1 I I i I 11 II 11 i 1I 1 ! $ II ;I 1 I ' I I y` � i ! 1 II \ I I I I 1 1 J L_ -� 1 I ! J • I 1 11 i 1 1 I 11 j i L I,r ,4474 _a r. i 44'44 11 !Ii1 1` __ I ;11 1 -_ 7474-- 7474 �41 �' .4 -{ . I ril II I `. i 41 11 r1 I I ii ;i • J I �� i1 i Tip G I I I i I a 1- -�11 p I� I ._________,,I7 _______ _ NOTE: RUN 18/4 CABLE IN FRAMED WALL, IN CONDUIT, ADJACENT TO STORE FRONT SYSTEM EXTEND TO BURGLAR ALARM PANEL IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. SECURITY COMPONENT INSTALLER SHALL EXTEND OUT SIDE OF MULLION WITH 1/4" ARMORED CONDUIT TO CORNER OF BREAK-OUT DOOR AND FINISH INSTALLATION AS SHOWN. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION AND LENGTH OF WHIP REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION WITH LOSS PREVENTION MANAGER. (TYP. FOR BOTH SLIDING DOORS) 4 VESTIBULE ELEVATION E104 / SCALE = 1/4" =1' -0" r•. ��c.- .._..,�.,_..� 4444._ 4444_. - 4444.-_. 11--- 1 4444__ r- 11 II Ii 11 11 I x,17474- - -I 7474-- 7474 E� -�� 7474 a Qpj k- I I; I I : rj nTrT -rr; --f- 1 i I, 54 U -11 SENSOR -1-1(:). SP d I2 P I l' >' I II H 1 1 I ---- Il '; 'i 1°jTRNING SP W -2 SP -i- :- ±- 1:ROOM PD =_ II c n � it l -1.i I i•! -`Il 4ti -Y -1I • 1 1 cm< C-19 __ k Ijllii 1 I I jll . I I -1 ' 17:1477-1.H" -? .; 1I IDFfl' I i 1 ill , 11 SP 1 ji r I . I I �J i- ! C-i II1I 1 I,1 p- �t- III I 1 C 1.7 III C -13 9' 12Q, VM L �1 1 9' -C" __ 4. I • i. 1 C -20 11' -0" RCU #3 SP X -,_ ,4,4,44 44}74 ; i 1 _, I i 4474. RTU -2 SENSOR Imo^ ��i 1 ( E a C -12 9' -10" SP L --2 V C -18 P -2 b6 ", j --1 -. - - - . ia. =m._1' Ii, r I 1 i- Hi !i I� i I II I it r -m I I _ I Ir "�! I'' ?� ®. I�;�f' ,I P-fi r: i I 4 t _o RTU -F5 SENSOR __ I ' T I I ' -�li I. I �� E I i i l i I� fr--- 1 i i t ,.., A H 1-1 -1- -,I ■ 1 "-'I i IL ---r 1 I i H--°-41'm--1 -- -� - - 1- r,.- '-1----7-17---- - -- ; "-- - i i SP ,- s- ...- -1 T.-.,i -.1 1 l .0 J I I i • 2 LB - 19 9 r , -- .--; , co ‘— co ! -__1 LB - 34 --I .1 ELC -32 gcLC - 12 , LC - 12 . LB - 21= _ L C - 30 -' MANAGER'S LC -28 OFFICE 11 111 ;7, co ROOM 112 ! it '2T I• Le- J i [- 11 II Higc LB - 19 q ENLARGED OFFICES - LEFT SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" IL GP 1[ GP GP if 7ILB - 31:LB - 331B -33 CRT CHARGING STATION PLUGMOLD - LB - 37 - - - 1 IG Ef3 LB - 33 LC - 6 ' --------- PHONE/DATA-- PROCESSING ROOM ELEV. A E20,,) SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" KEY NOTES: 1 EC SHALL CONNECT TO PREWIRED REGISTERS, SODA COOLER AND ICE MACHINES AS SHOWN. CONNECT OWNER SUPPLIED WHIPS TO UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM AND MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS. 2 EAS PANEL FOR FUTURE EAS SYSTEM. SEE DETAILS 8/E202 AND 9/E202 FOR DETAILS. TYPICAL FOR ALL EAS PANELS. 3 MOUNT JB 18" AFF, BELOW COUNTER, FOR WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVES. EC SHALL PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES AT WATER CLOSET AND CONNECT COMPLETE SYSTEM. TRANSFORMERS AND SENSORS BY PC. COVER PLATE SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH WALL. 4 MOUNT 18" AFF, BELOW COUNTER, FOR LAVATORY FAUCET SENSORS. PC SHALL PROVIDE TRANSFORMER, SENSOR FAUCETS AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS, PC SHALL WIRE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING, U.N.O. 5 ALL RECEPTACLES IN MOTHERS ROOM SHALL BE TAMPER-RESISTANT. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 6 COORDINATE LOCATION W/ FACTORY INSTALLED LED DISPLAY LIGHTING. 7 EC SHALL CONNECT TO (6) OWNER SUPPLIED POWER SUPPLIES FOR DVR EQUIPMENT. Cr> CO Cq-CO-T-C?-°—Ct) Ct) _t CO t -I CO 1 -I ! Ca 1 1 Ca JH PROCESSING ROOM 106 LB - 15, 17 CI13-1 • ,LB- 19 \\1141_6 SPD LC - 8 LB 37 1--- fir:3-1, L 1 I LC - 16 201 I I LC - 18 nZn • LB - 3 = _ _ D - 54 „ , I : ; 1 IHAN:DRYER- THAND7DR.YER---1L . , . • ; II ; co ; ; ' 't!III:!!I • ' • - ; I • EQUIPMENT ROOM 107 I 7.— S Ht I i 1 I I', ! I \ - • .; nj \ • i , ( , i 1 ‘1 ; '11 -IQ 9fP-----z-----;-\\ I ',11..---•0"4:c.":'-',`402c01--- ."9's , ,:,,,,,4, I i _1 _J r- —1_1, 0 811 II . • , -.1m,- I \...._.„, , _, 1 ii 1 , LJ j I [. 1, ,1 I, 11 r ! 4 ICE CREAM MACHINE LB - 4 SODA COOLER I LB - 2i LB - 10t, r1:1 LC -9 LB - 12 ; LC - 11 LB - 14 1:2 LB -16 i."), 1 I I' .....J! .......11 __:.4„._ It._ .1,...! II I! 1 ii ' 1 !! ji II 11 • i , I; I: i !! I.: i . I t I : ! i:JI :! : i... IL _-_: 71771'—'-'—/ I A 11 \ . \ : '-..._.; ',..:,__J 1 / \N ENTRY VESTIBULE LB - 23 I ctE LA - 16 ..!;r1i:. LA - 16 lir —10 PRA E-N---1 -----1=ELc- 4 : . REFRIG;1‘TOk___II 1..% tc-OOM 1 ;I „.'' 1 1 GFI il 111 1 Il LA- 10":---,1 11'- I :: !I I ! .:---:-<,: t, ti. j ;i---118 lc I, H-2k--- ' ' HA _ 42i r-‘, hir-----d LAO_FiF4E! i'MAi KER7,77 j 11 1 11(,,,,,_11 GFI i; 11 li 1 i•-1511 46” IJ )1 72" I i 1 .! - : 1...1....-..4.-..„,.... • • ..--- . ,,-,...„--. ; -...-1 I LO i I— t _ ;, . Iv - I •,I, co _ II I ..-1 .. al --;--r-",--y- , , ' !HAND DRYER-t-4-, HAND DRYER1 : . ' ' LB - 56 - ENLARGED BREAK AREA SCALE = 1/8" = I-0" II D 11 I i=•----1- n fl 1 [1 ::-:- , . . 1 1 I i 1 it I: i i, , II_ i _II "=---- P. ---F-- T ----` — —.1r-- f 1.1 ci ..! J • il ,I II PLUGMOLD - 3'-0" i El] EE ----i LC - 8 LB - 35[ 61 17•71675,1e7WIMIVIImInaver II .-■. I PHONE/DATA ;-- PROCESSING ROOM ELEV. B SCALE = 1/4" = 1 '-0" EC SHALL PROVIDE SINGLE RECEPTACLE WITH ON/OFF WITCH FOR COMPRESSOR, MOUNT HIGH JUST INSIDE DOOR FOR EASY ACCESS LA - 37 I > ________ __I-IL: K ,/: It \ 1 • - ; \:„. 1 / - 1; / • i-- I BIKE ASSEMBLY ELEVATION SCALE = 1/4" = 102 A H --- EXIT VESTIBULE 103 LC -3 LB - 6 - LC - 5 LB -8 Ld- 9 LB I— — — ----v. 1 , `k i , \ 5 /6 ENLARGED FRONT END POWER SCALE = 1/8" = 1_11 9:1-1 LB - LB 42 : I LILO O rri-L1 jj)72" kp MICROWAVE GFI LA- 12 46" r bI /- F-HH 1 + PLUGMOLD - 3'-0" r ::i IG13 l IG 11 ;LC- 10 LC-10 P HONFJDAT___A I —1 LB -36 9 MANAGERS OFFICE ELEV. A SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" f- TASK LIGHT I SEE E102 i PHyNtiOATA BOX LA - 33 [LC - 31 LA - 31 9 9 IL -LIGHt.SWITCH !;I 13 b ; ;'r III-1 1- I 1 L t; • (2) 4" CONDUITS FOR BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. STUB INTO SALES AREA AT DECK EC SHALL HARDWIRE POWER SUPPLY FROM SAME CIRCUIT. RETURN GOODS DESK SCALE = 1/4" =11-0" (1"C) & (2"C) RUN POWER/DATA DOWN COLUMN AND STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR. LC -22 LI- ( 4 1 II I : LC - 23 LA - 28 '91# 6' -6^ z, VI...41LC- 25 _LI ; LC -25 v • 7- I" 77-7 5 5 ENLARGED ELECTRONICS DESK SCALE = 1/8" = I-0" T-1 PHONE VR SYSTEM IG • LC - 30 i-DVR MONITOR LC - 32 IG MANAGERS OFFICE ELEV. B SCALE = 1/4" = 1'-0" ALARM SYSTEM C.P. EXPAN. MOD. P.S. API S F.A.C.P. JUNCTION BOX LC -24 FIRE ALARM PANEL UL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY WITH AUXILARY POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT RM ELE. B SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" (3) 4" CONDUIT STUBED AT 8'-0". RUN ALONG TOP CHORD OF BAR JOIST. STUB 2' INTO SALES FLOOR. PAINT TO MATCH. LI 9U MANAGER'S OFFICE 111 COUNT ROOM 112 PROCESSING ROOM 106 EQUIPMENT ROOM I ' \ -!-- — I ! flI 11- 1-2-7-1 F-77-1 LC - 39Z, " 0 ; , . og: 8 . a) L0 ci) v.) co c.) . --1 —1 i - FI ,\,____ii [ i 1 --7"-::::-H,LC - 3711..,-611 '''' 1 i 1 I I \..___} I ; I LB - 39* 11 I I I ,-----1 ''- 7 1 ii ..e.;: .._ ...... .... ...... ...._ ..... ... ........ ... ..... LC - 39'3= 1 co ;T: ce) 4 I C.) co I : B it 0 Ca 1 I. ...I /..,—..... J / \ I ! I t____ „..", _177:1) I ( ___,\I I— , 1 1 c ,....) („_ ________.„ „__:__ _ _.______:_i \\ \\ • \\ \\ ,..i; ! ...,,i ,9„, rps-N, -- 1 (1"C) & (2"C) RUN POWER/DATA DOWN COLUMN AND STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR. 3 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 201 /1:13 MOTION DETECTOR 1 1 L D t .....___,_...__I-. 1 1 L t__.t PHONE/DATA ---\ COUNT ELEV. B SCALE = 1/4" = (2) 4" CONDUIT STUBED AT 8'-0". TO DECK FOR LV CABLING NOT RUN INTO SALES FLOOR. a W-16 LC-18 IG IG RELAY RACK SERVER RACK PHONE RACK (2) 4" TELEPHONE SERVICE TO DEMARK. COORDINATE WITH CPM. 13 EQUIPMENT RM ELE. A E201 SCALE = 1/4" = I-0" SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" It, - I . \ \ . / \ \ \ , \ I /.7/ \‘' . \\ \,/.-1:6. -• ii I F Il II. I 1 1 ti I I j / PLUGMOLD - 3'-0" 1G9 LC - 14 PHONE/DATA 6 COUNT ELEV. A 20) SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" b (01 RECEIVED MAR 11 2010 PERMIT CENTER HONE BOARD E.C. TO PROVIDE #6 GROUND WIRE FROM PHONE BOARD GROUND TO ELECTRICAL GROUND. BURGLAR ALARM PANEL FIRE ALARM PANEL EQUIPMENT RM. KEY PLAN SCALE = 1/4" = V-0" SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED 1.1 1.." 11 I P.■ I I /1 ' LUNt I K. LJUL.; ?St Kt.VIILJIN NO. DATE DESCRIPTION II 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE , .ER ENGINEERS & CON . TANTS 923 MAIN STREET, N. WILKESBORO 1C 28659 PHONE: 336-667-4225 FAX: 336-67-4332 ar-1.0..... Y OV VIA • c<1/44. 4.44fr .A r o 4 -4. I, t b or stto _ .40%,0NAL 8 v:t 4- isitx) / . . . _ - YS° STORE SUPPORT ONE GEOFFREY WAYNE, NJ 07470 u]: > CENTER WAY THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUMILA 7 WA DRAWING TITLE ENLARGED VIEWS AND DETAILS SCALE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. , 201 z\R 4 1/2" CONDUIT. TYPICAL 1/2" DEEP JB. PANTED TO MATCH EXIT SIGN DETAIL E202 / SCALE = 3/4" =1' -0" BRASS COVER WIREMOLD 825CK -1" FLOOR BOX WIREMOLD 800LCK TO EAS PANEL CENTER OF DOOR EQ EQ iL_ 1" CONDUIT -Fr J NOTE: 6' -0" SPACING FOR 12' -0" &10'-O" DOORS (TYP.) 5' -2" SPACING FOR 9' -0" & 8' -0" DOORS (TYP.) 2' -2" FROM INSIDE EDGE OF DOOR FRAME (TYP.) VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS WITH TRU PM EAS PEDESTAL FLOOR DETAIL SCALE = 1/2" =1' -0" AFTERSETS FINISH FLOOR SAND 3" CONCRETE SUB SLAB CONCRETE COMPLETELY SURROUNDING DUCT 3 UNDERFLOOR DUCT GROUTING E202 / SCALE = 3/32" =1'-0" (2) 3/4" C. WITH PULL STRINGS , TO JOIST AREA FOR FUTURE EAS SYSTEM, CONCEAL IN WALL. TURN OUT AND BUSH EACH, INSIDE CABINET. RECESSED BOX 18" X 18" X 6" D. (HOFFMAN) BOX: #A SG118X18X6 DOOR FRAME: #AFDF1818P, T R LOCK KIT LOUVER KIT: #A VK86 SERVICE LED VESTIBULE BUMPER GUARD (TYP.) TOP OF PNL, MOUNT 1. -11" A.F.F. BOX WITH LOCKABLE ACCESS DOOR & LOUVER VENT BY EC. PAINT COVER TO MATCH WALL SURFACE. UNDERGROUND CONDUIT TO FUTURE EAS PEDESTALS. LV WIRING BY EAS VENDOR. 8 ELEVATION 15A, 120V. NEMA, 1/2 HP RATED SINGLE POLE SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT, I.G. RECEPTACLE FOR EAS SYSTEM POWER 4 "X4" EAS SYSTEM JB WITH TEST SWITCH. SERVICE LED AND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE BY EC. CONDUIT TO PANELS BY EC. EAS SYSTEM RECEPTACLE IN HANDY BOX, BY EC. (NORMAL POWER) EAS MOUNTING DETAIL E202/ SCALE = 1/16" = 1' -0" PIGTAILS SHALL EXTEND OUT OF FIXTURE FOR FINAL CONNECTION BY EC 3 -LAMP BALLAST (TYPICAL CIRCUITING) w vU ii w co FIXTURE TYPE CALLOUT LTE CIRCUIT — CALLOUTS BALLAST HOUSINGS ABOVE FIXTURE EMERGENCY BALLAST (WHERE APPLICABLE) PHASE 'B' SHALL ALWAYS BE CONNECTED TO BALLAST THAT SHARES EMERGENCY BALLAST, AND SHALL BE USED FOR NIGHT LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT. NON - SWITCHED PHASE 'B' SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALL EMERGENCY PENDANTS, SEE TERMINAL STRIP ON ONE -LINE DIAGRAM. PENDANT- COMPACT FLUORESCENT FIXTURE TYPE CALLOUT DE TYPICAL 8' -0" 4 LAMP FIXTURE 4 LAMP BALLAST 0 -10V DIMMING 4 INDICATES CIRCUIT NON SWITCH SOURCE, OF SAME CIRCUIT AS NORMAL BALLAST SEE TERMINAL SWITCH ON ONE - LINE DIAGRAM. EMERGENCY BALLAST (WHERE APPLICABLE) LINEAR FLUORESCENT (12� FIXTURE WIRING DIAGRAMS SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" EXPOSED DATA/POWER CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH PERIMETER WALL (2) 2" CONDUITS FOR DATA TO DECK. RUN IN WALL TO DECK. WALKER #H322 -2 TRANSITION (2) 2" CONDUITS NO. 4 WALKER DUCT BLANK - 1 1/4" CONDUIT FOR POWER. MOUNT IN WALL TO DECK WALKER NO.312 -1 1/4 NO. 2 DUCT BLANK WALKER NO.332UF 90 °VERTICAL ELBOW NO. 2 WALKER DUCT BLANK IN SLAB FOR POWER TO CASH REGISTERS. PROVIDE WITH 90° HORIZ. ELBOW AS REQUIRED. WALKER NO.H332 90° VERTICAL ELBOW. STUB UP INSIDE WALL DIRECTLY UNDER ACCESS BOX NO. 4 WALKER DUCT BLANK IN SLAB FOR DATA/COMM TO CASH REGISTERS. PROVIDE WITH 90° HORIZ. ELBOW AS REQUIRED. WALKER STUB AT WALL SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" EC TO DRILL A 3/4" DIAMETER HOLE INTO COLUMN AT BOTH TOP AND 7' -0" A.F.F. FOR CONTROL WIRE. ROUTE CONTROL WIRE DOWN INSIDE OF COLUMN TO SENSOR. COLUMN SENSOR NOTES: 1. LOCATE SENSORS IN SALES AREA ON SIDE OF COLUMNS WHERE NOTED AND SHOWN. 2. BOTTOM OF SENSOR TO BE MOUNTED 7' -0" A.F.F. (TYPICAL) UNO. (SALES AREA ONLY) CONTROL BOX- PAINT TO MATCH COLUMN CONTROL WIRING COLUMN CONTROL BOX PAINT TO MATCH COLUMN (7SENSOR MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" FMC TO DECK MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX, PROVIDE APPROX.18" FOR MINOR ADJUSTMENTS OF FIXTURE. JB MOUNTED TO DECK. FOR MAIN POWER RUN. SHC BALL TYPE SWIVEL HANGER, APPLETON #8456R OR EQUAL. L- I w E (11 PENDANT MTG DETAIL SCALE = 1" =1' -0" UNISTRUT BOLTED TO JOIST, ABOVE TOP CHORD (TYP.) PROVIDE 3/4" RIGID CONDUIT TO SUPPORT LIGHT FIXTURE. BALLAST HOUSING ACCEPTS 3/4" THREADING. EC SHALL RUN WIRE THROUGH CONDUIT AND HARD -WIRE FINAL CONNECTION TO FIXTURE. NOTE: ALL CONDUIT AND UNISTRUT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH ROOF DECK. 1 POWER: CABLE GRIP #5541NM W/ NONMETALIC GRIP WHIP PROVIDED BY OTHERS FOR PREWIRED REGISTER SYSTEM. POWER. BRASS COVER PLATE #431 BR075 (2) #4220 AFTERSET INSERT ISOMETRIC BRASS AFTERSET TELEPHONE: LOCATION COVER BRASS COMMUNICATION COVER PLATE #829STC #4220 AFTERSET INSERT CORE DRILL 6 1/2" DIAMETER HOLE TO DUCT, THEN DRILL A 2 1/2" HOLE INTO DUCT CENTERED IN A 6 1/2" HOLE IN CONCRETE. GROUT FILL AROUND AFTERSET TO FILL VOIDS IN 6 1/2" HOLE, ATTACHES TO DUCT WITH LOCKING TABS. 2" CONCRETE NO 2 DUCT 3 1/8" X 1 1/4" WALKER DUCT NOTE: AFTERSET INSERTS & FITTINGS MUST BE LOCATED BELOW CASH REGISTERS AND CUSTOMER SERVICE DESK. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT CORE DRILL BUILDING SLAB FOR AFTERSET LOCATIONS UNTIL ALL MILLWORK HAS BEEN CONFIRMED. COORDINATE WITH LATEST Fl AND BRU REP. UNDERFLOOR WALKER DUCT DETAIL E202 / SCALE = 1/16" = I'-0" J -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE TRU GONDOLA 6 CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION TEAM SHALL ATTACH LIGHT TO GONDOLA W/ INCLUDED BRACKET HARDWARE INCLUDED W/ FIXTURE GONDOLA TYPE 'VL' FIXTURE TRU 3 TIER VALANCE E202 / SCALE = 1/2" = .1' -0" EC SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SCREWS FOR CONNECTION OF ADJOINING FIXTURES. 10 J -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE TRU GONDOLA CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL — INSTALLATION TEAM SHALL ATTACH LIGHT TO GONDOLA W/ INCLUDED 'Z' BRACKET HARDWARE INCLUDED W/ FIXTURE GONDOLA TYPE'VL' FIXTURE 5 TRU 2 TIER VALANCE SCALE = 1/2" = 1' -0" WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE SEISMIC SPLINE LINES AT 45 AT 8,-0" O.C. (TYPICAL FOR ALL MOUNTING DETAILS) AIRCRAFT CABLE FURNISHED WITH LIGHT FIXTURE 4' -O" 4' -O' 4' -O" 111 8' -O" TYPE "D" FIXTURES U BRACKET FURN ISHED W/ LIGHT FIXTURES CADDY /ERICO SPEED LINK CABLE TIE CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 02/26/10 ISSUED FOR 90% LL REVIEW 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS NO. 0 PROTOTYPE UPDATES DATE 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE ENGINEERS & CONSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET, N. WILKESBORO. NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 336 - 667 -4332 TOP OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBER AIRCRAFT CABLE FURNISHED WITH LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURE NOTE: 1. STRUT SHALL ONLY BE PROVIDED IF AIRCRAFT CABLE CANNOT BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY TO JOIST. 2. EC SHALL PROVIDE (2) SCREWS FOR EACH CONNECTION OF AN ADJACENT FIXTURE. 3. PRE -SALES AND RECEIVING AREA ARE SIMILAR, EXCEPT LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE MOUNTED ABOVE BOTTOM OF JOIST. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A UNIFORM 6 " -12" OF TIEBACK ABOVE LIGHT FIXTURE THROUGHOUT SALES FLOOR SALES AREA MOUNTING DETAIL E202 / SCALE = 12" =11-0" LOCATE CONDUITS 5" TIGHT TO COLUMN . 30" / / PAINT TO MATCH COLUMN. 22" VERIFY EXACT LOCATION FROM LATEST "Fl" PLAN COLUMN 0 PLAN BOXES MUST BE LOCATED BEHIND ACCESS PANEL IN METAL DESK WORKSTATION. 46" °o 27" 2 -G. BOX 0I. EC TO PROVIDE ANGLES WHERE NEEDED 30" 4 1 -G•B °X ELEVATION METAL DESK WORKSTATION SCALE = 1/8" =1' -0" 3/4" C -POWER COLUMN. PAINT CONDUITS TO MATCH WALL 3/4" C -DATA RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL �o in0 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE DETAILS SCALE As indicated SHEET NO. ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 E202 /\R E RR KS, b► Pu"; ENGINEERS & CONSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET, N. WILKESBORO. NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 336 - 667 -4332 TOP OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBER AIRCRAFT CABLE FURNISHED WITH LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURE NOTE: 1. STRUT SHALL ONLY BE PROVIDED IF AIRCRAFT CABLE CANNOT BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY TO JOIST. 2. EC SHALL PROVIDE (2) SCREWS FOR EACH CONNECTION OF AN ADJACENT FIXTURE. 3. PRE -SALES AND RECEIVING AREA ARE SIMILAR, EXCEPT LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE MOUNTED ABOVE BOTTOM OF JOIST. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A UNIFORM 6 " -12" OF TIEBACK ABOVE LIGHT FIXTURE THROUGHOUT SALES FLOOR SALES AREA MOUNTING DETAIL E202 / SCALE = 12" =11-0" LOCATE CONDUITS 5" TIGHT TO COLUMN . 30" / / PAINT TO MATCH COLUMN. 22" VERIFY EXACT LOCATION FROM LATEST "Fl" PLAN COLUMN 0 PLAN BOXES MUST BE LOCATED BEHIND ACCESS PANEL IN METAL DESK WORKSTATION. 46" °o 27" 2 -G. BOX 0I. EC TO PROVIDE ANGLES WHERE NEEDED 30" 4 1 -G•B °X ELEVATION METAL DESK WORKSTATION SCALE = 1/8" =1' -0" 3/4" C -POWER COLUMN. PAINT CONDUITS TO MATCH WALL 3/4" C -DATA RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL �o in0 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE DETAILS SCALE As indicated SHEET NO. ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 E202 /\R ti r PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.LO. / M.C.B. - A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "MDP" 277/480 30, 4W 1000 M.C.B. 50K PNL / 35K CKT BRKS No No No Yes DESCRIPTION CKT DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION CKT 20 "HA" 225 ��. LINEAR SALES LTG. 28.38 SODA COOLER 2 225 �\ �\ 3 -T-1" 20 23.97 0.20 28.38 ■ 4 3 23.97 6 RTU SERVICE REC. 20 28.38 10+ 23.97 7 "T -2" 100 �\ ��. /\ 0.36 15.43 DOOR BUZZER 20 110 �\ �\ 11 RTU -1 8 23.55 10 20 15.43 GP DUPLEX 9 23.55 12 14* 15.43 11 23.55 13 RTU -2 110 /\ ITh 20 23.55 20 0.60 70 �\ / 7.\ \ RTU-3 14 15.79 EF -1 23.55 0.70 16 15 15.79 18 14 0.36 23.55 17 15.79 19 RTU -4 70 �- 0.36 15.79 REGISTER 16 25 /-\ t-\ 20* RTU-8 20 5.00 EXPRESS REGISTER 15.79 17 22 21 5.00 24 SPARE 22 15.79 23 5.00 25 RTU-9 30 �-� /\ \. 2.77 3.01 0.54 25 �\ �� 7--\ 20 RTU -10 26 5.54 28 VESTIBULE REC. 2.77 0.62 27 -. 30 SPARE 24 2.77 29 5.54 31 RTU -11 30 C---N �\ \. 3.88 SPARE 26 35 �� �\ \ RTU Al 32 8.03 0.00 8.03 20 34 33 0.18 36 SPARE 3.88 29 8.03 37 RTU -A2 35 �\ \. 8.03 31 SPARE 35 �\ �\ 0.00 RTU A3 20 8.03 40 32 8.03 . 39 20 42 41 8.03 8.03 43 RTU -A4 35 /_\ �\ \. 8.03 20 35 25 �\ 0.36 RTU A5 MANAGER OFFICE PLGMD 5.54 46 45 PROCESSING ROOM PLGMD 8.03 . 8.03 20 0.00 20 47 5.54 49 COMPACTOR 25 �-�. �\ 20 1.50 1.08 SPARE 20 �\ /\ SPARE BAILER 50 3.00 52 20 3.00 ■ 1.50 51 20 54 42 53 3.00 SPARE SPACE 0 �\ 42 0.00 20 SPARE 15 �� �\ 0.00 POWER METER 56 0.10 58 57 0.00 . 0.10 59 60 SPARE 20 0.00 0.10 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE TYPE LSG 205.9 205.9 205.9 TOTAL CONNECTED= 617.7 KVA PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.LO. / M.C.B. I.G. A.I.C. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "LB" 120/208 30, 4W 100 M.LO. 10K FULLY RATED No No Yes No DOUBLE SECTION CKT DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION CKT 1 AUTO DOOR OPENER 20 0.72 * 7 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 SODA COOLER 2 1.00 3 PHONE BOARD 20 8 * 0.20 3.50 20 ICE CREAM MACHINE 4 1.20 5 RTU SERVICE REC. 20 10* 10+ 1.08 20 EXPRESS REGISTER 6 0.36 7 DOOR BUZZER 20 0.36 11 150 20 REGISTER 8 20 9 GP DUPLEX 20 20 0.36 14* 20 REGISTER 10 0.36 11 WATER COOLER 20 3.81 20 0.60 20 REGISTER 12 0.36 13 EF -1 20 0.70 20 0.36 20 REGISTER 14 0.36 15 CU -1 & AHU -1 15 1--■ * 19 LINEAR SALES LTG. 1.00 0.36 20 REGISTER 16 0.36 20* 17 1.00 20 EXPRESS REGISTER 18 17 0.36 19 OFFICE AREA REC., CP -1 20 SPARE 22 20 20 SPARE 20 0.00 21 OFFICE AREA REC. 20 3.01 0.54 FRONT BREAK/ REST. LTG. 20 METAL WORKSTATION 22 6 23 VESTIBULE REC. 20 0.62 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 0.36 20 SPARE 24 0.00 25 MOTHER'S RM. REC. 20 0.90 20 20 20 SPARE 26 0.00 27 SPARE 20 7 0.00 PRESALES/ RECEIVING LTG. 20 CUST. SERVICE DESK 28 0.18 29 SPARE 20 29 0.00 0.00 20 OUST. SERVICE DESK 30 0.36 31 SPARE 20 0.00 32 20 20 SPARE 32 0.00 33 PROCESSING ROOM 20 33 1.26 SPARE 20 MANAGER OFFICE PLGMD 34 0.18 35 PROCESSING ROOM 20 35 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 0.36 20 MANAGER OFFICE PLGMD 36 0.18 37 PROCESSING ROOM PLGMD 20 0 . 20 0.00 20 COUNT RM PLGMD 38 0.36 18 39 SPECIAL ORDER DESK • 20 0.10 1.08 SPARE 20 SPARE 40 0.00 41 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 20 EAS SYSTEM 2 50 0 20 TRAINING ROOM REC. 42 0.10 43 SPARE 20 0.00 42 20 20 SPARE 44 0.00 45 SPARE 20 44 0.00 20 SPARE 46 0.00 47 SPARE 20 20 /Th �\ 0.00 20 SPARE 48 0.00 49 SPARE 20 0.00 50 20 LAVATORY SENSORS 50 0.54 51 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 52 0.00 53 SPARE 20 53 SPARE 0.00 20 WOMENS HAND DRYER 54 0.90 55 SPARE 20 0.00 20 WOMENS HAND DRYER 56 0.90 57 SPARE 20 0.00 20 MENS HAND DRYER 58 0.90 59 SPARE 20 0.00 20 MENS HAND DRYER 60 0.90 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 7.39 7.8 8.08 TOTAL CONNECTED= 2327 KVA PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.LO. / M.C.B. A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB COMMENTS . "HA" 277/480 30, 4W 225 M.L.O. 65K PNL / 35K CKT BRKS No No No Yes CKT DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Co BKR DESCRIPTION o! qt H CKT O # 3 * 1 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 3.26 PHASE AMPS 20 / 1 PENDANT SALES LTG. 2 * 9 PRE FAB 4.13 3 * 3 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 10K FULLY RATED 3.26 No 4 * 10+ 4.15 3 * 5 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 Bo Co 3.26 6 * 11 4.13 4 * 7 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 3.26 20 VIEW MONITOR 20 /\ 0.05 PENDANT SALES LTG. 8 * 9 3.50 4 * 9 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 4 2.98 5 10* 10+ 383 4 *11 UNEAR SALES LTG. 20 6 0.36 3.26 12* 11 150 4 * 13 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 3.40 0.36 9 20 VESTIBULE/ CUST. LTG. 14* 8 20A/4P 5 * 15 UNEAR SALES LTG. 20 11 3.81 20 20 SPARE 16 20 0.00 5 *17 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 20 0.36 3.81 20 SPARE 18* 14 0.00 5 * 19 LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 0.36 19 20 20 SPARE 20* 17 o.00 6 *21 PERIM. UNEAR SALES LTG. 20 20 3.40 18 20 SPARE 22 20 0.00 6 *23 PERIM. UNEAR SALES LTG. 20 20 0.00 3.01 20 FRONT BREAK/ REST. LTG. 24* 0.36 1.85 6 *25 PERIM. LINEAR SALES LTG. 20 0.62 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 20 20 FRONT OFFICE/ REST. LTG. 26* 20 FIRE ALARM PANEL 24 27 SPARE 20 20 0.00 BRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 20 SPARE 28 26 0.00 7 *29 PRESALES/ RECEIVING LTG. 20 0.18 1.31 20 SPARE 30 29 0.00 7 * 31 PRESALES/ RECEIVING LTG. 20 1.31 DVR SYSTEM 30 20 SPARE 32 20 0.00 TOTAL CONNECTED= 6.42 KVA 33 SPARE 20 32 0.00 33 20 SPARE 34 0.00 0.00 20 35 SPARE 20 35 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 0.00 20 UH -1 36 20 1.22 36 37 SPARE 20 0.00 1.08 20 WATER HEATER 38 SPD 2.60 0.10 39 SPARE 20 0.00 0.00 20 20 "FTU" MOTHERS ROOM 40 EAS SYSTEM 2 50 20 41 SPARE 20 0.10 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 0.00 30 EWH -2 42 20 6.00 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE + CONTACTOR #12 FOR NL. 29.65 23.93 31.35 TOTAL CONNECTED = 84.93KVA PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.L.O. / M.C.B. A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "LC" 120/208 30, 4W 100 M.L.O. 10K FULLY RATED Yes No Yes No DOUBLE SECTION # DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION CKT 1 VIEW MONITOR AND CCTV'S 20 0.90 0.36 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 20 VIEW MONITOR 2 0.05 3 EXPRESS REGISTER 20 HA 0.36 0.2 -0-DO07 20 TRAINING RM. 4 0.54 5 REGISTER 20 0.72 �\ 0.36 20 PROCESSING RM. 6 0.36 7 REGISTER 20 0.36 BUSWAY "D" PLGMD. 8 20 PROCESSING RM. 8 0.36 9 REGISTER 20 12 0.36 20A/4P 20 MANAGER OFFICE 10 0.36 11 REGISTER 20 "C -9" 1.25 0.36 20 MANAGER OFFICE 12 0.36 13 REGISTER 20 0.36 1.44 4 20 COUNT RM 14 0.36 15 EXPRESS REGISTER 20 2.52 0.36 19 20 RELAY RACK 16 1.00 17 PRINTER/FAX CUST. SERV. 20 \ BUSWAY "H" PLGMD. 0.36 20 SERVER RACK 18 1.00 19 CUST. SERVICE DESK 20 0.18 HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 20 SPARE 20 0.00 21 CUST. SERVICE DESK 20 0.00 0.36 0-2-1-D003 20 BURGLAR ALARM PANEL 22 0.36 23 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 20 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0.00 1.08 20 FIRE ALARM PANEL 24 0.18 25 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 20 0.72 BRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0.00 20 METAL WORKSTATION 26 0.18 27 BIKE AREA WRKSTN. 20 11.09 0.18 20 CCTV 28 0.36 29 SPARE 20 0.00 20 DVR SYSTEM 30 0.36 31 IDF, RGD DESK 20 0;38 TOTAL CONNECTED= 6.42 KVA 20 DVR MONITOR 32 1.08 33 SPARE 20 0.00 20 PRICE CHECKERS 34 1.08 35 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 20 0.72 20 PRICE CHECKERS 36 1.62 37 SPECIAL ORDER DESK 20 1.08 20 �\ �\ �\ SPARE SPD 38 0.10 39 REGISTRY KIOSK 20 0.00 0.72 20 40 0.10 41 EAS SYSTEM Y0 20 0.36 42 0.10 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 5.68 6.14 7.22 TOTAL CONNECTED= 19.04KVA THIS IS A DOUBLE SECTION PANELBOARD Q z 0 U w co 0 E H z O 0 15 15 16 16 FE z 0 U w PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.LO. / M.C.B. A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "LA" 120/208 30, 4W 250 M.C.B. 10K FULLY RATED No No No Yes DOUBLE SECTION #KT DESCRIPTION BKR As Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION CKT 1 TRU FRONT SIGNAGE 20 0.72 0.36 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 20 "C -1" - "C-5" COILS 2 0.05 3 TRU FRONT SIGNAGE 20 HA 0.54 0.2 -0-DO07 20 "C-6" - "C -16" COILS 4 LA 5 BRU FRONT SIGNAGE 20 0.72 �\ 0.90 20 VENDING 6 1.00 7 BRU FRONT SIGNAGE 20 0.72 BUSWAY "D" PLGMD. 8 20 VENDING 8 1.00 9 SPARE 20 12 0.00 20A/4P 20 REFRIGERATOR 10 1.20 11 SPARE 20 "C -9" 1.25 0.00 20 MICROWAVE 12 1.80 13 SPARE 20 0.00 1.44 4 20 COFFEE MAKER 14 1.20 15 SPARE 20 2.52 0.00 19 20 BREAK RM. REC. 16 0.72 17 DOCK REC. & LTG. 20 \ BUSWAY "H" PLGMD. 0.36 20 SPARE 18 0.00 19 DOCK REC. & LTG. 20 0.36 HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 20 SPARE 20 0.00 21 RTU SERVICE REC. 20 0.00 1.26 0-2-1-D003 20 SPARE 22 0.00 23 BRU SALES REC. 20 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0.00 0.72 20 SPARE 24 0.00 25 TRU SALES REC. 20 0.72 BRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0.00 20 SPARE 26 0.00 27 SPARE 20 11.09 0.00 20 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 28 1.08 29 RGD PLUGMOLD 20 0.18 20 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 30 0.72 31 RGD DESK REC. 20 0.18 TOTAL CONNECTED= 6.42 KVA 20 ELECTRONICS REGISTER 32 1.08 33 RGD DESK REC. - 20 0.18 - 20 BIKE WORKSTATION 34 0.18 35 BIKE ASSEMBLY PLGMD, EF3 20 0.36 20 SPARE 36 0.00 37 BIKE ASSEMBLY 20 0.18 20 SPARE 38 0.00 39 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 40 0.00 41 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 42 0.00 43 BIKE LIFT 20 1.20 20 r\ BIKE LIFT 44 1.20 46 1.20 45 1.20 47 BIKE LIFT 20 /Th �\ 1.20 20 BIKE LIFT 48 1.20 �\ 50 7 20 4.9 1.20 51 SPARE 20 0.00 20 �\ BIKE LIFT 52 1.20 0.00 54 53 SPARE 20 1.20 55 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 56 0 00 57 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 58 0.00 59 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 60 0.00 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 11.01 8.87 9.64 TOTAL CONNECTED= 29.52 KVA PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.L.O. / M.C.B. A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "LD1" 120/208 30, 4W 100 M.C.B. 10K FULLY RATED _ No No No Yes 150° #KT DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION CKT 1 BUSWAY "A" PLGMD. 60 �\ �\ Yes 0.36 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-0-D007 60 �\ f\ "C-4" BUSWAY "B" PLGMD. 2 1.98 4 HA 0.36 0.2 -0-DO07 3 0.72 6 LA 2 0.36 5 0.72 �\ 7 BUSWAY "C" PLGMD. 60 �\ / �\ \ 0.34 Yes HA 60 �\ /-\ 0- 2 -0-D006 BUSWAY "D" PLGMD. 8 1.98 LA 0.67 Yes 10 9 0.36 12 "C-8" 20A/4P 0.67 11 0.72 �\ 13 BUSWAY "E" PLGMD. 60 �\ �\ �\ "C -9" 1.25 LA 4 60 �\ \ BUSWAY "F" PLGMD. 14 2.88 16 20A/4P 1.44 4 15 HA 18 0- 2- 1 -D007 PENDANT (3) LAMPS 2.50 17 2.52 �\ 19 BUSWAY "G" PLGMD. 60 �\ �\ 0-2-1-D006 2.33 "C -12" 20A/4P 60 �\ / \ BUSWAY "H" PLGMD. 20 2.16 22 PENDANT NL LAMPS 2.16 20A/4P 21 2.16 24 HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 2.16 23 1,44 / 25 SPARE 20 0.00 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-1-D003 20 SPARE 26 0.00 27 SPARE 20 SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0.00 TRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 20 SPARE 28 0.00 29 SPARE 20 0- 2- 1 -D002 BRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0.00 20 SPARE 30 0.00 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 13.27 10.75 11.09 TOTAL CONNECTED= 35.11 KVA NOTE: EC SHALL PROVIDE NEW TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORIES IN PANELBOARDS WHERE CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN REVISED OR ADDED, INDICATING LOAD CHANGES OR ADDITIONS. TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE. . PLAN MARK KVA PHASE PRI. VOLT. SEC. VOLT. TEMP RISE COMMENTS SERVING ELEC. HELD "T -1" 150 30 480 120/208 150° MOUNTED ABOVE POWER WALL BY EC LA & LD 7-2" 75 30 480 120/208 150° MOUNTED AT DECK ABOVE PANEL 'LB' AND 'LC' BY EC LB & LC CONTACTOR SCHEDULE. . DESCRIPTION COIL CONTROL COMMENTS MARK AMP / POLES PNL CKT ELEC. HELD PNL CKTS OUTPUT # "LD2" "C -1" 100A/3P LA 2 No LD1 PANEL 0- 2 -0-D008 VALANCE & TRACK LTG. "C -2" 100AI3P LA 2 No LD2 PANEL 0- 2 -0-DO08 VALANCE & TRACK LTG. "C-3" 20A/4P LA 2 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-0-D007 LINEAR SALES LTG. "C-4" 20N4P LA 2 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0.2 -0-DO07 LINEAR SALES LTG. "C-5" 20N4P LA 2 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 21E301 0- 2 -0-D007 LINEAR SALES LTG. "C-6" 20AI4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 21E301 0- 2 -0-D006 LINEAR SALES LTG. (PERIMETER LTG) "C -7" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0- 2 -0-D005 PRESALES/ RECEIVING LTG. "C-8" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0- 2 -0-D004 VESTIBULE/ CUST. LTG. "C -9" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 21E301 0- 2- 1 -D008 PENDANT (3) LAMPS "C -10" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0- 2- 1 -D007 PENDANT (3) LAMPS "C -11" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 21E301 0-2-1-D006 PENDANT (3) LAMPS "C -12" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-1-D005 PENDANT NL LAMPS "C -13" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-1-D004 SECURITY LIGHTING "C -14" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes HA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-1-D003 EXTERIOR LIGHTING "C -15" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes LA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0-2-1-D002 TRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE "C -16" 20A/4P LA 4 Yes LA SEE DETAIL 2/E301 0- 2- 1 -D002 BRU EXTERIOR SIGNAGE PLAN I.D. CRITICAL PANEL INFORMATION MOUNT TYPE COMMENTS VOLTS PHASE AMPS M.LO. / M.C.B. A.I.C. I.G. BUS SURF. MNT. REC. MNT. PRE FAB "LD2" 120/208 30, 4W 100 M.C.B. 10K FULLY RATED No No No Yes CKT DESCRIPTION BKR Ao Bo Co BKR DESCRIPTION #� 1 VALANCE LIGHTS 20 0.87 20 PLGMD. 2 1.08 3 PLGMD. 20 0.36 20 PLGMD. 4 1.08 5 SPARE 20 �. 20 BIKE VALANCE LIGHTS 6 7 ELECTR. PLGMD. 20 0.00 20 SPARE 8 9 ELECTR. PLGMD. 20 0.89 20 SPARE 10 0.00 11 SPARE 20 0.00 20 ELECTR. DESK RECEPT. 12 0.18 13 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 14 0.00 15 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 16 0.00 17 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 18 0.00 19 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 20 0.00 21 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 22 0.00 23 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 24 0.00 25 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 26 0.00 27 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 28 0.00 29 SPARE 20 0.00 20 SPARE 30 0.00 * HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 2.49 2.33 1.61 TOTAL CONNECTED= 6.42 KVA CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE 0 10/28/09 DESCRIPTION 2010 58K REV. 0 • BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE ENGINEERS & C 1 NSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET. N. WILKESB /RO C 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 1.6 -> • 7 -4332 ea.3, . / A. R. pt '�h� ey0 6 I J VV Ctl V t� -1 j5 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION T U KW I LA, WA DRAWING TITLE PANEL SCHEDULES SCALE ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. E301 �a NOTE: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING QUANTITIES: 1 POLE CIRCUIT -1 HOT, 1 NEUTRAL, 1 GROUND 2 POLE CIRCUIT - 2 HOT, 1 GROUND 3 POLE CIRCUIT - 3 HOT, 1 GROUND 1 POLE IG CIRCUIT -1 HOT, 1 NEUTRAL, 1 GROUND, 1 ISOLATED GROUND. MINIMUM WIRE & CONDUIT SIZES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES AMPS LOAD ANALYSIS AT PANELBOARDS: GROUND (CU) HA MISC. MECHANICAL LIGHTING TOTAL 8.60 KVAX 1.00 = 8.60 3.72 KVA X 1.00 = 3.72 72.61 KVA X 1.00 = 72.61 84.93 KVA 84.93 84.93 KVA = 102.5 KVA KVA KVA KVA AMPS LC RECEPTACLES MISC. TOTAL FIRST 10 KVA 10.0 KVA X 1.00 =10.00 KVA 18.74 REMAINING 8.74 KVAX 0.50 = 4.37 KVA 0.30 KVA X 1.00 = 0.30 KVA 19.04 KVA 14.67 KVA 14.67 KVA = 40.72 AMPS LA RECEPTACLES MISC. MECHANICAL TOTAL FIRST 10 KVA 10.0 KVA X 1.00 = 10.0 13.16 REMAINING 3.16 KVA X 0.50 = 1.58 4.36 KVA X 1.00 = 4.36 12.00 KVAX 1.00 = 12.00 29.52 KVA 27.94 27.94 KVA = 77.55 KVA KVA KVA KVA KVA AMPS LD1 RECEPTACLES LIGHTING TOTAL FIRST 10 KVA 10.0 KVA X 1.00 =10.00 KVA 32.76 REMAINING 22.76 KVA X 0.50 =11.38 KVA 2.35 KVA X 1.00 = 2.35 KVA 35.11 KVA 23.70 KVA . 23.70 KVA = 65.87 AMPS LB RECEPTACLES MISC. MECHANICAL TOTAL FIRST 10 KVA 10.0 KVA X 1.00 =10.00 13.16 REMAINING 3.16 KVA X 0.50 = 1.58 7.41 KVA X 1.00 = 7.41 2.70 KVA X 1.00 = 2.70 23.27 KVA 21.69 21.69 KVA = 60.21 KVA KVA KVA KVA KVA AMPS LD2 RECEPTACLES LIGHTING TOTAL FIRST 10 KVA 3.96 KVA X 1.00 = 3.96 KVA 3.96 REMAINING 0 KVA X 0.50 = 0 KVA 2.46 KVA X 1.00 = 2.46 KVA 6.42 KVA 6.42 KVA 6.42 KVA =17.82 AMPS NOTE: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING QUANTITIES: 1 POLE CIRCUIT -1 HOT, 1 NEUTRAL, 1 GROUND 2 POLE CIRCUIT - 2 HOT, 1 GROUND 3 POLE CIRCUIT - 3 HOT, 1 GROUND 1 POLE IG CIRCUIT -1 HOT, 1 NEUTRAL, 1 GROUND, 1 ISOLATED GROUND. MINIMUM WIRE & CONDUIT SIZES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES AMPS FEEDER SIZE (CU) GROUND (CU) CONDUIT 15 #12 #12 3/4" 20 #12 #12 3/4" 25 #10 #10 3/4" 30 #10 #10 3/4" 35 #8 #10 3/4" 40 #8 #10 3/4" 45 #8 #10 3/4" 50 #8 #10 3/4" 60 #6 #10 3/4" 70 #4 #8 1" 80 #4 #8 1" 90 #3 #8 1 -1/4" 100 #3 #8 1 -1/4" 5/8" DIA. HOLES FOR ANCHOR BOLTS SUPPLIED BY CUST. TYP. LEFT VIEW POWER WALL ELEVATION SCALE = 3/4" = I' -0" n fV DEMAND LOAD ANALYSIS LIGHTING 77.42 KVA X 1.00 = 77.42 KVA RECEPTACLES 81.78 KVA FIRST 10 KW 10.0 KVA X 1.00 = REMAINING 71.78 KVA X .5 = MECHANICAL 444.10 KVA X 1.00 = 10.00 KVA 35.89 KVA 444.10 KVA MISC. 20.67 KVA X 1.00 = 20.67 KVA SUB -TOTAL 585.08 KVA = 703.74 AMPS + 25% OF LARGEST MOTOR 9.0 X 25 = 2.0 KVA TOTAL 587.08 KVA = 706.15 AMPS 480V 120/208V 38 30 4W NOTE: NEUTRAL DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER - SEE ONE LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUCTOR SIZES 3 PHASE, 1 PHASE SIMILAR NEAREST AVAILABLE GROUNDED STRUCTURAL METAL MEMBER 3 SEPARATE NC SYSTEM SCALE = 6" = 1-0" C/T CABINET MIN. 4 -250 MCM COPPER FROM SERVICE ENTRANCE INCOMING SERVICE NOTE: WHERE CONDUIT IS USED TO PROTECT THE GROUNDING I = = _1 CONDUCTOR, IT SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUCTOR CONNECT TO BUILDING STEEL, METAL WATER AT BOTH ENDS MAIN(PROVIDE JUMPERS AS REQUIRED), AND STEEL RE -BARS (MIN. 201) IN FOOTING 1200A MAIN LUGS #3/0 COPPER NEUTRAL LINETYPE LEGEND PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR PROVIDED BY OWNER VIA PREFAB MANUFACTURER #3/0 COPPER 4 SERVICE GROUND DETAIL E302 SCALE = 6" =1' -0" i o o n o - HA ° LA -2 VWT t MDP (� LD -2 LA -1 1 I EMS LD -1 1 ° 6 LA-2 0 0 0 0 HA E 0 0 0 0 �- -_1- ❑ J_„J . 6 6 0 A 100A- CONT.] LD -1 y J EMS CABINET • T1 150KVA XFMR L NOTE: POWER WALL LAYOUT FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY CONTACT HILL - PHOENIX FOR JOB SPECIFIC LAYOUT BEFORE STUB -UPS ARE INSTALLED. TOP VIEW T1 150KVA XFMR ' 5/8" DIA. HOLES FOR ANCHOR BOLTS SUPPLIED BYCUST. (NOTE: TRANSFORMER MUST BE ANCHORED TO A MASONRY WALL. IF IT ISNT, USE ALTERNATIVE ANCHORING METHOD.) REMOVABLE LIFTING BRACKETS/TUBES FIELD MOUNT TRANSFORMER TO TRANS. MNTG. BASE W/4 EA. 3/8 "- 16X1" HEX HD GR5 BOLTS (NUTS PRE - WELDED TO BASE) I� ( • • --1 0 E 6 ° 6 • - E A 100A1 1 CON LD -2 o J A LA -1 E t1 6 LA-2 HA E . • - . 6 6 0 A 100A- CONT.] LD -1 EMS CABINET ° CONTACTORS . VWT' • • . MDP 1000A MCB TYPE LSG 90X45X18 3' -4" 3' -4" 3' -4" 3' -9" 13' -9" FRONT VIEW 4SETSOF (4) 250 KCMIL, #2/0 CU. GND, 3" CONDUIT. EC SHALL RUN MAIN FEEDS THROUGH PREWIRED C/TS. RIGHT SIDE UTILITY COMPANY TRANSFORMER r T --1 I METER 1 AND CTS _ - RTU RTU RTU RTU RTU RTU #1 #2 #3 #4 #A1 • #A2 '2'2 C/ c/ <e/ c/ ( ( ( ( ( ( D UU U' UU 2N V z CO CD RTU RTU RTU RTU RTU RTU RTU COMPACTOR ( #A5 #A3 #8 #9 #10 #11 #A4 BAILER r/ 7c(r / I (. ( . ( ( ( 0 0 DDDD o U0 0 0 0 o U0 0 0 UUU UUUUU UU :U D d;"4. D. : : 8 "v �'v 0- 0v �r`t 'v �v UM i�c U� U� U� U� U� U� U� 0o o coo 0-) U� o� o� o� UM o� o� Ft d I o Ft d o o c o MDP1000A, 480/277V, 3PH, 4W, SWBD 3P ' b 3P ' 3P '� 3P '� 3P 3P '� 3P ' 3P ' 3P ' 3P ' 3P ' 3P ' 3P ' ;1-, 3P ' 110( 110( 70( 70( 35( 35( 25( 35( 25( 30( 25( 30( 35( 25 20( - 1000A -3P. GFI 1 � Q 2 �Q �Q �Q �Q 3 ■? \? \Q s? 'Q ■? \? . ∎? .? 19 20 -. - --_ -� - o - -� - -� - -�- - -1 - - -o - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S - - N '� 3P 4 5 '0 6 7 12 13 ,0 16 14 8 9 10 11 15 17 18 3P ,o ( 225A 3P ( 3P ( w 15A( _�RI -� G `q 225A'? 100A < �q L_ -- - :II ±-.T7-1 ______ ___ __ __ __ _ ______ I 3/O CU ci _I_ _L _L -_L_ ._L- N UFER/ FOOTING REBAR BLDG. STEEL WATER PIPE GROUND ROD TELEPHONE BOARD J (4) 350 AL, #2 AL GND PANEL "HA" 250A M.L.O. 277/480V 3PH,4W J "C -3" "C-4" "C -5" ."C -6." "C -7" - - I H L_J L_J L_J L_J L_J CKT# CKT# CKT# CKT# CKT# Co) 10 =•_ N C CO) Q Q 2 2 = N N N Q¢¢ 2 2 2 N CO __ "C-8" "C -9" "C -10" "C -11" "C -12" - -1 I -I 7 I- -1 (- - -I I- --1 LH- �F- - -I--I f f- - -I-J I- - -I-] I- 1- --I� I �I L_J L_J L_J L -_J L_J CKT# CKT# CKT# CKT# CKT# _ N co 2 2 "C -13" "C -14" F_H__.�FH L_J L_J CKT# CKT# r L 0 co 2 2 TERMINAL STRIP O r- M u) N re) N N c') , 1 1 . 1 I I <<<< < <<<< <<<< <Q 1 TO EMERGENCY BALLASTS AND LINEAR NIGHT LIGHT CIRCUITS o 2 2 FINAL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FEEDER TERMINATIONS AT TRANSFORMER LUGS BY CONTRACTOR. r N z 0 Q _- ri 150 KVA L PANEL "LA -1" DOUBLE SECTION PANEL (SECTION 1) 400A BUSS 250A M.C.B. 120/208V 3PH,4W W/ FEED THROUGH LUGS. J_ #1 /0 CU. TO NEAREST STEEL \ (4)#1/0 AL, #6 AL GND, 2 "C U4)#1/0 AL, #6 AL GND, 2 "C PANEL "LA -2" DOUBLE SECTION PANEL (SECTION 2) 400A M.L.O. 120/208V 3PH,4W "C -15" "C -16" L -+� I-I- - F-1 L_J L_J CKT# CKT# •- M u: ti r 100 ,Q "C -1" PANEL "LD -1" 100A M.C.B. 100A BUS 120/208V 3PH,4W T (3)#1 CU, #6 CU GND, #4 CU I "C -2" PANEL "LD -2" 100A M.C.B. 100A BUS 120/208V 3PH,4W L _L GENERAL NOTE: 1. POWER WALL PROVIDER SHALL MAKE CONNECTIONS FROM PANEL TO CONTACTORS AND TERMINAL STRIP, CIRCUITS AS SHOWN. EC SHALL PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTIONS ON OTHERSIDE OF CONTACTOR. 2. CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL STRIP SHALL BE UNSWITCHED FOR CONNECTION TO EMERGENCY BALLASTS. 3. CONTACTORS ARE CONTROLLED BY EMS THROUGH PILOT RELAYS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY POWER WALL MANUFACTURER. 4. PENDANT NIGHT LIGHTS SHALL BE CONTROLLED FROM CONTACTOR C-12. 5. ALL RTU'S SHALL HAVE INTERNAL, FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS. ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" LOCKABLE DISCONNECT MOUNTED AT TRANSFORMER 1 /2A 3PH, PANEL MTD., _I_ IN -LINE FUSES TPOWER I LMETERJ I- 1100A IJ 2 I 5 KVA L 100A 100AF IT z 0 0 gtp � N O - U #4 CU. TO NEAREST STEEL 100 L -17 100AF A - r PANEL "LC" 100A M.L.O. 120/208V 3PH, 4W PANEL "LB -1" DOUBLE SECTION PANEL (SECTION 1) 100A M.L.O. 120/208V 3PH, 4W W/ FEED THROUGH LUGS. - -_- -J L J_ PANEL "LB -2" DOUBLE SECTION PANEL (SECTION 2) 100A M.L.O. 120/208V 3PH, 4W cr7.2 RECEIVED MAR 112010 -A PE c : P`�� Pk" RMIT CE ... ,; �©' ' ?ts.0-`3%?' j CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE ENGINEERS &j ONSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET. N. WIL B • RO, NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 : 6 -667 -4332 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCAE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. E302 AA; C O S�; ib►: ENGINEERS &j ONSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET. N. WIL B • RO, NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 : 6 -667 -4332 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA, WA DRAWING TITLE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCAE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. E302 AA; O RTU CONTROL WIRING ® EXHAUST FAN CONTROL ® LIGHTING OVERRIDE CONTROL © 24VDC PILOT RELAYS (TYP FOR 20) ® NOT USED O OATH -1 HOFFMAN STAINLESS STEEL OATH -1 (4) SWITCH ASSEMBLY (EF-1) ) (INTERCONNECTS, TEMPERATURE AND CO2 SENSORS) CONTINUOUS HINGE, TYPE 4X T-STAT NOTE: MOUNT AT REAR A1212CHNFSS- Al2P12- CPMK12, BY EC. 8001 2 ... OF STORE, ABOVE EMS AND POWER WALL, FIELD COORDINATE WITH ROOFING INSTALLER AND ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES. VAISALA HMD60Y0 1 0 RH+ RH- BAPI y 1 1 16 -20 29-36 �E 1 ■ �- ACI 1O BY HILL- PHOENIX EC SHALL CONNECT CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO CONTACTS. 121 > Light Override 1 4-SWITCH ASSEMBLY- LIGHTING OVERRIDE ECLIPSE 4B-OL 1 CT-B ALS-1 CONTROL BOARD (BY 12 i VERIS IND. MOUNTED TO SNAP 1 RTU BACNET INTERFACE BOARD (FACTORY INSTALLED) SYS BUS TRANSFORMER 120V/24V, 96VA WITH CB we 4ffi. cr43 122 ) Light Override 2 � 1 DIMMING BALLAST TRANSDUCER KELE LDIM2 3 TRACK, BY EC. 123 ) Light Override 3 �� a I 12 T+ T 24V FUSED STARTER DO w k) 0 II' = re R o a 1O 124 ) Light Override 4 112" NPT FOR ALS -1. INSTALLED BY EC 11 > 19 9Im1 _ (BASED ON LENNOX) RTU MTD. TERMINAL STRIP ALS -1 ® SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR O SPACE HUMIDITY SENSOR TRANSDUCER CONTROL BOARD '6000000& 000000000000 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 91011121314151617181920' TO NEXT RTU FOR DIMMING BALLASTS (TYPICAL FOR 3) (ST -1) (RHS -1) -1 uGHrt F1S�ETPOINT »_<13.14,15 ril _ _ _ FROM EMS ^ +M 140104.x.. etNWWf«4,IM otwsar.e.r it 1•-.. 3 - t i W r m , Paoonr3 ©o E IR 0 04W dMNY\BLE CO2 Sensor T -STAT (TYP FOR RTU -3 & 5) (TYP FOR ALL) . 0 � 4 OUTDOOR SENSOR ASSEMBLY sro y70V dMM48lE �QO BALLAST EMS1 SCALE = 1/2" = I' -0" C M N -n TO T4 EMS1 SCALE = 1/2" =1' -0" 2 DETAILS EMS1 LGR1000 BT485 00 o_ 0 A 0 0 0 10/100 BaseT Ethemet Pod Et 0IJ0 /N IMA U 4851 CMnet Rnat Local Access 3 and Pon S2 Ill ON. Tx}� ore l- Wt Om avid Grand 0/.,.r.. MarnoWOR P.M Wont MNnom Rervor 3V Lithium Battery CR-123A m LGR1000 Control Module Error Gated x•00 Dal Pogemn e_ 4•-'e -- 10/. ---e Q8 41.--0 a-�•A Module MOWS -.Ma. -...r I•I I•I PZ rant goata goo 0 '000nooao Port St crowd 24v� Iral 0/"n N-ft Ht ROL Int. e - G = 0 c 0 1, I ®1 r� 8V .era -.e "a Na. Rio R- 1 mA 00/432 0- ,x 0 0 0 0 0 ■® Option Comm SCALE = 12" = 1' -0" T1 C 0 BT4851 0 SET TO 0 SET TO 1 RTU BACNET NETWORK T1 9 I 1 > OATH -1 • Temp : 0- 2- 0-A101 g 12 ) OATH-1 - Hunldlty: 0-2-0-A102 O 14 ) 0 O (4) TYP 0 0 We 0 0 0 Na, 9414 0 0 0 0 ME812U 24V Redo Power 1=3 I Off FfflOn 0 0 0 2nd M 0 4w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Or ®o Il RHS-1 - Space Humidity : 0- 2 -OA104 ST 1 Space Temperature : 1- 2.0 -AI11 0. 02 0. 0. 0. 0. 0r 0. 0. 02 0. 04 On 0. 0r 0. TO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X44 N. .47 0. 0 2 Ne 0. 0.1140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 21 > Light Override 1 - Sales Full On:0- 2- 1 -DI01 -< ® 1 22 >- Ught Override 2 - Sales Full DlmMrg : 0- 2 -1 -D102 - < 123 )- UgM Override 3 - Sales Employee Ltg. : 0- 2- 1- D103 --< 1 24 > Light Override 4 - Unoccupied : 0-21 D104 < (8) TYP 1 25 > 128 1 27 > Ei • Future Override 5 : 0-2-1-D105 Future Override 6 : 0- 2- 1 -DI06 Future Override 7 : 0- 2- 1 -D107 Future Override 8 : 0- 2- 1 -D108 IP 91 IR043” C -# : DESCRIPTION : 0- 2- 1 -DO## DESCRIPTION : 0- 2- 2 -AI## CONTROL POINT LABEL DESCRIPTIONS 0 0/e I 02 0. 0. 0. 0 0r 0. <- CONTACTOR #- REFERENCE E301 ONE -LINE DIAGRAM CONTROL POINT DESCRIPTION BACNET NETWORK NUMBER DEVICE ROUTER NUMBER DEVICE ADDRESS - CONTROL TYPE: D- DIGITAL, A- ANALOG, 0- OUTPUT, I- INPUT CONTROL POINT NUMBER ON BOARD 6 0. 02_ 0 s 04444 0. 0r 0. II® II E113 I I:m:1 ig Ond Cad Rn.t- M2V I•I I•I 0/®t eve_ 3v Lithium Batty QL123A m rte. Sow Rnet BACwet' Xnet Remote Expansion • K, D ad Na ow ", • ono • 14, • .4.7 144 haft Al 0/:"' Unn r..t Input m 1440 to MAR &N, m. 04.1, er N41 24 Vdc 21vac No n.-reA Oruro ME812u Module Status OrdCaba 0 .µr S. tw Own ..rya Evan. Ran ... NOWn Conan. a 5i err • •• Inf. Bat Facet CONIItOLMODULE so m eat -0014 7 oEa are. .+0/.a n.r Module Address CID CIO 101 0 0 _v off= .0 -0 -0 [SET TO 21 ISETTO01 F: lie I ®I I ®I 1 CEO I 1 ®1 IEol I ® I 1 cro I WAN eifit -..,r 7 o 0 0 0 0 UO-7 110.0 110.6 U04, time • UO-2 , UO-1 0 CT -AD 11 +11 -12 +1213 +I3 - Power Meter + 0 0888 CTS: EC SHALL RUN MAIN FEEDS THROUGH PREWIRED CITS. c-1,G2 : Valance and Trade Ltg :13-2-0-D008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nadu b USA I I MEX88U 0 0 Ir�4n Power IcDI Off On Ow MD 24 vadc 24 Vote I0/ Poo* Oat tail Ond aver -� 41:1 mR `d I10- IIN.1 NUR Drir.d5n. SR MAAR ° '- r° `an7 fowl Module Address uoa t -104 stun • 0/r N4 • N�.M N.. N- - ar • Rmi UaaaGN Inset a. 044 Ned. Select Or/ 1114 • am 04.8 meowsa IOW lam RYA Ow 1.104 00-3 1.102 U0-1 tan I: :t EER r.. ISM" TO11 I ®I I ®1 1DUI IOU 1 1=1110 l I ®I LEI MEx88u CONTROL MODULE. Osau an MR Rt. No Ue eo-7 x04; 1404 U04 2 UO-2 140-, ; 00000000 .0 004 r o 40 00.7 o 004 o 04 U0-4 (s) (te) Q • > G3. C-4. C-5 : Linear Sales Ltg : 0- 2- 0-0007 < 19 I >- 0-6 : Unear Sales Ltg Perimeter : 0- 2-0-13006 -< 18 1® > C-7: Linear Pre -Sales Ltg : 0- 2-0-D005 < 17 lO 2 > C-8 : Vestibule / Cust Ltg : 0- 2-0-D004 ( 16 I > Group 1 : Dinning Ballasts : 0- 2-0-A003 < 15 I 0 >- Group 2 : Dimming Ballasts : 0.2- 0-A002 ( 14 1® > Group 3 : Dimming Ballasts : 0- 2-0-A001 (3) TYP 1 0 2 0 3 0 00 =VAC Im IS m PS-1 120 VAC AUX O COY 20740 >-C-9 : Pendant (3) Lighting : 0- 2- 1 -D008 >-G10 : Pendant (3) Lighting : 0- 2- 1- D007 -< 35 1 >-G11 : Pendant (3) Lighting : 0- 2- 1- 0006 --( 34 I >-G72: Pendant NL Ughtng : 0-2 -1 -0005 -( 33 1 91 9 0 0 a� 0 m Not. b USA .0 14•4 O 4B U04 19 to °O1 t 0 >- C-13 : Security Lighting : 0 -2 -1 -0004 ( 32 1 >-C-14: E>dorla Lighting :0- 2- 1 -D033 ( 31 1 ->- 0-15 : Exterior Slgnage : 0-2-1-0002 -( 30 1 >- EF -1 : S/S : 0- 2- 1 -D001 < 29 1 .ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS DEVICES FOR FIELD INSTALLATION, BY EC (PROVIDED BY CSUSA) ID DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER QTY ALS-1 EXTERIOR LIGHT SENSOR GREYSTONE PSR -1 T -E 1 T-STAT CO2 SENSOR - 0- 2000PPM 4-20MA TELAIRE 8001 2 OATH -1 OUTDOOR TEMP & HUMIDITY 4-20MA VAISALA HMD60Y0 1 RHS-1 ROOM HUMIDITY SENSOR 2% 4 -20MA OR O-5VDC BAPI BAH200 -R 1 ST -1 ROOM TEMPERATURE 4 -20MA (EQUIPMENT RM) ACI A/TT1 K -3 -R-4 1 4-SWITCH ASSEMBLY- LIGHTING OVERRIDE ECLIPSE 4B-OL 1 CT-B CURRENT TRANSDUCER 0.75- 200AMP (EF -1 STATUS) VERIS IND. H600 1 RTU DEVICES (PROVIDED BY RTU MANUF.) . ID DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER QTY BACNET BACNET COMMUNICATION BOARD- FACTORY MTD. LENNOX 39W75 4--14 T-STAT `SENSOR, NON ADJUST TEMP LENNOX 94L60 +-14 EMS - LAN GATEWAY AUTOMATED LOGIC LGR1000 1 *- INSTALLED BY EC. +- QUANTITY IS (1) PER RTU. DEVICES FOR FACTORY INSTALLATION (PROVIDED BY CSUSA) ID DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER QTY CT-A CURRENT TRANSDUCER 5 -1200 AMP VERIS IND. H681-2-1200-1V 3 POWER METER- 277/480V 3 PHASE, 1200A VERIS IND. H8437VB 1 EMS - LAN GATEWAY AUTOMATED LOGIC LGR1000 1 EMS- ME CONTROLLER AUTOMATED LOGIC ME812U 1 EMS - EXPANDER MODULE AUTOMATED LOGIC MEX88U 2 EMS- EQUIPMENT PORTAL AUTOMATED LOGIC EQPRTL 1 PS -1 POWER SUPPLY 100VA RIB PSB100AB10 1 TR -1 TRANSFORMER 120V/24V, 96VA WITH CB DYNACON LE12100 1 DIMMING BALLAST TRANSDUCER KELE LDIM2 3 1 H EMS PANEL POWER - N 120 VAC - - - - G LA-42 (TYP) -0 4 0 -0 5 0 �s0 T4 SEE LDIM DETAIL - - - - 8 0 -11711 (HILL - PHOENIX IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MOUNTING AND INTERNAL WIRING OF EMS SYSTEM AS SHOWN, TYPICAL, U.N.O.) EMS1 / SCALE = NTS KEY NOTES 0 FOR A LOOP - POWERED 0 -5VDC, 0- 10VDC, OR 4 -20 mA SENSOR, WIRE THE SENSOR'S POSITIVE TERMINAL TO THE + TERMINAL ON THE CONTROLLER'S AUX POWER OUT PORT. WIRE THE SENSOR'S NEGATIVE TERMINAL TO ANALOG INPUT + TERMINAL. 0 -5vdc 0 -10vdc 4 -20mA Out n/c 2 WIRE DEVICE 0 -Svd \Out V+ 0 -10vdc 4 -20mA / 3 WIRE DEVICE + Any Input GND + Any Input GND OAUX POWER 24vdc SET INPUT JUMPER FOR mA OR VOLTS VOLTS 00 00 • • mA 0 DIGITAL OUTPUTS FOR LIGHTING CONTROL SHALL BE PREWIRED IN POWERWALL TO PILOT RELAYS, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY HILL - PHOENIX. ® 113 > (0- 2- 0 -A001) SHALL CONTROL GENERAL DIMMING LINEAR FLUORESCENT SALES LIGHTING, (TYPICAL CIRCUITS CORRESPONDING TO CONTACTORS 'C-3', 'C-4', AND 'C -5'.) 114 > (0- 2- 0 -A002) SHALL CONTROL DIMMING FOR ALL LINEAR FLUORESCENT NIGHT LIGHTS, (SEE "NL" DESIGNATIONS ON E102 FOR FIXTURE LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES) (0- 2- 0 -A003) SHALL CONTROL DIMMING PERIMETER LINEAR SALES LIGHTING, (TYPICAL CIRCUITS CORRESPONDING TO CONTACTOR 'C -6'). SEE POWER WALL SITE SPECIFIC INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND DESIGNATIONS. 0 EC SHALL PROVIDE CONDUIT STUB TO DECK FOR OWNER PROVIDED ETHERNET CONNECTION, SEE NOTE #10. RTU -14 BACNET T -STAT 0 -10V BALLAST 0 -10V BALLAST NOTES: 1. THE EC (EXCEPT AS NOTED) SHALL FURNISH ALL CONDUITS AND LOW VOLTAGE CABLE. EC SHALL INSTALL ALL EMS CONTROL CABLE IN W CONDUIT IF CABLE IS INSIDE BAR JOISTS OR INSIDE WALLS AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 2. THE EC (EXCEPT AS NOTED) SHALL INSTALL THE COMFORT SYSTEMS USA (CSUSA) SUPPLIED FIELD DEVICES AND CONNECT TO HILL - PHOENIX INSTALLED CONTROL BOARD, LOCATED IN POWER WALL. 3. THE EC SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL TERMINATIONS FROM CONTROL BOARDS TO ALL REMOTE EQUIPMENT. 4. CSUSA IS TO PROGRAM AND PERFORM FINAL SYSTEM CHECKOUT. 5. THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) SHALL BE FACTORY INSTALLED BY HILL PHOENIX. THIS SHALL INCLUDE ALL INTERNAL INTERCONNECTIONS AS SHOWN. 6. ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSORS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ROOFTOP UNITS. SENSORS ARE TO BE MOUNTED BY THE EC AND SHALL BE WIRED FROM THE ROOFTOP UNIT TERMINAL STRIP TO THE SENSOR LOCATION BY THE EC. 7. ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) AND INDIVIDUAL RTU'S SHALL BE FIELD INSTALLED BY THE EC. 8. ALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY EC AND PER WIRE SCHEDULE, AS SHOWN. 9. ALL INQUIRES AND /OR QUESTIONS PERTAINING TO THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM AND OR SCHEDULING SHALL BE DIRECTED TO: COMFORT SYSTEMS USA/ EASTERN HEATING & COOLING CONTROLS DIVISION 880 BROADWAY ALBANY, NY 12207 -1316 (518) - 465 -8878 10. ETHERNET CONNECTION (PROVIDED BY OWNER) MUST BE DEMONSTRATED AS OPERATIONAL PRIOR TO SCHEDUUNG SITE VISIT WITH COMFORT SYSTEMS USA. OWNER'S I.T. REPRESENTATIVE MUST SUPPLY A STATIC IP ADDRESS PRIOR TO START UP. 11. A COMFORT SYSTEMS USA REPRESENTATIVE WILL BE SCHEDULED ON SITE ONE (1) DAY TO PERFORM THE SYSTEM DOWNLOAD AND START -UP IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN CSUSA AND TRU. THIS TRIP IS SCHEDULED BY CSUSA FOR THE WEEK FOLLOWING THE STORES FIXTURE/TURNOVER DATE. PLEASE NOTE: TECHNICIANS REPRESENTING THE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL TRADES MUST BE ON SITE DURING SYSTEM DOWNLOAD AND START -UP TO ASSIST IN RESOLVING ANY ISSUES THAT MAY BE DISCOVERED AT THAT TIME. IF THE CSUSA REPRESENTATIVE CANNOT COMPLETE THEIR WORK DUE TO THE ELECTRICAL AND /OR MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS WORK NOT BEING COMPLETE, CSUSA WILL INVOICE TRU FOR AN ADDITIONAL TRIP, OR TIME ON THE JOB. WIRE SPECIFICATIONS #12 AWG THHN #A30008 (MAGNUM CABLE) OR EQUAL, 18/2 AWG TWISTED PAIR, PLENUM RATED, UNSHIELDED, CLASS 2 WIRING WNVHITE JACKET 1?-1#A3-ARC-156-2 (MAGNUM CABLE) OR EQUAL, 22/2 AWG TWISTED/ SHIELDED PAIR, PLENUM RATED, CLASS 2 WIRING W /GREEN JACKET #A30009 (MAGNUM CABLE) OR EQUAL, 1813 AWG TWISTED PAIR, PLENUM RATED, UNSHIELDED, CLASS 2 WIRING W/WHITE JACKET RTU -3 RTU -2 RTU -1 BACNET T -STAT BACNET T -STAT BACNET T -STAT LINEAR SALES LIGHT FIXTURES (GROUP 1) 0 -10V BALLAST 0 -10V BALLAST 0 -10V BALLAST LINEAR SALES LIGHT FIXTURES (GROUP 2 0 -10V BALLAST 0 -10V BALLAST 0 -10V BALLAST LINEAR SALES LIGHT FIXTURES (GROUP 3 _ 0 -10V 0 -10V 0 -10V BALLAST BALLAST BALLAST 4 Override Switches 4 SETS DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION SET UP FOR SUPER SIDE BY SIDE TRU /BRU CO2 SENSORS NEED TO BE WIRED INTO RTU AT TERMINAL STRIP AS SHOWN ON SHEET EMS -1. (DCV MAXIMUM DAMPER OPENING POINT) TO A SET POINT DETERMINED BY THE TEST AND BALANCE CONTRACTOR PER THE CFM's SCHEDULED ON THE RTU SCHEDULE, PRIOR TO COMFORT SYSTEMS USA(CSUSA) ARRIVING ON SITE. THE PARAMETER IS SET UP IN PERCENTAGE WHICH IS THE ELECTRICAL SIGNAL GOING TO THE DAMPER ACTUATOR THAT DRIVES IT UP 100% OPEN (THAT DOES NOT EQUATE TO THE PERCENT OF OUTSIDE AIR ENTERING THROUGH THE DAMPER. (DEFAULT) (DCV START OPENING POINT) SHOULD BE AT A CO2 SET POINT OF 500PPM. (DCV MAXIMUM OPENING POINTIF PPM EXCEEDS SETPOINT) SHOULD BE AT A SETPOINT OF 1200PPM. DAMPER SHALL BEGIN OPENING AT 500PPM AND REACH THE FULLY OPEN POINT AT 1200PPM. THESE SETTINGS WILL ALLOW OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER TO MODULATE BETWEEN MINIMUM POSITION AND MAXIMUM POSITION TO MAINTAIN CO2 LEVEL SETPOINT. TEST AND BALANCE REQUIREMENTS THE TEST AND BALANCING CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER POSITION AND MEASURE THE OUTSIDE AIR CFM TO ACHIEVE THE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM VENTILATION RATES INDICATED ON THE RTU SCHEDULE, PRIOR TO (CSUSA) ARRIVING ON SITE. THE TEST AND BALANCING CONTRACTOR SHALL SET THE MINIMUM OA DAMPER POSITION USING THE 0- 100% MINIMUM POSITION POTENTIOMETER ON THE LENNOX ECONOMIZER BOARD. ADJUST THE OA DAMPER TO THE REQUIRED POSITION TO OBTAIN THE MAXIMUM VENTILATION CFM RATE. THEN, USING THE LENNOX IMC BOARD, RECORD THE DAMPER POSITION (PERCENT OPEN) CORRESPONDING TO THE MAXIMUM VENTILATION AND FORWARD TO (CSUSA), THIS DAMPER POSITION WILL BE PROGRAMMED INTO THE SYSTEM BY (CSUSA). NOTE: DAMPER PERCENT OPEN DOES NOT EQUATE TO OUTSIDE AIR PERCENT OF SUPPLY AIR. DAMPER POSITIONS MUST BE DETERMINED THROUGH APPROVED TEST AND BALANCE PROCEDURES. ROOF MTh ASSEMBLY 2 SETS 2 SETS OUTDOOR LIGHT SENSOR (ALS -1) OUTDOOR TEMPJ HUMID. SENSOR (OATH -1) cri EXHUAST FAN (EF -1) EQUIP. RM TEMP (ST-1) EMS O Z < I- a_ W cn POWER METER C/T'S POWER WALL (PROVIDED BY HILL - PHOENIX) EMS ONE -LINE SPACE HUMIDITY (RHS -A) EC SHALL RUN MAIN FEEDS THROUGH PREWIRED C/TS. EC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONNECTION AND INSTALLATION OF ALL PERIPHERAL COMPONENTS, TYPICAL, U.N.O.) SCALE = NTS CONSTR. DOC & REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 03/08/10 ISSUED FOR BIDS & PERMITS i PROTOTYPE UPDATES NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 10/28/09 2010 58K REV. 0 BID DATE: 03/09/2010 PROJECT NO.: 55252805 DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: CARP PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: SSBS 58K PROTOTYPE PAGE ENGINEERS & CONSULTANTS 923 MAIN STREET. N. WILKESBORO, NC 28659 PHONE: 336- 667 -4225 FAX: 336 -..7 -4332 STORE SUPPORT CENTER ONE GEOFFREY WAY WAYNE, NJ 07470 THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF TOYS "R" US. THE INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED NOR THE DRAWINGS REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION OF TOYS "R" US. LOCATION TUKWILA. WA DRAWING TITLE RECEIVED MAR 112010 PERMIT CENTE p a tlxv.01‘ ENERGY MANAGEMENT LE As indicated ISSUE DATE MARCH 9, 2010 SHEET NO. EMS1 �;